Académique Documents
Professionnel Documents
Culture Documents
^^- f
ANDBOOK ON
GERMAN
LITARY FORCES
WAR DEPARTMENT
WAR DEPARTMENT TECHNICAL MANUAL
TM-E 30-451
HANDBOOK ON
GERMAN
MIL1TAR.Y FORCES
UNCLASSIFIED
REGRAOED
AUTMO»
United States Government Printing Office
~\
Washington : 1945
-E 30-451 ,$us been pttbli.dd to ~rwidr? a bertnunc’tri comprehcnsiw manual on the Gernfo
Armed Porces.
For tlie most part material in tkls handbook IJ bawd on injormution available ufi to
I5 Eehruary 1945.
WAR D E P A R T M E N T
\TASH1~.(.TOX 25, D. C., 15 MARCH 1945
OFFICIAL: G. C. MARSHALL
J. A. ULIO ^ Cl&f of Staff
Ma.jor General
The Adjutant General
DISTRIBUTION :
AAF (10) ; AGF (56) ; ASF ( 2 ) ; T of Opns (200) escept POA, CBI &
SWPA (10) ; Dept (2) ; Base Comds (2) ; Is Comds (2) ; Arm & Sv Bd
(2) ; Def Comd (5) ; S Div ASF (1) ; Tech Sv (2) ; Sv (2) ; PC & S
(ZI only) ( 1 ) ; Gen & Sp Sv Sch (200); USMA (100) ASF Tng C
(200) ; AGF Rep1 Tng C (200) ; A (20); CHQ (20) ; AF (5) ; Following
in ETO, M T 0 & ZI only: D (5) ; B ( 3 ) ; R ( 3 ) ; Bn (2) ; C (1) ; G ( 5 ) ;
CONTENTS
Pa
CHAPTER I. THE GERMAN MILITARY SYSTEM °?
Section I. Introduction I—1
//. The German Soldier ; I—2
. ///. The High Command 1—15
IV. Organization of the Army for R’ar ....... ............... IL41
V. Functions of the Corps Area I—45
VI. Conscription, Replacement, and Training I—54
IB
I MARCH 1945
r UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-45I
iv
I MARCH 1945 TM-E 30-451
UNCLASSIFIED
CHAPTER I
bulwarks of Germany. Despite the supposed fanaticism bordering on madness. If too old, he
chronic disunity at the top, disaffection among is driven by the fear of what his propagandists
the officer corps, and disloyalty in the rank and have told him will happen to the Fatherland in
file, despite the acute lack of weapons, ammuni- case of an Allied victory, and even more by the
tion, fuel, transport, and human reserves, the fear of what he has been told will happen to him
German Army seems to function with its old pre- and his family if he does not carry out orders
cision and to overcome what appear to be insuper- exactly as given. Thus even the old and sick
able difficulties with remarkable speed. Only by perform, to a certain point, with the courage of
patient and in&ssant hammering from all sides despair.
can its collapse be brought about. The German High Command has been particu-
The cause of this toughness, even in defeat, is larly successful in placing the various types of
not generally appreciated. It goes much deeper men where they best fit, and in selecting those to
than the quality of weapons, the excellence of serve as cannon fodder, who are told to hold out
training and leadership, the soundness of tactical to the last man, while every effort is made to pre-
and strategic doctrine, or the efficiency of control serve the elite units, which now are almost en-
at all echelons. It is to be found in the military tirely part of the Wafen-SS. The German soldier
tradition which is so deeply ingrained in the in these units is in a preferred category and is
whole character of the German nation and which the backbone of the German Armed Forces. He
alone makes possible the interplay of these various is pledged never to surrender and has no moral
factors of strength to their full effectiveness. code except allegiance to his organization. There
The German Army of 1939 was a model of is no limit to his ruthlessness.
efficiency, the best product of the concentrated The mentality of the German soldier of 1945
military genius of the most scientifically military is the final result of that policy of militarism
of nations. A study of the German Army of which, even in the 19th century, caused a famous
1945, however, older and wiser, hardened and German general to rccommcntl that soldiers should
battle-tested, cornered and desperate as it is, will be trained to ask of their superiors: "Master,
show best how this military science and military order us where we may die."
genius operate in the practical exigencies of long-
drawn-out total war. 2. Manpower Problems
a. ANNUAL CLASS SYSTEM. When Hitler re-
introduced general conscription in 1935, the great-
Section II. THE GERMAN SOLDIER est possible care was taken to create a strong mili-
tary force without disrupting the economic life of
I. Fanatic or Weakling? the nation. Men lvere registered by annual classes
The German soldier who faces the Allies on the and during the \-ears before the war those of the
home fronts in 1945 is a very different type from older classes were called only in small groups to
the members of the Army of 1939 which Hitler attend training exercises of limited duration. Even
called "an Army such as the world has never for the younger classes, all feasible arrangements
seen". The German soldier is one of several were made for the deferment of students and of
different types depending on whether he is a vet- those engaged in necessary occupations. h e n ac-
eran of 4 or 5 years, or a new recruit. The cepted for active service were called to the colors
veteran of many fronts and many retreats is a by individual letter rather than by public an-
prematurely aged, war weary cynic, either dis- nouncement for their annual class. This system
couraged and disillusioned or too stupefied to was continued in the gradual mobilization which
have any thought of his own. Yet he is a sea- preceded the outbreak of the war in such a way
soned campaigner, most likely a noncommissioned that the wartime Army could be built up organ-
officer, and performs his duties with the highest ically and the normal course of life was not seri-
degree of efficiency. ously upset.
The new recruit, except in some crack S S units, b. \~CTAR DEVELOPMENTS, A S long as the war
is either too young or too old and often in poor was conducted on a limited scale, the Armed
health. Forces were very liberal in granting occupational
He has been poorly trained for lack of time and medical discharges. As the war progressed
but, if too young, he makes up for this by a and grew in scope and casualties mountid, it be-
l—2
I MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451
came necessary to recall many of these men and zation and employment of the Volksstur~ti is
eventually to reach increasingly into both the under Himmler's direct control.
older and the younger age groups. The complicated record system of the Armed
After Germany changed from the offensive to Forces was maintained in principle but stream-
the defensive in 1943, it became both possible and lined for the sake of saving manpower.
necessary to transfer an increasing number of
Air Force and naval personnel to the Army, to c : FOREIGN ELEMENTS. (1) Original policy.
enforce "voluntary" enlistment in the Waffen-SS, In their attempts to solve their ever acute man-
and to commit line-of-communication units to power problems, the Germans have not neglected
regular combat not only against partisans but to make the fullest possible use of foreign ele-
against regular enemy forces. ments for almost every conceivable purpose and
by almost every conceivable method. Originally,
The increasingly heavy losses of the Russian great stress was laid on keeping the Armed
campaign forced Hitler to :ancel his order ex- Forces nationally "pure". Jews and Gypsies wera
empting "last sons" of derimated families and excluded from military service. Foreign volun-
fathers of large families frcm front-line combat teers were not welcomed. Germans residing
duty. Prisons and concen ration camps were abroad and possessing either German or dual
combed out for men who coild be used in penal citizenship were rounded up through the German
combat units with the inducenent of possible later consulates from 1937 on. When Germany set
reinstatement of their civic rijhts. out to invade other countries, beginning with Aus-
Although a "total mobilizaton" was carried out tria, only the inhabitants of these countries who
in the spring of 1943, after Stalingrad, it became were held to be of German or related blood be-
necessary by the end of tha year to lower the came liable to German military service; the Czech
physical classification standads drastically and minority in Austria, for example, was exempted.
to register men up to 60 yers of age for mili-
tary service. Even men wh severe stomach (2) Recruiting of foreigners. With the inva-
sion of Russia in June 1941, German propagan-
ailments were drafted into spcial-diet battalions.
dists set themselves to the task of changing the
During the summer of 1944, ivilian occupations
whole aspect of the war from a national German
were reduced to an absolutely Ecessary minimum.
affair to a "European war of liberation .from
Finally, the remaining male c/ilians from 16 to
Communism". In this way the Nazis were able
60 were made liable for hote defense combat
to obtain a considerable number of volunteers
service in the "Volkssturm" and even Hitler
from occupied and even neutral countries, who
Youth boys and girls were calld up as auxiliaries.
were organized in combat units of their own in
Along with these measures here went a con- German uniforms and under German training.
tinuous reorganization of comat as well as ad- The original policy was to incorporate racially
ministrative units for the purose of increasing related "Germanic" people, such as the Dutch and
efficiency and saving personnel. Scandinavians, into the Wafen-S’S and non-Ger-
The strength of divisions us lowered while manic people such as the Croats into the Army.
their firepower was increased (d their compon- When the failures in Russia and other increas-
ents were made more flexible, evere comb-outs ing difficulties began’ to affect the morale of thk
were made among rear-area peonnel and tech- foreigners, their "voluntary recruitment" became
nical specialists. The strongest fssible measures more and more a matter of compulsion and their
were introduced against waste c manpower, in- service in separate national units had to be
efficiency, and desertions, partidarly after the brought under more rigid supervision. The or-
Army was brought under therver increasing ganization of such units, therefore, was turned
control of the SS, in the sumnr and autumn over in increasing measure to the Waflen-SS,
of 1944. even in the case of racially non-Germanic ele-
After the Allied breakthrough iFrance, Himm- ments.
ler was appointed Commander f the Replace- At the same time, it became necessary for the
ment Army and as such made ihWaffen-SS the Army to fill its own depleted German units by
backbone of German national ifense. Whole adding a certain percentage of foreign recruits.
units of the Air Force and Navyere taken over This was done partly by declaring the inhabitants
and trained by the Waffen-S&nd then dis- of annexed territories, such as the Polish Cor-
tributed among depleted field uni The organi- ridor, to be "racial Germans" (Volksdeutscke),
1—3
MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIED TM-E ‘30-45I
making them provisional German citizens subject addressed only indirectly, in the third person, as
to induction into the Armed Forces. A consid- "Herr Major is absolutely right." Hitler, how-
erable source of manpower was Soviet prisoners ever, is addressed directly as "My Leader".
of war of different national origins. Some of Therefore, the Nazis made use of the direct
+ese were put into regular German units as form of address toward superior officers at first
"racial" Germans; others were employed in such optional, then compulsory. Superior officers and
units as "auxiliary volunteers". Separate national noncommissioned officers are addressed as "Mr."
units also were created from Cossacks and from (Herr) followed by their rank; in the Wa@-SS,
the numerous peoples who inhabit the Caucasus however, only by their rank: "Herr Leutnant!",
and Turkestan and are collectively referred to by but " Unterstiirnz fiillrcr!"
the Germans as "Eastern Peoples" (Ostr~tilkcr). Originally, a distinction was made between the
Every possible inducement has been used for the regular military salu:e and the "German saluta-
cruiting of foreigners, including their religion, tion" (Dcutschcr GI-zss) which consists of saying
);”as in the case of the Mohammedans in the Bal- "Heil Hitler!" with the right arln outstretched.
icans. Only in the case of Jews and Gypsies was In August 1944 the litter type of salute was made
the original policy of exclusion not only upheld compulsory throug1out. E,veryone salutes his
but extended during the war to include those of own superiors as wdl as others entitled to a salute
50 per cent Jewish descent. according to the f dlowing general rules: Every
officer is the supericr of all lower-ranking officers
3. Duties and Rights of the Soldier
and all enlisted mer; every noncommissioned offi-
a. T H E OATH. Every German soldier, upon cer is the superiol of all privates; every non-
induction, is compelled to affirm his legally es- commissioned officr in one of the first three
tablished military obligation by means of the grades is the supeior of lower-grade noncom-
following oath (vow, for atheists) : "I ~zvcar by missioned officers n his own unit. There is no
God this holy oath (I vow) that I will render -
ge?eral rank supciority otherwise among non-
unconditional obedience to the Fiihrer of Ger- commissioned officrs or among the various grades
many and of her people, Adolf Hitler, the Su- of privates; howeer, all members of the Armed
preme Commander of the Armed Forces, and Forces are obligald to "greet" one another as a
that, as a brave soldier, I will be prepared to matter of militaryetiquette.
stake my life for this .oath (vow) at any time."
If, because of an oversight, the oath has not been Members of tk Armed Forces are forbidden
administered to a soldier, he is held to be in the to associate with oreigners even if they are raci-
same position as though he had sworn it; the ally related; mariages between soldiers and non-
oath is regarded only as the affirmation of an in- German women :e subject to approval, which is
herent legal duty. given only after3 very thorough investigation ;
b. MILITARY DISCIPLINE. The German sys- the offspring of Ich marriages are considered to
tem of military discipline is rigorous, and ex- be German. In.he Wafle&YS, such marriages
cesses are severely punished. In principle, abso- are entirely probited for German personnel.
lute and unquestioning obedience towards su- Men who sev-ely and repeatedly violate mili-
periors is required. However, since the summer tary discipline, it not to an extent that warrants
of 1944, when the Army came under the political a death sentete, are transferred to correction
influence of the Nazi Party, new orders were battalions for probationary period and given
issued providing that disloyal superiors not only arduous and *ngerous assignments; if incor-
need not be obeyed but in emergencies may be rigible, they £ then turned over to the police
liquidated by their own men. Officers who do for extreme plishment.
not lead their men into combat or show other C. PRESERV~ON OF HONOR. Honor is con-
signs of cowardice or who, for any reason, muti- sidered the sdier's highest possession. Except
late themselves, are normally condemned to death. in extreme cas, he may be given the opportunity
Divisional commanders and other high-ranking to redeem hirelf for a dishonorable action by
combat officers are specifically ordered to set an a heroic deal in battle or, in milder cases, by
example of leadership in the front lines; this ex- exceptionally rave and meritorious service in
plains the high casualty rate among German gen- the lowest gre of private to which he is reduced
erals. from his fora rank. However, there also exists
Traditionally, German superior officers were a rigid persal honor code for officers. Under
I MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451
its provisions, they are obligated to defend their of kin receive their first notification through a
own personal honor as well as the good name personal letter from his company commander,
of their wives by every possible means and are which is handed to them by the local leader of
held to account for violations committed by them- the Nazi Party.
selves or their wives. According to the German 1). POLITICS IN THE ARMED FORCES. Tradi-
conception, special honor rules apply to officers tionally, all German military personnel is barred
and those civilians who are socially their equals. from all political activities including the right to
These rules provide in extreme cases for settle- vote. Hitler, when introducing general conscrip-
ment by duel with pistols until one of the two tion, maintained this tradition in order to obtain
parties is fully incapacitated. This is a leftover the full support of the military and decreed that
from feudal times; before Hitler's assumption of membership in the Nazi Party and all political
power, a half-hearted attempt was made to out- activities would be dormant during the period of
law duelling by officers, but the penalties pro- any man's active service. In the later stages of
d were i d did not carry moral stigma. the war, however, serious reverses and the in-
It is significant that under Hitler, duelling of offi- creasing danger of sagging morale caused the
cers was legalized in cases where all efforts at official introduction of politics into the German
settlement by an officers' court of honor (ap- Armed Forces. This ‘occurred progressively from
pointed by a regimental or higher commander) the latter part of 1943 on, by appointment of Na-
fail; however, for duels between two officers, but tional-Socialist guidance officers (NS-Fiilzrungs-
not between an officer and a civilian, a decision ojiziere) on all staffs, the organization of politi-
must first be obtained from the Commander-in- cal meetings, and other efforts at raising morale,
Chief of the Army. Their medieval conception of as well as through the merciless terrorization of
honor has a strong influence on the mentality and wavering officers and soldiers by the "strong men"
actions of many German officers. An officer is of the Wuffcn-SS.
obligated to react to deliberate insults instantane-
c. AXVARDS. A very extended and clever use
ously, in a positive and masterly fashion, and to
has been made of honorary titles for units, medals
protect other officers from becoming the object
and awards for individual achievements, and com-
of public disgrace.
memorative decorations for participation in out-
In the SS, "qualified" enlisted men (i.e. those standing combat engagements. It is significant,
who ar e dagger) are subject to the same for instance, that because the German is basically
honor rules as officers, being obligated to "defend averse to hand-to-hand combat, the golden close-
their honor by force of arms". arms”. bar was created in 1944, which is bestowed
by Hitler personally at his headquarters, as the
4. Morale Factors highest honor offered the German soldier. Himm-
a. RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN OFFICERS AND ler shortly thereafter created the golden partisan-
MEN. The opening of the officer's career to combat bar which he bestows personally at his
the common German man of the people was a headquarters. The requirements for winning
revolutionary change in the German social sys- either bar are extremely severe so that soldiers
tem brought about by Hitler. It has created an will do their utmost. Awards and decorations
entirely different type of relationship among the may be held to have acted as very important mor-
ranks than existed in the armies of Imperial Ger- ale-builders for the German Armed Forces.
many.
5. Ranks
No one can become an officer without being a
certified Nazi, even if not a member of the Party, a. R A N K GROUPS AND CLASSES. German sol-
and without being considered capable of imbuing diers are divided into the following four rank
his men with the Nazi spirit. Thus, the social groups:
mingling between officers and men in off-duty (1) Oficers (Ofi&re) :
hours, which has been encouraged by the Nazis 1st rank class: general officers (Generule).
to some extent, appears to have a strong propa- en rank class: field officers (Stabsofigiere).
3rd rank class: captains (Hauptleute und
gandist purpose. A sincere personal interest of
Rittmcister).
the officer in his men is encouraged, the all-im- 4th rank class: lieutenants (Lcutnnnte).
portant requirement being that he must have their (2) Musirinns (activities suspended in Novem-
confidence. In case of death, the soldier's next ber 1944).
r—5
I MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451
(3) Noncommissioned Oficers (Untero&icre) : rank of first sergeant; rather, this is a position
1st rank class: fortress shop-foremen and usually held by a master sergeant or technical
horseshoeing instructors (see table).
- 2d rank class: noncommissioned officers
sergeant. A corporal in the German Army func-
of the lst, Zd, and 3d grades. (Unter- tions as acting sergeant and normally is promoted
ofiziere mit Portepce) to the rank of staff sergeant rather thhn sergeant;
3d rank class: officer candidates and non- as to the latter rank, see paragraph e.
commissioned officers of the 4th and Sth d. PRIVATES. There are three grades in the
grades. (Fiihwiche und Unterofiziere
ohne Porte@) group which correspond to U. S. privates first
(4) Privates (Murznschaften). class, and a soldier may be promoted from any
Figures 1 and 2 show tables of U. S. and
of them to become a corporal. They may be de-
German equivalent ranks. scribed as chief private first class in administra-
tive position (Stabsgefreiter), senior private first
b. OFFICERS. Nearly all German officer ranks class who functions as acting corporal (Obcrge-
correspond to U. S. Army rank, although their freiter), and ordinary private first class
terminology differs for general officers, a Gcn- (Gefreiter). A soldier cannot become chief pri-
eralmujor being the equivalent of a brigadier vate first class without having been a senior pri-
general. The functions, hoivever, do not always vate first class. In most branches there are
correspond. This is partly clue to the fact that senior privates first class (Obcrgrcnadiere in in-
German wartime ranks are permanent, which fantry, Oberkanonicrc in artillery; the Obrrjiigrr,
makes it often impossible for German officers however, in the light, mountain, and parachute
to be promoted to the higher rank which their divisions, is a corporal) and ordinary privates
wartime appointment actually would warrant. (Grenadiere, Kanoniere, etc.).
c. NONCOMMISSIONED OFFICERS. The non- e. PROMOTION OF ENLISTED M E N . In most
commissioned officer ranks are divided into two branches, a soldier cannot become a private first
groups: the first group .corresponds to the first class without having been a senior private and
three grades in the U. S. Army. There is 110 he cannot become a corporal without having been
U. S. Army German Special Type of
Equivalent Basic Rank Dcsigltation Personnel
General of the Arm?. G Gelzrralfrld~~~arsrhall
General . Generaloberst
Lieutenant General . .. General . .. General drr Infantcrie e^c Infantry, etc.
Generalobcrstabs-
Ar,ot .................... Medical
Vetcrindr Vcterinar?
Intendant Administrative
Richtcr Judiciary
Major General Generalleutnant Generalstabs-
Arzt, etc. as above Medical, etc. as above
Erigadier General G eueralnzajor . .. General-
Arzt, etc. as above Metlical, etc. as above
Colonel Oberst Obcrst-
Arct, etc. as above Metlical, etc. as above
Lieutenant Colonel . . . . Oberstlcutnant Oberf eld-
Art=, etc. as above Medical, etc. as above
Major . Major ... .... Oberstabs-
Arzt, etc. as above.Mctlical. Medical, etc. as above
Captain ... . l lauptinqnn . Stabs-
Rittmeister (cav) Artz, etc. as above Zcdical, etc. as above
First Lieutenant Oberleutnant Ober-
Arzt . Medical
Veterinar . . Veterinary
Zahlvneistcr Administrative
Second Lieutenant Lx&ant Assistenz-
Arzt Medical
Veteriniir Veterinary
Zohlmcistw Administrative
Figure l.—Table of oficer ranks.
1—6
I MARCH 1945
UNCLASSIFIED ™ E30 - 451
li. S. Army Gerrrlail Special .Typc of
Equivalent Basic Rank Designation Personnel
I~~‘~stlltqsobrr- ..Fortress Chief Shop Fore-
’rrkmcistcr man
Oberhufbeschlags- .. Chief Horseshoeing In-
Lchrmcister structor
Fcstzfrlgs- Fortress
W erkincistcr Shop- Foreman
zrfbcschlags- ........... Horseshoeing
Lehrmeister Instructor
Master Sergeant .*.... SfabsfcldzL’cb& Slabs—
H'achliiieisler \rly. Cav, A A
Bcscl~ltmrrrrist(~ ~ .1 Iorseshoeing
Fcucnvcrker Ordnance
Schirrr,lcistcr .. Supply
I;zcrrkmci.rtrr ..... Signal
l~rirftclubcrrjrlcistcr ... l'igeoneer
Technical Sergeant . . . . Oberfcldwebel Ober—
Il/ac/rtrrlcistrr Arty, Cav, AA
etc., a.s above as above
Oberfiihnrich Senior Officer Candidate
Unter—
Arzt Medical
Vetcriniir Veterinary
Staff Sergeant .. l:cldulebrl Il’achtmeister .............^rty, Cav, AA
etc., as above as above
F ahnm jzlllker-l; elda,cl~~~l . .. Advanced Officer Candidate
Sergeant Untcrf eldzccbcl lilzterzutachtllrcisfcr .4rty. Cav, A.4
t;ahnenjunkcr Officer Candidate
Corporal Unterojizier Oberjiiger Light and Mt Inf.
Promotions to all noncommissioned officer ranks except sergeant and master sergeant normally arc
dependent upon tables of organization, in addition to the following specifications:
at least an ordinary ln-ivate first class (GefGtev). tinw iI1 grade without having been promoted to
Parachutists (Fallscllil-11~ljiiger) may be privates staff sergeant may bc promoted to sergeant; hav-
to begin with, but the lowest rank provided for ing served the maximum time in that grade with-
in their table of organization is corporal (Ober- out having been promoted to technical sergeant,
jiiger), in lieu of a. pay’ bonus. Otherwise, the he may be promoted to mastrr sergeant. as shown
designation (Emcmuq~) as senior private, which in table below.
does not involve an increase in pay, is now auto- After 4 months of service in a combat unit,
matic in principle upon completion of the basic privates of any rank who arc squad leaders may
training period. Promotions to any grade of pri- be promoted to corporals and corporals who are
vate first class are dependent on time limits and platoon leaders may lx promoted to staff ser-
merit, but not on tables of organization, as shown geants, regardless of length of total service or
in the table above. service in grade.
Promotions to the ranks of sergeant and master Honorary promotions may be awarded for dis-
sergeant are not dependent on tables of organiza- tiiiguishetl conduct iti battle (l~ostliun~ously to
titin ; a corporal who has served the maximum those killctl in action).
‘I—8
I MARCH 1945 UNCLASWED TM-E 30-451
l—9
• M A R C H 1945 UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451
Professional Armed Forces officials (Wehu- additional allowance is paid for living quarters
machtbeawzte) receive, in addition to war service in view of the fact that this is already included
pay, their peacetime salaries and allowances in the regular pay, whereas soldiers who receive
(Friedensgebiihmisse), less a wartime deduction only war service pay are entitled to civilian family
offsetting their war service pay as a whole or in support. Clothing is free except for officers,
part in the same manner as for professional sol- who receive a one-time clothing allowance of
diers who receive Armed Forces regular pay. $180.00 ($280.00 for those wearing the blue
Non-professional soldiers from the rank of naval uniform) and a monthly upkeep allowance
senior private first class (Obergefreiteg) upward of $12.00. Soldiers contracting for professional
may apply for wartime regular pay (Kriegsbe- service receive a cash bonus, known as Kapitzrlalz-
soldung). They are then paid exactly like pro- tc~rhandgrld. of $120.00 (12-year contract) or
fessional soldiers and consequently are not en- $40.00 (4%-year contract).
titled to civilian family support. Therefore, sol- c. PENSIONS. Regular officers and profes-
diers with dependents will not make this applica- sional soldiers are entitled to various benefits
tion if the amount of their civilian family support upon their clischarge ; the extent of these depends
is higher than their wartime pay would be. on length of service. They include lump-sum
Armed Forces officials who have no peace time compensations, unemployment assistance, and, in
salary receive war time regular pay without hav- some cases. pensions. Discharged professional
ing to apply for it. noncommissioned officers are encouraged to go
In the foregoing table, column 1 shows the into civil service or agriculture; particularly in
Armed Forces regular pay (Welwmachtbcsol- the latter case they receive substantial cash SUIIIS
dung) for professional soldiers or wartime regu- for the purchase or lease of land. All honorably
lar pay (Kriegsbesoldung) for non-professional’ discharged soldiers receive a mustering-out pay
soldiers in ranks from senior private first class of $20.00.
(Obergefrcitw) upward and for wartime oficials. d. LEAVES, ETC. Leaves and furloughs are
The amounts quoted represent the minimum base classified according to their purpose such as re-
pay for single men without dependents before creation, convalescence, occupational, bombing, or
deduction of the income tax, which is shown in emergency. Transportation is free, in principle.
parenthesis at the minimum rate applying when The considerable liberality regarding leaves that
the soldier has no additional income. All figures was practiced in the early stages of the war was
are quoted according to the most recent revision, radically curtailed under the strain of the later
on 9 November 1944, of the Military War Com- emergencies, which in 1944 led to their complete
pensation Law of 1939. The pay rises for men freezing, except, possibly, in the case of con-
with dependents according to a scale which pro- valescents.
vides for additional amounts up to 10 children.
Column 2 shows the war service pay (Welzrsold)
7. Categories of Officers and Other Personnel
for all members of the Armed Forces, including
officials, regardless of whether they are also paid a. REGULAR OFFICERS (aktive Offiziere). The
under column 1 or not. The amounts are shown small corps of regular officers inherited by the
in U. S. dollars at the basic rate of exchange Nazi regime from the pre-1935 German Reichs-
(1 Reichsvvlark equal to $0.40). wehr was substantially increased, before the war,
b. ALLOWANCES. All soldiers in ranks from by the recall of all suitable retired officers, the
general to private receive $0.40 daily as combat absorption of many police officers, and the crea-
area service compensation (Frontzulage). This tion of new officers from volunteer officer candi-
is granted not because of the danger to life and dates and suitable noncommissioned officers and
limb but for the "more difficult living conditions". privates from the regular ranks. At the begin-
On trips taken in the line of duty, the soldier, ning of the war, suitable professional noncom-
regardless of rank, receives an allowa&e for missioned officers were given temporary officer
overnight quarters and $2.40 per diem additional. ranks (as "Kriegsofiziere"), which were made
Every member of the Armed Forces is entitled permanent in 1942.
to free rations, quarters, and clothing; those who Special categories of regular officers are medi-
must or are allowed to take their meals outside cal officers (Sa&ttitso@7icrc), veterinary officers
receive $1.20 per diem as ration money. No (Vete&iivofizieve), and ordnance officers (Waf-
I—IO
I MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451
fenoffiziere, commonly designated as Ofiiziere tenants upon being discharged at the end of their
(W)). contractual period.
After 1934, a number of First World War In wartime, there cannot be any reserve officer
officers were recalled, mostly in administrative candidates of the peacetime type, as conscripts
positions, as supplementary officers (Ergiimungs- are not being discharged upon completion of a
ofiziere) and designated as aktive Ofiziere (E) ; compulsory two-year service period; instead,
the (E) has since been dropped and those who qualified volunteers and suitable conscripts from
were qualified have been taken into the regular the ranks are designated as reserve officer appli-
officer corps. Many officers who had been re- cants (Reserve-O fizicr-Be-werber—R.O.B.).
tired as "officers not in service" (Ofiziere ausser Originally, there were two age groups of re-
Dienst—-a.D.) as well as many regular officers serve officers, those of the reserve class under
eligible for retirement were designated as sub- the age of 35, designated as O@icre der Reserve
ject to active service in recalled status "at the —O.d.R.), and those of the Lalzdwehr reserve
disposal of a branch of the Armed Forces (Army, class above 35, designated as Ofiziere der Land-
Air Force, or Navy)" (Ofiziere BUY Verfiigzlng rzhr—0.d.L. Both types of officers, collec-
eines Wehmzachtteiles—z. V.). Retired officers tively, were called "officers in inactive status"
designated z.V. were normally not recalled to ac- (Ofiziere des Beul-laubtenstandes—0.d.B.).
tive service before mobilization, but a number of During the war, the designation 0.d.L. has been
them were appointed in peacetime to fill certain eliminated, so that all reserve officers are 0.d.R.
open officer positions as "officers recalled to serv- as well as 0.d.B.
ice" (Ofiziere ZUY Dienstleistmg—z.D.). Dur-
ing the war, the designation z.D. has been used d. ARMED FORCES OFFICIALS (Wehrmacht-
for certain officers whose qualifications are in beamte). Officials in administrative, legal, and
doubt and whose final status (regular or reserve) technical service positions are a category peculiar
is not determined, The designation of regular,, to the German Armed Forces. They consist of
officers subject to retirement as 2.V. continues in civil service personnel performing functions with-
wartime, which means that, such officers, imme- in the Armed Forces and are recruited, in part,
diately upon their discharge as regular officers, from former professional noncommissioned of-
are retained in active service in recalled status ficers who became military candidates for civil
in any position in which they may be needed. service (Militiirar~wtirtcl-) at the end of their 12-
year contractual period of active military service.
b. GENERAL STAFF CORPS OFFICERS (General- Until 1944, none of these officials were classified
stabsofiziere, 0fli.i.G.). General Staff Corps as soldiers, but certain groups have now been
officers are carefully selected and trained to repre- converted into officers in the Special Troop Serv-
sent the German General Staff Corps in both com- ice (Trztppensonderdicnst—TDS). These are
mand and staff functions. On division staffs, as the higher administrative officers (Intendanten)
"la", they hold the position of operational chiefs in ranks from captain to lieutenant general; the
of staff, and as "lb" they are chiefs of the rear lower administrative officers (Zahl~~&ter) in the
echelon. In the higher echelons, the intelligence ranks of first and second lieutenant, and the judge
and training staff sections are likewise in the per- advocates (Richter) in ranks from captain to
sonal charge of General Staff Corps officers. lieutenant general. It was also made possible for
reserve technical service officials to become re-
c. RESERVE,OFFICERS (Rcserveofizierc). The
serve officers of the motor maintenance troops
nucleus of the reserve officer corps consists of
if qualified.
conscripts who because of their qualifications and
performance during their first year of service In addition to regular Armed Forces officials,
were accepted in peacetime as reserve officer there are the categories of reserve officials
aspirants (Reserve-O fizier-Anw&ter-—R.O.A.), (Beamte dcs Beurlaztbtcnstandcs—B.d.B., also re-
received special training in platoon-leadership ferred to as B.d.R.), officials in recalled status
during their second year, and were designated "at the disposal of the Army, etc." (Beamte zur
reserve officers after their discharge and subse- Verfiigung—B.z.V.), and officials appointed for
quent recall for a four-week exercise period with the duration (BeavPzte auf Kriegsdauer—B.a.K.).
their old unit. Suitable professional noncommis- These three categories are collectively referred to
sioned ‘officers were made reserve second lieu- as supplementary Armed Forces officials (Ergiin-
1-11
I MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIF\ED TM-E 30.451
his blood type. Any unit, however, may issue a military records accompany the soldier to his first
disc to a member who has lost his original one, induction unit, but upon his transfer from it are
with its own name and a new serial number. returned to and kept at his home recruiting sta-
tl. UNIT, ROSTER SHEET (Krirgsstal?l?~~lz~lZen- tion (Welzre~satsdienststrllc), which normally is
blatt). Every Field Army unit and those units a recruiting sub-area hcatlquarters (Wchrbczirks-
of the Replacement Army which are of Field konzmando) for officers or a subordinate military
Army or training type keep an individual roster reporting office (Wrhrmcldramt) for enlisted
sheet on every one of their members, containing men. The soldier's unit roster sheets, which are
the record of the individual's service in the unit. closed and forwarded to his home recruiting sta-
This sheet is to be closed upon the termination of tion upon his transfer from one unit to another,
that service and then forwarded direct to the sol- are filed in the inside rear cover pocket of his
tlier's home recruiting station (Wrlzrcvsatzdifnst- Wrlzrsta~~znzbrtch. Since the autumn of 1944, the
strllc), where his basic military records are kept. transfer into the Wehrstammbuch of entries from
There are two different forms: one for officers these or other documents that are received for
and officials of all ranks, the other for enlisted filing in the pocket has been suspended until after
men. the war; it is planned that the entries then be
made from the Wchrpass, which is kept up at all
e. BASIC MILITARY RECORDS. At the time of
times by the unit in which the soldier is serving.
the first physical examination when the service
record (Welzrpass) is issued to the soldier by his The Wehrersatzdienststelle is the home recruit-
recruiting sub-area headquarters (Wehrbezirks- ing station of all Germans who are subject to
kommando), the latter opens a corresponding conscription and therefore is responsible for all
basic military record book (Wehrstammbuch) for members of the German Armed Forces, includ-
him, together with an accompanying health record ing volunteers, regardless of whether they serve
book (Gesundheitsbuch) and a classification card in the Army, Air Force, Navy, or Waffen-SS.
(Verwendungskarte). His military registration The Wehrstammbuch of naval personnel, how-
card (Wehrstammkarte), which was made out by ever, is kept by their own home base replacement
the police authorities as part of his miltary regis- units. It does not contain any unit roster sheets
tration record ( Wehrstammblatt), is pasted inside (Kricgsstammrollenbliitter), as these are replaced,
the front cover of the Wehrstammbuch. Actual- in the Navy, by a conduct book (Fiihrungsbuclz)
ly, this card is an open envelope with the soldier's for enlisted men which follows them from unit
registration record on its face and containing a to unit, as does their Wchvpass. The health rec-
police report (Polizeibericht) on his conduct prior ord book (Grsundlzeitsb~tch), which otherwise is
to registration. kept at the Wehrersatzdienststelle together with
f. MILITARY REGISTRATION NUMBER (Wehr- the Wclzrstall2llzbzlrh, is in the personal possession
nummer). This is determined at the time the of naval personnel as is, of course, their paybook.
Wehrpass is issued to the soldier; in other words, Before 1944, the classification card (Vcmefz-
while he is still a civilian. He retains it per- dlrngsknrtr) was used for entering the soldier's
manently, regardless of whether he is in active training record and was forwarded to his first
service or not, as his identifying number with field unit for inspection, to be returned within 3
the authorities which administer the conscription days to the home recruiting station. Since the
laws. It normally consists of the following five autumn of 1944, the card has not been sent to the
elements (although there are some variations) : field; but the same purpose is served by the de-
Name of the W chrbezirkskommando. tailed training record sheet (Ausbildu~zgsnarlz-
zeleis), introduced in 1933, which the soldier, upon
Last two digits of the year of birth.
his transfer to the field, carries in the pocket of
Number of military registration police precinct his paybook; it is supposed to be destroyed by
(in certain larger cities, number corresponding the field- unit, but this is not always done. I
to first letter of family name).
Records peculiar to the Waffrr~-SS are the S S
Serial number of the conscription (or volun- basic record card (SS-Stammkartc), which fol-
teer) roster sheet (W ehrstammrollenblatt). lows the soldier from unit to unit as does his
Number indicating registrant's place on that Wehrpass, and the SS control card (SS-Ober-
sheet (from 1 to 10). wachungskarte), which is kept by his SS replace-
g. UPKEEP OF MILITARY RECORDS. The basic ment unit and never follows him into the field.
1—13
I MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451
h. OFFICER RECORDS. Officers, in addition to reduction is entered only on the closed Kriegs-
the basic records described above have a personal stammrollellblatt. The records of a degraded
record folder (Personalnachweis). In the Navy, regular Air Force officer must be requested from
which has no unit roster sheets for either officers the Air Force Personnel Office. In the Savy, the
or enlisted men, the officer's Perso~zalnachweis Persona2nzachwei.s of a degratletl officer is closed,
takes the place of the enlisted men's Fiihrulzgs- the reduction having been entered on it, is sent
buch. Otherwise, the officer's Personalnuchweis to his home recruiting station, and is replaced
normally is kept in several copies, which may be by an enlisted man's Fiihrulfgsbztch; whereas thtl
found at the rep!acement unit of his peacetime I~iihrungsb~~clz of a degraded noncommissioned
unit; at the corps area headquarters (Wehrkrels- officer is continued after the reduction has been
kom.mando); at the Army Personnel Office entered. i no s is the reduction entered in
(Heercspcrsonalamt) ; or in the case of reserve either thr old or the new Soldb~ch or Wchrpass.
officers at their recruiting sub-area headquarters
j . TERMIIYATI~N OF SERVICE. The Wehrpass
( Wehrbezirkskommando).
is given to the soldier upon his honorable dis-
In case of discharge or death, one copy is in charge from active service, rven when such a
all cases forwarded to the Armed Forces Wel- discharge is temporary (e.g. for occupational rea-
fare and Pension Office (Wehrmnchtfiirsorgc- sons). In the latter case, his Soldbuch is re-
und Versorgullgsamt) accompanied by the ofi- turned to him in exchange for the W&pass
cer's medical record papers (Krankenpapiere). \vhen he is recalled to active duty. Otherwise,
i. PUNISHMENT RECORDS. An individual ex- the Soldhuch and all other basic military records
cerpt from the unit punishment book (Auszzrg uzu remain on file at his home recruiting station. Dis-
dem Strafbuch) is forwarded upon the transfer charged soltlirrs are given a discharge certificate
of an enlisted man, together with his Wehrpass, (Entlass~cl~gsscl~~~ill).
whereas the punishment record of an officer ap- In case of death, all basic military records of
pears in his character and efficiency report (Bcur- jhe,, solclier arc filed by the home recruiting station
teilungsnotiz). In the event of a disciplinary re- except his Wchrpass, which is given to the next
duction in rank, the soldier's Soldbuch, Wehrpass, of kin. A report on his death and burial, to-
and Kriegsstam~~~rollenblatt are closed by his unit gether with the broken-off lower half of his iden-
and forwarded, for filing in the Wehrstammbuch tification disc and a description of the grave, is
pocket, to his home recruiting station, which issues sent to the Armed Forces Information Bureau
a new Wehrpass. The unit itself issues a new for War Casualties and Prisoners of War, which
Soldbuch at once, and a new Kriegsstammrollen- is the only agencv authorized to handle inquiries.
blatt is opened which, in the case of a former However, the L@affell-SS had its own informa-
officer, must be of the enlisted man type. The tion bureau.
1—14
I MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIED -E 30-451
Section III. THE HIGH COMMAND 1943.) The object of this division is to insure
that all purely routine and administrative matters
I. Introduction will be handled in the rear and not obtrude them-
selves into the actual conduct of operations by the
The basic principle under' the German military
forward headquarters.
system is unity of command. This principle is
exemplified in the highest as well as the lower There is a fairly standardized method of indi-
echelons. Under this system the Army, Navy, cating the relative size and importance of the
and Air Force are regarded as branches of a single various subdivisions within a high command. In
service (Die U’elwwzacht), headed by the Armed descending order. these units with the accepted
Forces High Command (Oberkommaudo drr translations used in this book are:
Wehrwzacht or OKW) ( l ) * . The OKW controls
Amt—Office (6)
all matters of inter-service policy in both peace
A 111tsgruppc—Group (7 )
and war. It is responsible for all preparation
Abteilung—Uranch (8)
for national defense in time of peace, and for the
(Prlrppr—Section (9)
conduct of operations in time of war. The head
Refer&—Desk (10)
of the OKW is a cabinet member and represents
the joint interest of the three branches with re- In general (with sonle exceptions) an Amt or
spect to other departments of the Government. Amtsgruppr is headed l)!. a general officer and an
In effect, therefore, the ‘German High Com- Abteilztrlg by a field officer.
mand is divided into four parts, as follows: However, these subdivisions are not necessarily
Armed Forces High Command—Oberkornmalldo subordinate to one another schematically; i.e.,
der Wehrnzacht (OK?+/) ( 2 ) ; Army High Com- the channel downward from an Amt may skip
mand—Oberkommando des Heeres (OKH) (3) ; Auatsgruppe and go direct to Abtcilung or even to
Navy High Command—Oberkowwza~zdo der Refcmt.
Kriegsmarine (OKM)(3); Air Force High
The following description gives the nomencla-
Command—Oberkommando der L,uftwaffe
ture and function of only the more important
(OKL)(4).
subdivisions of the Armed Forces High Com-
Under this system it is not unusual in a task mand (Ok’%‘) and the Army High Command
force for units of one branch of the Armed ! Ok’H). All the German abbreviations used are
Forces to come under the immediate command explained in a glossary at the end of the section.
of another branch. All personnel may he trans- It should be noted that thi? is the organization
ferred from one branch to another in the same existing at the beginning of 1945, and that under
or equivalent rank. This, in fact, has been done present circumstances the High Command, like
on a very considerable scale in 1943 and 1944, all other aspects of the German ,%rnmed Forces,
with a transfer of thousands of members of the is subject to rapid and unforeseen changes.
Air Force and Navy to the Army.
The OKW is supreme and responsible for* the 2. The OKW (1I)
coordination of the active war effort by the three Hitler himself is the Supreme Commander of the
subordinate branches, while the OKH is respon- Armed Forces (Oberster Befehlslzabcr der Wehr-
sible for all purely Army matters, just as each maclft) (12). Under him, Keitel is the Chief of
of the other two High Commands is responsible the Armed Forces High Command (Chef des
for the application of general policies within its Ok’lV) (13) and as such serves as Hitler's chief
own sphere. executive officer in the administration of the
In wartime, each High Command has a forward ,4rmed Forces and the application of his policies
echelon (1. Stafl el) (5) and a rear echelon and plans.
(2. Staff eZ). The forward echelon moves to a The operational part of the OKW is the
location appropriate to the theater of main opera- Armed Forces Operations Staff (Wehrwzucht-
tions, while the rear echelon remains in Berlin. fiihrzmgsstab), which constitutes the main ad-
(Almost all elements of the rear echelon were
visory body to Hitler on strategy and planning.
evacuated from Berlin beginning in October
It is located at the field headquarters of the OK@‘,
* See Section 4 for an explanation of the use of these which is known as the Fiihrerhaziptcluarticr(14).
numbers. The other subdivisions of the OKW are mostly
l—15
SUPKEME COMMANDER (Obil. Mil 2
HITLER TO
o
CHIEF OF ARMED FORCES HIGH COMMAND (CHEF O.K.W.l*
KEITEL
ARMED FORCES
CHIEF OF ARMED FORCES FOREIGN GROUP ADMINISTRATION SAW MATERIALS
PARTY LIAISON
TRANSPORTATION (RAIL ft lAg Auill (W VI BRANCH
(Gr zbVI
WATER (Ch.f.Trtp)* (FOR MILITARY ATTACHES) (R.I"
CHIEF OF
PRISONERS OF WAR
CHIEF OF ARMED FORCES INTER-SERVICE CENTRAL
(Chat Kri.g.g.f)
PATROL SERICE COMMUNICATIONS RAW MATERIALS BRANCH
(Ch»f W Sir)* (Ag W N V)* (R» Si A l * *
INSPECTORATE FOR
WELFARE. PENSIONS
MILITARY SCIENCE
ARMED FORCES
BRANCH
JUDGE ADVOCATE GENERAL
(W WIM»
IW M
with the rear echelon and deal with numerous (24). Subordinate to the Chief of the OKW
administrative matters of joint interest to the and, in medical matters, to the Commissioner
t&ree branches of the Armed Forces. General of Medicine and Sanitation (General-
The accompanying chart (Figure 4) shows the Komfnissar des Fiihrers fiir das San&its- und
principal branches of the OKW and their sub- Gesundheitswesen). The Armed Forces Surgeon
ordination. Their functions are discussed in the General formerly also held the positions of Chief
following paragraphs. Army Medical Inspector (H Sara In@) and Army
Surgeon (H Arzt). In August 1944, the personal
a. ARMED FORCES CENTRAL OFFICE (Wchs-
union was dissolved, but the latter two positions,
nzachtzentralanzt—WZA) (15). The officer in
as well as the equivalent positions in the Navy and
charge of this agency is responsible for central
Air Force, are all subject to the supervision and
organizational matters, such as increasing or re-
control of the Armed Forces Surgeon General
ducing the personnel of branches of the High
in medical matters.
Command. The office also includes the Armed
Forces Central Group (Ag WZ) (16). f. CIIIEF OF AR&IV STAFF WITH C H I E F OKW
of these sections includes officers representing all fice is composed of independent branches in the
three branches of the Armed Forces. (The in- OKW, grouped together for administrative pur-
telligence section now embodies elements of the poses. It contains:
former counterintelligence branch and other op- (1) General Armed Forces Branch (Alige-
erational portions of the old Foreign and Counter- meine Abteilung—W Allg) (42).
intelligence Office of the OKW, the bulk of which (2) Armed Forces Administration Group
was taken over by the 6\S" in the middle of 1944.) (Amtsgruppe Wehrmachtverwaltung—Ag WV)
(2) Foreign Group (Amtsgruppe Ausland— (43). Responsible for the administration of all
Ag Ausl) (32). This includes the Branch for OKW agencies and OKW personnel and for
Military Attaches of the OKH (Att Abt d OKH) certain fiscal matters.
(33). It also is concerned with acquisition of (3) Chief of Prisoners of War (Chef des
foreign newspapers, rules on travel to foreign Kricgsgcfangenenwesens—Chef Kriegsgef) (44).
countries, and relations of German military per- The administrative head of all matters relating
sonnel with foreigners. both to German and to Allied prisoners of war,
(3) Armed Forces Signal Communications he also performs the function of inspector of
Group (Amtsgruppe Wehrmachtnachrichtenver- prisoner-of-war installations. In this latter ca-
bindungen—Ag WNV) (34).' This group main- pacity he acts under the directives of the Inspector
tains the trunk communications between the high General for Prisoner-of-War Affairs (Gen Insp
commands and is the nerve center of the top com- Kriegsgef), who comes directly under the Chief
mand echelons. It has at least two signal regi- of the OKW. The agency is divided into a Gen-
ments of the Army at its disposal to maintain a eral Branch (Kriegsgef Al/g.) (45) which deals
special network of land cables and radio channels with treatment, exchange, and release of prison-
linking the OKW, OKH, OKL, and OKM and ers ; administrative and punitive matters; and
the principal subordinate headquarters. It con- relations with the protective powers and with the
tains a radio communications branch (Ag WNV / International Red Cross; and an Organization
Fu)(35) and a wire communications branch (Ag Branch (Krirgsgef. Org.) (46), which deals
WNV/KF) (36). with the employment and living conditions of
(4) Cryptographic Branch (Chiffrier-Abteilung prisoners of war in German hands.
—Chi) (37).
(4) Insfiectorate for Welfare and Pensions
(5) Armed Forces Historical Branch (Kriegs- Agencies (Inspektion der Fiirsorge und Versor-
gcschichtliche Abteilung dir Wehrmacht—W Kr gungsdicrlststrllcll im OKW—Jn FV) (47).
Gesch) (38). Headed by the Fuhrer's Official Welfare and pension matters for all branches of
Military Historian (Der Beauftr d Fiihrers fiir the Armed Forces are controlled by this agency.
die mil Geschichtsschr. This officer also heads the Subordinate to it are the Armed Forces Welfare
Army Historical Branch (Kr Gesch Heer) and and Pensions Branch (W Vers) (48) ) the Civil-
other historical agencies in the OKH. This ian Pensions Branch (Abt. Reichsvers.) (49),
branch records all military history which concerns and the Armed Forces Education Branch (WV)
the three branches of the Armed Forces as a (50). Until 1944 the Armed Forces Education
whole. Branch was a separate branch of the AW A.
(6) Armed Forces Propaganda Branch (Ab-
(5) Armed Forces Casualty Branch (Abtei-
teilung fur W'ehrmachtpropaganda—W Pr) (39).
lung Wehrmachtverlustzvesen—WVW) (51).
Headed by the Chief of the Propaganda Troops
(Chef Pr Tr) (40), this branch is responsible (6) Armed Forces Plenijotentiary For Settle-
for all types of military propaganda except that nzent (R cz~ollnliichtigtcr dcs OKW fiir Siedlungs-
which is fed to the troops by the National-So- fragen—BW Sied) (52). Arranges for reset-
cialist Guidance Staffs (NSFSt) of the various tlement of Germans in annexed territory.
high commands. It includes sections for the ad- (7) Hitler Youth Liaison (Vertreter der Wehr-
ministration of the propaganda troops, propa- macht beim Jugendffhrer des Deutschen Reichs—
ganda to the home front, military censorship, AWA/HJ) (53). Represents the interests of
propaganda to foreign countries, and counter- the Armed Forces in the Hitler Youth organiza-
propaganda. tion.
1. GENERAL ARMED FORCES OFFICE (Allge- (8) Military Science Branch (Abteilwrg Wis-
rneines W ehnnachtatnt—AW A) (41). This of- senschaft—W Wiss) (54). Studies develop-
1—18
I MARCH 1945
UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451
mentg of the physical sciences which affect the OKW during February 1944. It maintains liai-
military. son between the OKW and civilian agencies in
IX. ARMED FORCES ECONOMIC OFFICE (Wehr- Germany. It contains a domestic security branch
ze~irtsclzaftsamt—Wi A) (55). This office is re- (Ag 3/1) (671, and an ideological guidance
sponsible for long-range military-economic plan- branch (Ag J/Z) (68).
ning, the economic exploitation of occupied areas, (2) Party J*iaisofl (Gruppe z.b.V.—Gr.z.6.
and representing .the interests of the Armed V.) (69). Formerly part of the General Armed
Forces with other government departments con- Forces Office (AM’A), this section was trans-
cerned with production, raw materials, labor, agri- ferred to the cbntrol of the National-Socialist
culture, and foreign trade. It contains: Guidance Staff of the OKW in 1944. It is be-
(1) Armed Forces Economic Rrarrch (Wehr- lieved to maintain thv liaison with the National-
wirtschaftliche Abteilztng—Wi) (56). Con- Socialist Party and to control such matters as
cerned with general planning matters and control collections for charitable (U Party purposes within
of the subordinate regional agencies of the office. the LArmed Forces.
(2) Razf Materials Branch (Rohstoflabteilung p. INSPECTOK GENERAL OF MOTOR TRANSPORT
—Ro) (57). This agency has been transferred ( Gelzcralirlspcktcur fiir- das Kraftfahrzwsen—
to the control of the Ministry of Armament and Gcn In@ Kfw) (70). He is immediately subor-
War Production for the duration of the war. It dinate to Hitler and coordinates all matters re-
included or cooperated with the Central Raw garding motor transport. He may issue orders
Materials Branch (Ro St A) (SS), the Armed to other OKPt’ and OJ<H offices concerned with
Forces Tire Center (W R St) (59) (still under motor transport.
the Armed Forces Economic Office), the Central
Petroleum Branch (hlin St A) (60), and the 3. The Army High Command (OKH)
Economic Experts Personnel Section (Stab W a. GENERAL. Since the Army is by far the
Fach) (61) (still under the Armed Foices largest and most important of the three branches
Economic Office). of the German Armed Forces, it was, from the
(3) Contracts and Price Control Branch (Ver- outbreak of the war, the branch which Hitler
trays-und Preispriifwcsen—Prcispr) (62). The was most anxious to control directly. Its head-
fixing of prices for Armed Forces Contracts is quarters in the field always has been located in
supervised by this branch. It is now under the the immediate vicinity of the Fiihrrrhauptqzzarticr.
Ministry of Armaqent and War Production. In December 1941, after the failure of the Mos-
n. CONSCRIPTION AND RECRUITING OFFICE cow offensive, Hitler removed Brauchitsch as
(Wehrersatzallz~--—WEA) (63). This office was Commander-in-Chief oi the Army (Oberbcfchls-
created in the summer of 1943, when the function liabcr dcs Hccrcs (70a)) and took over personal
of controlling recruiting and conscription for the command himself. He has exercised this com-
three branches of the Armed Forces was trans- mand ever since, and the result has heen a par-
ferred from the Army High Command to the tial merging or overlapping of the functions of
OKW. It controls the Replacement Branch the OKW and of the OKH. Keitel, while still
(Abt. E) (64) ) which was formerly part of the Chief of the OKLV, nevertheless also acts as Hit-
Group for Replacement and General Troop Mat- ler's executive officer in matters pertaining to the
ters (Ag E Tr) in the OKH. Army alone. Similarly, it is often difficult to
o. NATIONAL-SOCIALIST GUIDANCE STAFF OF
draw the line between the dc facto authority and
THE OKW (N ationalsozialistischer Fiihrungsstab functions of the Army General Staff and those of
des OKW—NSF/OKW) (65). Established in the Armed Forces Operations Staff.
December 1943, this agency is to ensure uniform The accompanying chart (Figure 5) shows the
political indoctrination in the Armed Forces, in principal branches of the OKH and their subor-
cooperation with the Party chancellery. It in- dination. Their functions are discussed in the
cludes : following paragraphs.
(1) Interior Group (Amtsgruppe Inland— b. ARMY GENERAL STAFF (Gemralstab des
Ag J)’ (66). Formerly a branch (Abt.) of the Heeres—Gw St d N) (71). This organization,
General Armed Forces Office (2WA), this was which is a functional part of the Army High
upgraded to a group (Ag.) and transferred to Command, must not he confused with the Gen-
the National-Socialist Guidance Staff of the eral Staff Corps. The latter, called in German
L—19
•0
HITLER
NATIONAL-SOCIALIST
GUIDANCE STAFF
OF THE ARMY
1 frijd d Pi Trl
training within the Theater of Operations; all braries, and Army archives, all of which were
training in the Zone of the Interior is under the transferred in 1942 to the Fiihrer's Official Mili-
Chief of Training in the Replacement Army tary Historian (D. Beauftr d Fiihrers fiir die mil
(Chef Ausb). Geschichtsschr) (92). It still nominally includes
Branch 11 (11. A&&lung) (84). Military Branch 7, Military Science Branch (7. Abteilung
schools and officer training which are the functions or Kr Wiss Abt) (93), but the functions of this
of this branch are now entirely under the Home branch are also believed to have been largely taken
Command, especially the Inspector General for over by the new Army Historical Branch (Kr
Potential Officers NCOs (GJF). Gesch Heer) under the I;iihrer's Official Military
THIRD SENIOR GENERAL STAFF OFFICER (Ober- Historian.
quartiermeistcr III—O Qu111) (85). This group- C H I E F SUPPLY AND ADMINISTRATION OFFICER
ing, responsible for organization includes: (Generalquartiermcister—Gcn Qu) (94). This
Branch 2 (2. Abteilung or Org. Abt.) (86). officer does not belong to the basic organization of
This branch is ,responsible for laying down rules the Army General Staff in peacetime but was ap-
relating to various aspects of organization in the pointed at the beginning of the war, in accord-
field and, in conjunction with the chiefs of arms ance with previous plans, to take charge of the
and services attached to the General Staff, recom- whole supply and administrative structure of the
mending to the General Army Office (AHA) Field Army. He was given an elaborate organi-
the issuance of changes in the existing Tables of zation, described below, including a number of
Organization. attached officers as chiefs of the various services
Branch 8 (8. Abteilung) (87). The function for the Field Army; these officers bear the same
of this branch ‘which was concerned with tech- relationship to the General Staff as the chiefs of
nical services is now probably handled by other arms except that they come under the Chief Sup-
agencies such as the Chief of Technical Troops ply and Administrative Officer instead of being
under the Chief Supply and Administration attached directly to the Chief of General Staff.
Officer (Gelz Qu/Gen d Tech% Tr).
The organization given below is basically that
FOURTH SENIOR GENERAL STAFF OFFICER
which applied in the early stages of the war and
(OberquartiermeisterIV—OQuIV) (88). The takes into account only the more important of
intelligence branch is probably the only one of the the temporary modifications which have occurred
five major groupings in the Army General Staff since. It should be noted that the first three
which is still fully operative. Its two geograph- sections, called supply sections (Quarticrmcistcr-
ical branches are subdivided into various geo- Gruppell 1, 2, 3) (9.5) are concerned with the
graphical sections which collect and evaluate in- planning, organization, and general operation of
formation and disseminate intelligence regarding the services in the field; they are each headed by
the armies of the various countries in the form of a General Staff Corps officer and may be regarded
printed manuals and periodic reports. . The as constituting the G-4 division of the Army
grouping includes: General Staff. All the other sections, which are
Branch 3, Eastern Armies (3. Abteilung, Frd numbered according to the standard German staff
Heere Ost) (89). Deals with the armies of the organization, deal with the actual functioning of
Soviet Union, Scandinavia, the lower Balkans, the various services and are headed by the chiefs
Africa, and the Far East. of these services for the Field Army.
Branch 12, Western Armies (12. Abteilung,
Fr$ Heere West) (90). Deals with the armies Section Qu 1 (Gruppe Qu 1) (96). General
of Western Europe (Section I I ) , Great Britain planning and organization of supply in the field,
(Section I I I ) , the upper Balkans (Section I V ) , establishment of communication lines and rear
and the Western Hemisphere (Section V ) . The boundaries of the Theater of Operations, trans-
Western Hemisphere section was transferred port questions in conjunction with the Chief Army
from the Eastern Armies Branch to Western Transportation Officer (Chef Trspzer), and con-
Armies Branch after Pearl Harbor. trol of those service troops not sub-allotted to
army groups and armies.
F I F T H SENIOR GENERAL STAFF OFFICER (Ober-
quartiermeister V—O Qu V) (91). Deals with Section Qu 2 (Gruppe Qu 2) (97). Civil
military history. This group formerly included affairs policies in the communications zone, es-
special sections for historical research, Army li- pecially the exploitation of the country for mili-
l—22
I MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451
tary purposes; evacuation, booty, and prisoners military matters in the civil administration of oc-
of war. cupied areas in the Theater of Operations, in-
Section Qu 3 (Gruppe Qu 3) (98). Action on cluding relations with the civil authorities and
supply requisitions from army groups and armies the discipline of the population; cooperates with
for ordnance, fuel, and engineer equipment. Sections Qu 2 and III above. This section is
These requisitions are adjusted in accordance believed to have been renamed Qu 5.
with over-all plans and policies and are then for- Chief of Supply Troops (General der Naclz-e
warded to the authorities in the Zone of the In- schubtruppen) (106). Controls all General
terior. Headquarters supply troops, working in cooper-
Section II a (Gruppe II a, Adjutantur) (99). ation with Section QU 3 on questions of their
Personnel and security matters within the staff employment. Known as H cercs~zaclzschubfiilzrer
of the Chief Supply and Administration Officer. until October 1942.
Section III, Field Legal Administration Section F. P., Army Postmaster (Gruppe F.
{Gruppe III, Feldjustizvemaltung) (100). P., Hcevesfeldpostmeister) (107). Responsible
Headed by the chief of the Judge Advocate Gen- for all questions relating to the Army Postal
eral's Department in the field, responsible for Service in the Field Army.
questions of military law and jurisprudence. Chief of Technical Troops (General der Tech-
This section was upgraded to a branch and trans- nisclzen Truppelz—Gen d Tech Tr) (108).
ferred to the control of the General for Special Chief adviser on the organization and employ-
Employment (Gen z b V) sometime after the ment of the ,technical troops. These troops,
beginning of the Russian campaign, while classified as a combat arm, perform a num-
Section IV a, Chief Army Administrative Of- ber of highly technical services requiring spe-
titer (Gruppe IV a, Hecresintendant) (101). cialized equipment for the armies in the field.
Resppnsible for the general control of adminis- Senior Military Police Officer (Hiihcrer Feld-
trative matters and the personnel who deal with gcndarllzcrir-O~tfi,-icr—Hoh Feldgen Offs) (109).
them throughout the Field Army. These matters Responsible for all matters concerning the or-
include pay, clothing, personal equipment, rations, ganization and employment of the military police
billeting, and fiscal matters. in the Field Army.
Section IV b, Army Surgeon (Gruppe IV b, c. CHIEFS OF BRANCHES ATTACHED TO THE
Heeresarzt—H Arzt) (102). Controls all medi- GENERAL STAFF. The Commander-in-Chief of
cal matters and medical personnel throughout the the Army and the .Chief of the Army General
Field Army, subject to the direction of the Chief Staff have at their disposal in wartime a group
Army Medical Inspector (H San Imp). (At of general officers representing the various com-
present these two positions are believed to be bat arms \vho serve as the principal advisers on
united in one person.) the organization, training, equipment, and tactical
Section IV c, Army Veterinarian (Gruppe IV c, employment of their respective arms in the field.
;fecrcmeteriniir—H Vet) (103). Controls all They usually have no actual command authority
veterinary matters and veterinary personnel in but may issue instructions and suggestions to
the Field Army, subject to the direction of the the troops based on the evaluation of experience
Chief Veterinary Inspector (Vet Imp). in the field. For the publication of technical
Section V, Chief Motor Transport Officer manuals and the like they collaborate with the
(Gruppe V, General dcs Kraftfahrwesens—-Gen d inspectorates of their branches in the General
Kfw) (104). Controls the motor maintenance Army Office. They may also recommend
troops in the Field Army and is responsible for changes in the organization or equipment of the
general questions of availability and utilization troops to the Organization Branch of the General
of motor transport. He is simultaneously in Staff (Gen St d H/Org Abt) for forwarding to
charge of a group in the General Army Office the inspectorates.
(AHA) responsible for the same matters in the Three officers in this category, whose titles be-
Zone of the Interior, and holds concurrently the gin with Chef instead of General, are regarded as
office of Chief of Armed Forces Motor Trans- organically absorbed into the General Staff for
portation (Chef WKW) under the OKW. the duration of the war instead of being attached
Section Z, Civil Commissioner (Gruppe 2, to it like the others.
Zitilbeauftragter) (105). Responsible for non- The chiefs of those branches of the German
I—23
UNCLASSIFIED
I MARCH 1945 TM-E 30-45I
Army which are ,classified as service troops are (8) Chic/ of Volunteer Units (Gcncral der
likewise attached to the General Staff in wartime Freiwilligenverbti~lde—Gen d Freiw Verb) (123).
but, as has been shown above, are placed under This post was created in January 1944 to replace
the Chief Supply and Administration Officer. that of the former General of Eastern Troops
(The Chief 61 Technical Troops, which are of- (Gen d Ost Tr)(12-l). It tlrals \\-ith the organi-
ficially classified as a combat arm, is nevertheless zation, equipment, training, and employment of
under the Chief Supply and Administration Of- units formed from impressed Soviet prisoners of
ficer since these troops actually have the function war. The Chief of \-oluntcer Units is subordi-
of service troops.) nate to the Chief of the Army General Staff in
The absence of a representative of the Panzer matters concerning the Field Army and to the
troops from this group of senior officers is ex- Chief of Army Equipment and Commander of
plained by the creation in 1943 of the Inspector the Replacement Army (Chef II Riist II. BdE) in
General of Panzer Troops (Gcn Insp d Pz Tr) matters affecting the Zone of the Interior. His
to supersede the previous Chief of Mobile Troops, permanent representative in the Replacement
who had been attached to the General Staff like Army is the Commander of Volunteer Units
the other chiefs of branches. The Inspector (Kdr d Freiw Verb) (125).
General of Panzer Troops is represented in the (9) Chief Army Transportation Officer (Clzcf
General Staff by his Chief Antitank Officer for dcs Transportwescns—Chef Trspw) (126). Also
All Arms (Gen d Pz Abw aller Waff en). believed to hold the post of Chief of Armed
(1) Chief Infantry Oficer (General der In- Forces Transportation (Chef Trspw d W). Part
fant erie—Gen d Inf) (110). Responsible for of the Army .General Staff, responsible for rail
regular infantry, light infantry, mountain infantry, and water transportation. He controls the Chief
cavalry, and reconnaissance matters. of Railway Troops (Gen d Eisb Tr)(127).
(2) Chief of Armored Trairls (Kommandcur (10) Ge)zeral for Special E~?aploynzent (Dis-
dcr Eisenbahn-Panzerziige—Kdr d Eish Pz Ziige) cip$ne) (General zu besondcrcr Verwendung—
(111). Gen z b V)(128). Responsible for the main-
(3) Chief Artillery Oficcr (Gcncrcl der Artil- tenance of discipline, counter-espionage, and legal
leric—Gel? d Art) (112). Controls the Chief matters in the Field Army. Controls the Branch
Coast and Fortress Artillery Officer (Gen d H for Army Matters (Hecr U’cs Abt), which is
Kiist u Fest Art)(113), the Chief Army Anti- concerned with the maintenance of discipline; the
aircraft Artillery Officer (GCU d H Flak Tr) Penal Section (Gr Str) ; and the Army Field
(114), and the Chief Armored Artillery Officer Legal Branch (H Feld Just Abt), which was
(Hijh OffzPz Art) (115). formerly the Field Legal Administration Section
(4) Chief of Mapping and Sur~,ey (Chef dcs under the Chief Supply and Administration
Kriegskartex- und Vermessungswesens—Kr Kart Officer.
Verm Chef) (116). This officer is a part of the d. MEDICAL AND VETERINARY INSPECTORS.
rear echelon of the General Staff (Gelz St d H/2. The following chief inspectors are in charge of
Stafel) and is represented at field headquarters all medical and veterinary matters throughout the
by the Commander of Mapping and Survey German Army and are directly under the Com-
Troops (Kdr d Kurt u Verm Tr) (117) ) who is mander-in-Chief:
his direct subordinate.
(1) Chief Army Medical Inspcrtor (Hrrrrs-
(5) Chief Signal Oficer (Chef dcs Heercs- Sanitiitsins~ckteur—H San Insp) (129). In-
nachrichtenwesens-—Chef HNW) (118). Part of structs the Army Surgeon (H Arzt) on medical
the General Staff in wartime, with offices at the matters in the Field Army and controls medical
rear echelon as well as at field headquarters. matters in the Replacement Army, in the same
(6) Chief Engineer and Fortifications Oficer manner as the inspectors -of branches, through the
(General der Pioniere ,und Fcstungen—Gen d Piu Medical Inspectorate (S Jn) in the General Army
Fest) (119). Controls the Inspector of Fortifica- Office. His activities are subject to the supervi-
tions (Insp Fest) (120) and shares with the Gen- sion and control of the *Armed Forces Surgeon
eral Army Office control of the Chief of Amphi- General (Chef W San). (At present the Chief
bious Engineers (Hijh Ldgs Pi Fii) (121). Army Medical Inspector is believed to hold con-
(7) Chief Chemical Warfare Officer (General currently the office of Army Surgeon.)
der Nebeltruppen—Gen d Nbl Tr) (122). (2) Chief Veterinary Inspector (Veteriniirin-
l—24
I MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451
spckteur—Vet Insp) (130). Instructs the Army pointments, transfers, and promotions as well as
Veterinary (H Vet) on veterinary matters in the for basic directives regarding the handling of
Field Army and controls veterinary matters in the officer personnel matters. Its various br’anches
Replacement Army, in the same manner as the deal with officers according to categories or
inspectors of branches, through the Veterinary branches of service. It includes :
Inspectorate (V Jn) in the General Army Office. (a’) Branch 1, C‘ci~fl-al Hranclc (1. Zcntral-
e. ARMY PERSONNEL OFFICE (Hccrcsperso- AZ&lung) ( 133). Handles basic policies and di-
nalamt—PA) (131). This office is independent of rectives, including such general matters as the
both the General Staff and the Hcftne Command transfer of large groups of officers from other
and comes under the direct control of the Com- branches of the Armed 1;orces to the Army.
mander-in-Chief of the Army. It is responsible (b) Branch 2 (2. /lhtcilulzg) (134). Infantry
for all appointments, transfers, promotions, and and cavalry officers.
other matters concerning all types of officers in (c) Brallch 3 (3. ifbtcilung) (135). Officers
the German Army. It therefore has been a power- of the Panzer troops and of the supply troops.
ful instrument in exercising control over the offi- (d) Brancl~ 4 (4. rfhtrilwg) (136). Artillery
cer corps. and chemical warfare officers.
The order for the promotion of an officer to
(e) nranclz 5 (5. Ahteilzorg) (137). Engineer
the rank of colonel or above is issued by Hitler
and signal officers.
himself on the recommendation of the Personnel
(f) Branch 6 (6. rlhtrilulzg) (138). Reserve
Office. In lower ranks it makes the promotions
officers and officers in recalled status (Ofiziere
on its own responsibility.
2. V.).
The authority to transfer various types of spe- Branch 7, which deals with specialist officers
cialist officers (medical, veterinary, ordnance, mo- (medical, veterinary, ordnance, motor mainte-
tor maintenance, and Special Troop Service) is nance), is believed to have formed the nucleus for
delegated by the Personnel Office, so far as the the new Group P 6 formed in May 1944 (see be-
lower ranks are concerned, to the technical low).
branches which deal with these services; for the (2) Group P 2 (Amtsgruppc P 2—Ag P 2)
upper ranks, the Personnel Office orders the trans- (139). Responsible for officer education and
fers on the recommendation of the technical welfare. It was expanded from a branch in Aug-
branches. ust 1942 when "ideological training" for the oficer
The Personnel Office does not concern itself corps was added to its functions. It includes:
with Armed Forces officials, who are dealt with ia) Policy Srctiorl, forwrYly Branch 1 (Chef-
exclusively by the Army Administration Office ~/YzI~@, formerly 1. Abtrilmg) (140). Education,
(VA) ; it should be noted, however, that two im- questions of honor among officers, political mat-
portant former categories of these officials are ters, special cases involving general officers and
now classified as officers in the new Special Troop high staff officers.
Service and are therefore handled by the Person- (b) Branclz 2 (2. Ahtcilung) (111). Final de-
nel Office. cisions in all individual cases involving honor,
The Personnel Office includes seven main sub- sub- and officer- behavior.
divisions designated as P 1, P 2, etc. Three of (c) Branch 3 13. .fhtrilw~~g) (142). Com-
these are now groups (Amtsgruppen) with sev- plaints, questions of 12ryan ancestry, marriage,
eral subordinate branches each, while the others welfare measures, and personal assistance for
are independent branches (Abteilungen). Group officers and their dependents.
P 6 is a recent offshoot of the basic Group P 1, (3) Branch P 3 (Ncrres-Prrsollalahteilung 3
and for this reason its-subordinate branches are —P 3)(143). Responsible for all General Staff
numbered consecutively with those of P 1. . Corps officers, including their selection and train-
While the bulk of the Personnel Office is nor- ing as well as their transfer and promotion. It took
mally stationed in wartime with the rear echelon' over full responsibility for these functions from
of the High Command, each of its branches also the Central Branch of the Army General Staff
has a forward echelon at field headquarters, where (Gen St d H/GZ) in nfarch 1943.
the major decisions in personnel matters are made. (4) Branch P 4 (Hrcrrs-Prrsonalabtrilung 4
(1) Group P 1 (Amtsgruppe P 1—Ag P 1) —P 4) (144). Responsible for officer replace-
(132). Responsible for all officers' records, ap- ments. Lays down general directives for the In-
1—25
I MARCH 1945
UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451
Spector General for Potential Officers and Non- (Lehrgiingc fiir hiihcre Adjtcfalltell—-Lehrg j
commissioned officers (G/F). hiihere Adj) (153). This section deals with the
(5) Branch P 5 (Heeres-Perso?zalabteilung 5 administration of special six to eight-week courses
—P 5) (145). Responsible for decorations and given by the Army Personnel Office for Senior
awards. Divided into several sections, each deal- Personnel Officers. These consist mainly of lec-
ing with a different type of decoration or award. tures on the functioning and policies of the Army
(6) Group P 6 (Amtsgruppe P 6-Ag P 6) Personnel Office and affiliated agencies.
(146). Responsible for personnel matters of f. CHIEF OF ARMY EQUIPMENT AND COM-
officers in the specialist careers (Sonderlaufbah- MANDER OF THE REPLACEMFNT ARMY (Chef dn
Taen) and of specialist leaders (Sonderfiihrer). It Heercsriistwlg wzd Befehlshabrr dcs Evsatsheercs
was formed in May 1944 as an offshoot of Group —Chef H Riist u BdE) (154). This officer is the
P 1 as a result of the creation of the Special wartime deputy of the Commander-in-Chief of
Troop Service (TSD), comprising the administra- the Army charged with all the functions of the
tive officers (Intendanten) and the judge advo- Zone of the Interior. These are primarily the
cates (W ehmzachtrichter), who were formerly conscription, training, aand replacement of per-
classified as Armed Forces officials and dealt with • sonnel ; the procurement, storage, and issue of
by the Army Administration Office. The num- equipment; and territoria1 administration. He
bers of the branches in this group follow those of controls all the principal offices of the High Com-
Group P 1 . It includes : mand which are left behind as the rear echelon
(a) Branch 7 (7. Abtcilung) (147). Medical, on mobilization, with the exception of the Per-
veterinary, ordnance, and motor maintenance offi- sonnel Office. These are discussed in the fol-
cers. In the lower ranks the authority to transfer lowing six lettered paragraphs.
these officers is delegated to the Chief Army Medi- g. GENERAL ARMY O W I C E (Allgenzeiltrs
cal Inspector (H San In.@), the Chief Veterinary Hre~csamt—AHA) (155). Similar in function
Inspector (Vet Imp), the Ordngnce Inspectorate to the General Armed Forces Office in the OKW
(Fz Jn), and the Chief Motor Transport Officer (AWA), this office is composed of a number of
(Gcn d Kfzu) ; in the upper ranks, transfers are important, but partly unrelated, branches in the
made on the recommendation of these agencies. OKH, grouped together for administrative pur-
(b) Bramh 8, General Bramlt (8. Allg.) poses. Its chief is believed to act as the deputy
Abteilung) (148). Handles basic policies and is- to the Chief of Army Equipment and Comman-
sues general directives regarding officers con- der of the Replacement Army. It is used by
trolled by the group. various agencies both in the Home Command and
(c) Branch 9 (9. Abteilung) (149). Probably in the Field Army and does most of the paper
handles the officers in the Special Troop Service work for the OKH. It contains:
(TSD). (1) Staff (Stab AHA) (156). The staff of
(d) Branch 10 (10. Abfeilung (Sdf.)) (lS0). the General Army Office is a central agency which
Responsible for personnel matters of specialist approves the publications written by subordinate
leaders (Sdf) (such as interpreters). They were units and issues tables of organization, tables of
formerly taken care of by Branch 7 when it was equipment, manuals, and other publications. It
still part of Group 1. includes the Army Regulations Administration
(7) Brarlch P 7 (Hem-es-Personalabteilung 7 (Hecrcs-Druckvorschriftcmwrrt~alfw~g — HDvV)
—P 7) (151). Responsible for personnel matters (1571, a section which issues all directives on
of all officers belonging to Field Army units under clothing and uniforms (Stab/BkZ) (lSS), and a
the control of Himmler, primarily Yolks Grenadier section concerned with .technical developments in
divisions (VD). This branch was formed in weapons and equipment (Soudcrstab A) (159).
October 1944. (2) Inspectorates of Ar~ns and Services.
(8) Special Section (Gruppe z b V)(152). There are approximately 15 of these inspectorates.
This section contains the officers who are charged grouped. under the General Army Office, which
with the handling out of decorations and medals are the principal agencies for handling the paper
and the performance of other ceremonial func- work for their respective arms and services. They
tions. It was formerly called Section for Repre- have no command functions themselves but keep
sentation and -Honors (Gruppe Rep/E). records and publish orders, directives, training
(9) Coztrscs fOl Senior Personnel Oficcrs manuals, and other material on behalf of the two
l—26
I MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451
types of chiefs of arms and services: the inspec- zecscn) (169). Formed in December 1943 with
tors (W’a.#cninspekfeure) in the Replacement the expansion of Inspectorate 7. May be con-
Army and the chiefs of branches (Waflcu- trolled by the Chief of Training (Chef Ausb) as
gcrzerale) attached to the General Staff in the well as the General Army Office. It includes:
Field Army. They are referred to either as in- Signal Cranch—Inspectorate 7 (N achrichten-
spectorates (Ins~ektioncrz—In) or as branches truppen-Abteilung—Jn 7) (170).
(Waffenabteilulzgen). Most of them have num- Signal Equipment Branch (Nachrichtengeriit-
bers, ranging between 2 and 13, but several have Abtcilung—N. Gcr. Abt)(171).
been upgraded to the status of a group (Amfs-
gruppe) and control two numbered branches. .1rmy Communications Branch (Heeresnaclz-
~lchtc~~vcrbi~~d~r~~~ls-.3btrilung — HNV). Similar
/n 1, the Inspectorate of Cadet Schools (Inspek-
tion der Kriegsschulcn), was in peacetime di- in function to the Armed Forces Communications
rectly subordinate to the Commander-in-Chief of Group in the OKW (Ag WNY)(172).
.the Army; its function has now been taken over (Ii) Supply Branch — Inspcctorate 8 (Ab-
by the Inspector General for Potential Offcrrs teilung Nachschubtruppcn—Ju 8). (173). At-
and Noncommissioned officers (GJF). The tachcd to this branch is the Senior Officer of Ad-
present inspectorates of arms and services are as ministrative Troops (Hoh Off d Vera TY)
follows: (174), responsible for the uniform training of
(a) Infantry Branch — Inspectorate 2 (In- the administrative troops in the Replacement
fanterieabtcilulzg—Jn 2) (160). Attached to the Army under the directives of the Chief of Train-
Infantry Branch is the Senior Infantry Officer ing.
for Land Fortifications (Hijh Inf Offz fiir die (i) Chemical Warfare and Air Raid Protectiojl
Landesbcf ) (161), who is directly subordinate to Branch—Iusficctorate 9 (Abteiluug Nebeltruppe,
the Chief of the General Army Office. He assists Gasabwehr uud Luffschutz-—Jn 9) (175).
the Chief Engineer and Fortifications Officer (j) Rail-way Errginecs Branch—Impectorate
(Inspector of Fortifications) (Insp Fesf) at the 10 (Eisenbahllpionier- rlbteilung—Jn 10) (176).
Army General Staff in fortification matters con- (k) Branch for Tcchuical Troops-—inspec-
cerning the infantry. He is also responsible for torate 11 (Abtcilung Tcchnische Truppen—Jn
the uniform training of officers charged with the
defense of fortifications. (1) Group of the Chief Motor Transport
(b) Riding-and Driving Branch—Insprctorafc Oficcr (General dcs k’raftfnlr)‘~lcseI2s-—Gen d
3 (Abteilurig Reit- und Fahrwesen—Jn 3) (162). Kfw) (178). Formerly called Chief of Motoriza-
Concerned with the training of men who handle tion (G&n d Mot)(179). The Chief Motor
horses as riders or drivers. Transport Officer, in addition to being responsible
(c) Artillery Group (Anztsgruppe Artilleric— - for all motor transport in the field, also controls
Ag Art)(163). Formed in July 1944 to control the following agencies in the General Army Office :
the following two inspectorates : Motor Transport Branch—Inspectorate 12
Artillery Branch—Inspectorate 4 (Artillerieab- (ilbtcilung Kruftfahrwrseri—Ju 12) (180).
t&lung—Jn 4) (164). Chief of Motor Repair (Chef des Instandset-
Army Antiaircraft Artillery Branch-—Inspec- zungsivcscn—cl~c~f Inst) (181).
torate 13 (Hceres-Flakartillcricabtetiluug—Ju 13) Senior Motor Maintenance Troop Officer (Hii-
I165). Jicrcr Offizicr der Kraftfahrparktruppc—Hoh Offz
((1) Engineer Branch — Inspectorate 5 (Pio- d Kf Pk Tr)(1%). He supervises the training
uierabteilung—Jn 5) (166). of motor maintenance troops in the Replacement
(e) Inspectorate of Fortifications (Inspektion Army and his position is equivalent to that of an
der Festungen—Jn Fest) (167). Concerned with inspector.
the training of fortress engineers. (111) dfcdical Inspectnratc (Heeres-Sanitiitsin-
(f) Panzer Troop Branch — Inspectorate 6 spektion—S Jn)(183). This inspectorate also
(Abteilung Panzertruppe—Jn 6) (168). Be- contains the staff of the Chief Army Medical In-
lieved transferred to the control of the Inspector spector (HSan lnsp) and is equivalent to a group.
General of Panzer Troops (Gen Insp d Pz Tr) It includes:
when that office was created in 1943. Personnel Branch (Personalabteilung—S Jn/
(g) Signal Group (Arntsgruppe Nachrz’chtcn- Pevs)(184).
l—27
I MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451
(230). This group is responsible for the pro- sible for seeing that all ordnance materiel is
curement of all ordnance materiel except am- manufactured according to specifications and for
munition. Its main function is the placing of accepting it on behalf of the i\rmy. It controls
orders with industry. Here too the numbers of the Acceptance Inspectors (Abnah~~zeinspizien-
the branches mostly correspond to those of in- ten) (245) located in each Wehrkreis. It is
spectorates of the same branch of service in the composed of a Central Branch and Branches 1
General Army Office. It includes: and 2.
(a) Branch for General Army Equipment (6) Chief Ordnance Engineer Group (Amts-
(Allgevneines Heeresgeriit—Wa J Rii—W u G gruppe Chefingenieur—Wa Chef Zng) (246).
1) (231). Handles all types of equipment, in- This group contains various technical branches
eluding medical and veterinary. which design and supervise the manufacture of
(b) Weapons Branch (Waffenabteilung—Wa certain ordnance parts. It includes :
J Rii—W u G 2) (232). Divided into sections (a) The Chief Designer's Branch (Chefkon-
responsible for weapons of the various arms. strukteur—Wa Chef Ing I) (247) contains a sec-
(c) Engineer, Railway Engineer, and Fortress tion which maintains liaison with the Reich Pat-
Equipment Branch (Pionier-, Eisenbahnpionier-, ent Office (Reichspatentamt).
und F estungs-Geriiteabteilung-W a J Ru—W
(b) Pig Iron Branch (Halbzeugstelle—Wa
uG 5) (233).
Chef Ing ~ /HZ) (248).
(d) Tanks and Tractors Branch (Panzer-
(c) The Manufacture Branch (Fabrikations-
kawpfwagen- und Zugkraftwagen-Abteilung—
abteilung—Wa Chef Ing 4) (249) contains
Wa J Rii—W uG6) (234)
various sections for studying methods of manu-
(e) Signal Equipment Branch (Nachrichten- facture of weapons, vehicles, and other equip-
geriitabteilung—Wa J R&-—W u G 7) (235). ment.
(f) Optical and Precision Instruments Branch (d) The Machine Recording Branch (Ma-
(Abteilung fiir optisches und feinmechanisches schinelles Berichtwesen—Wa Chef Ing 5 M B)
Gerat—Wa J Rii—W uG 8/20) (236). Com- (250) is responsible for punch-card machines
posed of various sections responsible for general and other mechanical office aids.
optical instruments for all three services, special (e) Section for the Manufacture of Machine
army optical instruments, precision antiaircraft Tools, Gauges, and Tools (Fabrikationsgruppc
artillery parts, artillery fire control parts, and the Werkzeugrnaschinen, Lehren und Werkzeuge—
like. Wa Chef Ing 6) (251).
(g) Motor Vehicle Equipment Branch (Kraft- (f) Section for the Manufacture of Ammuni-
wagengeriitabteilung—Wa J Rii—W u G 12) tion (Fabrikationsgruppe Munition—Wa Chef
(237). Ing 7) (252).
(4) Group for Ammunition Manufacture (7) Group for Antiaircraft Artillery Develop-
(Amtsgruppe fiir Industrielle Riistung (Muni- ment (Anztsgruppe fiir Flakentwicklurrg—GL/
tion)—Wa J Rii Mun) (238). This group is Flak-E) (253). Includes:
responsible for all ordnance equipment. It in-
(a) Branch for Ballistics and Development of
eludes :
Antiaircraft Ammunition (Ahfcilrcng fiir Ballis-
(a) Ammunition Branch 1 (Munitionsabtci- tik und Entwicklung der Flaknzunition—GL/
lung I—Wa J Rii MUM 1) (239). Flak-E /l) (254).
(b) Ammunition Branch 2 (Munitionsabtri- (b) Branch for the Development of Antiair-
lung 2—Wa J Rii Mun 2) (240). craft Equipment (Abteilung fiir Geriitentwick-
(c) Ammunition Branch 3 (Munitionsabtei- lung—GL/Flak-E/2) (255).
lung 3—Wa J Rii Mun 3 uzbV) (241). Prob- (c) Branch for Technical and General Matters
ably manufactures special types of munitions. (Abteilung fiir technische und allgemeine An-
(d) Ammunition Branch 4’ (Munitionsabtei- gelegenheifen—GL/FIk-E/3) (256).
lung 4—Wa J Rii Mun 4) (242). (d) Branch for Weapons Development (Ab-
(e) Ammunition Branch 5 (Munitionsabtei- teilung fiir Waffenentwicklung—GL/Flak-E/4)
Zung 5—Wa J Rii Mun 5) (243). (257).
(5) Acceptance Group (Amstgruppe fiir Ab- (e) Antiaircraft Armament Branch (Abteilung
nahme—Wa Abn) (244). This group is respon- Flakriistung—GL/Flak-Rii) (258).
1—30
I MARCH 1945 TM-E 30-451
(8) Ordnance Research Branch (Forschungs- Equipment and Commander of the Replacement
abtcilung—Wa F). Army (Zahlmeistereie~t des Ch H Riist u. B d E)
j . ARMY ADMINISTRATION OFFICE (Heeresver- (268) have four accounting offices carrying the
waltungsamt—VA) (259). This office is respon- Roman numerals I to IV.
sible for what is defined by the Germans as Army (2) Group for Real Estate, Agriculture, and
Administration (HeeresvemmJtung). Its respon- Forests (Allrtsgruppc Liegmschaftm, Land- und
sibilities include mainly the procurement of ra- Forstwirtschaft—Ag V 11) (269). Includes:
tions, billets, pay, and clothing for the Army. (a) Branch for Real Estate of Garrisons and
Until May 1944 the personnel connected with Procurement of Quarters (Abteilulzg fiir Liegen-
Army Administration normally were Armed scllaftm dcr Stundorte und W ohnungsfiirsorge—
Forces officials (Wehrmachtbeanzte), divided into V 2)(270).
a large number of technical and non-technical (1)) Branch ior the Administration of Maneu-
"careers" (Laufbahnen). At that time those in ver Areas (Abteilzrng fiir Verwaltung von Ubungs-
the important careers of the Administrative Serv- /&itzen—V 6) (271).
ice (Verwaltungsdienst) and of the Judge Ad- (c) Army Forestry Branch (Heeresforstabtei-
vocates (W ehrvnachtrichter) were made into a lung—V 10) (272).
new category of officers in the Special Troop
(3) Rations and Procurement Group (Amts-
Service ( Truppensonderdienst—TSD) ( 260).
gruppe Heeresverpjlegungs- und -Beschaffungs-
Their activities still are controlled by the Army
wesen—Ag V 11Z) (273). Responsible for the
Administration Office, but their promotions and
procurement and administration of rations. In-
transfers are now the responsibility of the Army
cludes :
Personpel Office (PA).
(a) Army Rations Branch (Hceresverpfle-
The Administration Office includes: glcngsabtcilfrllg—V 3) (274).
(1) Group for 0ficial.s and Civilian bt’ol-kers
(Anztsgruppe Allgemeine Heeresbeamtelz-, An- (b) Army Procurements Branch (Heeresbe-
gestcllten-, Arbcitrr- und Kassenangelegep&eiten schaffungsabteilung—V 5) (275).
—-Ag V1) (261). Responsible for personnel ad- (c) Rations Inspector in the OKH (Verpjle-
ministration and pay for Armed Forces officials, pngsinspekteur im OKH—Verpfl Imp OKH)
salaried workers (Angestellte), and wage earners (276) is responsible for over-all planning of
(Arbeiter). Consists of: rations supplies in the whole Theater of War.
(a) Branch for Army Officials (Heeresbeam- (4) Construction Group (Anztsgruppe Bau—
tcnabteilung—V 1) (262). Ag V II’) (277). Responsible for all army con-
struction. Includes:
(b) Branch for Civilian Workers (Abteilung
fiir Gefolgschaftsangelegenheiten des Heeres— (a) Branch for Administration of Army Con-
V 8) (263). struction (Heeresbauvrr-waltungsabteilung—V 4)
(c) Branch for Army Accounts and Pay of (278).
Officials (Heereskassen- md Beamtenhesoldungs- (1)) Branch for Army Construction Activities
abteilung—V 9) (264). (Hrercsbnuairtschaftsabteilung—V 7) (279).
(cl) Cashier of the OKH (Anztskasse des (5) Budget Group (Agl~stgruppe Hazrshalts-
Oberkomnzandos des Heeres—AK (OKH)) und Bcsoldungswrscn—Ag Haushalt) (280).
(265) is responsible for paying personnel of the This group was formed in February 1944 by an
OKH. amalgamation of four independent branches con-
(e) Pay and Allowance Department of the nected with budget and finance matters. u p to
OKH (Gebiihrnisstelle des Oberkommandos des August 1944 it was immediately under the Chief
Heeres—G St OKH) (266) handles pay and of Army Equipment and Commander of the Re-
allowances of military personnel and Armed placement Army; it was placed under the control
Forces officials in the OKH. of the Chief of the Army Administration Office.
(f) Wage and Salary Office (Lohnstelle des It includes:
Obcrkonmandos des Heeres—Lohnst OKH) (a) Army Budget Branch (Heeres-Haushalts-
(267) has sections concerned with salaried abteilulzg—H Haush) (281).
employees, wage earners, and various types of (b) Central Branch in the OKH (Zentral-
pay deductions. abteilzmg inz OKH (Chef H Riist u. RdE)—Z)
(g) Accounting Offices of the Chief of Army (282).
I—3I
I ~M‘ARCH 1945
UNCLASSIFIED TM-B 30-451
(c) Army Pay Branch (Heeresbcsoldungs- (1) SigHal Comnunicatio~zs Branch of the
abteilung—H Bes Abf) (283). Chief of Army Equipment and and of
(d) Army Finance BrTnch (H ecyes-Finanzie- the Replacement Army (N achrichten-Betriebs-
rungsabteilung) ( 284 ). Abteilamg des Ch H Riist u. BdE) (291). Con-
k. INSPECTOR GENERAL FOR POTENTIAL OFFI- tains a telephone operating company, a telegraph
CERS AND NONCOMMISSIONED OFFICERS (General- compariy, a signal exploitation company, and a
inspekteur fiir den F iihrernachwuchs des Heeres radio transmission center.
—43q (285). Formerly the Inspector of Army (2) Amay Raw Materials Branch (Heeres-
(Training and Education (Zpz EB) (286) ; re- Rolzsto~abteilung—H Ro) (292). Charged with
named and broadened in scope .amd authority the procurement of raw materials for the OKH.
in March 1944. Subordinate to the Chief of Formerly a s&ordinate unit of the Army Ord-
Army Equipment and Commander of the Re- nance Office (Rohsfoflstelle OKH—Wa Chef Ing
placement Army ‘(Chef H Riist u BdE). He 2/:5Va Ro) (293), it was made an independent
is responsible for the uniform recruiting, Na- branch in 1942.
tion&Socialist instruction and guidance, and uni- (3) Arlrzy Map Service (Hrcresplankalrllller-—
form training of all potential o’fficers and non- HPK) (294). Contains a foreign maps branch,
commissioned officers (Fiihrernachzfachs). He and a map production branch.
is in charge of all officer candidate and noncom- (4) Army Technical Bureau (Heerestcch-
missioned officer schools and determines the nisches Biiro (HTB) (295). Believed to be a
subject-matter and methods of instruction, par- staff of engineers at the disposal of the OKH.
ticularly the political aspects. He controls: (5) Women's Aat,*iliary Corps (Nachrichten-
(1) Bymach for the .Procureme& of Leaders lzelferin~le~a-Ei~~sat~abteilztng—NH-E~nsat~abtei -
(Abteilung Hecresnackwurhs—Abt. HN) (287). lung) (296). The women's auxiliary corps is be-
This branch was independent up to 1944 but be- lieved to be subordinate to the Chief of Army
came subordinate to the Inspector General for Equipment and Commander of the Replacement
Potential OfficeSs and Noncommissioned Officers Army. It is formed into special battalions (Ein-
when he was appointed. This branch represents satsabteilungen) and used throughout the Field
the Army in dealing with other services and agen- and Replacement Armies for signal communi-
cies in all questions concerning the procurement cations and o,fice work at higher headquarters.
of leaders. m. NATIONAL-SOCIALIST GUIDANCE STAFF OF
(2) Cadet School Branch (Abteilung Kriegs- THE ARMY (~ationalsozialistischer Fiihrungsstab
schulen—KS) (288). Previously called Inspec- des He&es—NSF St d H) (297). Established
torate 1 (In 1) and directly under the Chief of in March 1944 to control the uniform National-
Army Equipment and Commander of the Re- Socialist indoctrination and guidance in the Army.
placement Army. Administers all officer candi- Directly subordinate to Hitler but attached to the
date schools. Army High Comtnalld. Issues directives to the
(3) Nonconkssioned Oficer School Brad National-Socialist Guidance Officers (NSFO) in
(Abteilung Untero@ier-V orschulcn u, -S~hulcn the field.
—US) (289). n. THE FUHRER'S OFFICIAL MILITARY HIS-
(4) Inspector of Army Oficer Procurenrenf TORIAN (Der Beawftrugtc dcs Fiihrers fiir die
Ofies (Inspcktcuy dey Annal~mrsfrllen fiiv Ojji- milit&rische Geschichtsschrcibung—D Beauftr d
zieFbewerbcr des Heeres—Insp d Axnst) (2%). Fiihrcrs fiir die mil Geschiclrtsschr) (298). Ap-
Set up in 1943 as an independent agency in the pointed in 1942 to take charge of the writing of
Army Personnel Office; transferred to the control military history of World War II. Directly
of the Inspector General for Potential Of?icer and subordinate to Hitler but attached to the Army
noncommissioned officers in 1944. Controls the High Command. Upon his appointment, the
officer candidate acceptance centers located in each agencies connected with military history in the
Wehrkreis. Army were transferred from the jurisdiction of
1. MBCELLANEOUS AGENCIES The following the Fifth Senior General Staff Officer (O Qu V)
are independent agencies, all immediately subor- to his control but remained subordinate to the
dinate to the Chief of Army Equipment and Com- OKH. In addition, historical branches were set
mander of the Replacement 'Army (Chef H Riist up at both the OKW and the OKH to record the
u. BdE) : war for the Armed Forces and for the Army
l—32
i MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451
respectively. This obviated the need for the cessor to the Chief of Mobile Troops (General
Military Science Branch still under the O Qu V, der Schnellen Truppenj (305) who had been at-
and it is believed that its existence is only nomi- tached to the Army General Staff. Directly sub-
nal. The Fiihrer's Official Military Historian ordinate to Hitler but attached to the Army High
controls within the OKH: Command. Controls the whole Panzer arm; re-
(1) Army Historical Branch (Kriegsgeschicht- sponsible for its organization, training, and re-
liche Abteilung des Heeres—Kr Gesch Heer) placement system. His prerogative extend to the
(299). Established in 1942. Probably took Air Force and Waffen-SS Panzer units. He
over all the functions of the Military Science controls:
Branch (Kr I Abt.) in the Army General (1) Chief Antitank Oficer for All Arms
Staff. It includes the editorial staff of the maga- (General der Panzerabwchr aller Waflen) (306).
zine "Military Science Review" (Milita'rwissen- Appointed in November 1944 to coordinate anti-
schaftliche Rundschau). tank tactics throughout the Armed Forces. He
(2) Military History Research Institute also acts as liaison officer for the Pa.naer troops
(Kriegswissenschaftliche Forschungs-Anstalt) at the .Army General Staff replacing the former
(300). Originally under the control of the Army Panzer Officer at the Army General Staff (Pa
General Staff but believed to have been trans- O&b GmStdH) (307).
ferred to the control of the Fiihrer's Official Mili- (2) Inspector of Parlser Troops (Inspekteur
tary Historian, sometime after 1942. der Panzertruppen—Insp d Pz Tr) (308). Has
a function similar to that of the other inspectors
(3) Chief of Army Archives (Chef der Heeres-
in the OKH except that he is not controlled by the
archive—Chef H Arch) (301). Transferred
Chief of Training in the Replacement Army
from the Army General Staff in 1942. Army
(Chef Ausb). He controls the Panzer Troop
archives have been kept in Potsdam, with a
Branch, Inspectorate 6 (Jn 6) (309), although
branch office at Liegnitz.
the latter may still be administratively under the
(4) Chief of Army Libraries (Chef ,der General Army Office.
Heeresbiichereien—Chef H Bitch) (302). This (3) Field Army Branch (Abteilung Feldheer)
position was created in 1942, first under the con- (310). This branch maintains liaison between the
trol of the Army General Staff and then trans- Inspector General of Panzer Troops and the
ferred to Fiihrer's Official Military Historian. Field Army. It is responsible for the proper
Responsible for the administration of all military evaluation and use of all combat experience and
literature. makes suggestions on the organization, training,
(5) Captured Documents Exploitation Center and development of the Panzer arm.
{Wehrmacht-Sichtungsstelle—We Sist) (303). (4) Training Branch (Ausbildungs-Abteilung
Exploits captured documents (Beuteakten) for —Ausb Abt (311). Formed in 1944, this
the whole of the Armed Forces. branch took over the administration of the train-
o. INSPECTOR GENERAL OF Panzer TROOPS ing of Panzer troops from Inspectorate 6. It
(Generalinspekteur der Panzcrtruppen—Gen Insp issues a regular monthly periodical dealing with
d Pz Tr) (304). Appointed in 1943 as a suc- the experience of Panzer troops in the field.
1—33
I MARCH 1945
UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-45I
4. ,Glossary and Index of German Terms and (Branch for Billets and Xlaneuvcr Areas) 193
Abt Untcroffizier-Vorsclmlen unt! -Schulcn—(NC0
Abbreviations
Schools Branch) 289
This glossary consists of German designations Abt Wehrmachtnachrichtenverbindungen Funkwesen
for all the principal agencies of the Armed Forces (Armed Forces Radio Communications Branch)
35
and Army High Commands, together with their
Abt Wehrmachtverlustwcsen—(~\rmet! Forces Casu-
usual abbreviations and approximate translations. alty Branch) 51
The glossary is designed to assist the reader in Abt Wissenschaft—(Military Science Branch) 54
finding an explanation of the function of each Abwicklungsstab (Unit Inactivation Staff) 196
agency. The numbers following the terms serve Adjutantur (Personnel Section) 99
as a cross-reference to paragraph 3, where the Ag—Amtsgruppe (Group) 7
explanations are numbered serially. Ag Art—Amtsgruppe Artillerie (Artillery Group)
13
Abnahmeinspizient (Acceptance Inspector) 245 Ag Ausl—Amtsgruppe Auslant! (Foreign Group) 32
Abt—Abteilung (Branch) 8 Ag Chefingenieur (Chief Ordnance Engineer Group)
1. Abt 77 246
1. (Zentra!) Abt 133 Ag E Tr—Ersatzwesen und Allgemeine Truppen-
2. Abt 86, 134, 141 Angelegenheiten (Group for Replacement ant!
3. Abt 89, 135, 142 Genera! Troop Matters) 190
4. Abt 83, 136 Ag fur Abnahmc (Acceptanrc Group) 244
5. Abt 78, 137 Ag fur Industrielle Riistung—Waffen und G&it
6. Abt 79, 138 (Group for Weapons and Equipment Manufac-
7. Abt 93, 147 ture) 230, 138
8. Abt 87 Ag GL/F!ak-E—Amtsgruppe fur Flakentwicklung
8. (Allg) Abt 14s (Group for Antiaircraft Artillery I)cve!opment)
9. Abt 80, 149 253
10. Abt 81, 150 Ag Haushalt—Amt.sgruppe Haushalts- und Besol-
11. Abt 84 dungswesen (Budget Group) 280
Abt Allgemeines Kriegsgefangenenwesen (Genera! Ag HR—Heeresrechtswesen (Army- Judge Advo-
Branch for Prisoner of War Matters) 45 rate General's Group) 194
Abt Demobil—Abteilung Demobilmachung (Demo- Ag J—Ag Jnland (Interior Group) 66
bilization Branch) 197 Ag Nachrichtenwcsen (Signal Group) 169
Abt E—Abteilung Ersatzwesen (Replacement >4g P 1 (Group P 1, Officers' Records, Transfers
Branch) 64 and Promotions) 132
Abteilung—See Abt Ag P 2 (Group P 2, Olficers' Education and Wel-
Abt Ersatzwesen (Replacement Branch) ‘64 fare) 139
Abt Feldheer (Field Army Branch) 310 I’ig P O—-Amtsgruppe P 6 (Group P 6, Specialist
Abt fiir A!!geme:ne Truppenangelegenheiten Officers) l-l6
(Branch for Genera! Troop Matters) 191 Ag V I—Allgemeine Heeresbeamten- Angestellten-,
Abt fur Wehrmachtfachschulunterricht (Armed Arbeiter- und Kassenangelegenheiten (Group for.
Forces Educational Branch) 50 Officials and Civilian Workers) 261
Abt fur Wehrmachtpropaganda (Armed Forces Ag V II—Amtsgruppe Liegenschaften, Land- unt!
Propaganda Branch) 39 Forstwirtschaft (Group for Real Estate, Agricul-
Abt HN—Abteilung Heeresnachwuchs (Branch for ture, and Forests) 269
the Procurement of Leaders) 787 Ag V III—Amtsgruppe Hecresverpflegungs- und
Abt Krafttahrwesen—Jn 12 (Motor Transport Beschaffungswesen (Rations and Procurement
Branch—Inspector-ate 12) 180 Group) 273
Abt Kriegsschulen (Cadet School Branch) 288 Ag V IV—Amtsgruppe Bau (Construction Group)
Abt Lehrfi!m (Training Film Branch) 210 277
Abt Nachschubtruppen—Jn 8 (Supply Troops Branch Ag WNV-—Amtsgruppe We!trmac!ttnachric!iten-Ver-
Inspectorate 8) 173 bindungen (Armed Forces Communications
Abt Nebeltruppe, Gasabwehr, und Luftschutz—Jn 9 Group) 34
(Chemical Warfare and Air Raid Protection Ag WNV/Fu—Amtsgruppe Wehrmachtnachrichten-
Branch—Inspectorate 9) 175 Verbindungen, Abteilung Funkwesen (Armed
Abt Organisation des Kriegsgefangenenwesens (Or- Forces Radio Communications Branch) 35
ganization Branch for Prisoners of War) 46 Ag WNV/KF—Amtsgruppe Wehrmachtnachrich-
Abt Reichsvers—Reichsversorgungsabteilung (Civ- ten - Verbindungen, Kriegsfernmelde - Abteilung
ilian Pensions Branch) 49 (Armed Forces Wire Communications Branch)
Abt Reit- und Fahrwesen—Jn 3 -(Riding and Driv- 36
ing Branch—Inspectorate 3) 162 Ag WV—A m t s g r u p p e Wehrmachtverwaltung
Abt Technische Truppen—Jn 11 (Branch for Tech- (Armed Forces Administration Group) 43
nical Troops—Inspectorate 11) 177 AHA—Allgemeines Hceresamt (Genera! Army
Abt U—LJnterkunft and Truppcniihungs!)litze Office) 155
l—34
1 MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30.451
General der Nachschubtruppen (Chief of SuppI> (Branch for the Development of A A Weapons)
Troops) 106 257
General der Nebeltruppen (Chief Chemical War- GL/Flak-Rii—Abteilung Flakriistung (Antiaircraft
fare Officer) 122 Armament Branch) 258
General der Osttruppen (changed to Gen d Freiw G St OKH—Gebiihrnisstelle des OKH (Pay and
Verb) 124 Allowance Department of the OKH) 266
General der Pioniere und Festungen (Chief En- Gr—See Gruppe
gineer and Fortifications Officer) 120 Gr S—Gruppe Seelsorge (Chaplains' Section) 192
General der Panzerabwehr aller Waff cn (Chief Gruppe (Section) 9
Antitank Officer for -411 Arms) 306 Gruppe IIa—Adjutantur (Personnel Section) 99
General ‘der Schnellen Truppen (changed to Gen Gruppe III—Feldjustizverwaltung (Field Legal Ad-
Insp d Pz Tr) 10 ministration Section) 100
General des Kraftfahrwesens (Chief Motor Trans- Gruppe IVa—Heeres-Intendant (Chief Army Ad-
port Officer) 104 ministration Officer) 101
General des Kraftfahrwesens/AHA (Group of the Gruppe IVb—Heeresarzt (Army Surgeon) 102
Chief Motor Transport Officer in the General Gruppe IVc—Heeresveterinir (Army Veterinarian)
Army Office) 178 103
General zu besonderer Verwendung (General for Gruppe V—General des Kraftfahrwesens (Chief
Special Employment (Discipline)) 128 Motor Transport Officer) 101
Generalinspekteur der Panzertrtippen (Inspector Gruppe Z—Zivilbeauftragtcr (Civil Commissioner)
General of Panzer Troops) 304 105
Generalinspekteur des Kraftfahrwesens (Inspector Gruppe FP—Heeresfeldpostmeister (Army Post-
General of Motor Transport) 70 master) 107
Generalinspekteur fiir das Kriegsgefangenwesen der Gruppe z b V—Gruppe zur besonderen Verwendung
Wehrmacht (Inspector General for Prisoner of (Party Liaison) 69
War Affairs) 27 Gruppe z b V—Gruppe zur besonderen Verwendung
Generalinspekteur fiir den Fiihrernachwuchs des (Ceremonial occasions) 152
Heeres (Inspector General for Potential Officers G St OKH—Gcbiihrnisstelle des OKH (Pay and
and NCOs) 285 Allowance Department of the OKH) 266
Generalquarticrmeister (Chief Supply and Admin- GZ—Zentralabteilung (Central Branch of Army
istration Officer) 74, 94 General Staff) 75.
Generalstab des Heeres (Army General Staff) 71 H Arzt—Heeresarzt (Army Surgeon) 102
General z b V IV (General for Special Employ- H Hes Abt—Heeresbesoldungsabteilung (Army Pay
ment IV—now Chef W Str D) 23 Branch) 283
Gen Insp d Pz Tr—Generalinspekteur der Panzer- Heeresbesoldungsabteilung (Army Pay Branch) 283
truppen (Inspector General of Panzer Troops) Heeresdruckvorschriftenverwaltung (Army Regula-
304 tions administration) 157
Gen Insp Kfw—Generalinspekteur fiir das Kraft- Heeresfeldzeugmeister (Chief Army Ordnance Offi-
fahrwesen (Inspector General of Motor Trans- cer) 189
port) 70 Heeres- Finanzierungstabteilung (Army Finance
Gen Insp Kriegsgef—Generalinspekteur fiir das Branch) 284
Kriegsgefangenenwesen der Wehrmacht (Inspec- Heeres-Flakartillerieabteilung—Jn 13 (Army Anti-
tor General for Prisoner of War Affairs) 27 aircraft Artillery Branch, Inspectorate 13) 165
Gen Qu—Generalquartiermeister (Chief Supply and Heeres-Haushaltsabteilung (Army Budget Branch)
Administration Officer) 74, 94 281
Gen St d H—Generalstab des Heeres (Army Gen- Heeres-Intendant (Chief Army Administrative
eral Staff) 71 Officer) 101
GJF—Generalinspekteur fiir den Ftihrernachwuchs Heeres - Nachrichtenverbindungs - Abteilung (Army
des Heeres (Inspector General for Potential Communication Branch) 172
Officers and NCOs) 285 Heeres-Personalabteilung 3—P 3 (Branch P 3 Gen-
GL/Flak-E—Amtsgruppk fiir Flakentwicklung eral Staff Officers) 143
(Group for Antiaircraft Artillery Development) Heeres-l’ersonalabteilung 4—P 4 (Branch P 4,
253 Oflicer Replacements) 144
GL/Flak-E/l—Abteilung fiir Ballistik und Entwick- Heerrs-Personalabteilung 5—P 5 (Branch P 5,
lung der Flakmunition (Branch for Balli.stics and (Branch P 5. Decorations and Medals) 143
Development of Antiaircraft Equipment) 254 Heeres-Persona!abteilung 7—P 7 (Branch P 7,
GL/Flak-E/2—Abteilung fiir Geritentwicklung Officers in VoIksgrenadier Units) 151
(Branch for the Development of Antiaircraft Heerespersonalamt (Army Personnel Office) 131
Equipment) 255 Heeresplankammer (Army Map Service) 294
GL/Flak-E/3—-Abteilung fiir technische und allge- Heeres-Rohstoffabteilung (Army Raw Materials
meine Angelegenheiten (Branch for Technical and Branch) 2’12
General Matters) Heeres-Sanitiitsinspekteur (Chief Army Medical
GL/Flak-E/4—Abteilung fiir Waffenentwicklung Inspector) 129
l—36
I MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451
1—37
I MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451
l—38,
I MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451
I-40
I MARCH 1945 TM-E 307451
I-—42
I MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451
the Commander-in-Chief to be known as the tion of men; all types of military training, in-
Chief of Army Equipment and Commander of the cluding the selection and schooling of officers and
Replacement Army (Chef der Heeresriistung und noncommissioned officers; the dispatch of per-
Befehlshaber des Ersatzheeres), responsible for sonnel replacements to field units in response to
maintaining the Field Army by the dispatch of their requisitions; and the organization of new
replacements, the formation of new units, and units.
the supply of materiel, as well as continuing the 1). EQUIPMENT. Design, procurement, accept-
normal military functions at home. ance, and storage of equipment of all kinds, and
At the same time each of the active corps its dispatch to the Field Army, involve: assess-
took the field under its commanding general, and ment of the future needs of the field; planning
the corps areas were placed under deputy com- of production; obtaining the necessary raw ma-
mands to control the Replacement Army, the terials and labor; development and testing of new
permanent installations, and the conscription and weapons; fiscal matters; maintenance of suitable
training system. The new commander in each storage and transport facilities, and of head-
corps area was to be’ known by the dual title of quarters to control them; and organization of
Deputy Commanding General and Commander the channels for supply requisitions and deliveries.
of the Corps Area (Stelluertretender Komman- c. ADMINISTRATION. Administration of the
dierender General und Befehlshaber im Wehr- permanent military installations in the Zone of
kreis). In his capacity as -Deputy Commanding the Interior and emergency defense of the home
General he was to be responsible for all matters territory also are responsibilities of the Home
having to do with troop units of the Army, par- Command. The latter function (which would be-
ticularly the operation of the replacement sys- come operative, for example, in case of a sur-
tem ; as Commander of the Corps Area he was prise airborne invasion of the heart of Germany)
to exercise all territorial functions, such as con- would be exercised by the Home Command only
scription, control of permanent installations, and until an adequate Field Army force could be
local defense, on behalf of the entire Armed assembled to take charge of the operations.
Forces. r c e s . functions of the Home Command
The corps of the new Field Army were or- are discussed in detail in Sections V and VI, of
ganized into armies (Armeen)—an administrative this chapter and in Chapter VI below.
and tactical echelon which had not existed in
peacetime. These, in turn, were placed under 5. Organization of the Theater of War
the tactical control of army groups (Heeres- On the outbreak of war, all the parts of Europe
gruppen), which were directly responsible to and its adjacent waters which might be the scene
field headquarters for the conduct of operations. of operations became, from the German point
At- the lower levels, each unit which took of view, the Theater of War (Kriegsgebiet).
the field in 1939 left behind at its home station Within this area the Germans distinguish between
a rear echelon which was known as its replace- the Theater of Operations (Operationsgebiet) and
ment training unit (Ersatzeinheit). An infantry the Zone of the Interior (Heimatkriegsgebiet).
regiment, for example, left behind an infantry Since, in the German concept, wars should be
replacement training battalion, bearing the same conducted as far as possible beyond their own
number, which was thenceforth to induct and frontiers, the military nomenclature also provides
train recruits, dispatch them to the field regi- for an intermediate area known as the Zone of
ment as needed, and receive personnel back from Military Administration (Gebeit der Kreigsver-
the field unit if they were to be discharged or waltung) or Occupied Territory (Besetztes
when they came out of general hospitals. Gebiet); in fact, much of Europe was in this
category during the years when the German
4. Functions of the Home Command armies were fighting in the distant steppes of
The functions of the wartime command for the Russia and in Africa.
Zone of the Interior may be described as three- The Theater of Operations itself is divided
fold: into the Combat Zone (Gefechtsgebiet) and the
a. PERSONNEL. Conscription, training and re- Communications Zone (Riickwtirtiges Gebiet).
placement of personnel include control of mobili- The latter may be entirely taken up by the Army
zation policies and the actual call-up and induc- Rear Areas (Riickzetirtige Armeegebiete) or,
1-43
™E3<M51
I MARCH 1945
UNCLASSIFIED
if the line of communications is long, its rearward tion; he may not conscript German males found
part may be the Army Group Rear Area (Riick- in the area or ?nake requisitions of horses or
wtirtiges Heeresgebiet). motor vehicles, for example, since this would
Each of the above subdivisions of the Theater upset the long-range and nation-wide programs
of War is subject to a different type of admin- of the Home Command for the utilization of per-
istration by the military, mixed military and civil, sonnel and equipment. Only under absolute mili-
or only the civil authorities. The arrangement is tary necessity may a field commander assume
shown schematically in Figure 7. control of units or installations of the Replace-
The Zone of the Interior was extended in ment Army, and he must then immediately notify
1941 and 1942 to include Denmark, Alsace, Lor- the Commander of the Replacement Army. The
raine, Luxemburg, and those parts of Poland latter, on the other hand, must consult the field
incorporated in the so-called Government Gen- commander on any matter of fundamental im-
eral; it already included Bohemia and Moravia. portance affecting the area of joint interest. This
By contrast, much of Germany itself was within arrangement well illustrates the careful distinc-
the Theater of Operations and even within the tion which the Germans make between the func-
Combat Zone by the end of 1944. tions and authority of the Field Army and those
The Zone of the Interior is in general the of the Home Command.
area under the command of the Chief of Army Within the Communications Zone, the Army
Equipment and Commander of the Replacement Group Rear Area (when it exists) is placed
Army. Special regulations provide for the divi- under the authority of a Commander of Army
sion of authority whenever units or installa- Group Rear Area (Befehlshabcr des riickwiirtigen
tions of the Replacement Army are stationed with- Heeresgebiets), who has h a s of a corps
in the Theater of Operations, as has happened commander and is responsible to t o
with the pushing back of the front lines into Ger- of the Army Group. His main tasks are to pro-
many. In such cases the field commander has no vide for the military administration of the area
authority over the units or installations in ques- and< to protect the security of the lines of com-
F RONT LINE
DIVISION
CORPS IN RESERVE
J IN
i RESERVE o
I oo o ' oo o 1 o oo . o oo 5
I ARMY REAR AREA k ARMY REAR AREA o
O A
g (RUCKWARTIGES ARMEEGEBIET)o(RUCKWARTIGES ARMEEGEBIET)
division status and in military schools. (See Sec- In principle, the staff is organized like any nor-
tion VI.) mal corps staff. The differences result from the
Replacgment of personnel for the affiliated field fact that it has, not an operational, but a replace-
units and formation of new units. (See Section ment mission; furthermore it is not a mobile, but
VI.) a static organization. Thus, for example, Section
Local defense is provided for, in the first in- I b, which in a field unit handles supply of equip-
stance, by static units of various types, particu- ment and ammunition, is in this case also respon-
larly the local defense battalions (Landcssclziitzen- sible for the supply of manpow-cr and for sending
Bataillone), local construction units (Landesbau- replacements to the Field Army; Section I c, nor-
pioniere), and river guard units (Landespioniere). mally. ifitelligence, is not primarily concerned with
Such units are controlled by a special adminis- obtaining information about the enemy but with
trative division staff (Divisions-Komuznzando counterintelligence and security; and Sections II,
z.b.V.), of which one was set up in each corps personnel, and IV a, administration, are expanded,
area early in the war. They provide guards for Section II serving also as the depository for per-
vital installations and for prisoner of war camps sonnel records while Section IV a is incorporated
and furnish personnel for local garrison battalions into the large and semi-autonomous organization
• (Standortbataillolze) and companies. In case of of the Corps Area Administration (Wehrkreis-
emergency the corps area commander has extra- verwaltung).
ordinary powers over civilian agencies as well as The staff is headed by a Chief of Staff (Chef
the military units and installations in his territory ; dcs Stabes) and includes the following sections:
he may then, for example, issue orders to the pro- Section I is responsible for such matters as
bvincial and local authorities, commandeer trans- training, quarters, air raid protection, gas defense,
port and supplies, and take any other steps neces- transportation, training films, surveying and map-
sary until outside help arrives. ping, engineer units. and technical supervision of
Any General Headquarters units of the Field -utilities in military installations.
Army which are temporarily stationed in the corps Signal matters are handled in the I a Section
area are controlled by the corps area headquarters by the Commander of Signal Troops (Ko~-
through its special administrative division staff mandeur der NachrichteMrzcppen). He in turn
(Div. k-do. 2.b.V.) or other appropriate command has a staff of his own concerned with training,
channel. activation, and replacement of signal units, super-
Auditing of the accounts of all field units affili- vision of radio traffic, static telephone installa-
ated with the corps area is another responsibility. tions, signal equipment, and female auxiliaries.
All military personnel, regardless of their own Section I b handles the supply of ordnance
unit affiliation, are subject to the curfews and equipment and ammunition for units stationed in
other disciplinary regulations issued by the local the corps area. As an echelon in the control of
garrison commander within the corps area. These manpower, this section supervises the conscrip-
regulations are enforced by a patrol service main- tion offices (Wchrevsatzdienststellen) and is re-
tained by the corps area headquarters as well as sponsible for issuing the orders for the transfer
by the garrison headquarters. In all territorial of replacements to units of the Field Army in
matters the corps area commander has a large response to their requisitions.
degree of autonomy. He allots units to garrisons Section I c handles counterintelligence and se-
and determines the areas controlled by the gar- curity to the limited extent that the corps area
rison commanders. He also controls the Corps headquarters participates in these activities. It
Area Administration ( Welzrkreisz~erwaltung) and also is concerned with Armed Forces propaganda
its subordinate administrative offices so far as and press relations, as well as the training and
their activity concerns the troops stationed in the employment of interpreters. Formerly this section
corps area. also handled troop welfare, morale building, and
recreational activities; later, these became the re-
3. Corps Area Headquarters Organization sponsibility of the National-Socialist Guidance
The various responsibilities of the corps area com- Officer (Nationalsozialistischer Fiilzrungsofi.zier)
mander and the corps area headquarters are re- who is an independent staff officer in charge of a
flected in the composition and functions of his newly created section of the staff.
regular staff and attached special command staffs. Section II, the personnel section, is divided into
l—46
I MARCH 1945
UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451
Subsections II a, dealing with officer personnel, On the staff of each corps area headquarters a
and II b, concerned with enlisted personnel. Sub- Section F, Welfare (Fiirsorge), controls the ac-
section II a keeps individual records fo;’ all p;o- tivities of welfare officers (Fursorge-Offiziere)
fessional officers regardless of where they are em- who give advice and assistance to professional
ployed and handles the recruiting of officer candi- soldiers who are discharged or about to be dis-
dates and awards of decorations. Subsection II b charged. All discharged non-professional soldiers
deals with transfers and detachment of individual are taken care of by the Ministry of Labor.
enlisted men to schools or for other duty. It does This section represents that part of the German
not keep individual records for enlisted personnel, Welfare and Pensions (I;iirsorge und Versor-
as these are kept by the conscription offices. It gztrlg) organization which is administered by the
also handles the rec.ruiting of potential officer and corps area commander. The The part, Pensions
noncommissioned officer candidates (A~z~&~lzc- (Vcrsorgung), is handled on a different level, the
stellrn fiir den Fiihrcunacll~illtchs), deferment of chain of command going from the Armed Forces
essential workers, and furloughs and discharges. High Command to one of three regional Welfare
Section III is headed by the corps judge Groups (Versorgungsgruppen) which are located
(Korpsriclatcr) ; however the corps area heacl- at Berlin, Breslau, and Munich. These control
quarters is not an important echelon for legal the Welfare and Pension Offices (Fiirsorge- und
matters. Versorgungsiimtcr), of which there is one in each
corps area. These offices, which.do not form part
Section IV a, administratign, is headed by the
of the corps area organization, grant pensions
Korpsintendant who at the same time has charge
for discharged professional soldiers and their de-
of the Corps Area Administration (Wehrkreis-
pendents. The reason for the separation of the
verwaltung). offices from the control of the corps area com-
Section IV b is headed by the Deputy Corps mander is the desire to achieve uniformity in the
Surgeon (Stellvertretelzder Korpsarzt, also called administration of pensions throughout the entire
Wehrkreisarzt), who advises the commander -on~ Reich.
medical questions and has a staff of his own.
Under him spe/cial medical officers (Trupfieniirzte) Attached to the staff of each corps area head-
supervise discharges for medicab reasons which quarters is a Commander of Prisoners of War
are handled through army discharge bureaus (Konzmandcw dcr Kriegsgefangenen im Wehr-
(Heeresentlassungsstellelz). kreis . . . ) . who is in charge of all prisoner of war
camps in the corps a He r c a . for
Section IV c is the Deputy Corps Veterinarian officers (Ofizierslagcr or Oflag) and camps or
(Stellvertretender. Korpsveteriniir, also called enlisted personnel (r.lallnscllafts-Stall~mlager or
Wehrkreisveteriniir), who has his own separate Stalag), both types being designated by the Ro-
staff. man numeral of the corps area and distinguished'
Section IV d comprises the Protestant and by letters, as XII A, G, etc.
Catholic corps area chaplains (W ehrkreispfarrer). The Commander of Military Police Patrols
Motor transport (Heeres-Motorisierung) is (Konzmalldcur drs Strcifendicnstes) is the su-
handled by a separate staff section, sometimes called perior of all road and railway patrols. ’ is di-
Section V or referred to as the Corps Area Motor rectly subordinate to the corps area commander
Transport Officer (Wehrkreiskraftfahvofizier) and works in close liaison with the garrison com-
It deals with the issue of licenses for military manders.
drivers and vehicles; allocation and distribution The Officer for Military Economic Affairs
of military vehicles, tires, equipment, gasoline, (Wehrzvirtscjiaftsoffizier) handles, for the corps
and oil; traffic control; and the supply of vehicles. area commander, all questions of military eco-
Independently of this section there exists a nomics having a territorial bearing; he is at the
Commander of Motor Maintenance Troops same time a direct representative of the Armed
(Kowmandeur der Kraftfahrparktruppe), who Forces Economic Office in the Armed Forces
controls motor maintenance training units, niotor High Command and liaison officer to the regional
maintenance and repair parks, and parks for spare armament inspectorates (Riistungsinspektionen)
parts and tires. This commander is sometimes, if of the Ministry for Armaments and War Pro-
not always, the same man as the Corps Area duction (Ministcrium fiir Riistung und Kriegs-
Motor Transport Officer. produktion).
1—47
MARCH 1945
UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30451
Personnel matters of all administrative officers TRATION. The principal function of the Corps
in the Corps Area Administration, its subordinate Area Administration consists in supervising the
agencies, and Field Army units maintained by the various local offices in the corps area which con-
corps area. stitute the executive organs of administration.
Training of administrative officers. In principle The local administrative offices are:
this separation into "IV a matters" and independ- Army garrison administrations (Heeres-Stand-
ently handled administrative matters is carried ortzerwaltungen).
down to the lowest administiative echelons, al- Army ration main depots (Heeres-Verpjle-
though the scope of their independent authority is gungshauptiimtcr) and army ration depots
less comprehensive than that of the Corps Area (Heeres-VerPflrgztlzgsiilrlter).
Administration. This basic division of the ad- Hospital administrations (Lazarettverwaltun-
ministrative authority is characteristic of the dual gen).
functions and responsibilities of the administra- Clothing offices (Bcklcidu~zgsiimter).
tive service of the German Army. Construction ofices (!lrcrcshautinzter).
The head of the Corps Area Administration is Administrative offices of units of battalion or
an administrative officer in the Special Troop higher status located in the corps area (Zahl-
Service (,Truppensoadcva’ie~zst) with the title wzeistereien ).
Korpsintefzdant who is at the same time the head An additional function of the Corps Area Ad-
of Section IV a of the staff of the corps area com- ministration is auditing the accounts of the bat-
mander. As head of the Corps Area Administra- talion administrative officers (Truppenzahl-
tion the Korpsintendant is directly subordinate JO meisfer) of Field Army units affiliated with the
the Army Administration Office; as a staff officer corps area, wherever they are located. It may
he is subordinate to the commanding general. issue instructions to these officers, but they arc
c. FUNCTIONS OF THE CORPS AREA ADMINIS- technically subordinate not to it but to the Field
I
1
SECT SECT
B 6
(0
0£
t
z (ft DC U.
1*"
3
o(9 3zo O H
(0
o (9
Ct:
z o o
>
5
3
UNIT RATION
PAYMASTERS! DEPOTS
Army administrative headquarters at higher and carries out the administration for OKH-con-
echelons. trolled establishments in Corps Area III such as
The Corps Area Administration is also respon- demonstration units, army specialist schools,
sible for personnel matters of administrative of- academies, and other institutions.
ficers in units affiliated with the corps area and f. SUBORDINATE ADMINISTRATIVE AGENCIES.
serves as their replacement unit. It also trains Of the various local administrative agencies subor-
such officers. dinate to the Corps Area Administration, those
d. ORGANIZATION OF TIIE CORPS AREA ADMIN- which deal with rations and clothing form part of
ISTRATION. Corresponding to its responsibilities the organization of supply and are therefore dealt
the Corps Area Administration is subdivided into with in detail in Chapter VI below.
the following sections (Sachgcbiete) : The most important of the remaining local of-
Section A : Fiscal matters ; interpretation of fices are the garrison administrations (Heeres-
pay regulations; travel, moving, and transporta- Standortverwaltungen).
tion allowances ; welfare and pensions ; vocational As a rule there is a garrison administration in
schools of the Army ; office equipment; libraries ; every garrison and on every maneuver area; it is
general rules for cashiers, bookkeepers, and audi- always designated by the name of the garrison
tors ; office regulations for paymasters. town. Large cities may have more than one gar-
Section B : For the duration of the war this rison administration.
section is known as the auditing office (Abrech- The head of the garrison administration is an
nungsintendantur). It audits the accounts of unit administrative officer who is appointed by the
paymasters in the field and of ordnance installa- Army High Command and who is directly sub-
tions in the corps area. ordinate to the Korpsintendant. The head of the
Section C: Rations; procurement, adminis- garrison administration is not on the staff of the
tration, and issue of ratibns through the ration garrison commander, and there is no subordina-
depots; procurement of forage for the remount tion of the garrison administration to the garrison
depots ; bakeries ; troop-kitchens ; ration supply commander. The two are expected to cooperate
for the troops while on maneuvers ; auditing of the closely, but in practice this dual authority leads
accounts of the ration depots and of those gar- at times to difficulties which have to be adjusted
rison administrations with a "rations" department; by agreement between the Corps Area Adminis-
auditing of the accounts of the remount depots. tration and the corps area commander.
Sectidn D : Supervision of th’e garrison ad- The garrison administration normally consists
ministrations; auditing of their accounts; billet- of the following departments:
ing ; administration of real estate. Real estate management (GI-undstiicksverwZ-
Section E : Administration of hospitals; au- tung).
diting of their accounts ; questions concerning civ- Garrison finance office (Hrcrcsstarldortkasse).
ilian workers; legal matters so far as not dealt Pay records for civilian workers (Standortlohn- .
with in any of the other sections; clothing; super- stelle).
vision of clothing depots and auditing of their Pay records for soldiers (Sfandortgcbiihrnis-
accounts. stclle).
Section F : Construction matters; supervision Utensils and general equipnlcnt depot (Gerii-
of the construction offices; civilian contracts. tclagcr).
Section G: Procurement of living quarters The real estate department handles the main
for members of the staff of the Corps Area Ad- task of the garrison administration, which is the
ministration. management and utilization of the real estate in-
Section P : ( P I ) ,Personnel matters of the cluding training area, and the erection, mainte-
administrative officers. ( P II) Personnel matters nance, and administration of the buildings and
of civilian workers. other installations owned or rented by the Army.
e. SPECIAL ADMINISTRATIVE HEADQUARTERS. Excluded from these are the garrison hospitals
Comparable with the Corps Area Administrations, (Standortlazarette) and the installations of the
but in a special position, is the Administration for remount depots, which are taken care of by these
Central Army Tasks (Verwaltung fiir Zentral- organizations themselves.
aufgaben des Heeres). This office is organized in The garrison finance office has the task of mak-
the same way as the’ Corps Area Administrations ing payments and keeping books and accounts
I—50
I MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451
for the garrison administration and the construc- repair, and maintenance of buildings owned ‘or
tion offices (HeeresJauiitizter). It also, keeps the rented by the Army and give advice to the other
surplus cash for other local offices of the Army. administrative agencies.
Affiliated with a garrison finance office are all
small unit pay offices (ZahlsteZZen) and branch 6. Medical Service and Installations
pay offices (Ncbenzahlstellen), which are only a. MEDICAL SERVICE. Within the Armed
allowed to make cash payments and which there- Forces the administration of the medical services
fore use the garrison finance office for other types and the use of the medical installations and facili-
of payment. ties in Germany have been centralized to a high
The pay office for civilian workers keeps the degree. In considering the medical organization
pay records for these groups and instructs the of the Replacement s\rmy it should be borne in
garrison finance office to make the corresponding mind that these facilities, to a varying degree,
payments. are also at the disposal of the other branches of
The department handling pay records of sol- the Armed Forces and of the Wafen-SS.
diers in the field determines the regular service The Chief Army Medical Inspector (Heeres-
pay (Wehrl~~aclztbesoldung for professional sol- sanitZ.tsinspekteur), whose activities are super-
diers and Kriegsbesoldung for all other soldiers) vised by the Armed Forces Surgeon Genera1
and makes the corresponding payments through (Chef des Weh~marhtsanittitswesens), is sta-
the garrison finance office to their accounts or tioned at the headquarters of the Commander of
dependents. the Replacement Army but does not form part of
The utensils and genera1 equipment depots store his staff. He works through his own staff, the
tools, utensils, and office equipment used in bar- Army Medical Inspectorate (Heeressantitiitsin-
racks and other installations. Such utensils and spektion), which is part of the General Army
general equipment are procured by the Corps Office (Allgemeines Heevesamt). He is the head
Area Administration, which orders one or several. of the medical services of the Field Army as well
of the larger garrison administrations to effect as of the Replacement Army. The Chief Army
the purchases for the entire area and store the Medical Inspector is the superior of the medical
goods. personnel of the Army in disciplinary matters and
Another type of local administrative agency is questions concerning medical work. He decides
the hospital administration (Lazaretts~ewaltungj. on the assignment and promotion of medical
This is subordinate to the Corps Area Adminis- officers.
tration as well as to the medical officer in charge Within the limits of the directives issued by
of the hospital. It deals independently, under the the Armed Forces Surgeon General he has the
supervision of the Corps Area Administration, following responsibilities:
with payments, bookkeeping, and accounting for Training of medical personnel.
the hospital. In its concern for the medical per- Direction of the medical service including hy-
sonnel, officials, and hospitalized soldiers in mat- gienic and sanitary measures in the Army.
ters of pay, rations, and clothing it occupies the Evacuation and hospitalization of casualties
same position as the administrative office (Zahl- and the administration of all military hospitals.
meister) of a unit staff. With regard to the ad- Supply of drugs and medical equipment for the
ministration of the real estate and buildings be- Army.
longing to the hospital it has the same responsibili- The permanent medical installations in Ger-
ties as the garrison administration has for other many comprise medical units, hospitals, and sup-
property. ply installations which are all organized on a
Army construction offices (Heeresbauiimter strictly territorial basis.
and Heeresneubauiimter) are established by the b. CORPS AREA SURGEONS. In the Replace-
Army High Command, which also ‘appoints the ment Army the channels of command go through .
head of the office and determines the size of his the chief medical officers of the corps areas.
staff. The work of the construction offices is These officers have a dual title. They are called
supervised by the Director of Construction (Sec- deputy corps surgeon (Stellvertretender Korps-
tion F ) in the Corps Area Administration. arzt) for orders, which concern the troops and
Within their district Army construction offices emanate from the deputy corps headquarters
deal with the technical side of the construction, (Stellvertretendes Generalkommando), and corps
1—51
l MARCH 1945
UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451
area surgeon ( Wehrkveisarzt) in all territorial prisoners of war (Reservelazarette fiir Kriegsge-
matters which are handled under the jangene), fangene), and other types were created.
of the corps area headquarters (Wehrkreiskom- Since the peacetime facilities were entirely in-
mando). In this dual capacity they are on the adequate for the wartime needs, a large number
staff of the corps area commander and head o f of civilian institutions and suitable buildings such
IV b (medical) section of this staff. They a s as civilian hospitals, hotels, and schools were
therefore subordinate to the commander of the taken over and converted into general hospitals.
corps area as well as to the Chief Army Medical The general hospitals are designated by the name
Inspector. Within their territory the chief o f of the town, and Roman numerals if there is
cal officers of the corps areas have the more func- more than one general hospital in the town—for
tions and responsibilities as the Chief Army example Reservelazarett Kassel III. If a general
Medical Inspector. hospital controls wards in separate buildings
c. MEDICAL U N I T S . The corps area surgeons these usually are called part-hospitals (Teilla-
control the medical replacement battalions zaret zarette). The capacity of a general hospital may
tiits-Ersatzabteilungen), one in each corps vary vary anywhere from 100 to 1,000 or more beds.
which train medical replacements for the Field The medical personnel of a general hospital
Army. They also control the medical battalions belong to the medical section (Heeressanitiitsstaf-
(Sanitiits-Abteilungen), which during the war fel) which is stationed in that particular town or
comprise all the medical personnel other than district. They therefore are affiliated permanently
those in training, serving in the Replacement with one of the medical battalions (Sanitdtsab-
Army with units or in general hospitals. Each teilungen) of the corps area.
corps area usually has two or three medical bat- For the purposes of medical supervision, gen-
talions, which are designated by their headquar- eral hospitals, with an aggregate of about 5,000
ters town. beds in a given area of the Wehrkreis, are
The medical battalions are composed of b e d s grouped together into general hospital districts
cal sectiens (Heere’s-Sanith’tsstaffeln) of grouped (Reservelazarett-Bezirke) d i s t ri c ts
size. The medical sections are the local sub-units supervision of senior medical officers.
of the medical battalions and generally 'can be The majority of the general hospitals are
found in every permanent garrison and every equipped and staffed to deal with a fairly wide
maneuver area. They are designated by the range of casualties and diseases, but a few of
name of the garrison town. them specialize, such as general hospitals for blind
The commander of the medical section is the soldiers or for soldiers with brain injuries. In
local representative of the corps area soldiers the military medical organization, the main types
and also serves as the garrison surgeon the of casualties and diseases are indicated by a sys-
ortarzt) and head of the IV b section on the tem of code numbers, running from 1 to 21, in
staff of the senior garrison officer. The garri- order to facilitate the distribution of casualties to
son surgeon is therefore subordinate to the' senior those hospitals which are best fitted for their
garrison officer as well as to the corps area sur- treatment.
geon. The garrison surgeon also trea tme For the purposes of evacuation and distribu-
military hospitals in his area. tion of casualties each general hospital in a given
d. HOSPITALS. In peacetime all the larger area area is subordinate to a transportation headquar-
risons had .permanent garrison hospitals ters ters (Transport-Konwnandantur), he a medi-
ort-Lazarette). In addition there existed c a l cal liaison officer handles all these questions. The
Army tuberculosis hospitals (Lazarette fiir Lun- distribution itself is based on daily reports from
genkranke des Heeres) and Army t h e the general hospitals to their local distributing
(Kurlazarette des Heeres). centers (Kranken-V erteilungs-Stelle) giving the
In wartime all these hospitals are designated number of unoccupied beds.
general hospitals (Reservelazarette) Thus the All general hospitals form part of the Replace-
garrison hospitals became Reservelazarette, me ment Army and therefore, as a rule, all soldiers
tuberculosis hospitals Reserve-Lazarette fiir sent sent to a general hospital automatically are trans-
genkranke, and the sanatoriums Reserve-Kurla- ferred from the Field Army to the Replacement
mrette. In addition Army convalescents' homes Army. At times, when the Theater of Operations
(Heeres-Genesungsheiwe), general hospitals has has extended into Germany proper, this rule has
l—52
I MARCH 1945 TM-E 30-451
been modified, so that soldiers who are sent to area has home horse hospitals (Heimat-Pferde-
general hospitals in the corps areas near the com- lazarette), to which are evacuated the horses
bat zone are transferred to the Replacement Army which cannot be treated at the installations of the
only after having stayed in the general hospital Field Army, and sick horses from the Replace-
for 8 weeks; this is the same period that applies ment Army. The home horse hospitals are num-
to field hospitals. bered with the Arabic number of the corps area,
and if there is more than one horse hospital in a
7. Veterinary Service corps area they will be distinguished by adding
a. CONTROL. At the head of the veterinary 100, 200, etc., to the number.
services of the Armed Forces is the Veterinary Horses that have been cured go from the home
Inspector (Yete,;,iivilzspektcur), who is stationed horse hospital to a home horse park (Heimat-
at the heaquarters of the Commander of the Re- pferdepark). Each corps area has one home horse
placement Army. Although subordinate to the park. The Corps Veterinarian orders which
latter, he receives his instructions regarding ques- horses from the home horse park are to go to the
tions concerning both the Field Army and the Field Army and which to the Replacement Army.
Replacement Army direct from the Commander-
in-Chief of the Army. 8. Other Installations
The staff of the Veterinary Inspector is the a. REMOUNTS. Army remount purchasing com-
Veterinary Inspectorate in the General Army missions (Heeres-Remontieru~zgskommissionen)
Office (Allgemeines Heeresamt). procure young horses for the Army. These com-
The Veterinary Inspector is the superior of all missions are outside the corps area structure and
veterinary and horse-shoeing personnel in all mat- directly subordinate to the Army High Command.
ters concerning their professional or vocational The young horses purchased for the Army are
activity. He makes suggestions to the Army Per- stabled and maintained by Army remount depots
sonnel Office for the appointment of the higher (Heeres-Remonteiimtcr) until they have reached
ranking veterinary officers of the Army and makes the age for training in corps area riding and driv-
these appointments himself for the lower ranks. ing schools or delivery to troop units. The re-
He instructs the Army Veterinarian (Heeres- mount depots are independent of the remount pur-
Ycteriniir) with regard to the veterinary service chasing commissions. They are subordinate to the
in the Field Army, the evacuation of horses, and corps area commander, but in certain respects
the replacement of horses and veterinary equip- they are under direct control of the Inspector of
ment. Riding and Driving at the Army High Command
In the Replacement Army the Veterinary In- (Inspektew dcs Reit- und Falwwesens) so as to
spector directs. the veterinary service in accord- assure uniformity throughout all corps areas.
ance with instructions given by the Commander b. FORESTRY. The Army Forest and Fisheries
of the Replacement Army. He is responsible Control Offices (Hrcrcs-Forstaufsiclztstimter) su-
for the training of veterinary and horse-shoeing pervise the administration and utilization of for-
personnel and the replacement of veterinary ests and fisheries connected with properties be-
equipment. He gives the instructions for the longing to the Army, such as maneuver areas.
distribution of horses evacuated from the field In Germany proper there are two of these control
and their allocation to home horse hospitals offices, at Berlin and Wiesbaden, controlling the
(Heimat-Pferde-lazarettc). local offices in the Corps Areas I-XIII.
In the Zone of the Interior the authority of These local offices are called Army Forest Of-
the Veterinary Inspector is exercised through the fices (Heeres-Forsfiimtrr) ; they in turn supervise
deputy corps veterinarian (Stellvertretendcr forestry offices (Hceres-Oberfiirstereien and
Korpsveteriniir), who is on the staff of the deputy Hecrcs-Rcvierfiirstcrric,l ).
corps commander as his IVc. He holds the alter- The Army forest and fisheries control offices
native title of Corps Area Veterinarian (Wehr- act in conjunction with the respective corps area
kreisveteriniir) for his territorial functions. headquarters on matters concerning the troops and
Under the deputy corps veterinarian are the with the corps area idministrations in fiscal and
veterinary personnel and the veterinary installa- bookkeeping questions.
tions located in his territory. c. MILITARY PRISONS. Military prisons ark in-
b. VETERINARY INSTALLATIONS. Each corps ter-service institutions. They are not organized
l—53
UNCLASSlFlED
I MARCH 1945 TM-E 30-451
on a territorial basis but generally have several one of the numerous replacement and training
corps areas allotted to them. units and schools of the Replacement Army, their
There are various kinds of military prisons, dispatch to a field unit, and their return to a
each kind receiving prisoners of a different cate- replacement unit. The principle of affiliation
gory. These prisoners originate from the Replace- betwee’n field and replacement units, the fact
ment Army as well as from the Field Army. that developments in the Field Army are often
Wehrmaclzt-Gefiingrcisse, which are responsible preceded by corresponding developments in the
directly to the Armed Forces High Command, re- Replacement Army, and the presence of units of
ceive soldiers who are condemned to terms for the Replacement Army on the fighting fronts
more than 3 months. They are also used for pris- show that, although the German Army was
oners of war who are sentenced to terms of im- divided into two parts in 1939, the Field Army
prisonment. and Replacement Army are closely interlinked
Wehrmacht-Untersuclzungsgefiillgnisse accept and cannot be fully understood except as com-
prisoners with sentences of up to 3 months. plementary parts of a whole.
Wehrmaclrt-Haftanstalten are subordinate to
2. Conscription System
garrison headquarters and take prisoners with
a. HISTORICAL DEVELOPMENT. Systematic uni-
sentences of up to 6 weeks.
versal military training in modern times is an
There is one Wehrmacht-Festungshaftanstalt,
invention of the Germans and has been developed
which takes soldiers whose sentences specify that
to its highest degree of refinement by them. It
they are to. be confined to a fortress, i.e., that
grew out of the mass armies which were neces-
their offense is not a a one.
sary to overthrow Napoleon and was introduced
d. ARMED FORCES SIGNAL HEADQUARTERS
by a Prussian law of 3 September 1814 as a
( W ehrmacht-N achriclzte~ako~~~~~zandantu~e~z) are
part of the far-reaching army reforms initiated
designated by the towns in which they are located.
by Scharnhorst and his colleagues to cope with
They are regional liaison offices between the
Armed Forces and the German Postal Service the< new forms of warfare. Ever since then
(Dcutsche Reichspost). In addition to their liai- universal compulsory military service has existed
son functions they collect data on installations for in Germany, with the exception of the period
long-distance communications which are of mili- from 1918 to 1935, when it was forbidden by the
tary importance. Treaty of Versailles.
b. BASIC LAWS. On 16 March 1935 the uni-
versal service system (allrgcllrc%zr WehrpjIicht)
Section V I . . CONSCRIPTION, REPLACEMENT, was reintroduced by the I.aw Regarding the
AND TRAINING Structure of the Armed ITorces (Gesetz iiber
den Aufbau der Welzrmacht). This law stated
I. Introduction in three short sentences that military service was
This section deals with the entire system of per- to be based on the principle of universal liability,
sonnel replacement for the Field Army. The and that the Army was to be expanded (initially)
units of the Field Army do not procure their to a strength of 36 divisions. This was followed
own replacements independently. Replacements on 21 May 1935 by the Military Service Law
for the field units are obtained only through the fWchrgcsctz), which established the purpose and
specified units of the Replacement Army, and scope of universal service, administrative control
those for the units of the Replacement Army in of civilian manpower, categories of manpower
turn come only through the home recruiting according to age and training status, rights and
stations. Thus, the following main divisions of duties of military personnel, and methods of call-
the replacement system are obvious: up and discharge. This law, and the decrees
Conscription—the function of the home re- issued under it, still govern the German con-
cruiting stations (Wehrersat~dienststellcn) under scription system after 5 years of war.
the Armed Forces High Command (OKW). c. CONTROLLING AGENCIES. The execution of
Replacement and Training—the primary func- the system for exercising military supervision of
tion of the Replacement Army (Ersatzheer). men liable to military service and for examin-
The following pages describe the machinery ing and conscripting them from civilian life into
for .the registration and supervision of those the Armed Forces is a joint responsibility of the
liable to service, their induction and training in German civilian and military authorities.
1—54
I MARCH 1945
UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451
(1) Civilian. The Minister of the Interior, a general officer with the status and disciplinary
controlling all police authorities and the ordinary authority of a division commander. (In some
local registration of the civilian population, is cases he may be a naval or air officer, since the
responsible for the registration of men liable for recruiting system operates jointly for all three
military service. This occurs through the local branches.) Recruiting sub-areas are commanded .
and district police authorities. by lieutenant colonels or colonels selected from
(2) Civilian and military. The Minister of the class of officers whose suitability for active
the Interior and the Minister of War jointly service in the field has ceased. They have the
the and I n t e r i o r the Decree regarding status of regimental commanders.
Military Examination and Drafting (Verordnung There are two recruiting sub-area headquar-
Mil i tary und Aushebung), which in- ters which do not come under any Wehr&eis
volves collaboration of the civilian and military headquarters but directly under the Armed
authorities during the phase between first regis- Forces High Command. The R.ecruiting Sub-
tration and induction. They were also jointly Area Headquarters "Ausland" (Wehrbezirks-
responsible for dividing each corps area into kommando A&and in Berlin) deals with the
suitable recruiting areas and sub-areas in such registration, control, deferment, and call-up of
a way as both to meet the military needs and to fit, German citizens in foreign countries (occupied
so far as possible, the existing civilian adminis- or neutral). During the war it has established
trative subdivisions of the country. branches abroad in occupied countries; in neutral
countries it is assisted in its mission by the Ger-
(3) Military. The Armed Forces High Com-
man consulates. The Maritime Recruiting Sub-
mand M i l i t a r y . for the call-up, in-
Area Headquarters (W chrbezirkskornmando See),
duction, and discharge of personnel. This in-
with its seat at Hamburg, has the supervision
cludes the recruiting area and sub-area headquar-
of manpower of all Germans in the merchant
ters which examine and draft recruits and repre-
marine.
sent the military interests in the administrative
control of civilian manpower before and after d. CLASSIFICATION OF MANPOWER. (1) Basic
service. concept. "Military service is honorary service to
(4) Chain of military command This being the German people. Every German is liable
a matter which concerns all three branches of the to military service. In time of war, in addition
Armed Forces, it is supervised by the Replace- to liability to military service, every German man
ment Branch (Abteilung Ersatzwesen) of the and every German women is liable to service to
Conscription and Recruiting Office (Wehrersatz- the Fatherland." These are the opening clauses
amt) in the Armed Forces High Command of the Military Service Law of 21 May 1935.
(OKW).' a m t ) from this agency, orders (2) Extent of liability. In time of peace all
are issued through the various Wehrkreis head- German males were liable to military service
quarters (Wehrkreiskommandos, Wkr.Kdo.) to from their 18th birthday until the 31 March fol-
the recruiting area inspectorates (Wehrersatz- lowing their 45th birthday. (31 March is the
inspektionen, W.E.I.) and from there to the end of the German fiscal year.) In East Prussia
recruiting sub-area headquarters (Wehrbezirks- (separated from the rest of Germany by the
kommandos, W.B.K.). These control the Mili- Polish corridor), liability was extended until the
tary Reporting Offices (Wehrmeldeamter, W.M. 31 March following the 55th birthday. The Min-
A.) and set up from time to time in their dis- ister of War was empowered to extend liability
tricts the examining boards (Musterungsst'dbe, in either direction in time of war, and it now ex-'
Must. Stb.). Most Wehrkreise contain two or tends from 17 (the class born in 1928) to 61
three recruiting areas, but Wehrkeis VI, compris- (the 1884 class).
ing thre e r e c r u i t ing Rhineland region, has (3) Reserve status. All men not doing their
four, while Wehrkreise VII, XX, XXI, Bohmen active military service are classified into the fol-
und Mdhren, and Generalgouvernement consist lowing categories:
of only one such area each. The number of re- ren, I: Those under 35 who have com-
cruiting sub-areas in each area varies between four p!eted their regular period of active service and
and a dozen according to local needs. Each been discharged. There are only very few fit
recruiting area is controlled by an Inspector of men in this group today.
Recruiting Area (Wehrersatsinspekteur), who is . Reserve II: Those under 35 who have been
1—55
UNCLASSIFIED
I MARCH 1945 TM-E 30-451
either in a deferment or in definite assignment inal offense) or totally unfit, or if it was discov-
to a branch of service. The registrant then was ered that he had been inducted by error. Both
told to go home and await orders. In wartime this type of discharge and the normal discharge
the procedure has been accelerated, and the draft- after two years of service were carried.out by
ing is now combined with the call-up. the unit itself. In wartime this has been modi-
(4) Call-up. The actual call-up (Einbevzr- fied. In order to be discharged from active
funs) is issued by mail by the recruiting suh- seriiice members of the Field Army first must be
area headquarters in the form of an induction transferred to the Replacement Army, either by
order (Gestellungsbefckl) directing the registrant their own unit or by a hospital. In order to re-
to report. at a specified time at the headquarters lieve these units, however, and to reduce the
of a unit (in wartime a replacement unit), distance which the infirm soldier must travel
(5) Induction. Recruits reporting at a bat- to his place of discharge, army discharge centers
talion headquarters are first subjected to roll- (Hcercs-EntlrrssalIlgs-Stc~cIl) have been estab-
call and then distributed to the &ordinate con- hshed to handle medical discharge cases. The
panies, where the final medical examination and Waffcsz-SS has its own corresponding medical
actual induction (Eimtcllzrng) takes place. In- discharge center. In thr German Air Force, the
duction is followed by a mental and physical physical examinations for recc,ption and discharge
test to determine the most suitable employment are given in both combined reception and - dis-
of each man and the administration of the oath charge centers (Annalzrllc- und Entlassungsstel-
of allegiance. lcgz), which handle either procedure all the way
through.
(6) VoZuntcrrs. Volunteer applicants for the
officer and noncommissioned officer careers apply (8) Foreigners. Foreigners and stateless per-
at reception centers for potential officers and sons, in case they are classified as "racial" Ger-
noncommissioned officers (A~zrlalznzcstclle~z fiil- mans, may volunteer for service in the German
den Fiilzremaclrwurhs), which come under the Tn- Army. If they live within Germany, applications
Spector General for Potential Officers and non- are handled by the competent recruiting sub-area
commissioned officers (GJF). Within limits, the headquarters; if they live in foreign countries,
volunteers are given the privilege of selecting their they are dealt with by the Recruiting Sub-area
arm or branch of service. Headquarters Auslalld in Rcrlin. Volunteers
In January 1945 these reception centers were from the Nordic countries (Norway, Sweden,
combined with the recruiting centers for the Denmark, Netherlands, Belgium) may be inducted
Waflen-SS to form new "Combined Recruiting without the acquisition of German citizenship.
Centers of the Army and Waffen-SS" (Ergtin- Applications are handled by the Recruiting Sub-
ounysstellen des Heeres md dcr Waflm-SS). area Headquarters Alrslarld in Berlin.
Under Himmler's orders, one of these was es- Since about 1943 virtually all "racial" Germans
tablished in each Wehrkrcis, with branch of&es in living in Balkan countries under German domina-
all major cities. They also deal with volunteers tion have been required to "volunteer". The
to the ranks for Yolks Grenadier divisions and concept of "racial" Germans (Volksdeutsche) has
thus facilitate the distribution of manpower under been interpreted very widely by the High Com-
SS control. mand with the growing stringency of the man-
Volunteers to the ranks have been numerous power situation. Especially in the annexed areas
during the war, though much less so than in 1914- of Poland, people who knew scarcely a word
1918. At the beginning of the war the lower of German were classified as belonging to Sec-
age limit was 17 (instead of 18 for conscripts) ; tion 3 of the German Racial List (Abteilmg 3
it later was lowered to 16% and then (in 1944) drr Deutsche?z Volkslistc); this meant that they
to 16. In the past 2 years a large proportion were vested with German citizenship for a pro-
of the youngest age class has been induced by bationary period of 10 years and were liable
various kinds of pressure to volunteer, largely to military service but could not rise above the
for the Waffen-SS. rank of private first class.
(7) Discharge. Discharge before completion Many thousands of genuine foreigners from
of the normal period of service was possible in other occupied countries have been persuaded to
peacetime if a man became "unworthy to bear join the German Army, often through political
arms" (by reason of conviction for a major crim- or economic pressure. The procedure for their
I—57
I MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451
enlistment has varied widely for different na- transferred to Wehrkreise which do—from Wehr-
tionalities and at different times. kreise VI, XII, and XX to Wehrkreis VII and
f. HANDLING OF CONSCRIPTS. The three from Wehrkreise II, III, IV, VIII, IX, X, XI,
branches of the Armed Forces submit to the XXI, and Bohmen und Miihren to Wehrkreis
Armed Forces High Command, their personnel XVIII.
requirements on the 15th of each month for the In general, transfers from one Wehrkreis to
second month, following. According to the de- another are not made unless there is a cogent
mands and the general replacement situation the reason for them, and they were not frequent until
various Wehrkrcis headquarters then receive growing man-power difficulties began to make
orders specifying how many men are to be in- it impossible for some Wehrkreise to meet their
ducted for each branch of the Armed Forces. obligations from their own resources. In prin-
The Armed Forces High Command deter- ciple, a conscript trains and fights in the com-
mines which age groups are to be drawn upon pany of men from his own province. One sig-
according to the type of service for which they nificant deviation from this policy was in the
are required. The Wehrkreis headquarters are treatment of conscripts from the annexed areas
boimd by these arrangements but may accept vol- of Poland, France, and Yugoslavia. Alsatians
unteers of all age groups. generally were sent for training to northeastern
If men of a certain t’ype are not available Germany (Wehrkreis II) and Poles to the Ber-
within the Wehrkreis where they are required, lin area (Wehrkreis III) or to the southwest
the Armed Forces High Command may order (Wehrkreis V).
the transfer of recruits from one Wehrkreis to
3. Replacemenf Training System
another.
Within the Wehrkreis, the Wehrkreis head- a. BASIC PRINCIPLE. Every unit in the Field
quarters is responsible for distributing the replace- Army is affiliated for personnel replacement pur-
ment requisitions among the recruiting area and "poses with a specific unit of the Replacement
sub-area headquarters as rapidly as possible and Training Army, located in its own original Wehr-
with due regard to the varying characteristics kreis and known as an Ersatz unit. The function
of the population in different districts. City of the latter is to induct recruits, to provide for
areas provide the best material for motorized their training, and to see that they are held in
units, country areas for cavalry and horse-drawn readiness to be sent off to the field unit in batches
units. A mixing of rural and urban elements is or individually as required.
to be aimed at in the interests of regional and The normal location of the Ersatz unit is the
national solidarity. home station of the affiliated field unit, to which
The Navy accepts volunteers from all parts the soldiers expect ultimately to return for their
of the Reich. For its seagoing personnel it has discharge or for reassignment. For example, a
a priority on recruits who, by reason of their soldier who is wounded and goes to a reserve
place of residence or previous experience, are hospital in the Zone of the Interior will be sent,
classified as belonging to the "seafaring popula- on leaving the hospital, to his affiliated Ersatz
tion" (seemiinnische BevSlkerung) ; to man its unit before being returned to the field.
shore installations it takes conscripts from the Whenever feasible, trained replacements are
Maritime Wehrkreise—I, II, X, and XX. The sent by an Ersatz unit to a field unit with which
Air Force has a similar priority on conscripts it is affiliated. If, however, a man for any reason
fclassified as part of the "aeronautical population" is diverted to a different field unit, or if he subse-
(jliegerische Bev6lkerung), which includes those quently is transferred from one field unit to an-
who have belonged to gliding clubs or who joined other, the affiliated Ersatz unit of his new field
the aviation branch of the Hitler Youth. unit must be entered on Page 4 of his paybook
under the heading "present competent Ersatz
The Army aims at assigning every individual
unit" (jetzt zustdndiger Ersatztruppenteil).
conscript to the type of unit for which his physi-
cal condition, his civilian background, and his In order to understand the intricacies of the
special abilities best fit him. With this in view, present Ersatz system it is well to trace the suc-
certain standing regulations have been introduced. cessive stages of its development.
Thus mountaineers called up in Wehrkreise that b. ORIGINAL OPERATION OF THE SYSTEM.
maintain no mountain units automatically are Each infantry regiment which took to the field at
1—58
o
i
ARMY HIGH COMMAND
TROOPS
INSPECTORS OF ARMS INSPECTORATES OF ARMS SENIOR OFFICER OF
MOTOR MAINTENANCE
I SERVICES & SERVICES
TROOFS
WEHRKREIS
HEADQUARTERS
r
COMMANDER OF PANZER
TROOPS OR PANZER REPLACEMENT DIVISION
REPLACEMENT DIVISION STAFF
STAFF
COMMANDER COMMANDER
INFANTRY REPLACEMENT OF MOTOR
ARTILLERY REPLACEMENT MMNTENANCE WEHRKREIS WEHRKREIS
INFANTRY REPLACEMENT S TRAINING REGIMENTAL
t TRAINING REGIMENTAL S TRAINING REGIMENTAL TROOPS SURGEON VETERINARIAN
STAFF SIGNAL TROOPS
STAFF
STAFF IPANZER ARM) 3
CO
INFANTRY
I PANZER I I I CO
UNITS ANTITANK INFANTRY ARTILLERY SUPPLY TROOP MOTOR MAIN MEDICAL “ N M VETERINARY
UNITS RECONNAISSANCE RECONNAISSANCE ENGINEER UNITS SIGNAL UNITS
IPANZER ARM) | UNITS | UNITS UNITS UNITS TENANCE UNITS UNITS
I UNITS
f
in
i.
MARCH 1945
UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451
the beginning of the war left behind at its home in any Wehrkreis were controlled by two or more
station a battalion cadre bearing its own number artillery replacement training regimental staffs
and known as its Ersatz battalion. The primary bearing the numbers of artillery field regiments
purpose of this battalion was to receive recruits, originally raised in that Wehrkreis. The replace-
train them, and dispatch them as replacements to ment training battalions for the smaller divisional
the field regiment. At any given time it included components likewise bore the numbers of some
one or more of each of the following types of of the corresponding field units from the Wehr-
companies: kreis, but usually one such replacement training
Reception companies (Stammkompanien), con- battalion would provide replacements for the cor-
sisting of new recruits and cadre personnel. responding field battalions of several divisions.
Training companies (Ausbildungskompanien), Altogether over 50 types of regular replacement
also known as Rekruteneinheiten. These com- training units existed.
panies provided for the training of the inducted d. CHAIN OF COMMAND IN THE REPLACEMENT
undrained volunteers. After the training was fin- ARMY. The replacement training units are sub-
ished the recruits joined the transfer company, if ordinate to the Wehrkreis Headquarters (Wehr-
they were not transferred to the Field Army im- kreiskommandos) in their capacity as Deputy
mediately. Corps Headquarters (Stellvertretende General-
Transfer companies (Marschkompanien) which kommandos, Stv.Gen.Kdo.) through the follow-
were pools of trained replacements ready to de- ing intermediate staffs:
part for the field unit. One or more Replacement Division Staffs (Di-
Convalescent companies (Genesendenkom- vision Nummer . . . ., Div. Nr ) controlling
panien), consisting of men released from reserve the replacement training units either directly, as
hospitals who were being prepared for return to in the case of independent units of the supporting
the field, All other replacement training units are arms and services (reconnaissance, engineer, sup-
organized in a corresponding manner. ply troop replacement training battalions) or
c. ORIGINAL AFFILIATION SYSTEM. The three through several infantry and artillery replacement
replacement training battalions corresponding to training regimental staffs (Grenadier-Ersatz-
the three infantry regiments of afielddivision were Regiment, Gr.Ers.Rgt. and Artillerie-Ersatz-
controlled by an infantry replacement training Regiment, Art.Ers.Rgt.).
regimental staff (Grenadier-Eysatz-Regim,ent— Possibly one Panzer Replacement Division Staff
Gy.Eys.Rgt.) bearing the number of the division. (Panzer-Division Nummer Pz.Div.Nr. . . .)
Thus, the 2d, 23d, and 44th Infantry Regiments, or a Commander of Panzer Troops (Kommandeur
belonging to the 11th Infantry Division, were rep- der Panzertruppen, Kdr.d.Pz.Tr.) of either bri-
resented by the 2d, 23d, and 44th Infantry Re- gade or regimental status, controlling the replace-
placement Training Battalions controlled by the ment training units either directly, as in the case
1 lth Infantry Replacement Training Regimental of the independent battalions (tank, antitank, and
Staff at Allenstein in Wecehykyeis I, the home sta- Panzer reconnaissance replacement training bat-
tion of the division. Replacement training regi- talions) or through one or two motorized infantry
mental staffs usually were commanded by colonels. or Panzer Grenadier- replacement training regi-
The replacement training regimental staff also mental staffs.
controlled from three to five infantry specialist The Commander of Motor Maintenance Units
replacement training companies which provided (Kommandeur der Kraftfahrparktruppe, Kdr.d.
the personnel for the infantry howitzer companies, Kf.Pk.Tr.), controlling motor maintenance re-
antitank companies, signal sub-units, engineer placement training units.
platoons, and mounted platoons of the three in- The Commander of Signal Troops (Komman-
fantry field regiments. deur der Nachrichtentruppe, Kdr.d.Nachr.Tr.),
controlling signal replacement training battalions.
The other components of the field division—
the artillery regiment, reconnaissance battalion, Wehrkreis Surgeon (Wehrkreisarzt in his
antitank battalion, engineer battalion, and signal capacity as Stellvertretender Korpsarzt), control-
battalion, were affiliated in a similar way with re- ling medical replacement training units.
placement training units of their respective arms Wehrkreis Veterinarian ( Wehrkreisveterindr in
back in the Wehykycis from which they came. his capacity as Stcllvertyetendcr Korpsveterinar).
All the artillery replacement training battalions The Deputy Corps Commanders, who are not
I—60
I MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451
only the commanders of the replacement training replacement training unit. If an adjustment is
units but also commanders in the Wehrkreis, are not possible within the competent area, the Com-
subordinate to the Commander of the Replace- mander of the Replacement Army is notified and
ment Army (Befehlshaber des Ersatzheeres). orders another Wehrkveis to provide the replace-
They have the right. to shift the location of units ments. The replacement training units have to
of the Replacement Army within their areas but notify the deputy corps headquarters at once on
must notify the Commander of the Replacement what date the replacements will be ready to leave.
Army. Although the requisitions are strictly chan-
The responsibility of the Commander of the the direct relations between the field unit and
Replacement Army and of his subordinate head- the competent training unit at home always were1
quarters and offices for maintaining the Field considered desirable, in order to strengthen the
Army on a wartime footing remains in effect feeling of comradeship. This was achieved not
when parts of the Replacement Army are located only through the personal connections but also
in the Theater of Operations. through circular letters and newspapers.
The number of replacement division staffs in f. LATER MODIFICATIONS OF THE REPLACE-
each is is regulated by the Army High MENT TRAINING SY~TEXI, 1 9 3 9 - A U T U M N 1942.
Command. They are responsible for the unifor- (1) Early change in the afiliation system. The
mity of in in their subordinate replacement system of numerical affiliation between replace-
training units. They are to be kept free from all ment training mlits and field units, applying par-
administrative duties. Regarding correspondence ticularly to the infantry units, was valid in gen-
they are to participate only in what concerns the eral for the four initial waves of divisions sent to
training, arming and equipment of replacement the field by each Wehrkreis in the summer and
a s as well as the maintenance of autumn of 1939. These were the "active", or
discipline (including proceedings of law) and the peacetime, divisions, numbered from 1 to 36, 44,
personal matters of their subordinate officers and 45 and 46; those raised from reservists, numbered
officials. Should there be several replacement di- 52 to 98; those raised from Landwehr personnel,
vision staffs in one Wehrkreis, the deputy corps c o r p s to 246; and those formed from so-called
headquarters orders which replacement training Ergiinzungs units (special "supplementary"
units are subordinated to either one. peacetime units for short-term training of men in
e. REQUISITIONING OF REPLACEMENTS. The the intermediate classes 1901 to 1913), from 251
field unit may request replacements if there is a to 269.
deficiency of more than 10 per cent of their table The component units of divisions formed sub-
of organization strength. Replacements for spe- sequent to the initial mobilization period, on the
cialists, such as communication personnel or tech- other hand, usually were not given new replace-
nicians, are to be requested as soon as their ab- ment training units of their own, but were as-
sence would hamper the efficiency of the field signed, through the corresponding Deputy Corps
unit. Every independent field unit (regiment, in- Headquarters, an affiliation with existing replace-
dependent battalion) sends its requests for re- ment training units of their respective armi. Thus
placements through channels to the division head- each infantry replacement training battalion
quarters. The division forwards them direct to eventually had to feed replacements to several
the competent deputy corps headquarters. field regiments, only one of which bore its own
The deputy corps headquarters thereupon issues number. Similarly, when the infantry component
orders to the appropriate replacement units. The in the Panzer divisions was increased from one
replacement division staffs usually are consulted regiment to two in 1940, the second regiment usu-
only th e to the state of training of the ally was affiliated with the existing replacement
replacements before the deputy corps commander training battalion of the original regiment. Some
disposes of them. The commanders of the re- replacement training units were converted outright
placement training regimental staffs participate into field units; on the other hand some field units
fully in th e If the records which every were later dissolved. These changes tended to
deputy corps headquarters has to keep show that upset the principle of numerical affiliation, which
the competent replacement training unit cannot underwent further changes in the following years.
provide all or any of the replacements, the deputy It was the practice from the very beginning to
corps headquarters passes this order to another collect groups of trained replacements of the vari-
1—61
I MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451
ous arms in the Wehrkreis and assemble them into units, acting more or less as the rear echelon of
loosely organized special personnel transfer bat- the latter, there have been numerous shifts of
talions known later as Marschbataillone for the units in the Replacement Army from one part of
purpose of conducting them to the combat zone. Germany to another and from Germany into oc-
Originally each such transfer unit normally cup cupied countries and back again for varying
destined for a particular division, and often reaso reasons. From 1939 to 1941, when Germany still
ried the number of that division, preceded by had had neighbors to be attacked, the replacement
Roman numeral of the Wehrkreis and followed training units were withdrawn from the border
by a serial number. Such battalions usually were regions several months before an offensive was to
attached to the rear echelon of the division in the commence in order to free the barrack space and
field, and from there the personnel was filtered other military facilities for the assembling of field
into the various divisional components as forces. forces. After the area was no longer being used
or they filled up field replacement pools. for this purpose, the replacement training units
After the start of the Russian campaign, it was generally returned to their home stations.
found expedient, in view of the long distances in- Replacement training units, with their control-
volved, to draw on these field replacement pools in ling replacement division staffs temporarily thus
some cases without regard to their Wehrkreis of transferred to another Wehrkreis, are subordi-
origin or the division for which they originally nate to the deputy corps headquarters of this
were intended. Thus a division which had suf- Wehrkreis for administrative purposes as well as
fered particularly heavy losses might receive W for the general supervision of their training; the
large portion of the personnel which had f o r replacement division staffs, however, are the
trained and dispatched to the field for a cement direct recipients of requisitions of replacements
ent division in an adjacent and less d i r e ct from the field units in this case, and at the same
In other cases, all the divisions under a given time the contact with the home Wehrkreis was not
corps or in a particular area would share a single completely broken off. New conscripts, normally
field replacement battalion. In the African thea- given orders by their local recruiting sub-area
ter, for a time at least, there was g i v en field headquarters to report to a replacement training
replacement battalion for all the divisions of he unit not far from their home town, were sent in
Africa Corps, although they came from different
these cases either individually, or in small groups,
Wehrkreise. In the middle of 1941, t h e s e all
on long train journeys before induction or were
units in Africa were assigned affiliations o n re-
assembled in special collecting points known as
placement training units in Wehrkreise ,711 asembeld
Wehrkreis-Ersatz-Depots. The k n o w n a s
XII, regardless of the location of their previous
used for receiving men who returned from the
replacement training units; this was done in u s e d
field as convalescents or f r om the reason.
to concentrate the specialized training which fie
After the units returned to the Wehrkreis these
men required for operations in the desert.
depots were dissolved.
All such measures resulted in a further break-
ing down of the system of numerical affiliation and All these moves and a number of others, con-
in some cases even a departure from c u r r e n t current with or subsequent to them, served the
the great majority of men in a given unit should additional purpose of garrisoning the annexed or
come from the same Wehrkreis. It must be borne conquered areas adjacent to Germany proper and
in mind, however, that all these, as well as all sub- thus relieved the field forces of this responsibil-
sequent modifications up to the beginning of thus ity. At the same time barracks and training
in the detailed operations of the replacement i t y . grounds in Germany were freed for the formation
ing systems, never have violated its basic principleg of new units for the constantly expanding Ger-
namely, that every field unit at all times must of man Army, and the recruits were given training
affiliated with a specified replacement training unit away from home and under conditions more like
to which all men leaving the Field Army are away those in the field. All these moves prior to the
matically sent. autumn of 1942 (except t o t h e primary
(2) Early movements of replacement training motive was the evacuation of assembly areas)
units. Despite the fact that the original replace- were by units in border Wehrkreise into adjacent
ment training units were intended to remain oc occupied or annexed territory immediately across
the home stations of their corresponding the the border. The movements thus amounted to a
l—62
UNCLASSIFIED
I MARCH 1945 TM-E 30-451
slight extension of the German Zone of the In- Soviet Union, and northern Italy in the form of
terior in all directions. reserve divisions. Combined training thus could
g. REORGANIZATION OF THE REPLACEMENT be carried on under more realistic conditions, and
ARMY IN THE AUTUMN OF 1942. (1) Principle. numerous fully organized field divisions were re-
The most far reaching change in the replacement leased for service on active fighting fronts. In
training system took place on or about 1 October most cases the units from a given Wehrkreis
1942 when all basic replacement training units went to the country nearest them. In the case of
were broken up into their two elements—one to the basic infantry training units, approximately
handle induction and replacement and the other to two-thirds moved out in this way, and only one-
handle training. The induction and replacement third remained within greater Germany.
unit retained the designation Ersatz. But hence- (3) Changes at battalion level. Under the
forth it was concerned only with receipt of re- original system each infantry replacement train-
cruits from the conscription offices; issue of their ing battalion. as already indicated, normally con-
personal equipment and their paybooks; short tained a reception company, four training com-
military indoctrination of recruits; forwarding of panies, and one or more convalescent and transfer
recruits as speedily as possible to its sister train- companies. At the time of the reorganization the
ing unit; receipt of convalescents and sending training companies were withdrawn under the
them back to a field unit; and with the processing battalion staff. and a new replacement battalion
of men from its affiliated field units who for any staff was created to control the remaining com-
reason were to be discharged. The newly created ponents having purely replacement functions. In
training unit (Ausbildungseinheit) bore the same some cases, apparently, the new training battalion
number as the Ersatz unit and was to receive the established a transfer company of its own as a
men from the Ersatz unit, give them their train- pool for trained men awaiting transfer to the
ing, and then dispatch them to an affiliated field Field Army, while in other cases it seemed to send
unit. them to the transfer company of the replacement
(2) Movements following the re,organization. battalion.
The purpose of this measure apparently was to In practice, the change took place in either one
facilitate a shift of most training activities farther or the other of the following ways : In the case of
into the occupied countries, particularly in the replacement training units which were already in
west, without seriously affecting the efficiency of newly acquired or occupied territories in the
the induction and replacement procedure back in autumn of 1942, the replacement elements in some
the Wehrkreise. cases returned to their home stations to resume
The disadvantages of the earlier removal of the their normal induction and replacement functions
replacement training units from their home sta- and retained the name Grenadier-Ersatz-Bataillon,
tions, from the administrative point of view, were etc. The training elements then usually were in-
almost sufficient to outweigh the advantages. For corporated into reserve divisions and moved
this reason, none of the earlier moves except those farther afield, receiving the name reserve bat-
dictated by military necessity were very far from talion (Reserve-Bataillou), etc.; if they remained
home, and the practice of garrisoning more dis- in Greater Germany they were called training bat-
tant occupied territories with replacement training talions (Ausbildungs-Bataillone), etc. In other
units never was resorted to under the old system. cases (both in Germany and in adjacent occu-
It was probably these considerations, as much as pied or annexed territory) both elements remained
it was the growing shortage of man-power, which in the a s area and took the form of combined
caused the German authorities, in September 1942, replacement and training battalions (Ersatz- und
to divide all the basic replacement training units Ausbildungsbataillo~ae).
into their two parts, even though in some cases The above remarks apply to the various other
they were reunited under a new name. This arms as well as to the infantry. Most of the serv-
made it possible for the replacement units to oc- ice troops remained at their home stations as com-
cupy their home stations, and for the training bined replacement and training battalions.
units to enjoy complete freedom of movement. (4) Changes at regimental level. Many of
The latter henceforth were used in large numbers their replacement training regimental staffs be-
to occupy different parts of France, the Low came staffs of reserve regiments (Reserve-Regi-
Countries, Denmark, Poland, Lithuania, the menf) in occupied territory. The only regimental
l—63
I MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451
staffs remaining in the Wehrkreise after the rear- also, the reserve divisions took on the character
ganization were combined replacement and train- of defensive field divisions. For instance, some
ing regimental staffs (Ersatz- und Ausbildungs- of them received divisional rear service units,
Regimenter). These controlled combined replace- numbered 900 plus the reserve division number.
ment and training battalions and specialists com- These services were part of the Field Army. This
panies remaining in the Wehrkreise. In addition, system of reserve divisions was developed stead-
new infantry replacement regimental staffs (Gren- ily throughout 1943. After the summer of 1943
adier-Ersatz-Regimenter) were created to control new reserve divisions also were formed from
replacement battalions and specialist replacement Panzer and motorized training units (Reserve-
companies whose training elements had become Panzer-Divisionen) which until then had been sta-
reserve units. These new regimental staffs re- tioned in the Zone of the Interior.
ceived new numbers mostly in the 500 series, and (6) Reserve corps. To control the replace-
had no affiliation with a field division bearing the ment functions of reserve divisions (i.e., the dis-
same number. However, some of the companies patch of trained replacements to the Field Army)
controlled by these new staffs retained their origi- a number of reserve corps (Rescrvckorps) and
nal numbers. Thus the original numerical affilia- one or more reserve Panzer corps (Reserve-Pan-
tion system had almost disappeared at regi- serkorps) were formed. Orders issued to deputy
mental level. corps headquarters relating to these functions
In the artillery the original regimental staffs were now also addressed to the reserve corps, in-
that remained in the Wehrkreis took over the dicating that they acted as channels for replace-
functions of those which went out to reserve ment requisitions in the same manner as deputy
divisions. corps headquarters. However, at least some re-
serve corps controlled one or more defensive in-
(5) Cha+ages at division level. For occupa- fantry divisions of the Field Army as well as
tional and defensive purposes, as well as for the their reserve divisions.
conduct of combined training exercises, the re-
h. T H E ULTIMATE FATE OF THE RESERVE D I -
serve units in occupied territory were organized
VISIONS. Altogether, the training units of the
into a new type of training division known as a
different Wehrkreise formed 26 reserve divisions
reserve division (Re serve division) which still re-
in 1942 and 1943, four of which were reserve
mained part of the Replacement Army. This was
Panzer divisions. Thirteen were in the West,
done in all cases except one by the conversion
seven in the East, three in Denmark, two in
of one of the former replacement division staffs
Croatia, and one in Italy. From this large number
in the Wehvkreise. If not enough staffs remained
it is evident that field divisions were relieved
in a Wehrkreis to supervise the induction and re-
from defensive and occupational duties to an ap-
placement activities of replacement units as well
preciable extent. In 1943, even before the last
as the training of combined replacement and
reserve divisions were formed, a number of them
training units, a new staff was created, sometimes
were converted into divisions of the Field Army.
taking a number 300 higher than that of the de-
Two of them in the East became field training
parted reserve division. Other new replacement
divisions (F eldausbildatngsdivisio~ z c l l ,
division staffs were created by conversions of spe-
Div.), which, although retaining training func-
cial administrative division staffs (Divisionskom-
tions in addition to their line of communication
Inundo z.b.V., Div. Kdo. z.b.V.) As a result the
duties, no longer formed part of the replacement
number of the replacement division staffs was
and training structure of their Wehrkreise. A
only slightly diminished from 34 in September,
third reserve division in Croatia was converted
1942 to 29 in 1943. Each reserve division con-
into a light (Jdger) division, and three other re-
trolled a group of reserve regiments and support-
serve divisions received the designation static
ing units from its own Wehrkreis, but the allot-
(bodenstiindige) divisions.
ment of battalions within the regiment no longer
followed the original pattern based on the sub- Thus by the end of 1943, 23 reserve divisions
ordination of infantry regiments to the field divi- were in existence including the three static divi-
sion of the same number. Sometimes the bat- sions. During 1943 several of these divisions
talions took the numbers I, II, and III, and the were engaged against partisans while others be-
regimental number, with or without addition of came firmly established along the Channel coast.
their own original numbers. In other respects, During 1944 the reserve divisions rapidly dis-
l—64
I MARCH 1945
UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451
integrated. Of the five reserve divisions in the sion in t h e 1944, recruits no longer were sent to
East, two were destroyed or disbanded, and three the reserve divisions in the West.
went into combat. The remaining reserve divi- d i v i - gradually was resumed within Ger-
sion in Croatia apparently was disbanded early in i n At first some Wehykreise dispatched re-
the year. All the 13 reserve divisions in the West W e s t existing training or combined replace-
disappeared. Three reserve Panzer divisions were were and training units of their own Wehrkreise
merged with remnants of Panzer or Panzer Grena- within Grena- Germany, and in cne case even
dier field divisions and lost their identity. Three to Th r e e units of a neighboring Wehrkreis.
reserve divisions on the Channel coast were con- c o n - first one and then other training
verted to field divisions in February, 1944. Two companies w o added within the different Wehr-
others were disbanded in July and August, after after and replacement units were expanded into
giving up most of their personnel to divisions i o n s replacement and training units. By
that had suffered heavy losses in the Invasion. the a s i o n . of 1944, virtually all replace-
The five reserve divisions in southern France ment ance in some ?V’clzv&eise had regained
and on the Biscay coast were engaged against their again s t and had become combined
the Allied landing in southern France and up- u p - and training units. This was espe-
graded to field divisions. The reserve mountain ntain the case with the replacement units of the
division in Italy also may have been upgraded former reserve Panzer divisions in the West.
to a field division during the year. Of the three thr e e did not start expanding their
reserve divisions in Denmark, two appear to have training h a v e until late in 1944. In some cases
remained intact during 1944, while the third was the reforming of artillery training units preceded
in the process of being converted. Thus by the the reforming of infantry training units. In some
end of 1944, a maximum of six to seven reserve reserve to help control combined replacement
divisions remained, of which perhaps only two and t w o battalions in the infantry and facili-
were able to fulfill the functions for which they tate they possible employment in the field, the
were originally created. old ratio of three replacement and training bat-
talions to one staff was restored through a new
The reserve divisions had definite disadvantages
sa d vantages replacement and training regi-
as well as advantages. They were good for train-
mental staffs.
ing and garrison functions during the winter of
1942-43 and for the greater part of 1943. But The of of training was aided by the
when they received definite defense assignments, But that pure replacement battalions had always
especially on the Channel coast, they no longer maintained a skeleton force of instructors and
could concern themselves with training. Neither cadre l o n g e r to provide a minimum of train-
could they afford to send trained replacements to ith er the reception, transfer, and convalescent
field divisions and to replace them with untrained to Also many reserve divisions returned
recruits and thereby imperil their combat effec- their instructors and cadres to their Wehrkreis
tiveness. e they were converted or disbanded.
j . T I V E N E S S . DURING THE SUMMER AND
The seriousness of the situation was intensified AUTUMN OF i e d In the summer of 1944, when
by the fact that during 1942-43 two-thirds of the the Reichsfuhrer-SS took over the command of
"training" had been moved out of Germany to t o Replacement Army, a number of trends be-
take place in these reserve divisions. As a result, r e s u l t , Training hours were length-
at a critical period the continuity of training had ened, a d the training period was reduced to an
to be interrupted, and a new start made in the the of 6 weeks. Air Force and Navy per-
' Wehrkreise within Germany. rmany. were retained for the Army, and the
i. RESUMPTION OF TRAINING WITHIN GER- Volkssturm was created. Paper work was sim-
MANY. New training facilities had to be provided plified, N Wehrkreis borders were adjusted.
as one reserve division after another ceased its Economy and simplification were achieved
training functions. For a time, some of the reserve through:
divisions had training battalions (Ausbildungs- (g) Changes in the afiliatiou system A basic
Bataillone) which could train personnel without t h o u t of the affiliation system for infantry regi-
interfering with the new defense responsibilities ments occurred. A single infantry replacement
of the reserve divisions. But following the Inva- I n v a - became the competent replacement unit
1—65
I MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451
staffs from the four western Wehrkreise were Also not represented are the four important
transferred to the Western Front with the combat replacement and training brigades for the Gross-
elements of their subordinate units. deutschland, Feldherrnhalle, Croatian, and "999"
The untrained recruits, unfit convalescents, and units, which are outside the regular series of re-
cadre personnel necessary for maintaining the placement units.
replacement and training schedule remained be- Wehrkrcis XVIII has mostly mountain troops.
hind. In some instances, a "reserve" staff prob- Wehrkreis XX, XXI, Btihmen und Mahren, and
ably stayed at the home station to control replace- Generalgouvernement are omitted, since they con-
ment elements and rebuild the training structure. trol only a very few units. Since units in Wehr-
These hastily collected divisions received a variety kreise XX and XXI are connected with Wehr-
of names, of which "combat divisions" (Kampf- kreis II, and units in Wehrkreis Bohmen und
division, also Div. NY ( K ) ) seems to have Miihren properly belong to Wehrkreise XIII and
been the most common. Five such divisions were XVII, they are listed under Wehrkreise II, XIII,
actually in line, and a sixth was in charge of for- and XVII, respectively. In general, units are listed
tification work. The subordinate units originally under the Wehrkreis that controls them, and not
kept the numbers they had in the Replacement necesarily under the Wchrkreis in which they are
Army, but later were renumbered as organic field located. Although the units in the table have been
units. Four of the former replacement division designated simply as replacement units most of
staffs were upgraded to field divisions, and a fifth them are actually combined replacement and
was dissolved. In addition, the border Wehrkreis training units.
furnished numerous independent battle groups, The strength of battalions will fluctuate greatly,
block units (Sperrverbiinde), and other units, depending upon whether they have just received
which eventually were absorbed by various field new recruits or convalescents or depleted their
units at the front. Local defense duties of the organization by sending replacements to the field.
replacement and training units are fulfilled by Thus some battalions in the t may h e a
alarm units (Alarmeinheiten). strength of 500 men and others over 1500.
1. STRENGTH AND DISTRIBUTION OF THE R E - Affiliated field divisions are given to permit a
PLACEMENT ARMY AT THE E N D OF 1944. The comparison between the replacement units and
accompanying table (Figure 10) shows by "their" field units. General Headquarters troops
Wehrkreise the distribution of replacement bat- and disbanded or destroyed field divisions are
talions for combat troops and affiliated field divi- not included, and converted field divisions could
sions at the end of 1944. not be attributed to a specific Wehrkreis. The
Each of the 15 Wehrkreise existing at the out- present affiliation is the controlling one, even
break of the war has, in addition to the replace- though the division was mobilized in another
ment battalions for combat troops, one to three Wehrkreis.
replacement division staffs, and two to five in- Demonstration regiments and battalions and
fantry replacement regimental staffs. Most of the the many military schools contain additional re-
latter control three to four infantry specialist re- serves of manpower. With the latter, however,
placement companies. Each of these Wehrkreise attached "kommandiert" personnel is carried by
(except I and XV111) also has one to two the old unit and not by the school.
Panzer Grenadier or motorized replacement regi- At the end of 1943 there were possibly
mental staffs, containing two or three specialist 2,000,000 men in the Replacement Army; at the
replacement companies and one to two artillery re- end of 1944 there were probably considerably
placement regimental staffs. The infantry replace- less. On the whole, units of the Replacement
ment battalions of both these arms contain re- Army were remarkably stable during the 5
connaissance battalions. In addition, there are years of war, with regard to type, number, and
two chemical warfare replacement regimental in some cases also with regard to the location of
staffs in Wehrkreis X. The many other replace- the replacement elements.
ment units—mostly of service troops, such as However, major changes did occur in the re-
supply troops, motor maintenance troops, and placement division staffs, regimental staffs, and
medical troops—are not represented in the table specialist companies in the years 1942 to 1944.
since there is generally only one in each Wehr- Most of the units dissolved were in the artillery
kreis. battalion series. Additional units or new types
1—67
I MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451
of units were created whenever necessary, often modified, is worked out to the smallest detail. The
preceding developments in the Field Army, as table was valid for a Volks Grenadier division as
witnessed by the formation of assault gun, and late as November 1944. The replacement units
Panzer howitzer replacement and training bat- shown are mostly of the combined replacement
talions, mortar training companies, and replace- and training type, even though they are designated
ment and training battalions for troops with as replacement units.
stomach and ear ailments. n. RECENT DEVELOPMENTS. After the Allied
m. EXAMPLE OF AFFILIATION BETWEEN A advance through France in August 1944, most of
FIELD DIVISION AND ITS REPLACEMENT AND the replacement and training units from the out-
TRAINING U N I T S . The table above shows how lying areas of the western W4wkreise were with-
the replacement training system, although greatly drawn farther east within the Wehrkreise. Evi-
l—68
UNCLASSIFIED
I MARCH 1945 TM-E 30-451
dently efforts were being made to preserve the Replacement Army. He exercises his authority
replacement and training structure within the efforts the Inspectors of Arms and Services,
Wehrkreise, even though they were part of the who issue directives regarding the particular
Theater of Operations. A similar attempt was training in their arms to the Wehrkreis headquar-
made in Wehrkreis I on the Eastern Front. In ters. These directives are based on tactical doc-
some instances, replacement units were moved to In worked out in detail by the Inspectorates of
another Wehrkreis, but then only to locations just Arms and Services in the General Army Office,
which, us t follow instructions from the Chief
across the boundary.
of Training and his Inspectors.
Late in 1944, Wehrkreis XII, the middle one
one directives for the training of Panzer troops
of the western Wehrkreise, moved some of its
are issued by the Inspector General of Panzer
replacements far inland into the central Wehr-
Troops, who is directly subordinate to Hitler.
kreise. These units, however, still remain at the The training of medical troops is directed by the
disposal of Wehrkreis XII. Chief Army Medical Inspector, who is directly
Early in 1945 affiliation between replacement subordinate to the Army High Command, and
units and field units was still valid as affiliation that of veterinary troops by the Chief Veterinary
from the field unit to the replacement unit, but Inspector, immediately under the Armed Forces
generally not in the other direction. High Command.
The training of potential officers and noncom-
4. Training
a i n i n g officers wherever it occurs, takes place
a. INTRODUCTION. (1) Types of training es- the under the command or under the supervi-
tablishments. The general military training of sion of the Inspector Genrral for Potential Of-
the German soldier takes place principally in the ficers and noncommissioned officers. His author-
training units of the Replacement Army, al- ity is restricted to supervision when this type of
though a certain amount of training also is given training takes place in establishments under the
in its replacement units. Training units also are command of the Chief of Training, the Inspector
prepared to conduct special courses in order to General of Panzer Troops, or any Wehrkreis
provide some types of specialized personnel, as headquarters. Special-service schools and spe-
required by the Field Army, and to secure a pool cialist training schools are under the command
of personnel trained with particular care as poten- of the Chief of Training I\-ith the exception of
tial officers and noncommissioned officers. In the Schools for Pawcr Troops. nhich are com-
addition to these general training units, numerous manded by the Inspector General of Panzer
schools and courses have been established with the Troops.
specific purpose of training potential officers and (3) Supplrwr~ztary tvaiilillg. The paragraphs
noncommissioned officers. Other schools, desig- below describe how the various types of training
nated as special-service schools (Waffenschulen), oned and schools discharge their functions. It
have the function of providing specialized train- should be kept in mind that these functions are
ing for officers and enlisted men of their partic- supplemented in many ways. A considerable
ular branch of service, developing its arms, equip- part of the military training in Germany is given
ment, and tactics with the help of their demonstra- in the form of pre-Army training by other mili-
tion units, and furnishing instructors for the tary and auxiliary organizations. Special abilities
Army. In addition, specialist training schools found in various civilian occupations are put to
are established to provide instruction for ordnance use by the Army. and only personnel with a cer-
officers, technical officials, and particularly non- tain professional backgromld are trained for a
commissioned officer-technicians, or for officers number of technical employments within the
and noncommissioned officers of all arms and Army. Civilian establishments sometimes are
services as specialists in certain particular func- used for the training of Army personnel; for
tions, such as air raid and gas protection. service s technical courses often are conducted
(2) Chain of command. The training in most in factories producing special types of equipment.
types of replacement and training units, which b. GEKERAL TRAINING. (1) Organization of
are under the command of the Wehrkreis head- training units. In principle, the training unit is
quarters exercised through intermediate staffs, a true image of the field unit which it supplies
is coordinated by the Chief of Training in the with trained replacements. Thus, the infantry
1—69
CHAIN OF COHMANO
COMMANDER OF THf
I
i
REPLACEMENT ARMY
- SUPERVISION
<s-
SUSOIDINATE TO THE
NSKCTOR GENERAL O f INSPECTOR GENERAL FOR
CHIEF O F T I A N N O
PANZER TROOPS POTENTIAL OFFICERS A NCOi
INSPECTOR
OF
PANZER TROOPS
X CO
WEHRKREIS NCO.
OFFICER APPLICANT RESERVE OFFICER OFFICER CANDIDATE ft OFFICER CANDIDATE OFFICER CANDIDATE NCO & OFFICER NCO < OFFICER OFFICER CANDIDATE OFFICER CANDIDATE
AND RESERVE OFFICER APPLICANT, « ADVANCED OFFICER ft ADVANCED OFFICER ft ADVANCED O F f U E l APPLICANT COURSES APPLICANT COURSES i ADVANCED OFFICER A ADVANCED OFFICER
APPLICANT COURSES ADVANCED RESERVE CANDIDATE COURSES CANDIDATE COURSES CANDIDATE COURSES CANDIDATE COURSES CANDIDATE COURSES
OFFICER CANDIDATE
COURSES
rVi
I MARCH 1945 U\jCLASS\F\ED TM-E 30451
training battalion, just like any battalion of an units. The latter are often placed in special com-
infantry regiment, consists of the lst, 2d, and 3d panies within the training battalions and regi-
rifle training companies, and the 4th machine-gun ments.
training company. This principle has been some- The basic training (Grundausbildung) in in-
what modified, however, in order to take advan- fantry training units normally is planned for 16
tage of specialized training personnel and to ex- weeks; actually this period now is reduced to 8
pedite the training; thus, drivers of horse-drawn weeks in most cases. This period may be followed
vehicles, for example, usually are not trained by an indefinite period of advanced training (Er-
within each training company but combined into weiterulzgsausbildztng), lasting up to the time of
a special detachment within the battalion. The transfer of the recruits to a field unit. The basic
infantry training regimental staff, in accordance training usually is divided into three parts, the
with the normal (pre-1944) composition of a reg- first of which is devoted to individual training, the
ular infantry regiment, usually controls three in- second to the training of the individual recruit
fantry training battalions, a 13th infantry-howit- within the framework of the squad, and the third
zer training company, and a 14th infantry anti- to the training of the squad within the framework
tank training company; in addition, however, it of the platoon. During the advanced training
often has controlled a 15th infantry signal train- period, the scope of training is amplified to include
ing company, and every second or third staff a exercises on reinforced company or, in artillery
16th infantry engineer training company to fur- and chemical warfare troops, even battalion level.
nish trained personnel for the signal platoons in The basic training components, listed in order of
battalion headquarters and the signal and engi- the importace attributed to them, are: combat
neers platoons in the regimental headquarters training, firing, lectures, drilling, sports. The drill
company. Recently, a 17th mortar training com- for the modern German soldier is far from what
pany has been added to train crews for the heavy is generally believed; drilling of the famous
mortars, introduced into the 4th and 8th com- goose-step is not permitted, and "present arms" is
panies of the infantry regiments of regular in- not taught.
fantry divisions. Only one training company (3) Training in rcplaccmcnt units. Although
for infantry mounted platoons in each Wehrkreis according to their organization basically not equip-
trained replacements for the mounted platoons ped for training purposes, the replacement units
of all the infantry regiments under its responsi- nevertheless perform training functions on a re-
bility. duced scale. This is done in three ways:
Recent developments, including the introduction After their induction into a replacement unit
of new weapons and the growing scarcity of which is not stationed in the same location as its
training personnel in conjunction with’ the in- corresponding training unit, the recruits immedi-
creasing pressure of time, have accentuated the ately are combined into training groups to under-
tendency of concentration and specialization of go a one to three-week period of preparatory
training, and continuous reorganizations of the training (Vor-Ausbildzmg) until they can be sent
field divisions have made the similarity between to a training unit.
field and training units less and less evident. Regular training functions are performed in
(2) Prograna in training units. The main re- the convalescent components of replacement units.
sponsibility for the training of recruits rests with Their purpose is to restore the health and physique
the commander of the training unit of company of convalescents until they regain full fitness for
size (company, battery, troop). The detailed field duty, and also to select and train instructors
training schedule is prepared within the frame- for the training units. For the latter purpose spe-
work of the company. The battalion commander cial courses are conducted by the convalescent
supervises the progress of the training in the units.
companies of his battalion and inspects the re- After regaining their fitness for field duty, the
cruits at the end of their basic training. The convalescents are sent to the transfer components
commanders of higher echelons coordinate the (Marschkompanien, etc.) of their replacement
training in the units under their command and units, where they are given advanced training un-
supervise it. They are also responsible for the til the time of their transfer to a field unit.
education and training of officers and potential c. NONCOMMISSIONED OFFICER TRAINING. (1)
officers and noncommissioned officers within these General categories. The two basic categories of
I—71
I MARCH 1945
UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30.451
noncommissioned officers are the ones enlisting who will be not over 38 years of age at the end
for either 12 or 4% years, called active or pro- of their service period; the age limit for men en-
fessional noncommissioned officers, and the con- listing for 4% years is 28 years. If acceptable,
scripts promoted to noncommissioned officer's these men are appointed noncommissioned officer
rank, called reserve noncommissioned officers. applicants by their battalion commanders.
The active noncommissioned officers may either (b) Training of nonconwzissio~ted oficer appli-
serve in ordinary noncommissioned officers' func- cants. The noncommissioned officer applicants
tions in the various arms and services or they may belonging to units of the Replacement Army are
receive specialized training as technicians. Typ- normally educated and trained at the Army non-
ical training establishments for ordinary noncom- commissioned officer schools, Up to February
missioned officers are the Army noncommissioned 1944, the training period of a noncommissioned
officers' schools (Heeres-Unterofizier-Schulen), officer applicant volunteer at an Army noncom-
for technicians the specialist training schools and missioned officer school was 10 months. The first
the special-service schools (Waffen-Schulen) of 4 months were devoted to basic training, and dur-
chemical warfare troops, engineers, and signal ing the remaining 6 months the applicant received
troops. In peacetime, noncommissioned officers training as a squad leader in his particular branch
serving 12 years were, at the end of their service, of service. In February 1944, the basic training
trained for civilian occupations in Army voca- was removed entirely from the Army noncommis-
tional schools (Heeresfachschulen) and Armed sioned officer schools, and the applicant volun-
Forces vocational schools (Wehrwachtfach- teers thenceforth were to be sent to training units
schulen) ; in wartime, this vocational training is of their appropriate arms for basic training, to-
restricted to the rehabilitation of men no longer gether with the other recruits inducted at the
fit for service. The reserve noncommissioned of- same time. The advanced training period, for ap-
ficers receive special training in noncommissioned plicant volunteers and appointed applicants alike,
officer courses (Unterfiihrer-Lehrgiinge), which was reduced to 5 months for branches having
may be conducted in the Field Army as well as Army noncommissioned officer schools of their
in the Replacement Army at various echelons. own, and to 3 months for some specialized
(2) Ordinary noncommissioned oficers. (a) branches, whose applicants are trained at scl~ool~
Selection. In peacetime and to an even larger of related branches. These periods may be sup-
degree, in wartime, the German High Command plemented by an additional period of 1 or 3
considers the possession of a highly qualified months, respectively, spent in training units, mak-
noncommissioned officer corps as of vital im- ing a total advanced training period of 6 months
portance for the effectiveness of the Army and before the applicants graduate from the Army
endeavors by all means of propaganda to fill its noncommissioned officer school and are promoted
ranks. For the professional noncommissioned to privates first class (Gefreite). They then are
officer corps two sources are open: transferred to a field unit.
Volunteers for the noncommissioned officer At present, there are about 22 Army noncom-
career may apply at the age of 1 6 5 years and, if missioned officer schools for infantry, one for
accepted by a selection center for potential Army mountain infantry, seven for Panzer troops, two
officers and noncommissioned officers, enter the for artillery, two for engineers, and one for signal
Army at the age of 17 as noncommissioned officer troops. These schools are usually organized like
applicants (Unterofizier-Bewerber, usually ab- a battalion of their respective arms; the Army
breviated U.B.). Some of these may have had noncommissioned officer schools for Panzer troops
pre-Army training for this career as junior cadets are specialized in one of the main branches of this
(Jungschiitzen) in Army noncommissioned of- arm (Panzer Grenadiers, tank crews, antitank
ficer preparatory schools (Heeres-Unterofizier- personnel, Panzer reconnaissance personnel).
Vorschulen). Men enlisting for long-term service while serv-
Conscripts already in service who wish to enlist ing in the Field Army (Kapitulanten des Feld-
for either 12 or 4% years must have a good record Izeeres) may take part either in a noncommis-
as leaders in combat, instructors, and disciplinar- sioned officer applicant course conducted by a field
ians. They can enlist only after one year's service headquarters, especially in a divisional combat
and are finally accepted only after 2 years' serv- school, or in a course at a field noncommissioned
ice. Only those are accepted for a 1Zyear term officer school (Feld-Unterofizier-Schule). In
l—72
I MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30451
their training, these schools approach field con- terminating their enlistment period, most of these
ditions to a much larger degree than the Army technicians have the opportunity, after taking ad-
noncommissioned officer schools; their training ditional courses at the appropriate specialist train-
periods last only about 2% months. There is one ing schools, to become advanced technical or ad,
field noncommissioned officer school for each of ministrative officials.
the three most important arms: infantry, Panzer (b) Training. In addition to an apprentice-
troops, and artillery. They originally were located ship in Army units or headquarters required for
in occupied territories, but now apparently have most of the technician careers, courses of varying
been removed to Germany proper. They are be- length are conducted for the various types of
lieved to be organized like a regiment of their technicians at the specialist training schools and
respective arms, including some or all of its more some special-service schools. In many cases, short
important special branches. or wartime courses have been established to sup-
(3) Noncomntissioned o@cer technicians. (a) ply sufficient personnel for the wartime Army;
Selection. A number of careers as technicians the men participating in these courses, however,
(Sonderlaufbahnen) are open for active noncom- usually will not become full-fledged technicians
missioned officers who, as a rule, must have en- upon graduating from these courses but only after
listed for 12 years; exceptions are the medical taking additional courses at a later opportunity.
technicians, blacksmith technicians, and musicians, These men are not necessarily active soldiers; if
who will also be accepted if they enlist for the they did not enlist for long-term service, they are
4>&year period. For most of these careers, quali- designated as reserve noncommissioned officer
fied professional backgrounds are required. Upon technicians.
Length of Course
Peace War
NCO Technician Germwt Designation Training School (where Knowa)
Supply Technician Schirrmeister (F) Army Riding and 12 months
(H-Dr T) Driving School
Supply Technician Schirrmeister (K) School for Army 4 months
(MT) Motorization
Supply Technician Schirrmeister (P) Engineer School 2 3 months
(Engr)
Supply Technician Schirrmeister (PT)
(Tech Engr)
Supply Technician Schirrmeister (EP) Railway Engineer
(Ry Engr) School
Supply Technician Schirrmeister (Ch) School for Chemical 7 months Al/2 months
(CW) Warfare Troops
Supply Technician Schirrmeister (Sch) Spandau Army 6 months
(SL) Equipment Depot
Supply Technician Schirrmeister (Fz)
(Ord)
Ordnance Technician Feuerwerker Army Ordnance Tech- 18 months 6 months
nician Schools
I and II
Weapon Technician Waffen-Unteroffizier Army Weapon Tech- 12 months 3-5 months
nician Schools
I and II
Signal Supply Tech- Funkmeister Army Signal School 9 months 3 months
nician II
Pigeoneer Brief taubenmeister School for Dog and 7 months
Pigeon Service
Fortress-Engineer Festungspionier- Fortress Engineer 3 years
Technician Unteroffizier School
Fortress Maintenance Wall-Unteroffizier Fortress Maintenance 12 months
Technician School
Medical Technician Sanitats-Unteroffizier Medical schools 9 months
Blacksmith Technician Beschlagschmied- Army Blacksmith 4 months 2 months
Unteroffizier schools
Musician Technician Musiker
l—73
I MARCH 1945
UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451
The table on page 73 shows the various types of fiihrer) and to supp1y sergeants for weapons and
technicians, the duration of their courses, and the equipment (Gerat-Unteroffizicre).
schools conducting these courses. (c) Trailzing at specialist training schools.
(4) Training of reserve llolzcollzllzissioned of- Gas protection noncommissionetl officers (Gas-
ficer applicants. Conscripts who are acceptable schuts-Untrrojjizievc) take courses at Army Gas
as future noncommissioned officers and are con- Protection Schools 1 and 2, or at the H’ehrkreis
sidered for promotion, but who are not enlisting gas protection courses. Other noncommissioned
for a definite service period, are appointed reserve officers receive special training in fire fighting at
noncommissioned officer applicants (Reserve- the Army Air Raid Protection School or at the
Utzterbfizier-Bewerber usually abbreviated R.U. Wehrkreis air raid protection courses. Field
B.) by their battalion commanders. The train- cook noncommissioned officel-s (Fcldkoch-Unter-
ing of the reserve officer applicants normally ofiziere)( mess sergeants (Kiirhcrl-Unterofi-
takes place at Wehrkreis noncommissioned officer ziere), and mess clerks (Kiichmbm-hfiihrer) are
courses (Wehrkreis-Unterfiihrer-Lehrgiinge), al- trained at Wehrkreis cook schools or by field
though reserve officer applicants recently have also cook instruction staffs.
been trained at Army noncommissioned officer
(6) Training of illtclligmce personnel. Lin-
schools. Each of the original Wchrkreise has
guists who may be employed as interpreters
one Wehrkreis noncommissioned course, usually
(Dolmetschcr) in all branches of the Army, but
located at a maneuver area within the Wehrkreis
particularly as intelligence personnel, usually hold
itself or in a neighboring Wehrkreis. These
the position of specialist leaders (Sorldevfiihrer)
courses are more or less organized like infantry
regardless of their actual noncommissioned of-
regiments, but often include, in addition to reg-
ficer or officer rank. They receive linguistic and
ular infantry components, other types of specialist
intelligence training in the interpreter companies,
sub-units, such as a reconnaissance troop, a mor-
of which there is one in each Wrhrkreis, and in
tar training company, or a field howitzer battery.
the ,Interpreter Demonstration Battalion. In ad-
In some Wehrkreise, sub-units of the Wehrkreis
dition, a Signal Interpreter Replacement and
noncommissioned officer course for arms other
Training Battalion trains signal intelligence per-
than infantry may be established with existing
sonnel.
training units or Army noncommissioned officer
schools of these arms. In Wehrkrcis IX, in ad- d. T H E TRAINING OF POTENTIAL OFFICERS.
dition to its regular Wehvkreis noncommissioned (1) General. The system for training German
officer course, such a course for Pamer troops officer replacements in wartime normally extends
has been identified. over a period of between 16 and 20 months (in-
cluding prescribed service in the field) and is
(5) Training of noncommissioned officers for divided into three main phases. These phases
special functions. A number of noncommis- differ slightly for active and reserve officer re-
sioned officers are employed in functions requir- placements, but the duration and standard of
ing special training without being technicians. training are identical. The only difference be-
These may be trained within their own or other tween active and reserve officers is that the former
units or headquarters by practical experience and enroll for an unlimited period of service and have
apprenticeship, or in special courses conducted to meet slightly higher physical requirements.
by units or headquarters (in the field usually by For both categories, the training during the three
the division combat schools, in the Replacement main phases takes place in schools and courses
Army by the Wehrkreise), or at specialist train- devoted to this particular purpose. In the first
ing schools. phase, these are either officer applicant courses or
(a) Training by practicd experience. First reserve officer applicant courses; in the second
sergeants (Hauptfeldwebel), clbthing supply ser- phase officer candidate schools or courses; and
geants (Bekleidungs-Unterofziere), and similar in the third phase advanced officer candidate
types of special function noncommissioned officers courses.
usually are trained in this manner.
In certain cases selected enlisted men who are
(b) Training in special courses conducted by over 30 years old and have served in the field
units and headquarters. This type of training in cambat units may become officers without at-
usually applies to company clerks (Rechnungs- tending officer candidate schools or courses but
1—74
I MARCH 1945
UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 36-451
merely after a very few months of additional (c) Oficer candidate trairzing. After comple-
service in the field as officer candidates. tion of their training in the Replacement Army.
The following paragraphs outline the normal the officer applicants are transferred to a field
procedure for selecting and training active and unit for a period of not longer than 3 months in
reserve officer replacements. order to demonstrate their leadership abilities in
(2) Potelztial active officers (aktivcr Ofizier- the field. The latest tendency has been to reduce
Nachwuchs). (a) Selectioll. Future active of- this period as much as possible, even down to a
ficers are selected in the following three ways: very few days, in order to preserve the potential
Untrained volunteers, usually at the age of 16 officers who, after completion of 10 months of
or 17, after a preliminary selection by a selection training in the Replacement Army, represent a
center for future Army officers and noncommis- valuable investment of the Army. As soon as
sioned officers (Amahmcstclle fiir dm Fiihrer- they have proved themselves in the field they
llachwuchs dcs Heeves), enroll for an unlimited are appointed officer candidates (Fahnenjunker)
period and enter the Army as officer applicants and sent to an officer candidate course (Fhj.-
(Ofizier-Be,werber, usually abbreviated O.B.). Lchrgang) of 3 to 4 months' duration. These
courses are usually conducted at the special-serv-
Conscripts already serving who are under 28
ice schools; the infantry, Panzer troops, and ar-
and decide to apply for the active officer career
tillery, however, have separate officer candidate
first are appointed reserve officer applicants
schools and courses. It should be noted that
(Reserve-Ofizier-Bewcrber, usually abbreviated
these courses are not only attended by personnel
R.O.B.), or if they have already attained noncom-
who have passed through the officer applicant
missioned officer grade, reserve officer candidates
training period but also by conscript and profes-
(Fahnenjmker der Reserve, usually abbreviated
sional noncommissioned officers who have been
Fhj.d.R.), by their regimental (or independent
appointed reserve officer candidates by their regi-
battalion) commanders. A note is added to the
mental (or independent battalion) commanders.
record indicating that they intend to adopt the
Toward the middle of the course, the candidates
active officer career. They are accepted for this
are promoted to officer candidate-staff sergeants
career upon graduating from the officer candidate
(Fahnenjunker-Fcldwcbel, usually abbreviated
course, but they must first attend a reserve officer
Fhj. Fzu.) ; upon graduation they are promoted to
applicant course if they have not already attained
advanced officer cancliates (Oberfdhnriche, usual-
noncommissioned officer grade.
ly abbreviated Obfiih~.).
Professional noncommissioned officers may,
after at least 2 months of service in the field, be (d) Advanced oficer candidate training.
appointed officer candidates (Fahnenjunker, usu- After completing the officer candidate course, the
ally abbreviated Fhj.) and be sent to an officer candidates attend an advanced officer candidate
candidate course. course (Obcvfiihnr.Lchrga,zg) lasting 3 months.
(b) Oficer applicalzt training. This first phase These courses usually are conducted at the special-
of the training of future officers lasts 10 months service schools. For advanced officer candidates
and is designed for the untrained volunteer of- of the infantry they may be conducted at especial-
ficer applicants. It is divided into the following ly designated infantry officer candidate schools,
two periods: and for those of the Pame troops T the Panzer
troop advanced officer candidate schools. Upon
Four months of basic training in a training
graduation from these courses, the candidates are
unit.
promoted to second lieutenants (Leutnant, usu-
Six months of noncommissioned officer train-
ally abbreviated Lt.) (The word "promote"—
ing in an officer applicant course (O.B.-Lehr-
befordevn is always used ; German officers are not
gang1. These courses usually take place at Army
commissioned).
noncommissioned officer schools, some of which
are reserved exclusively to this type of courses. (3) Potelztial reserve oficers (Reserve-O@
In some special branches, officer applicant courses zier-Naclnvuchs). (a) Selection. Potential re-
are held at the special-service schools or at train- serve officers are selected in the following ways:
ing units. Upon graduation from the course, in Untrained volunteers may be accepted by the
which they are especially trained as squad leaders, selection centers for potential Army officers and
the applicants are usually promoted to noncom- noncommissioned officers as aspirants for the re-
missioned officers. serve officer career (Anw iir die t e r
1—75
I MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-45I
O fizier-Laufbahn). They are appointed reserve ing these courses, they are promoted to reserve
officer applicants by the regimental (or independ- officer candidate-staff sergeants (F1aj.Fw.d.R.))
ent battalion) commander of their responsible re- and upon their termination to advanced reserve
placement unit after 4 months' service. officer candidates (Oberfiihrwicll dcr Reserve,
During the’ condcription procedure suitable men usually abbreviated 0berftilznr.d.R.).
may be selected by the commanders of recruiting (d) Advanced reserve oficcr candidate train-
sub-area headquarters. They have a similar ing. The courses for advanced reserve officer
career to that of the untrained volunteers de- candidates usually are conducted by the Wehr-
scribed above. kreis headquarters. Upon graduation from these
Conscripts in basic training may be appointed courses, the candidates are promoted to reserve
reserve officer applicants by the regimental (or second lieutenants (Lcutwant dcr Reserve, usu-
independent battalion) commander of their re- ally abbreviated Lt.d.R.).
placement or training unit. (4) Potential oficer specialists. Slightly dif-
Conscripts already serving for some time may ferent rules apply for the training of potential of-
be appointed reserve officer applicants, or, if they ficers in specialist careers who, in addition to their
have already attained noncommissioned officer military education, require a certain type of pro-
grade and, within 1 year previous to the date of fessional training. These are the careers of med-
their appointment, have proved themselves in a ical officer, veterinary officer, ordnance officer, and
field unit, may be appointed reserve officer candi- officer of the motor maintenance troops. In addi-
dates, by the regimental (or independent battal- tion, the administrative officer and judge advocate
ion) commander of their field or replacement careers in the Special Troop Service require spe-
unit. cial rules regarding the replacement of their of-
(b) Reserve oficer applicant training. Un- ficers.
trained potential reserve officers first undergo (a) Potential medical officers (Sanitiits-Of-
4 months of basic training, after which they fiziev-Nachzvuchs). Active medical officer ap-
are appointed reserve officer applicants. Reserve plicants are selected from secondary school gradu-
officer applicants who have had their basic train- ate volunteers by the Wehrkrcis surgeon in con-
ing spend 6 months in a reserve officer applicant nection with the recruiting sub-area commander.
course (R.O.B.-Lehrgang). These courses usu- They take part in the officer applicant training
ally are conducted by the headquarters of replace- conducted for potential infantry officers, and after
ment and training units, and some infantry and its conclusion and a short assignment to a field
artillery replacement regiments have special of- unit are appointed officer candidates. At that time,
ficer replacement companies and batteries (Of- they are assigned to the Medical Officer Academy
fizier-Nachzvuchs-Kompanien-Batterien) for this and begin taking medical courses at the university.
purpose. Recently, however, the ones for infan- After a certain period of time they are promoted
try officer applicants have been more and more to medical technical sergeant (Fcldmtcrarzt).
concentrated on Wehrkreis level; the W&l-kreis Upon passing their medical examination, they be-
headquarters may designate a particular infantry come officers. Soldiers of the Field and Replace-
replacement battalion as an officer replacement ment Army may be accepted for this career if
battalion (Ofizier-Nachwuchs-Bataillon), or con- they fulfill the requiremellts. Doctors and medical
duct a special Wehrkreis reserve officer applicant students may become reserve medical officers.
course (Wkr. R.O.B.-Lehrgang). Upon conclu- While taking medical courses at universities, the
sion of this course, in which they are primarily reserve medical officer candidates are assigned to
trained as squad leaders, the applicants are usu- medical officer feeder battalions (Sanitiitsofi;xier-
ally promoted to noncommissioned officers. Ergiinzungs-Abteilungen).
(c) Reserve oficer candidate training. After (b) Potential veteriwary oficers (Veterikiir-
completion of their training in the Replacement Ofizier-Nachwuchs). Like the medical officer
Army, the reserve officer applicants, just like the applicants, the active veterinary officer applicants
active officer applicants, are transferred to a field are selected from young civilian voiunteers and
unit to prove themselves worthy. and then are from soldiers of the Field and Replacement
appointed reserve officer candidates. Subsequent- Armies. Their officer applicant training takes
ly, they attend the same officer candidate schools place in a mounted replacement and training unit.
or courses as the active officer candidates, Dur- After their promotion to officer candidates they
J—76
I MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIED TM-E3<M5,
are assigned to the Army Veterinary Academy. tration School; active officer candidates in the
a r e become assig n e d upon passing their higher brackets are believed to be assigned to the
veterinarian examinations. Veterinarians and vet- Administrative Academy while taking law courses
erinary students may become reserve veterinary at the University of Berlin. The officers of the
officers. judge advocate career are recruited from soldiers
(c) Potential ordnance officers (Offizier (IV)- who are acceptable as officers of the fighting
Nachwuchs). Active ordnance officers are re- troops and, at the same time, have the professional
cruited from active ordnance technicians; reserve qualifications to become judge advocates.
ordnance officers from ordnance technicians with (5) The traifaing of oficers for special func-
wartime training who did not enlist for the 12- tions. Officers employed in specialized functions
year period. They are selected by their regimental within the scope of their particular branch of serv-
(or independent battalion) commander and sent ice are trained for these functions at the special-
to an ordnance officer candidate course (Fahnen- service schools of their arm. The most important
junker (W)-Lehrgang) at Army Ordnance ones of these are: Infantry School, Mountain
School I. During this course, which lasts 3 Infantry School, Reconnaissance and Cavalry
months for active ordnance technicians, and 9 School, Bergen and Krampnitz Schools for
months for reserve ordnance technicians, they are Panzer Troops, Artillery Schools I and II, School
appointed ordnance officer candidates (Fahnen- for Chemical Warfare Troops, Engineer Schools
junker (IV)) by the commander of the Army 1 and 2, Army Signal Schools I and II, Army
Ordnance School. Upon graduating from these Supply Troop School, Motor Maintenance Troop
courses, they are promoted to ordnance lieuten- School, Army Administration School.
ants (Leutnant (IV)).
Officers who are employed in special functions
(d) Potential officers of the motor maintenance not in connection with their branch of service are
troops (Offizier-Nachwuchs der Kraftfakrpark- trained in schools or courses established for this
truppe). Active motor maintenance officers are purpose which arc described below.
recruited from supply technicians ( M T ) who are
General Staff Corps Officers (Generalstabs-
appointed officer candidates by their regimental
Ofiziere) belong to the General Staff Corps
(or independent battalion) commander and sent
to officer candidate courses at the Motor Mainte- (Generalstab), and usually are appointed either
nance Troop School. In addition, active or re- to the Army General Staff (Generalstab dcs
serve advanced officer candidates of other arms Heeres) or to one of the General Staff assign-
may be taken over into the motor maintenance ments (Generalstabsstellc~) on lolver staffs. These
troops to receive 2 to 3 months of special training latter are believed to be the assignments as chief
at the Motor Maintenance Troop School, provided of staff, assistant chief of staff for operations—
they have the required technical background. Sol- G-3 (I-a), assistant chief of staff for supply—
diers in motor maintenance units who are over 38 G-4 (Quautievweister, I-b), assistant chief of
years old, after at least 18 months of service, may staff for intelligence —G-2 (I-c) of headquarters
be sent to the officer candidate courses at the Mo- down to corps, and as G-3 in divisions. Active
tor Maintenance Troop School; younger men may officers, usually with the rank of captain, who are
be transferred to a tank or Panzer Grenadier regi- not over 28 years old, have exceptional personal-
ment and sent to a Panzer troop officer candidate ities, are qualified for a leading position, and have
course, to become reserve motor maintenance of- shown exceptional performance in at least 6
ficers. months of service at the front may be recom-
(e) Potential officers of the Special Troop mended for General Staff Corps training by their
Service (Offizier-Nachwuchs des Truppensonder- commanding officers. If accepted, they are, ac-
dienstes). The Special Troop Service includes the cording to the regular training schedule, assigned
administrative career (Laufbahn des Verwal- to the War Academy for a period of 1 year,
tungsdienstes) and the judge advocate career The first month of this period is spent at a spe-
(Laufbahn der W ehrmachtrichter). The officers cial-service school and the next 6 months at the
of the administrative career are recruited from War Academy itself. The aspirants then are at-
soldiers acceptable as officers of the fighting tached to the General Staff Corps (Generalstab)
troops. Officer candidates of this career in the for 5 months and are taken into it permanently if
lower brackets are trained at the Army Adminis- accepted.
1—77
I MARCH 1945
UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451
(6) Senior personnel oficers (Hijhere Adju- lished by armies or army groups in their rear
tant en). Courses for senior personnel officers are areas.
conducted by the Army Personnel Office. They (9) National-Socialist guidance officers (NS-
are usually held at leading Army schools, such as Fiihrungsofiziere), usually abbreviated (NSFO).
the War Academy or a special-service school. National-Socialist guidance officers for divisions
and higher headquarters take part in courses con-
(7) Battalion commandeYs (BtL-(Abt.-)
ducted by an Instruction Staff for N S Indoc-
Fiihrer). Special courses for battalion com- trination.
manders are conducted at an Army School for (10) Gas protection officers (Gasabwehr-Of-
Battalion Commanders. fiziere) usually abbreviated Gabo). Courses for
(8) Com,pany cowimanders (Kompanieftihrer). gas protection officers are conducted at Army Gas
Schools for company commanders may be estab- Protection Schools 1 and 2.
I—78
I MARCH 1945 TM-E 30-451
UNCLASSIFIED
CHAPTER II
ORGANIZATION OF THE
FIELD FORCES
Section I. OVER-ALL FIELD at various points since the spring of 1941. The
ORGANIZATION Commander-in-Chief and the bulk of the General
Staff of each High Command are stationed at
The High Command frameworks below the field headquarters, while the non-operational
Army High Command are the Army Groups branches back in the Zone of the Interior con-
(Hcevcsgruppelzl~onlIl~arldos) that are formed for tinue to handle all basic administrative matters,
particular campaigns to control two to four procurement, mobilization, training and replace-
Armies in a single Theater of Operations, or in ment of personnel, and equipment.
an important and more or less self-contained Hitler is the Supreme Commander of the
sector under such a theater. Since 1941 the total Armed Forces (Oberster Befehlshaber der Welr-
number of army groups has been between four macht). His Deputy as such is General Field
and twelve. Marshall Wilhelm Keitel, Chief of the Armed
The chart on page 3 shows the variations in the Forces High Command (Chef des Oberkom-
number of Armies (Aumeeoberkonmandos) per mando der Wehmmacht).
army group, of corps per army and of divisions Under the Armed Forces High Command the
per corps. functions of the joint general staff are performed
by what is known as the Armed Forces Opera-
tions Staff ( Wehmachtfiihrwgsstaf-W.F.St).
Section II. HIGH COMMAND The field headquarters of the Armed Forces
IN THE FIELD High Command which includes the principal sec-
tions of the Armed Forces Operations Staff is
Under the German military system the basic known as the Fiilzre~hauptqzlavticr. During the
principle is unity of command at all levels. Thus Polish campaign it was stationed between Berlin
the Army, Navy, and Air Force are considered and the Polish Frontier, moving to the Rhineland
branches of a single service, the Armed Forces for the Western campaign in 1940, back to the
(Wehrmacht). This joint High Command is re- East in 1941, and again to the West in 1944.
sponsible for the whole preparation of defense in Hitler's headquarters (Fiilzrerlzaztptquartier) is
time of peace and for the general conduct of war; believed to have moved recently to southern Ger-
it appoints commands for the joint task forces many where it is probably located in the vicinity
in the field and sees to it that the efforts of the of Berchtesgaden.
three branches of the armed forces are thoroughly The personnel of the Armed Forces High
coordinated. Command is drawn from all three branches, but
In time of war the Armed Forces High Com- the Army naturally has the largest representation.
mand, as well as the High Command of each The name of a command, organization, or unit
of the three branches establishes a field headquar- deriving from the Armed Forces High Command
ters away from Berlin for the conduct of opera- is often prefixed by Wehmlacht- or Fiihrungs in
tions. Its location at any given time depends on order to distinguish it from a similar command,
the theater to which the main attention is being organization, or unit in one of the three branches.
directed. In the case of the Navy, it is usually Since December 1941, when von Brauchitsch
at one of the naval bases while the headquarters was dismissed as Commander-in-Chief of the
of the Army, the Air Force and the Armed Army (Oberbefehlshuber des Heeres), and Hitler
Forces have been in close proximity to each other took direct control of the Army, the field head-
II—I
A Gps
U. S. Designations : A H Comd (Heercsgrupperl- Gps Corps Divs 73
(0 K H) (Annceoberkommu~dos) (Korps) (Divisionrn) o
kommandos) i
Obrrbrfrhlslrabrr Oberbefehlshabcr dcr Urfchlshuber c!t~s K omuumdicrender Divisionskommandeur
CG
des Hcercs Heeresgrlcppe Armeeobcrkommandos General
Chef des Gencralstabcs
c of s Chef des Gozr~ralstabcs Chef dcs Gemralstabcs Chrf drs Gcncralstabcs (I-a)
dcs Heeres
Offs Heerespersonalam t II-a, I. Adjztttr;lt II-a, 1. Adjzmlt I I-a, 1. Adjutunt IT-a, I. Adjutant
G1
.EM Allgevneines Heeresavrlt II-c, 2. Adjzltallt II-c, 2. Adjzbtant II-c, 2. Adjutant II-c, 2. AdjzLtaxt
Tmppelzabteilung
G-2 Obrrqllnrtierl)lcistr~ I-c, 3. Gcncral- I-c, 3. Grncral- I-c, 3. General- I-c, 3. Gcnrral-
IV stabsofizicr stabsofiioier stabsofiiairr stabsofizier
C Engr 0 General der General dev Piolzirrc lrlrc piorzicrfiihr c,r Stubsofizi(vr drr I’ionirrc Kommandeur dcs
Pionirre und Festungm (Gela. d. Pi.) (A. Pi. Fii.) (.Ytopi) Pionierbataillons i
:&•
Gerzeral fiir .Stabso#ii=icr fiir .Ctrrbsofi.zicr fiir Stabsoffizier fiir Kominnndeur der
C AT 0 P anzrrabwchr Panzcrbckampfung ? Panzcrbcka'mp fung I’ull=‘~rbc~kiimpfu,~g l’u,z,-erjiigcrabteilung
(Stopak)
Figure I.—German designations of Stf Offs and Sets ilt the higher cchelom.
O
I
1. The highest echelon of the High Command framework now 6. Organic army group troops are-—besi~les the army croup
consists of 12 army groups. signal regiment—various staffs and units dealing with adminis- y
2. Each army group has two to four armies. There are three
types of armies: ordinary armies, Panzer armies, and one para-
trative and operational matters within its territory, including the
t r a t area. Organic army troops are—-besides the army signal o.
chute army. reararea.—various police units,troopssupplystaffs, a field post office
3. Each army has two to seven corps. There are six types of regiment a propaganda company. units,0rsupplyganic corps troops afieldare-—besides
the corps signal battalion—acompany. police detachmrnt, a supply staff. R
corp^: Infantry; Mountain, Panccr; Parachute; Corps Commands, thg corpssign a map-printing unit,detachmrnt,amedical company, a veer-
and Reserve. i d g e c o l u m n , a field post oficeunit, and various other services.
4. Each corps has two to seven divisions. 7. o m p a n y , troops vary according to mission. (For the types
5. For the different type of divisions see charts, Section V. of GIIQ units sec Sections V I and V I I . )
quarters of the Army High Command virtually General Staff officer in charge of operations is
has been merged with that of the Armed Forces simultaneously head of the staff.
High Command. The functions of the two, how- The sections of these statis are numbered with
ever, have remained distinct, and there has been Roman numerals and letters. Similar to the CUS-
no personal union except at the top. Keitel acts tom in the U. S. Army, the numbers represent
as Hitler's deputy in the latter's capacity as Com- the sections as well as the men in charge of them.
mander-in-chief of the Army as well as in his Originally the positions of I-a, I-b, I-c and I-d
capacity as Supreme Commander of the Armed were all reserved for officers of the German Gen-
Forces. eral Staff Corps, but in 1944 the I-c at division
and I-d at army and army group were frequently
For the organization of the Armed Forces
identified as not being General Staff officers.
High Command see Figure 4, Chapter 1.
Figure 3 shows in numerical order the designa-
For the organization of the Army High Com- tions of the staff officers and sections, and Figure
mand see Figure 5, Chapter 1. 4 shows the same staff officers and sections as
The Fiilzverl~auptquarticr is frequently located they function operationally.
in special trains. It is at all times well protected . The headquarters of an army group is organ-
against air or land attacks by crack SS units. ized similarly to that of an army, but the ranks
In addition to those the following two units of of the officers holding corresponding positions are
the elite army motorized division, the Gross- higher.
deutschland Patloev Grefladier Division, have been The headquarters of a corps also is organized
temporarily charged with that protection and similarly to that of an army; however, the spe-
were therefore awarded the honor of including cialist officers more frequently take command in
"The Fiihrer" in their unit designation. These the field of all the units of their arm whether
units are: organic or attached.
The Pi&rev Escort Brigade, which consists of The headquarters of divisions also are organ-
three infantry battalions, one artillery battalion, ized similarly with most of the specialist officers
one tank regiment (including one battalion of being simultaneously in command of the units of
Pz. Kpfw.IV and one battalion of assault guns), their arms, e.g. the commanding officer of the
and one engineer company; division artillery regiment (Avtilleriefiilzrer-ArfE)
The Fiihrcr Grenadier Brigade which con- is also the chief artillery officer on the specialist
sists of: staff of the division commander. When General
Two infantry battalions (one motorized and one Headquarters artillery units are attached to the
armored) ; one battalion of self-propelled artil- division this Arfii usually is subordinated to a
lery ; one assault gun company; one Panther tank special artillery commander known as Artillerie-
battalion. komnzandeur whose small special staff is supple-
mented in action by the organic staff of the divi-
sion artillery regiment.
Section III. ORGANIZATION OF While some of the designations of staff officers
HIGHER HEADQUARTERS and sections remain unchanged in all echelons of
higher headquarters (as the U. S. designations
The headquarters of all German divisions, do) several of these titles vary in accordance with
corps, armies, and army groups consist of com- the rank and echelon in which they are function-
mand staffs (Ko-tmaandobehiirden) which are or- ing.
ganized in a uniform manner. Corps and higher It should be noted that the main channel of
staffs are known as senior command staffs supplies flows from the Zone of the Interior via
(hb’here Kommasadobehb’rden). They are headed army to division, while the army group and the
by a chief of staff, whereas in divisions the first corps are primarily tactical headquarters.
I MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-45I
neni
*I
ler
• V
I X
s
I
•i 4
"2
3
o ,_ S .E
— o •§
•s
II
I
eco
ec Q..
u
IS
6 "P o
I JS
s i
1T
11
> •?
>
o 5.
is
IL
f S
(Misc)
u
«t
5 (/) O
w -53
>3 4 5
w C u
u
Eco
I
J
u
"a
o S O a
UJ
| 5 S
1
la! O
n
_ S O O
£
o I
C Tnsp
?
UJ
Sj u
<
Asgd Sped Os
C Arty O
o
s o
6
II—5
I MARCH 1945 TM-E 30-45I
“NCLASS’F’ED
0 O X
<
i U u
3
T
>
If
1
a 0
o
E
< —i
TJ
C o ~
o
1
O • = •s i o
o 0
i — a i=
*> a
a
X 'i
i! ii 0
u i _c w
<c
i S 8
z
1 1 1
a
a.
5
1
o O 0 o
0
1
c tn
<
Ar
in
u
1
I
Toe Gp '
I 1 o
a
1°
2!
O
11—6
I MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451
DIVISIONS
COMPONESTS
Figure 5.
Il—8
r MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-45I
DIVISIONS
COMPONENTS
Inf Inf Arty Armd AA Projectors AT Engr Srrv
Inf Regt Inf Regt Arty Regt — — — A T Bn Fklgr n n Div Scrv
.SS Inf Regt S’S Inf Regt S S Arty Regt — SS .\A Hn .‘S :4T Bn .hS Engr Bn Div Sew
Figure 5. (Conlimed)
II—9
I MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451
DIVISIONS
Weapons and equipment (type distribution in the main types of divisions listed
under paragraph 1.)
c
D
o
H
lorts
1i c
Cbns
TYPES OF DIVISIOSS h E
MGs
c-i C E
UILU-
/20-1
0 s
fin
C "*
0
? OG
a 1-1 X CO ^ ^ c.-r «
SS Infantry Division—Organized and quipped similarly to the Infantry Division 1944 Type, INNc\-cr wit11 an addi-
tional Antiaircraft Battalion and slightly stronger components.
Army Light Division—Organized and equipped similarly to the Army Mountain I)ivisiou wit11 sliglltly more motori-
zation.
SS Mountain I~ivision—Orgatliz~(l similarly to the Army Mountain Division, however \vith two mot-e Mountain
Infantry Battalions. one A\ntiaircraft Battalion and a Tank or Assault Gun Company.
551 Motorized l)ivisioll—-Organized similarly to the Army Motorized Division, ho\\ever Nitll additional .\ntiaircraft
Companies and an Artillery Observation Battery.
Figure 6.
11—40
I MARCH 1945 TM-E 30-451
UNCLASSIFIED
DIVISIONS
Weapons and equipment (type distribution in the main types of divisions listed
under paragraph 1.)
37-mm AA/AT Guns
75-mm AT Gur
75-mm Tk Gun
75-mm Tk Gun
88-mm AA/AT
IV's
150-mm Hows
150-mm Hows
105-mm Gun/
105-mm Gun/
75-mm Guns
150-mm Inf-
75-mm Inf-
(Superlong)
75-mm AT
Hows (SP)
Hows (SP)
Hows (SP)
Guns (SP)
Inf-Hows
(Mtr-Dr)
Inf-Hows
Pz. Kpfw.
Vehicles
Vehicles
150-mm
75-mm
(Long)
Mtrels
Hows
Guns
H-Dr
Mtr
X
30 44 48 8 12 12 12 12 6 48 26.37 469
8 12 47 52 51 8 12 12 12 12 12 6 52 52 2685 480
8 12 69 64 62 12 24 12 12 12 12 6 64 62 3329 530
and
12 Hv
Guns
21 14 12 20 24 12 2141 389
Figure 6. (Co&wed)
II—II
I MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451
o
I
LIGHT ENGR CO
RAD CO AT CO MED
ARTY BN (PARTLY
UNITS
MTZI
LIGHT LIGHT HV CO
— INF BN INF BN VET CO
SIG CLM ARTY BN IMTZ)
5
LIGHT 13TH (INF 13TH (INF 13TH (INF MEDIUM LIGHT
CO
RCN CLM H O W I CO H O W ) CO H O W I CO ARTY BN ENGR CLM CO
UNIT
^ S EK Em Ez E ; E ; ES gB .§ I
Div Hq . 158 2 17 31
Rcn Bn 625 625
25 8 3 3 4 •> 3 45 3 3 213
Sig Bn 474 17 M 103 7 52
Inf Regt 3 250 m 3 V 123 18 6 2 47 T\ 210 683
Inf Regt
00 00
3,250 123
12; 36 27 12 123 6 2 47 7i 210 683
Inf Regt 3,250 12:
123 36 123 12 123 6 2 27 123 210 683
Arty Regt 2 500 32
32 32 4 8 40 105 229 2,274
AT Bn 50 IS
IF % 45 114
Engr Bn x4.3 x4
x4 9 20 44 87 19 52
Div Serv 2.300 3C
30 8 88 253 245 735
Total’ .. .. 17.200 527
52/ 116 90 17. 11 84 58 20 6 36 4 8 20 3 452 942 1,133 5,375
1
A Rep1 Bn may be added to any Inf Div.
Figwe 8.—Iflfantry Division, Old Type, fotnl strellgtk lf,200.
Also company and battalion trains have been signed to the division headquarters. This type
merged into battalion supply platoons, thus free- of division is shown on the Figures 14 and 15 as
ing the company commander from all duties other Folks Grenadier Division.
than operational and facilitating a more even dis- e. S S INFANTRY DIVISION (SS Grmadirr-
tribution of all types of supplies with less person- divisio~zc~~) ( T H R E E SS REGIMENTS OF TWO BAT-
nel. Bazookas replace all antitank guns in the TACIONS E A C H ) . The great majority of German
infantry regiments; the artillery regiment is or- infantry divisions are army infantry divisions.
ganized in batteries of six guns instead of four, However, there are also scLvcra1 SS infantry
with one battalion of eighteen 75-mm guns re- divisions (SS-Gretzadier di?isioflen) which have
placing a normal battalion of twelve 105mm been formed by the armed SS (WaffrwSS).
gun/howitzers. An additional new feature is the This type of division is organized similarly to the
formation of a divisional supply regiment which Infantry Division, 1944 Type, but it has slightly
combines all the divisional syrvicrs except thr stronger components and inclutlt3 an organic anti-
military police detachment which has been as- aircraft battalion.
IL—14
I
GERMAN INFANTRY DIVISION T
1944 TYPE 1
1
i
I I
i
DIV HO FUS BN SIG BN INF REGT INF REGT INF REGT ARTY AT BN ENGR BN DIV SERV
REGT
I I I 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
-
MAP RE- BN HO — BN HO — REGTl HQ — REGTL HO REGTL HQ REGTL HQ BN HQ — BN HQ DIV SUP
PRO SEC
MP DET R CO
IBCL)
— TP CO —
REGTL
HQ CO —
REGTL
HO CO
UGTL
HQ CO
REGTL
HQ BTRY
BN HQ
CO
— ENGR CO WORKSHOP
CO i
I
R CO INF BN INF BN LIGHT AT CO ADM
RAD CO — INF BN — — ENGR CO
ARTY BN IMTR-DR)
1
SUP UGHT AT CO ENGR CO MED
R CO — INF BN INF BN INF BN — ARTY BN —
PLAT ISP) IBCL) UNITS
<n
3>
HV WPN INF HOW INF HOW INF HOW LIGHT AA CO VET CO CO
CO CO CO HOW ARTY BN ISP) HOW
-n
m
MEDIUM FLD POST
O
AT CO AT CO AT CO
ARTY BN OFFICE
3i
2
I
.- s i si i I s- ? ft !i 1 il IT ?! si il II I! a
i i
Div Hq 34 87 106 121 92 12 5 32 21 1
Fiis B:i IS 113 580 477 122 127 43 12 0 4 8 5 102 57 165
Sig Bn 16 80 283 326 18 35 11 76 13 14 2 54
Inf Regt 48 316 1,644 1,373 350 332 107 24 U I I! 3 8 2 45 20 242 130 495
Inf Regt 48 316 1,644 1,373 350 332 107 24 12 8 36 3 6 2 45 20 242 130 495
Inf Regt 48 316 1,644 1,373 3.50 332 107 24 12 8 36 3 6 2 45 20 242 130 495
Arty Regt” 85 460 1.906 2.065 307 164 69 36 12 7 441 34 2,318
A T Bn 17 123 344 318 123 81 29 " 12 12 14 113 20 1
Engr Rn 18 92 510 432 136 71 31 6 6 20 17 19 52 25 97
Div. Serv. ’ .._._.._... 58 219 1,182 1,181 133 17 57 204 23 131 2!J 573
Total _._._. 38P 2,122 9,843 9,069 1,981 1,503 566 90 48 28 108 20 13 21 14 13 6 36 12 615 16S 1,466 551 4,656
I
3
A Fld Rep1 Bn with a C Sch may be added to any Inf Div.
The Arty Regt may be reduced m srxne Die, by 39 NCOs, 399 Pvts, 545 Hs, three 105.mm Gun/Hoas, three 150.mm HOWS, and
3 other equipment.
Including 71 officials.
Figure IO.—Infantry Division, 1944 Type, total strength
cr>
3
CO
GO
UNIT
„ o . 6- -S S 6 |
O >5 PM Ku PH tn J S>
I hv H(i 33 ’ 61 92 9: 81 7 2 25 21
Map Repro SC: ....... 1 7 7 1 2
MP Dot 1- 25 7 19 10 5 3 5
Total 34" 87 106 121 92 12 5 32 21
1
Including 10 officials.
Figure Il.—Division Headquarters, Infantry Division, 1944 Type, tofal strcngtlz 227.
I MARCH 1945 TM-E 30451
UNCLASSIFIED
INFANTRY DIVISION 1
EXPERIMENTAL TYPE 1
1 1 1 1 1 1 J 1 1
MAP RE- DV
CO HQ BN HO BN HO S ;p
PRO SEC HQ HQ
— AT CO i— AT CO
LIGHT
INF CLM 1— LIGHT
INF CLM
" 3 S 3 % % *
UNIT
3 a a« | - J BS BS e3 E* p fj| I J J
£ S a zs, ^a E P 8< \z< %< zs •?£, So %> a a> w
Div Hq 150 2 38 15
Fiis Co . .... 123 16 2 2 5 3 5 20
Sig Bn 402 11 85 20 6 25
Inf . .......... 2,645 178 24 18 12 3 6 2 51 44 244 631
Inf Regt 2,645 178 24 1s 12 3 6 2 51 44 244 631
Arty Regt 1,755 43 12 21 52 28 106 968
AA/AT Bn 350 17 12 14 88 24
Engr Bn ......... . . 4 4 11 3 7 35 6s
Div Serv ............ 1,395 30 159 33 86 391
Total .. 9,859 497 52 42 24 16 12 20 12 12 4 21 513 218 726 2,734
A Fld Rep1 Bn with a C Sch may be added to any Inf Div.
IL—17
r 2
3D
O
VOLKSGRENADIER
DIVISION
j
1
ft
FUS SIG INF REGT INF INF ARTY ENGR SUP REGT
AT BN
DIV HQ CO 1 IBCL) BN (BCD REGT REGT REGT RN
1 I I I 1 1 1 1
MAP RE- REGTL REGTl REGTL REGTL
— CO HQ — BN HQ —
Ha Ha —
Ha
— Ha
BN HQ — BN HO DIV SUP
PRO SEC
105-MM AT CO
It PUT SUP PLAT INF BN — INF BN — INF BN — ADM
GUN/HOW ISP)
UNCLASSIF
HV WPN INF HOW INF HOW INF HOW 105-MM AA CO MED
PLAT CO
— CO
— CO GUN/HOW ISP)
— UNITS
BN
150-MM
INF HOW
SEC
BAZOOKA
CO
— BAZOOKA
CO
— BAZOOKA
CO HOW BN — VET CO rn
1
May b . r.plor.d by a Fiis.Rn. 1 FID POST
OFFICE
TM-E
I MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-4?!
00 O
spa o^ o
S
H
rH O fV]
•>CTH
sp-HK
-UK
(dS) sun0
XV UJUI-SZ
a--ni\[) s u n O
XV uira-iv
sun
(as) o
s
smjoozeg CM CM
1^ 1^.
suojv
00 00 •J-i
IUUJ-OZI
SJJOJ\J <N CM CM
luiu-xg
S A
OW H
1O O 00
S
OK'I i- n ^ "o
— o >n
o •+ --^
(NJ T-H ^^
JO SJ£ sg§
-r -t-
MO CM
c
In
ffl
to
f2
11—19
I MARCH 1945
UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-45I
UNIT
2 d ; 4 h 1 il h is I |-
J-S
|= %•=.
s-s . ^
EX
ss s i
g»
&_ g * k §i i & il II ;y
Div . ........ 195 2
Mt Ren Bn 650 38 6 6 3
bit Rcn Bn ..... 453 11
Mt Inf Rcgt
Inf Reg 3,064 130 36 18 12 36 3 6
Mt Inf Rcgt
Inf Reg 3 064 130 36 18 12 36 3 6
Mt Arty Regt
Arty Re ... 2,230 69 2-i 12 12
AT Bn . . . 500 15 12 18
Mt Engr Bn
B 900 31 6 6 20
Div Serv . ... 2,000 59
Total 13 056 485 84 48 24 72 20 12 3 24 14 24 12 12
A Fid Repl Bn with a C Sch may be added to any Mt Div.
1 1 1
MAP RE- REGTL REGTL REGTL
BN HQ BN HQ — BN HQ BN HQ SUP
PRO SEC HO HQ HO
I
RCN CO
IBCL)
RAD CO —
MT INF
BN
MT INF
BN
75-MM
BN
AT CO ENGR CO
fBCL1
— ADM I
I
RCN CO SUP MT INF MT INF 75-MM MED •
(BCD PLAT
— BN BN
AT CO ENGR CO —
UNITS
BN
GO
en
150-MM LIGHT ENGR
16TH (AT)
CO
— 16TH (AT)
CO BN CLM (MT72
— MP DET rn
O
m
Figure 17.—A4m~y Ifountain Dvisiorz.
o
I
to
BN HO TP BN HO REGTL HO REGTL HO BN HO BN HO BN HO
CO CO CO CO CO BTRY CO CO
REGTl HO
BTRY
o
UI
I
3 "3 .*.„. §
6 8
Div Hq 32 31 78 95 44 3 2 32 8
Armd Ren Bn . . . 27 223 692 434 300 206 147 4 10 6 35 13 193 22
Sig Bn 13 223 360 400 300 300 147 107 14
Tk Bn 27 212 328 229 286 95 112 5 48 48 94 ‘18
00 00
Mtz Inf Regt 85 545 2,413 1,938 789 316 201 36 112 12 112 9 6 502
Mtz Inf R e g t . . . . 85 545 2,413 1,938 789 316 201 3 13 13 13 9 6 502
Armd Arty Regt. 69 365 1,215 1,217 343 203 92 9 12 12 12 6 407 31
AA Bn 22 142 600 673 69 47 18 18 8 171 16
AA Bn ... 20 166 327 271 142 100 47 12 31 135 17
Engr Bn 24 116 733 552 245 102 96 6 6 20 3 . 171 42
Div Serv 64 292 1.529 1,708 165 13 86 323 85
Total 4681 2,720 10,688 9,455 3,222 1.441 1,019 82 52 24 26 63 3 38 30 44 48 8 12 12 12 12 6 48 2,637* 469
1
Including 64 officials.
3
Including 6 4 o f f i c i a l s .
Figure 19.—Army Motorized Division, total strength, 13,876. OO
OO
I
MARCH 1945
UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451
II—24
o
1 PZ. GREN.
1 DIV
DIV HO ARMD RCN ARMD SIG TK tPAN- PZ. GftfN. ARMD ARTY AA BN ARMD ENGR
DIV HO CO BN BN Zfff) REGT REGT IARMD) REGT
AT BN
BN SEKV
REGT (MTZ)
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
MAP DE- CO HO BN HO BN HO REGTl HO REGTL HO REGTL HO
— — — — REGTl HO — BN HO — BN HO - BN HO - SUP
PRO SEC
1
—
MTRCL
PLAT
1
ARMD C
CO IH-TRKI —
RAD CO
—
3 7 - M M AA
PLAT —
PZ. GREW.
BN (ARMD)
PZ. GREN.
BN IMTZ1 —
MIXED SP
ABTY BN —
HV AA
BTRY —
7 5 - M M AT
CO ISP) -
ENGR CO
IMTZI -
MED
UNITS 1
1
PZ CHEN LIGHT PZ. KPFW. PZ. GREN. PZ. CHIN. LIGHT HV AA ENGR CO
UGHT 7 5 - M M AT MAINT
ARMD RCN CO ISP)' UNITS
CO IH-TRKI
cr
CLASS
HV M G ARMD RCN PZ. KPFW. HV INF HOW HV INF HOW MEDIUM LIGHT AA 7 5 - M M AT ENGR CO
PLAT — IV BN — CO (SP) — ARTY BN — — - IARMDI — MP DET
CO IH-TRK) CO ISP) BTRY CO IMTR-DRI
TN
HV WPN
CO IH-TRKI L_ TK
MAINT CO —
ENGR CO
(H-TRKI
ENGR CO
IH-TRK) —
LIGHT AA
CLM —
SUP
CO BD
CLM
—
FID
POST OFFICE —n
K OR J fn
o
SUP SUP SUP
— CO CO
CO
ro
en
i
H K H H
•"• ^ >^ £ •*
UNIT „ feoi | § ,3 S Ej |» »S E, EJ ^ E^ 4 E " E
Div Ha ............ 32 31 78 95 44 3 3 8
Div H i Co 3 37 179 138 65 19 16 2 2 4 3 31 28
Armd Rcn Bn .... 27 223 692 434 300 206 147 4 10 6 35 13 199 22
CO
CO
.M
.... O su ^S
~ *o S
8 «
~ =-
li -s
I ^
-i o
s > ooI-
?s l»
|^§o
y, — «u th m j K s 3
Armed Div H ( I.12’. GJ 30 71 86 4.3 3 30 8
Map Repro SW 1 7 7 1 2
Div H q Co 3 37 1iY 138 65 19 16 2 2 4 138 138
Total 35 l 68 257 231 109 22 16 2 2 4 63 231 —I
1
Including ten officiala.
Figure 22.—Division Heudqnarters, .4my Armored Division, total strength 360.
a AIMOflCO VAMIltt DIVISION
1
n. GUM.
REGT
1
- •EGH HO —I IfCTL V
IWUHQ
- n. GUN.
KKAIMOI -\ as —I
•OCKET
PROJEC-
TOR tTRY
*Z. GUN.
KAf
UCHT
AIMD ICN
CO IH-TIKl
- n. S«H.
IN tMTZ)
ROCKET
PROJEC-
TOR ITRV
AIMO ICH
CO IH-tlKI - n. aim.
•NIMTZ)
_ M I DE,
- HV MP HOW
CO isn
3
CO
L
I
UNIT
. o „ fe» -i S 3 § |a f« g | 6 | | 1-I --Pis'flit 1^11 g. U f
Div H q ......... 32 31 78 95 4. 3 32 8
Div H q Co 3 37 179 138 65 19 16 2 2 4 3 31 28
Armd Rcn B n .... 27 223 692 434 300 206 147 4 10 6 35 13 193 22
A r m d Sig Bn.... 16 103 396 444 69 51 35 114 14
T k (Pa) Regt... 70 614 1,087 816 719 245 296 6 8 64 62 64 62 313 53
Pz. Gren. Regt.... 89 598 2,555 1,957. 852 443 224 38 20 12 24 43 12 6 . 527 8S
Pz. Gwn. Regt.... 89 598 2,555 1,957 852 443 284 38 20 12 21 43 12 6 527 88
Armd Arty Regt.. 89 473 1,605 1,636 409 255 109 12 ' I 12 12 12 6 12 534 40
A A Bn 22 148 654 729 73 47 22 j ,,' IS 12 181 16
Bn Rkt Projector. 14 1Oi 358 380 40 53 15 18 ~ 107 8
Assault Gun Bn... 15 111 218 294 80 70 22 22 100 11
AT Bn 20 166 327 271 l-l2 100 47 12 31 135 100 Ej;
Armd Engr Bn ._ . 26 132 826 654 254 102 99 6 6 20 3 3 ~ 212 52 <D
Div Serv....... 64 292 1,529 1,708 165 13 86 323 85 ^
Tr,tal .,.. 576’ 3,627 13,059 11,513 4,064 2,050 1,465 100 55 24 71 18 114 38 3 S 12 69 61 02 12 24 12 12 12 12 6 12 6-I 6’ 3,3202530 £/>
1
Including 62 officials.
2
Including 359 Armd vehicles.
Figure 24.—SS Armored Divisior~, t&u1 strength 17,262.
o
I MARCH 1945 TM-E 30-451
UNCLASSIFIED
6. Air Force Parachute Division (Fallschirmjager- the later part of 1942 from surplus personnel
division) (THREE PARACHUTE RIFLE REGI- of the antiaircraft artillery, the air signal troops,
MENTS OF THREE BATTALIONS EACH) the ground crews of the flying troops, and ad-
AS the abovementioned •S'.S Armored Division ministrative units, as well as a certain number
may be considered the strongest type of division of recruits and foreigners. Most of these divi-
in the German armed forces, the German Air sions were sent to the Russian front in the win-
Force Parachute Division is believed to be the ter of 1942-1943 but some also were encountered
strongest type of the various infantry divisions. on the Italian front and in France. The organi-
While in the course of this war small German zation of this type of division varied, but it is
parachute units have been employed successfully believed that the basic pattern was originally a
as airborne troops in various campaigns, in the two-regiment, three-battalion division, with nor-
West, in the Balkans, in Crete and Sicily, one mal supporting units and an additional antiair-
generally may consider the present Air Force craft battalion. In the fall of 1943 the Air
Parachute divisions as especially carefully se- Force Field divisions were absorbed by the Army.
lected, well trained, and equipped crack infantry Many of them had suffered heavy losses and
divisions, with only a small percentage of their were disbanded in 1943 and 1944, and the re-
personnel having received training as parachutists maining few were reorganized along the lines
in the American sense of the word. The signifi- of the Infantry Division, 1944 Type.
cant organizational difference between the para- 8. Cavalry Division (Kavalluriedivision) (FOUR
chute division and the army infantry division CAVALRY REGIMENTS OF TWO BATTALIONS
is that each of the three parachute rifle regi- EACH)
ments has three battalions and a larger allotment
The only armv cavalry division identified is
of machine guns than the corresponding army
the Cossack Division which consists of Don,
units. The parachute artillery regiment has only
Kuban, and Terck Cossacks; some German offi-
three battalions (two light and one medium),
cers .and noncommissioned officers; and possibly
but the division includes a parachute antiaircraft
elements of other nationalities.
battalion and a parachute 120-mm mortar bat-
talion. The Waff~?~-SS is believed to have two cavalry
talion.
7. Air Force Field Division (Luftwaffenfelddi- All three of these cavalry divisions are or-
vision (THREE INFANTRY REGIMENTS OF TWO ganized similarly and consist of two cavalry
BATTALIONS EACH) brigades of two regiments each, a weak artillery
The Air Force Field Divisions were formed in regiment, a reconnaissance battalion, a signal bat-.
11-29
II MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30.451
\O *—< CO CO CO CO
ass O\ 00 M
co »—( r-i i-* Tf l i l
CO CO PO
SMOH
mu-0541
SRNO H
turn-so I
sung
"" - 88
(dS) sun
XV uiiu-
XV
tdS) suno
W ""-02 §
sun
If) f)
W
o
SE5|OOZEg tn to 10
s
uiui-jg •^
S
OIV A
H
2
to.
930
S 8
CM O 00
00 CM t-c
to tc c
pa
O1 O (/) c >
oioiat
Sal
Q K PH
CM PH
J3 J3 J3
aa z
II—30 P C D
I MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIED
talion, an engineer battalion, and the divisional 15. Reserve Division (Resevvedivision)
services. This controls reserve units for training, occupa-
tion, and defensive duties. This type of division
9. Line of Communication Division (Sicherungs- is organized similarly to field infantry divisions;
division) it has a preponderance of infantry, engineers,
Designed for mopping-up duties in the rear and static artillery, but the other elements are
areas, such a division may consist of two rein- believed to be very much under strength. In
forced regiments or of a number of independent spite of that, several reserve divisions have been
battalions. redesignated combat divisions (Kampfdivisionen)
and went into action on short notice.
10. Coast Defense Division (Ktlstenverteidigungs-
16. Field Training Division (Feldatlsbildzcngsdivi-
division)
sion)
This consists of a division staff controlling for-
This co’ntrols field training regiments in the rear
tress battalions and coast artillery units in a
of the Eastern Front. Is believed to be organized
coastal sector.
similarly to the Reserve Division and therefore
may be encountered in the field.
I I. Assault Division (Sturmdivision)
This is an honorary title for some divisions with 17. Antiaircraft Division (Flakdivision)
reduced infantry personnel and a concentration Under the German system, antiaircraft defense
of heavy firepower and automatic weapons. is in the main the responsibility of the German
.4ir Force, although the German Army also has
12. Frontier Guard Division (Grenzwachdivision) a large number of antiaircraft units of its own.
While the composition and equipment of antiair-
This consists of a division staff controlling cer-
craft batteries generally are standardized, the
tain frontier guard units. formation of these into battalions, regiments, divi-
sions, or units of equivalent size, however, is
13. Special Administrative Division Staff (Divi-
subject to more variations than in any other of
sionskommando z.b.V.)
the German arms. The average non-motorized,
This consists of a division staff controlling air force, antiaircraft division, which is shown
Landesschiitse~z Battalions and General Headquar- in the following figure, usually is located in the
ters troops stationed in a corps area in Germany. Zone of the Interior. It has a large number of
trailers but very little motorization, and depends
14. Replacement Division Staff (Div. NY. . . .) for mobility on separate transportation units. As
This is a division staff within a corps area in Ger- pointed out above, many other combinations of
many to supervise the induction of personnel the units shown as divisional components may be
and replacements for field units. encountered frequently.
1
Air SL AA AA AA Air Div
DivHq Defense
Regt Regt Regt Regt Med Unit Serv
Sig Bn
1
light HvAA HvAA
Regtl Hq SLBn SLBn SLBn Regtl Hq Bar Bin
Bn Bn
Bn AA BN
SL
Btry
SL
Btry
SL
Btry
Bar Bin
Btry
20-mm
AA Btry
88-mm
AABtry
105-mm
AA Btry
1
1
. UNC
SL SL SL Bar Bin 20-mm 88-mm 105-mm
Btry Btry Btry Btry AABtry AA Btry AABtry
GO
CO
SL SL SI Bar Bin 20-mm 86-mm 105-mm
Btry Btry Btry Btry AABtry AABtry AABtry
m
TM-E 30-4
Figure 28.—Antiaircraft Division in Zone of Ideri
Iderior.
I MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451
(FECHTENDE TRUPPEN)
°°^
165
165
NO
1. General
CM 0 0
This section consists of a list of the more im- "IX
NO
ft ft
portant types of combat units in the German
oc
armed forces, of the status of regiments and be- J
00 CM
CM 8
U-H
low with particulars on their organization. They
are arranged according to the arms and services sp-UK m m CM m
operations). sunj)
CO
XV mm-Si
2. Organic Infantry Units seyoozua
a. GENERAL. For the purpose of clarity we are
including under this paragraph all units which are
infantry units in accordance with the American
iuui-18 NO NO
conception. The G&mans consider security troops
(Sicherungstruppm) a separate category of units
CM CM
of the field army, but in reality they consist prin-
cipally of infantry. Similarly, the Germans con-
O CO i n NO
sider armored infantry (Panzergrenadiere) as be-
longing to the armored arm and not to the in-
fantry.
127
127
<N CM
co 120
477
140
NO
JO s a
The designation of the infantry regiment was
changed to Grenadierregivnc)zt in 1942 by special
order of Hitler to honor the infantry arm. The m
580
154
580
NO ON
SJAJ -t
same applies to the infantry battalion now called
Grenadierbataillon and to the infantry company
Grenadierkom panie.
;O0M
•-i 00
CM
CM
a
b. INFANTRY REGIMENT.
(1) Old Type Regimcut. The infantry regi- m ro ro
Sfio
ments of the Infantry Division, Old Type, may
be considered the basic type of German infantry
regiments, as their organization remained for all
practical purposes unchanged from the beginning
of 1940 until the end of 1943. Each of the three
regiments of the Infantry Division, Old Type,
UNIT
Regtl Hn Co .. .
c "o
tered any more, it is believed that this type of m U
regiment has formed the basic pattern and tradi- c c H
II—33
I MARCH 1945
UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451
tion for most of the infantry regiments now in the type of infantry regiment mentioned in sub-
the field. paragraph (Z), another type may be encountered
(2) 1944 Type Regiment. The above type of which is similar to the basic one mentioned in sub-
regiment has been superseded by the infantry paragraph (1). It is the three-battalion regiment
regiment in the Infantry Division, 1944 Type, of the infantry division, two-regiment type. How-
which consists also of three regiments, but each ever, it is believed that there is a trend toward re-
regiment has only two battalions in addition to oi-ganizing that type of division on a three-regi-
the infantry howitzer and antitank companies. ment, tn.o-battalion basis. After such a reorgan-
(See Figuvrs 29 to 39.) ization, the regiment probably will be similar to
(3) Tkec-Battalion Regiment. In addition to the Infantry Regiment, 1944 Type.
INFANTRY REGIMENT
1
—
CO HQ BN HQ BN HQ CO HQ CO HQ
ENGR
PLAT
— R CO R CO 2D PLAT BAZOOKA
PLAT
TN
Il—34
I MARCH 1945 UNCLASS\FIED TM-E 30-451
- o - - i
£
!3
a J i m
TI
O p-< P-i t/3
r/i
ij («*;> K
Co Hq 1 5 2 3 5 1 1 3
1st (Corn) Plat ...,... 1 2 29 23 1 99 6 6 7
20 (Engr) Plat 1 7 65 53 8 13 6 6 13 2
’
30 (Mtd) PIat 4 27 20 4 7 3 1 31
Tn 2a 10 42 44 8 2 1 1 5 15 32 4
’
Total 5 28 165 143 26 32 10 5 28 6 84
I T h e Mtd Plat may be replaced by a Bcl Plat with 29 Bcls and 2 11s.
2
Including two officials.
Figure 31.—Regimental Headquarters Coxpacy, Iefarztry Division, 1944 Type, total strength 198.
INFANTRY BATTALION
HV WPN
BN HQ ft CO R CO R CO CO
HO SEC CO HQ to HQ CO HQ CO HQ
COM SEC HV MG
R PLAT R PLAT R PLAT
PLAT
HV M G HV M G HV M G
SEC SEC SEC TN
TN TN TN
UNIT m J S g ' j H E a i c - y i - S j S
m
tn O w 2 ' ^ P t! • u ^
O Z ft «6 £ en J S SS ~S S> S
Bn Hq ...........6l & 13 58 58 8 14 1 1 - 16 4 33 6
R Co ............. 2 21 119 96 22 .28 13 2 15 11 27 3
R Co ............ 2 21 119 96 22 28 13 2 15 11 27 3
R Co 2 21 119 96 22 28 13 2 15 11 27 3
Hv Wpn Co 3 37 165 131 48 29 3 6 6 4 7 3 31 20 51 2
UNIT
6 - s- -3 * o I -3 J
O 7, ft «(J ft en J S> £ K> H
Hq Set 4 3 10 11 5 4 1 2 4
Corn Set 3 22 17 8 4 4 4
Tn 2l 7 26 30 3 2 1 12 25
’
Total 6 13 58 58 8 14 1 1 2 16 4 33
1
Including two officials.
Figure 34.—Infantry Battalion Hcndqzmrtrrs, Infmfry Dizkion, 1944 Type. fotnl strength 77.
UNIT „ » g » z
«« u t «S .s -5 S >
O S5 Pn «(J PH 7! J M
Co Hq . . . . 1 3 8 8 2 3 1 1 2
1st R P l a t ................. 1 3 29 22 5 7 4 2 > 3
2d R Plat ................. 44 29 22 5 7 4 2 3
3d R Plat 4
4 29 22 5 7 4 ? 3
Hv MG Set: 3 15 11 4 3 2 3 ? 4
Tn 4 9 11 1 1 1 2 12 1
Total 2 21 119 96 22 28 13 2 1.5 11 27
Figure 35.—Rifle Company, IllJantry Division, 1944 Typr, tofnl strclzgtlt 142.
UNIT 1 u »i S », Ji
o S» s <• o £.!;
O 5s ft Bio &, jj _) E> H W
Plat Hq 1 5 4 2 1 1 2 2 3
R Sqd .............. 1 8 6 1 2 1
R Sqd 1 8 6 1 2 1
R Sqd ................_.... 1 8 6 1 2 1
Total .......... 1 3 29 22 5 7 4 2 2 3
Only the 1st Plat of the R Co is commanded by an officer; the 2d and 3d Plats are commanded by NCOq, and consequently the
number of NCOs in these two platoons increases from three to four.
Figure 36.—Rifle Platoon, Infantry Division, 1944 Ty#r, tofal sfrmgth 33.
IL—36
I MARCH 1945 TM-E 30-451
UNCLASSIFIED
Figure 37.—Heavy 1C:eapons Cowpatty, Infantry Divisiort. 194-l Typr, fatal stvcwgth 205.
E
UNIT « « « T G-S T ^ <« -2
u u v «5 .1 •§ S fv ,9* £~ - •x
o % P- «S - « J ;;£ - - s> ?; x>
Co Hq 1 4 13 14 3 2 1 2 5
1st (75-mm Inf How) Plat 1 5 30 27 4 6 1 2 5 (75
2d (75-mm Inf How) N a t 6 30 27 4 6 1 2 5 (75
3d (7%mm Inf How) Plat 6 30 27 4 6 1 2 5 15
4th (15%mm Inf How) l’lat 1 5 33 29 5 6 1 2 6 2
Tn 6 13 16 2 1 1 1 5 13
Total 3 32 149 140 22 2 5 6 2 8 2 7 C3
Referred to by the traditional designation: "13th" Co.
Figure 3X.—I,rfarltry Ilozcit:er Company, Infantry I)k.i.Guu. lV4f Type, tota/ strc’rrgtll 184.
UNIT m B " g » 4 % i 2 i
Co Hq 1 10 26 29 6 3 1 4 2
1st (75-mm AT) Plat (Mtz) 1 4 28 25 4 5 3 3 5 1
2d (Bazooka) Plat (H-Dr) 5 43 25 19 4 1 18 4 4 4
3d (Bazooka) Plat (H-Dr) 1 4 43 2.5 19 4 1 18 4 4 4
Tn (Mtz) 6 11 16 3 1 1 7
Total 3 29 154 120 51 17 6 36 3 13 5 8 8 10
Referred to by the traditional designation: "14th" Co.
Figure 39.—Antitatlk Company (partly mortorized), Infantry Divisiolz, 1944 Typr, tofu1 sertngtlt 186.
11—37
I MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-45I
(4) Volks Grenadier Regiment. The infantry of the infantry battalion includes an infantry
regiment in the Volks Grenadier Division shows a howitzer platoon. The regimental infantry howit-
completely new organization. The infantry com- zer company is equipped with l-30-mm mortars
pany and battalion trains are merged to a supply and 75-mm infantry ho\vitzers only, and the regi-
platoon on a battalion level. The infantry com- mental antitank company has been replaced by
pany consists of two sub-machine gun platoons a bazooka company equipped with 72 bazookas.
and a rifle platoon. The heavy-weapons cornpan? ( See Figures 40 to 50.)
INFANTRY REGIMENT
CO HO BN HO BN HO CO HQ CO HQ
GREN
TN GREN CO TN TN
CO
HV WPN HV WPN
CO CO
II—38
I MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451
^ 8 f Si 1 I § 1 IS II I I* *l I °l = . -s
Regtl Hq 6 1 12 4 3 14 - 2 3 8 2
Regtl H q . 5 6 1 1. 2 32 1 1 27 6 53 38
Inf Bn 15 95 532 309 80 253 30 8 6 4 2 3 70 32 125 27
Inf Bn IS 95 532 309 80 253 30 8 6 4 2 3 70 32 125 27
Inf H o w Co1 3 32 162 145 21 31 5 8 4 1 33 2 89 4
Bazooka Co 2 2 19 146 91 63 14 4 72 1 1 19 12 30 2
Total 463 267 1,541 991 269 597 79 16 12 8 72 12 9 10 219 84 430 100
1
3
Referred to by the traditional designation: "13th" Co.
3
Referred to by the traditional designation: "14th" Co.
Including four officials.
Figure 41.—Infantry Regiment, L’olks Grenadier Division, total strelryth 1,854.
£ 8 f Si 1 % i J 4 s
O K AH K'J PI M J "=> B> t-i
Co Hq 1 5 2 3 4 1 1
1st (Com) Plat 1 2 29 23 9 6 6 7
2d (Engr) Plat 1 7 65 53 7 13 6 6 13
3d (Bel) Plat 4 27^ 20 4 7 3^ i 2 29
Tn 21 7 34 34 7 2 1 1 14 30 4
53 38
Total 51 25 157 133 22 32 10 1 27 6
1
Including two officials.
Figure 42.—Regimental Headquarters Company, Volks Greltadier Division, total strength 187.
INFANTRY BATTALION
HQ SEC CO HQ CO HQ CO HQ CO HQ
81-MM
MORT PLAT
Figure 43.—Infantry Battalion, Volks Grenadier Division.
11—39
I MARCH 1945 TM-E 30-451
UNCLASSIFIED
O ?: PH KU a, tfl j H KS '£Z H K
Bn H q 4 6 34 21 3 20 1 1 4 4 8 3
Sup Plat 2l 6 39 42 3 2 1 1 1 42 4
Gren. Co 2 16 101 46 9 64 9 7 4 10 5
Gren. C o 2 16 101 46 9 61 9 7 4 10 5
Gren. Co 2 16 101 46 9 64 9 7 4 10 5
H v W p n Co 3 35 1.56 108 47 39 1 8 6 4 1 28 16 45 5
’
Total 15 95 2 0 8 253 30 8 6 4 2 3 70 32 125 2
1
Including one official.
UNIT
. B m ::;s s $ o 4
o Z PH O-U PH t£ _i -^
Co Hq 1 5 1-l 16 1 3 1 1 1 5
1st (Sub-MG) Plat 1 3 29 5 2 26 3 2 1 3
2d (Sub-MG) Plat 4 29 5 2 26 3 2 1 3
3d (R) Plat ......................... 4 29 20 4 9 3 2 1 3
Total 2 16 101 46 9 64 9 Y 10
Figure J.%—Iufantry Company, Volks Grenadier Division, total strength 119
UNIT 1 CT 2 d » c
«3 U > «J5 .2 •§ S T-S i
O ^ d, Ku OH m J => f- S
Plat Hq .................. 1 5 2 1 3 2 2 1 3
Sub-MG Sqd 1 8 9
Sub-MG Sqd 1 8 9
R Sqd ........_............ 1 8 3 1 5 1
Total ............... 1 3 29 5 2 26 3 2 1 3
Only the 1st Hat of the Gren Co is commanded by an officer; the 2d (Sub-MC;) and 3d (R) Plats are conmanded by NCOs and
umsequently tbe number of NCOs in these Plats increases by three to four.
UNIT « m * d
£ 8 2 a 1 3 2
O " CU WO Pi i^ i ]
Plat Hq 1 5 2 1 3
R Sqd 1 8 6 1 2 1
R Sqd 1 8 6 1 2 1
R Sqd 1 8 6 1 2 1
Total .............1~- 4 29 20 4 9 3
II—40
I MARCH 1945 TM-E 30-45I
UNCLASSIFIED
UNIT
o
u
55 M^ hH CO*
e
Co Hq 1 8 IS 14 2 5
1st (MG) Plat 1 6 22 11 1 3
2d (MG) Plat 7 22 11 1 3
3d (Inf How) Plat 1 44 38 5 9 7 15
4th (Medium Mort) Plat 53 34 21 5 15 12 19
Total 3 35 156 108 47 39 1 1 28 16 45
Figure 48.—Heavy weapons Cowlpatty, Volks Grenadier Dizisiofl, total strength 194.
UNIT „ u J S 5 « | « E M - S
« <-> > «.£ .a "3 3 SJj J'S £•£
3 ^ CM KU CM V; J — <-, ,^£ <5>
Co Hq ............. 1 4 15 13 2 5 2 2 5 2
120-mm Mort Plat 1 7 44 38 6 8 2 4 9 27
120-mm Mort Plat 8 44 38 6 8 2 4 9 27
75-mm Inf How Plat 1 7 44 38 5 9 1 4 8 17 1
Tns 6 15 18 2 1 1 13 1
Total ... 3 32 162 145 21 31 5 8 4 1 33 2 89 4
Referred to by the traditional designation: "13th" Co.
Figure 49.—Infantry Howitzer Company, Yolks Grewadier Division, total strength 197.
« s , u I I i ! j I i
O F; P- WCJ CM t/l M P5 S> Ja 1>
Co Hq 11 2 2 1 1 1
Bazooka Plat 1
1 4 45 26 20 4 1 1 5 4 6
Bazooka Plat 5 45 26 20 4 1 18 5 4 6
Bazooka Plat 5 45 26 20 4 1 18 5 4 6
Tn 5 9 11 2 1 1 182 1 4 12 2
Total 1
2 19 146 91 63 14 4 72 1 1 19 12 30 2
1
Referred to by the traditional designation: "14th" Co.
3
In reserve.
(5) Volks Grenadier Bicycle Regiment. One battalions of the Volks Gwrladicr Division or
of the three infantry regiments in the Volks Gren- may be used as a mobile reserve. (See Figures
adier Division is an infantry regiment (bicycle). 51 to 54.)
That regiment includes one infantry battalion
(bicycle), and one normal infantry battalion, a The newest type of standard German infantry
regimental infantry howitzer company, and a regi- regiment is the Infantry Regiment of the Division,
mental bazooka company as shown in sub-para- Type 45, which is believed to have become the
graph (4). This infantry regiment (bicycle) may pattern for all German infantry regiments (see
be employed in the same way as the other two Figures 55 and 56).
11—41
1 MARCH 1945 TM-E 30-45I
UNCLASSIFIED
UNIT
S 6 . -o § 6 » Iab1 I* I •* J
• o V, P-, wu fc « j W o=S ~ 3 n K £ S > S E> H X PP
Regtl Hq 6 1 12 4 3 14 2 3 8 2
Regtl Hq Co 5 25 157 133 22 32 10 1 27 6 53 38
Inf Bn (Bcl) 15 95 .589 366 80 253 30 8 6 4 3 3 74 32 219 625
Tnf Bn 15 95 532 309 80 253 30 8 6 4 2 3 f0 32 125 27
Inf How Co ’ 3 32 162 145 21 31 5 8 4 1 33 2 89 4
Bazooka Co ’ 2 19 146 91 63 14 4 72 1 1 1 1 0 2
Total 463 267 1,598 1,048 269 597 79 16 12 8 72 12 10 10 223 84 524 698
1
3
Referred to by the traditional designation: "13th" Co.
3
Referred to by the traditional designation: "14th" Co.
Including four officials.
I~~igurr 51.—Infantry Regimesft (bicycle), Volks Grenadier Diz~ision, total strength 1,911.
UNIT
6 . s - •§ I 6 s | s | l 1 -3 £ l „
O E I ^ S I 3 & s i £s I I I tt> |5 jg §
Rn Hq 4 6 35 22 3 20 1 2 2 4 4 12 30
Sup Plat 2’ 6 51 54 3 2 1 1 17 54 24
Gren. Co. (Bcl) 2 16 110 55 9 64 9 8 4 24 130
Gren. Co. (Bcl) 2 16 110 55 9 64 9 8 4 24 130
Gren. Co. (Bcl) 2 16 110 55 9 64 9 8 4 24 130
Hv Wpn Co (Bcl) 3 35 173 125 47 39, 1 8 6 4 1 29 16 81 181
Total 15l 95 589 366 80 253 30 8 6 4 , 1 74 32 219 625
1
Including one official.
Z;igure. 52.—Ilrfarrtry Battaliolz (bicycle), Volks Grenadier Division, totnl strength 099.
UNIT 9 Y) i 2 3
a 3 ? °J 1 i £ °! =
O "Z Q-i KU P^ ft J K> H
CoHq................. 1 5 17 19 1 3 2 1 ~34
1st (Sub-MG) P l a t . . . . . . 1 3 31 7 2 26 3 2 1 3
2d (Sub-MG) P l a t . . . 4 31 7 2 26 3 2 1 3
UNIT „ u d 6 $ E.m ET - |
d3 8 I : i I 2 s > ?s % I « l
Co Hq 1 8 18 17 3 1 1-3 2 11 38
1st (MG) P l a t . . . . . . . . 1 6 24 13 9 9 4 4 2 12 4
2d (MG) Plat 7 24 13 9 9 4 7 21 4
3J (Inf How) Plat 1 7 48 42 5 9 1 4 15 12 37 46
4th (Medium Mort) Plat 7 59 JO 21 5 6
Total .............. 3 35 173 125 47 39 1 8 6 4 1 29 16 81 181
Figwr 54.—Heavy Weapons Company (bicycle), Volks Grenadier Divissio+t, total strength 211
II—42
I MARCH 1945
UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451
CO CM s
ON l°3
108
449
CD S
CM CM CO H
VO CM CM CM
88
O O s.)pitpA
220
CM co
CO CO co o
co CM CM c\
-UK
CM CM
JUI CO
lum-18
CM CM
1^
I S
OM A
H
00 00
spopj 5 VO c\
S A
DIM H 00 00 •o
sQK-'ins ; Rj 2 S
o to
330
}[tressy
s
00
270
• * CM
SJOJS1J
if) ^-^~J PO
CO co 00 ^
^j
o OO OO o ^
"I-
S
lW!d \O \O VD CM a
281
CM 00 OO CM
^O
126
284
!>.
3
922
CO O N
SIMI H
118
PI
165
146
1,532
CO
CO CO IO
S
HO
o O o\
CO CO
<M
CO
CM c- ^i
0
U
CL, :
h
How Co.
Total .
jtl Hq and
£
°a o =
c c
PC PC
M a s
c c C3 C C
izz PQ O r O
11—43
I MARCH 1945
UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451
(6) SS Infantry Regiment. In the SS In- tourth battalion or additional regimental com-
fantry Division the infantry regiment is similar panies.
to the Infantry Regiment, 1944 Type. (10) The Motoriz+ed Infantry Regiment (GYM-
(7) Mountain Infantry Regiment. There are adierrcgiment (Mot)). Sormally there are two
usually two regiments per mountain division or- regiments to the Motorized Division, consisting of
ganized especially for mountain warfare by mak- three motorized infantry battalions, heavy infan-
ing each of the three battalions self-sufficient. try howitzer company (self-propelled), and an
The normal infantry howitzer company is lack- antitank company. The motorized infantry bat-
ing, but mountain infantry howitzers are organic talions originally were organized similarly to nor-
in each battalion. (See Figures 57 to 59..) mal infantry battalions; however, in 1944 they
(8) The Light Infantry Regiment. Light di- were reorganized along the lines of the armored
visions usually have two regiments organized sim- infantry battalions (Pa~zzcrgrrnadierbataillons) of
ilarly to the Army Mountain Division but have the Armored Division. (See Figurc*s 60 and 61.)
slightly more motorization. (11) TIN SS Motorixd Info~fry Regime?zt
(9) The SS Mountain Infantry Regiment. (SS-Panscv Grenadier Rrgirucnt). Two regi-
The two infantry regiments per SS Mountain ments per SS Motorized Division are organized
Division are organized similarly to the Army similarly to the army motorized regiment; how-
Mountain Regiment; however, they have either a ever, it has an additional antiaircraft company.
MOUNTAIN INFANTRY
REGIMENT
CO HO
BCL HV MG
PLAT PLAT
150-MM
MT INF HV MG COM
HOW PLAT PLAT PLAT
HV MG ENGR
PLAT PLAT
120-MM 75-MM
MORT MT INF
PLAT HOW PLAT
1
Often referred to Ol a Bn Hq Co.
UNCLASSIFIED
s
o
UNIT ess z:i
Be
6o
22 3 p IK
Regtl Hq 25
Regtl Hq Co 182 4
Mt Inf Bn 877 40 12
MtlnfBn 877 40 12
Mt Inf Bn 877 40 12
16th (AT) Co 190 6 36
Light Mt Clm 36
Total 3,064 150 36 18 12 36
UNIT
d d z Em h |!
Bn Hq .. 27
Mt Inf Co 147 12 2
Mt Inf Co 147 12 2
Mt Inf Co 147 12 2
MG Co 208 12 4
Hv Wpn Co1 201 4 2
Total 877 40 12 6 4 2
1
Often referred to as a Bn Hq Co.
Figure 59.—A4ountain I~lfantry Battalion, total strength
877.
II—45
I MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451
GRENADIER REGIMENT
IMTZ)
150-MM
— INF HOW
PLAT (SP)
HV WPN HV WPN HV WPN
CO (MTZ) CO IMTZ) CO (MTZ)
TN
SUP SUP SUP
CO CO CO
Hows (SI')
150-mm Inf
-mm AT
-MG
IJNIT
un.s
NCO
Pvts
Offs
Mor
120-
Cb
K<! %> 3
R
Rcgtl Hq ........ 6 2 8 7 6 3 3 3
Regtl Hq Co 3 37 97 93 50 4 4 22 18
Gren. Bn (Mtz) .... 23 148 697 548 229 91 60 12 6 4 6 143 25
Gren. Bn (Mb) ....
O
Figure 61.—Motorized Infantry Regiment, Panzer Grenadier Ditisioq total strength 3,043.
11-46
! MARCH 1945 aMr* UNCLASSIFIED ‘TM-E30451
(12) The Panzer Grenadier RegiAent. ’‘%e is designated motorized. (See Figures 62 to 75.)
two regiments of the Armored Division are com- (13) The SS Armored Infantry Regiment
posed of only two battalions, a heavy infantry (SS Panzer Grenadier Regiment). There are two
howitzer company (self-propelled), and an engi- per S S Armored Division, each consisting of one
neer company. One of the four battalions in the armored and two motorized Panzer Grenadier
division is designated armored (Gepanzert or battalions, a heavy infantry howitzer company
Gp.). because it is equipped with armored person- (self-propelled), an engineer company (half-
nel carriers with mounted arms enabling the crews track), and an antiaircraft company. Compo-
to fight from their vehicles. The other three bat- nents of the regiment are organized like those of
>-v talions of the division are motorized only. The the Army Panzer Grenadier Regiment. (For
regiment, of which the armored battalion is a the S S Panzer Grenadier Regiment see Figure
component, also is designated armored. The other 76; for the breakdown of the components see
regiment which contains two motorized battalions Figures 64 and 65,)
— CO HQ — BN HQ — BN HQ CO HO CO HO
150-MM
_ INF HOW
PLAT (SP)
1so-mm
INF HOW
HV WPN HV WPN ENGR
P U T (SPI
CO (ARMD) CO (MTZ) PLAT
TNS
UNIT w
ii
8 „ s- -i f o a is is gi I? Is
Vehic
Hows
Mtrcl
Mtr
5 a £ S6 K w 3 K sa_2___E__g5_ Ra
Regtl Hq 6 2 8 7 6 3 3 3
Regtl Hq Co ( A r m d ) . . . . . . . 3 47 97 93 50 4 14 29 14
PzGren. Bn ( A r m d ) . . . . 26 168 673 456 242 179 115 12 6 4 18 12 1582 4
Pz.&en. Bn ( M t z ) . . . . . . . . . . 23 148 697 548 229 91 60 12 6. 4 6 143 25
Hv Inf How Co ( S P ) . . . . . ” 3 31 108 92 28 22 8 6 25 5
Engr Co ( H - T r k ) 3 40 211 177 40 37 27 2 2 24 1 48 7
l
Total ................. 64 436 1,794 1,373 595 336 224 26 14 8 24 25 12 6 406 81
1
Including eight officials.
a
Including 125 Armd Pers carriers
Figure 63.—Panzer Grenadier Regiment, Army Armored Division, total strength 2,294
I I
BN HQ PZ. GREN. PZ. GREN. PZ. GREN. HV WPN SUP
CO (ARMDI CO IARMD) CO IARMD) CO (ARMD) CO
— CO HQ — CO HQ CO HQ CO HQ
AA PLAT AA PLAT AA P U T
— (ARMD) (ARMD)
(ARMD)
11-48
' MARCH l945
TM-E 30-461
" '"""'""" UNCLASSIFIED
o
UNIT „ „ » S » S g,» 1» E~ _, v
in
fe
£ 8 2 s 1 3 § ^ if Jl is
Bn Hq 4 9 30 24 9 10 6 8 4
Ps. Gren. Co (Armd) 4 32 147 83 55 45 29 4 2 6 2; i
Pz. Gren. Co ( A r m d ) . . . . . . . . 4 32 147 83 55 45 29 4 2 6 25 4
Pz. Gren. Co (Armd) 4 32 147 83 55 45 29 4 2 6 2 25 4
Hv Wpn Co ( A r m d ) . . . . . . . 3 23 74 46 31 32 17 4 6 21 6
sup c o .................... T 40 128 137 37 2 5 54 2
Total 261 168 673 456 242 179 115 12 6 4 18 12 158” 24
1
Including three officials.
2
Including 87 Armd vehicles
Figure 65.—Panzer Grenadier Battalion, Army Armored Division, total strength 867.
UNIT „ ., .2 SS « *S P <« E
* ° § «j » •§ a > !j J§
O fc fc BSD fU c/) J ffi 5S So
Co Hq 1 7• 8 11 2 3 2 4 2
Pz. Gren. Plat (Armd). .. 1 3 26 12 10 8 9 4
Ps. Gren. Plat (Armd).. 4 26 12 10 8 9 4 •
UNIT
o . 6- -I i o h g* I •s
«S 8 f -Ji .a •§ g <=! I | |-S a
Co Hq 1o S
75 a,
11 «6
13 t-3 M4 J2 sa KE S>
4 3
75-mm Inf How Plat (SP).. .. 1 8 26 15 13 15 8 6 9 i
75-mm InfHow Plat ( S P ) . . .. 1 8 37 18 (S 13 7 4 8 2
Total .. 3 23 74 46 31 31 17 4 6 211 6
1
Including 17 Armd vehicles.
Figure 67.—-Heavy Weapons Company, Army Armored Division, total strength 100.
fb
UNIT
' 5 . s- •§ ^ 3 § i« sS 1? I
"S sj ? ^^ « •§ g > ?S s^ |§ i-§
OS; &4 «(J tn tn J B SS fi-H So S>
Co Hq 1 5 8 7 5 ~2 1 1 3~
Engr Plat 1' 7 50 41 7 10 8 8 10
Engr Plat ...‘. . 1 7 SO 1 0 g 8 8 10
Engr
gr Plat 8 50 41 7 10 8 8 10 2
Hv' MG Sec 3 12 8 5 2 2 1
81-mm
mm Mort Sec 3 14 7 8 2 2 2 2
Maint
lint Sec 2 8 9 1 3
Tnss . 5 19 23 1 9
Total
Total .... 3
3 40 211 177 40 37 37 2 2 24 1 48l 7
l
kcluding 28 Armd vehicles.
Figure 68.—Engineer Company (half-tracked), Panzer Grenadier Regiment, total strength 254.
11—49
I MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIED TM-E SO-461
UNIT
S fe- •§ i 3 » la la 1 3
Reetl Ha
g6 §2 I8 ^a7 I6 I3 g ,5 I I §l la II 3 3.
6
Regtl -Hq Co 3 47 97 93 50 4 4 22 18
3
Pz. Gren. Bn ( M t z ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 148 697 548 229 91 60 12 6 4 6 143 25
23
Pz. Gren. Bn (Mb). ,> 23 148 697 548 229 91 60 12 6 4 6 143 25
1.50-mm Inf How Co ( SP) P)...... 3 31 108 92 28 22 8 6 34 5
Engr Co ( M t z ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 34 180 161 32 24 12 2 2 18 35 7
Total 61' 410 1,787 1,449 574 235 144 26 14 8 18 12 6 380 83
1
Including eight officials.
Figure &.—Panzer Grenadier Regiment (motorized), Army Armored Division, total strength 2,258.
— CO HQ — CO HQ co no — CO HQ
o £ (X «S K w J ffi SS 2S So S>
Bn Hq 4 9 29 36 4 2 9 4
Gren. Co. (Mtz) 3 29 165 liS 59 29 18 4 2 4 4
Pz. Gren. Co. ( M t z ) . . . . . . . 3 29 165 165 59 - 23 165 4 2 24 4
pv Gren. Co. (Mtz) 3 29 165 115 59 23 18 4 2 24 4
Hv Wpn Co (Mtz) 3 29 79 63 24 17 2 4 6 20 5
Sup Co T 30 94 104 24 3 4 42 4
Total . 231 148 697 548 229 91 60 12 6 4 6 143 25
1
Including three officials.
Figure 71.—Panzer Grenadier Battalion (motorized), Army Armorcd Division, total strength 868.
. o . s- I a o a
tS U > ».§ .2 •§ S 5
O <5 OH BSU PH tfl J
Co Hq 1 7 9 10 3 4 3 4
Pz Gren Plat ( M t z ) . . . 1 4 38 26 13 4 6 5
Pz. Gren. Plat (Mtz) 5 38 26 13 4 6 5
Pz Gren Plat ( M t z ) . . . 5 38 26 13 4 6 5
MG Plat (Mtz) 1 8 42 27 17 7 4 2 6
Total 3 29 165 115 59 23 18 4 2 2 4
Figure 72.—Panzer Grenadier Company (motorized),, Army Armored Division, to tal strength 197.
«
O y
m {& ;i 1(^ I
in
i
J
Jj |i 55O
a
Co Hq . .. 1 7 10 13 2 3 4
1 7 32 18 14 8 l
OO
20-mm AA Plat . . 6
20-mm A A Pfat . 1 8 32 32 8 6 2 4 2
22 79 63 17 2 OO
Total .. 3 24 4 6 20 5
Figure 73.—Heavy Weapons Company (motorized), Army Armored Division, total strength 104.
UNIT o> !, J 2 S « ? . —
a 8 * U I 1 § if •*!
o & CL, «u s « a 2B g>
Co Hq 1 ' 5 13 8 7 4 2 3 2
150-mm Inf How Plat 1 5 23 18 6 5 2 2 6 1
150-mm Inf How Plat 1 5 23 18 6 5 2 2 6 1
150-mm Inf How Plat 6 23 18 6 5 2 2 6 1
Mun Sec 1 5 5 1 3
Maint Sec 3 10 13 4
Tns 6 11 12 3 2 6
Total 3 31 108 92 28 22 8 6 34 5
Figure 74.—150-mm Infantry Howitzer Company (self-propelled), Arttry Armored Divisiolt, total strengtlt 172.
II—51
UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451
-' 0 ” $8 I 1 o 2
O ^ fu 04 O di tfi J X
Co Hq . 1 3 5 5 1 3 1 3
Com Sec 2 8 10 3
Engr Plat '.. .... ’ 1 5 41 36 S 6 4 6 6 1
Engr Plat . 1 5 41 36 S 6 4 6 6 1
Engr Plat . .... ...... 6 41 36 5 6 4 6 6 1
N-mm. Mort S e c . . . . 3 14 8 8 1 2 2
Hv MG Sec 3 12 8 5 2 2 2
Maint Set .......... 1 3 4 i i
Tns 6 IS 18 3 8
Total . 3 34 180 161 32 24 12 2 2 18 35 7
UNIT
6 » S» -i ^ o S E « |» 11 eS s«
o £ (S (56 E w j M SS 2S E H S O K K
Regtl Hq 66^ ~2 2 8
8 7^7 6 3
Regtl Hq Co 33 47 47 47 97 93 93 50 4 47
Pz. Gren. Bn (Armd). ........ . . . 26. 168168 673673 456
456 242 -179 115 12. 6 4 179 242 152 24
Pz. Gren. Bn (Mtz). . . . 23
23 148 148 697 548
697 548 229 9 60 12 6 4 6 143 229
Pz. Gren. Bn (Mtz) . 23 148
23 148 697 548 229
697 548 9 60 229 6 4 6 143 229
H v I n f How Co (SP) ... 3 31 31 108
108 92 92 108 22 8 6 25 5
Engr Hq (H-Trk) 3 40 40 211
211 177177 40 177 27 2 2 24 1 48 7
AA Co . . . 2 14 64 36 28 16 12 16 2
2 14 64 36
Total ..... . . . 89 1
598 2,555 1,957 852 443 284 38 20 12 2 43 12 6 527s 88
89’ 598 2,555 1,957
1
Including 11 officials.
2
Including 89 Armd vehicles.
Figure 7&.—SS Panzer Grenadier Regiment, SS Armored Division, total strength 3^42
(14) The Parachute Rifle Regiment. Three per infantry. They include some men trained for air-
Parachute Rifle Division, these consist of three borne operations, but most of the so-called para-
chutists are well trained infantrymen only. The
parachute rifle battalions, a 120-mm mortar or a
equipment includes a high proportion of small
light gun company, and an antitank company. automatic weapons, bazookas, and antitank rocket
These regiments usually are employed as crack pistols. (See Figures 77 to 82.)
IJ—52
I MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIED ™-E
PARCHUTE RIFLE
REGIMENT
COM HO SEC CO HQ CO HO
PLAT CO HQ
CO HQ
81-MM 81-MM HV MG
PLAT MORT SEC MORT SEC PLAT
81-MM
MORT SEC
PRCHT PRCHT HV MG
TNS - R PUT R PUT PLAT
PRCHT
R PLAT
PRCHT PRCHT
— — 75- MM
R PUT R PUT
PRCHT LIC>HT
R PLAT
GUN PLAT
TNS TNS
TNS T MS
o
UNIT . g s 1 1 1 o a i
Zip m
h
Regtl Hq 7 60 36 17 10 3 3 13 4
Regtl Hq Co 6 225 182 89 37 11 12 i
Prcht R Bn ... . 828 410 257 214 66 8 13 2 81 19
Prcht R Bn 25 8 13 81 19
CM
Figure 78.—Parachute Rifle Regiment, Air Force Parachute Division, total strength 3,206.
11—53
I MARCH 1945
UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451
Hv MGs
Sub-MGs
Vehicles
Mtrcls
Pistols
LMGs
81-mm
Morts
Rs or
UNIT
Cbns
Oils
Mtr
w
Bn Hq T 89 57 71 20 2 12 5
Com Plat ... . 1 41 29 13 9 2 6 1
Prcht R Co. 4 166 72 59 43 20 3 15 3
Prcht R Co.. . . . . . .. . 4 166 72 59 43 20 3 15 3
Prcht R Co 4 166 72 59 43 20 3 15 3
Prcht MG Co .. .. 5 200 108 46 56 2 8 4 2 18 4
Total 25’ 828 410 257 214 66 8 13 2 13 214
1
Including three officials.
Figure 79.—Parachute Rifle Battalion, Air Force Parachute Division, total strength 853.
Vehicles
Pisttols
Mtrcls
LMGs
81-mm
Morts
Rs or
UNIT
Cbns
A
Offs
Mtr
.w
Co Hq 1 35 1 12 14 3 3 3
Prcht R Plat.. ... . 1 38 16 15 9 6 2
Prcht R Plat : 1 38 16 15 9 6 2
Prcht R Plat 1 38 16 IS 9 6 2
Tns 17 13 2 2 2 6
Total 4 166 n 59 43 20 3 15 3
Figore 80.—Parachute Rifle Company, A Air 0 . - Parachute Division, total strength 170.
Hv MGs
Sub-MGs
Vehicles
1
Pistols
LMGs
81-mm
Morts
Rs or
UNIT
Light
Guns
Cbns
Offs
Mtr
Co Hq 1 22 6 6 1 2 4
Corn Set 11 7 4 1
Prcht Hv MG Plat 1 37 19 11 9 4 2
Prcht Hv MG Plat 1 37 19 11 Q 4 2
Prcht 81-mm Mort Plat 1 48 28 11 11 4 3
Prcht Light Gun Plat 1 27 is 5 9 2 2
Tns 18 18 2 2 2 6
Total 5 200 108 46 5 2 8 4 2 18 4
Figure 81.—Parachute Machine-Gun Company, Air FForce Parachute Division, total strength 205.
Sub-MGs
Vehicles
120-mm
Pistols
Mtrcls
LMGs
Morts
Rs or
UNIT
Cbns
a
Mtr
o
Co Hq 2 13 3 5 9 1 1 4
Com Sec 18 18 6 2
Prcht 120-mm Mort P l a t . . . . 1 33 15 11 9 1 3 3
Prcht IZO-mm Mort Plat 1 33 15 11 9 1 3 3
Prcht 120-mm Mort P l a t . . . . 1 33 15 11 9 1 3 3
Mun Sec 11 11 1 2
Tns 17 17 2 2 2 5
Total 5 158 83 40 45 6 9 19 4
Note: Some Prcht Regts may have 75.mm of 105.mm Light (Recoilless) Guns instead of the 120.mm Marts.
Figure 82.—Parachute 12bmm Mortar or L$ht Gun Company, Air Force Pararhnte Division, total stretigth 163.
11—54
T 5 > ^ ™ •*--**&;£
S
OJV A H
3. General Headquarters
a. FORTRESS BRIGADE (Festuugsbr-igade). In-
dependent static infantry brigades.
b. FORTRESS REGIMENT (FcstzltzgsYegillzetlt).
Regimental staffs controlling fortress battalions.
S[O}SI,J
c. FORTRESS BATTALIONS (Festungsbataillon).
Static infantry battalions employed in the defense (i,
• « 8 -s= 1 i S ? If If si la Is i If J ! sl
S g £ as a .3 a a si §1 EH iS K 3 K,S sj i£ g a> a
Bn Hq 2 2 2 2 ' 1
C Sch 13 78 5 5 31 86
sup c o 3l 13 57 66 7 50 12 6 2 2 1 1 1 1 8” 3 24 48
Rep1 Popl 200 200
Rep1 Pool 200 200
Rep1 Pool 200 200
Red Pool 200 200 ~~
’ 2
Total ... 18 91 864 873 40 86 50 12 6 2 2 i 1 I I 3 G 48
x
Including one official.
3
Various types of armored vehicles may be attached for demonstration purposes.
Figure 84.—Field Replacement Battalion, Army Armored Division, total strength 973.
e. MACHINE-GUN BATTALION (Maschinenge- companies. Each company has twelve heavy mor-
wehrbataillon). The independent machine-gun J a r s (120-mm).
battalion consists of three companies equipped k1. ALPINE INFANTRY BATTALION (Hochge-
with heavy machine guns and bazookas and a birgsbataillon). The personnel of this battalion
heavy weapons company. It probably has been is especially trained for warfare in high terrain
redesignated fortress machine-gun battalion. and mountain climbing.
f. FORTRESS MACHINE-GUN BATTALION (Fes-
1. LOCAL DEFENSE (Laudessrhiitzen) REGI-
tungs-Maschinengewehrbataillon). These static MENT AND BATTAIJON. A local defense regiment
machine-gun battalions are composed largely of controls a varying number of battalions which are
Landesschiitzen personnel. Their organization is composed of two to six companies. The average
similar to a Maschinengewehrbataillon except for company strength is 150, and total battalion
the mobility. strength may vary between 400 and 900. These
g. SUPER-HEAVY MACHINE-GUN BATTALION units originally were employed for guard duties at
(Uberschweres Maschinengewehrbataillon). Or- vital installations and as support for the military
ganization of this battalion is probably similar to administration in occupied territories.
that of the Maschinengewehrbataillon. It is
m. SECURITY REGIMENT AND BATTALION
equipped wth 20-mm and 37-mm antiaircraft
(Sicherungsrcginlent). Numerous Landesschiit-
guns and bazookas.
zrn battalions have received additional transporta-
h. LIG,HT ANTIAIRCRAFT BATTALION (Flaba-
tion and equipment and been redesignated
taillon). This consists of light antiaircraft com-
security battalions (Sicherullgsbataillone). While
panies organized similarly to those found organi-
the strength of these battalions varies, similarly
cally in the infantry divisions. It is believed that
to that of the local defense battalions, Figures 85
many light antiaircraft battalions have been re-
and 86 show an average security battalion as it
formed and redesignated super-heavy machine-
may be encountered in the field.
gun battalions and are being employed as mobile
defense units of fortified zones. Several such battalions may be controlled by a
i. T A N K DESTRUCTION BATTALION (Panzerver- security regiment which usually is attached to
stiirer Bataillon). This battalion is equipped with commanders of army groups or army rear areas.
bazookas and other infantry antitank weapons. n. For a complete list of all infantry and se-
j . HEAVY MORTAR BATTALION (Scltweres curity units see the "Order of Battle of the Ger-
Granatwerferbataillon). This consists of three man Army", ,March 1945 edition.
11-56
I MARCH 1945 TM-E 30-451
UNCLASSIFIED
UNIT
y 1 - “2 . I o i
O !5 PH «U A< c/3 ,J ffi
Bn Hq 4 3 11 12 5 4 1 2 6
Com Sec 4 14 14 4 2
Security Co 2 24 135 97 30 39 10 2 2 2 2 '28
CM
CM
CM
Security Co 24 135 97 30 39 10 2 28
Security Co ?
CM
CM
24 135 97 10
CM
30 39 2 28
Tns I1 8 18 20 5 2 1 1 21
Total 2
. II 1 87 448 337 100 127 31 6 6 7 2 48 113
1
Including one official.
2
A Includ i n g a o n e of f i c i a l . and accordingly less fire power and transportation.
Figure 85.—Security Battalion, total strength 508-546.
Sub-MGs
Hv MGs
Vehicles
Vehicles
UNIT
Pistols
81-mm
NCOs
LMGs
Morts
Rs or
H-Dr
Cbns
Pvts
Offs
Mtr
w
Co Hq 1 3 6 6 2 3 1 1
1st Plat 1 -3 32 22 5 10 3 2 4
2nd Plat 4 • 32 22 5 10 3 2 4
3d Plat 4 32 22 5 10 3 2 4
4th (Hv Wpn) Plat 6 25 15 12 5 2 2 3 7
Tns .. . 4 8 10 1 1 1 1 3 8
Total 2 24 135 97 30 39 10 2 2 2 12 28
4. Armored Organic Units that the tables of organization specify 14 tanks for
Armored troops (Panzertruppen), created as an each of the companies, distributed as follows:
arm in April 1943, include many units which, two in company headquarters, and four in each
according to the American conception, belong to of the three platoons. One battalion usually is
other arms. This refers specifically to the Panzer equipped with Pz. Kpfw. V tanks, and the other
Grenadier units which the Germans include in the with Pz. Kpfw. IV tanks. (See Figures 87 to
armored troops arm, while we consider them as 96.)
belonging to the infantry; tank destroyer units ; b. T H E SS TANK (Panzer) REGIMENT. This
and armored reconnaissance units, each of which regiment is organized similarly to the Army Tank
we oonsider as belonging to their appropriate arm (Panzer) Regiment except that the tank com-
while the Germans include them under armored panies are believed to consist of 17 instead of 14
troops. tanks. They are distributed as follows: two in
a. T H E ARMY TANK (Panzer) REGIMENT. company headquarters and five in each of the
This consists of two tank battalions of three com- three platoons. The SS tank regiment has there-
panies each, but a. fourth, an assault gun company, fore more strength and fire power than the Army
b e ’ be encountered. It is believed Tank Regiment, (See Figures 97 to 101,)
pdAouuy diiuy ')USIU}6J^[ yuvj^—
D3S
wav
D3S
NOW
IVId
OH OD — OH OD OH OD OH OD OH OD XI
OH OD
|
1
OD Nno OD OD
OD X I OD X I OD X I OH NS OH N9 OH OD
nnvssv dns
N9 Al IVId OD OH
OD 1NIVW NS A 1103)1
Mi6X "Zd Zi VV WW-ZE OH 11O3V
XI
1N3WIO3V
-•• • « _,,-. » 5
• %^ *^p^ .yc ^s1 -: a*
jS <OV <ai Hj Hc« 41 5.
,8 - ^ 1 I | fif h If lh *g % J 1
O f ? PL, «d PH W 3 °o« So iCu Ru.2 a, a; S> 9
Regtl Hq 4 3 7 9 3 2 2 4
Regtl Hq Co 4 51 54 37 ' 71 8 14 4 3 4 3 15 5
1
37-mm AA Plat 1 27 49 19 42 16 8 8 7 2
. . V. ... 27 221 416 319 285 103 114 3 48 48 127 18
Pg.Kpfw.IVBn 27 212 328 229 286 95 112 3 48 48 .94 18
TkMaintCo 6 39 185 209 17 4 4 68 6
Total 69^ 553 Ifi39 822^ ^M 228 252 6 8 52 51 52 51 3U3 53
1
2
May be replaced by a flame-thrower Tk Plat with six flame-thrower Pz. Kgfw. lll's.
3
Including seven off%&.
Including ten Armd vehicles.
UNIT
us
o
o
t SS
o
II 52 ft.
Co H q . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 2
Com Plat 8 3 13
Tk Plat 1 11 20
Maint Sec 3 11 11 3 3
Tns '. 2 29 25 21 35 10
Total 4 51 54 37 71 14 15
Figure 89.—Tank Regiment Headquarters Company, Army Armored Division, total strength 109.
. I « :i 1 E i ‘ii E- Q
Bn Hq 4 4 7 11 1 3 2 4 2
Bn Hq Co ....... 4 32 99 61 53 22 24 3 6 6 19 8
Sup Co 7 59 211 226 21 30 4 98 2
Tk Co . . 4 42 33 7 70 16 28 14 14 2 2
Tk Co 4 42 33 7 70 16 28 14 14 2 ?
Tk Co 4 . 42 33 7 70 16 28 14 14 2 2
Total .._......... ......... 27’ 221 416 319 285 103 114 3 48 48 127’ 12
1
Including two officials.
2
Including five Armd vehicles.
Figure 90.—Pz. Kpfw. V (Panther) tank battalion, .4rmy Arntered L$@sion, total strength 664.
I MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-45/
.. .CO
UNIT
.n «yis (u-> «L
*
O o
5P- |tna «JS Soca
".3 z .2
ill
A3«
Co Hq 1 22 2 3 2 1
1 18
18 17 2 27 8 12 6 6 3
J+gr and Rcn P l a t . . . . . . . . . - . . 1 88 45 32 12 10 11 11 7
20-mm AA Plat ( S P ) . . . . . "11 4 35~~
35 24 12 4 1 3 4 1
Total ............ 4 32 99 61 53 22 24 3 6 6 19= 8
1
Long-barreled in P,-. Kpfw. IV; superlong-barreled in Ps. Kpfw. V.
2
Including five Armd vehicles.
Figure 91.—Tank Battalion Headqnarters company, Army Armored DiGsion, total strength 135.
UNIT m CT 2
£ 8 ~
Pn
°£ 1 2 -*> 2
o PH j
Co Hq 3 5 14 13 7 2 4 2
Med Serv ...... 1 3 5 2 6 1 3
Maint Serv (Mtr Vehicles and \\:pns) 2 34 130 137 4 25 42
Fuel Serv 4 22 23 2 1 2 21
Mun Serv 3 15 16 • 1 1 1 14
Adm S e r v . . . . . . 1 10 . 25 35 1 1 14
1
Total 7 59 - 211 226 21 30 4 98 2
1
Including two officials.
Figure 92.—pz. Kpfw,.. J (Panth.er) Tank Battalion S14pply Compa?ty,, Army Armored Division, strength 277.
UNIT
m 3 . z
O !? PH «U O. « S>
Co Hq 1 9 9 7 10 4 4 2 2 2 2
Tk Plat l 11 8 20 4 '8 4 4
Tk Plat 1 11 8 20 4 8 4 4
Tk Plat l 11 8 20 4 8 4 4
Total . . 4 42 33 7 70 16 28 16 14 2 2
1
Long-barreled in Pz. Kgfw. IV; super long-barreled in Ps. Kpfw. V.
Figure 93.—Tank Company, Army Armored Division, total strength 93.
« s , u ! 1 i
O fc &< «u PH C/) J
Co Hq 3 5 14 13 7 2 4 2
Med Serv ................................. 1 2 5 2 6 3
es and Wpns)
Maint Serv (Mtr Vehicles Wpns)...... 2 28 59 65 4 20 27
Fuel Serv 3 9 10 1 1 1 8
Mun Serv -................ 3 12 13 1 1 1 11
Adm S e r v . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 10 24 34 1 1 13
Total .. . al 51 123 137 20 24 3 66 2
1
Including two officials.
Figure 94.—Ps. Kpfw. IV Tank Battalion Supply Company, Army Armored Division, total strength 181.
H—60
I MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30451
UNIT „ t • « §
* u > ».§ « •§ S
O £ t, eio a, tn j
Co Hq . 3 88^ 8 2 1 4 2
Tk Maint Plat . 1 99 50 59 1 1 13 1
Tk Maint Plat 1 99 50 59 1 1 11 1
Tk Salv Plat 7 39 37 6 3 2 IS 1
Ord Sec 1 11 8 8 . 2 5
Sig Equip Rep Sec 4 8 10 2 4
2 6 8 4
Tn 77 16
16 20 3 8 1
Total 66 ll 39
39 185
185 209 17 4 4 68 6
1
Including three officials.
Figure 96.—Tank Maintenance Company, Army Armored Division, total strength 230.
, 8 a *a 1 2 | ial la ia 1 ^ % *£ j I
O E ; ft «U PL< tn j SOB fto Ko Ro^ o, n! S> S
Regtl Hq 4 3 7 9 3 2 2 4
RegtlHq. . 43 56 37 76 9 16 5 3 5 3 1.5 5
37-mm AACo. ( S P ) 1 . . . 1 27 49 19 42 16 8 8 7 2
Pz. Kpfw. FBn 27 250 439^ 316 29() HI 135 3^ 59 59 127 18
Pz. Kpfw. V Bn 27 250 351 226 291 103 133 3 59 59 94 18
Tk Maint Co 6 39 185 209 17 4 4 68 6
Total 7<f 614 1,087 816 719 245 296 6 8^ 64^ 62 64^ 62 31^ 53
1
Ma be replaced by a flame-thrower Tk Plat with six flame-thrower Pa. Kgfw. 111's.
*9 Including seven officials.
InYuding seven Armd vehicles.
Figure 97.—SS Tank Regiment, SS Armored Division, total strength 1,771.
11—61
MARCH .I945
UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451
c. T H E TANK BATTALION. In the Army Mo- tain Division this is organized similarly to the SS
torized Division this battalion is organized simi- tank companies in the SS Armored Division; it
larly to the tank battalions in the Army Armored may be replaced sometimes by an assault gun com-
Division; it sometimes may be replaced by an pany.
assault gun battalion. f. FLAME-THROWER TANK PLATOONS. These
consist of six flame-throwing Ps. Kpfw. IItanks,
d. THE TANK BATTALION. In the S-S1 Motor- and are frequently organic in the tank regiment
ized Division it is organized similarly to the tank (Army and SS). They are either a part. of the
battalions in the SS Armored Division. regimental headquarters company or are assigned
e. T H E SS TANK COMPANY. In the 55" Moun- directly to the regimental headquarters,
UNIT „ v, « « cfe| g~ i
o a 1 g £ 5 2 no& iiol
Bn Hq 4 4 7 11 1 3 2 4 2
Bn Hq Co 4 37 104 61 61 24 27 3 8 8 19 8
Sup Co .....
..... 7 59 211 226 21 30 4 98 2
Tk C ; 4 50 39 6 69 18 34 17 17 2 2
Tk Co .........*..... .......*.
......*. 44 50 39 6 69 18 31 31 31 2 ?
Tk Co ........ 4 50 39 6 69 18 31 31 31 2 2
’ a
Total ..... 27
27' 250 439 316 290 111 135 3 5 5 127 111
1
Including two officials.
2
Including five Armd vehicles.
Figure 98.—Pz. Kpfw. V, Tank Battalion, SS Armored Division, total strevlgth 716.
UNIT
A » -1 § & **J
* 8 f :i i i § us
Co Hq O1 ^2 2
PH (KU3 2
O< « J SOPQ 1
Corn and Rcn Plat. . . . . ... 11 2 23 222 23 35 10 10 8 8 3
11 23 22 322 11 7
CM
3 4
1 4 35 24 3
Total ... 4 37 104 61 61 24 27 3 8 8 19 8
4 37 104 61
1
8
Long-barreled guns in Pz. Kpfzu. IV, superlong in Pz. Kpfw. V.
Including five Armd vehicles.
Figwe 99.—SS Tank Battalion Headquarters Company, SS Armored Division, total strength 145.
UNIT „ .2 g » Er
O Z tu o5cj DM en j tCc!
Co Hq 1 8 9 6 9 3 4 2 2 2 ?,
Tk Plat 1 14 10 10 5 10 5 5
Tk Plat 1 14 10 20 5 20 5 5
Tk Plat .. . .... 1 14 10 20
20 55 20 5 5
Total 4 50 39 66 69
69 18
18 34 17 17 2 2
1
Long-barreled guns in Pz. Kpfw. IV, superlong in Pz. Kpfw. V.
Figure NO.—SS Tank Company, SS Armored Division, total strength 93.
I MARCH 1945
UNCLASS\F\-ED TM-E 30-451
a | •« " I I 1 S jig . 1
Bn Hq ... 4 3 7 10 3 1 1 3 2
Bn Hq Co. 4 37
37 10-I
10-I 61 61 24 27 3 8 8 61 8
sup Co ...... ....... 7 51
51 123
123 137 20 2-l 3 66 2
Tk C o . . . . . , . ,........ 4 50
50 39
39 6
to to to
69 18 34 17 17 2
Tk Co ....... 4 50
50 39
39 6 ‘69 18 34 17 17 2
Tk C o . . . . . . . . . ... .. 4 50
50 39
39 6 69 18 34 17 17 2
Total .. 27% 241
241 351
351 226 291 103 133 3 291 291 942 1
1
a
Including two officials.
Including five Armd vehicles.
Figure lOl.—Ps. Kpfw. IV, SS Tank Battalion, SS Armored Division, total strength 619.
PL,
UNIT * u JS d E a ?! @
MI O <n ° 2 2 A ^ E - £ i " ' £ r •2
O • 15 (£ ' (25 -£ en J Som ScO
Bn Hq . . . . ;. . . . 4 4 7 11 1 3 2 4 2
Bn Hq Co. 4 27 89 51 48 22 18 3 3 3 19 8
sup c o .......... .....
..... 7 59
59 211 226 21 30 4 98 2
Tk Co ..... .....
.... 4 42 33 7 70 16 28 14 14 2 2
Tk Co 4 42 33 7 70 16 28 14 14 2 2
Tk Co ......... ..... 4 42 33 7 70 16 28 14 14 2 2
Total 27%1 216
216 406 309 280 103 108 3 45 45 1272 280
1
Including two officials.
2
Including eight Armd vehicles.
Figure lOZ.—GHQ Pz. Kpfw. VI, (Tiger) Battalion, total strength 649.
11—63
I MARCH 1945 UiCLASSlFiED TM-E 30451
BN HQ BN HQ CO SUP CO TK CO TK CO TK CO
CO HQ CO HQ — CO HQ CO HQ CO HQ
MUN
SEC
ADM
SEC
Figure 103.—Heavy Tank Company (Tiger) (FKL) (Remote Control), tot@1 strengkt 188.
UNIT „ u » a „ g§ ft a-3
Co Hq 2 88 9 9 5 5 14 2 2 4 4 22 ^2 2 3
Plat 1 13
13 18
18 22 30
30 55 99 44 44 9
Plat 1 13
13 18
18 22 30
30 55 99 44 44 9
Plat 14 18 22 30 5 9 4 44 9
Maint Sec 6 30 6
26 10 4 1 10
Tns 7 30 22 1.5 2 1 9 10 1
Total . 44 61 123 559
9 129 23 33 11 14
14 36 22 4
Figure 104.—Heavy Tank Company (Tiger) (FKL) (Remote Control), total strength 188.
11—64
I MARCH 194~ uNCLASS\F\ED TM-E 30-451
ARTILLERY REGIMENT
J 1
REGTL REGTL 75-MM 150-MM
105-MM 105-MM
HQ HQ BTRY GUN BN HOW BN
GUN/HOW GUN/HOW
BN BN
I
BT«Y BN HQ BN HQ BN HQ BN HQ
HQ
BTRY
II—65
I MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30451
i 8 | mf I 1 i gz $6 A i I
Regtl Hq 5 2 18 17 6 7 3 2 8 1
4 22 59 64 17 6 1 1 65 3
CM 00
Regtl Hq B t r y . . . . . . . , 2 29
1st (Light) Bn 19 109 424 460 71 38 17 12 7 1 96 516 13
1
00 00 OO
2d (Liaht) Bn 19 109 424 460 71 38 17 12 7 96 516 13
3d (Light) Bn 19 109 424 460 71 38 17 12 7 1 96 516 13
4th (Medium) Bn..._. 19 109 5.57 604 71 37 17 12 4 1 124 697 13
Total ... 85' 460 1,906 2,065 307 164 69 36 12 30 7 441 34 2,318 56
1
Including ten officials.
Figure 106.- -Artillery Regimmt,InfantInfantry
ry Division, 1944 Type, total strength 2,451.
UNIT „ ^ a B ^ s M * !
* s i :j i i § |i *i i <??
Bn Hq . . 6 3 8 10 7 4 2 1 12 1
Hq Btry Incl Tns . . 4’ 22 111 126 16 34 142 3
to to
9 2 2
150-mm How Btry ... 3 '28 146 156 16 8 5 4 30 181 3
to to
IN CM
146 156 16 181 3
OO OO
5 4 30
150-mm How Btry ... 3 146 156 16 5 4 \ 30 181 3
OO
UNIT „ u ^ i » | s
* 8 i :i I i s i4
Bn Hq 6o E
3 PM
8 «10
u &.
7 m
4 J SO 2 1 12 1
Hq Btry Incl Tns 4l 22 104 108 16 10 2 5 3
CM CM
30 126
105-mm Gun/How B t r y . . 3 28 104 114 16 8 5 4 22 126 3
104
OO OO
3 28 114 16 5 22
CM CM
Regtl Hq
t § i u i I I i li i I i
5 2 18 17 6 7 3 2
a
8
Regtl Hq Btry 4 22 59 64 17 6 1 2 1 29 65
1st (Light) B n . . . . . 19 100 344 371 74 37 17 11 7 1 70 406
2d (Light) B n . . . . . . . . ..... 19 100 344 371 74 37 17 U 7 1 70 406
3d (Light) B n . . . . . . . . . . . 19 100 344 371 74 37 17 11 7 1 70 406
4th (Medium) B n . . . . . . 19 97 398 422 74 67 17 9 4 1 90 476
Total .............. 85' 421 1,507 1,616 319 191 69 33 9 30 7 329 1,767
1
Including ten officials.
Figure 109.—Artillery Regiment (Reduced Strength and Fire Power), Infantry Division, 1944 Type, total streligth 2,013.
II—66
I MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451
ARTILLERY REGIMENT
BTRY WRY
HO
ODD
SEC
TN
UNIT . V I 2 m g 5 4 | : 3
s s i d I t g M iJ §1 lg I gg g «• a
Regtl Hq .............. 5 3 7 7 3 5 4
Regtl Hq B t r y . . . . . . 4 23 68 74 14 7 1 7 2 15 4 42 4
75-mm Gun B n . . . 18 123 372 416 55 36 11 18 30 1 71 8 267 12
105-mm Gun/How Bn 16 85 270 300 43 28 10 12 22 1 56 6 211 10
105-mm Gun/How B n . . . 16 85 270 300 43 28 10 12 22 1 56 6 211 ”10
150-mm How B n . . 16 86 277 308 43 28 10 12 18 8 87 6 327 13
Total ........... 75' 405 1,264 1,405 201 132 45 18 24 12 99 13 285 30 1,062 49
1 Including ten officials.
UNIT m um « g
O S5 w PiO p_, C/2 t-J
Bn Hq 5 33 77 99 3 3 3 1 9 1
Hq Btry 4 24
24 101
101 107
107 13 9 2 3 26 2 90 5
3 30
30 88
88 100
100 13 8 4 6 8 1.5 9 56 2
75-mm Gun Btry. 3 33 88 100 13 8 4 • 6 8 15 2. . 56 7.
75-mm Gun Btry 3 33 88 100 13 8 4 6 8 15 2 56 2
Total 18’
18’ 123 372 416 55 36 14 18 30 1 71 8 267
1
In&ding two officials.
UNIT 2 „ &„ -S if 3 it
Bn Hq 66 33 88 10
10 3 4 3 1 9 1
Hq Btry 44 5
to to
22
22 88
88 92
92 14 8 2 3 26' 90
105-m, Gun/How Btry.. 33 30
30 87
87 99
99 13 8 4 6 8 15 56 2
105-mm Gun/How Btry.. .. 33 30 87 99 13 8 4 6 8 15 2 56 2
’
Total . .. 16
16’ 85 270 300 43 28 10 12 22 1 56 6 211 10
1
Including two officials.
Figure 113.—105mm Gun-Howitzer Battulion, Volks Grenadier Division, total strellgtlt 371.
* 8 * 6S f 3 g !B J f
Bn Hq ...................
o6 a3 I8 &6
10
i3 A4 3 §a s> g1 9 1
Bn Hq Btry 46 233 958 10010 143 48 2 29 100
CM
6 5
150-mm How Btry ........ 43 23
30 95
87 100
99 14
13 88 24 6 66 1 29 109 6
CM
3 30 87 99 13 8 4 6 6
150-mm How Btry ........ 3 30 87 99 13 8 4 6 6 1 29 2 109 6
!T7 3’ 30 87 99 13 8 4 6 6
Total . . .. 16 86 277 308 43 28 10 12 18 8 87 6 327 13
^7 1? 86 277 308 43 28 10 12 18
1
Including two officials.
Figure 114.—150-mm Howitzer Battalion,. Volks Grenadier Division, total strength 379.
II—68
I MARCH 1945
UNCLASSIF TM-E 30-451
(3) In Arwzorcd and Motorized Divisions. divisions may be found with some variations in
Three battalions (I normally equipped with two the General Headquarters pool.
batteries of 105mm gun/howitzers and one bat-
b. T H E ARMY ANTIAIRCRAFT ARTILLERY BAT-
tery of 150-mm howitzers all self-propelled, II
TALION (Heeresflakartillerieabteilung). One to a
equipped with 105mm gun howitzers, and III
Panzer and a motorized division, consisting of
with 1SO-mm howitzers). Panzer and Pan&r
two %-mm antiaircraft batteries and one 20-mm
Grenadier divisions also have a separate Army
antiaircraft battery.
antiaircraft artillery battalion as an organic divi-
sional component. In SS Panzer divisions a c. T H E ASSAULT-GUN BATTALION (Sturw
heavy artillery battalion, usually equipped with geschiitzabteilung). This sometimes replaces the
170-mm guns, is added as the fourth battalion in antitank battalion in Panzer Grenadier divi-
the artillery regiment. sions. Those in company strength, but designated
(4) In Light and Mountain Divisions. It has battalions organic in infantry, light, and mountain
four battalions—I and II equipped with 75mm divisions, were renamed P anzerjiigerkompanie in
mountain howitzers and III with 105mm gun- the fall of 1943. Most of those in the General
howitzers. The organization of IV may vary Headquarters pool were renamed Assault Gun
but it normally is equipped with 1.50-mm howit- Brigades, however, a few General Headquarters
zers. assault gun battalions are believed to have kept
All the types of artillery battalions organic in their designation.
ARMORED ARTILLERY
REGIMENT
— BTRY HQ
— BTRY HQ
105-MM
GUN/HOW
BTRY ISPI
150-MM
HOW BTRY
(SPI
11—69
-s Jl UJUII
(11) Velocity Measurement Platoon (Velozi- tank weapons, however, has been so irregular that
tiitsmesszug). they had to be omitted in many of the tables of
(12) Meteorological Platoon (Wetterpeilzug). organization listed herein.
Makes air analyses for artillery units but does not
engage in weather forecasting. 9. General Headquarters Antitank Units
&
<£ EHV. HCJ
<5 . < K <% <55
a 8 i r° 1 2 I fi II II J
o £ ck (So E 5 j °o Ko Ro S>
Bn Hq 5 1 6 7 5 2 3
Bn Hq Co 4l 20 49 58 13 2 1 23 2 4
1st (75mm) AT Co ( M t r - D r ) . . . . 3 24 104 99 50 16 12 12 36 5
2d (75mm) AT Co (SP)) 3 44 72 59 29 31 14 14 28 4 7
3d (20-mm) AA Co (SP)) 2 34 113 95 26 32 2 12 24 6 6
Total 17l 123 344 318 123 81 . 29 12 12 14 113 20 17
1
Including three officials.
Figure 123.—Antitank Battalion, Igafantry lX~isio~z, 1944 Type, total strength 484.
II—73
I MARCH 1945 UNULASSIHtu TM-E 30-451
a 8 - "a 1 2 i• ia la la J I
O S3 0< «U A< (/I J SO KO KO S> S
Bn Hu .. . 5 1 6 7 5 2 3
Bn H i Co . 41 ?.O 49 58 13 2 1 23 2 4
1st (75-mm) AT Co (M-Dr).
Dr) 3 20 84 (7 44 4 9 9 28 4
2d (75-mm) AT Co (SP)) . 3 44 2d 69 40 10 16 14 2d 4 7
3d (37~mm) AA Co ( S P ) . . . . . . . . . 2 3d 113 105 3d 10 4 9 19 5 5
Total 171 119 324 326 140 26 30 9 9 14 100 18 16
* Including three officials.
Figure 124.—Antitank Battalion, Volks Grenadier Division, total strength 460.
$ a »a" - I I i ia En
W U -g «.§ .3 H S . A 3
Bn Hq .. . 44 1 6 7 4 2 2
Bn Hq Co 1 20 27 29 10 9 4 3 10 1
7%mm AT Co ( S P ) * 3 40 30 11 33 29 14 14 29 4
75-mm AT Co (SP) l . 3 40 30 11 33 29 14 11 19 4
75-mm AT Co (Mtr-Dr) . . . 3 20 94 59 41 17 41 41 17 4
Sup Co ........... 6ff= 45 140 154 21 16 3 16 2
Total 20"
20s
166 327 271 142 100 271 1 1 135 271
1
Frequently referred to as Assault Gun Co.
2
Including three officials.
Figure 125.—Antitank Battalion, Army Armored Division, total strength 513
A II—74
11 «•
MARCH 1945 TM-E 30-451
UNCLASSIFIED
T/GER-P AT BN
BN HQ BN HQ CO AT CO AT CO AT CO
CO HQ CO HQ CO HQ CO HQ
1
The Pz. Jag. Tiger-P (Porsche) also known as the Ferdinand or
Elephant,’ThePz. consists of the 8.8-cm Stu. K.43/l on the Tiger-P Chassis.
II—75
I MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451
UNIT *
01
O
O
!5
li3j5 £ v
Co Ha~ ............._.. . 11 9 3 19 6 3 3 1 7,
COm Plat 1 8 23 30 2 10 1
AA Plat 5 41 27 19 4 1 3 7 3
Engr Plat 1 3 23 17 6 4 3 4 4
Maint . ........ 1 9 41 47 4 4 16
Trains... . . 2 19 98 98 21 4 3 45 3
Total 7l 55 235 222 71 22 10 83 13
1
Including three officials.
Figure 1X—Battalion Headquarters Company, Tiger-P Antitank Battalion total strength 297.
UNIT o
o o
SB
O U
Co Hq . . . 2 8 13 10 13 4 2 2 2 4
1st Plat 1 14 20 9 26 9 4 4 4 2
2d Plat 1 14 20 9 26 9 4 4 4 2
3d Plat ........... 15 20 9 26 9 4 4 4 •7
Maint Set . 3 23 21 5 3 8
Tns 13 34 26 21 2 13 2
Total 4 67 130 84 117 34 16 14 35 12
" It should be noted that the personnel of engi- ployed by the Tiger (FKL) Company and the
neer platoons in organic divisional units (other crew of which belongs to the armored arm, while
than the organic engineer battalion) belong to the the Goliath crew belongs to engineers).
arm of the unit which they are serving and not to
the engineer arm, although they are trained to per- 12. General Headquarters Engineers
form minor engineer functions. AS the reorganizations of German divisions of
Engineer units often form small detachments 1943 and 1944 have greatly reduced the strength
within their unit for special missions (such as of most types of organic engineer battalions, the
flame-thrower detachments and mine-detection de- General Headquarters engineer units have gained
tachments ). considerably in their importance.
An engineer battalion (Pionierbataillon) is or- Engineer bridging battalions consisting of four
ganic in every German division, varying in bridging companies and an engineer park corn-
strength and composition according to the type of pany, with a total strength of about 900, may be
division, (See Figures 133 to 135.) allotted from the General Headquarters pool.
The engineer battalion in the Two-Regiment In- Various types of bridge columns listed under
fantry Division is similar to that in the YoEks paragraph 11, sub-paragraph g, are usually al-
Grenadier Division except that its components are lotted to corps.
slightly weaker. Various types of engineer battalions, sometimes
The armored engineer battalion in the Motor- controlled by regimental staffs, may be employed
ized Division is very similar to the armored bat- in the support of the division engineers according
talion in the Army Armored Division. to tactical requirements.
The armored engineer battalion in the SS The construction engineers belonged formerly
Armored Division is similar to the armored engi- to a separate arm of inferior status known as con-
neer battalion in the Army Armored Division. It struction troops (Bautruppen). They were re-
has, however, two bridge columns instead of onIy classified as engineers in the fall of 1943, and in-
one. cluded in the designation of their regiments and
A mountain engineer battalion is approxi- various types of battalions their new arm: engi-
mately equal in strength to an armored engineer neers (Pioniere).
battalion; however, it includes mountain climbing For a complete list of identified engineer units
devices and trestle bridge equipment. see "Order of Battle of the German Army,"
The parachute engineer battalion is believed March, 1945, edition,
to be organized similarly to the engineer battalion
in the Infantry Division, 1944 Type. 13. Railway Engineers
Bridge columns were, until 1943, an organic Railway Engineers (Eisenbahnpioniere or Eisen-
component of the engineer battalions in all types bahntruppen) constitute a separate arm. All
of divisions, At the time of the major reorganiza- railway engineer units are alloted by the General
tion of German divisions the bridge columns were Headquarters pool.
withdrawn to corps from all but the armored di-
The railway engineer regiments (Eisenbahn-
visions. The different types of bridge columns
pioniewegiment) consist of two battalions of
are designated by various capital letters, i.e., "B,"
four companies each. The companies operate in-
"J," " K " and "T," each of which represents the
dependently, and frequently make use of prisoner-
type of bridge-building equipment used. Of these,
of-war labor. Their main work is the maintenance
the bridge column "B" has sufficient equipment
for building longer bridges than does column "K." and repair of tracks and the building of railway
However, bridges built by column "B" are of bridges.
wood, while those built by column "K" are steel. Railway Construction Companies (Eisenbahn-
Armored engineer platoons, Goliath, about 35 pionierbaukompanien) are specialist companies
men strong, may be included in any type of engi- engaged in various types of railway construction
neer battalion. These platoons specifically are work.
equipped for the handling of the cable-controlled,
14. Railway Operating Troops
small, armored demolition-charge carrier, the GO-
liath (not to be confused with the large radio con- Railway Operating Troops (Eisenbahnbetriebs-
trolled demolition carrier, B-IV, which is em- truppen) (formerly part of the railway engineers)
11—78
I MARCH 1945 TM-E 30-451
UNCLASSIFIED
were created as a separate arm in November, well as among the three branches of the armed
1943, and include all railway operating units. forces.
They are responsible for the operation of mili- The Armed Forces Signal Command (Wehr-
tary traffic; for providing engineers, guards, and machtnachrichtenkommandantur) is an inter-
antiaircraft protection for military trains, and for service signal headquarters which supervises op-
supervising the repair of bomb damage to rail- erations of permanent signal installations.
roads. The Army Group or Army Signal Regiment
(Heeres- or Armeenachrichtenregiment) is found
15. Organic Signal Troops (Nachrichtentruppen)
with either an army group or an army.
It should be noted that the personnel of signal The Field Signal Command (Feldnachrichten-
platoons and organic divisional units other than the kommandantur) is found in each army. It is a
organic signal battalion belong to the arm of the static signal headquarters responsible for the per-
units in which they serve, although they are manent signal installations in the army area.
trained to perform minor signal tasks. The propa- The Corps Signal Battalion (Korpsnachrichten-
ganda troops, which formerly belonged to the abteilung) is found with each corps.
signal troops, are now a separate arm. (See The Railway Signal Regiment (Eisenbahnnach-
paragraph 17 below.) richtenregimcnt) controls a varying number of
A Signal Battalion {Nachrichtenbataillon) is railway signal battalions.
organic in every German division, varying in The Women's Auxiliary Signal Battalion
strength and composition according to the type of (NachYZC.htenheIf’erinnenubteilung) is engaged in
division. (See Figures 136 to 138.) signal work, such as radio, telephone, and tele-
The signal battalions in all German divisions graph operation.
are composed of a telephone company, a radio Independent specialist companies are engaged
company, and a light signal column or a battalion in various types of signal work. Their function
supply platoon. Their equipment and strength, usually is shown by their title. For a complete
however, vary considerably in accordance with list of identified signal units see "Order of Battle
their type of employment. of the German Army", March, 1945 edition.
16. General Headquarters Signal Units 17. Propaganda Troops (Propagandatruppen)
These are allotted to all echelons of the Ger- Formerly belonging to the signal troops, these
man Armed Forces, from the Armed Forces High became a separate arm in the beginning of 1943.
Command itself down to corps and divisions. They consist mainly of news reporters, photog-
The Armed Forces Signal Regiment (Fiihr- raphers, film camera men, and radio commenta-
ungsnachrichtenregiment) is under direct control tors. Their main function is front line reporting,
of the Armed Forces High Command. Its pri- but they also conduct propaganda addressed to
mary mission is to maintain signal communications the enemy as well as to German troops. The basic
between Hitler's headquarters (Fuhrerhaupt- unit is the propaganda company: (See Figure
quartier), army groups, and army headquarters, as 139.)
IL79
I MARCH 1945
UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451
Com
Hq BhyHq BlryMq — BtryHq
Surv
Plot Cam Com
S.c Soc
i.
Rang* Pcol«ct<>r Prelector Pro|oclor
Finding Soc
fee Soc
AT Sic — Am SM
H Mdr
H in
UNIT e S B 2
£ S Kg g£ g> I
Regtl Hq 31 7 3
Regtl Hq Btry .............. . 7 3 2
Projector Bn ............._ ...._....... ....... 555 20 4 2 109 9
Projector Bn 555 20 4 18 109 9
Projector Bn . .......................... . . 4 18 109 9
Light Projector C l m . . ...................4 18 20 5
Total 1^876 62 ~\2 54 374^ 37
A Rkt projector Regt (Mtz) consists of either two 150-mm projector Bns plus one Hv projector Bn (210 or 280/320-mm), or
threeARkt150~mmprojector Bns. A Hv projector Regt (Mtz) consists of two Hv projector Bn (210 or 280/320-mm), plus O r 150-mm
projector Bns.
11—80
I MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451
6 5
<* 8 * °* 1 2 g h •s>
O £ CM «u CM in J i^O
Bn Hq 2 3 10 10 3 2 3 ' 1
Bn Hq Btry : 3 2 10 10 9 6 2 1 10 2
Projector Btry . . . 3 27 105 113 70 12 6 1 6 31 2
Projector Btry . . . 3 27 105 113 10 12 6 1 6 31 2
Projector Btry 3 27 105 113 ' 10 12 6 1 6 31 ?,
Am Clm 5 45 45 2 3
Total . 14 101 440 464 44 47 . 20 4 18 109 9
. 8 . 6- -i a o § Is ll I -3 i-y
• g g £ d I I 3 •£ II flS II I
Bn Hq . . . 91 14 60 65 18 . 7 4 2 14 10 4 1 10
Engr Co 3 26 150 , 122 40 21 9 2 2 6 1 3 16 8 29
Engr Co 3 26 150 122 40 21 9 2 2 6 1 3 16 8 29
Engr Co (Bel) 3 26 150 123 38 22 9 2 2 6 1 3 16 8 29
1
Total 18 92' 510 432 136 71 31 6 6 20 17 19~ 52 25 97
* Including three officials.
Figure 133.—Engineer Battalion, Infantry Division, 1944 Type, total strength 620.
. s ,
O is fc
JI
«u
i I § I !j A j j |i , . *
PM en J M ooS u,H S> S tf> (-. K pq
Bn H q 9» 14 61 60 17 7 10 8 3 1 10 37
Engr Co (Bel) 3 26 150 128 49 2 9 2 2 6 1 3 16 8 29 130
Engr Co (Bel) 3 26 150 128 49 2 9 2 2 6- 1 3 16 8 29 130
Total 151 66 361 316 115 11 18 4 4 12 12 14 35 17 68 297
1
Including three officials.
UNIT
a 8
co
§ °|
J2
I
v
O
g
1
»
§
to
O
> I?
b
g S » > » S E
ij
« <?
II
ll
O £ fc «U CM 03 J K SS fcH So
4 2
Bn Hq 3 3 13 9 6 4 3
48 1;
Bn Hq Co 9" 22 128 136 27 12 11 2
128 7
Engr Co (Mtz) . .. 167 128 41 21 67128 2 2 6
Engr Co (Mtz) 3 25 167 128 41 21 18 2 2 6 24 7
Engr Co Co(Mtz)(Armd) . . . . .. 4 3 29 2 6 3 36 6
Br Clm K (Mtz) 1 2 14 83 92 7 3 36 10
Total 243 ~U8 743 562 247^ 102 96 6^ 6 20^ 3^ 174” 42
1
May be replaced by a similar Br Clm, Type J.
2
Including five officials.
8
Including 31 f i v e officials.
Figure 135.—Armored Engineer Battalion, Army Armored Division, total strength 885.
II—81
l MARCH 1945
UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451
UNIT :
.
*
6y .2 6-
„.§
-i
.2
i•§ <S8
O fel A< «<J -AH M IJ
Bn H q 61 6 8 9 8 3 4 3
1st (Tp) Co ......... . . . 4 37
37 132 154 4 15 S5 34 4 7 2 42
2d (Rad) CO (Mtz) ,_.......... . 27
27 105 122 3 11 4 35 4
Sup Plat .. . 2 10
10 38 41 3
3 6
6 22 7 2 7 12
1
Total 16 80 283 326 18 35 11 76 13 14 54
1
Including three officials.
Figure 136.—Signal Battalion, Infantry Divisionj 1944 Type, total strength 379.
UNIT
<5 « &. I s? 3 -3 -3 "3
o £ CM P2U S « j s> S
BnHq ................. 6 6 8 6 8 3 4 3
Tp Co ...........t..._..... 3 27 112 131 9 1 8 19 3 3
Rad Co .._..._.,,._.._...,_.... 3 1 5 94 19 1 4 16 3
Sup Plat " 2 7 2<? 32^ 6^ 2 5 1 10
~ Total TTT 77. VV' 57 234 266 34 5 11 5 10 12 44
1 Including three ofticials
UNIT
o . s- •§ a o
sS u ? . i .» •§ S
O t? AH PSU AH Cfi J
Bn H q T 9 26 28 13 3 11 ?,
4 39 150 175 13 1 14 44 6
Armd Rad Co 4 50 200 216 17 21 20 50 6
Light Sig Clm ...._._...._...... 1 5 20 25 2 2 1 9
Total 161 103 396 444 69 51 35 114" 14
»Including three officials.
a
Including 20 Armd vehicles.
Figure 138.—Armored Signal Battalion, Army Armored Division, total strength 515.
II—82
I MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIED 30-451
UNIT
m O
« u
o a
’
Co Hq 11 3 17
Light War Reporters Plat 9 5
Light War Reporters Plat 9 5
Hv War Reporters Plat 9 5 14 9
Propaganda Plat ' 8 23 26 IS
Working Det 2 8 22
Tns 8 10 3
1
Total 48 57 105 56 26
1
Including eight officials.
Figure 139.—Propagan& Conlpawy, total strerrgth 210
18. Organic Reconnaissance Units One of the bicycle companies, however, sometimes
Most types of German field divisions include an may .be replaced by a motorcycle company. For
organic reconnaissance battalion, and the re- the strength and equipment of the mountain
mainder have strong reconnaissance companies. reconnaissance battalion, see Section V, Para-
The following are the basic types of the divisional graph 3.
reconnaissance units: The Mobile Battalion (Schrlelle Abteilung)
The reconnaissance battalion of ‘the Infantry was formed in 1943 by merging the reconnais-
Division, Old Type, consisted of a horse cavalry sance and antitank battalions. A considerable
troop, a bicycle troop, and a heavy weapons troop. number of infantry divisions adopted that type of
For many years it was the basic reconnaissance a reconnaissance unit. Early in 1944, however,
unit of the German Army. Since the end 1943, the mobile battalions started to revert to their
however, it has been replaced by the Fiisilier bat- former status of a separate antitank battalion and
talion. a separate reconnaissance battalion. At that time
The Fiisilier battalion of the Infantry Division, the latter was reformed and redesignated Fiisilier
1944 Type, consists of three rifle companies and battalion.
a heavy weapons company. This battalion may be 19. General Headquarters Reconnaissance Units
employed either on reconnaissance missions or as
a crack divisional reserve unit. (See Figure 140.) The Mobile Batialion (Schzelle Abtehng) is
When, at the end of 1944, the tables of organi- a component of the Mobile Brigade (Schnelle
zation for the newly formed Yolks Grenadier di- Brigade). It normally is composed of a mounted
visions were issued, the reconnaissance unit for troop, two bicycle troops, and a heavy weapons
that type of division was specified to be a strong troop. It also may contain organic antitank units.
Fiisilier company, highly mobile through a large The Mounted Regiment (Reiterregiwzent) re-
allotment of bicycles. (See Figure 141.) cently has been identified, A new table of organi-
Front reports indicate, however, that there is a zation for cavalry regiments exists, however, and
trend toward increasing the strength of the new units may be formed.
Fiisilier battalion again. The Motorcycle Company (Kradschiitzenkonz-
The armored reconnaissance battalion, after panic) still may be found in organic reconnais-
many reorganizations in recent years, became a sance units in mountain and light infantry divi-
. very strong and highly mobile standard type of sions and also a component of a Geneial Head-
reconnaissance unit in most types of German quarters motorcycle battalion.
armored and motorized divisions. (See Figures In addition to reconnaissance units mentioned
142 and 143.) in this paragraph, there are also numerous regi-
The Mountain Battalion (Aufkl~rungsubteilung) mental and battalion reconnaissance platoons and
is organic in army and S S mountain divisions squads, but the personnel in these units belongs
and in light divisions. It consists of three to the arm of the regiment in which they are
bicycle companies and a heavy weapons company. serving.
11—83
I MARCH 1945
UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451
* 8 2 4 8 $ d 3 8 &ES 8m s
O1 !5 & eio pn W IJ X SS -S S>
Bn Hq ....., 6 13 58 58 8 14 1 1 2 16 4 13
22 16 ?7
to to
R Co (Bcl) 2 21 119 96 22 13 16
R Co 2 21 119 96 22 28 13 15 11 ?,7
R Co 2 21 119 96 22 22 13 ?, 15 11 27
Hv Wpn Co.. 3 3 165 131 48 29 3 6 6 4 7 3 15 27 51
Total 151 113 580 477 122 127 477 12 6 4 8 5 102 57 16S
1
Including two officials.
Figure 140.—Fusilier Battalion, Infantry Division, 1944 Type, total strength 708.
< 3 < U 1 1 I ! H£ 1 4 2
H
Co. Hq . . . .*. 1 8 18 18 3 77 1 3 2 18 18
Sub-MG Plat (Bcl). . . . .... 1 3 31 7 2 26
26 2 2 1 6 32
Sub-MG Plat ( B c l ) . . . . 4 31 7 2 26
26 2 2 1 6 32
R Plat (Bel) 4 31 22 4 99 3 2 1 6 32
Hv Wpn Plat ... 1 5 34 1 1 11 2 2 6 5 1 29
Inf .How Set 4 4 19 3 55 1 2 4 16 32
Total .. .. 3 28 169 28 28 84 8 2 2 2 1 19 10 56 166
1
May be replaced by a Fii* Bn similar to the Inf Bn (Bel).
Figure 141.—Fusilier Company, Volks Grenadier Division, total strength 200.
(3 g '£ S
1
UNIT >i ,. ^ S g . ; S E * « * E ^
§ ^ (E S6 jg ^ 3 ffi si eg gcB
Bn Hq 4 66 12
12 13 4 5 3 4 4
Bn Hq Co , 3 33
33 80
80 27 61 28 53 3 3 3 ?.
3 29 53 7 45 33 25 13 23 ?.
Armd Ren Co . 3 36 144
144^ 83 55 45 29 4 2 6 ? 21 4
... 3 39 125 125 51 51 44 2 2 30 -\
Hv Wpn Co 4 32 122 67 32 32 19 6 6 6 27 4
sup c o T 48 156 172 1 6 4 7l 3
1
Total 2T-
27 223 692 434 300 206- 147 4 10 6 434 13 199* 77.
1
Including three officials.
2
Including 124 Armd vehicles.
Figure 142.—Armored Reconnaissance Battalion, Army Armored Division, total strength 942.
11—84
I MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451
UNIT » u 2 g » S« u| B. .a vi
« 8 « SI 1 i s ?S U ?!
O fc (£ P4U S en J SS EH
1 8 10 12 3 4 2 4
75-mm Gun Plat 1 7 ?4 4 17 11 7, 6 8
81-mm Mort Plat 1 12 43 24 20 12 2 6 8
Engr Plat 1 5 45 27 13 11 13 6 7 1
Total 4 32 122 67 53 38 19 6 6 6 27* 4
1
Inc'uding 25 Armd vehicles.
Figure 143.—Heavy Weapom Company, Armored Reconnaissance Bnttaliou, total strength 1
UNIT « » B
p « O ¥„
O £ PH ,-J i-c/j
Regtl Hq 5 5 29 2 4 3
2 13 3 1
Hv SL Bn 16 97 550 9 30 6 29 85 16
Hv SL Bn 16 97 550 9 30 6 29 85 16
Hv SL Bn 16 97 550 9 30 6 29 85 16
Total . . 53* 298 1,692 29 90 18 94 255 52
1
Including ten officials.
Figure 144.—Heavy Searcltlight Regiment (mm-motorized), total strength 2,043.
20. Air Force Antiaircraft Field Units and Air Force of trailers but very little motorization and de-
Antiaircraft Units in the Zone of the Interior pend for mobility on separate transportation units,
as already stated in Section V, paragraph 17.
a. MOBILE UNITS. The composition of antiair-
Static units usually are employed for the pro-
craft units larger than batteries varies greatly
tection of specific targets.
in accordance with local conditions, as already
For the difference in German designations of
indicated in Section V, paragraph 17. Normally
antiaircraft units and antiaircraft units in the
an antiaircraft battalion consists of three to five
Zone of the Interior, see Figure 145.
batteries, with a maximum of eight. An anti-
The main components of the non-motorized an-
aircraft regiment normally con&.ists of from three
tiaircraft division described in Section V, para-
to four battalions, with a maximum of six. Divi-
graph 17, are one heavy searchlight regiment
sions have three or four regiments.
and three antiaircraft regiments (see Figures 144
Motorized antiaircraft units have a smaller to 150). Any of the above units may also be en-
number of components than do non-motorized countered as motorized antiaircraft with corre-
units. In accordance with their type of motori- sponding higher strength. However, the basic
zation they are designated: tactical motorized antiaircraft units are the mixed
• Motor-drawn (mot. or mob. 2); mounted on antiaircraft battalion, the light antiaircraft bat-
half-tracks (w& G1); self-propelled (nlot. 3.). talion, and the heavy searchlight battalion. Any
Non-motorized units are designated: combination of these units totaling three or four
Mobile (v for verlegeftihig) ; or Static (O for battalions may be components of a motorized anti-
ortsfest). aircraft regiment, but most frequently regiments.
The personnel strength of motorized units is of three mixed antiaircraft battalions probably
usually approximately double that of non-motor- will be encountered. (See Figures 151 to 154.)
ized ones. The Germans designate antiaircraft units
Mobile antiaircraft units have large numbers equipped with 20-mm or 37-mm guns as light;
U—85
UNCLASSIFIED
l MARCH 1945 TM-E 30-451
r
11—86
I MARCH 1945
UNCLASSIFIED
TM-E 30-451
. as .
z
O "5 s
>•
s
2 <
- Q
"• z
<
I!<
°5 I
i-
s O
Z o
2 2
u
UJ
Z
. as. UJ U
<
S3
-s
z p z
<o a
o <^
I 2
o
m
O
as
3
li
UJ
< a-
O a
UJ
iZ
|1
UJ UJ
<
a x
2 1°
So
a ui
z x
5 •-
UJ Z
z z
"2
ui
11—87
l MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451
UNIT
m 6 I e
O !Z PH iJ — C/i N!fi s
Bn H a ..................._............ 8l 14 44 1 13 5 3
Com Sec ......................... 3 16 4 1
SL Btry 2 20 125 2 7 2 3 20 3
.
S L Btry . ... 2 20 125 2 7 2 20
SL Btry ............................... 2 2 7 2 8 1 20
S L Btry 2 8 1 2 8 1 20
« 8 { 3 \
O fc • d, J H
Bn Hq 81 14 44 1 13 5 3
Corn Set ......... 3 16 4 1
Bar Bln B t r y . . . . . . 2 20 130 2 18 3 20 3
Bar Bln Btry 2 20 130 2 18 3 20 3
Bar Bln Btry 2 20 130 2 18 3 20 3
Bar Bln B t r y _ . . 2 20 130 2 18 3 20 3
Total If)1 97 580. 9 72 29 85 16
1
Inclyding two officials.
Figure 148.—Barrage Balloon Battalion, total strength 693.
UNIT % 3|~ %
£ s - i H hi k h A
Bn Hq . 13 36 1 9 3 3
1 8 7,
20-mm A A Btry 3 30 120 2 12 3 4 2 16 2
to to
3
CM CM
16
so to
20-mm AA Btry 30
3(j 120 2 3 4
20-mm A A Btry 3 30 120 7 3 4 16
37-mm AA Btry 3 30 120 2 12 4 2 16
Total 191 134 524 9 36 9 12 16 19 67 11
1
Including two officials.
Figure 149.—Light Antiaircraft Battalion (non-motorised), total strength 677.
11—88
I MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30.451
20-mm AA
88-mm AA
UNIT
Vehicles
Mtrcis
LMGs
NCOs
Guns
Guns
Pvts
Tlrs
Mtr
ta
o
Bn Hq 8' 17 51 1 15 7 3
3 16. 4 1
r-"^ -mm Btry 2 21 81 2 2 6 2 9 2
2
CM
8%mm Btry ..*................, 2 21 81 6 2 9
CM CM
88-mm Btry 2 21 81 2 6 2 9 2
88-mm Btry 2 21 81 2 6 2 9 2
a
Total Iff 104 391 9 8 24 27 43 12
1
a
Including two officials.
Some Hv AA Bns may consist of four 105.mm Btries with a total of 16 guns.
Guns (Four-
20-mm AA
20-mm AA
88-mm AA
Barreled)
Sub-MGs
Vehicles
UNIT Pistols
Mtrcis
LMGs
NCOs
60-cm
Rs or
Guns
Guns
Cbns
Pvts
Offs
SLs
Mtr
Regtl Hq .................... 91 34 123. 140 20 10 2 25 5
"^ Mixed AA Bn ............... 39 403 908 1,OSL 241 17 30 18 12 339 12
Mixed AA Bn ............... 39 403 908 1,051 241 93 17 30 18 12 339 38 12
Mixed AA Bn 39 403 908 1,051 241 93 17 30 18 12 339 38 12
1
Total 126* 1,243 2,847 3,293 743 289 53 90 54 36 1,042 119 36
1
Including ten officials.
20-mm AA
88-mm AA
Barreled)
Sub-MGs
Vehicles
UNIT
Pistols
Mtrcis
LMGs
NCOs
Rs or
60-cm
Guns
Guns
Cbns
Pvts
SLs
Offs
Mtr
Figure 152.—Mixed Antiaircraft Battalion, Anhrcraft Regimen ( (motorized), total strength 1,350.
II—89
I MARCH 1945
UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451
UNIT m . z 2 Q Q
«B 8 « Si 1 ? § |I A 3 re
Ol • fc ft «U PH en J °O
5 26 81 62 36 18 1 62’ 8
20-mm B t r y . . . . . . . . * . . . . . . . . . . . . .....a. 6 65 139 151 51 14 9 3 4 58 5
20-tnm Btry 6 6 139 151 51 14 2 9 3 4 58 S
6 6 139 151 51 14 2 9 3 4 58 5
Light AA Clm 1 6 1 56 2 1 23
Total 241 227 549 571 191 571 7 571 9 1 220 5
1
Including two officials.
" Some light AA Bns may have four Btries and about 1,000 men.
Figure 153.—Light Antiaircraft Battalion (motorized), total strength 800.
11—90
I MARCH 1945
UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451
from any other. German organizations above the taneously. Units from the Air Force, the Navy,
division should be regarded as. basic t h e the Army, and the Armed SS all serve together
frameworks, with a minimum of organically as- under a commander chosen from any of the four
signed combat and administrative units; branches. branches. Likewise, in basic training great em-
forces are formed around these frameworks. phasis is placed on cooperation among the services
An effort always is made to retain a a n d and among different branches of the same service.
number of combat units in the various types of To sum up, it always should be borne in mind
General Headquarters pools. Consequently, when when confronting any situation involving Ger-
a large German unit, such as a corps or a m a n man forces that the predominating note in all
is engaged in combat it almost always will be German military thought is the combination of
reinforced by units from the General Headquar- all arms and services necessary for any specific
ters pools. When the amount of reinforcement mission into a task force (or combat team) under
is large, additional commanders and staffs also a single commander.
will be attached. The great influence which Gen-
This holds true for all German task forces from
eral Headquarters reinforcements can have on
the highest echelons down to the reinforced regi-
the combat power of a standard the
ments, battalions, and companies. (See Figures
such as a division, should not be overlooked. 155 to 163.)
The German system as thus outlined is both
b. T H E ARMORED BRIGADES (Panzerbrigaden).
rigid and flexible. It is rigid in the sense that all
These were formed in the summer of 1943 with
the units in any single pool are as nearly These
the following components:
as possible; it is flexible because the principle of
combining units from the various pools is util- Brigade headquarters.
ized to obtain any sort of combat organization Brigade headquarters company.
which may be required for a given purpose. - Tank battalion.
Every German task force assigned to a mission Panzer Grenadier Division (armored).
is tactically and administratively an independent Armored engineer company.
and self-contained organization. Coordination Sixty-ton column.
with other units is arranged in advance. The
Medium maintenance platoon.
force never is required to depend on other units
to carry out its mission. Several armored brigades, however, were en-
The German system of organization for c o u n t countered in the field with two Panzer Grenadier
is both economical and effective. It enables the battalions and two tank battalions. Almost all
commanders to concentrate combat power at the armored brigades located on the Western Front
most vulnerable points without changing have have been incorporated into armored divisions,
dispositions. The method also is deceptive to the which were badly in need of replacements.
enemy, as it prevents an easy estimate of German
c. ARMORED TRAINS (Eisenbahnpanzersuge).
strength in any particular situation.
Armored trains have been employed by the Ger-
The administrative organization for supply and mans successfully since the outbreak G e r -
evacuation is arranged in a manner similar to with the objective of surprising the w a r by the
that of the combat organization and is employed sudden occupation of a strategically located rail-
in conformity with the principle that the admin- road station or to protect vital lines of communica-
istrative plan must support the tactical or strate- tion against partisan and guerrilla attacks.
gical plan. Like the tactical organization the Ger- Armored train, Type EP-42, consists of six ar-
man administrative organizations differ with the mored, infantry, artillery, and antiaircraft railway
situation. cars. The train is armed with two 105-mm gun-
One of the outstanding characteristics of the howitzers mounted on special cars; two antiair-
German military system is unity of command. craft cars, each with one four-barrelled, 20-mm
All units engaged on a single mission are under antiaircraft gun, one 76.2-mm Russian gun; and
one commander, who is charged by one two two infantry railway cars g u n two ; and
with responsibility for the success of the tars, tars, one heavy machine gun, and 22 light ma-
sion. As a corollary, two or more German com- chine guns. The- total Strength of that armored
mands never are assigned the same mission t r a i n train is about 113.
11—91
I MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451
li
I
s
li
lij, • : . ii
1111
1 1**1
1 Mi
ni-i
111
i
1
DIvHq
til
11—92
>i, <£ < < H 3 £•
a § a g » If If ! p II h h h h g| II is l! is Is h h
.."..
814 g £
86
32 K ss §s £ EH §5 s5 a3 ^5 sS K S R5 KS RS £3 s§5 ^K S3
Div Hq 55
Sig Bn .....:.' 9 58 184 12
Inf Regt ........ . . . 20 124 693 53 4 5 1
.1
A1C*
(Port Mtil
1
-
CeH,
-QDH-I
75-mm AT
Boteafca
-
Woftlrf) X, -L
•o»»ota
UNIT
6 s o B Em ' | 8.
UNIT
iJ
its
O
o
U
J5
m
S
PH
%
H
J
E
s-
S
WJ
•o
£S
JZ
Regtl Hq ....... 7 1 16
Regtl Hq Co-. 5 28
28 165
165 99
Bel Bn 15 100
100 550
550 37 6 9
Bel Bn 15 110
110 570
570 38 6 10
Inf How Plat 1 10
10 55
55 44 2 1
AT Co (Part Mtz) 3 229. 154
154 3 34 3
Total .... 46 278 1,510 91 12 19 34 3 2 1
G46 278^ U10 91 12
Jt-94
I MARCH I94S
UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451
UNIT
. 3 . sa i I » § I It 1 I 1
O Z PH «SJ CH w ,J B Bid, SS ffi N-<
CT Hq 1 3 1 1 1
Hv Wpn Co 2 4 SO 43 8 3 2 2 — 4 5 1
R Co 1 11 75 65 14 9 9 2 6
A T Co 2 5 38 38 3 4 9 2 5 1 6 3
Total . . . . . . . 6 20 163 149 26 . 16 11 2 6 2 9 4 2 11 1 6 5
<
UNIT „ » | „ =„ |
0 Z &, pju PH UJ J SS m
la
$3
20-mtn AA Plat 1 4 37 34 6 3 2 4 4 1
81-mm Mort Plat 1 ' 13 9 2 2 1
Total 2 4 50 43 8 3 2 2 — 4 5 1
~2 4 50 43 8 3 2 2~
Figure 161.—Heavy Weapons Company, Small Combat Team, total strength 56.
UNIT ' u ™ i C
te sJ ? „,§ .2 •£
% "I
O ^ Pn «U PH iTi
pis
Co Hq 1 1 5 6 T
R Sqd 1 7 6 1 1
R Sqd 1 7 4 2 1
R Sqd 2 I 1 2 T
R Sqd 1 8 6 2 1
Hv MG Sec 2 6 6 4
Engr Counter Attack Sec 2 28 24 3 3
Engr A T Plat 1 6 6 1
Total 1 .11 75 65 14 9 9 ' 2
a
*t!
8 * ^
sj > tn^s
1 2 1 la
.2 « .A3
3
O Z PH P4SJ PH t/2 ffl RO
Co Hq 1 1 4 4 1 1 1 1
Mun Sec 11 2 1 -2 2
11
Bazooka Sqd 9 9 1 9 6
1
AT Gun Plat 1 2 23 24 2 2 3 2
2
6 3
Total 2 5 38 38 3 4 9 2
Figure 163.—Antitank Company, Small Combat Team, total strength 45.
11—95
TM-E 30-45 i
I MARCH 1945
UNCLASSIFIED
d. MILITIA (Volkssturm) UNITS. In Octo- identification papers as members of the German
ber, 1944 a decree was issued by Hitler calling Armed Forces. Their employment probably is
up all able-bodied German men between the ages limited to defensive fighting in trenches, woods,
of 16 and 60 for the defense of the Fatherland. and streets, since their units are equipped with
That decree calls for the creation of a people's small automatic weapons, machine guns, and ba-
militia (Yolkssturm) under the leadership of zookas only, but it is possible that light and me-
Himmler in his function as Commander-in-Chief dium mortars will be added later.
of the Replacement Training Army. It is difficult to determine definitely the tables
It is believed that the Party in general, and of organization for militia units as these will vary
the Storm Troop Organization (SA) and the greatly in accordance with local conditions and
National Socialist Motor Corps (NSKK) in par- the manpower and weapons available, but indi-
ticular, have been charged with the part time cations from the front lines point toward the
training of these men who are to remain on their following average tables of organization for the
jobs until a direct threat endangers their area. basic militia unit, the Militia Battalion. (See
In such an emergency they will be called to the Figures 164 to 167.)
ranks, come under the command of the army,
and be issued weapons, brassards with the in- In some cases several militia battalions may be
scription "Deutscher Volksstumn Wehrmacht" and combined in a militia regiment.
MILITIA
(VOLKSSrURM) BATTALION
1
CO CO CO CO
BN HO
. .X ,
11—96
I MARCH 1945 «*MNM*I*» I mr>i A O O i n r r v TM-E 30-451
UNCLASSIFIED
UNIT
c o «S "SS > »£ .2 •§ S
m u PMJ MJ PL, «u t en j
Bn Hq 1 2 - 1 2 2 2 2 4
Co 1 4 14 83 38 13 33 9 9 9
Co 1 4 14 83 38 13 33 9 9 9
Co I 4 14 83 38 13 3l 9~ 9 9
Co 1 4 14 83 38 13 33 9 9 9
Total1 : i 6 17 58 334 154* 54 136 36 36 36
1
With companies of maximum strength the Bn total may increase to 1-6-21-90-570 or 688 men and the firepower accordingly.
Figure 165.—Militin (17nlk.wturm) Battalion, total strettgth 416-688.
b
UNIT S jj Si ' £ S
o JSS ^S > »J .2 •§
U PkiJ « J d, « U few
Co Hq . . .... • 1 1 2 2 2 1 3
Plat 1 4 27 12 4 10 3 3 3
Plat 1 4 27 12 4 10 3 3 3
Plat 1 4 27 12 4 10 3 3 3
1
Total 1 4 14 83 38 13 33 9 9 9
x
W i t h four Plats of four Sqds each the Co strength may increase to 1.5-22-142 and the fire power accordingly.
UNIT b b %
Pvt
in
£.2
K 5 n
Plat Hq 1 1 3
CO 00 00
1 l
Sqd .. .. 1 3 1 3 i 1 1
Sqd 1 3 1 3 i 1 1
Sqd 1 8 3 1 3 i 1 1
1
Total 1 4 27 12 4 10 3 3 3
1
With four Sqds per Plat the Plat strength may increase to 1-5-35 and the fire power accordingly.
II—97
I MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451
Section VII. SERVICE TROOPS operating troops are an independent arm although
they work ‘in conjunction with the supply troops.
1. General The commander of the division rear services
Every German division includes in its organic (Kowwnandeur dcr Divisiomrrachschubtruppen-
components the divisional services which vary in Kodina), formerly known as Divisionsnachschub-
strength in accordance with the size and type of fiihrer-Dinafu), commands the divisional service
the division. The divisional services of all types troops.
of divisions, however, are organized on the basis The light column (Leichtc Kolomze) found in
of the same standard pattern and include the fol- most types of infantry regiments, consists of 39
lowing components: wagons carrying all types of supplies except ra-
Divisional Supply Trodps (Nachschubtrup- tions. It serves as a supply reserve for the
Pen). subordinate battalions.
Administrative Troops (Verwaltungstruppen). The trains (Trosse) are battalion and company
Medical Troops (Sanitiitstruppen). supply units. They consist of a combat train, a
A Field Post Office (Feldpostamt). rations train (a second rations train in the bat-
Motor Maintenance Troops (Kraftfahrpark- talion), and a baggage train. The company bag-
truppen), varying in size in accordance with the gage train and the second battalion rations train
degree of motorization of the division. are usually motorized. The second battalion ra-
Veterinary Troops (Veteriniirtruppen). Only tions train consists of one truck hauling supplies
in divisions with horse transport. from the division distribution point.
A Military Police Detachment (Feldgendarnze- The repair company (Instandestzungskonzpa-
yietrupp) which in some divisions is withdrawn nie) repairs equipment and weapons except motor
from the divisional services and assigned to the vehicles. Several units of this type may be found
divisional headquarters. in a division.
UNIT
CO O
tfci O
O 55
‘
Div Sup 14 62 366 294 36 5 26 60 13 103 392
Workshop Co 6 21 110 113 24 4 21 1 6
Adm .. 10 34 193 216 14 3 8 3 3 1s
Med Units .. 21 76 372 413 32 7 12 74 4 17 3 46
Vet Co 4 19 133 130 24 2 6 8 2 11 1 105
Fid Post Office 3 7 8 15 3 1 4
Total .. SS1 219 1,182 1,181 133 17 57 204 23 131 25 543
1
Including 22 officials.
Figure 168.—Division Services, Gewnan Iltfantry Division, 1944 Type, total strel~gtl 1,459.
UNIT „ „ « S
•3
'3
O £ H, SS(J K
Div Sup . .. 15 95 640 695 50 5 46 122 35
Adm . ' 10 34 193 220 14 3 12 37 25
Med Units 23 83 402 450 58 11 95 10
Maint Units 12 48 279 309 30 14 60 10
M P Det 1 25
25 77 19 10 5 2 5
Fid Post Office 3 7 8 15 3 1 4
1
Total 6?
64 292
292 17529
1,529 l77O8
1,708 165 13 86 323. 85
1
Including 18 officials.
Figure 169.—Division Sewices, Army Arlnored Division, total strerlgtla 1,885.
UNIT » » g » | JS ^|
I g I a I I $ 2 2 gj
Regtl H q 8 6 12 18 5 3 1 6 3 40
120 Ton Clm (Mtz) 2 17 95 112 2 2 19 1
30 Ton Clm 2 12 80 92 2 1 42 100 5
30 Ton Clm 2 12 80 92 2 1 42 100 5
Sup Plat 1 3 60 65 1 1 19 48 3
Ord Co 3 . 18 67 83 3 1 5 1 10
Maint Plat 2 g 50 58 2 1 6 1 4 •>
Adm Co . 8 • 22 134 156 8 3 28 1 11 5
Med Co 10 34 150 167 27 2 16 2 17 2 46 20
Atnb Plat 1 5 34 40 21 2
Vet Co 4 15 100 102 17 2 7 1 10 1 94 in
Fid Post Office .. 3 9 6 6 12 3
Total '.... 46l 161 868 951 121 3 15 111 12 130 18 388 103
1
Including eight officials.
Figure lfO.—Supply Regiment, Volks Grenadier Division, total strength 1,675.
11—99
I MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIED
are being allotted to .divisions in accordance with A military police battalion is found with each
the tactical requirements. For the procedure of army and consists of three or four military police
evacuation of wounded and the definition of companies.
medical units see Section V, paragraph 3. Military police detachments are organic in every
German division. They were originally a part of
5. Field Post OfFice the divisional services, but may be found now fre-
There is a field post office in every German quently within the division headquarters.
division ,acting as a branch post office of an army
9. Miscellaneous Units
of which the division is a part.
For a list of all identified units of the service
6. Motor Maintenance Troops troops arm, see "Order of Battle of the German
Army," March 1945 edition.
The supply and motor maintenance units of the
German Army, which originally combined all 10. Abbreviations
transport troops (Fah&uppen), were divided
All abbreviations are according to TM 20-205
into two separate arms in the fall of 1942. The
and/or FM 21-30. It should be noted that there
ransportation and supply units now are classi-
are no official abbreviations for:
hed as supply troops (see paragraph 2 above),
while the motor maintenance units are grouped Bazooka Pistol
under the motor maintenance troops. Their great Corps Pool
efficiency has been proved when servicing numer- Flame thrower Post Office
ous makes of motor vehicles taken from all occu- Gun • Vehicle
pied countries. Workshops are designated usually Light Workshop
%
as workshop companies (Werkstattkompanien), Medium
or as mobile repair shops (Kruftwugenwerk-
The abbreviation Sub-MG has been adopted
stiitte).
instead of SMG to avoid confusion with Schweres
Machines Gewelzr which means "Heavy Machine
7. Veterinary Troops Gun."
The great majority of German divisions use The following list of abbreviations is used in
horses as means of transportation and have a vet- connection with the organization charts.
erinary company which consists of a horse col- A Army
lecting platoon, a horse hospital, and a fodder AA Antiaircraft
platoon. Because of the importance which horses AA/AT Antiaircraft-Antitank
still play within the German Army, there is an Admses...Administration
elaborate system of veterinary units and horse Amb Ambulance
Armd C Armored Car
hospitals in the field as well as in the Zone of the
Arty Artillery
Interior.
Asgd -4ssigned
AT Antitank
8. Military police
Atchd Attached
The military police duties are divided between Bar P,ln Barrage Balloon
the military police (Feldgendarmerie), whose Bcl Bicycle
main task is the maintenance of traffic discipline, Bn Battalion
and guard troops (Wachtruppen), primarily con- Br Bridge
cerned with the guarding of vital military instal- 13try . I3attery
lations in the field. The latter also take charge of C Combat
C of S Chief of Staff
prisoners of war and escort them to the rear
Cbn Carbine
areas. Patrol duties and the maintenance of mili-
CG .........Commanding General
tary discipline are carried out both by army and
CH Chaplain
SS patrols and the ,military police. Clm Column
The guard battalion is an independent battalion Cml Chemical
assigned to army groups and armies. Co Company
I MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIED ™.E 30-451
Com Command Mtz Motorized
Comdt Commandant Mun Munitions
C Sch Combat School N C 0 . . . . . . . Noncommissioned Officer
Ct Combat team Offs Officers
Decon Decontamination Ord Ordnance
Det Detachment Pers Personnel
Div Division Plat Platoon
Ech Echelon Prcht Parachute
Engr Engineer Pvts Privates
Fin Finance Pz Panzer
Fid Field Pz. Gren Panzer Grenadier
Fiis Fiiselier Pz. Kpfzu Panzer K awzp fzvag en (Tank)
- Fwd Ech Forward Echelon R ...Rifle
GHQ General Headquarters Rad Radio
Gp Group Rcn Reconnaissance
Gren Grenadier Regt Regiment
GS General Staff Regtl Regimental
Gun/How . . . . Gun-Howitzer Rep1 Replacement
H Horse Repro Reproduction
H-Dr Horse-drawn Rkt Rocket
H-Trk Half-track r ack Rear echelon
How Howitzer SAR Semiautomatic Rifle
Hq Headquarters Sch School
Hv MG He.avy Machine Gun Set Section
Hv Wpn C o . . . Heavy Weapons Company Serv Service
Incl Including Sig Signal
Inf Infantry SL Searchlight
-1nt Intelligence sp Self-propelled
JA Judge Advocate Spcl Specialist
LMG Light Machine Gun Sp Stf Special Staff
Ln O Liaison Officer Sq Squad
Med Medical Sub-MG Sub-Machine Gun
Met Meteorological sup Supply
MG . Machine Gun Surg Surgeon
Mort Mortar Surv Survey
MP .....:...Military police Tat Tactical
MT Motor Transport Tlr Trailer
Mt Mountain Tn Train
Mtd Mounted Tng Training
Mtr Motor Tp Telephone
Mtrcls Motorcycles Tr Troop
Mtr-Dr Motor-drawn Vet.........,Veterinary
11—101
I MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451
CHAPTER III
Section I. SS AND POLICE Polish campaign in 1939. This led to the building
up of the Wafen-SS, at first consisting of the
I. Introduction equivalent of two or three divisions and finally
Any description of organisation, mission, and structure growing to a substantial and favored branch of
of the SS cannot be understood unless one tries to con- the armed forces of the nation. In 1943 the 55 1
ceive it inwardly with one's blood and heart. It cannot gained control of the powerful Ministry of the In-
be explained why twe contain. so much strength though terior, in which it had already constituted the most
we number so few.
important group in the form of the police. During
Heinrich Himmler.
1943 and 1944 the SS gained more and more in-
The SS, or Schutzstaflel, is the Protective fluence in, the Army itself, taking over succes-
Guard of the National-Socialist Party (NSDAP). sively control of political indoctrination, of the
Officially an independent Gliederung (Branch) of intelligence services, and of the whole replacement,
the Party, led by Heinrich Himmler, it actually training, and material procurement system.
has a status and importance far exceeding those Apart from these obvious acquisitions of power
of the other branches and even those of the and authority, the S S has steadily extended its in-
Party its From its original function of guard- fluence into many branches of German life which
ing the person of Party leaders and speakers, the would seem, on the surface, to have little or noth-
SS developed even before the war, into a far-flung ing to do with its original or derived mission.
organization to protect the entire Nazi movement High-ranking officers of the S S now occupy con-
against all internal enemies. More recently, it has trolling positions in most of the central depart-
extended its influence and power into every con- ments of the government, in regional and local
ceivable aspect of German national life and has administration, in heavy industry, finance, and
a acquired a large measure of control over commerce, and in cultural and charitable activ-
the Army It It is more than a state within a ities. Directly or indirectly the S S controls the
t ; it is o to both the Party and the gov- training of youth in the Hitler Youth organiza-
ernment. tion, the storm troops (SA), and most of the
The rise of the 55 1 has been gradual but un- other Party organizations and activities.
ceasing. Because of its origin and its own experi- The character and purposes of the SS would
ence as an underground organization, it has al- not be clear without reference to its mystical
ways understood how to combat systematically and worship of the German "race". This is exempli-
unrelentingly any subversive activities in the fied not only by the physical requirements for be-
Reich and in all occupied areas. It was by exten- coming an S S man, but also by a vast’ program
sion of its responsibility for internal political se- of procreation propaganda, resettlement of popu-
curity that the S S first acquired control of the lations, eradication of elements considered racially
Secret State Police and later (in 1936) of the en- undesirable, genealogical research, and welfare.
tire o f of Germany. Quite naturally Typical of the S S is its insistence that the abbre-
therefore, it was given the policing powers in most viation of its title always be printed or typed as
of the countries occupied by Germany during the the runic symbol of victory and arbitrariness:
war. It was also logical that the SS, as the elite
the
corps of the Party, should take part in the march
into Austria and Czechoslovakia along with the
troops of the Army, and that it should furnish
small contingents of trained men to fight in the The development of S
S power is intimately
Ill— l
I MARCH 1945
UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451
REICHSFUHRER- Vf HIMMLER
J
CONSTITUTION SECURITY POLICE CONSCRIPTION of SETTLEMENT
and LEGISLATION ARMED FORCES
FINANCE
PUBLIC HEALTH CRIMINAL INVESTIGATION ARMY PROCUREMENT and
POLICE SUPPLY
CONFISCATION of PROPERTY
COMMUNAL and FINANCING of
ADMdlSTRATlON SECRET STATE POLICE SELECTION SETTLEMENT in CONQUERED
(GESTAPO! of OFFICERS and NCOs AREAS
CENSUS and SURVEY FRONTIER POLICE COMMANDER OF ARMED
FORCES OF THE INTERIOR
SPORTS and ATHLETICS REINFORCED FONTIER
EMPLOYMENT
GUARD SERVICE
OF VOLKSSTURM
THE GERMAN POLICE
ORDER POLICE
PROTECTIVE POLICE,
ADMINISTRATIVE POLICE,
GiNDARMERY, COMMUNAL
PROTECTIVE POLICE, FIRE
PROTECTIVE POLICE, FIRE
FIGHTING SERVICE, TECHNICAI
EMERGENCY CORPS, AIR RAID
PROTECTION, WATERWAYS
POLICE, URBAN-RURAL
AUXILIARY GUARDS.
_L PERSONNEL of
DEPARTMENT SUPERVISION OF NPEA and SECURITY SERVICE
for REPATRIATION of HEIMSCHULEN ISD dor RF-++) VOLKSGRENAOIER UNITS
RACIAL GERMANS IVOMI IPOLITICAL SCHOOLSI
—BURO HEISSMEYER)
linked to the career of Heinrich Himmler. This offices represents not merely a pezsonal union of
seemingly unassuming and quiet-mannered man powers but the acquisition of successive fields for
has obtained one important post after another un- the extension and infiltration of SS influence. It
til today more power is concentrated in his person is significant in this connection that in all his vari-
than in any other man except Hitler. Indeed, his ous capacities Plimmler always uses his original
power is much more absolute than that of Hitler, title of Reichsfiihrer-SS (abbreviated RF-SS).
since the latter's actions and decisions are neces- The S S is at once the basis and the instrument of
sarily influenced by various pressure groups with-
Himmler's strength.
in the Party, by consideration of public opinion,
and by other outside forces. For this reason a description of the functions
Wherever Himmler has secured a position, he of the RF-SS is the most effective way of indi-
has taken the SS with him. His plurality of cating the present position of the SS in Germany.
III—2
I MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-4551
2. External Functions of the RF-SS force operating in towns and cities with more than about 5,000
inhabitants.
Communal Protective Police (Schutz0X& der Gem&&n), a
As shown in the accompanying chart (Figure regular police force for towns too smfI to have the urban Pro-
tective Police mentioned above.
l), the RF-SS holds eight separate offices besides Gendarmery (Ge&wmerie), a regular police force for rural
communities.
those resulting directly from his position as com- Administrative Police (Yerwaltzmgspolizei), for such routine
functions as registration of residents, Inspection of buildings, and
mander of the SS proper. They are: the keeping of police records.
Fire Protection Police (Feuevschl~t~~olizei), a federalized
a. REICH AND PRUSSIAN MINISTER OF THE INTERIOR communal fire-fighting organization with police status.
Fire-Fighting Services (Feuerwehr~n), a federalized organ&-
(Reichs- ztnd Preussischer 114inister des Innern). In this tion of voluntary fire fighters, replacing former private societies
capacity, which he acquired in August 1943, Himmler and associations.
Air Raid Protection Police (Luftschut~polizei), responsible for
controls a department for constitutional and legislative aid and clearance measures durin air raids.
Urban and Rural Auxiliary Euardsairraids. (St&- und Landwacht),
matters, the administration of the German civil service auxiliary police organizations of part-time volunteers in urb&
(Beanzentum), veterinary matters, and public health, the and rural areas.
T.qchnical Emergency Corps (Technische Nothilfe—TN), which
federalized communal administration, census and survey, provides technically trained personnel for emergency work of al!
and the administration of sports and athletics. This kinds, especially in case of a breakdown of public services.
ministry also controls the federalized German police, of c CHIEF OF ARMY EQUIPMENT AND COMMANDER OF
which Himmler wasrthe chief long before he became the THE REPLACEMENT ARMY (Chef der Heerestistung %nd
Minister of the Interior. Befehlshaber des Ersatzheeres—Ch H R&t u.BdE).
b. CHIEF OF THE GERMAN POLICE (Chef der DeutschPrt In this function, which he acquired in July 1944, the
Polizei—ChdDtP). In this office, which he has held RF-SS controls the conscription of the Armed Forces,
since June 1936, the RF-SS has succeeded in creating the Army training and replacement system, and Army
a closely knit national police force fully in accord with procurement and supply. He is responsible for the selec-
the purposes of the S S . The principal measures by tion and training of future officers and noncommissioned
which this was accomplished were the federalizing of officers snd, in his capacity as commander of all forces
the former state and local police organizations, the in- in the Zone of the Interior, he controls the Volkssturm
stitution of a personnel policy controlled by the SS, and orders its employment.
the extension of the scope and authority of the police as d. REICH COMMISSIONER FOR THE STRENGTHENING OF
a whole to new fields, and the interweaving of the ad- GERMANISM (Reichskommissar fiir die Festigung des
ministration and functions of the Party Security Serv- Deutschen Volkstum—RKV). Since October 1939, when
ice (Sicherhcitsdienst des Reichsfiihrers-SS—SD des he received this appointment, the RF-SS has been the
RF-SS) with those of the Security Police (Sicherheits- highest authority on all’ matters concerning the settling
po&et—Sipo). The two last-named organizations were of Germans in annexed areas. A vast organization wa,~
combined under the Central Security Department created to deal with the redistribution of property which
(Reichssicherheitshauptamt—RSHA ). fell to the Germans as spoils of war.
The German police organization, as such, is divided e. PRESIDEKT OF THE SOCIETY "FOUNTAIN OF LIFE"
into two categories, the Security Police and the Order (Verein "Lehensborn e.V."). Through this organiza-
Police (Ordaungspolizei—Orpo). tion, which he founded in September 1936, the RF-SS
(1) The Security Police has two branches: The takes active control of the numefous measures which the
Criminal Investigation Police (Kriminalpolizei—Kripo) SS has devised in order to insure the "victory of births
and the Secret State Police (Geheimp Stoutspolizei— of good blood".
Gestapo). Under the control of the RF-SS the func- f. PRESIDENT OF THE SOCIETY " T H E ANCESTRAL HERI-
tions of the Criminal Investigation Police have under- TAGE" (Yerein ‘Dns Ahnenerbe"). This group deals
gone many changes, and it now constitutes a valuable with racial and genealogical matters and fosters interest
ally of the Secret State Police. The latter, as the politi- in family tradition and racial purity.
cal branch of the police, has always led the fight against g. PARTY COMMISSIONER FOR ALL RACIAL MATTERS
subversive elements in Germany and served as the ex- (Beauftragter der NSDAP fiir alle Volkstumsfragen).
ecutive arm in the process of ridding Germany of In this function, which is his only official one within the
"undesirable" elements. An adjunct of the Gestapo is Party proper, the RF-SS acts as the chief adviser to the
the Frontier Police (Grenzpolizei), which was greatly Fiihrer on racial matters, and as the coordinator between
strengthened in 1944 by attaching to it the Reinforced the Party and his own function as Reich Commissioner
Frontier Guard Service (Verstiirkte Grenzaufsichts- for the Strtingthening of Germanism.
dienst). The latter is properly a branch of the Reich h. PLENIPOTENTIARY GENERAL FOR ADMINISTRATION
Ministry of Finance and now serves the combined pur- (Generalbevollmiichtigter fiir die Verwaltung). This
poses of this ministry and of the political police. To- appointment went with that of Minister of the Interior,
gether, these organizations have the new and important the previous incumbent (Frick) having received it at
mission of preventing the desertion of military per- the beginning of the war, to coordinate all wartime na-
sonnel, 6s well as the escape of foreign civilian workers tional administration problems.
across the borders of the Reich.
(2) The Order Police includes the regular uniformed 3. Internal Special Functions of the RF-SS
police and has acquired control of a number of auxiliary In his capacity as commander of the S S proper,
organizations which are not always concerned with
Himmler has four special functions not directly
strictly police functions.
Components of the Order Police are: connected with the organization and administra-
S S
tion
Protective Police (ScltutapoliacC—Schupo~, a regular police of the . . They are:
III—3
I MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451
a. The Department for the Repatriation of Radial discipline ensures the complete subservience to
Germans ( Vo,ksdezatsche-1 Mittelstelle—Vomi) dis a bureau the SS, even of those members who joined origi-
which is characterized as a Main the (Haup-
nally merely as an expedient to be entitled to wear
tamt) because it comes directly under the nally Since
October 1939 this department has carried out the far- the black uniform and to climb the ladder of
flung resettlement plans for "racial" p o l i t i c a l , the political, economic, or even artistic success.
western borderlands of Russia. Hundreds of thousands A few statistics may serve to show to what
' of such perSons have been transferred to the annexed
extent this most powerful body has permeated
areas of Poland.
the Third Reich:
b. The Bureau Main Department , t h e
fiihrer Heissmiyer (Dienststelle Hauptamt SS-Obergrup- Hitler's personal entourage includes at least
penfiihrer Heissmeyer) has as its chief mission the s i x six .S'.S' men.
trol of the National Political Educational Institutes The Party Reich Directors (Reichsleiter) in-
(Nationalpolitische Erziehungsanstalten — - and clude ten SS men out of a total of 16. Most of
Boarding Schools (Heimschzhlen). The former clude
the six non-.S'.S' members have suffered a loss
schools for selected pupils from all over Germany t h e
are supposed to attain a high scholastic record while o f o£ power and prestige in the past two years. Ten
jected to most severe indoctrination in Party o f of the 26 posts in the Reich Cabinet are held by
Heimschztlen are designed for the children of soldiers or SS men. Thirty-nine .S'.S' men with the rank of
of civil service officials who cannot maintain a permanent colonel or above hold other important posts in
residence. These schools, in which political indoctrina- the Reich Ministries.
tion is especially accentuated, have grown rapidly in
number to accommodate large numbers of children ren- Most of the Reichsstatthalter, provincial presi-
dered homeless by air raids. dents, state ministers, and secretaries and vice-
c. The Security Service (Sicherheitsdienst des RF-SS presidents of state governments are men whose
—SD or SD des RF-SS) is nominally a branch of the high SS rank is not always the most publicized
General SS but is controlled, under Himmler, hi gh feature of their careers. In municipal affairs
Central Security Office (Reichssicherheitshauptamt)
along with the Security Police. It is officially the in-
.numerous mayors are identified with the 5"6".
• telligence service of the Party against internal enemies, The permeation of all branches and levels of
while the Security Police (including the Gestapo) is the government in Germany by officers of the S-S" is
executive agent for combatting them. From gov ernment matched on a nearly equal scale in industry, fi-
mission the SD has constantly grown in matc hed in
1944 absorbed the bulk of the Abwehr, the n a n c e ,
nance, commerce, cultural activities, and chari-
organization of the Ar’med. Forces. Many of its mem- table organizations.
bers were until recently engaged in occupied areas, but
5. Organization of the SS •
their number inside Germany has greatly increased with
the shrinking of the areas still occupied. At the same a. FUNCTIONAL ORGANIZATION. The .S'.S'
time their importance in Germany has developed steadily proper is divided functionally into three main
and their preparations for the eventuality p roper
can be expected to be the most efficient and far reaching. groups:
d. With the formation of Volks Grenadier units in the (1) The General SS (Allgemeine SS), com-
latter part of 1944 the RF-SS became responsible for the posed of the ordinary part-time members of Gen-,
personnel of these units, acting through a new special eral .9.S1 regiments (SS-Standarten), the full-time
branch of the Army Personnel Office (PA/P e r a1 is
members (normally with the rank of major or
believed that such personnel are more or less interchange-
able with the members of the Waffen-SS. above) of General .S'.S' units and headquarters,
and non-active members attached to units and
4. SS Control of Public Life headquarters of the General 5*5. The General
As impressive as the list of the functions of S^ is not maintained by the state; its expendi-
the RF-SS must appear, it is by no means more tures are borne by the Party and ultimately con-
than an indication of the power of the SS, which trolled by the Party Treasurer, who himself holds
has enlarged its position and range of influence the rank of a full general of the SS.
steadily by an unobtrusive but thorough policy In certain occupied countries (e.g. Norway,
of infiltration. Dominating almost every branch Holland) organizations have been set up which
of official and semi-official German life, are SS are modeled on the General .S'.S'. These are known
has become a super-government composed of a as Germanic SS (Germanische SS) and have
racially conscious "order" of men (and women) their own central organization, ultimately subor-
bound by a rigid set of rules, the foremost di dinate to the RF-SS in Germany.
these being unswerving loyalty to one's immediate (2) The Armed SS (Waffen-SS). This cate-
chief and unquestioning obedience. This strict gory comprises the full-time military organization
111-4
REICHSFUHRER—55
HIMMLER
1 1 1 1
H M V, V, W
CENTRAL DEPARTMENT MAIN OPERATIONAL DEPARTMENT MAIN ECONOMIC ADMINISTRATION MAIN RACE * SETTLEMENT MAIN DEPARTMENT FOR PERSONNEL MAIN LECAL DEPARTMENT
I f f HA) IH-FHAI DEPARTMENT CETSCTTLEMENT (H-PE>SONAL-HAI IKAtV-GERICHT)
IW-WVHAI (M-Ru5HA)
1 1 1 I
PERSONALIEN)
- GERMANIC GROUP
IAg Dl I— MEDICAL GROUP
(Ag Dl
CONCENTRATION CAMPS GROUP
(Ag D) - SETTLEMENT OFFICE
(SIEDLUNGSAMTI
-
LIAISON OF!
(VERBINDUMGS AMI)
IAMT IV!
GO
CO
EXECUTIVE STAFF
ISTABSFOHRUNG)
VOLKSSTRUM
— ECONOMIC ENTERPRISES GROUP
IAg W) m
o
1
GENERAL** WAFFEN hh DEATH'S-HEAD
FORMATIONS
of the S S together with their training and re- Department contains the ‘following four groups:
placement t&its, schools, and installations. It is Group A controls operations, personnel, and supply.
a specially regulated public instrument of the It includes the Headquarters OfiCes (KommcmdoGmfer)
Reich on the model of the Army and is now con- of the General SS and of. the Waflesl-SS.
sidered a component part of the Armed Forces. Group B is responsible for the selection and training
of officers and noncommissioned officers.
Its expenses are borne by the State.
Group C consists of the inspectorates of the various
(3) The Death's-Head Formations (SS-Toten- branches of service.
kopfverbiinde). These consist mainly of the Group D is in charge of medical matters for the
guard units of concentration camps. Their de- entire 55.
velopment from the General SS is closely identi- (5) The SS Main Economic Administrative
fied with the work of the Gestapo. Their ex- Department (SS- Wirtschaftsverwaltungshaup t-
penses are a responsibility of the State. amt—SS-WVHA) is responsible for fiscal mat-
b. HIGH COMMAND ORGANIZATION. The SS ters, administration of S S property and concen-
High Command is known as the Reichsfiihrung- tration camps, and control of supply installations.
SS and consists of the RF-SS, his staffs, and the It is divided into five groups as follows:
chiefs of the Main Departments (Haupttimter) Group A includes finance, law, and certain general
described below. These Main Departments ad- administration matters.
minister the internal affairs of the three func- Group B is responsible for supply installations and
tional subdivisions of the S S . procurement and delivery of certain types of supplies for
SS units and headquarters.
(1) The Headquarters Staff of the RF-SS
Group C administers the works and buildings of the
(Kommandostab RF-SS) is located at the Field SS, including the construction of buildings.
Command Post of the RF-SS (Feldkommando- Group D administers all concentration camps.
stelle RF-SS) which is usually near Hitler's Group W manages the economic enterprises of the
headquarters in the field (Fiihrerhauptquartier). T5.(
(2) The Main Department Personal Staff
;6) The S S Main Race and Settlement De-
(Hauptamt Persiinlicher Stab—HA Pers. Stab)
partment (SS-Rasse- und -Siedlungshauptamt—
is a permanent installation at Himmler's rear
FS-RuSHA) contains the following four offices
headquarters to assist him in the execution of 4mter):
his manifold tasks.
Administration Office (Verzualtungsamf).
(3) The SS Central Department (SS-Haup- Marriage Office (Zfeiratsamt) which rigidly controls
tamt—SS-HA) is responsible for miscellaneous the selection of suitable wives by SS men.
over-all administrative and personnel matters. Racial Office (Rassenamf), which selects future SS
It is divided into the following five groups (Amts- men and handles the tasks of racial selection connected
gruppen—Ag) : with the function of the RF-SS as Reich Commissioner
for the Strengthening of Germanism.
Group A handles general administration matter.
Group B takes care of recruiting and registration of Settlement Office (Siedlungsamt), which deals with
the settlement of discharged SS men, especially in the
all categories of S S personnel.
annexed eastern areas.
Group C is responsible for propaganda, education, and
phvsical training. The above offices of the Main Race and Settle-
Group D controls the Germanic SS (Gemzaniscke SS)
ment Department are further divided into Main
including recruitment in cooperation with Group B.
The Executive Staff of the German Volkssturm Branches (Hauptabteilungen). One of these is
(Stabsfiihrwng des Deutschen Volksstwms) has been the Main Welfare Branch, which handles the
identified in the SS Central Department and presumably problems of welfare and pensions in close coop-
handles the responsibilities of the RE-SS connected with eration with the 5"5" Main Welfare and Pension
this national militia. Department (SS-Hauptfiirsorge- und- Versorg-
(4) The SS Main Operational Department ungsamt) in the Reich Ministry of the Interior.
(SS-Fiihrungshauptamt—SS-FHA) concerns it- (7) The S S Main Department for Personnel
self largely with the Wafen-SS. It grew out of (SS-Persofitalhauptamt-—SS-Pers.HA) is the cen-
the former Operational Office in the S S Central tral recording office for all SS officers and poten-
Department in 1940. Its long-time chief, Hans tial officers, including those of the Security Serv-
Jiittner, is now the deputy of the RF-SS in his ice (SD). It is not itself responsible for promo-
capacity as Chief of Army Equipment and Com- tions and appointments. It is divided into two
mander of the Replacement Army. This Main offices (Amter) :
IH—6
Altona
XZ OSTSEE «STETTIN WEICHSEL
Oldenburg Stettin
Bromberg
BOHMEN - M AHREN
Stuttmrt
The Office of Ofiicer Personnel Records (Amt fiir ' representatives of the Reich government admin-
Fiiiwerpersonalien). istering any part of such an area.
The Office for Potential Officers (Amt fiir Fiihrel’- He is the commander of the 5"5" district if the
nachwuchs).
area under his jurisdiction is constituted as such.
(8) The SS Main Legal Department (Haupt- The HSSPf commands the S S and police units
amt SS-Gericht—HA SS-Gericht) is concerned and installations in his area except those which
with the special jurisprudence which operates have been subordinated to the OKH for opera.
within the SS and police organization, It is di- tions and those which are commanded by a terri.
vided into four offices (A’mter) : • torial commander of the WaflcwSS.
Office I is the Legal Affairs Office. Operational commands have been assigned to
Office II is the Ofice for Organization, Personnel, and an HSSPf under different circumstances and in
Disciplinary hfatters.
Office III is the Office for Pardons, Reprieves, and varying degrees. Such commands have consisted
the Execution of Sentences. of special staffs for combating partisans (SS und
Office IV is a Liaison Office (Verbindungsamt). Polizci-l;ii~lrungsstab fiir Ba?2denbekiimpfung)
c. REGIONAL OKGANIZATION. (1) General. and battle groups which were formed hastily from
The basis of the regional organization of the SS the forces normally commanded by the HSSPf
is the district (0berabschnitt—Oa.). There are. when his area was invaded or threatened. A
seventeen of these districts in Germany proper number of personalities have in this way gradu-
and each coincides exactly with a Wehrkreis ated from assignment as HSSPf to that of the
(Army corps area). The S S districts are known commander of an S S corps.
by geographical names, but it has become a con- Various special offices are sometimes combined
venient and growing custom to add to the name with that of the HSSPf in certain areas. For
the Roman numeral of the corresponding Wehr- example, the ZZSSPf in Prague holds the position
kreis. With two exceptions, the headquarters of -of ,,Minister of State for Bohemia and Moravia
the district is in the same city as that of the (Staatsminister fiir B ohm en zutd Miilzrelz) and
Wehrkreis. In addition six districts have been acts as the deputy to the Reich Protector of this
organized in occupied countries and are known area. The HSSPf in the Government General
by names according to their geographical location. holds the position of State Secretary for Security
One of these, named "Ukraine" was dissolved Matters (Staatssckrettir des Siclaerlzeitswesens).
early in 1944. With the increasing danger to Germany proper
The control of a district is entrusted to a new responsibilities have been thrust upon the
Higher SS and Police Commander (Hb’herer SS HSSPf, especially in the border areas. In some
und Polizeiftihrer—HSSPf), ,who normally com- cases he has assumed active command of all
mands both the S S and police units and installa- units of the auxiliary organizations of the Reich
tions in the district. and of the Party, except those of the Todt Organi-
Occupied areas which have not been organized zation (0T), so far as they have been organized
into SS districts are also commanded by an for defensive combat tasks. In case of an in-
HSSPf, whose functions are analogous to those vasion of his area he has been ordered to attach
of the HSSPf of a district. himself and all the units under him, including
In certain areas a regional organization of the those of the S S and police, to the commander of
Wafen-SS exists side by side with the general the Wehrkreis and to act as his deputy for the
regional organization of the SS and police. These latter if necessary.
.areas are controlled, for special purposes of the The full title of an HSSPf may indicate the
Wafien-SS only, by territorial Commanders of Wehrkrcis (e.g. HSSPf Welzrkreis X), the geo-
the Waffen-SS (Befehlshaber der Waflen-SS— graphical name of the Obcrabschnitt (HSSFf
Bfh.d.W-SS). Nordsee), or its headquarters city (HSSPf Ham-
(2) Authority of the HSSPf. (a) General burg). In occupied or annexed areas the title
functions. The HSSPf is the representative of varies. The following examples are given as illus-
the RF-SS at any given military territorial head- trations : HSSPf beim Reichskommnissar fi&- die
quarters, or, where they exist, at the headquarters besetsten niederlandischen Gebiets is also encoun-
of the Reich commissioners (Reichskommissare) tered as HSSPf Nordzuest or a3 HSSPf den
for occupied areas. As such he is the official ad- Haa& The HSSPf in Greece was normally
viser in all SS and police matters to the regional designated HSSPf Griechenland.
III—8
I MARCH 1945
UNCLASSIFIED T&E 30151
Each HSSPf is assisted by a Chief of Staff S t af f Protective Police who live in bar-
(Stabsfiihrer) in the execution of all his duties. racks), who has the title of Commander of the
The latter is also the Chief of Staff of the SS Protective Police (Konmandcur der Schutz-
district in those areas where the HSSPf is also polizci).
the commander of such a district. These inspectors have complete administrative
(b) Organization of SS districts. In Greater departments covering all aspects of police activi-
Germany (excluding Bohemia-Moravia and the lies which are assigned to their respective
Government General), the HSSPf has two sepa- branches.
rate staffs for his two main functions. One staff Certain areas adjacent to Germany, particu-
assists him in the command and administration larly Alsace, Lorraine, and Luxemburg, have been
of the SS, another in that of the police. incorporated into WeArkrcise while their civil ad-
The staff of the SS within the 55" district con- ministration has remained separate. For these
sists of the following officers under the Chief of areas a dual nomenclature exists for the leading
Staff: members of the police staff of the HSSPf. They
Administrative Officer. are referred to as Inspectors in the old part of
Chief Medical Officer. the district and as Senior Commanders (Befehls-
Director of Training. haber) of their respective branches for the an-
Chief Personnel Officer. fice r . The latter nomenclature coincides
Chief Signal Officer. with that of the corresponding officers in areas
The Administrative Officer heads the Adminis- outside the Reich proper as described below.
trative Office (Verwaltungsanlt), which operates The organization of SS districts outside Greater
under the control of the SS Main Economic Ad- Germany (namely Ost, Nordwest, Nord, Ost-
ministrative Department and handles all matters Zatzd, and formerly Ukmine) is identical to that
of finance and supply within the district. inside Germany with the following exceptions:
Each district is divided into two or more sub- There is an economic section directly subordi-
districts (Abschnittc), each having its own head- nate to the HSSPf. This is headed by an officer
quarters. These sub-districts are distinguished known as SS-Wirtschaftcv and replaces the ad-
by Roman numerals. Their commanders are ministrative office in the SS district.
known as Fiihrcr dcs SS-Abschnitts. The head- he a d - of 5*.? districts do not exist.
quarters of the S S sub-districts are organized Instead, one or more S S and Police Commanders
on the same general lines as those of the dis- (SS und Polizeifiihrcr—SSPf) may exist. These
trict; both are closely parallel to the standard are representatives of the HSSPf in all his func-
German staff organization for any military unit tions for the sub-area which is assigned to them.
or headquarters, including the numbers and let-
A Waflccn-SS Recruiting Inspectorate (Ersatz-
ters used for the sections and sub-sections.
inspektion dcr Waffen-SS) replaces the Wafelt-
Each of the districts inside Germany has a SS Recruiting Center.
Waffen-SS recruiting center (Ergiimungsstelle)
The leading officers on the staff of the HSSPf
administered directly by the SS Central Depart-
for the command and administration of the police
ment. It also has a section for racial and settle-
have the following titles and functions:
ment matters (Rasse- und Siedlungswesen), which
is under the supervision ,of the SS Main Race Senior Commander of the Security Police and
and Settlement Department. of the Security Service (Licfehlshaber der Sicher-
The staff of the HSSPf for the command and heitspolizei und des Sicherheitsdiemtes—BdSuSD
administration of the police includes the follow- or BdS). He may control subordinate area com-
ing two leading police officers under the Chief of manders (Kovlrnandez~rc—KdSuSD or KdS).
Staff: Senior Commander of the Order Police
Inspector of the Security Police and of the (Befehlshaber dcr Oudprungspolizei—BdO). He
Security Service (Inspekteur der Sicherheits- may control subordinate Commanders (KdO).
polizei und des Sicherheitsdienstes—IdSuSD, These Senior Commanders have complete ad-
sometimes also given as Ids). ministrative departments covering all aspects of
Inspector of the Order Police (Inspekteur der police activities which are assigned to their re-
Ordnungspolizei—IdO). This officer controls spective branches.
the commander of the Barrack Police (those ele- The above deviations in the organization of
Ill—9
I MARCH 1945
UNCLASSIFIED
TM-E 30-451
the police, but not those relating to the SS, also Siidwest Stuttgart V
apply to the district Biihwzen-M iihren. West Diisseldorf VI
(c) Orga&ation of ayeas whick are not SS Siid Munchen VI
districts. In occupied areas which are not con- Siidost Breslau VIII
stituted as SS districts, the HSSPf retains his Fulda-Werra Arolsen IX
dual function as commander of all SS and police Xordsec Hamburg X
forces. There is considerably less emphasis on Mitte Braunschweig XI
SS matters and normally no special staff for Rhein-West- Wiesbaden XTI
the latter exists. The police functions take on mark
added significance because the IISSPf not only -Main Niirnberg XIII
concerns himself with the German police forces Donau Wein XVII
but also controls, in varying degrees, the native Alpenlantl Salzburg XVTII
police in the area. The nomenclature of the Weichsel Danzig XX
police officers coincides with that in S51 districts the Posen XXI
outside Greater Germany. Xordwest Den Haag (Netherlands)
In Italy several HSSPf's have been installed. Nord Oslo ( Norway)
They are subordinated to one Supreme SS and Osl Krakau (leneralgouver-
Police Commander (Hiickstcr SS wtd Polizei- nement
fiihrer—Htichst. SSPf). It is believed that the 1 >6hmen- Prague Boh men und
general organization of the areas controlled by Miihren Mahren
these officers differs little from that of the HSSPf Ostland Riga (Ostland)
and subordinate SSPf's in other occupied areas.
(3) Territorial comnaa~ldrrs bf tkc Waffcn-SS. (5) List of SS sub-districts. Each district
Tn certain selected arcas the SS High Command comprises an average of two or three sub-dis-
has installed territorial commanders of the tricts (Abschnitte) distinguished by Roman nu-
IVafl’cfi-SS (Befeklshabcr dcr Wa.ffcn-SS—Bfk. merals. The sub-districts are also colloquially
d.W-SS). These represent the regional echelon referred to by the names of the regions which they
of the SS High Command for the Wa#cn-SS comprise or by the location of their headquarters.
only. They execute its directives and are in Oa.
Number Headquarters
complete command of all units of the Waffen-SS
in their areas. The commander of the Wa#ell- I Siid Munchen
SS shares with the HSSPf control of the static 11 Elbe Dresden
installations of the Waflen-SS, but is otherwise ic Spree Berlin
completetly independent ‘of him. Such com- TV Mitte Hannover
manders have been identified in the Netherlands, V West Duisburg
in Bohemia and Moravia, in the area of the S^S1 VI Siidost Breslau
district "Ostland", and in Hungary. VTT Nordost Konigsberg
VTII Donau Einz
The commander of the Waf’cn-SS may take
IX Main Wiirzburg
on operational assignments under the command
X Siidwest Stuttgart
of the OKH.
XI Rhein-West - Koblenz
The staff organization of these commanders
mark
is comparable to that of a corps. The various
XII Spree Frankfurt/Odei
members of his staff represent the different offkcs
of the High Command and the Inspectoratcs of XIII Ostsee Stettin
XIV Nordsee Oldenburg
the branches of service.
XV Xordsee Hamburg-
(4) I.ist, of SS districts. The following is a
Altona
list of the SS districts together with their head-
XVI Mitte Dessau
quarters and the corresponding Wekrkreise.
XVII West Minister
Oa. Headquarters Wehrkreis XVIII Elbe Halle/Saale
Nordost Konigsberg I XTX Siidwest Karlsruhe
Ostsee Stettin II XX Xordsee Kiel
Spree . Rerlin ITT XXI Siidost Hirschberg
Elbe Dresden TV XXII Nordost Allenstein
Ill— IO
1 MARCH 1945 mm
UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451
the nucleus of the Wuj%z-SS in its rapid expan- as part of their names, e.g. 15. Waffcrz-Grenadier-
sion which followed. Division-SS (Lett. Nr. I). Officers of "non-
The Wafien-SS is based on the tradition of the Germanic" origin cannot become full-fledged
General S S . It retained the strict racial selection members of the SS officer corps. They are desig-
and the emphasis on political indoctrination of the nated as Wafen-Fiihrer der SS, and the individ-
S S . The reasons for its formation were as much ual rank is always given in the same manner, e.g.
political as they were a welcome opportunity to Waferz-U~ztersturrrrfiihrer.
acquire for the SS the officer material which was There is no doubt that this rapid expansion has
to prove. so valuable later on. somewhat modified the character of the Wafien-
With the intensification of the war the Waffen- SS as a political elite formation. h’evertheless,
SS became the proponent of the recruiting of the crack divisions of this organization may still
"Nordic" peoples for military service in the in- be expected to fight to the very end, especially
terest of Germany. In 1940 the Standarten since the individual soldier and especially the in-
"Nordland" and "Westland" were created in dividual officer have been made to feel personally
order to incorporate such "Germanic" volunteers involved in tile endless series of war crimes, and
into the Waffcti-SS. They were combined with strong propaganda has convinced most that their
the existing Standarte "Germania" to form the treatment, either in captivity or after defeat, will
"Wikiq" Division. compare very unfavorably with that accorded
In the subsequent years the Wafen-SS pro- other members of the armed forces.
ceeded to form native "Legions" in most occupied The Waffen-SS at present consists of at least
areas. These, in turn, were later converted into 31 divisions and three brigades, as well as a num-
Wa,fen-SS brigades and divisions. ber of independent smaller units. Of the divi-
A slackening in the principles of racial selection sions seven are Pallzcr divisions. They form the
occurred only after the war took on much less strongest and politically most reliable portion of
favorable aspects. During 1943 and 1944 the ;ihe< WaffcwSS. The balance consists of five
SS turned more and more toward frantic recruit- Panzer Grenadier divisions, five mountain divi-
ing of all available manpower in occupied areas. sions (of which at least one is believed to have
While its major effort was directed toward the been disbanded), seven infantry divisions, and
incorporation of the "racial" Germans (Volks- two cavalry divisions. Three other divisions have
dlmtschc), a method was devised which permitted been identified, but their type is not certain.
the recruiting of foreigners of all nationalities on About a third of the divisions are classified as
a grand scale, while retaining at least some sem- %on-Germanic". Of the brigades at least one is
bl:znce of the original principles of "Nordic" SU- of the Panzer Greuadicr type and its strength is
periority. Spreading foreigners thinly through- little less than that of a division.
out trustworthy established units soon proved Of the 13 identified S S Corps five are Panzer
insufficient to digest the mass of recruits. Con- corps, two mountain corps, four infantry corps
sequently divisions of foreigners were formed and two of uncertain type. At least one SS
which received a sprinkling of regular Wafen-SS Panzer Army exists. It played a prominent part
cadres. Finally the necessity arose to complement in the Ardennes counteroffensive in December
the officer corps of the WaffewSS with foreigners. 1944.
Still very much concerned with the racial as- Among the divisions of the IC’affcr&S one is
pects of its units, the Waflc11-SS developed a sys- designated as the SS-Poliunci Division. This is
tem of nomenclature which dubs the unit as for- the only unit made up of members of the police
eign by an addition to its name. which has been fully incorporated into the Waftfz-
Units containing a high percentage of "racial" SS. It is not to be confused with the SS-PoZizei-
Germans and "Germanic" volunteers (i.e. Scandi- Regimcntcr, which have remained part of the
navians, Dutch, Flemings, Walloons, and French- police and are described in a separate section
men), carry the designation "Frcitilligen-" as below.
part of their names, e.g. Il. SS-Freke~~l~gen- b. RECRUITING, TRAINIKG, AND REPLACE~MENT
PanzergreFaadier-l%vivision "Nordland". Units IN THE rf’affrn-SS. (1) RrrruitiJlg. (a) Gels-
containing a preponderance of "non-Germanic" eral. In principle, no new members were ac-
personnel, especially members of the Slavic and cepted for the SS after 1933 except from selected
Baltic peoples, carry the designation "Wafen-" graduates ,of the Hitler Youth. The creation of
III—12
2
TO
O
REICHSFUHRER-f4
I
MAIN ECONOMIC
CENTRAL DEPAXTMENT MAIN OPERATIONAL DEPARTMENT MAIN DEPARTMENT FOR PERSONNEL ADMINISTRATION
4* DEPARTMENT
(HAUPTAMT-^ -HA) (FUHRUNGSHAUPTAMT-ff-FHAl h (PERSONAL HA) 4 f (MVHA)
RHEIN-WISTMARK XH PERSONNEL O
MAIN POLITICAL PHYSICAL VOCATIONAL
XIII
DONAU XVH
EDUCATION TRAINING SCHOOLS OF 3
•RANCH OFFICES
[AMT I) IAMT III WAFFEN-SS GO
ALPENLAND XVIII
CO
WEICH5EL XX TRAINING AND
CENTRAL SCHOOL FIELD UNITS OF IEADQUARTERS AND
WARTHE XXI
TRAINING FOR REPLACEMENT UNITS
ENLISTMENT SCHOOLS OF WAFFEN WAFFEN 4 *
BOHMEN-MAHItEN B-M PHYSICIAL REGIONAL COMMANDS
CENTERS CAMPS OF WAFFEN * *
TRAINING
O
GERMANS FOREIGNERS
TRAINING REPLACEMENT
RECRUITING
the Waffen-SS and its rapid growth have caused bers of the Hitler Youth to "volunteer" for the
the partial suspension of this rule, although serv- Waffefz-SS. Still more recently. complete Army,
ice in the Waflen-SS does not necessarily entail Navy, and Air Force units were taken over by
membership in the General S S . the Wa.#cn-SS, given SS training, and incor-
(b) Pre-wur recruitment. Suitable SS cancli- porated into its field units.
dates were singled out while still in the Hitler (d) Recruitment machinery icithin Germany.
Youth. In particular boys who had proved them- The enlistment drives of the JJ7a#err-SS within
selves, often under SS leadership, in the HJ pa- Germany, at first occurring at irregular intervals,
trol service (HJ-Strcifcndifwst) n-ere welcomed are now practically continuous, indicating the
as future SS men. If the candidate satisfied SS great need for rcplaccments. Tlrc SS-Standartc
requirements with respect to political reliability, "Kurt &~gcr.s", through its various agencies is
racial purity, and physique, he was accepted at the the most successful propaganda machinery for the
age of 18 as a candidate (BCZLW~I’P). On the JVclflrr~-SS. Through its \var reporter battalion
occasion of the annual Party Congress (Reichs- iKricgsbcrichtrv Abtcill/rzg) it l)ublicizcs the im-
pnrfei) in September of the same year, he was portant role of the IVaflc,rl-SS in the German
accepted as an aspirant (11/wiirtcr), rvceivctl an press. Recruitment for the IVaf<xrl-SS is region-
SS certificate (SS-Aasccrcis), and \vas enrolled ally organized and controlled by the recruiting
in the ranks of the SS. office (Er~iinsu/lysall2t—Ami I), which is sub-
(c) PJ’autinze reckitrllcrlf. Recruitment and ordinate to the Recruiting and Registration Group.
enrollment of new members for the SS have be- The regional organization consists of recruiting
come of particular importance in vie\\- of the centers iErgiinzungsstellen), I\-hich arc named in
great expansion of the Wa#c/r-SS during- the war. accordance with the SS districts (SS-Obcrab-
The SS Central Department (SS-flauptamt) is sclmitte) in \\-hich they arc locntc(l. They also
responsible for recruiting and registration of carry thv Roman numeral of the JJ’clfukrcis and
Germans and of "Germanic" and "non-Germanic" are always located at the CJ7~~l~ukrc~is headquarters
foreigners for the Waflo~SS. It exercises such city, except in S S district "Afitte", where the rc-
functions for German and "Germanic" personnel cruiting center is at I%r;~unsch\\-eig instead of
through the Recruiting and Registration Group Hamlover, and SS district "Wcicl~~rl”, where it
(Awztsgruppc B), and for "non-Germanic" for- is at Gotenhafen instead of Danzig. Some of
eigners through Group D—Germanic SS (inlet.+ these recruiting centers also maintain branch
gmppc 0). offices outside Germany for the recruitment of
The S S Main Operational Department ISS- racial Germans ( J'ollzsdclrt.scl~c,). The recruiting
I;iihvltngslzazlptaI?zt—SS-I;Hrlj, which is respon- centers, in cooperation \vitli various State and
sible for the operational control of the Waffc/~- military authorities effect the release of the ex-
SS, lays down the general policy on recruiting amined and accepted applicants by the Reich
and notifies its special requirements from time Labor Service and by thts recruiting sub-area
lo time. The SS Central Department, however, headquarters (W ehrbczirkskommando). The re-
remains responsible for the whole recruiting syt;- cruits are then sent to a specific training and re-
tern of both the General S S and the WU#~N-S.S. placement unit or mancuvcr area 0: the Waffcll-
Recruiting for the General SS, now almost at SS.
a standstill as a result of the war, is carried out In January 1915, the recruiting centers for the,
through its own local units. JVaffcwSS were combinctl with those of the
Service in the JYn.flz:r~r-SS is, at least officially, ,\riiy for its volunteers for the officer and lloll-
voluntary. The Waflcrl-SS claims priority over commissioned officer careers and for Volks Gre-
all other branches of the Armed Forces in the nadier divisions. Under Himmler's orders
seIection of recruits. To meet the high rate of "combined recruiting centers of the k m ) - and
casualties and the expansion of CVafcn-SS field Waffen-SS" (Ergiinsungsstellen des Hceres und
divisions, service in the JJTo~~~II-SS uxs made dcv WaflewSS) were set up in each W’chrkreis,
compulsory for all members of the General SS with branch offices in all major cities.
and voluntary transfer of personnel after being (e) Recruitment machinery outside Germany.
inducted into any of the other branches of the The original tlecisioll to t,nli?;t "&-manic" and
Armed Forces was permitted. Since 1943 a great "non-Germanic" foreigners to serve with the
amount of pressure has heen exerted on men- JJlnfrrz-SS \vas ba.;etl on the 1”ol)a:‘anda rathe?
Ill—l4
I MARCH 1945
UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451
than on the fighting value of these volunteers. well as training within the SS, are the responsi-
No doubt for this reason the men were mostly fighti ng the SS Central Department. However,
organized in small independent national legions. the reason for the military training of
In Scandinavia and the occupied countries of s m a l l units dcvol\-es entirely on the S.
the West, the recruiting was undertaken largely Main Operational Department.
by the local Nazi and Quisling parties; in the d e r tak e n the S S aspirant in his first year
Baltic states by the German controlled govern- of service trained for the SA Defense Training
ments ; and in the Balkans by the German authori- Badge (SA-]V chrc.bzcichcn) and the Reich
ties in agreement with the governments concerned German Badge in l~ronze (hrorrxrlcs Rriclrssport-
With the growing need for reinforcements, a ncernctl He \vas then called up first for six
large element of compulsion entered into the re- months of service in the Reich Labor Service, and
cruiting campaigns. At the same time the small then for his i o n of duty in the German Army.
uneconomic legions were reorganized into regi- t two and a h e years. he returned to the
ments and battalions, either to be incorporated 5"5" to receive further intensive training and in-
into existing Waffcn-SS divisions or to form the p o r a t e d Finally, on the ninth of November
basis for new divisions and brigades. Early in flffo;-SS his return to civil life. hc was inducted
1943 the German government, in exchange for into the 6"5 as a full -S\S" man. The outbreak of
promises to deliver certain quantities of war ve r n the m e n t , of the Waf’ejz-SS inter-
equipment, obtained from the governments of d e l iver training schedule.
Rumania, Hungary, and Slovakia their consent
to an all-out recruiting drive for the Waffcn-SS (b) Propaganda aud political education. The
among the "racial" Germans domiciled in those Office fl~ c ~ - . S . \ Education (A?l?t Welfan-
countries. In effect, all able-bodied men who schaulichc Erziehung—Amt 1) in the Education
could be considered to be of German origin, in- and w h 8 Training Group (A~jfsgutippr C—
cluding some who could scarcely speak the Ian Ag - is responsible for propaganda and the
guage, were induced by various forms of social l a n - of German personnel. This is
and economic pressure to volunteer, and many c i a l out i : i two \V:i\.S. In the first place
men already serving in the Armies of these three this many supervises the issuance of a number of
countries were transferred to the Germans. Wd! r e e publications, such as the JVa.~m-SS
over 100,000 men were obtained in this, manner W t l ! handboo!; "Dicl rmff dir JT’ofcn-SS",
and were distributed among all the divisions of the series of -S\S" educational booklets (SS-Schu-
the Waffen-SS. o f , a news magazine for SS and Police
(SS-Informationsd'cnst), and an illustrated mag-
The whole of this foreign recruiting organiza- an i z a - : !nd articles for more general
tion is controlled by the Germanic recruiting of- o i - (SS-C~itlrc~ft). %ontlly, this of-
fice (Gcrmanischcs Erganzungsamt—Amt II) in i n holds political education courses for SS
the Germanic •.SW group (Amtsgruppe D—Ag officers and enlisted personnel in ^5" training
D). Orginally this recruiting organization con- camps (SS-Ausbild<mgslagcr) and in addition is
sisted of a number of recruiting commands commanc!s for the appointment of education offi-
(Ersatzkommandos) established in the principal cers (Schulungsofftzicrc) to the staffs of the SS
cities of the occupied countries. Subsequently bsequen t l y l ’ olitical and propaganda di-
these were reorganized as SS recruiting inspec- rectives for t icrll-SS also emanate from
torates (SS-Ersatzinspcktionen) responsible for this office.
recruiting over a wide area, e.g. SS recruiting
r e foreign recruits often require special in-
inspectorate Siidostraum at Vienna for the whole
w h o le they cab be handed over to
of the Balkans. Such inspectorates control a
the a as fit for its military training. To
number of recruiting commands covering smaller
meet a l l e r special training camps (Az4sbi/-
areas, which again are subdivided into branch
branch were established. Such camps and
offices (NcbcnstcUcn) ; finally, there are various
the i o u s political education of foreign volun-
enlistment centers (Wcrbestcllen) under each
e ach under the control and supervision of the
branch office.
office. for Gcrnmanic Training (Gcrmanisrlrr
(2) Training. (a) General. Propaganda on on—Amt III) in the Germanic S S group.
behalf of the SS, political education, physic?.! phys ic:.1 issues a number of propaganda pub-
training, pre-military and technical training, as a s for foreign volunteers. including a mag-
111—15
I MAR&H 1945
UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451
azine for each nationality in its own language and The S S inspectorates (SS-Z~~s~cktioncn),
also a ‘number of newspapers. which are combined into an inspectorate group
(c) Physical apld preliw&ary trai&g. The (Atsfsgruppc C-—Ag C), are responsible for the
Office for Physical Training (Anzt fiir Leibeser- technical and unit training within the various
ziehung—Anat 11) in the Education and Physical branches of service. There are ten such inspec-
Training Group is charged with the responsihil- torates, numbered in a brokei series from one to
ity for physical training of all branches of the 13. Each one is headed by an Inspector (Inspell-
SS. The SS instructors in athletics and physical teur), who is directly responsible to the Chief
culture are trained at the S S Central School for of the SS Main Operational Department. It may
Physical Training (SS-Reichsschule fiir Leibesii- control experimental and demonstration units and
bwzgelz), and special SS manuals on the subject staffs, and it usually lvorks in close liaison with
are issued. In addition the Office for Physical the corresponding inspcctoratc in the OKH.
Training has set up special physical training The Training Group (A~fsgrttp/ B—-Ag U)
camps for the Germanic SS outside the Reich. is responsible for individual officer and noncom-
The SS has for some time taken a very active missioned officer training. It exercises these
interest in the premilitary training programs cf functions through the Office for Officer Training
the Hitler Youth and other Party organizations. (Amt Fii~zrevazlsbildung—Amt XI), which con-
(cl) Technical training. As part of the gen- trols all officer candidate schools (SS-/unker-
eral program of training and preparation for the schulen.) and courses, and the Office for T\ion-
Waffen-SS, special SS Higher Vocational commissioned Officer Training (Ant Unter-
Schools (SS-Berujsoberschulen) have been set fiihrerausbildung), which controls all noncon-
up under the control and direction of the Edu- missioned officer schools and courses.
cation and Physical Training Group for giving (f) Schools alld coIfI=cc.~. During 1943 and
higher technical training to candidates for the e1944 the Waflfrn-SS established schools and
Wafien-SS. All German boys who are appren- courses for almost all branches of military af-
tices or students in business, trade, or agricuI- fairs needed by a complete and well balanced mili-
ture, and are attending a trade or technical school tary organization. ,4s a result, it is now thor-
may apply for entry into such a school as officer oughly equipped with schooling facilities of its
applicants of the Waflen-SS. The wartime own, although certain highly specialized types of
course is limited to 1% years and is free to the personnel are still train& in special S S courses
selected candidates. at regular Army schools.
The Vocational Schools of the Waj%z-SS The SS schools may bc tlivitled into four cate-
{Berufsschulen dcr Wafien-SS) give similar gories: special service schools. officer candidate
training, though of a lower standard. schools, noncommissioned officer schools, and
(e) Military training. The military training specialist training establishments.
of the Wafen-SS is controlled entirely by the SS Almost all the schools of the JT’nffcn-SS have
Main Operational Department, which exercises certain basic elements of organization in common,
this function through three main agencies: which are analogous to those of Army schools.
The Training Branch (Abt 1 d) in the Head- They are headed by a commander who is assisted
quarters Office of the Wafien-SS (Konznla~ by a headquarters staff (Konrrrrnlldosfub). Un-
doanzt der Waflen-SS—Amt II) supervises and der this they have instruction groups (Lehrgmp-
coordinates the whole sphere of training in .the Fen) of battalion status and inspectorates (Jn-
Wuffen-SS. This branch is divided into a num- sjvkfiolw!) of company status.
ber of sections, each of which is responsible for Special-service :;chools (JJ’clffr~zsCIzz~Ze~z) have
a certain type of training. Its mission includes the function of providing specialized and ad-
close cooperation with all other offices and inspec- vanced training for officers and enlisted person-
torates concerned with military training, liaison nel in their particular branch of service (@‘@en-
with the training agencies of the German Army, gattzfng). The JJ’trffrr~SS has special-service
and issuance and control of all instructional ma- schools for mountain infantry. cavalry, Panzer
terial. It also registers and controls the training Gwzadirrs, and Panzer troops, but not for ordi-
of future SS staff officers, providing courses fcr nary infantry: this is explnincd by the fact that
supply officers (1 3-Lehrgiinge) and for intelli- all Waffc?z-SS field divisions except some of
gence officers (1 c-Lehrgiinge). those which are composed principally of non-
Ill—l6
MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30.45I
German personnel are either Panzer, Panzer noncommissioned officer technicians (Linter-
Grenadier, cavalry, or mountain divisions. fiihrer der So9lderlaufbaluzen). Specialist train-
The courses at the special-service schools may ing establishments include the Motor Technical
he divided into three main categories: reserve School of the Waflen-SS (Kraftfahrtech9zische
officer candidate courses (Rese9veJunker-Lehr- Lehramtalt dcr Waffen-SS at Vienna, the Ord-
gtinge—RJL) ; preparatory courses (Vovberei- nance Technical School of the Waj%cn-SS (Waf-
tulzgs-Lehrgii9zge) for officer applicants (Fiihrer- fentech9zische Lchranstalt dcr Waffen-SS) at
Bezuerbcr—FR) and reserve officer applicants Dachau, riding and driving schools, motor trans-
(Reserve-Fiihrer-Bczcvrbcr—RFB) ; and courses port supply-troop schools, and a number of other
for technicians, which are found mainly at the types.
special-service schools of the signal troops and (3) Replacement. Unlike the Army, the
artillery and which use special technical equip- Waflcn-SS does not decentralize the control of
ment peculiar to their respective arms. its replacement system to its regional headquar-
Most of the Wnffejt-SS special-service schools ters in Germany. The entire replacement system
have demonstration regiments (Lehrregi9nenter) of the W’aflc9&S is administered centrally by the
attached to them for demonstrating and instruct- SS Main Operational Department. Replacement
ing and also for experimenting with new weapons requisitions from field units for ordinary per-
and tactics. sonnel are sent through this dcpartmcnt direct to
Officer candidate schools are discussed in the the replacement units concerned. Those for of&
separate section on the officer corps below. cers go to the SS Main Department for Person-
The two basic types of establishments for the nel (SS-Pcrsorr~rl EInuptarrrf), except that for all
training of noncommissioned officers for the officers in the economic administrative service the
Wajjell-SS are the noncommissioned officer SS P\Tain Economic Administrative Department
scl~ools and separate noncommissioned officer (SS-Wistschaft-Vrrze,altzlrrgs-Hauptallzt) is the
courses. The former are for professional non- responsible replacement agency.
commissioned officers and the latter for reserve The entire system of transferring and assigning
noncommissioned officers. WaRen-SS personnel to training and replacement
The SS noncommissioned officer schools (SS- units, field units, schools, and headquarters is cou-
Ulzterfiihl-er-SchzIlclz), which train German and trolled by the reinforcement branch (Abt I e) in
"Germanic" personnel, and the SS and foreign the Headquarters Office of the TVaffrn-SS (Ko~x-
personnel noncotnmissioned officer schools (SS- 99zandoa9lrt drr Tt’ajfffrlz-SS—Amt II). This
md Waflcn-Unterfiihrer-Schulerl), which train branch works in close cooperation with various
German and "non-Germanic" personnel, are or- other agencies regarding the transfer and assign-
ganized into either one or two battalions, a bat- ment of specialist ~,ersotinel. For example, the
talion consisting of a headquarters and four com- veterinary troops of the Wafle92-SS are super-
panies. Each company usually trains noncom- vised by the Veterinary Branch (Abt IV) in the
missioned officers for a different branch of serv- Riding and Driving O & e (Amt Reit- und -Fahr-
ice. On completing the course an SS noncom- wssen—Amt VI), which also conducts their train-
missioned officer applicant (SS-Untrrfiihrrr-Be- ing and courses, while all ordnance troops are
zucrber) is appointed S S noncommissioned officer controlled by the Ordnance Branch (Abt II) in
candidate (SS-U9tterfiihreY-A9mutirtcY) ; he may the office for supply (Nachschubamt—Al7zt VII).
become a sergeant (SS-U9zterscharfiihrer) only Both these branches maintain personnel assign
after demonstrating his abilities in a troop unit. ment sections for their respective specialist per-
Besides the courses for professional noncom- sonnel. Medical personnel comes under the con-
missioned officers held at the noncommissioned trol of the Administration Office (Anzt XIII) in
officer schools, the Waffcn-SS conducts short- the Medical Group (Sauitiitmvsru der Waffen-
term noncommissioned officer courses (Untcr- SS-rlnztsgruptw D—Ag 0).
fiihrer-Lehrg&ge) for reserve noncommissioned c. OFFICER CORPS OF THE Wafleu-SS. (1)
officers. These are usually held in the field divi- Gerzeral. The S S Main Department for Person-
sions during quiet periods. ttel (SS-Persollal - Mauptamt — SS - Pers HA)
Spe\cialist training establishments have the mis- keeps a central card file on all officers of the SS.
sion of training of officer technicians (Technische The original officer corps of the SS comprised a
Fiihrer der Sonderlaufbahnen) and particularly number of different categories, mainly dependent
Ill-—17
I MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451
upon the nature of their employment. The cre- terial are of two basic types: SS officer candidate
ation of the Wufmz-SS and its employment as a schools (SS-Ju77kcrscl77!lc7z), which train German
powerful military force necessitated the forma- and "Germanic" officers; and S‘S and foreign per-
tion of a separate officer corps for the Wafer- sonnel officer candidate school5 (SS- 217d Wafe77-
SS. An officer may, and often does, have dif- ]unkcrscliulc77), a-bich train I)oth German per-
ferent ranks in the two corps. sonnel and "non-Germanic" foreigners. The
(2) Selection of iMospcctive officers. The courses last about 6 months and are differen-
selection, registration, and training of prospective tiated as either war-officer-candidate courses
officers for the Wa#e77-SS is the responsibility of (Kriegsjunkcr-Lchr gunge) or \\-ar-officer-candi-
the SS Main Operational Department, which ex- date courses for foreign personnel (Kriegs-Waf-
ercises this function through the Office for Offi- fenjunker--Lchrgiirigc).
cer Training (fl77~t ~ iihrerausbildztll9—Alltt XZj (a) Active oficcl-s. The active officer cantli-
in the Training Group (L4,mtsgrzcppe B). At the dates of the Waffrn-SS attcntl the war-officer-
time of induction the recruiting center reports of- candidate courses (i(ricgju77/~c~r--Lrl7r~~i77~c) held
ficer material to this ofice. Every volunteer has at the officer candidate schools. These candidates
the opportunity to enter the oficer career of the must have previously completed a preparatory
FVafl’c7t-SS, depending upon three qualifications, course (T~orberrit7~7!g.~-I~e17r~/~777~~) held either at
namely, his character as a German, his perfor- a special-service school or at a training and re
mance as a National Socialist and a member of placement unit of the rl'c7fffc77-SS. They start
the SS, and his qualifications as a soldier an<1 this course as active officer applicants (Fiihrrr-
leader. Bewcrbcr—-FR) ant1 sul,sequently receive the title
Men selected as prospective officer cand&tes of SS-Junker and the equiva!ent rank of the low-
proceed to a training and replacement unit 01 est grade of sergeant (U7rtr,rsc.l7arJiilIvo-). After
training camp of the Wuferl-SS. The unit con;- the mid-term examinations at the officer candidate
mander concerned decides whether a candidate is school they become Sfc7/7d(7,-tr’/7j7/7/fi~‘r with the
fit or unfit for the officer career of the Wnfcn- equivalent rank Of .~rharfiihwr, and after the
SS after he has completed his basic training. The final examination Standardtcnobcrjunker (equiv-
branch of service to which an approved candidate alent to Hau~fsrlza~fiillr-rr,). Cantlitlates then re-
is to be allotted is then determined by the Office turn to their units and, after a minimum of two
for Officer Training in consultation with the vari- months, are appointed 2~1 T<enant (Unter-
ous offices and inspectorates of the SS Main OI:- sturu/fiihrcr) ly the RF-SS upon the recom-
erational Department. mendation of their regimental commanders.
The officer corps of the Wafe?z-SS comprises
(b) Rrsrrvc offic-crs. r\e;ervc: officer cancli-
three categories:
dates of the 56'nffr77-S.S, after taking a prepara-
(CL) Active 0~~~7s of the Waffm-SS (Aktive tory course as Rcssrvc-Fithrcr-Bcivcrber—RFB,
Fiihrer drr Wn,fen-SS), those who adopt the become SS-Junker dcr Reserve and then attend
career of S S officer. The elite of this category a reserve oficcr ca9didatc conrsc (Kcscrvc-Jm-
includes all pre-war graduates of the SS officer kcr-l,chrga77~~), held at a sl)ecial-service school of
candidate schools. the lYtiflr77-SS and Listing about 4 months. After
(b) Reserve ojjicers of the Wafen-SS (Re- the mid-term examinations the!* become Stand-
serve-Fiihrcr dcr Waffcn-SS). artenjunkrr dcr Rcsrrvc, ant1 after the final ex-
(c) Forcip oficrrs of the SS (CVajfe+ aminations Standartenoberjunker dcr Reserve.
Fiihrer de7 SS). This category includes all active Foreign officers of the rescrvc (Tl’afcrz-Fiihrer
and reserve officers of "non-Germanic" nationali- der Rcsr7-z~) also attend the reserve officer can-
ties. Those eligible include men who previously didate courses.
held a commission in their own armies and those I,ike active officer cantlitlate~. the graduate.;
who show leadership qualifications in the ranks of become officers only after at kast 2 months of
the Wnffr~SS. This category, however, does not service with a unit.
include officers coming from "Germanic" coun . (c) Forf+rl 0fircr.s of the SS. "Non-Gel--
tries, who may become full-fledged officers (SS- manic" officer candidates attend a war officer can-
Fiihrer) of either the active or reserve category didate course for foreign p~rsonn~l (KricgkWaf-
(3) Officer candidate schools. Waffw-SS fen junker- Lehrgang) held at the SS and foreign
schools designed to train and provide officer ma- personnel officer-candidate schools (SS- und
Ill—l8
I MARCH 1945
UNCLASSIFIED TME 30.451
Waffelljlflaker-Sclzulen). After its completion sides lectures at universities, the training includes
they return to their units and after a period of 2 practical experience and instruction at an admin-
months are appointed Wa~elz-Ulztcrsturl?zfiilzrer istrative office of the Waflcn-SS.
by the RF-SS upon the recommendation of their (d) Ordlzawe tecllllician career. This in-
regimental commander. cludes :
(4) Oficer cmdidafc COWSCS. Apart from the Ordnance supply officer (SS-Fiilzrer im Waf-
regular courses at the ofiicer-candidate schools de- fen- lrrld ,l~lrlliriolrsdirl/st)
scribed above, the R’aflcll-SS conducts the fol- Ordnance officer technician (TrclmSS-Fiihver
lowing special officer-candidate courses: JV)
Courses for partly disahled SS officer candi- Engineering officer (Trchll.SS-Fiikrer W
dates (I.chqii+zge fiir vrrselwtc SS-Jwkcr) held Ing.)
at the officer-candidate schools. The Ordnance Technical School and the engi-
Special course for Panzer officer candidates neering schools of the Ti'a~~c~l-SS provide for the
(Pan~er-Ju~~kcr-So~~d~~rlcl~~~a~~~). specialized training of these officers. They also
(5) Otlzcr oficc~ fyainillg rstablislm~ents. The attend lectures and 1cccivc practical application
TVaffclz-SS maintains medical and economic ad- at technical institutions.
ministrative officer training establishments with (c) Motor -trrlrrriral caret-r. This includes:
the function of providing for and supervising the Motor officers (Ti~cl~~~isclrr SS-Fiihrer (K) I)
military education of prospective active medical Motor officers (‘Trclrnisclrr SS-Fiilwer (I()
and economic administrative officers of the Waf- 11)
fc+Ss’ during the period of their studies at uni- The Motor Technical School of the TJiafc?t-SS
versities and other institutions. provides for and supervises the training of these
(6) Specialist careers. All officer candidates officers.
choosing a specialist career (Sonderlaufba.lzn) (f) 0tlrcl- specialist careers of fhr Waffcll-SS
Inust have certain basic qualifications. They include:
must have spent half a year .with a field unit and Officer technician (sig) (Tccl~~~iscl~c SS-
successfully graduated from an officer candidate Fiihrcr (N))
school of the LVa~m-SS. Judge advocate (SS-Fiilzrrr und Richter)
The following are the various specialist careers Notary (SS-Fiihrc’r und Beurkundungsfiihrer)
If the Waffm-SS: Water suppl!- officer (SS-Fiihrcr und W’elw-
(a) Mrdical career. This includes: gcologr)
Physician (SS-Fiilwcr wd Arzt) Bandmaster (SS-Fiihrcr und Musikfiihrer)
Medical techniciau (SS-Fiihrer im Sanith’ts- The officers in thaw specialist careers, besides
tech. Dicmt) their instruction at technical schools and other
Dentist (SS-Fiihrcr wd Zaharzt) estal~lishnicnts of the 1IVtrflcrl-.SS, receive special-
Pharmacist (SS-Fiilwcr und Apothcker) ized training at the special-service schools or spe-
The Medical Academy of the Waffm-SS pro- cialist training SChCiOlS of the ]Vaffcn-SS.
\-ides for the training of all officers in the medical d. SUPPI.Y SYSRELR OF THE IFaffcn-SS. (1j
career. Besides their formal training students Gc~ml. Units of tile TT’rrfle~-SS operating un-
attend lectures and practical demonstrations at der the tactical control of the Army utilize the
various universities. regular -4rniy sulq~ly channels for supplies of
(1)) Vcfcrinary rarrcr. This includes: rations, fuel. heavy equipment, and ammunition.
l’eterinary (SS-Fiihrer und Veterinh’r) In addition, however, tile SS maintains its own
\‘eterinary technician (SS-Fiihrcr inr Vrtrri- svstem of supply distinct from that of the Armed
/riivtrclm. Dicmt) I’orces and not subject to control or supervision
Officers in the veterinary career receive their hy the latter. For this put-post a large network
specialist training in the IHacksmith, School as well of depots and stores hns been built up in Ger
as in the veterinary training and replacement unit many and in occupied territory.
of the Waffen-SS. (2) Confyol. Ol)erntionall!- these depots and
(c) Adwinistrativc rawer. The Officer School stores come under the control of the S S Main
of the Economic Administrative Service of the Operational Department, which is responsible for
SS gives lectures and provides practical applica- the equipment and supply of SS units and estab-
tion for officers in the administrative career. Be- lishments when not under the tactical control of
11—19
I MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451
the Army. The S S Main Economic Administra- tion controlled by an official (SS-Wirtschufter)
tive Department, on the other hand, is responsible on the staff of an HSSPf. He is responsible for
for the detailed administration of these depots, or the administration of all depots and supplies in
for the general supervision of administration his region. Where field units of the Waflen-SS
where there is decentralization of its authority, are likely fo operate in a particular area for a con-
e.g. to the economic official (SS-Wirtsclzufter) siderable period, special supply bases (Stiitz-
with a Higher SS and police commander in occu- punkte) are usually established at convenient
pied territory. The actual responsibility for sup- points. These are small and temporary in char-
ply is divided between the SS Main Operational acter.
Department, which is responsible for initial equ$- (4) Clzan~zcls oj s~(/@y. All Wa#‘rn-SS units
ment and the supply and maintenance of arms, requisition their supplies from the S S Main Op-
ammunition, technical equipment, and transport erational Department. which either makes the issue
vehicles, and the SS Main Econotnic Administra- itself or instructs the SS Main liconomic Admin-
tive Department, which is responsible for rations, istrative Department to do so. The latter then
clothing, personal equipment, coal, wood, and either dispatches the material direct to the unit
fodder. from one of the central depots or from the fac-
For certain types of heavy equipment which tory, or arranges for it to be made available to
are obtainable only from Army depots, agreemer,t the unit at the nearest comcnient sub-depot.
is reached between the OKH and the SS Main The main stocks cf supply are held in central
Operational Department, which becomes respon- SS depots. These are of two kinds :
sible for the general supervision of stocks, main- Main supply depots (SS-Hauptwirtsclzafts-
tenance, and repair once such equipment has been Zagrr-—ZIWL), containing miscellaneous types
handed over to an SS unit. of supplies.
Although the SS and Police supply and admin- Special depots, including SS ordnance depots,
istratidn system in wartime operates primarily for motor transport supply depots and parks, signa.l
the Waffen-SS and SS police units, its organiza- equipment depots, medical equipment depots, and
tion and installations are also at the disposal of clothing depots.
the General SS and the S S Death's-Head For- From these central depots, outlying sub-depots
mations. are supplied. These may be either SS supply
(3) Regional organization of suffly. The SS depots (SS-~~rc~c~~sclzl~l~lagcr), mainly found near
Main Economic Administrative Department con- the borders of Germany and in occupied territory,
trols all regidnal supply depots. There is a or S S troop supply depots (SS-Truppenwirt-
marked tendency for SS depots and administra- sclzaftslag~r—TWLj, which hold stocks of cloth-
tive services to be grouped around concentration ing, light equipment, fuel, and other goods.
camps, notably Dachau and Oranienburg. Tli i s At the time, when the supply lines on the East-
arrangement centralized administrative matters, ern Front were too far cxt~ntled. SS supply ser-
as the concentration camps come under the con- vice headquarters (SS-A~trrhsclzlihkollzlllanda?2-
trol of the SS Main Economic Administrative tz~ea) were established. Each of these was in
Department, and the inmates of such camps pro- itself an important group of depots and adminis-
vide a cheap source of labor. trative ofices. Although subordinate for admin-
At each SS district headquarters in Germany istrative purposes to the SS economic official with
proper there is an administrative office (Verwal- the local HSSPf, it was the primary link between
tungsa’mt) which controls and supervises all sup. the SS main departments and main depots in Ger-
ply depots and installations within its area. Simi- many and the S S units and sub-depots in its own
larly at the S S sub-district headquarters there is area. It served both as a distribution center and
an administrative branch (Vemc,alt26~~gsabteilung) a supply base, and in its depots were held arnls,
with the same functions. At the headquarters of ammunition, motor transport equipment, capture1
an SS garrison command (SS-Stalzdortbereich) material, clothing, fuel, coal, wood, building ma-
there is an SS garrison administration headquar- terial, and other goods. It was also empowered,
t’ers (SS-Standortverwallung) dealing with sup- subject to the approval of the S S economic of%-
lily and finance in its area and directly subordi- cial with the HSSPF, to make contracts with or
nate to the respective S S district and sub-district. purchases from private firms in its area.
In occupied territory, there is an economic sec- (5) Veterinary supply service. The Waff en-
II’20
I MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451
55 i t s its own channel of supply for its Stab RF-SS), and the Head of the S S Medical
cavalry and non-motorized units. Horses for the Group, who acts as inspector General of SS
Waffen-SS are procured through SS remount de- Medical Services.
pots (SS-Remonteiirnter), which were mainly Actual administration is carried out by the
found until recently in occupied territory. These Medical Group (Sanifiitswese~z der Waffen-SS—
depots forward the horses to the S S rihing and Anztsgruppe U) in the S S Main Operational De-
driving schools (SS-Reit-md-Falwschulen), from partment, which controls SS hospitals and medi-
where they either go to a unit direct or to an SS cal services in Germany and in occupied territory
base veterinary depot (SS-H&tzatpferdepark), as well as the medical units attached to 5 5 units
which in turn forwards them to an SS veterinary in the field. It does not, however, automatically
depot (SS-Pferdepark) in a forward area, usually follow that all 5 5 casualties are evacuated
attached to an S S corps. These corps will then through SS medical channels. Local circum-
make distribution among their divisions which stances may make it difficult o: inexpedient t,?
have veterinary companies. Wounded horses,
use SS medical facilities, and it frequently hap-
after treatment in the field, go to an S S veter-
pelt; that SS wounded are evacuated as far as
inary hospital (SS-Pferdelazarett) in a forward
base hospitals in Germany entirely through regu-
area an then SS an 5 5 base veterinary hospital
lar Army medical channels.
(SS-Hcimafpferdelazarett) in Germany. Veter-
inary equipment for Waffen-SS units can be ob- A great number of SS medical institutions, SS
tained from the S S Central Veterinary Park (SS- hospitals (SS-Laznreffcj, and SS convalescent
Hauptvrterintirpark) by way of one of the vet- homes (SS-Gen~esungsheiww) have been identified
erinary parks in forward areas. both in Germany and in occupied areas.
e. E~~PI,~YMIXVIY OF THE Waflen-SS IIV TEIE
(6) Movement of supplies. The transporta- FIELD.
tion of SS supplies is coordinated by the trans.
Hitler is nominally the Supreme Commander
portation officer (Transportofizier—TO) in the
of the Waffetz-SS. This command is exercised
5 5 Main Operational Department. He maintains
only through the RF-SS, and it has become very
liaison both with other SS main departments
doubtful of late whether Hitler has retained any
where necessary and also with the German rail-
power to direct Himmler in this or any other
way authorities and the transportation authorities
of the German Arms. Subordinate to him are a capacity.
number of regional transportation officers, found The field hcadquartcrs of the RI;-SS (Feld-
in in those districts close to the German bor- kol~mandostelle RF-SS) represents nominally the
der. Other transportation officers are stationed highest echelon in the direction of the employ-
at principal railway stations in Germany and in ment of the LVaficn-SS. Since Himmler is not
occupied territory. At railway junctions particu always present at this headquarters, proper allow-
larly important for S S movement, S S reloading ance should be made for the fact that the RF-SS
stations (SS-Unzschlagstellen) are established. will decide in person about such employment, re-
gardless of his wheresljouts at the time. No unit
(7) Repair and maintenance of velzicles and of the W’afm-SS may be dissolved, under any
cquipnzeltt . In forward areas, besides the repair circumstances, by anybody but the RF-SS.
and recovery sections at divisions, independent For military operations, units of the Waffeft-SS
sections may operate at supply depots or at sup- are placed under command of the OKH. In the
ply service headquarters. In Germany facilities beginning individual units were assigned to army
for repair exist at the appropriate SS central de- groups and armies as needed, although an effort
pots and also at the SS Ordnance Testing Work- was made to give them independent tasks wher-
shop (SS-Waffenamt-Priifungswcrksttitte) and ever possible. Special emphasis was placed on
the S S Ordnance Works (SS-Ausriistungs- the propaganda value of their employment, and
werke). Extensive use is also made- of Army many spectacular missions were assigned to them,
repair facilities. although their military importance and difficultv
(8)’ Medical sewices. General supervision were often exaggerated. \Vith the progress of the
over the medical services of the 5 5 is exercised Russian campaign these units became involved in
by two officers, the Chief SS and Police Medical tougher combat assignments. Due to the strict
Officer (Reichsarzt SS und Polizei), who is at- selection of their personnel, not only from a politi-
tached to the Personal Staff RF-SS (Pers&Zichcr cal point of view but also from that of health,
III-—2I
I MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451
stamina, and stature, these units were in a position sia itself the number of Ll’n#clr-SS units engaget!
to take full advantage of the strong propaganda grew from five divisions in 1942 to at least four
efforts which the SS made in their behalf. Gain- corps and 13 tlivisions for the better part of
ing a reputation as an elite force, divisions of the 1944. An SS brigade partici!,ated in the defense
IT’aflerlz-SS began to control regular Army units of Corsica and was later committed as a division
engaged in the immediate vicinity. The next step in the Italian thca:cr, whiles another appearet!
was the formation of SS corps which, under there to assist in the internal tasks resulting from
OKH command, controlled SS divisions and the Italian collapse. To this I\-ere added a new
brigades. Soon certain S S corps held command division and a new brigade in 1944. Two corps
over a small group of S S units and a much larger and at least seven divisions fought at various
proportion of regular Army units. Eventually, times against the partisans it1 Yugoslavia, and
certain SS corps commanded Army units only. one division formed an important component of
For a brief period, in 1943, an SS Army existed the occupation forces in Greece. Two Ilmfegz-SS
which held mainly administrative functions in corps and six divisions were employed in Nor-
northern Italy. But in the autumn of 1944, when mandy and participated in the withtlrawal from
the Sixth Palzzer Army was formed, a large unit France. On the Western I:ront one Army, at
of the German Army was for the first time desig- least six corps, and a minimum of nine divisions
nated as an SS unit. Previous to that event, SS were opposing Allied forces at the beginning of
generals had held Army commands under the 1945. Two or three corps, nine divisions, and two
OKH in a few instances during the defense of brigades formed the strength of the Il’nffc~l-SS
Normandy ant! the withdrawal from France. in Hungary at that time.
The territorial commanders of the Wuflen-SS Corps units of the Wafm-SS, such as Panzw.
(Bcfehlslraher dcr W’afen-SS), who have been heavy artillery, observation, projector, signal, re-
installed in certain occupied and annexed areas, connaissance, and antiaircraft battalions and
take charge of operations only in certain special smaller units of the same and other types, may
cases. For example, a coast defense sector (Kiis- be used as tactical stlpport for both wfl#filt-SS
tcnverteidigmgsabsclmitt) in the Netherlands was and Army units.
commanded by such an officer under the Com- Ever since the S S increased its power over the
manding General in the Netherlands (LXXXVIII Army so suddenly in July 1944, rumors have per-
Army Cor!‘s). His command included training sisted that individual members of the Wnffen-SS
and replacement units of the Waffcn-SS, of the became attached to regular Army units, especia!!y
S
S Police, and of the Air Force. in the low echelons, in order to increase the relia-
Tn theory, the influence of the RF-SS ceases bility of these troops. The fact that units of the
with the subordination of bf’n#~-SS units to the Wafcn-SS were used to prevent mass desertions
Army. Tn effect, however, much evidence points or withtlrawals contrary to ortlers is established.
to the fact that he retains the right to pass on the IJ’nffrll-SS personllc! forms the nucleus of the
type of employment which the Army may pre- Volks Gwnadiw and probab!\- also the Volkssturm
scribe. units. To some extent personnel of the i7’aflfn?-
The temporary relief of Rundstedt as com- SS was exchanged with ,4rmy personnel, while
mander of the Western Front in 1944 is attrib whole contingents of Air Corps and Navy per-
uted, at least in part, to a conflict between him sonnel were repeatedly presset! into the service of
and the RF-SS resulting from discrepancies of the Wu,flcll-SS when it became urgently necessary
opinion as to the employment of the Waffen-SS to reform badly mauled rVnffrll-.~S units.
in that theater. Another recent trend is the assumption of com-
Units of the Wt.tffnt-SS have been employed mand fmictions in the TVq,TwSS by high-rank-
in all theatres of the war, except in North Africa ing Army officers. They appear \vith SS ranks
and in the original campaign in Norway. From equivalent to their former Army ranks. Although
the small beginning of regimental units partici- this procetlure may I)e causet! merely by military
pating in the Polish campaign, active employment expediency. it is not likely that a high-ranking
of w’afefz-SS units grew to at least two divisions German officer would assume an .96" rank with-
in the Western and Balkan drives of 1940 and out coming under the special tlisciplinary rules Of
1941. One division was engaged in Finland from the SS and without having reconciled himself to
the beginning of the Russian campaign. In Rus- its program, ideals, and plans for tile future.
11122
I MARCH 1945
UMCLASSl~lED TM-E 30-451
The actual replacement units of the S S police Xormally these units come under the regional
regiments are the special-service schools, which command of the HSSPf represented by the com-
were formerly called instruction battalions (Lelzr- mander of the Order Police. In certain areas
Bataillione). These units receive their person- special headquarters have been formed under
nel from the recruit assembly centers (Erfassungs- the HSSPf to carry out such tasks as the com-
dienststellen) of the Protective Police. For bating of partisans. Sometimes S S police units
officers and specialist personnel, the responsible have been placed under &\rrny command for
replacement units are the officer candidate schools military operations, or they may be directly sub-
and specialist training schools. ordinate to a commander of the JVaffen-SS
c. OFFICER CORPS. All officers of the Pro- who in turn comes under the .1rm)..
tective Police are recruited in wartime from
graduates of the SS officer candidate schools
(SS-Junkerschulen). They are then given spe- Section II. .AUXILIARY ORGANIZATIONS
cial police training at police officer schools. All
officers now have dual rank in the S S and the 1. introduction
Protective Police. Certain militarized organizations have devel-
d. SUPPLY. The S S police regiments have oped from independent or Party formations to
their own supply depots and their own channels full-fledged partners of the Armed Forces. In
of supply. They receive such supplies from the the field, when they operate directly for the
Main Ordnance Depot of the Order Police Armed 170rces, they are described as attached to
(Hau~ptzeugawt der Ordnungspolizei) and from them (Welznjzachtgefolgc) ; but they also per-
the police procurement depots (Polizei-Bc- form many supply, construction, policing, and
schaffu~lgstimtcr) as well as from the clothing training tasks of military importance when not
distribution centers of the police (Bekleidzmgs- actually associated with military units.
liefet-stellefa der Polisei). For certain types of
2. Labor Service
supply, however, they depend upon the supply
depots and installations of the Waflelz-SS or The German Labor Service (Reiclzsarbeitsdienst
those of the Army. —RAD) arose from a Party organization set up
in 1931 and known ;is the NS-Arbrifsdicllst for
e. EMPLOYMENT OF SS POLICE U N I T S IN TIIE
the purpose of easing unemployment. It grew in
FIELD. The employment of police units for mili-
importance with the rearmament of Gtarmany, and
tary purposes dates back to 1939, when a Riiac-
a law in 193.5 made scrvicc in the RAD, IIOW sep-
llctlngslaundertsclzaft dcr Polizei was engaged in
arated from the Party and made into a State or-
directing refugees who were evacuated from the
ganization, compulsory for all young Germans.
western border areas. Their main mission was
The strength of the RAD in 1939 is estimated at
to keep the roads clear for the columns of the
360,000 men; it is now considerably less. The
Armed Forces. The expansion into battalions
RAD is a Supreme Reich Authority I\-ith the same
was brought about in order to cope with the
status as the Ministries. It has nevertheless main-
type of guerrilla warfare which originated in
tained its strong ties to the Party, documented by
Russia behind the lines of the swiftly advancing
the position of its chief, the Rrichsavbeitsf iilzrer,
German forces. Numerous units employed here
as a member of the High Command (Reichs-
gained valuable experience which they put to
lritwg) of the Party.
good use in their later missions in Yugoslavia,
Greece, Italy, and France. SS police units were The mission of the RAD in peacetime con-
also stationed wherever large-scale construction sisted in the creation of jobs. the performance of
of defense works was in progress, e.g. at the public works, the revival of interest in the dignity
Atlantic Wall and in the Mediterranean defense of manual labor, and above all the physical hard-
zone. At times SS police units joined with com- ening, disciplining, and political indoctrination of
bat troops in the front lines, especially where its members.
defensive operations became urgent. In most The RAD has its own regional organization
cases only elements of SS police regiments have based on 40 Arbeitsgaue which contain numerous
been identified in one place. Battalions of the groups (Gruppell) and detachments (Abteih-
same regiment have been found in different sec- gen). A detachment normally consists of about
tors and even on different fronts. 200 men,
III—24
TN (and other
Army SS Police auxiliary police) RAD OT NSKK Party-Oficials # SA and NSFK HI
Gren. SS-Mann Anwarter Anwarter Arbeitpmann Arbeiter Sturmmann Heifer Sturmmann## Hitlerj unge
Ob. Gren. Sturmmann Vormann Vormann Obersturmmann Oberhelfer Ober sturm man n## Rottenfuhrer
Gefr. Rotten fuhrer Unterwacht- Unterwacht- Obervormann Meister Rotten fuhrer Arbeitsleiter Rottenfiihrer Ober rotten fiihser
meister meister
Ob. Gefr. Rottwachtmeister liott wachtmei ster Hauptvormann Obermeister Oberarbeitsleiter
Stabsgefr. Untertruppfiihrer Hauptarheitsleitw
Unt. Offz, Unterscharfiihrer Wachtmeister Wachtmeister Truppfiihrer Truppfiibrer Scharfuhrer Scbnrfiibrer Kameradschafts-
fiihrer
Unt. Feldw. Scharfiihrer Oberwachtmeister Oberwachtmeister Ober scharfiihrer (Jberscharfiihrer Oberkamerad-
scbaftsfiibrer
Feldw. Oberschar fuhrer Zugwachtmei ster Zugwachtmei ster Oberscharfiihrer Obertruppfiibrer Truppfiibrer Bereitschaftsleiter Truppfiibrer Scharfiihrer
Ob. Feldw. H a uptschar fuhrer Hauptwacht- Hauptwacht- Haupttruppfiihrer Obertruppfiihrer Oberbereit- Obertruppfiihrer 0herscb;~rfiibrer
meister meister schaftslciter
Stabsfeldw. Sturmschar fuhrer Bereitschafts- Haupttruppfiihrer Hauptbereit- Haupttruppfiibrer
wachtmeister , schaftsleiter
Meister Meister Unterfeldmeister
Obermeister
Lt. Untersturmfuhrer Leutnan Zugfuhrer Feklmeister Krontfiihrer Sturmfuhrer Einsatzleiter Sturmfiihrer Gefolgschaftsflibrer
Ob. Lt. Obersturmfuhrer Oberleutnant Oberzugfiihrer Oberfeldmeister Oberfrontfuhrer Obersturmfuhrer Obereinsatzleiter Obersturmfuhrer Obergefolgscbafts-
fiihrer
Hauptmann HauptsturmfuhrtT Hauptmann Bereitschafts- Oberstfeldmeister Hauptfrontfiilxer Haul’tsturmfdbrer Haupteinsatzleitrr H au pt stu rmf uh rer Hauptgefolgscbafts-
fiihrer fubrer
Major Sturmbannfuhrer Major Abteilungsfiihrer Arbeitsfuhrer Stabsfront fuhrer Staffelfuhrer Gemeinschafts- Sturmbannfiihrer Stammflihrer
leiter
Obst Lt. Obersturmbann- Oberstleutnant Oberabteilungs- Oberarbeitsfiihrer Oberstabsfront- Oberstaffel- Hauptgemein- Obersturmbann- Oberstammfiihrcr
fuhrer fuhrer fiihrer fiihrer schaftsleiter fiihrer
Oberst Standartenfiihrer Oberst Landesfiihrer Oberstarbeits- Oberstfrontfuhrer Standartenfiihrer Hauptabschnitts- Standartenfiihrer Bannfiihrer
fuhrer fuhrer
Ober fiihrer < >herf iihrer Hauptbereichs- Oberf iibrer Hauptbannfilhrer 3
leiter CO
Haulrtdienstlciter Brigadrftibrcr
CO
Gen. Maj. Brigadefiihrer (jeneralmajor Generalarbeits- Einsatzleiter Brigadefiibrcr Gebeitsfiihrer
fuhrer
Gen. Lt. Gruppenfuhrer Generalleutnant (Chef der TN) Obergeneral- Einsatzaruulxn- Gruppenfiihrer Hauptbefeblsleiter Gruppenfdbrer Obergebeitsfiibrer m
arbeitsfiihrer leiter IT
General Obergruppen- General Einsatzgruppen- Obergruppenf tihrer Gnuleiter Obergruppenf iihrer Stabsf tihrer
fiihrer leiter I
Gen. Obst. Oberstgruppen- Generaloberst Reichsarbeits- Chef der OT Korpsfiihrer Reichsleiter Stabschef der SA Reichsjugendfuhrer
fuhrer fuhrer
Gen. Feldm. Reichsfiihrer-SS
4P This is only a selection of the many Party ranks. # # SA-Sturmmann equals NSFK-Mann.
SA-Obersturmmann equals NSFK-Sturmmann.
o
Figwe 5.—Table of equizulmt mnks.
I MARCH 1945
UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451
The work done by the RAD was of substantial 4. Nazi Party Motor Transport Corps
military value even in peacetime. It helped to
The Nationals0zialistiscl~c~s hFraf’tfahrkorps
build fortifications and formed the nucleus of the
(NSKK) \vas organizctl untlcr its present title in
construction battalions of the Army and Air
1931 to increase the mobility of the S.l (Erown-
l;orce at the outbreak of war. Such battalions,
shirts). Afttr 1933 the Ss‘KK turned to the
which were originally formed by the outright con-
training of drivers for the e\entual use of the
vcrsron of KAD groups, had an average strength
Armed Forces.
of 2,000 mc’n and consisted of four construction
companies and three construction columns. These As a branch (Glicdrl-~lrg) ot the Party, the
units prepared the way for the work of the engi- NSKK has its o\vn rcgiollal organization which
neers and did the pick and shovel work under is dividctl into i2~otorobl,r!/~llp~~.// and further into
them. During the Polish campaign the work con- Motorgruppen. Membership is on a voluntaq
sisted of road and railway repair work and of basis.
construction of airfields. In addition they brought Since the outbreak of war the NSKK has ful-
up supplies, collected and sorted captured equip- filled three important functions. It has organizetl
ment, and helped with the harvest. In December pre-military training in the motorizetl branch of
1939 the R/ID reverted to its original form and the Hitler Youth, it has provided an auxiliaq
continued to carry out its wartime duties Lmder transportation service in the conlmutlic~ttions zone
its own commanders and under RAD rules and in support of the Armed Forces, and it has trained
administration. l3y 1943 the RAD men were com- tank crews for the Army. ITor the transport func-
pletely militarized. In addition to the shovel work, tion A’Sk’l< units were organized as four separate
they were employed to lay minefields and man brigades (Brigadcrz).
fortifications and were taught antitank and anti-
aircraft defense. In 1944 such employment became With the forming of the Volkssturul in October
tllore general \vhile conditions inside Germany 1944 the NSKK became responsible for its auto-
necessitated the use of the RAD to operate antiair- motive training.
craft batteries, fight fires, clear bomb damage, and
build temporary quarters for the bombed-out. 5. Technical Emergency Corps
Knits remaining in the field or finding them- The Tcchnisclw Nothilfc tTiV), often referred
selves in German areas which became parts of the to as the Tcrlo, is a branch of the Order Police
fighting front \\:cre often incorporated into the (Ordrfzf~r,qspolizri). It is a corps of engineers,
Wclannaclat without further ado. technicians, and skilled and sem-skillctl specialists
in construction \vork, public utilities operation,
3. Todt Organization communications, metal salvage, and other r & t e d
fields.
The Orpnisatio~z Todt (OT) was first formed
by the late Dr. Todt in 1938 to build the western Alost of its members are men over military age.
tlefcnscs known in Germany as the Westwall. In General requirements are those of the SS and
lvartime its Einsntzpuppezr (Work Groups) were Police.
employed as construction units in almost all defen- Founded in 1919 as a strike-breaking organiza-
sive construction works, especially those in France, tion the TN was retained after 1933 as a force of
Italy, and the Lowlands. The OT cooperates the state to cope \vith emergencies and dangers to
closely with private firms in its missions for the the public. Incorporated into the police in 1937,
Wclzr~~~l~t and employs increasing numbers of the TN continued to 1)erform its original mission
foreign laborers. Its liaison with the Artny is in wartime. In addition, units of the TN were em-
maintained through the fortress engineer staffs ployrd in construction and rrl)air \vork and in
(F~stungspiollicrsti~~~). The transport system of many other technical tasks M’ith the. .\rmetl Forces.
the OT is maintained by the NSE=IC (see below). I’ortions of these units ha\.c been incorporated
The German personnel of the OT is armed in into the X r t q as technical trool)s (Trch/tis~l~c
order to be prepared for any surprise attack while Tr~pprrr), A-hich have since lost their identity as
working on the building site. Most of the men be- TN units csntirely. TN units are known to have
long to age groups which are expected to have performed engineer functions for SS-Polizci uliits
received military training during the last war, which lvere employed in defcnsivc tasks in for-
Kefresher courses are - held. < ward echelons.
I—26
I MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIED TM.E 30.451
Since 1939 the SA has made a substantial con- ganization (NS-Frazrcmchaff) upon reaching the
tribution to the German war effort through its age of 21.
assigned responsibility for military training pre- The HJ for boys is divided into the Hitler-
ceding or following the period of regular military Jugend proper (for boys from 14 to 18) and the
service. It also trains those who were rejected Deutsches Jungvolk-—DJ, for boys from 10 to 14.
by the Armed Forces for physical reasons. In Its regional organization is based on Gebiete,
1944 the SA was entrusted with the task of teach- which are further divided into Banne, Stamme,
ing every German marksmanship, and with the Gefolgschaften, Scharcn, and Kamcradschaften.
forming of the VoZk.&rnz in October 1944 the Units of the HJ have been committed to "war
SA became responsible for its rifle training. employment" (Kriegscimatz), discharging such
The bulk of the pre-war members of the SA duties as fire fighting and air raid protection.
were drawn intO the Army, whose 60th Panzer They have also been widely employed to help with
Grenadier Division is composed mainly of SA the harvest and as conductors, mail clerks, post-
men and carries the name "Feldherrnhalle" in men, and street cleaners as well as for salvage
honor of the most elite peacetime regiment of the activities and collections for war charities. Since
SA. 1943 most members of the / / / have had to serve
as antiaircraft auxiliaries (H J-Luftzcaffenhelfer
2. National-Socialist Aviation Corps (National- and HJ-Mari~~ehclfer), performing many func-
sozialistisches Fliegerkorps—NSFK) tions in the antiaircraft batteries, which relieve
This organization incorporated the existing as- older men for combat duty.
sociations for aviation into one Party-controlled Bazooka battalions. (Panzerschreckabteilungen)
organization in April 1937. The mission of the have recently been formed from HJ personnel.
NSFK consists in pre-military training of pros- Close liaison between the HJ and both the Armed
pective members of the Air Force, post-military Forces and the WaflewSS is i by s
training of its reservists, and general furthering of specially appointed liaison officers. The elite of
of air-mindedness among the German people. the HJ is used in its i t s
Particularly outstanding have been its efforts in (Streifendicnst), which combines all the tasks of
the development of the use of gliders. Its regional a junior S S and police force. The members of
organization, like that of the SA, is based on this group are most unscrupdlous and are used as
Gruppen and Standarten. Membership is volun- raiding squads and in In Poland they
tary and excludes simultaneous membership in the formed pursuit detachments (Rollkommandos)
SS, SA, or NSKK. serving under officers of the -S^ Death's-Head
Formations.
3. Hitler Youth (Hitler-Jugend-HJ)
All German youths between the ages of 10 and Section IV. EMERGENCY DEFENSE OF
18 belong to this organization of the Party, which GERMAN SOIL
is charged with their thorough pre-military train-
ing and political indoctrination. Pre-military Detailed plans exist for the rapid mobilization
training has been greatly expanded in the course of all the auxiliary organizations described in the
of this war. For this purpose about 300 Wehrer- above paragraphs in case of the actual invasion
tiichtigungslager (military fitness camps) were of, or immediate military threat to, any part of
installed, beginning in 1943. Participants in these Germany proper. Elaborate administrative prep-
training courses were subsequently incorporated arations have been made for their operational
into the Armed Forces and especially into the control and chain of command in such an emer-
Wafen-SS, whose 12th Panzer Division bears the gency.
name "Hitler-Jugend". Graduates of the HJ be- The commander of each corps area (Wehr-
come eligible for Party membership. They may kreis) has always been responsible for organizing
either choose a career as Party functionaries the emergency defense of his territory. Since,
(Politische Leiter) or may join the SS, SA, however, he normally controls only the static mili-
NSKK, or NSFK. tary forces and installations of the Armed Forces
Girls belong to a branch of the HJ known as proper, the Higher 5"S and Police Commander
the League of German Girls (Bund Deutscher (HSSPf) has been designated to join him in case
il4iidel—BDM) and join the Party Women's Or- of invasion and to take control of all the other
III—28
I MARCH 1945
UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451
available manpower in the area which is organ- take the place of the combat commander in case
ized in a form suitable to aid in its defense. He he should become a casualty, unless there is an-
is not to be subordinated to the Wehrkreis com- other officer senior to him in the area.
mander but must cooperate with him and will The organizations which come under the control
deputize for him if necessary. The only exception of the Higher SS and Police Commander in emer-
to this is the Todt Organization, whose units and gency include the Waffm-SS, Security Police,
installations pass directly to the control of the Protective Police, Rural Police, special employ-
Welzrkreis commander in such an emergency. ment units of the General SS (SS-z.b.Y.), special
Under the HSSPf the Wehrkreis is divided, employment units of the SA (SA-z.b.V.), Urban
for emergency defense, into security zones (Si- and Rural Auxiliary Guards, Fire-fighting Police
chcrzrrlgsbcrcicke), each headed by a commander and Fire-fighting Services, Technical Emergency
of the Protective Police (Sclzupo). In case of in- Corps, German Labor Service, Postal and Rail-
vasion each such commander joins the Armed way Security I:orccs, Industrial Emergency Units
Forces commander (Wehr~~zaclztkonr~~zal?dant) in (Industrie-Alarmcinheiten), P1ant Protection
the major garrison area which most nearly coin- Service (It’crksrlzutz), the German Red Cross,
cides with the security zone. The Armed Forces and the Volkssturm.
commander then acts, in collaboration with the This arrangement for the emergency defense
security zone commander, as "combat commander" of German soil is in sharp contrast to the estab-
(KallzpfkOllZI1zundu12t) of the area, a concept in- lished prerogatives of the Army in military mat-
troduced in 1944 for commanders who take full ters in that responsibility as well as actual control
charge of areas which are expected to become cut of the defending forces is to be shared between
off and which must be defended to the "last car- the proper territorial military authority and the
tridge". The commander of the security zone will representative of its principal rival, the SS.
III—29
I MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451
CHAPTER IV
TACTICS
Section I. GENERAL TACTICAL DOCTRINES ship has been responsible for many bold decisions.
Yet, while the Germans have many excellent tac-
I. Basic Doctrines ticians, they tend to repeat the same type of
maneuvers, a fact which has been fully exploited
An outstanding characteristic of the German na- by Allied commanders.
tion is its fondness for everything connected with
militarism. This is based not only on traditional The German specialization in particular types
sentiment but also oil long-range and intense edu- of warfare such as mountain, desert, winter, or
cation that glorifies the military spirit. This gives the attack on fortified positions, showed thorough
the German military leaders the essential founda- preparation and ingenuity. At the same time the
tion for aggressive military operations. Germans had been quite willing to learn from
their opponents and on numerous occasions have
The Germans believe that only the offensive can copied Allied tactics and weapons.
achieve success on the field, particularly when
combined with the element of surprise. German
military literature, for the past century, has em- 2. Recent Tactical Trends
phasized the need for aggressiveness in all mili- From the time when the German Army was
tary operations. forced on the defensive by the Allied armies,
The Germans have been thoroughly aware of German tactical doct:r;nes have undergone modi-
the psychological component in warfare and have fications such as renunciation (except in unstated
instances) of air support, and the substitution' of
developed systematic terroriiation to a high
linear defense for elastic offensive defense.
degree.
At the same time they have placed considerabie The primary goal of Germany today is to gain
reliance on novel and sensational weapons such time and to achieve victory in .a political sense,
as the rna3.s use of armor, the robot bomb, and since the Germans are no longer capable of a
the super-heavy tank. Their principal weaknesses military victory. Of necessity their military opera-
in this regard have been their failure to integrate tions now supplement this effort and have become
these new techniques with established arms and a large-scale delaying action.
tactics—German field artillery, for example, did
not maintain pace with German armor—and their 3. Exercise of Command
devotion to automatic .weapons at *the expense of
The U. S. and German doctrines applied in exer-
accuracy.
cise of the command ;:rc virtually identical. The
A highly trained officer corps and a thoroughly Germans stress the necessity of the staff in assist-
disciplined army are the necessary elements to ing the commander to VI-aluate the situation and
implement this aggressive philosophy. German in preparing and di.;seminating orders to the lower
tactical doctrines stress the responsibility and the units. They emphasize that the commander
initiative of subordinates. The belief of former should be well forward with his units not only
years that the German Army was inflexible and for , the purpose of f:tcilitating communication, but
lacking in initiative has been completely destroyed also 1~2cause his presence has a salutary effect on
in this war, in which aggressive and daring leader- the troops.
IV—I
I MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451
patrol is commanded by a sergeant who has under actual area to be reconnoitered. In other in-
him 15 to 20 men, organized in two equal sec- stances, artillery and mortars that have regis-
tions, each commanded by a section leader. These tered during the previous day shell during the
are raiding patrols, and their mission often in- night the area to be reconnoitered. As soon as
cludes bringing back prisoners of war. Since the harrage is lifted, the patrol advances under
Allied air supremacy has neutralized German air cover of machineYgun fire from flanking positions.
reconnaisance to a great extent, the Germans hare
placed increased importance on prisoners of war,
especially officers, as a source of information on
ellcmy strength, dispositions, and intentions. Section III. MARCHES
Combat or other types of patrols are often sent
out to test the' strength of enemy outposts. If an 1. General
outpost proves to be weakly held, the patrol at-
The formations and the ‘organizations of the
tacks, occupies the position. and remains there
march column in day or night advances are the
until relieved by troops from the rear. If the
same in the German Army as in the U. S. Army
patrol is strongly garrisoned, the patrol attempts
and are governed by the same principles. For a
to return with a prisoner of war.
smooth functioning of the march the Germans
f. SPECIAL PATROLS (spiihfruppen wit heson- stress : systematic training and practice : attention
derm Azrfgnbcn). These vary in strength in ac- to physical welfare; care of vehicles and equip-
cordance with their special mission. Special pa- ment ; previous reconnaissance of routes; warning
trols are sent out to carry out such tasks as orders; and the issue of detailed march orders.
demolitions, engaging of enemy patrols that have
penetrated German positions, and ambushing 2. Organization and Control of the March Column
enemy supply columns.
In order to secure the march column against
g. MISCELLANEOUS PATROLS. Engineer patrols enemy attacks, the Germans divide the column in
are employed to reconnoiter approaches to forti- the same manner as U. S. doctrine prescribes,
fied areas, defiles, or rivers. Artillery patrols, namely into Advance Guard (L’ovhut), Main
usually consisting of an officer and a few mounted Body (&OS). and Rear Guard (Nachl~ut). Ger-
men. reconnoiter routes of approach, obsrrvation man equivalents for the C. S. trrms are:
posts, and firing positions.
h. TERRAIN RECONNAISSANCE (G clii~ld eerkztn- Advance Guard
dung). The Germans place great emphasis on Spitze ...............Point
terrain reconnaissance, realizing the influence ter- Spitzenkowpanic ..;\ dvance party
rain has up011 the conduct of operations. >Iost of Vortrupp Support
their usual reconnaissance missions include ter- Haupttrupp .... ..............Reserve
rain reconnaissance tasks. Terrain may be so
Rear Guard
important at times as to require reconnaissance
Nachspitzc.............Rear point
by special units. Groutid and air reconnaissance
Naclzspitzc~zko~~lpanic ......Rear party
units give special attention to the road net—its
Naclztrupp ..............Support
density, condition, road blocks, mines, and demo-
Haupttrupp ..............Reserve
litions—as well as to the terrain itself, particularly
tank country. The issue of orders for march ant1 traffic con-
i. EQUIPMENT AND SUPPORT. The Germans trol is the responsibility of the higher command.
equip their ground battle-reconnaissance patrols Movement by road of formations from battalion
with machine pistols and one or two light machine strength upwards is carried out in the Zone of
guns that are used to cover the patrol's approach the Interior at the orders of the Army High
or withdrawal. Engineers often are attached to Command (OKH) or a headquarters acting on
guide a patrol through German minefields and to the orders of the Army High Command. In the
clear a way through enemy wire or mines. Ar- Theater of War such movements. are controlled
tillery support is given in the form of harassing by Army Headquarters, which issues orders in
fire put down just before the patrol reaches its accordance with instructions from Army High
objective. Sometimes the artillery ,fires into ad- Command or the Army Group. Movements in
jacent sectors to mislead the enemy as to the the areas of military commanders of line-of-com-
IV
I MARCH 1945 .UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-45I
munication areas are controlled by orders of the The Germans are very much concerned about
commanders of such areas. antiaircraft protective measures and often march
Orders for movement are issued to the forma- in open columns (~;licgrrlllarschfiefc) ; an ad-
tions of fighting troops by the operations group vance in deployed iormation (Fliegevmarsch-
of headquarters; those to supply services and breite) is seldom practical. Antiaircraft defense
units in the line-of-communication area emanate is concentrated at important terrain features, such
from the supply and administrative group. as bridges, crossroads, and defiles. Because of
The Germans set up a well organized traffic Allied air supremacy the Germans now instruct
control service which is under the orders of the their troops to conduct movements and the trans-
operations group. All traffic control services usu- port of supplies only at night, and without lights.
ally wear orange-red brassards, while the members They also order their troops to leave burned out
of the military police are distinguished by metal vehicles standing on the road to attract fresh at-
gorgets. tacks by en~l~y aircraft.
The Germans allot to each front-line division
its own road or sector of advance, usually marked
by advance parties. General Headquarters or any Section IV. OFFENSIVE
other troops directed simultaneously on the sanie
roads, are subordinated to the division for the
I. General
duration of the move. All-weather roads usually
are allotted to motorized or armored divisions, The fundamental principle of German offensive
while subsidiary roads are assigned to infantry doctrine is to encircle and destroy the enemy. The
divisions. objective of the combined arms in attack is to
bring the armored iol-ccs and the infantry into
3. Conduct of the March decisive action against the enemy with sufficient
When a German infantry division advances fire power and shock. Superiority in force and
along several routes, an infantry element normally fire power, the employment of armored forces, as
forms the head of each main body. The com- well as the surprise clement, play a great part in
mander of the main body usually marches at or the offensive.
near the head of the main body. The motorized Coordination between the combined arms under
elements of the division, unless employed on a strong unified command is, the Germans em-
reconnaissance or security missions, are organized phasize, an absolute requisite to the success of
into one or more motor echelons which follow the these shock tactics. This has become more and
march column by bounds, or move in a column more true as the Allies have developed effective
along a separate road. Before the march begins, antitank weapons and have adopted deeper de-
the division signal battalion lays a trunk telephone fenses, limiting the self-sufficiency of German
line as far forward as the situation permits and tanks. To counter these measures, the Germans
extends this line while the march proceeds. The have increased the mobility and armor protection
leading signal unit usually marches with the sup- of their motor-borne infantry, and have mounted
port of the advance guard and establishes tele- a large proportion of both their direct and indi-
phone stations at important points. In a march rect heavy support weapons on self-propelled
along several roads the trunk line normally is laid carriages.
along the route of the division commander and In attempting thoroughly to paralyze the de-
his staff. In addition to the construction of the fender up to the moment of the tank-infantry as-
trunk line, the Germans stress radio communica- sault, the Germans realize that even the most for-
tions to the rear and flanks, as well as the use of midable forces are ncvcr sufficient for overwhelm-
messengers mounted on horses, bicycles, or ing superiority on the entire front. They therefore
motorcycles. select a point of main elfort (SrhWer$u?lKt) for
a breakthrough, allotting narro\v sectors of attack
4. Security of March Columns (Grf~cl~t~~trcifen) to the troops committed at the
As a rule the Germans allot motorized units decisive locality. There they also mass the bulk
for the protection of the flanks and rear of march of their heavy weapons and reserves. The other
columns. However, a smaller unit, such as a bat- sectors of the front are engaged by weaker, diver-
talion, may advance without flank security detach- sionary forces. In selecting the point of main ef-
ments. fort, the Germans consider weaknesses in the
IV—5
I MARCH 1945
UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451
enemy's defensive position; suitability of the ter- all in front, or is attacked in front only by light
rain, especially for tanks and for cooperation of forces, while the main attacking force passes en-
all arms; approach routes; and possibilities for tirely around him, with the objective of maneuver-
supporting fire, especially artillery. Although the ing him out of position. This requires extreme
Germans select a point of main effort in all at- mobility and deception.
tacks, they usually also make plans for shifting
d. FRONTAL ATTACK (Froufnhgriff). The
their main effort if they meet unexpected success
Germans consider the frontal attack the most dif-
elsewhere. To allow such shifts, sufficient reserves
ficult of execution. It strikes the enemy at his
and a strong, unified command are organized.
strongest point, and therefore requires superiority
An attack on a narrow front, according to Ge;- of men and materiel. A frontal attack should be
man doctrine, must have sufficient forces at its made only at a point where the infantry can break
disposal to widen the penetration whild maintain- through into favorable terrain in the depth of the
ing its impetus, and to protect the flanks of the enemy position. The frontage of the attack should
penetration. Once the attack is launched, it must be wider than the actual area (Sclrwerpunkt)
drive straight to its objective, regardless of op- chosen for penetration, in order to tie down the
position. enemy on the flanks of the breakthrough. Ade-
quate reserves must be held ready to counter the
2. Types of Attack employment of the enemy's reserves.
of the attacking force or force% is exposed to missions of the artillery, location of reserves, and
enemy fire. Rending back one wing may give an the time of attack. The order is not drawn up in
opportunity for a flank attack, or for a single or accordance with any stereotyped form, but as a
double envelopment. rule follows this pattern:
f. PENETRATION (Einbruclz) AND BREAK- (1) Estimate of the situation (disposition of
THROUGH (Durchbruch). These are not separate hostile and friendly troops).
forms of attack, but rather the exploitation of a (2) Mission.
successful attack on the enemy's front, wing, or (3) Assembly areas for the forward com-
flank. The penetration destroys the continuity of panies ; objective; sector boundaries; orders for
the hostile front. The broader the penetration, the the continuation of combat reconnaissance.
deeper can the penetration wedge be driven.
(4) Instructions for the preparation of the
Strong reserves throw back enemy counterattacks
heavy-weapons fire support, especially for massed
against the flanks of the penetration. German
fire.
units are trained to exploit a penetration to the
maximum so that it may develop into a complete (5) Orders to the artillery for fire preparation
breakthrough before hostile countermeasures can and coordination.
be launched on an effective scale. The deeper the (6) Assembly areas for the reserves.
attacker penetrates, the more effectively can he (7) Time of attack.
envelop and frustrate the attempts of the enemy
(8) Instructions for rear services (medical
to close his front again by withdrawal to the rear.
service and supplies).
The attacking forces attempt to reduce individual
enemy positions by encircling and isolating them. (9) Location of command posts.
The Germans do not consider a breakthrough (10) Miscellaneous.
successful until they overcome the enemy's artil-
b. SECTORS OF ATTACK. The width of a sec-
lery positions, which usually is the special task
tor assigned to an infantry unit in the attack de-
of tanks. Reserve units roll up the enemy's front
pends on the unit's mission and battle strength,
from the newly created flanks.
on terrain conditions, on the available fire sup-
port of all arms, and on the probable strength
of enemy resistance. Normally the sector assigned
to a platoon is between 165 and 220 yards. A
company attack sector is about 330 to 550 yards.
A battalion sector is 440 to 1,100 yards, while
a division sector may be 4,400 to 5,500 yards.
These sectors also provide the boundaries for
the other arms, especially for the artillery in sup-
port of the infantry, although the artillery may
utilize favorable observation positions in neigh-
boring sectors. This also applies to the heavy
infantry weapons.
For large units the sectors are determined
from the map; for smaller units, from the ter-
rain. These sectors extend as deep into enemy
figure 2.—Breakthrough. territory as the plan of battle may require. As
the situation develops, changes are frequently
The Germans often refer to this maneuver as made. Important points always lie within units'
"Keil und Kessel". sectors, unless they are to be attacked by several
units. The Germans do not consider it necessary
3. Organization of the Attack to occupy the whole width of the sector with
troops. Open flanks ordinarily are not bounded.
a. ATTACK ORDER. The attack order (An-
grifsbefehl) generally contains the objective of c. FIRE PLAN. Fire superiority is achieved
the attack, the disposition of the infantry, unit through coordination of the infantry and artillery
sectors and boundaries, disposition and support weapons. The basis for the fire plan (Feuer-
IV—7
I MARCH 1945 UW,MSlFlED TM-E 30-451
I MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451
plan) is the regulation of the commitment of all tank combat without having superiority in range
weapons. and armament. They have learned that large for-
The fire plan includes the following: mations of tanks cannot achieve a breakthrough,
(1) Assignment of combat missions. opposed by an effective screen of antitank guns,
(2) Distribution of observation sectors and without the assistance of other arms. Therefore
fields of fire for the infantry and the artillery. attention has to be given to the combined tactics
(3) An estimate of capabilities of the artillery of tanks and Panzer Grmadicrs, the mechanized
for effective execution of the combat mission. or motorized infantry who accompany the tanks.
(4) Orders for the commencement of fire and Great emphasis in German offensive theory
fire schedules. is laid on the role of the artillery, but in practice
(5) Orders for the preparation for massed the artillery-support role has devolved to an ever-
fire. increasing degree on the tanks and assault guns.
(6) Instructions for ammunition supply. jevertheless, the principle that the supporting
The Germans stress the coordination of flat fire should be concentrated on a narrow frontage
and high trajectory weapons so that all dead where the tanks and infantry are most likely
spaces are covered by fire. Lack of signal equip- to achieve a breakthrough has been retained.
ment, however, often hinders the application of The fact that a part of the enemy resistance
this principle. is likely to remain undisclosed until the attack
4. Conduct of the Attack has already begun has caused the Germans perma-
nently to decentralize a portion of the field ar-
a. GENERAL. Most of the German successes
tillery. This tendency has led to the emergence
in the present war have been achieved with
and continual development of the assault guns,
armored formations. Years of secret training
whose main function is the close support of in-
and equipping were devoted to the development
fantry and tanks in the attack. Their armor and
of the Panzer division. The original German
mobility allow them to operate much farther for-
Hitzkrieg tactics were based on the belief in the
ward than the field artillery.
irresistible power of tank formations operating in-
dependently with the support of dive-bombers. The tendency to detach field artillery battalions
Considerable modifications have taken place in from their field artillery regiment remains strong.
this theory over the past few years. At the pres- In fact, this tendency is so prevalent that a
ent time, the offensive tactics of the Germans are concentration of massed artillery preceding an
less spectacularly bold than they were in 1939, but attack seldom is achieved, necessitating, as it
the fundamental theory behind them has changed does, a great degree of centralized control. The
remarkably little, though in their armored tactics Germans, however, replace the massed artillery
they stress more tank-infantry coordination Since fire to a large extent with the fire of multi-barreled
unlimited air support is no longer at their com- mortars and rocket projectors, though these latter
mand. have not the accuracy of the former.
The main weight of all major German attacks The Germans make a clear distinction between
since 1939 was borne by the Pa.nzer division. an attack made from movement and an attack
Where infantry divisions have been employed, from a prepared position, which is the more com-
they were limited to local attacks on a compara- mon of the two.
tively minor scale or to mopping up in rear of b. ATTACK BY MECHANIZED AND MOTORIZED
the Panzer divisions. The Germans never en- FORCES. (1) The attack. In armored-force
visaged a full-scale attack by infantry formations operations, the Germans stress the need for the
on fixed defenses. German tactics have been to concentrated employment, at the decisive place
outflank or encircle the main area of the enemy and time, of the entire combined command of
defenses with tank formations and to have the tanks and other arms, less necessary reserves.
infantry roll up the defenses from the rear, or The tanks constitute the striking force of such a
to break frontally through the enemy defenses command and normally advance as the first echelon
with massed tanks and develop the famous ‘Keil of the attack. Their primary mission is to break
und Kessel" maneuver. through and attack the enemy artillery, rather
The Germans learned at heavy cost the futility than to seek out and destroy enemy tanks, which
of charging a hostile antitank defense with tank can be more effectively engaged by antitank units.
concentrations and of engaging in tank-versus- The mission of the other arms is to assist the
IV—9
I MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-45I
4th PLAT
3rd WAVE
< 3 r d WAVE
tanks in their advance, and particularly to elim- with by e lim- wave or which has revived
inate antitank weapons. The smallest combat unit since the first wave passed through.
in such a force of combined arms is the company. A typical attack formation of this type might
The basic formation for the tank platoon, be divided up among the Panzer division's units
company, and battalion are file, double file, wedge, as follows: the first wave, on a frontage of about
and blunt wedge. The type of formation used 2,000 to 3,000 yards, might consist of one tank
for a specific task depends to a large extent on battalion, two companies forward, supported on
terrain conditions and the strength of enemy the flanks by elements of the assault gun bat-
opposition. A German tank platoon normally talion. Close to the rear of the first wave usually
consists of one command tank and two tank follow one or two Panzer Grenadier companies
squads of two tanks each. in armored half-tracks. About 150 yards to the
The tank regiment normally attacks in waves, rear of the first wave moves the second wave,
in either of the following manners: formed of the second tank battalion in the same
formation, closely followed by the remainder of
The tank regiment is echeloned in depth, one
the armored Panzer Grenadiers, who are in turn
tank battalion following the other. The regi-
followed at some distance by the motorized Pan-
mental commander's location is between the two
zer Grenadiers. The flanks are protected by anti-
battalions. This formation has the advantages
tank guns which normally operate by platoons,
of a sufficiently wide front (about 1,100 yards),
moving by bounds. The artillery forward ob-
and close contact by the commander of his units
server travels in his armored vehicles with the
in the conduct of the attack. The normal depth
first wave, while the artillery commander of the
of such a formation is about 3,000 yards. This is
supporting artillery units usually travels with
the usual form of the tank attack. When two
the tank commander. Assault guns normally also
tank battalions are attacking, one behind the other,
accompany the second wave.
it takes them about half an hour to pass their
own infantry. The tanks help each other forward by fire and
movement, medium or heavy tanks taking up
When the two-battalions-abreast formation is
hull-down firing positions and giving covering
employed, it is almost essential that another tank
fire while the faster tanks advance to the next
regiment form the following wave. This forma-
commanding feature. Then the latter give cov-
tion usually has the disadvantage of being too
ering fire to the former moving forward to their
wide. The regimental commander cannot observe
next bound.
his units, and he has no units of his own behind
him which he can commit in a decisive moment. Once the first wave has reached the rear of
The attack normally proceeds in three waves. the enemy's forward defenses, it pushes straight
on to attack the enemy's artillery. As soon as
The first wave thrusts to the enemy's antitank these positions have been neutralized, the tanks
defense and artillery positions. reform beyond the artillery positions and either
The second wave provides covering fire for the prepare to exploit the attack or form an all-
first wave, and then attacks the enemy's infantry round defensive position on suitable ground.
positions, preceded, accompanied, or followed by The tank unit commander, as the leader of
part of the Panzer Grenadiers, who dismount as the strongest unit, is in most cases in command
close as possible to the point where they must of t combat team, and all the other participat-
engage the enemy. The objectives of the second ing arms (Panzer Grcmdirrs, artillery, engineers,
wave are the remaining antitank positions, posi- and antitank units) arc placed under him. The
tions of heavy infantry-support weapons, and ma- m a - realize that a strong and unified com-
chine-gun emplacements which hold up the ad- mand is an essential feature of any military op-
vance of the infantry. fantry. For certain missions, however, tank
The third wave, accompanied by the remainder units are attached to another arm, in which case
of the Panzer Grenadiers, mops up. the tank commander is consulted before the final
These three waves now often are telescoped plans for the operations are made.
into two, the first wave speeding through the (2) Infantry-tank cooperation. When the
enemy's position as far as his gun positions, the enemy has well prepared positions with natural or
second crushing the enemy's forward positions constructed tank obstacles, the German infantry
in detail and mopping up the opposition not dealt attacks before the tanks and clears the way. The
IV—II
I MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451
objective of the infantry is to penetrate into the infantry to the line of departure on tanks or
enemy position and destroy enemy antitank wea- troop-carrying vehicles in order to protect the
pons to the limit of its strength and the fire power infantry and to increase its speed. The infantry
of its own support weapons, augmented by addi- leaves the vehicles at the last possible moment,
tional support and covering fire from the tanks and goes into action mainly with light automatic
and self-propelled weapons sited in their rear. weapons.
Only after the destruction of the enemy anti- The tanks advance by bounds from cover to
tank defense can the tanks be employed on the cover, reconnoitering the terrain ahead and pro-
battle line to the fullest advantage. viding protective fire for the dismounted Panzer
When the tank obstacles in front of the enemy Grenadiers. The tanks do not slow their advance
position already are destroyed, and no additional to enable the infantry to keep continuous pace
tank obstacles are expected in the depth of the with them, but advance alone and wait under
enemy's main defensive position, the infantry cover until the infantry catches up with the ad-
breaks through simultaneously with the tank unit. vance. Terrain that does not offer sufficient
The infantry attack is conducted in the same man- cover is crossed with the greatest possible speed.
ner as it would be without the cooperation of The infantry attacks in small formations also
tanks. Heavy infantry weapons are kept in by bounds under the fire cover of its own heavy
readiness to fire at possible newly discovered anti- weapons and of the tanks, staying away from in-
tank positions. Of particular importance is pro- dividual tanks because they draw the strongest
tection of the open flanks by echeloning the flank enemy fire.
units and employing heavy weapons at the flanks. When a tank company attacks with infantry,
In most cases, the infantry follows the tanks there are normally two platoons on the line, one
closely, taking advantage of the fire power and platoon back, and the fourth platoon in reserve.
paralyzing effect of the tanks upon the enemy's The interval between tanks is usually 100 to 120
defense. The Germans normally transport the yards. The tank's machine guns usually engage
llNFANTRY;
infantry targets at about 1,000 yards range and engineers, assisted by artillery. The normal com-
under, while the tank guns engage targets at 2,000 position of a combat group attacking one bunker
to 2,500 yards. is one platoon of tanks and one platoon of in-
The coordination between tanks and Panzer fantry reinforced by one squad of engineers.
Grenadiers moving into combat on armored half- Before. the combat group is committed against
tracks is similar to the technique employed in a the nemy pillbox, artillery fires high explosives
purely armored formation, since the armored half- a smoke shells at the neighboring pillboxes to
tracks are not only troop-carrying vehicles but Isolate them, shells the terrain between pillboxes,
also combat vehicles. When the terrain is favor- and conducts counterbattery fire. Under the pro-
able for tank warfare, the Panzer Grenadiers in tection of this fire, the combat group advances
their armored half-tracks follow immediately close to the pillbox while other infantry units
with the second wave, after the first tank wave attack the enemy in the terrain between the pill-
has overrun the opponent's position. A deep and boxes.
narrow formation is employed. After the pene- One tank squad covers the advances of the
tration, the main mission of the Panzer Grena- other tank squads and the infantry platoon by
diers is to overcome the enemy positions which direct fire against the pillbox, particularly against
survived the first wave. the observation and weapons' openings. The first
In attacking enemy pillboxes the Germans use tank squad halts under cover whenever possible
combat groups consisting of tanks, infantry, and and covers the advance of the second tank squad.
LEGEND
When the combat group reaches a barbed wire flanks of a tank attack are vulnerable. There-
obstacle surrounding the pillbox, the two tank fore they assign to the artillery and the rocket
squads have different missions. One tank squad projector units the task of protecting flanks by
remains in front of the pillbox, and its tanks are barrages using high explosives and smoke shells.
driven into a position from which they can over- The artillery has the following missions during
look the terrain, and watch out for antitank guns the tank attack:
and machine gun emplacements, while the other Counterbattery fire.
tank squad (the pillbox tank squad) rolls across Blinding enemy observation posts.
the obstacle to enable the infantry and engineers As the attack progresses, engaging successive
to get close to the pillbox. The pillbox tank lines of antitank defense, especially areas to the
squad then fires on the pillbox at close range. rear and flanks of the sector attacked.
The infantry squad meanwhile takes the sur- Screening the flanks of the attack with smoke
rounding terrain and covers the engineers who and neutralizing the enemy's infantry and rear
blast the entrance of the pillbox with T N T . areas.
(3) Artillery-tank coordination. Artillery sup- Delaying the movement and deployment of
port is of decisive importance for the prepara- enemy reserves, particularly tanks.
tion and the successful conduct of a tank attack. The Germans stress that this wide variety of
A unified command for the entire artillery con- tasks must not lead to the wholesale dispersal of
trols the artillery fire as long as the infantry and effort. The main task of the artillery is at all
tank units are fighting on the same line. When times the destruction of the enemy's antitank
the tanks break through the enemy forward de- weapons, tanks, and artillery.
fense lines, the self-propelled artillery or any
Liaison between artillery and tanks during the
other artillery battalion designated for the sup-
attack is established by the commanding officers
port of the tank unit is placed under the command
and the artillery liaison group, which normally
of the tank unit commander. moves with the first wave. Artillery forward ob-
The Germans believe that the artillery fire servers, if possible in armored observation posts,
must not check the momentum of the attack. ride with the most forward elements. A German
Consequently the heaviest fire must fall well field expedient is for the tank unit to take along
ahead of the tanks or outside their sector. a forward observer in one of its tanks. It often
The mission of the artillery preparation before happens that the tankman himself has to take
the attack is to destroy, or at least to neutralize, over the observation for the artillery. He him-
the opponent's antitank defense in the area be- self can request artillery fire and shift concen-
tween the line of contact and the regimental re- trations when the situation requires such changes.
serve line. Continuous counterbattery fire pre- Figure 10 represents a map with superimposed
vents the enemy from shelling the tank assembly coordinate system and artillery reference points
area and from breaking up the preparation of used by tank commanders to help them in this
the tank attack. tack.
The artillery has the following missions before
c. T H E INFANTRY DIVISION IN THE ATTACK.
the tank attack:
(1) General principles for employment. Ger-
Counterbattery fire on enemy artillery located man teaching envisages infantry divisions being
in positions which command the ground over employed to make a penetration in the enemy
which the tank attack is to be made. defensive positions through which armored and
Concentrations on enemy tanks in assembly mechanized formations can pass. During the
areas. course of this war, however, no major attack has
Harassing fire on all areas in which the anti- been carried out by infantry divisions without the
tank units are located or suspected. Fire is support of Panzer divisions. In fact, more ma-
heaviest on areas in which tanks cannot operate jor attacks have been carried out by Panzer divi-
but from which they can be engaged effectiveIy. sions, with only a minimum of ordinary infantry
Adjusting fire with high explosives on probable elements. Infantry divisions have been emPloyed
enemy observation posts commanding the sector almost entirely in a role of consolidation, follow-
to be attacked. These observation posts are ing up the armored and mechanized formations,
blinded with smoke as soon as the attack begins. systematically eliminating centers of resistance
Experience has taught the Germans that the by-passed by tdc latter, or csploiting the latter's
IV—14
I MARCH 1945
UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-45I
1
Figure S.—Map with superimposed coordirrtrtc system and ctrti//rry rrfcrelkcc poirkIs used by tan& co?kmmdcrs.
IV—15
I MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451
success by mopping up demoralized enemy de- procedure may go down to companies if a high
fenses to the flanks of the armored break- state of preparedness is necessary. Features of
through—in short, consolidating and holding the the first stage of deployment are as follows:
ground won by the mechanized formations. Companies retain their combat vehicles until
In view of the unspectacular role allotted to their weapons and equipment arrive at the off-
the infantry division it is difficult to give informa- carrier position, which is located as far forward
tion about other than minor infantry tactics, such as the situation permits.
as attacks on a small scale. The Germans often place only one company
(2) Preparation for the attack. The method forward, the main strength of the battalion be-
of forming up for an infantry assault on a pre- ing kept under control of the battalion commander
pared position is similar to that employed by the as long as possible so that he may employ it in
Panzer division. While the infantry is in as- the most advantageous direction for attack.
sembly positions, the artillery makes all prepara- If the condition of the terrain and enemy fire
tions for the support of the attack. It draws cause a change of intervals between units, the
out hostile artillery fire and executes counterbat- normal intervals are resumed as soon as possible.
tery fire against known enemy batteries. Large Support weapons are used to cover the "shak-
troop concentrations and especially-important tar- ing out" phase of deployment and the subsequent
gets are' taken under fire at great ranges. In advance, the weapons being kept within the march
order not to betray their full strength and in- column between the companies or behind the bat-
tentions, the Germans withhold a portion of their talion.
batteries from these missions. They also try to
After the first stage of deployment has been
deceive the enemy as to their intentions by cover-
carried out, the leading elements of the battalion
ing other sectors simultaneously with fire. When
may be ordered to seize important tactical
possible, preparation for an attack is avoided
features.
during the day in order to prevent Allied obser-
vation. Occasionally, to obtain a success by sur- When deploying by night or in woods, a care-
prise, the Germans launch attacks without artil- ful reconnaissance is made, routes are marked,
lery preparation. Surprise attacks also are and strong protection is placed forward. Inter-
launched under cover of darkness or fog. a re units are shorter.
After the first stage of deployment has been
The, Germans normally occupy their line of
completed, the battalion commander marches with
departure by means of infiltration in order to
the leading elements and normally will send
avoid losses. Their orders direct what actions
reconnaissance patrols ahead or reconnoiter the
have to be taken when companies run into enemy
enemy position himself. The commanders of
defenses; when enemy fire is opened from the
support weapons accompany him, reconnoitering
flank; when an enemy counterattack is launched;
for firing positions.
when objectives are reached; when companies ap-
pear to be getting dispersed; when part of a com- (b) Second stage. The second stage (Figure
pany pushes too far ahead of neighboring units -IO>, called Entzuicklung (development), is de-
or is held up. ployment in detail, which is the final action of the
The heavy machine guns of the rearward com- company extending itself down to platoons and
pany and some of the mortars and heavy mortars squads. Features of the second stage of deploy-
are assigned to deal with enemy flanking fire. ment are as follows:
The commander of the heavy company is nor- The companies deploy in depth as soon as
mally at the battalion headquarters, from which they come within range of artillery fire. An
he can control the fire of the infantry heavy sup- advance in columns of files is considered desir-
port weapons. able because it affords a small target and the com-
(3) Deployment. (a) First stage. The Ger- pany is easier to control, but before adopting
mans carry out deployment in two stages. They this formation the danger of enfilade fire is
call the first stage Entfaltung or "shaking out", weighed.
which is equivalent to the development of a march If enemy fire and difficult terrain necessitate
column according to U. S. procedure. In the further deployment, the companies disperse in
first stage (Figzrre 9), an infantry regiment nor- depth by sections. Reserves and support weapons
mally deploys down to battalions, although the also adopt open formations, but they remain
IV—17
I MARCH 1945 UNCLA'SSIFIED TM-E 30-451
far enough behind to avoid coming under the fire reason of proximity of the assault detachment to
directed at the leading elements. the artillery's danger zone, the former cannot be
When the rifle companies are deployed, they protected by covering fire, the smoke party may
exploit all possible cover as they advance, em- lay a smoke screen. The obstacle-clearing party
ploying column-of-file formations with irregular then cuts one or more lanes through the wire,
distances, The leading elements are not ex- using wire cutters or bangalore torpedoes. The
tended until they are to engage in a fire fight. embrasure-blasting party passes through and at-
The elements that follow continue advancing in tacks the embrasures. Flame throwers, if em-
file. ployed, are not intended by themselves to cause
In determining when to deploy, the Germans the surrender of the position, but to cover the ad-
take into consideration additional physical strain vance of the embrasure-blasting party with its
placed on men when they march cross-country. explosive charges which are considered the de-
cisive weapon.
(4) Technique of attack. The infantry attack
on prepared positions is made in the same se- Antitank guns may be used to give close sup-
quence as that of the Panzer division, namely port to the embrasure-blasting party, being man-
penetration, breakthrough, exploitation by the re- handled from cover to cover. They will attack
serves. In the infantry attack, however, the first the embrasure, with armor-piercing ammunition
phase is a series of local attacks by so-called as- and also give protection against possible tank-
sault detachments (Stosstrupps) with the aim supported counterattacks.
of overcoming key points in the enemy defenses, It is probable that several such operations
so that wedges into the enemy's forward positions will be in progress on any one sector at any one
can be established from which the attack can be time before an attack, in the first place to probe
driven forward into the depth of the enemy po- for weak spots, and in the second place to keep
sition, or rolling up the positions on either flank the enemy in uncertainty as to the final point of
of the wedge. main effort of the attack. German feint attacks
Assault detachments normally are composed of have often been delivered in such strength or with
infantry with engineers attached. A typical as- such violence as to be indistinguishable from the
sault detachment consists of the following: one main attack.
officer; obstacle clearing party, consisting of Once a wedge has been firmly established in
two to six men for each lane to be cleared, the enemy positions, the second phase of the at-
equipped with small arms, wire-cutters, and ban- tack begins. Troops so far held in their assembly
galore torpedoes and other explosives ; embrasure- area, or slowly making headway under cover of
blasting party consisting of three or four men the artillery fire supporting the first phase of the
equipped with grenades and demolition or pole attack, advance to cut the enemy position in two
charges. This party may also include, though it and to roll up the positions flanking the wedge.
may work independently, a flame-thrower party, Because the Germans anticipate enemy de-
consisting normally of two men; covering parties, fenses organized in depth, and because these are
normally two or three parties of varying size from unlikely to be fully disclosed until after the be-
three men with one light machine gun to full ginning of the attack, they do not make detailed
platoons; smoke party consisting of two or three plans for close-support covering fire, which would
men equipped with smoke candles or grenades; be hard to work out in advance, but tend to de-
supply party, carrying reserves of equipment and centralize their support weapons and artillery for
ammunition, their strength depending on the size the second phase of the assault, in which rein-
of the assault detachment. forced battalions, companies, or platoons fight
Attacks most often are made at dawn, and their own way forward, independently of their
are preceded normally by heavy artillery prepara- flanking units, until they have gained their final
tion, one purpose of which is to make shell holes objective.
which afford cover for the a:!vancing assault de- Attack on lightly defended positions is more
tachments as they move forward. When the latter similar to the conduct of the attack by the Panzer
reach the wire obstacles surrounding the enemy division. The first phase is likely to be a de-
position, Very signals are fired, calling for avaiI- ployed attack on a two-regiment front, the third
able artillery fire to be brought on the position regiment in reserve.
to seal it off from flanking positions. If, by The Germans believe that in the advance ex-
IV—l8
I MARCH 1945
UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451
tended formation of units is advantageous because artillery in general support (L!llgcpm+ze Untrr-
it forces the enemy to scatter his fire. stiitzulig) or in direct support (Unmittelbare Un-
To counteract the overwhelming Allied superi- t L ’miitzung j , in the same manner as the U. S.
ority in artillery and planes which frequently Army. The Germans consider the battalion as
knock out the attack before it is under way, the the firing unit. Splitting up an artillery battalion
Germans have been known to use the following into batteries and placing batteries under an in-
method. Small groups of less than platoon size fantry battalion is the exception justified only
infiltrate mainly at night over a period of three when the infantry battalion has an independent
to four days into the hostile battle position or at mission (for example, flank protection) or when
least well behind the advanced positions. During the terrain does not permit unified fire control by
the day the infiltrated groups conceal themselves, artillery battalion commanders. Single commit-
but if caught pass themselves off as ordinary ment of guns is against German tactical doctrine.
patrols to avoid raising suspicion. When the Various recent reports, however, describe devi-
actual attack is launched these units try to give ations from the prescribed practice. Normally the
the impression that the defender is surrounded Germans do not employ single field artillery
and often cause great confusion. pieces for direct fire, as, for instance, the Rus-
When the Germans go over from the attack to sians do. But much use is made-of roving guns
the defense, even if only temporarily, they con- (Arbeitsgeschiitz), and of guns firing from alter-
centrate the supporting weapons around the com- nate positions to make identification more diffi-
mander of the unit that is to be supported, so cult. Standing German orders call for the prep-
that he can control the fire plan. aration of alternate firing positions, which, how-
ever, are used now only in cases of very he&y
(5) Infantry-assault gun coordination. The
counterbattery fire, as the gasoline shortage keeps
assault guns are ,organized in assault gun bat-
all b a t - to a minimum. The Germans often
talions and are under the control of the division
designate the number two piece as the roving
commander.
gun, and, unlike the other pieces, it normally is
The Germans regard their self-propelled assault
not dug in. It frequently changes its position,
guns as decisive weapons to be employed par-
which is about 250 to 300 yards from the rest of
ticularly at the point of main effort. In coopera-
the battery.
tion with infantry they facilitate the penetration
and breakthrough. These weapons, the Germans The German artillery often engages a target
believe, complement artillery fire by their ability from a lateral position. This deception, particu-
to follow the infantry right up to an objective. larly identified with longer range weapons, is
Their use for small actions before an attack -is extended by employing another gun, often of
forbidden so as .not to betray their presence. lighter caliber, in a carefully coordinated attack
Surprise is sought by bringing them into position on the same target. Flash simulators alsc in-
by night and camouflaging their assembly area. crease the difficulty of visual location ‘of active
Used primarily to neutralize enemy support guns.
weapons at short ranges over open sights, assault The first step to obtain infantry-artillery co-
guns are preferably employed in concentrations; w e a p o n s is taken in the attack order and is
to employ them singly or in comparatively small assured by direct contact between the command-
number is frowned upon by the Germans. ers, artillery liaison units (Artillerieverbindungs-
German assault guns advance with or just be- Ko~~~z~ndo), and direct contact between artillery
hind the infantry; they never go ahead of the observers and infantry units.
infantry. When an objective is reached, the as- The Germans also employ forward observers
sault guns do not remain with the infantry while (Vorgeschobene Beobachtcr), who have the same
the position is being consolidated but retire about task as their U;. S. counterpart.
1,000 yards to await further assignment. The signal equipment necessary for communi-
In close combat the assault guns are rather cation between units, liaison units, and observers
helpless and therefore it is the task of the in- is only partly organic. The Germans keep most
fantry to keep the enemy away from the assault of the signal equipment centralized in the divi-
guns. Newly-organized assault-gun escort bat- sion signal battalion, which allots equipment as
teries have the same task. needed ta sk. various units.
(6) Artiller3f. The Germans employ their field In the attack the greater part of the artillery
IV—19
I MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451
supports the main effort. The remainder of the a stand. Combat aviation bombs routes of re-
artillery is assigned the, mission of flank protection treat and strafes the hostile forces in direct sup-
against possible enemy counterattacks. port of the ground attack. Combat engineers re-
pair damaged roads, facilitating the continuous
5. Meeting Engagement (Begegnungsgefecht) flow of supply and troops.
In the meeting engagement the Germans believe Pursuit, after a successful breakthrough, is
that the advantage lies with the side which SUC- regarded by the Germans as a ideal s for
ceeds first in making effective preparation for the the Panzer division. Panzer Grenadiers in arm-
attack ayd thereby deprives the enemy of his free- ored half-tracks or in unarmored vehicles and
dom of action. When both adversaries attack tanks supplement each other in in the
immediately from march columns, the decisive enemy. During the advance on roads, the tanks
factors are the initiative of the junior officers and form the point. However, through wooded areas
the efficiency of the troops. The senior com- or larger villages the Pmrzw Grenadiers take
mander quickly coordinates the functions of the over the point. Tanks and Panzer Grenadiers
various officers, while the advance guard secures stay close together so that either, according to
for him freedom of action and the opportunity the situation, can be committed as soon as enemy
for a speedy deployment of his troops. resistance is encountered. Tanks are normally
not used in units of less than company strength.
6. Pursuit
U. S. and German tactical doctrines on pursuit
Section V. DEFENSIVE
are very much alike. Pursuit begins when the
enemy is no longer able to maintain his position
and abandons the combat area with the bulk of his I. General
forces. The object of the pursuit is the complete Jn German doctrine the object of the defense
annihilation of the retreating or routed enemy. (Vdrteidigung, or Abwehr) is to halt the hostile
Effective pursuit requires great initiative from attack, or to gain time pending development of a
commanders of all echelons of command, who more favorable situation for resumption of the
must not hesitate to start pursuit immediately, offensive. Thus German and U. S. doctrine are
even when their troops are exhausted. The essentially the same: only the offensive leads to
enemy must be given no time to pause to re- decisive successes.
organize his forces and reconstitute his defense. In the last two years German defensive oper-
The pursuit is conducted on a broad front by ations have become increasingly passive in nature.
means of fire and movement. When making for The Germans formerly placed the greatest stress
distant objectives every effort is made to get on immediate and violent counterattacks as ef-
around the enemy's flanks and effect a surprise fective means of destroying the attacking enemy.
attack in his rear. However, care must be This required great mobility and large reserves.
taken that enemy attack on one's own flank does At present more emphasis is placed on the con-
not cause deflection from the original direction. struction of defensive positions, and counterat-
Fast-moving troops are used in the pursuit. tacks are frequently local in character. It is most
These troops often are organized into pursuit or likely that this passive type of defense is only an
advance sections. The infantry scatters the expedient due to German shortages of mobile
enemy and by-passes resisting enemy strongpoints, equipment and manpower.
leaving their destruction to units following in
the rear. Part of the artillery places concentra- 2. Organization for Defense
tions at the avenues of retreat, while the re- a. GENERAL. The Germans attempt to break a
mainder displaces forward in echelon, providing hostile attack in front of the main line of resist-
continuous support for the units in. front. The ance (Hauptkampflinie), at the forward limit of
Germans emphasize that a pursuit without the the battle position (Hauptkampffeld), or to force
necessary artillery support may lead to disaster. the enemy to abandon his attack.
Assault guns travel well forward with the rapidly As in U. S. practice, the commander usually
advancing infantry, their comparatively heavy determines from the map the main battlefield and
armament enabling them to crush quickly and assigns a general line as guide for the location of
decisively any enemy forces attempting to make the main line of resistance, to ensure continuity
IV—20
I MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIED IM-E 30-451
of the defensive position. Lower echelon com- location, which depends upon the terrain, is al-
manders fix the main line of resistance on the ways within range of friendly light artillery.
ground, since only on the terrain, after thorough German -outpost positions are occupied in
reconnaissance, can the details of the defense be strength varying from platoons to companies, de-
decided. A recent official German directive states, pending upon the mission, terrain, width of the
however, that reconnaissance must not delay the the and the number of troops available. Often
construction of defensive positions. they are only weakly occupied as long as the ad-
Organization of the defensive position follows vanced positions are in front of them. Ordinarily
a conventional pattern and includes an advanced outposts are established by infantry units drawn
position (Vorgeschobene Stellung), and an out- from the main battle position, supported by the
post position (Gefechtsvorposten), both of which fire of close-support weapons, such as mortars
usually are under immediate command of the area and infantry guns. Antitank guns often are at-
commander. A reserve position may also be pro- tached to these outpost units to repel hostile arm-
ander. ored r o - units. The main weapon,
however, is the light machine gun which opens fire
The width and depth of a German defense area
at ranges of about 1,300 yards, while riflemen
depend upon the terrain and the proportional
commence fire at about 850 yards.
strength of friendly and hostile forces. In gen-
eral, however, the width of a defensive sector Firing positions are selected by the Germans
assigned to a unit is approximately twice the to facilitate unobserved withdrawal of the out-
width of the sector when the same unit attacks. posts to the main battle position when hostile
Normal sectors are: platoon, 220 to 550 yards; pressure becomes too strong. Several alternate
company, 440 to 1,100 yards; battalion, 880 to positions are prepared for each weapon, and shifts
2,200 yards; regiment, 2,200 to 3,300 yards; divi- are made by day and night to make it difficult
sion, 6,600 to 11,000 yards. for the opponent to detect and dislodge the out-
post troops. Positions normally are selected at
b. ADVANCED POSITION. The Germans or- the edges of woods, villages, hedgerows, or hills.
ganize the advanced position 5,000 to 7,000 yards A good field of fire is considered mandatory, and
in front of the main line of resistance, within the the organization of firing positions is simple.
range of their medium artillery. A position is Numerous dummy positions are constructed, in-
selected which will prevent seizure by the enemy cluding knee-deep trenches filled with leaves to
of important terrain features, provide good obser- simulate depth and occupancy. During the day,
vation points for friendly artillery, and, if pos- positions are manned by guards; at night, ad-
sible, deceive the enemy as to the location of the vanced listening posts, particularly alert at dusk
main line of resistance. Troops manning these and dawn, warn the troops of the enemy's ap-
positions attempt to make the enemy deploy his proach. Small, prepared attacks with limited ob-
forces prematurely and, if possible, in the wrong jectives under the protection of the outposts are
direction. utilized to interfere with the hostile preparations
The forces in the advanced position are usually and secure information.
reconnaissance detachments, which include ma- Withdrawal of the outposts is conducted so
chine-gun, armored-car, and antitank-gun units, as not to hinder the fire of the main battle posi-
the fire power and mobility of which make them tion. After the outposts are abandoned, they are
suitable for this type of employment. In general likely to be covered by carefully registered fire
they occupy important features, such as railroads, of heavy weapons in order to prevent their occu-
river crossings, cross-roads, and commanding pation by the enemy.
ground. Forces in advanced positions are not ex-
d. M A I N L I N E OF RESISTANCE. The Germans
pected to hold at all cost; in the face of superior
organize their battle position in depth, with in-
enemy fire they retire along predetermined routes
dividual strongpoints connected to form an unin-
under over of their medium artillery.
terrupted belt. The strongpoints, constructed for
c. OUTPOST POSITIONS. Outpost positions nor- all-around defense, and surrounded by barbed-
mally are established 2,000 to 5,000 yards in front wire obstacles and mine belts, contain one or
of the main line of resistance. When the fronts more heavy weapons supplemented by machine
are stabilized, the outpost position is the only posi- guns, mortars, and riflemen. The smallest strong-
tion forward of the main line of resistance. The point is occupied by a reinforced squad. Squad
IV—21
I MARCH 1945
UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-45I
+ 0+
strongpoints normally are incorporated ‘into pla- dugouts, foxhoIes, and antitank positions. They
toon strongpoints, and the latter into company clear fields of fire by careful cutting of under-
strongpoints, etc. brush but try to avoid cutting down trees in order
The Germans make the maximum use of re- to preserve concealment of the position. The
verse slopes in their defensive positions. For- underbrush is left in front of the position as far
ward-slope positions are usually avoided as they as 1 to 3 yards. They organize observation posts
are detected too early by the enemy and are likely for artillery and heavy infantry weapons, increase
to be destroyed by massed fire. Since organiza- the depth of the battle position, dig communica-
tion of a position in woods requires much time tion trenches and emplacements for the heavy
and labor, and strong occupation is requisite to infantry weapons, and build command posts.
compensate for poor observation, the Germans Finally, they construct emplacements for the artil-
also avoid woods when time is short and labor lery, dig antitank ditches within the battle posi-
scarce. Battle positions are laid out so that tion, and build dummy positions.
woods are neither in, nor directly in front or in The Germans insist on thorough camouflage.
rear of, defense installations. The Germans - be- Whenever practicable, trenches and wire obstacles
lieve, however, that when it is possible to estab- are placed along natural terrain lines such as rows
lish a well prepared position in a woods, a posi- of brush or edges of fields. Trenches are dug
tion so located offers the same advantages as a zig-zag at obtuse angles, 330 to 660 yards long,
reverse slope. depending on the terrain. Machine-guns are em-
When the Germans decide to construct defen- placed in trenches 1 to 3 yards in length. To
sive positions on terrain divided by a stream, they avoid silhouettes, the Germans heap more earth
organize bridgeheads on the bank on the hostile behind the trenches than in front. Dugouts for
side where the terrain facilitates crossings. Where riflemen and for machine-gun positions normally
the river forms a re-entrant bend into enemy-held provide sufficient protection against enemy artil-
terrain, a second position is constructed at the lery and mortar fire. Whenever possible, three
base of the bend. On narrow rivers and creeks, layers of logs and earth are used as cover.
the entire German main line of resistance is on e. RESERVE POSITION. Occasionally a reserve
the hostile side of the river, and the stream be- position is organized and troops in the main battle
comes the tank obstacle of the position. (See position retire to it, but only under heavy pres-
antimechanized defense.) When the friendly sure. This reserve position is constructed far
side of the river consists of swampland, it is used enough to the rear to compel hostile artillery to
as an obstacle, and the hostile bank is not included displace forward in order to bring it under fire.
in the defense system. Motorized reserve units normally are kept there
The Germans endeavor to provide all parts of for counterattacks which are planned in advance.
their position with strong support from artillery f. ANTIMECHANIZED DEFENSE. In construct-
and heavy infantry weapons. A detailed fire plan ing a defensive position the Germans stress con-
is prepared in advance by the infantry and co- struction of obstacles and antitank defenses. If
ordinated with the artillery plan. Provision is possible they select tank-proof terrain, and natural
made for fire in front of the forward limit of the tank obstacles, such as steep slopes, are improved.
battle position, which is partly protected by mine- Very steep forward slopes are made at least 8
fields and other obstacles. Alternate positions are yards deep, while uphill slopes are made 2 to 3
dug so that support weapons may be shifted and yards high. Originally the Germans constructed
fired rapidly. The mass of the artillery lays con- antitank ditches well forward of the main line
centrated fire both close to and well in front of of resistance, but experience taught them that
the main line of resistance, and is sited to cover such ditches offered favorable jumping-off posi-
the spaces between the effective fire zones of tions for hostile infantry and also revealed the
front-line units. location of the main line of resistance. At the
The Germans in general adhere to the principle present time, therefore, antitank ditches normally
of "effect before cover" in determining priorities are dug in the area between the main line of re-
for constructing the various installations in a de- sistance and the artillery positions. They are
fense position. First they build combat trenches; built in an uninterrupted line to avoid leaving
erect infantry obstacles such as barbed-wire passages that can be exploited by the enemy.
fences; and construct machine-gun positions, All crossings essential to assure the maneuver-
IV—23
UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451
I MARCH 1945
ability of friendly troop: are built, so that they blinding their own antitank gunners, and leading
can be blown up on the shortest notice. hostile tanks not only are left without adequate
The Germans are aware that obstacles of any support but are silhouetted against the smoke.
kind are effective only when covered by fire from The Germans also rely on the smoke being sucked
various weapons. Consequently, there usually into the tanks and forcing the crews to dismount.
are trenches behind the antitank ditches from
3. Conduct of the Defense
which machine-gun and antitank-gun fire can
cover the entire length of the tank obstacle. German defense of a position, whether hastily
The Germans learned that dense minefields in prepared or complete in all details, is conducted
front of their positions were an inadequate tank on the same principles. Unless they are com-
obstacle, because the enemy usually neutralized pelled by manpower and materiel shortages to rely
them by massed artillery fire or by concentrated on the strength of their positions, the Germans
air bombardment before launching a large-scale prefer heavy concentrations of fire and powerful,
attack. Now German minefields normally are coordinated counterattacks by mobile reserves of
laid within the main battle position, and only all arms. They apply the principle of selecting
single mines are dispersed in pattern at wide in- a point of main effort (Schwcrpunkt) to the de-
tervals in front of the main line of resistance. fense as well as to the attack. This principle
Particular stress is placed on the mining of roads. necessarily is applied in reverse order in the
Routes of withdrawal which have to be left open defensive, the main effort being made opposite the
are prepared for mining, and, if time does not point where the enemy is making his main attack.
permit placing of actual mines, dummy mines are German artillery attempts to disrupt a hostile
installed. attack before it reaches the defensive positions.
The Germans employ many kinds of tank ob- The Germans state that it is invaluable to install
stacles. They recently have used static flame observation posts simultaneously in the main line
throwers dug into the ground. Usually sited in • of resistance, in the advanced position, and in the
pairs and in conjunction with other tank obstacles, immediate vicinity of the gun position. Thus
they are fired by well concealed personnel as soon they try to keep a hostile force constantly under
as hostile tanks come within range. observation and fire even when it achieves a
penetration. The artillery regiment commander
German antitank guns are disposed in depth,
controls the fire as long as possible, although re-
with some well forward. They often are dug in
quests for artillery barrages may be made by unit
and carefully concealed to prevent the enemy
commanders as low as platoon leaders. Capabili-
from discovering the location and strength of the
ties of German heavy mortars, which like all
antitank defenses prior to attack. In emplacing
other support weapons usually are sited on re-
antitank guns, the Germans prefer positions in
verse slopes, are exploited, with a present trend
enfilade or on reverse slopes. They normally em-
toward mortar-fire concentration.
ploy two to three antitank guns in each position,
protecting them from infantry attacks with light When a part of the battle position is lost, the
machine guns. Ranges at which the Germans area is taken under artillery fire to annihilate
open fire upon hostile tanks vary according to the enemy forces which have penetrated it. The
caliber of the gun and its position. Although Germans normally organize reserve units, even
single antitank guns sometimes engage enemy when only relatively few troops are available.
tanks at ranges up to 1,000 yards, main antitank Immediate local counterthrusts by infantry ele-
defenses usually hold their fire until the range is ments and support weapons near the penetration
reduced to about 150 to 300 yards. The employ- endeavor to hurl back the enemy before he has
ment of close-combat antitank teams supplements an opportunity to establish himself. These small
the antitank defense. When the hostile tank at- counterthrusts, which normally closely follow the
tack is repulsed, the antitank guns move to alter- artillery fire, preferably are directed at the flanks
nate positions. of the penetrations.
The Germans emphasize that the use of smoke When the enemy succeeds in making a large
can be of great assistance in defeating enemy tank penetration or breakthrough, the German higher
attacks. Smoke shells are fired into the attacking echelon commander decides whether a general
formation about one-third the distance back from counterattack should be launched to restore the
the leading echelon. Thus the Germans avoid position or whether the main battle position
IV—-25
I MARCH 1945
UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30.451
should be reestablished farther to the rear. The windows opened so as not to disclose those from
counterattack is directed against the hostile flank, which fire is maintained. Kooms are darkened,
where possible, and is prepared thoroughly. As- and passages are cut in the walls between build-
sembly area, time, objective, zone, artillery sup- ings. To avoid detection, the & m a n s fire from
port, and employment of tanks, self-propelled the middle of the rooms, and frequently change
artillery, assault guns, and air units are controlled their positions, while communication is maintained
by one commander. through cellars and over roofs. Machine guns
German antiaircraft defense, which is unable to are sited low, usually in basements. to provide bet-
give adequate protection everywhere because of ter grazing fire. Chimneys and cornices are used
Allied air supremacy, is concentrated at impor- as cover for men on roofs; tiles may be removed
tant points. The main mission of the light and to provide loopholes. Searchlights are mounted
medium antiaircraft artillery is the protection of to illuminate fields of fire; in their absence vehicle
roads. Accuracy of Allied air reconnaissance headlights may be used as substitutes. When
compels the German antiaircraft artillery to houses collapse, the defense is carried on from
change positions from day to day, the changeover cellars, and rubble heaps of destroyed areas are
being made during the night. The Germans also organized into strongpoints.
enforce a preliminary two-hour fire silence in the Tanks are considered to be ineffective within
new position to try to trap enemy fighter-bombers. a defended town, although the Germans have used
Searchlights often are placed parallel to a pro- them in static, dug-in positions at cross-roads and
tected road to prevent enemy aircraft from illumi- squares. As a result of their experiences on the
nating the road by flares. This is particularly Eastern Front, the Germans believe single tanks
important since the Germans normally bring for- are too vulnerable to Moloto\- cocktails, magnetic
ward their relief troops, rations, and ammunition mines, and explosive charges;. When the Ger-
during the night. mans themselves use these antitank weapons, they
employ them from foxholes dug outside the peri-
4. Defense of Towns
me&- of the town. Efforts arc made to destroy
enemy tanks inimobilized by antitank action,
The Germans regard towns and villages as ex- either within or outside the town, in order to pre-
cellent strongpoints, particularly if the buildings vent their recovery or use as artillery observa-
are of masonry. Towns also are regarded as tion posts and machine-gun nests. Antipersonnel
excellent antitank positions because of the con- mines are interspersed in antitank minefields be-
siderable infantry-artillery effort necessary to cause the attacking infantry are considered the
neutralize them. chief menace.
In defending a, town or village, the G&-mans Assault guns may provide direct defensive sup-
locate their main line of resistance well within port fire if attacking forces break through and
the built-up portion; the edges of the town, which disorganize the German position. To secure the
provide easy targets for artillery fire, are believed added protection afforded by masonry walls, the
to be too vulnerable. The main line of resistance Germans may locate assault guns or tanks within
is laid out irregularly in order to develop flanking buildings and use them against hostile armored
fire, and every effort is made to conceal its loca- vehicles and infantry. Counterattacks. supported
tion until the last possible moment. Minor by assault guns or tanks, will not be withheld until
strongpoints are maintained forward of the line in the situation has become desperate; indeed, sur-
order to break up attacks and provide additional prise counterattacks may be launched at any time.
flanking fire. Cul-de-sacs are organized and at- For the defense of village strongpoints special
tempts made to trap attacking forces in them for battle commandants (Karnpfkolllrllalldanten) arc
destruction by counterattacking mobile reserves. appointed. The battle commandant is usually the
These reserves are kept in readiness within senior officer and the tactical commander of all
the town itself, but other reserve forces are military forces, emergency units, and civil organi-
held outside the town to prevent hostile flanking zations in his area. He has the disciplinary power
maneuvers. of a regimental commander.
Both occupied and unoccupied buildings are In the case of fairly small villages, consolida-
booby-trapped in organizing the defended posi- tion of the place itself is usually deemed suf-
tions. Entrances to buildings are blocked, and all ficient. For Iarger localities an outer defense
IV—26
3
GO
GO
system is constructed in addition to the inner mans employ emergency units, organized from
defenses. personnel of Army, Navy, and Air Force in town
The inner defense system consists of a num- defense. Besides these regularly organized emerg-
ber of concentric positions which are broken down ency units, improvised emergency units are
into perimeter positions, intermediate positions, formed from stragglers, remnants of formations,
and the inner ring position. The inner defense and units in process of reorganization. Utiliza-
system is divided into sectors, each forming a tion of emergency units is only temporary. Their
strongpoint system in itself, with the strongpoints main tasks, of local nature, are protection of head-
protected by all-around antitank and infantry ob- quarters, supply points, airfields, etc., and garri-
stacles and connected with each other by trenches. son service in fortifications.
The perimeter ring .pasition is the most impor- 5. Doctrine of Westwall System
tant part of the inner defenses and consists of The Germans consider economy of force the
one or more continuous trench systems, each with fundamental principle in planning zones of perma-
a deep main battle zone. The forward edge often nent fortifications. They originally built the West-
is beyond the outskirts of the village, unless this wall as a protective barrier along the French
creates unfavorable conditions for the antitank frontier to permit commitment of maximum
defense, in which case it is within the village itself. forces offensively in the East. Thus, in 1939,
Artillery and heavy support weapons are em- they were able to hold in the West with approxi-
ployed as whole units in support of the perimeter mately 20 divisions, while employing 40 to 50
ring position, although single guns may be de- divisions against Poland.
tached for the defense of strongpoints and roads.
When Westwall construction ceased in 1940,
The nearer the fighting approaches the inner ring,
German strategy in the West was offensive, en-
the more likely it will be that the Germans will
visioning an invasion of France by a wide envel-
split up the support weapons units for close co-
opment, with the bulk of the German forces in
operation with infantry assault groups.
the ‘North, where the Westwall defenses were
The outer defense system likewise consists of relatively weak. The pivot of maneuver was
a number of concentric positions, approximately south of the Moselle River, where the Westwall
4 to 6 miles apart, so as to force the enemy artil- defenses were strongest.
lery to displace to engage each one. For defense The Germans never have discarded the prin-
of larger towns the Germans organize the outside ciple that offensive action is the best protection.
ring about 1 2 5 to 18% miles beyond the out- When their armies were forced back to the West-
skirts whenever feasible. Beyond this outside wall in 1944, they used this defensive system
defense ring, about 2,200 yards forward, are the as a base for offensive operations in selected
advanced positions, with covering units still areas, as in the Saar and the Eifel. Advantage
further forward on main roads and railways. also was taken of this protected zone for the free
Patrols of all types, including motorized and lateral movement of troops; shelters were utilized
cyclist patrols, give early warning of the enemy's for the cover and concealment of reserve forces,
approach and keep him under continuous obser- weapons, and supplies.
vation. Non-military outposts, such as police German Westwall tactics are based on a stub-
sentries, party officials, and local farmers also are born defense of individual fortifications, local
used for these duties. counterattacks against areas of penetration, and
Sector boundaries for companies and battalions counterattack by general mobile reserves against
are defined from the outside defense ring to the areas of deep penetration. German troops are not
center of the town or village. Usually they do permitted to develop a static-defense complex
not coincide with vital main roads, which always which might foster the idea that a position once
are defended by entire companies or battalions. surrounded is lost. Bunker garrisons are taught
Every strongpoint, defense block (combined ad- to continue resistance even though surrounded,
jacent buildings), and sector has local reserves; because their perseverance impedes the attackers'
mobile reserves, consisting of combat groups com- advance and facilitates counterattacks. Troops
prised of infantry, tanks, assault and self-pro- are trained in the principle that the decision usu-
pelled guns, are employed for counterattacks of a ally is achieved by the infantry in the open be-
larger scale. tween bunkers. Organic heavy infantry weapons
In addition to regular military units the Ger- and artillery are the backbone of German defense
IV—28
I MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451
y%Wi !1 i
in the Westwall, just as in mobile warfare. Re- position, the breaking of contact, the retirement,
serves habitually are left under cover until the and the resumption of the defense are carefully
time for counterattack arrives. planned beforehand. Positions in the rear are
Surprise is always attempted. For example, prepared for the reception of the troops, particu-
bunkers and heavy weapons frequently are sited larly if they have been engaged in heavy fighting.
on reverse slopes, not only for concealment and The retirement is made in conjunction with that
protection in defilade, but also to open fire sud- of adjacent units, and stress is placed on maintain-
denly upon the unwary attacker crossing the crest ing the cohesiveness of the retiring forces.
or moving around the nose of a hill. The attacker By maintaining the usual fire of all arms, the
penetrating the Westwall defense system must Germans try to deceive their enemy as long as
be prepared to cope with unexpected resistance possible as to the continued occupation in force of
flaring up in his rear areas, surprise by accurate their original position.
flanking and enfilade fire at short and medium In view of the severe losses inflicted by Allied
ranges, sudden counterattacks by forces not planes and armored forces on German troops dur-
known to be in the areas, and counterattacks in ing daylight disengagements, the Germans try to
increasing strength as the penetration progresses. await darkness before withdrawing from action.
German doctrine prescribes that the intact por- At night they break off combat on a wide front
tion of the defenses must continue the battle, and move back along routes as nearly perpendicu-
regardless of the situation at the penetrated area, lar as possible to terrain features suitable for
until the appropriate command orders a readjust- fighting delaying actions. When the situation
ment of the line. Penetrations normally are dealt forces them to withdraw during daylight, they do
with as follows: by mobile reserves which seal so by unit sectors, coordinating the movements of
them off f rontally; by counterattack or counter- adjacent units.
offensive from protected flanks to threaten the b. ORDERS. The German company commander
rear areas of the penetrating force; or by both, as follows this outline in drafting his orders for
in the Aachen area. At any rate, the Germans breaking off an engagement:
will attempt to destroy the penetration before the General instructions. Rearward movement of
attacker has reorganized and consolidated his supplies, ammunition-carrying vehicles, and equip-
gains. Here again the principle of economy of ment.
force is generally followed. German troops may Reconnaissance and marking of routes of with-
be taken from strongly protected and little threat- drawal.
ened areas in order to concentrate on adequate Detailed instructions. Combat orders for the
counterattacking or counteroffensive force. covering forces (reconnaissance units, heavy sup-
Hence the attacker should have sufficient strength port weapons, medical personnel, infantry com-
to ward off strong countermeasures and at the bat wagons, and infantry engineers).
same time exploit the advantages gained by a Type, time, and march order for the withdrawal
penetration. of the rifle platoons and heavy weapons.
Assembly areas.
Section VI. RETROGRADE MOVEMENTS Location of the company commander.
2. Retreat (R~ckztlg)
I. Withdrawal from Action (Abbrechen des Ge-
a. GENERAL. Retreat is a forced retirement
fechts)
which is ordered by the Germans only when all
a. GENERAL. The Germans break off an en- possibilities for success are exhausted. The ob-
gagement for one or more of the following rea- jective is to place enough distance between
sons : when it has served its purpose; when con- friendly and hostile forces to enable the former
ditions require the employment of the troops, or to conduct an orderly withdrawal and to occupy
part of them, on another front; when a continua- new positions to the rear.
tion of the battle gives no promise of success; or b. COVERING FORCES. The German usually or-
when defeat is imminent. ganize covering forces from troops in closest con-
When an attack exhausts itself without attain- tact with the enemy—either whole tactical units or
ing its objective, the Germans assume the defen- elements from several. These forces attempt to
sive as the first step in withdrawing from action. make the enemy believe that the position is still
If the defense must be continued in a rearward fully occupied. Engineers prepare additional ob-
IV—3I
UNCLASSIFIED
MARCH 1945 TM-E 30-45l
stacles, minefields, and booby traps forward of the length of time each particular position is likely
and within the positions to be held. A portion of to be held, and the decision of the individual com-
the artillery and heavy infantry weapons support pany and platoon commanders. During each stage
the covering forces. They maintain as long as of the retreat, the commander of the rear com-
possible their former fire activity to deceive the pany can order a withdrawal to the main rear
enemy, even when fulfilment of their mission guard position, but withdrawal from each main
means the loss of individual guns. The sector rear guard position is ordered by the commander
assigned to a covering force is usually too wide of the main body. l:requently the speed of with-
to be under effective control of a single comman- drawal is based on a time-distance schedule. Dur-
der, but the actions of the various commanders ing the withdrawal from a certain town, rear
are closely coordinated. Orders specify whether guards were instructed to retire not more than
the covering forces are to remain in contact with 3,000 yards a day.
the hostile forces until they begin to advance, or (4) Experience has shown that in certain types
to follow the main body after a specified interval. of country a reinforced rear guard company gen-
c. REAR GUARD (Nachhut). (1) As the dis- erally can hold up very superior forces on a front
tance from the enemy increases, the retiring troops as wide as three miles. In one instance of a
form march columns. Where possible, a divi- withdrawal from a defensive position along a river
sion's retirement takes place along two parallel line, a German Panzer division, which had one
routes. The freshest troops available are used as Panzer Grenadier battalion and attached elements
rear guards. Since the rear guard cannot expect as its rear guard, was covered by one rifle com-
support from the retreating main body, it must pany reinforced by a company of tanks, four in-
be relatively strong. It is composed of infantry fantry guns (including two self-propelled), and
units. Generally the divisional field artillery re- a battery of medium howitzers. The tanks were
tires with the main body, none being assigned to mainly used to cover the withdrawal of the rifle
the rear guard. Self-propelled and heavy in- elements. On another occasion a similar rear
fantry-support guns, and even howitzers, are fre- party had a number of heavy mortars attached.
quently attached to the rear guard. Tanks also These covered the infantry withdrawal with the
may be assigned. A typical rear guard for each help of four tanks, which also carried the mortars
route in a division retirement is one infantry bat- back to the next bound.
talion to which are attached elements of the recon- (5) Particularly suited for rear guard tasks,
naissance unit, to protect the flanks, and of the because of its armor and high fire power, is the
engineer unit, to prepare demolitions. armored reconnaissance battalion ol the Panzer
division. When employing the armored recon-
(2) The rear guard infantry battalion nor- naissance battalion in terrain that affords cover,
mally employs only one of its rifle companies on the Germans site well camouflaged, armored half-
active rear guard tasks. The three rifle companies tracks in WOO&X! areas, flat reverse slopes, or high
perform this function in turn as long as their grain fields, and open fire with all weapons at
strength remains approximately even. If the ter- very close range. The armored half-tracks then
rain demands it, two companies are employed at penetrate into the confused enemy and, after re-
a time. Two or more antitank guns and half pulsing him, retreat to previously organized alter-
of the self-propelled or heavy infantry guns al- nate positions.
lotted to the full rear guard support the rearmost
rifle company or companies. When pressure be- 3. Delaying Action
comes too strong, the single rifle company is with- a. BASIC PRINCIPLES. The Germans make a
drawn through the two remaining rifle companies distinction between "delaying engagements" (Hin-
which are supported by the remainder of the at- haltendes Grfecht) and "delaying action" (Hinhal-
tached weapons. Variations of this leapfrogging tender Widerstand). A delaying engagement is
progress are repeated until darkness, when a gen- primarily the general plan of the higher comman-
eral disengagement takes place and the original der for holding back the enemy. Delaying actions
formation is resumed. are the measures taken by lower units to carry
(3) Rear guards withdraw by bounds to se- out the higher commander's plan.
lected but not prepared positions. The extent to The purpose of delaying actions is to enable
which positions eventually can be prepared de- the main German force to disengage itself from
pends on the proximity of the pursuing forces, battle, retire in order, and establish a new defen-
IV—32
I MARCH 1945
UNCLASSIFIED
TM-E 30-451
sive position. Delaying actions therefore seek to reaches the old one, or their losses will be ex-
deceive the enemy as to German strength, dispo- cessive.
sitions, and intentions; to prevent the enemy from The troops therefore do not retire in the face
committing the main German forces; and to pre- of enemy patrols—every effort is made to destroy
vent close pursuit of the main forces by the such patrols—but only when the enemy mounts
enemy. These measures are accomplished by rear an attack. If it can be ascertained that the enemy
guards, special battle groups, and strongpoints, all is preparing for a massed attack, the Germans
of which are characterized by high automatic fire make a timely withdrawal to avoid exposing the
power, mobility, and economy in numerical troops to enemy artillery concentrations. Ad-
strength. vance elements employ smoke to enable them to
Delaying actions are organized not in a main make a getaway in a critical situation. Riflemen
defensive belt, but on lines of resistance (Wider- cover the disengagement of heavy weapons, which
standslinien). The distance between such lines move back by bounds. Every opportunity is
is great enough to prevent the enemy from en- taken to make limited counterattacks in order to
gaging two of them from the same artillery posi- inflict casualties on an enemy who advances
tion. He is compelled to displace and move up his recklessly.
artillery to engage each line. These lines of re- Fire is opened at extreme ranges on an enemy
sistance are normally established along forward advancing for a major attack. Enemy recon-
slopes to facilitate disengagement and withdrawal naissance forces are allowed to approach, how-
under cover. The delaying actions are fought for- ever, and then an effort is made to destroy them.
ward of the lines of resistance with mobile forces. Counterattacks on a large scale are avoided,
Furthermore, battle outposts are organized for- except when the enemy threatens to penetrate the
ward of each line. line of resistance. When that occurs, the Ger-
The main delaying weapons are machine guns, mans counterattack with the main forces of the
mortars, and self-propelled weapons. Tanks are, rear guard and seek to restore the situation in
used in small groups. order that the program of staged withdrawal may
Maintenance of contact is a most conspicuous be continued. Local counterattacks are made for
principle in the Germans' conduct of a withdrawal the protection or retention of some feature essen-
and delaying action. The size, composition, di- tial to the safe conduct of the main withdrawal,
rection, and intention of the attacking enemy force or to gain time for the preparation of the line
are observed at all times. of resistance or phase line.
b. CONDUCT OF THE DELAYING ACTION. Dur- The area between the lines of resistance is
ing a delaying action, wide sectors are covered by called the intermediate area (Zz&clzenfeZd). Ex-
artillery units widely deployed—guns are sited by plicit orders are given as to whether the inter-
sections if necessary—and by widely distributed mediate area is to be covered in one bound or is
infantry-support weapons. The defense is then to be fought over. The latter necessity arises
further organized by establishing strongpoints especially when the next line of resistance has not
manned by small groups. been fully prepared and time must be gained.
The positions from which delaying actions are Detachments must reach the line of resistance
fought are characterized by very slight depth. AS early enough to insure that all the main positions
a general rule, a unit is responsible for double are occupied in time.
the front normally allocated in defensive fighting. The supply of ammunition is carefully organ-
A company sector is 650 to 1,300 yards; a bat- ized. A great deal of ammunition is required
talion sector 1,750 to 4,400 yards; a regimental for delaying actions because a few weapons on
sector 4,400 to 6,600 yards; and a division sector a broad front must do as much as or even more
1.3,OOO to 22,000 yards. than the normal number of guns in a defensive
In leaving a line of resistance, German cover- position. When ammunition is scarce, the Ger-
ing forces attempt to disengage by night. If mans specify, down to sections if necessary, the
that is not possible, their actions are governed by quantity of ammunition that may be used at each
the following principle: the enemy is not al- position. Every commander maintains a supply
lowed to come closer to them than they are from of ammunition for emergencies.
their next line of resistance. The troops must The Germans stress the importance of deceiv-
be able to reach the new position before the enemy ing the enemy by every means. Artillery and
IV—33
UNCLASSIFIED
1 MARCH 1945 TM-E 30-45I
heavy weapons are moved continually to give an quently laid at the heads of re-entrants in hilly
impression of greater strength. Dummy posi- terrain.
tions and camouflage are also widely used. d. BATTLE GROUPS IN DELAYING ACTION.
So that isolated groups may be adequately di- Battle groups normally are organized for the
rected, signal communication receives special at- execution of some specific task in the withdrawal,
tention. such as a local counterattack or the defense of
In delaying actions in mountainous terrain, the some particular feature whose retention is neces-
Germans make greater use of their reconnaisance sary for the security of the main withdrawal.
and engineer units than of any other component. Battle groups, which the Germans employ for
Reconnaisance units are almost continuously in offensive and defensive as well as delaying mis-
contact with advance and flanking enemy ele- sions, vary in size from a company or two, with
ments, and participate in most rear-guard and attached close support weapons, to a regiment or
battle-group engagements. several battalions reinforced with tanks, artillery,
c. STRONGPOINTS IN DELAYING ACTION. The antiaircraft, engineer, and reconnaissance ele-
Germans cover the rear guard's resistance or ments. In all cases the Germans seek to make
phase lines by a system of strongpoints or de- them as self-sufficient as possihle in comhat. In
fended localities. Just as it is a function of the actual practice, however, the composition of Ger-
rear guards to prevent a pursuing force from man battle groups appears often to have been
making contact with the main body while it is on dictated less by the theory of what units should
the move, so it is the function of strongpoints to be put together to form a self-sufficient comhat
prevent the penetration of resistance or phase lines force, than by the demands of an emergency
until the main body has withdrawn to its next situation which commanders have been forced to
position. meet with the insufficient and normally disasso-
In manning strongpoints, the Germans show ciated units at their disposal.
the same economy of force they show in forming German hattle groups may he organized for
rear guards. Typical fire power of a strongpoint short, long, or changing missions. They are
in close country is one or two self-propelled guns, usually known by the name of their commander.
two heavy mortars, and up to six machine guns. e. DEMOLITIONS AND OBSTACLES. T O prevent
In open country, one self-propelled gun is nor- the pursuing enemy columns from approaching
mally employed, supplemented by three tanks and close enough to engage even their rear guard ele-
a small party of infantry with mortars and ma- ments, the Gerinans continually employ demoli-
chine guns in armored half-tracks. tions and obstacles of all kinds. The thorough-
Strongpoints generally are organized on the ness with which ehgineer operations have been
hedgehog principle. Provision is made for all- carried out has increased steadily throughout the
around fire, but the strongpoints are not neces- war. Culverts and bridges are completely de-
sarily mutually self-supporting. They are nor- stroyed. Roads and all natural detours are
mally located on commanding features, and some- mined, cratered, or blocked by felled trees; in
times on the forward edges of villages or hamlets streets and villages, streets are blocked by the
if these dominate road or terrain bottlenecks. In wreckage of buildings. Vertical rail obstacles are
flat country, however, villages usually are not oc- placed to obstruct main routes; mines often are
cupied except by snipers, but positions are oc- laid for 30 yards around the edge of the obstacle.
cupied in the rear of the villages to engage enemy Wooden box mines are used to a large extent as
vanguards debauching from them. Weapons are demolition charges, and aerial bombs and artillery
not dug in, and positions are frequently changed. shells are sometimes similarly employed.
Counterbattery fire thereby is rendered very dif- Frequently rear parties are committed to a
ficult as there are no prepared positions to be delaying engagement in order to cover the prepa-
spotted from the air. The Germans thus force ration of demolitions immediately behind them.
their enemy to launch a full-scale attack sup- During static periods in the general withdrawal,
ported by artillery to dislodge the garrison of when the Germans occupy their line of resistance
the strongpoint, which normally withdraws just or phase line, engineer units prepare demolitions
before the attack can materialize. Approaches to i’n the rear. After the withdrawal, these demoli-
strongpoints which cannot be covered by fire are tions are covered by sniper fire, machine guns,
frequently mined. Extensive minefields are fre- and self-propelled weapons as long as possible.
IV—34
I MARCH 1945
UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451
. $ • ! • » x X 0 ' X
' V7F I
^ { 9 , 9 . 9 9 , 9 , 9 , 9 , 9 , 9 . 9 , 9.
- P, 9 . 9 !9 , 9 , 9 . 9, 9 , 9 , 9 . 9, 9 RING 3
RING 4
BURIED T-MINES IT-MINE 42 OB T-MINE 431, WITH Z-METER SPACING BOTH LATERALLY A N D IN DEPTH.
RING 1
n
9 -^—+- 9 , x . 9 , x . 9 , x , 9 i x t 9 OOQ RING1
•Jn
%•
-S-. . I •• ^ .
o <?<X>O RING 1 •
•»<,
I Q ^ Q
RING 1
T-MINES [T-MINE 4 2 OR T-MINE 431 LAID O N SURFACE, WITH 4-METER SPACING BOTH LATERALLY A N D IN DEPTH.
IV—36
I MARCH 1945
UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451
from old telephone wire. (See Figure 15.) The between fixed points, serves to lay out right an-
mine-measuring wire is 24 meters , (about 25 gles by staking out a triangle with sides of 6,
yards) long, and every meter (3 feet 3 inches) 8, and 10 meters respectively. Spaces between
is marked with a piece of wood. The rings on the mines are determined by reference to the marks
ends are about 5 inches in diameter. The meas- on wire; the four rings on one end are used to
uring wire, in addition to measuring the distance offset the rows.
L_H9._t__$._1_Q__H^^-Q._t__$.8ooo RINGl
t
O i O
i- -><- - i — 1—I—*—^—^—t—*- J5J—, 1—|—v—OOOO RING 1
I
I
m I
..•!.• • • • • X - - 4 . o o o o 1
-*—I—-t—K—X—< "' t X — * - " '|.. X ' i—' i X yooo
I • i 9 • i , >? , i , g -, i , 9 i 1 i 8
>O0 RING 1
p—J—i -x-—I—I—t—x—I—I—I—x—i—J—l--»t—I—j—I—X—I—I—H-3*—^o-oo'-RiNciY
X „..) „ I i—%—i—I—i—y—)—|—\—y—(—|—i—x—i—|—t-M—cxJKX) RJNGT
Jr. i Ao-oo "mNeT
SCHU-MINES 4 2 , SPACED W-METER LATERALLY AND l-METER IN DEPTH. THE MINES ARE PLACED AT
%-METER INTERVALS ALONG THE MEASURING WIRE.
2 m (2.2 yds) 2 1
4 2
6 3
Vi m (0.55 yd) 1 2
2 4
The density of a minefield depends upon the types of mines, which often are unmarked and
interval between mines and the number of rows. show every evidence of hurried laying. The con-
The table above represents the density. sequent lack of pattern uniformity makes their
Mine lanes are left open for patrols, and pas- detection and clearance a laborious and dangerous
sage lanes for assault troops. For permanent pa- task. Though no consistency is noted in layout
trols new lanes are made from time to time and and types of mines used in such fields, the Ger-
the old ones closed. A mine-free safety strip is mans show certain preferences in their choice of
provided on the Germans' side. sites for them.
The Germans normally lay mine belts in indi- b. LOCATION. In general, mines are laid either
vidual sections 80 by 105 feet. The sections usu- close to, or on, roads; on airfields and railways;
ally are staggered, and, for extensive mine belts, and along telegraph routes. Surfaced portions
they are combined in units of three or four to of roads usually are avoided by the hasty mine
form forward or reverse arrowheads, or echelons. layer, but khaki-painted T-Mines sometimes are
Minefields arranged in echelon are surveyed by placed on the surface at dips in the road, in the
using corner posts on the hostile side of inter- hope that drivers will be unable to check their
mediate minefields as survey points. vehicles in time to avoid them. The Germans also
The Germans emphasize that minefields must place mines along the shoulders of the road oppo-
be covered by fire, although during a hasty with- site narrow places where drivers have to detour
drawal they often do not follow this principle. It to pass, and at the entrances to defiles where they
is common for a regular minefield to have a listen- have to pull off the road to wait for vehicles
ing post with two men at the rearward edge; moving in the opposite direction. Other places
about 70 or 80 yards farther to the rear there usually sown with antitank mines are turnouts,
usually is a covering party of four or five men sharp bends, the unsurfaced islands sometimes
armed with one or two light machine guns. found at crossroads, berms, and well worn wheel
When the Germans are in hasty withdrawal, ruts.
they usually lay a large number of small nuisance c. CONCEALMENT. The Germans, with great
minefields. These fields contain many different ingenuity, attenqlt to make their tnines difficult
IV—38
I MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451
to detect. They bury them as much as 24 inches real mines, is placecl in shallow holes to cause
below the surface where they explode only after a h e y i n in the mine detector. Dummy mines
passage of a number of vehicles has compacted rface are wired in and connected with booby
the earth cover sufficiently to operate the fuze. traps.
They put explosives in wooden boxes to prevent
4. revent of Minefields
the effective operation of ordinary mine detectors,
and mark tire prints in the earth on top of the The Germans stress the marking of minefields
mine by drawing a detached axle and wheels and attempt to mark them in such a manner that
over it. they cannot be recognized by the enemy but can
The Germans also show considerable ingenuity easily be found by their own troops. Their meth-
in siting random antipersonnel mines on the line ods of marking minefields are not uniform. The
of the hostile advance. Road demolitions are front edge of a field often is unmarked and un-
plentifully sown with S-Mines, and kilometer wired; the rear edge seldom so. Some fields have
posts at points where vehicular drivers have to been to unmarked, but because of many
dismount to read directions are similarly treated. accidents caused by their own minefields, the
S-Mines also are placed in ditches, often close to Germans issued orders within recent months
to the trip-wire peg of another mine. making proper marking obligatory.
Nuisance fields on lines of communication gen- The following are typical examples of mark-
erally are closely spaced, occasionally so closely ings by the Germans, the type used depending
as to cause sympathetic detonation. This is par- on r - situation and terrain: corner-post mark-
ticularly possible when mines are laid with their ing stakes; double-apron fence on the enemy side
pressure plates almost flush with the surface of and a single trip wire on the friendly side, or the
the ground and only lightly covered with earth. reverse; single knee-high wires; cattle fencing;
German dummy minefields take various forms. empty mine crates; and signs.
In some cases a trip wire is laid to give the ap- The length of marking stakes varies with the
pearance of a minefield perimeter wire, with the terrain. They are flattened on one side for a
usual lanes, and the ground is disturbed at regu- length of about 8 inches. The flat surface is
lar intervals. Scrap metal, often dispersed with painted red, with the letter M (M&en) in black.
GAP MINES
MINE STAKE ACTUAL MINEFIELD SIGN DUMMY MINEFIELD SIGN MINEFIELD GAP SIGN
gyS'Kfflafg
7T1 in en\tntmint
OTHER TYPES OF SIGNS AT ACTUAL MINEFIELDS OTHER TYPES OF MINEFIELD GAP SIGNS
189
Mine Obstacle: Mine Plan:
Real Div Engr
How laid:_
Mine Pattern:-Erefi^
Warning Fence:_Q
DistinguishingEevrures:
Map Reference: Captured Russian. Map L37-6
*) "ip
3 JUe 1942
ate mine Iield was laid-- ~ ~~~ ~AY~ ____ dote drawn_4-MnjL
by Cpl_ StUtVf-r/
AIWAYS KING I
/20S-Minef
&Gkefidd D /4m wide,
2/SfocK Mines 7 fines each fae u/iM3Mtfffes witit trip
IV—40
I MARCH 1945
UNCLASSlF\ED TM-E 30-451
Mine Pattern: ^^
Warning Fence: '~~~~' s^ .
! I- I /
/
I • /
73
:
;
7»V-.
explosive 1?cVxkw*K
igniters
Such stakes are used only on the friendly edges (7) Da)- of survey and instrument used (old
of minefields. or new compass—German issue).
Signs are painted in red and white on boards (8) Name and rank of officer or noncommis-
or pieces of sheet metal, and fastened to t o sioned officer in charge of survey.
stakes. The edges of minefields are marked with b. M I N E DATA IN MAP. The following data
signs showing horizontal stripes. Edges of lanes are given on the mines :
through the fields are shown by vertically divided (1) Number, type and igniter. (Example:
signs with the white portion on the side of the 72 T-Mine with T-MZ. 42, booby-trapped.)
lane, and the red portion on the side of the mine- (2) Whether or not the mines are dug in.
field (danger). The reverse side of the signs (3) Number of rows, and number of mines
(the side toward the enemy) is painted olive drab. per row.
If red paint is not available, the Germans substi- (4) Fence (Example warning fence on
tute black-and-white signs. They are painted with friendly side.)
the following words: (5) Special features (Example destroyed
Millen—for mines enemy tank in center, on enemy side.)
Gasse or Gassen—for mine lanes
c. MINEFIELD-TYPE IDENTIFICATION IN MAP.
Entimint—for an area cleared of mines.
Colored lines drawn diagonally across the upper
Minefields are marked with vertical lettering,
right-hand field of the mine map identify the
dummy minefields with slanting letters. This dis-
type of the minefield as follows:
tinction, however, is supposed to be made known
(1) A red diagonal line designates fields which
only to the German engineer troops because other
cannot be cleared because some or all mines are
troops may divulge the location of dummy mine-
booby-trapped.
fields by crossing them.
(2) A yellow diagonal line designates fields
which can be cleared by using data from mine
5. Mine Plans, Sketches, and Reports
document.
A German mine plan shows one or more fields (3) A green diagonal line designates dummy
in all necessary technical details. A German mine minefields.
map, on the other hand, shows all mine obstacles (4) Mines taken up or o r marked
within one front sector and their tactical sig- in red.
nificance, but without technical details. The number of the minefield plan and unit
The Germans use a number of different forms designation appears on the upper right-hand cor-
for their reports and sketches, although all are ner of the sheet. Battalion, regiment, and division
based on the same principle. Figure 17 shows 9 engineers make their notes in the space provided
very commonly used form. The upper third of for them.
the mine map form provides space for written For S-Mines laid 50 meters (55 yards) from
specifications and a small situation sketch. Thrthe the German lines, a note is made in red letters:
drawing is made on the blank space proiided. VORSICHT, NUR 50 METER ABSTAND!
It is the engineers' responsibility to draw up (Caution, only 50 meters distance!)
mine maps, and to keep them up to date. Addi- In case electrical ignition is provided, a note
tional remarks sometimes are placed on the back is made showing how the igniters will be disposed
of the sheet. of, if the unit which has laid the minefield is
a. DETAILS OF M I N E MAP. The German mine relieved.
map usually shows the following details: d. INFORMATION IN MINEFIELD DRAWING.
(1) Name of the obstacle and designation of The drawing of the minefield is made in the
the unit which laid it. blank space on the lower part of the sheet. The
(2) Name of the area in which the obstacle is scale is from 1 :500 to 1:2,000 whenever possible.
located. The following information is included:
(3) Grid reference and particulars of the map (1) Shape and size of minefield.
sheet referred to. (2) Pattern.
(4) Obstacle shown in the little sketch in red. (3) Location of booby-trapped mines.
(5) Date minefield was laid. (4) Location of survey points with azimuth
(6) Name and rank of officer or noncommis- and distances.
sioned officer in charge of laying field. (5) Type and location of warning fence.
IV—42
I MARCH 1945 TM-E 30-451
UNCLASSIFIED
S£t. Schmaltz
CONVENTIONAL SIGNS FOR MINE MAPS (6) Location of the front lin and c5
tions.
Terrain impassable for tanks (7) Neighboring minefields, nline lanes, ter-
Antitank ditch or obstacle rain features, special features.
The Germans believe that it is not necessary
Antitank mine field to mark on the minefield drawing the location
Antipersonnel mine field of every single mine, if a partial drawing is suf-
3 ficient. The German mine plans contain the de-
4
1 Mines per meter width of front tail symbols shown in Figure 18, while simple
I + + + •
tactical signs are sufficient for minefield maps.
CONVENTIONAL SIGNS FOR MINE The Germans complete their mine plans at
PLANS AND SKETCHES company or battalion command posts, based on
• 0 0 Antitank mines sketches and data compiled while the field is
being laid out. They make five copies of all mine
•» •« tm Index number to be used only
•« • « • » if different types of mines are laid plans and distribute them as follows‘: One for
•I •• •• in the same field. engineer company lvhich is in charge of the mine-
field ; two for division; one for army; one for
0 o O Improvised antitank mines central file in Dessau-Rosslau.
B B B S-Mines Changes in the minefield are recorded on the
back of the mine plan. After three changes a
^1 B B Stock Mines new mine plan is drawn.
I B B Schu-Mines 42 A mine sketch is a simplified mine plan used
to transmit information on a m i n & l d as rapidly
1 11 11 1 Improvised antipersonnel mines as possible. It is not drawn to scale, and is drawn
whenever the tactical situation, bad weather, or
ft ft ft Small hidden charges
other circumstances prevent the preparation of
ft ft ft Large hidden charges mine plans.
Front-line troops receive from the engineers
Observation mines
instructions or sketches showing the approximate
Booby-trapped mines location and extent of the minefield. These
sketches, as a rule, tie not contain details on types
Taken-up or destroyed of mines or igniters, pattern, and survey points.
Scattered mines Engineer units in charge of minefields keep
records of changes in minefields under their care
,1 1 u 1 Deliberate mine field and keep these records with their units, while
>_ • #]'[_ i ij Mines lying on the surface mine plans are turned over to the relieving units.
e. M I N E KEPORTX Armies generally designate
• i i| Mines below the surface certain areas for fields of scattered mines. In this
case mine reports take the place of mine plans.
Minefieldcleared or destroyed
Normally, mine reports contain:
(1) Number of the order authorizing scatter-
•V Gaps through mine fields
•\* ing of mines.
Dummy mine fields (2) Designation of units scattrring the mines.
(3) Name and number of field containing scat-
tered mines.
Built-in hidden charqes (4) Map location of scattered minefield.
Survey points (VP) and Fix points (FE’) (5) Number of mints scattcrctb, subdivided by
types and igniters.
-w—w—w- Warninq fences (6) Number and type of booby-trapped mints.
Direction of enemv attack kind of booby trap.
IV—44
I MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451
Section VIM. SPECIAL OPERATIONS by small-arms fire. Streets are avoided as much
as V I I I . by the Germans who infiltrate simul-
I. Town and Street Fighting taneously through back yards and over roofs.
They attempt to further the advance by seizing
In attacking a town or village, the Germans high buildings which offer dominating positions
employ flanking and encircling tactics. They at- and wide fields of fire.
tempt to cut off water, electricity, gas, and other When compelled to advance through streets, the
utilities. While carrying out the flanking maneu- man e in u - files, one on each side of
ver, they pin down the defenders with heavy ar- the thoroughfare. The left side is preferred as
tillery fire and aerial bombardment. When it is it is more advantageous for firing right-handed
necessary to make a direct assault, the Germans from doorways. Consideration is given to the
concentrate all available heavy weapons, including problem of fighting against defenders organized
artillery and air units, on one target. They favor not only in depth but in height. Consequently
as targets for their massed fire the forward edges ges men receive specific assignments to watch
of the community, especially detached groups of the rooms, the various floors of buildings, and
buildings and isolated houses. During the fire cellar windows. Side streets are immediately
concentration the infantry assembles and attacks blocked, and at night searchlights are kept ready
the objective immediately upon termination of to illuminate roofs.
artillery fire. Tanks and assault guns accom-
As soon as a building is occupied, the Germans
pany the infantry, and with their fire immobilize
organize it into a s?i-on~p~+nt. Windows and
any new enemy forces which may appear. They
They openings are cbn:iertetl into loopholes and
also support the infantry in sweeping away bar-
embrasures, Ceiigrs and attics are occupied first
ricades, blasting passages through walls, and
in a n d for defense.
crushing wire obstacles. Guns and mortars are
Even buildings which have been completely
used against concealed positions, and antitank
antitank are kept under constant observation to
guns cover side streets against possible flanking
anking their reoccupation by the enemy. From
operations. Machine guns engage snipers on
o n buildings the Germans deliver continu-
rations.
ofs. machine-gun and rifle fire with the object of
The immediate objective of the Germans is to denying the enemy the opportunity to occupy
divide the area occupied by the enemy. These T h e s e positions.
areas then are isolated into as many smaller areas Underground corridors and sewers, which pro-
as possible, in order to deny the enemy freedom vide a r e a s cover for defenders, are attacked
of movement. with determination. When immediate clearance
Another form of attack employed by the Ger- or movement. is not possible, the entrances are
mans is to drive through a community and estab- G e r - blasted, or guarded.
lish good positions beyond the town to block the Aware that their tanks and assault guns are
retreat of the defender. Then they try to an- vulnerable to attacks by tank-hunting units, the
nihilate the enemy within the community. Germans assign infantry to protect them. Bar-
ricades and obstacles arc cleared by infantry and
The assaulting troops are divided into a num-
engineers. All able-bodied civilians, regardless
ber of columns and make a series of coordinated
or dinated are summoned to clear ‘the streets of
parallel attacks. Attacks from opposite direc-
debris.
tions and conflicting angles are avoided, since
When a section of a town is occupied, the Ger-
they lead to confusion and to firing on friendly
mans close up all side streets leading from the
troops. The columns are sub-divided into assault
occupied ault block all exits of houses, and then
and mop-up groups. Assault detachments of en-
e n - a house-to-house search with details as-
gineers, equipped with demolition equipment,
signed to special tasks, such as mopping up roofs,
flame throwers, and grenades, accompany the in-
in- basements, courtyards, and staircases.
fantry. Where possible, the Germans blast holes
through the walls of rows of buildings along the 2. Attack on Fortified Positions
route of advance in order to provide the infantry The Germans realize the difficulty of attacking
with covered approaches. These passages afford a strongly fortified enemy position and prepare
protection for bringing up supplies and evacuat- such an attack well in advance of the actual oper-
ing casualties. Houses are cleared of defenders ation. Before attacking a large and intricately
IV—45
1 MARCH 1945
UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451
fortified position covering a large area—a classi- reconnaissance is carried out. even though com-
cal example was the assault on the Belgian For- pany strength becomes tcmpor;lrily retlucctl. Rc-
tress Eben Emael—the Germans attempt to se- connaissance patrol5 usually niove clockwise from
cure, in addition to information obtained through their original position. The company commander
normal reconnaissance, its exact plan by the em- reviews the reconnaissance reports in detail with
ployment of agents and fifth columnists. When his platoon and section leads-1-s;.
time permits, they construct a duplicate of the The company usually deploys in wedge forma-
fortification on similar terrain well in the interior tion when advancing. ln ortlcr to achieve sur-
of Germany, as they did with Eben Emael. In prise, the Germans often leave the roads and
building such installations for intensive rehearsal advance cross-country.
training of specially-organized combat teams, the As soon as the point of the wedge of the com-
Germans spare neither labor nor expense. These pany is in sight of the enemy, the Germans creep
special combat teams usually consist of combat forward to close-combat range, always keeping
engineers, reinforced by infantry, antitank, and contact with adjacent and supporting units. The
chemical warfare units. company then storms the enemy's position, using
The attack on the fortress usually is preceded the greatest possible number of hand grenades,
by an intensive dive-bomber bombardment and pole charges, and close-combat weapons. The
long-range heavy-artillery fire. The purpose of advance elements attempt to break into the hostile
these bombardments is to destroy obstacles and position as deeply as possible, the body of the
minefields, and to create bomb craters which not wedge widening the pencration on both sides.
only provide cover for assaulting troops but also The company commander then decides whether to
may be converted into firing positions. Often roll up the enemy position on the more important
paratroopers land in close proximity to the fortifi- flank or to hold the ground until reinforcements
cation just prior to the assault, immediately es- arrive before continuing the attack.
tablishing radio communication with the combat- Each platoon details at least one observer,
team headquarters. armed with an automatic weapon, to neutralize
The climactic phase of the operation is the as- enemy treetop snipers. The (Germans believe that
sault. Its primary objective is to get the engi- bursts of fire. rather than single shots, are neces-
neers forward to certain selected works. During sary to deal effectively with such snipers.
the approach, and until the engineers reach the The Germans consider fighting in wooded areas
fortifications, the artillery delivers fire of maxi- as the primary task of riflernell and machine gun-
mum intensity. Antitank guns lay direct fire ners, since the employment of heavy-support
against the embrasures, and chemical-warfare weapons often is iml~0ssible. The Germans oc-
units employ smoke to blind forts and adjacent casionally dismount heavy machine guns and use
supporting works. The infantry covers the em- them as light machine guns. Antitank guns of
brasures with rifle and machine-gun fire and small caliber and light infantry howitzers some-
remains in readiness to move forward and con- times are brought forward manually, and when
solidate any success the engineers may gain. En- indirect fire is not possible they engage targets
gineers crawl forward, utilizing shell holes for directly. Light mortars are employed individual-
cover. They. are equipped with hang grenades, ly. From Finnish troops, the Germans learned a
blocks of TNT, and submachine guns. Some successful method of using mortars in woods.
groups use bangalore torpedoes, some pole- The mortar observers, accompanied by a tele-
charges, while still others are armed with heavy phone operator, move with the advanced element.
flame throwers. With T N T and pole charges, The line back to the mortar crew is exactly 200
they attempt to demolish systematically the weak- yards long. One man is detailed to see that the
er works, such as embrasures, ports, turrets, line does not get hung on the way and as far as
joints, and doors. possible runs in a straight line. When the ad-
vanced element contacts the enemy, the observer
3. Combat in Woods judges the distance from himself to the target
When attacking in woods, the Germans usually and adds the 200 yards to the mortar range.
divide the area into company sectors. The Ger- Bracketing of fire for adjustment is considered
mans stress constant reconnaissance to discover too dangerous because of the close proximity of
the most weakly manned enemy position. This friend and foe.
IV—46
UNCLASSIFIED
I MARCH 1945 TM-E 30-451
When the Germans leave a woods or have to Normally supplies arc organized in two eche-
cross a large clearing within the wooded area, lons, the mou;ltain and valley echelon.
the troops work themselves close to the edge of The Germans make extensive use of high-tra-
the woods. Then all the men leave the woods jectory tveapons in mountain fighting, although
simultaneously, rushing at least 100 yards before antitank g-uns and heavy machine guns are used
seeking cover. for covering road blocks. The effectiveness of
the mountain artillery tl~pentls on carefully select-
4. Combat in Mountains ed observation posts \vhich are in communication
with the single gun positions.
a. GENERAL. The German principles of com-
Radio is the primary means of communication,
bat in mountain areas correspond in general to
since the laying of telephone wire is not con-
those employed on level terrain. The peculiari-
sidered feasible.
ties of mountain terrain, such as limited routes,
extreme weather conditions, and difficult commu- c. R O U T E S , Attacks across moun-
nications, necessitate additional considerations in tains are made to protect the flanks of the main
the tactics employed. The greatest differences attack. to work around the enemy rear, or to
occur in the higher mountains, where the Ger- provide flanking fire for the main attack. The
mans utilize specially trained mountain troops, Germans attempt to seize commanding heights
which include the renowned Tyrolean and Bava- and mountain passes.
rian mountaineers. The Germans select their assembly areas as
close to the enemy as possible to make possible
The Germans emphasize that all operations
a short assault. Supporting weapons are attached
will be of longer duration in mountainous coun-
to companies, and where feasible, to platoons.
try than in lowlands, and therefore make proper
allowance for the factors of time and space. For In defense, the Germans organize their advance
every 330 yards ascent or 550 yards descent they positions on the for\vartl slope, while the main
add 1 hour to the time estimate for covering a battle position with heavy-support weapons is
given distance on the map. Movements, com- located on the reverse slope. The greater part of
mand, and supply in mountain areas represent a unit often is held in reserve. This necessitates
sources of difficulty, according to the Germans. the organization of rclativcly narrow sectors,
which, however, results in an organization of
b. TACTICAL CHARACTERISTICS OF MOUNTAIN ground favorable for counterattacks.
WARFARE. The Germans divide their units into
numerous marching groups, which normally con- 5. Winter Warfare
sist of a reinforced infantry company, an artil-
lery battery, and an engineer platoon. In this Many of the techniques of German winter war-
manner the Germans counteract the danger of fare were developed from those of the mountain
ambush, since each group is able to fight inde- troops, which were adapted easily to conditions
pendently. The Germans locate their engineer of extreme cold.
units well forward with the advance guard so Ski patrols are the chief means of reconnais-
that they may assist in road repairs. The Ger- sance in snow-covered terrain. As a rule, the
mans realize that small enemy forces can retard strength of the patrol is a squad, reinforced by
the advance of a whole column and therefore they infantry soldiers traincLt1 as engineers, artillery
have single guns sited well forward. They also a l s o and a comtll~ulicatioll detachment. In
organize stationary and mobile patrols for flank a n k to normal reconnaissance missions,
protection. patrols obtain information as to the depth of the
The skill and leadership of junior commanders snow, load capacity of ice surfaces, and danger
are severely tested in mountain warfare, as forces of avalanches. These ski patrols normally blaze
generally are split into small groups, the efficient trails by marking trees or rocks and by erecting
command of which requires a high standard of poles or flags. Stakes are used to indicate the
training and discipline. Columns often are sep- extremities of roads.
arated by large areas and impassable country, and Under winter conditions, German units keep
since lateral communication is often very difficult, support weapons and artillery well forward while
command of deployed units becomes much more on the march. Their antitank weapons are dis-
complicated than over level terrain. tributed throughout the entire column. Ski
IV—47
I MARCH 1945 UNCLASSZFIED TM-E 30-451
Outpost with
•Passage for patrols .'Jliver ice ^.controlled mines-
Bunker for"*' .
&p-mmmortar '•. * Corduroy road
•-•sf->r ' -
' '.Swamp —
Hidden antipersonnelx
Embrasured
emplacement
Roofed Camouflage screen
emplacement
Machine-gun iobservation post
emplacement for infantry mortars
rj^ Emplaced’ heavy
ST machine gun
Emplaced
antitank gun
Mortar
Stone-roofed Bunkers for
bunker i81-mm mortars
Stone-roofed and %..
stone-walled bunker
, Antipersonnel
FfZ.l minefield and gap Concertina
) in minefield
A... "
Figure 23.—-Typical Gernlan zvirder positiofz along a river ilt k’ardia.
IV—48
I MARCH 1945
UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451
two or three companies, each of two or three headquarters would issue directives of a general
platoons. nature, and the leader of the smaller detachments
Battalions. would determine the method of execution. In
Regiments, consisting of several battalions. accordance with their strategic function, partisans
Brigades of several hundred men. almost always avoided pitched battles. If trapped
Units of several thousand men, of varying and forced to fight, they would follow different
composition and fighting value. courses according to their strength. Large bands
Divisional headquarters in command of opera- would fight it out, whereas smaller units en-
tional groups. deavored to disperse by small groups, infiltrating
Corps headquarters controlling a certain num- through the lines of the attackers or disguising
ber of brigades or regiments. themselves as harmless and peaceful civilians.
Scouting and reconnaissance detachments. Defensively, partisans fought with determination,
even ferocity, from behind well fortified and
Higher intelligence headquarters.
camouflaged positions, allowing the attackers to
In addition the 'Russians had signal organiza-
approach to close range, and then delivering con-
tions and special formations for demolition works
centrated surprise fire. In Warsaw, Polish par-
and bridging, mounted detachments, and in some
tisans fought in building areas for weeks with
cases even artillery and antitank guns. A special
much skill, inflicting considerable losses on the
ground organization was set up to serve the air
Germans.
forces which supplied the partisans.
(3) French fartisalz units. The composition (2) Fighting methods. The partisans carried
of the French partisan forces, according to the out guerrilla operations by conducting surprise
Germans, is: raids against headquarters, camps, and weapon
The squad consisted of four or five men. depots of the occupation army or by ambushing
military transportation fadiliiies, columns, or
The platoon consisted of approximately 30
c011v0ys.
1e11.
The company had approximately 100 men. When raiding columns, the partisans construct-
A battalion consisted of three or four com- ed obstacles along the route and then destroyed
panies. the first and last vehicle of the column. Railway
trains were destroyed by exploding the roadbed
(4) Wccrpons. The weapons of the partisans or removing trackage. Troops tryirg to escape
included rifles, light machine guns, light mortars, from trucks or trains were taken under fire. Be-
pistols, machine pistols, hancl grenades, explosives fore an attack partisans usually destroyed all tele-
and incendiary material. Battle units also had phone communications.
heavy machine guns, heavy mortars, and guns.
Partisan bands often changed their field of
(5) Unif00n.r. Partisans had no standard operations in order to carry out a given task, to
uniform. They WOW civilian dress and the most secure supplies, or to evade discovery and prevent
diverse uniforms of their own and enemy forces. encirclement. Strict discipline on the march was
Stocks of uniforms were maintained by raiding maintained. Marches were generally at night, by
German supply depots. routes known only to the local population. Parti-
(6) Ca9np.s. The partisans located their camp- san bands have marched 40 to 45 miles daily.
ing areas in inaccessible terrain such as dense A common ruse was to give the appearance of
forests, marshes, wooded mountains, and caves. greater strength by disseminating false informa-
The camps usually were fortified with field works, tion concerning partisan strength and armament.
dugouts, tree platforms, and minefields. Normal- Partisans frequently used military uniforms of
ly a number of camps were set up in adjacent the occupation army for purposes of reconnais-
areas with alternate camp sites prepared. The sance and requisitioning.
camps were complete \vith dumps, slaughtering For successful operation the partisans needed
facilities, bakeries, dressing stations, and weapon secret agents who could be found in almost every
repair shops. These camps were well guarded, village. The intelligence service of the partisans,
the personnel of the guard being composed of of necessity, employed large numbers of women
partisans or of voluntecbrs from nearby co1llI1lu- and children. In addition to collecting informa-
nities. tion, they were used as messengers between vari-
d. PARTISAN TACTICS. (1) Gcncral. Higher ous partisan groups. (Local civilian populations
IV—50
I MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451
usually were summoned to give assistance to the dicmt) and Secret Field Police (Gelz&c Fcld-
partisans.) polkri).
e. GERMAN ANTI-PARTISAN MEASURES. (1) The Germans emlhasizerl the equipping of
General. The Germans divide the measures to their anti-J’artisan miits with easily transportable
be adopted against partisans into offensive action and quick-firing wtal)ons, such as small arms,
and passive defense measures. Both constitute machine pistols. automatic rifles, rifles with tele-
specialized types of activity, brought aljout by the scopic sights, light and heavy machine guns, light
Jlarticular methods employed by the opponent. and medium antitank guns, light infantry guns,
Since the partisans are inferior in armament, light antiaircraft guns, and light flame throwers.
regular troops are inclined to underrate them and Heavier artillery, antitank and antiaircaft guns,
to act without due care and precaution. Accord- tanks, and armored cars, although they effectively
ing to German doctrine, dealing with partisans strengthened the forces, could not be employed in
demands increased vigilance, boldness, and ag- all situations and terrain.
i n in order to meet their extraordinary Clothing and equipage were designed to enable
cunning and cruelty. In addition, the Germans the unit to operate in all types of terrain and
considered that special training was necessary for under all weather conditions.
their own troops in order to overcome difficult The Germans realized the necessity of intensive
types of terrain such as woods, marshes. moun- intelligence work for successful anti-partisan
tains, and built-up areas as well as for fighting measures. Higher commanders kept situation
at night or under winter conditions. Experience maps based on information concerning the par-
taught the Germans that the success of their anti- tisans transmitted by all headquarters and units
partisan measures depended on proper coordina- of the armed forces, and by civilian establish-
tion between the German Armed Forces, SS, ments. Systematic observations were made by
police, and the civil administration, ignoring, security branches, such as the security service,
when necessary, territorial boundaries. the secret field police, and the military intelligence
(Abwchr) ; information was disseminated and
(2) Offensive, action. The Germans central-
exchanged by adjacent establishments.
ized the command and control of their anti-parti-
san measures and made arrangements in regard To provide all the necessary data for the tactical
to the fields oi responsibility between the supreme employment of anti-partisan forces, the Germans
command of the armed forces, the •S'.S"' Reichs- conducted intensive reconnaissance preceding
fiihrer and the Chief of Police. While in 1942- their operations. This was carried out by col-
1943 the responsibility for the organization and laborators, by mobile J)atrols. or by reconnaissance
direction of tnese measures rested with the su- aircraft. Collaborators were the only means of
preme command in operational areas and with reconnaissance employed when the projected op-
the SS Reichsfiihrer in the so-called Rcichskom eration had to he kept absolutely secret. The
missariat, the latter, upon acquiring increased interrogation of prisoners was considered one of
powers, assumed complete responsibility. the &&at , of information. The Germans
Subordinate to the SS R&lzsfiihrcr were the therefore abandoned their original practice of
Chief in Command of Anti-partisan Formations shooting captured partisans on the spot.
(Chef der Balldenkiilllpfvc,rbarrnc) and the senior When the Germans had adequate forces avail-
SS and police commanders, Lmcler whose com- able they attempted to encircle and annihilate par-
mand Army and Air Force units occasionally are tisan units. The planning for this operatiqn in-
attached. cluded the determination of the ground to be en-
All German troops and, in emergency, civilian circled, usually limited to the area actually known
establishments were prepared to engage partisans. to be held by partisans. The assembly area was
The Germans employed the following army units well removed from the areas to he encircled and
in combat against partisans: divisions, independ- was occupied in SUCJI a manner that the offensive
ent task forces, cavalry units, motorized units, intention was not disclosed. All forces taking
armored trains, service troops, emergency units, part in the operation moved from the assembly
and locally recruited units. In addition to these area so that they reached the encircling lines at
organizations, the Germans employed Navy and the same time. Lines were chosen which could
Air Force s as well as S S and police forma- be defended easily, such as lines of hills or forest
tions, including the security service (Sicherheits- paths across the direction of the advance.
IV—5I
I MARCH 1945
UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451
The Germans normally kept sufficient local and the leader of the partisans, ant1 the Germans USU-
mobile reserves armed with heavy support wea- ally placed a premium on the head of the leader
pons. The consolidation of the encircling line to encourage his capture or death.
was considered decisive for the outcome of the The Germans employed large numbers of heavy
operation, because partisan fighting patrols tested support weapons, tanks, assault guns, self-pro-
the German lines with the pbject of breaking out pelled antitank guns and heavy howitzers, when
through weak spots. The consolidation of the fighting the partisans in communities, and con-
encircling line followed the usual principles for centrated all available heavy jvcapons against a
defense, such as disposing forward battle out- single objective. The tactics employed followed
posts, drawing up fire plans for light and heavy the German combat methods for street fighting
support weapons, fortifying strongpoints for all- and combat in towns.
around defense, and keeping mobile reserves in The Germans also employed combat patrols
readiness. The precise method by which the en- against the partisans, copying the latter's methods
circled partisans were annihilated depended on with the object of harassing the bands and hinder-
the forces the Germans had available, on the ter- ing their assembly and suIq$-. sireas which
rain, and on the reaction of the trapped unit. were used regularly by the partisans for food
One method employed was the gradual com- requisitioning, or which they crossed on raids or
pressing of the encircled pocket, possible only in sabotage expeditions, offered good opportunities
restricted areas, because in large areas the encir- for the deployment of Gernlan combat patrols.
cling forces could not advance at the same rate, These patrols consisted of hand-picked, tough,
thus creating gaps through which partisans could well trained "Partisan Hunters" of platoon to
escape. Another method employed was to exert company strength. They oitcn wore civilian
pressure from one side of the pocket while the clothes or partisan uniforms.
troops on the opposite side confined themselves to
(3) Protection ~IZ~LISZITPS. Offensive anti-par-
defense. This method was used when the parti-
tisan operations were supplemented by vigilant
sans held ground easy to defend, such as a river
protective measures designed to safeguard troops;
course, a ridge of hills, or edges of woods. The
road, rail, and waterway communications and
Germans also utilized powerful wedges and split
traffic; industrial, administrative, and signal in-
up the defense pocket into several smaller pockets
stallations ; and growing crops and forest. pre-
which were mopped up separately. Another
serves.
method was to attack from the encircling line by
The Germans designated the security of troops
strong assault groups formed from reserves, in
as a command responsibility. As a rule the Ger-
cases where battle reconnaissance indicated that
mans did not billet units of less then company
the partisans intended to defend their center posi-
strength in lonely districts. All billets and camps
tion.
were organized for all-arountl defense, and all
When time and forces for an encirclement were guard rooms were made into strongpoints. Maps
not available, the Germans attempted to defeat showing the local partisan situation were con-
partisan bands by surprise attacks, intending to sulted before the march.
pursue and wipe out single detached groups. To protect railway installations the Germans
This method proved to be of value where a par- organized special protection forces whose task
tisan formation had not been able to consolidate included patrolling in addition to the protection of
its position. The German actions therefore were communication centers. Strongpoints were con-
dependent on the methods adopted by the parti- structed inside all installations and often along
sans. When they committed their forces for bat- the tracks.
tle, the German attack was carried out systemati- The Germans also organizctl special forces for
cally with concentrated forces and fire. When the protection of roads and waterways. These
the partisans attempted to avoid contact, the Ger- forces, "Sichcvzt~zgstvztppclz", were supplemented
mans pursued them frontally, while other units by military police detachments on the roads and
carried out enveloping movements. When the water police on the waterways.
partisan formation dissolved, however, the Ger- The ruthless methods employed by the Ger-
mans had to undertake reconnaissance to locate mans to maintain law and order are too well
their new assembly area before a new action could known to be discussed in this book. From the
begin. The primary target in such actions was killing of individual suspects to the wholesale
IV—52
UNCLASSIFIED
I MARCH 1945 TM-E 30-45I
slaughter of whole communities and the burning against airborne attack, the Germans organize an
of villages there is one long line of German all-around defense, giring particular attention to
atrocities and brutality. covering avenues of approach with machine guns.
f. GERMAN PREPARATION FOR PARTISAN I~'AR-
Observation posts arc set up on high points, such
FARE. Beyond doubt the Germans prepared and as church towers and terrain features to give early
are still preparing fanatical members of the warning of hostile landings. Such posts are Io-
National Socialist Party, SS, and armed forces cated also in rear areas, and are especially im-
for partisan activities as the territory occupied by portant in thinly populated localities, since wire
the Allies increases. One of Heinrich Himmler's communications are particular targets of enemy
main duties as commander-in-chief of the Home airborne troops. Special signals by church bells,
Army is supervising the establishment of partisan drums, or bugles arc arranged for alarming the
organizations and stay-behind agents in areas German mobile reserve units. These units, spe-
about to be occupied by the Allies. The Germans cially organized for the task of counteracting en-
have built up large stores of ammunition and emy airborne invasions and partisan activities
supplies, particularly in the mountainous areas of usually consist of motorized troops with machine
the country, and have established at various locali- guns and antitank guns mounted on their vehicles.
ties training centers for future German SS Par- Although the Germans consider it an error to de-
tisans. Women are included in this training pro- lay in committing these units, they stress that care
gram. As to the methods which the Germans are should be used to avoid enemy deceptive ma-
most likely to employ, no definite information can neuvers such as the dropping of dummy para-
be revealed at this time. However, it is recom- chutists.
mended that a study of the Allied partisan com- The Germans usually withhold rifle fire until
bat methods be made to obtain an approximate descc’nding 1)aracliutists are at close range, using
conception of possible German partisan activities. machine-gun fire at greater distance. They be-
lieve that fire is most effective immediately upon
the landing of the hostile force, before a consoli-
7. Anti-Airborne Operations
dation of position has been made. Enemy trans-
The Germans consider the use of mines and port planes are considered particularly good tar-
wire obstacles particularly effective against en- gets since they must reduce speed just prior to
emy airborne operations. They block landing the jump of the troops.
fields and areas where landings might be made The Germans appreciate the importance of im-
with S-mines, stakes, ditches, piled earth, stone, mediate action against airborne troops and when
and wood, nondescript vehicles without wheels, no alternative is possible they will commit in-
and other barricades. They also construct mine- ferior forces to coiiilx~t the hostile aerial itivasion,
fields and clun~n~y minefields. hoping to delay the attack until reserves can be
For the protection of important installations brought up.
IV—53
I MARCH 1945 TM-E 30-451
UNCLASSIFIED
CHAPTER V
most numerous defense works arranged in the the reserves to be kept close to the front SO they
greatest depth. But the defended zone is every- can begin the counterattack with minimum delay,
where made as strong as the available resources g. COMMTSICATIOSS. German fortified works
permit, and no terrain is left entirely without the commonly are linked together \vith communication
protecting fire of some permanent defense works. trenches to facilitate relief of personnel, ammuni-
d. SITING OF DEFES S E tion supply, and the care and evacuation of th-
and casemates in a fortified line are so spaced as wounded. In so:::e cases a group of defense works
to provide interlocking fields of fire between ad- is connected b\- a s~3;tem of tunnels. Signal com-
jacent works, yet they are not so close together munication is provided by telephone cables buried
that hostile artillery fire which misses one struc- in the earth, and often t&phonc~ communicate
ture will hit another. between the outside and the inside of a structure.
In view of the German theory as to the pur- Speaking tubes are installed in many of the works
pose of fortifications, the principle of "effect in case of failure of the telephone system.
before cover" is applicable; that is, a wide field
of fire is considered more important in siting a
position than cover or concealment. When pos- Section II. CHARACTERISTICS OF
sible, pillboxes r,nd casemates may be sited to per-
FORTIFICATIONS
mit both frontal and flanking fire. This is par-
ticularly important since German doctrine directs
that fortified positions be held even after the de- I. Principles of Design
fensive line is overrun by the enemy. The fire The basic considerations in the design of Ger-
plan of field artillery may be coordinated with the man fortificatioI:s are fire cfic c t . and con-
belts of fire from the fortifications so that concen- cealment. Fire effect has first priority; natural
trations can be laid on the areas where fire cov- concealment is used as much as possible by blend-
erage from the fortifications is relatively weak. ing positions with the surrounding terrain. Per-
c. FIELD WORKS. In accordance with German sonnel and supply shelters, in the construction
doctrine, concrete and steel pillboxes, and case- of which fire effect need not be taken into con-
mates are supplemented by extensive field forti- sideration, are completely below ground level, or
fications to lend flexibility and mobility to the de- as low as the water-table level permits. In order
fense, to engage the enemy before he gets close to present as small a target as possible to high-
enough to assault the main works, and to facili- angle fire and bombing, emplacements, pillboxes,
tate counterattack. Such field works are inter- and casemates are built no larger than necessary
spersed liberally throughout the Westwall and in- to permit crews to operate their guns,
clude minefields, .obstacles, fire trenches for in-
2. Construction
fantry weapons, and open emplacements for field
artillery. Although open gun emplacements are a. GESERAL. All permanent, fortress-type
intended to give supporting fire to pillboxes and works and many field works are of concrete re-
casemates, they also can cover dead areas between inforced with steel. Some field works, however,
the main works. are of masom-y, brick, or tinlber. Steel also is
f. SHELTER. The German practice is to provide used in concrete structures for beams, turrets,
all troops with adequate shelter against weather cupolas, gull shields, machine-gun loopholes, and
and hostile fire. Concrete pillboxes and casemates doors. These installations arc prefabricated and
often have accommodations for the gun crews, are assigned code or motlel Iilimbers. The con-
and open field works have underground shelters crete I\-arks themselves arc tlesignated by type
or dugouts adjacent to the firing positions. In a number and are constructed from plans prepared
fortified line, underground shelters are provided in the -\rmy Ord:lance Office.
in the rear of the battle zone for the reserves who b. THICKNESS OF CONCRETE. The usual thick-
are assigned to the counterattack. This is in ac- ness of concrete walls and roofs is 6 feet 6 inches
cordance with the German doctrine that reserves (2 meter:;) ; smaller thicknesses are found as a
should be committed as a unit, fresh, and without rule only in the small field works. In casemates
having had to sustain casualties or endure the the minimum thickness of the walls and roof is 6
strain of hostile aerial and artillery bombardment feet 6 inches, and generally increases commensu-
while waiting to attack. Personnel shelters enable rately with i ! ie caliber of the gt::i.
v—2
I MARCH 1945 UNCLFt~SI~i:r TM-E 30-45I
Figure 1—German three-way reinforcing rods and wooden forms ready for pimnntj m concrete.
GROUND LEVEL
AM MAGAZINE
AND ENTRANCE
figure 2.—Kitfgst(md.
GROUND LEVEL
THICKNESS OF
TURRET 3 4 "
GROUND LEVEL,
I;igurc 4.-—Purt,-ersicllzclkg.
V—4
I MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451
b. TOBRUK 58c. The most common type of foot of the s:airs has an opening for a machine
Tobruk is designated 58c by the Germans (see gun to keep attackers from entering the pillbox.
Figure 2). It also is called a Ringstand from A Tobruk pit is built into the front wall as an ob-
a rail that runs around the inside of the neck. servation or machine-gun post.
The rail provides a track for rotating a machine- (3) Loral tlrsigr1.7. Some pillboxes are found
gun mount, thus giving the gun a 360-degree \rhich do not conform to standard types and are
traverse. This type of Tobruk has- an ammuni- apparently of local design. The Germans often
tion chamber, which also serves as an under- construct a pillbox by mounting a steel turret on
ground entrance. an open emplacement, and many pillboxes along
c. MORTAR EMPLACEMENT. A Tobruk used the French coast were built by mounting a tank
as a mortar emplacement, such as Type 61a (see turret over a pit in the sea wall.
Figure 3), is larger than a Ringstand and has (4) Type 685 cascrnate. Figure 6 illustrates
a concrete base in the center of the pit for mount- a typical German casemate, Type 685, for the
ing the mortar. This type also is combined with 210-mm or 128~mm antiaircraft guns. Most casc-
an ammunition magazine. mates are of this siml)le design, consisting of a
d. Panzerstcllung. The German also have gun room with recesses for ammunition, but some
used a Tobruk as a base for a tank turret, usu- may provide quarters for the gun crew. The
ally taken from a French Renault 35 (see Figure walls and roof of Type 685 are 11 feet 5 inches
4). Such an installation, called a Pmzerstellung, (3.5 meters) thick. The embrasure permits a
has a turret armed with an antitank gun and a ma- traverse of 60 degrees and an elevation of 45 de-
chine gun coaxially mounted. The turret is bolted armed A number of similar casemates (Types
to a circular metal plate, which is rotated by hand 683, ted. 686, 688, 689, 690, 692, and 694) have
on wheels around a track in the top of the pit cmbrasures for a traverse of 90 degrees or 120
affording a 360-degree arc of fire. degrees. Additional protection and camouflage are
afforded by banking the sides and by covering the
4. Pillboxes and Casemates top with a Z-foot 6-inch layer of earth.
42'-7"
MACHINE-GUN
L03PHOLE
_T _
ANTITANK GUN
WITH STEEi SHIELD
MACHINE-6UN
LOOPHOLE
V—6
I MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451
GROUND LEVEL
DRAINAGE
APRON
-70-9"-
RECESS FOR
120 SHELLS 210-MM
OR
150 ROUNDS 128-MM AA
\ \ AMMUNITION
GUN ROOM
RECE FOR
120 CHARGES 2 1 0 - M M
OR
DIRECTION OF ENEMY 150 ROUNDS 1 2 8 - M M AA
TRENCH TO ENTRANCE
l'igitrc 6.—Typical cascmc'c, Type' 6S5.
v—7
TM-6 30-45I
I MARCH I 945
UNCLASSIFIED
RECESSES
EACH FOR
100 ROUNDS OF
AMMUNITION
k- 3l'-2
l;igurr 7.—Typical casematc, Type 677.
V—8
I MARCH 1945
UNCL.A33!? TM-E 30-451
h'iaurc ,V. F.mplaciiui a mobile .tied pillbox. 1 u/un 9.~-(.it'nmin ni.'hi/,- .,•/,.,•/ pillbox.
^^fS^K^^S^^^^^^^^^-f^^M:
figure 10.—Interior of mobile sleel pillbox shozuiny liyitre H . — l ' i e w Ihroimi •'.•,<; , v ,;\ n / mobile sleel
machiiie-iiun mount,
V—9
MARCH 1945
UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-4SI
c. MOBILE STEEL PILLBOX. The Germans also earth covering of 1 loot over the roof. Seventeen
have a mobile steel pillbox (Figures 8, 9, 10, 11) steel I-beams, 13 feet 2 inches long, support the
which is armed with a machine gun and manned ceiling over the interior compartment. Steel
by two men. The pillbox is constructed in two plates resting on the bottom flanges of the I-beams
sections, a top half and a bottom half welded prov provide an all-steel ceiling. Shorter I-beams sup-
gether. The top half contains the aperture, arma- port the ceiling over the doors and entrance stairs.
ment, air vents, and entrance door. Thickness of A camouflage flat-top is stretched over the trench
the armor varies from 5 inches at the apcrturc in the rear, which gives access to the entrance
to 2 inches at the sides and top. The bottom stair stairs, to conceal it from air observation. To
is only M inch thick, but is entirely below ground secure one side of the flat-top, a row of hooks
level when the pillbox is in place. is cast into the roof along the rear side of the
The total weight of the pillbox without s h e l t shelter. A Tobruk pit is built o one f the
ment or ammunition is 6,955 pounds. The aper- wings in the rear for observation. Although the
ture, which is seen on the left side in the photo- shelter accommodates only ten men, two entrances
graph, is divided into two parts: the lower part are provided to enable the section to deploy rap-
for the gun barrel; the upper for sighting. The idly when they are to man their positions nearby
machine gun has an arc of fire of approximately or launch a counterattack. Each of the entrance
45 degrees. The aperture cover is operated man- stairs is covered by a machine gun firing through
ually from the interior of the pillbox. Entry a a loophole in the interior wall at the foot of the
through a door, 20 inches by 23 inches, in the back stairs. Both entrances converge into a gas lock,
of the upper half. The door can be seen hanging sealed by three steel doors each about 1 inch thick.
open on the right in the photograph. There are All doors open out. To make thi c k . gren-
two openings in the top for periscopes, one over ade-proof, the vertical shaft is continued below
each seat. _the stovepipe and curved outward into the space
used for the emergency exit. A grenade dropped
A blower operated by a pedal provides ventila-
into the chimney thus will not enter the shelter but
tion. The ventilation holes on both sides of the
will fall outside the sidewall and explode harm-
pillbox also enable an. axle to be passed through
lessly. There are four ventilation shafts opening
the pillbox. \Vhecls are fitted to the ends of this
into the rear wall between the entrance stairs.
axle and the pillbox can then be towed upside
Two of these are dummies to mislead attackers
down. When installed for use, the sides and Two
who try to introduce smoke into the ventilating
are banked to blend with the surroundings.
.system to drive out the occupants. The blower
5. Shelters is driven by an electric motor, but the Germans
usually make provision for manual operation as
a. PERSOSNCL SHELTERS. (1) Purposes. The well, in case of power failure. To communicate
Germans stress the desirability of adequate shel- with the interior of the shelter, there is a tele-
ter for all troops. Persomlel shelters are built in phone at the head of one of the entrance stairs,
the rear of a fortified line to house the reserves and both a telephone and a s t a i r s , in the
and also in individual defense positions for and Tobruk. A telephone cable, buried deep in the
troops who man the installation. Some personnel earth, leads to neighboring installations.
shelters have accommodation ear t h , or
20 men, but it is the usual German practice to (3) Modifications in design. Modifications
house no more than ten men in one shelter. A may be made in the plans in order to adapt the
personnel shelter also may serve as a headquarters, shelter to the terrain; for example, the Tobruk
a command post, a medical station, or a signal may be built into the other rear wing, or the emer-
center. Types provided for these purposes are gency exit may be installed in the opposite side
similar in design and differ mainly in size and wall. Such changes are at the discretion of the
number of interior compartments. local construction authorities. Some types of per-
(2) Type 621 shelter, One of the most com- sonnel shelters have a steel turret built into the
mon personnel shelters (Type 621, for one in- roof for observation, and sometimes a machine
fantry section) is illustrated in Figure 12. It is gun is mounted in the Tobruk. However, the
constructed of reinforced concrete, with Ge rmans Germans insist that troops are not to fight from
ard wall and roof thickness of 6 feet 6 inches shelters, but are to use them merely as protec-
(2 meters). It is entirely underground, with tion tion while not engaged in combat.
V—IO
TM-E 30-451
I MARCH 1945
UNCLASSIFIED
TOBRUK PIT
FOR OBSERVATION
MACHINE-GUN
LOOPHOLE
DOWN COVERING STAIRS
48'3"
STEEL DOORS
OPENING OUT
MACHINE-GUN
LOOPHOLE
COVERING STAIRS
GROUND LEVEL
16'8"
MACHINE-GUN
LOOPHOLE
V—II
I MARCH 1945 TM-E 30-451
UNCLASSIFIED
TOBRUK
PIT
ENTRANCE
STAIRS
36 9
DOUBLE STEEL
DOORS TO GUN
COMPARTMENT
GROUNDS-
LEVEL
RAMP
v—12
I MARCH 1945 TM-E 30-451
UNCLASSIFIED
MACHINE-GUN
LOOPHOLE
35'6
MACHINE-GUN
LOOPHOLE
EYERGENCY EXIT
•3 6'- AA-GUN
EMPLACEMENT
5S"
.1
I V
6'S" \ N
•
I
MACHINE-GUN
LOOPHOLE
3'
t
DIRECTION OF ENEMY
V—13
MARCH 1945 TM-E 30-451
UNCLASSIFIED
MACHINE-GUN
LOOPHOLE
vb
CREW QUARTERS
•<6 3 T ER OF BUNK
DOWN
(0
MACHINE-GUN
LOOPHOLE
DIRECTION OF ENEMY (SEAWARD]
v—14
I MARCH 1945
u NCI.A: TM-E 30-451
V—15
I MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451
c. COMBINED SHELTER AND EMPLACEMENT. types usually are entirely underground and may
I'igure 14 shows a personnel shelter, with an open have a wall and roof thicknesses less than the
emplacement on the roof, known as Type L 409 standard 6 feet 6 inches, shelters designed for
("1," stands for Luftwaffe). This tyl)e will ac- supplies may have only one entrance; they or-
commotlate nine men, ant1 its tl<+ails are siniilar tIinaril\- have no emergency exit, machine-gun
to those of other lwsontwl shelters. Tyl)e L 409 lool~lioles, or ‘I’oln-uli.
is for a light antiaircraft gun. lnlt ill otlicrs of
the L 400 series the rooI ctll~~l;~cel~~ent is used to 6. Observation Posts
mount a searchlight (L 411) ) or a ratlio direction
The Germans haw constructed special works
finder (T,405j. In some tyl~s, tlw shelter be-
of reinforced coiicr~t~ as coa<t artillery observa-
low the gun eml~laccmc.nt is usccl as a battalion
tion ant1 conm~:md lwts. A typical olwzrvation
c011111m1d y s t (I, 434) or an ammunition maga-
post, Type 636 (for l\rmy C.‘oast i\rtillcry), is
zine (I, 407).
shown in I,'igur~ 1.5. Separate rooms are pro-
d. SUPPLY SHELTERS. The Germans have de- vided for ol~scrvntion, plo1tilig. radar, officers'
signed a numl)er of shelters for the storage 0I quarters, and enlisted men's quarters. A Giant
supplies, ammunition, and drinking water. Such Wi'trcbury radio tlircc~tioll fi~ltlcr is mounted in
rc IS.—Slots in the concrete pillars hold slcrl hurs across I he road lo serve tis a block.
V—16
I MARCH 1945 TM-E 30-451
the emplacement on the roof. For close defense, a. ANTITANK OBS'I AU.KS. (1) Dragon's teeth.
tllc,re arc two machine-gun loopl~ole~ covering the A prominent f<,aturc of the \\‘Mwall is the anti-
‘rc‘ar entrance: one in the exterior wall, and one tank ol)stacle C&XI by the Germans "dragon':;
in the interior wall at the foot of the stairs. teeth". These are truncated pyramids of rein-
'I‘llere arc quarters for t\vo officers and nine en- forced concrete. arranqd in irregular rows of
listed men, but since this tloc3 not accommodate four or five. ‘I’hc h + l t of the teeth varies sue-
all the persomlel on duty at the ol)servation post, cessiveljv from 2\ 'I fc,ct in the first row on the
a personnel shelter for one section is built nearby. enemy side to 5 fact ill the rear row, so that a
IGeld artillery observation posts in a permanent tank is made to belly on the obstacle. The teeth
tlefense line are similar to personnel shelters, with are cast in a cancrctc f(~uncl;ltion running from
tile addition of a steel cupola for the observer. front to rear, ant1 soIllc’tinl(.s also along each row.
to prevent the teeth from being tnpplccl over.
7. Obstacles Dragon's teeth are ~isunll~~ sited in long con-
tinuous lines, broken onlv where roads pass
The German tactical use of obstacles differs
through the line of ~IIFXK~CY ant1 whcrc the ter-
from the U. S. Army in that they install them rain is considered unsuitable for tank activity.
within the main battle positions. Obstacles are (2) E!Ul/Cl?f.S C’. ‘1‘11~ (;crmnns adopted the
covered by fire from concrete pillboxes and open Belgian de Coinicbt a!:titank obstacle, more often
emplacements. The Germans employ both fixed called "I~Iements C", \vliicli is illustrated in Fig-
and nicnd~lc permanent ol~stacles, constructed for ure 17. I fere a number of units ha\-v hccn fas-
the most part of steel, concrete, or both. The tened together to form a continuous antitank
most cninmnn types are tltisct-ihcd hclow. wall, lxit since tlie mirs l:a~ rcIllc,t-s in the front
V—17
I MARCH 1945 UNCLASSlFlED TM-E 30-451
Figwe 20.—Road passing through Westwall dragon's /ccth. Note (right) r~p,-~c//r/~ for -IrtJriz,tt,/ul .~~~~~~l hrr-s ~11ic~
rein be placed aeross the road as a block.
Figure 21.—Line of dragon's teeth of Westiwll. Note steel antitank barrier set at an anole m the road.
V—18
I MARCH 1945 ,UNCLA3S!Fi:D TM-E 30-451
bigure 22.—German double-apron barbed ivire. Note knife rcsls m the Inn l.-i/roiinil Crii/hti.
v—19
I MARCH 1945 TM-E 30151
UNCLASSIFIED
CHAPTER VI
Section I. HIGHER ORGANIZATION OF Within the Armed Forces the lines of dis-
SUPPLY tinction between the Armed Forces High Com-
mand and the Army High Command are not
1. Government Direction of Production always clearly dra\\-n as far as procurement is
concerned. The Army being by far the largest
Economic production in Germany is highly cen- branch of service, the Army High Command
tralizcd and under complete governmental con- (OKH) may in certain cases act for the Armed
trol. The Ministry for Armament and War Pro-
Forces High Command (0837). In addition,
duction (Reichstninstcrium fur Rushing und
the Army procures a proportion of the materiel
Kriegsprodulztion) under Albert Speer controls
used by the IVaficn-SS. The bulk of this materiel
production of war material and ammunition;
is transferred to the lVa#el~-SS through Army
the Xlinistry for Economic Affairs (Reichswirt-
channels of supply and not through the system
schaftslllillisteriu111) controls all other industrial
of depots maintained by the SS High Command.
production; the Ministry for Food and Agricul-
ture (IZciclzsllLilzistcri2111L fiir Emiihrung mu!
Laud~zuirtsclzaft) controls food production. Among 3. The Army
them these three ministries control production of The Army High Command (OKH) has the
the supplies for the German Armed Forces and, direct responsibility for a well functioning army
within the limitations imposed upon Germany by
supply system. Its wartime supply functions are
the insufficiency of her natural resources and
divided into two tlistinct phases. The first phase,
the effects of the Allied advances and bombings,
centering in the Zone of the Interior, is supervisctl
they are able to gear the production to the needs
of the war machine. by the Chief of Arm)' Equipment and Con-
mander of the Replacement Army (Chef dcr
2. Estimate of Needs and Placing of Orders.
Ncercsriistzwg at/d IlcfclM~abcr dcs Ersatz-
l~ccrcs) who organizes the procurement of sup-
These are essentially General Staff functions, plies; their storage in suitably placed depots, and
since they involve present and future operations ope r a t i o n s home and field units. It is
and capabilities. On the basis of High Con-
his duty to interpret high command directives on
mand directives, the detailed estimates of the
an over-all t h e basis. He determines n-hat
number or quantity of each article of supply arc
proportion of supplies is essential for USC by
worked out by the technical branches concerned;
t h y must be adjusted to the industrial, labor, and garrison and training units, what amount can
raw material potentialities of the nation. be sent to the front, and which areas are in the
best position :o issue supplies. The second phase,
The three branches of the Armed Forces and
the Field Army (I;rltlhccv) supply system, is
the Wajj-‘cn-SS establish their procurement pol-
icies on an interservice basis and coordinate the controlled by the Chief of 1:ield Army Suppl>
use of railways, canals, and roads for militarx and Administration (Cclzcralquarti~nlzcistcr or
traffic. In addition, for a number of particularI!- iicn. Qu) ~410 administers the sending of requi-
critical items, the Armed Forces High Command sitions to depots established by the Chief of Army
has created special dcbpots which arc at ils es- Equipment and the receipt, storage, and distribu-
clusivc disposal (~rrfii!/Llllgsdc~otsj. tion of supplies in the field.
VI—I
I MARCH 1945
UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451
Section II. SYSTEM OF SUPPLY WITHIN 2. Main Army Equipment and Ammunition Depot
GERMANY Organization
CHIEF
OF
ARMY ARMY
EQUIPMENT ORDNANCE
OFFICE
FACTORIES
CORPS
CHIEF AREA
ARMY ADMINISTRATION
ORDNANCE
OFFICER
AMMUNITION
AND
EQUIPMENT EQUIPMENT OKW
DEPOTS PARKS DEPOTS
TRAINING i FIELD
AND ARMY
GARRISON UNITS
UNITS
I
ADMINISTRATIVE RELATIONSHIPS
PHYSICAL FLOW OF EQUIPMENT AND AMMUNITION
'••i
VI—3
I MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451
Although the depots normally handle ma great manufacturers. The main function of these is
variety of items, they sometimes t o to facilitate transfer of vehicles from factories
particular types. For example, air reconnaissance to equilment depots.
has revealed large concentrations of motor trans- As the number of HZa is relatively limited and
port at the Chemnitz HZu and large artillery as they are perhaps the largest supply depots with-
stores at the Berlin-Spandau HZa. It is known, in Germany, they have been heavily bombed by
however, that these centers also hold large stores Allied air forces. Despite much bombe d b y
of equipment which cannot be s to re s HZa have shown great recuperative powers. t h e
\Yhen depots specialize in only one type of a i r . importance of many IlZa, however, has dimin-
ment, they have their specialti-s incorporated into ished, while that of the IINZa has increased
their names. This group includes the Army Tank through the dispersion of incre a the s e d
Equipment Depot (~iccrcspa~~zer~c~lganlt or supply centers.
IZPZa) at Magdeburg-Kijnigsborn; the Army
Branch Tank Equipment Depots (Heerespanscr- Fist of known Army Equipment Depots
n&en~ew$inztcv or HPNZa) at Frankfurt an der (branch depots not included) :
Oder, Natimburg, Bielefeld, Creslau, Oppeln,
Kassel, Xltengrabow, and Olmiitz; the Army Sig- Corps Area Installation Location
nal Equipment Depot (Hcercsaez~ga~~zt~zac~~~i~~te~z I HZa KiJnigsberg
or E-IZaNachr) at Berlin-Schiineberg; and the 11 HZa (liistrow
II HZa Stettin
Army Branch Signal Equipment Depot (Hcercs- III HZa Berlin-Snandau
ncbcnzeugamtnachrichten or HNZaNachr) at III UZaWuhr Berlin-
TYien-Strebersdorf (l’ienna). Schoncberg
IV HZa Chemnitz
In addition to their storage functions, the HZa IV II Za XamnlmiK
and HNZa adjust and test newly arrived mate- V HZa Ulm
rir:ls and repair damaged equipment. Several of VI HZa Unna
the HNZa are engaged almost entirely in repair VII HZa Frcilassing
functions, and most equipment rep a i r VI [ HZ a Inprolstadt
VII HZa Miinchen
ordnance. signal, and engineer equipment servic- VIII HZ.ii Breslau
ing sections for inspecting newly manufactured VIII HZa Bricg
equipment and repairing damaged equipment. VIII HZa Kotzenau
Specialization in items repaired may occur: thus IX HZa Kassel
the tank equipment depots repair tanks and ar- X HZa Hamburg-
Glindc
mored vehitiles which have been so a r - dam- XI HZa Hannover
acedc that. they cannot be repaired in the field. XI HZa Magdeburg
The equipment depots are staffed by officers XI HPZa 1Iagdeburi:
Konigsborn
and noncommissioned officers of the Ordnance XII IlZa Mainz-Kastcl
Branch who control the workers, usually civilians XIII IlZa Amberg
or soldiers serving a prison sentence. XVII HZa Wels
XVII HZa Wien
-~\n Army Equipment Depot is divided into two XVIII IIZa Hall (inTirol)
parts: the storage depot (Lager) and the work- XVIII II Za Salzburg
shop (JJ’e~fistn/t). The storage depot is subdi- XX IlZa Graudcnz
vided in departments (Be&kc), each of which XXI 11 Za Poscn
specializes in one type of equipment. Depending
on the type of equipment handled, the workshop c. AMMUXITIOX DEPOTS. Army Ammunition
will have separate sections like an arms D e p o t s Depots (Hccresmunitionsanstaltcn or HMa) and
(IVaffen-Wcrkstatt), an optical instruments Army Ammunition Branch Depots (Hecresmuni-
c-orkshop (Optischc-Wcrksiatt), etc. tionsnebcnanstaltcn or HMKa) are the main Ger-
man centers for the storage and issue of ammuni-
The Army Equipment Branch Depot is m a n
tion. Frequently they concentrate upon particu-
ized along the same lines as the Army t i o n .
lar types of ammunition; for example, the HMa
Depot.
at Miinsterlager, Celle, Dessau, Augsburg, and
Associated with equipment depots Ne u Neu Ulm are probably principal centers for the
Armed Forces depots attached the s t o r a g e storage of chemical warfare ammunition.
Vi
I MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451
VI—5
I MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451
In addition to storing and issuing ammunition, Most of the vehicles repaired belong to the
the HMa and I1;lINn participate in its production Wchrmacht and the 5"5"; but vehicles from semi-
by assembling and filling shells and by manufac- military and civilian agencies are also repaired.
turing fuzes and other accessories. The HKP vary widely as to the number of vc-
Like the equipment depots, the ammunition hicles repaired daily and the average number held.
depots are staffed by personnel of the Ordnance At Berlin, where there are three HKP, each ma;,
Branch. Employees include civilians, soldiers, hold as many as 1,000 vehicles and repair 30
prisoners of war, and large numbers of foreign daily. Most HKP, however, hold 60 to 100 ve-
laborers. An HMa usually has the following de- hicles and have a daily repair average of probably
partments : less than ten vehicles. Since many of the vehicles
Administration received are damaged beyond repair and must
Manufacture (filling and packing of shells) be scrapped or cannibalized, the daily repair aver-
Shipping > ages are not as inefficient as may appear upon
Personnel administration initial glance.
Motor pool A typical HKP includes a reception point
Because of the large number of well distributed where vehicle defects are inspected, a large num-
ammunition depots, many of them uncleground, ber of workshops, and final inspection points
Allied air attacks have not interfered materially where vehicles are either dispatched to units or
with their functioning. Eut the increased number sent back for further repair. Frequently there
of foreign laborers employed by these depots un- are branch administrative offices (Zzeleigstellen)
doubtedly has lowered their productivity. and workshops located as far as 40 miles from the
d. AREA OF DISTRIBUTION. Generally a depot Main Office (Hauptstelle). The number of HKI’
is allocated a definite geographical distribution in a corps area varies greatly: at one time Corps
area. The depot may be the exclusive German Area VI was known to have nine HKP, while
distributor of a particular item, or it may be Corps Area V had only four.
merely the exclusive distributor within an allotted 'Supplies of spare parts and tires are procured
area. Thus the Ulm HZa distributes types of from Central Spare Parts Depots (Ze~fralcr-
engineer equipment to all areas, while it issues snt~tcillagcr or ZE‘L) and Tire Depots (Reifelz-
Czech small arms to less than half of the corps laser) which are controlled by the HKP, or di-
areas. In addition, a depot may be assigned to a rect from factories.
particular army for the supply of, materiel re-
c. MEDICAL PARKS. The Berlin Main Medi-
placements and the repair of its damaged materiel.
cal Park (Hauptsanitiitsjark) and the Corps
3. Corps Area Equipment Park Organization Area Medical Parks (Wehrkreissanitatsparkc)—
a. GENERAL. The corps area parks comple- one per corps area—receive all types of surgical
ment the equipment depots in the handling of apparatus, drugs, bandages, and dispensing equip-
motor transport, engineer equipment, and anti-gas ment from factories and hold them for distribu-
equipment, and form the principal centers for tion to hospitals within their corps areas and to
the distribution of horses, veterinary equipment, Medical Collecting Parks (Salnrnclsanitiits~arke).
and medical equipment. Requisitions for repairs The latter are subsidiaries of the Corps Area
reach the parks from both home and field units. Medical Parks and serve as collecting points for
Primarily, a park is responsible for servicing its medical supplies to the field forces. In certain
allotted area; usually it also is charged with the cases the Main Medical Park and Corps Area
supply and maintenance of designated units of the Medical Parks may deliver their supplies direct to
Field Army. the field forces.
b. MOTOR TRANSPORT PARKS. The Home Mo- The Main Medical Park in Berlin occupies a
tor Transport Parks (Heimatkraftfahrparke or special position as it holds critical drugs and hos-
J1KP) received damaged or impounded vehicles pital supplies for distribution to Corps Area
such as motorcycles, trucks, and staff cars, but do Medical Parks and Medical Collecting Parks. In
not handle tanks and armored vehicles, or any addition it tests newly developed pharmaceutical
newly manufactured,vehicles. There are several preparations and medical equipment and furnishes
such parks in each corps arca, controlled by the the Corps Area Rledical Parks with "standard"
Home Motor Maintenance District Headquarters samples of medical cqnipment. The Main Medi-
(Nci777ntl:r-nftfalrrbrcivk) of the corps area. cal Park is subordinate to the Chief Army Medi-
VI—6
I MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451
cal Inspector, and the Corps Area Medical Parks Home Fortress Engineer Parks (Hcimatfestuag-
are subordinate to the Corps Area Surgeons; spio~ricvpa~/~c), which supply fortress engineer
there is thus no chain of command leading from units; a number of Ilomc Railway Engineer
the Main Medical Park to the Corps Area Medi- Parks (Hcinratciscl2bahnpiol2icvpavke) ; and a
cal Parks. few Gas Defense Equipment Parks (Gassclzutz-
There is also a group of Medical Booty Col- grrtitcpavkc).
lecting Points (Sanitiitsbcutcsam~I2ClsteIlc~z) that
4. Clothing and Individual Equipment* Supply Or-
are centers for the collection of captured medical
ganization
equipment. This is sorted and tested prior to
shipment to the medical parks for distribution. a. PROCUREJIENT AND ADMINISTRATION. Pro-
Although the medical parks participate in the curemcnt of raw materials is the special function
repair of damaged medical equipment, it is very of the Armed I:orces Clothing and Equipment
likely that much of the recovery work is done by Procurement Office (1Il’cl~r~~~aclrtbrsclzaffztlzgsu~~~t
the manufacturers. Rrklcidzrrlg und Ausriistuiig) at Berlin. The raw
d. VETERINARY PARKS. Veterinary supplies materials are then issued to the clothing depots
are procured through veterinary parks. The Army of the three In-an&es of the Armed I?orces and
Main Veterinary Park (Hccr~sl~auptz~ctcritlir’r- the SS which manufacture, store, and issue cloth-
park) is directly subordinate to the Veterinary ing and various items of individual equipment.
Inspector. It is the central procurement agency In addition, damaged, captured, or impounded
for veterinary equipment. Upon orders from the clothing may be sent to the clothing depots for
Veterinary Inspector the Army Main Veterinary repair and rcissuc.
Park will supply the Home Veterinary Parks In the Army the highest administrative echelon
(I~rilrrat~,c,trritliirpal-fir) with veterinary cquip- is a section in the staff of the General Army Of-
ment either directly or by ordering it for these fice (Allgrmcinrs Hcc,t-c.snrrrt/ Stnh /Rrklcidung)
parks from commercial manufacturers. Horse- which issues all directives on clothing and equip-
shoeing equipment is always ordered from civilian ment. It controls the work of the Army Cloth-
factories. ing Depots ( /1'ecrcsbeklcidnngsiunlcr or HE A).
The Home Vctcrinary I’arks, numbering one Within each corps arra the supply of clothing is
in each corps arcn, and tbc Army Main Veterinary directed by Skction E (Sachgebiet E) of the
T'ark receive veterinary equipment such as shoe- Corps Area i2dministration (Wcllrkrcisvcmxzl-
ing equipment and veterinary medicines from the fung). Thus for all practical purposes the nor-
manufacturers and issue it to units and horse mal Army Clothing Depot is subject to a dual
hospitals, besides repairing and salvaging dam- control.
aged veterinary equipment received from units. b. CLOTIIING D~RO~S. One or more Army
e. HOKSE PARKS. Young horses purchased by Clothing Depots are generally found in each corps
the Army are sent to Army Remount Depots area. Thcsc HEA reccsive raw materials from
(Ilrrrcsrcllzo~ztciilIlfcr) for their maintenance and which thev mnnufncturc clothing, insignia, shoes,
training until they are suited for field use. They tents, canteens, l)lankt,ts, and other items of in-
are then delivered direct to corps arca riding dividual equipment. They exercise control over
schools, to home units, or to Home Horse Parks Testing and Repair Sections (T’crzwaltu~zgsund
(Fl~~irrrat~fcrdc~a~~k~) which forward horses to ~~zsta~~dsrt=~r~~~/clnhtril~r~~gc~~), which repair dam-
Field Army units. aged clothing. and Army Clothing Dumps and
As the occupied territories formerly furnished Branch I)umps (Hccrcsbeklcidungslagcr und
most of the horse replacements for the German Nrhcnlagcv), which assist in the forwarding of
Army, their loss will greatly aggravate the alread! clothing to the field forces.
noticeable animal shortage at a time when the Specialized types of clothing &pots inch&
German Army is becoming increasingly depentl- Collecting I‘oints for \\%ter Clothing (SunmzeI-
cnt on horse transportation. Stcllrrl fiir Jl'illtrr-hrkl~.irlzllrgj, Army Clothing
i. OTHER PARKS. A sizeable number of Home Repair \\‘orkshops (Flrrrcsbekleidzr~lgsilzstand-
I<nginecr Parks (Hrinzatpiojzicrparkr) have been .~rt,-zlngszcl~~kstc’ittcll) \vhich presumably do not
reported functioning within the corps areas, sup- handle newly manufactured clothing, and Cloth-
plying home and field units with engineer equip- ing Processing Centers (I)urchsclzlrusu~lgsstc~l-
ment. In addition, there are at least five special ' Ausriistung tics Mamies. See note on page 2.
VI—7
I MARCH 1945
UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451
Zen) which are believed to be centers to which commercial channels and only bread and forage
reinforcements requiring refitting are routed be- were procured from the Army bakeries and
fore their departure for the front. In addition, rations depots, in wartime the supply of rations
rations depots may store and issue clothing for from Army depots has become the rule. To ful-
certain areas. fil this task, the Higher Rations Stores or EVM
c. AREA OF DISTRIBUTION. The HBA issues were formed at the outbreak of war from many
clothing and individual equipment to units within of the already existent Army Rations Main De-
its assigned territorial area. Many HLiA are also pots (Hccrcsz'crpflegungshauptiiwtcr) or (HV-
responsible for the supply of particular armies HA).
in the field; to facilitate the transfer of clothing The most important type of rations depot is
to field units, issues may be made to Army Cloth- the EVM. The EVM control Army Rations
inp Dunws and Branch Dumps which in turn Main Depots (HVHA) which in turn control
issue clothing and in.dividual equipment to field Army Rations Depots (Hccrcnrrpflcgungsamter
tinits. or HVA) and Army Garrison Rations Depots
(H ecrcsstand ortvcnvaltung Vcrpflcgungsabteihin-
5. Rations Supply Organization ion Although the number of such installa-
tions in a corps area varies, one corps area is
a. GENERAL. The German Army depends for known to have two EVM, three HVHA, nine
its transportation to a large extent on liorsc- HVA and at least 12 Army n in e
drawn vehicles; forage is therefore considered to pots. There are probably 40 EVM in Germany,
be of equal importance to human rations, and the 36 of which arc listed below.
supply of both is handled by the same agencies.
In the follolving tlcscription of the supply or- The echelon of the depot generally determines
ganization the term rations includes forage as its size and stock. Each EArM is expected to
well. maintain stock sufficient for one month's rations
b. PROCUREMENT ^ND ADMINISTRATION. The
for 300.000 men; this would amount to over
over-all planning of rations and the laying down 10,000 tons of food. An IIVIIA retains food
of policies for the procurement &d organization reserves of perhaps 3,000 tons, while an HVA
of supplies is done for all branches of the Armed usually stocks several hundred tons. An EVM
almost invariably has a bakery and good rail
Forces at the Rations and Procurement Group
facilities; lower echelon depots may lack bakeries
(Amtsgrztppc Vupflcgwzg zmd Bcschafuug) of
and may have only road connections.
the Army High Command/Administration Office
(Ok’H /Nccrcsvc7~~~aZtul2gsalnt). At the same The rule as to size of depots is not inflexible.
time the Rations and Procurement Group directs A large share of the stores normally retained by
the supply of rations to the Field Army and to the the EVM may be divided among HVHA and
Replacement Army. Regional control of supply is HVA for additional protection from air raids and
exercised by Section C (Snclzgcbiet C) of the to facilitate the loading of rations trains. In
Corps Area Administration. other instances, Army Garrison Rations Depots
Although all rations depots procure a propor- handle more stores than HVHA or HVA of the
tion of their supplies direct from local producers, same corps area due to abnormal troop concen-
they clraw most of them frdm the Higher Rations trations in their particular garrison areas.
Stores (Ersnt~~c~pfl~gll?~gnllagacirlc or EVnJ) While specialization is not typical of the rations
to which they are subordinate. In procuring ra- depots, since both human and animal rations are
tions for distribution, the EVX purchases food found in all typrs, a limitc~ t l of HVHA
from all parts of the corps area in which it is and HVA tend to have concentrated stores of a
located and arranges for the exchange of goods particular rations component. As an example,
with other corps areas. In many instances pro- one HVHA, now captured, maintained a reserve
curement of a particular rations component, such of thousands of tons of oats in addition to its
as flour or fodder, may be delegated to one of the stores of troop rations. In certain farming dis-
depots subsidiary to the EVJI. tricts Fodder Collecting Points (Ranhfuttcrsam-
C. RATIOXS DEPOTS. While in peacetime the mclstcllcn) specialize in the collection and storage
troops purchased their rations mostly through of forage.
VI—8
I MARCH 1945 TM-E 30-45I
UNCLASSIFIED
LOCAL
PROCUREMENT
IGHER RATIONS
STORE (EVM)
ARMY RATIONS
MAIN DEPOT (HVHA)
4- ^
I
ARMY GARRISON ARMY RATIONS
RATIONS DEPOT DEPOT (HVA)
DISTRIBUTION TO
REGIONAL A PARTICULAR
DISTRlBUTlON FIELD ARMY
VI—9
I MARCH 1945
UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451
List of known Higher Rations Stores (1 mate of the probable rations strength prepared by
Corps Arecl ' Location the army 28 days in advance.
I Instcrburg Lower echelon depots may become involved in
I K6nigsbcrg the supply of the field armies in a number of
I Lotzen ways:
II Stettin
III Berlin (1) When an HVA or / / / 11A is delegated to
III Potsdam assist the EVM in storage of field army rations.
IV Dresden (2) When an HVHA is assigned the function
i IV Halle of procuring and storing a particular compo-
IV Leipzig
IV Torgau
nent of the ration for the entire corps area.
V Aalcn (3) When any of the depots located in the
V Ulm theater of operations are turned over to a field
VI Minden army to be used as an Army Rations Depot
VI Miinster
VII Miinchcn (Annccverpflcgungslagcr).
VIII Breslau
VIII Liegnitz 6. Fuels and Lubricants Supply Organization
VIII Oppeln
IX Erfurt a. GENERAL. Because of the critical condition
IX Frankfurt am Main of German fuel supply, the collection and distri-
IX Kassel bution of fuel have largely been retained by the
X Bremen Ministry of Economic Affairs through its Cen-
X Hamburg
X Rendsburg tral Petroleum Office. Both the Central Petro-
XI Hannover leum Office and the Armed Forces High Com-
XI Magdeburg mand exercise authority over the W1F0 Com-
XII Mainz nomic Research Company), which is the organi-
XIII Barnberg zation responsible for the administration of depots
XIII Ntirnbcrg
Linz
supplying fuel to the armed forces.
XVII
XVII Wien b. PROCUREMENT. The Ministry of Economic
XVIII Graz Affairs, in collaboration with the Armed Forces
XX T)anzig High Command, establishes the proportional al-
XXI Posen
B.u.M Olmiitz lotment of fuel to the Armed Forces and to ci-
B.u.M Prag vilian users. The refineries, producers, and import-
ers then are directed to ship supplies either to the
d. AREA OF DISTR~RUTION. The WIFO main- WIFO Depots or to air force, naval or commer-
tained by the Army supply food and c i a l to cial storage depots.
Army, SS, and Air Force units present in their c. TYPES OF DEPOTS. The main WIFO de-
localities. Naval units generally are p o t s by pots controlled by the Central Petroleum Office
N a v a l R a t i o n s D e p o t s (~~l~rirlcvc~~flcg~~~~~~~~z-consistconsist of Main Strategic Depots (Zcntralhaupt-
ter). The process of local. supply is relatively lagcr), which are usually underground, and of
simple, as units contact the nearest 1Iain depot Main Transit Depots (Zcntralumschlaglager),
and thereafter automatically arc which to a which store supplies for transshipment. In addi-
depot for their supply of rations. If t i o n tion to supplying the largest share of fuel received
finds itself unable to provide full rations by all by army fuel depots, these depots handle a portion
of the fuel used by the Air Force and Navy. The
units in its area, it receives assistance o f other
Main Strategic Depots have storage capacities
depots in the corps area.
ranging into hundreds of thousands of tons of oil.
In addition to supplying local needs, the EVM For this reason the Allied air forces have bombed
are the principal centers for the supply of them them with great consistency. The importance of
to the Field Army. Ordinarily, a group of t h e the Main Transit Depots has decreased since the
becomes responsible for the rations cuttin g a cutting off of Rumanian petroleum imports.
particular army; then the EVM must make cer- The smaller 1VIFO depots, controlled by the
tain that the army has about 10 days' supply of Armed Forces High Command, consist of Army
rations on hand at all times, based upon an esti- High Command Fuel Supply Depots (OKH
VI—IO
I MARCH 1945
UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451
Naclcsrhrrl~ta~~klagcr) and subsidiary Army I:uel ways, The Transportation Headquarters are lo-
supply .Depots (Hcercs~~achschzrbtanklager). cated at the seat of a Railway Directorate
These depots are directed solely to the supply of (Reiclzsbahndircktiorr) and control the area of
.\rmy units. Very likely, commercial storage de- one or more Railway Directorates.
pots situated in the Theater of Operations have The Transportation Headquarters are the basic
been converted into LVIFO depots of this sort. units through which all military agencies must
Not controlled by JVIFO are the depots situ- deal if they require rail or water transportation
ated near the producing plants (~Vlarschtanklager for units, freight, or casualties. The Transpor-
or Fuel Replacement Depots) which send fuel tation Headquarters make the transportation fa-
supplies to the depots mentioned above as well cilities availahle and issue orders as to how and
as direct to the Field Army. when they arc to be used.
The staff of the Transportation Headquarters
7. Waffen-SS Supply Organization is organiz<s(l into:
a. RELATION TO ARMY SUPPLY. While the Section TX: Troop movements for the Armed
Wa-fen-S‘S is generally self-sufficient in its Zone Forces
of the Interior supply, it depends upon the Chief :2uxiliaries of the Armed Forces
of Army Equipment for most of its tanks, self-
Transportalion of prisoners of war
propelled guns, and other heavy equipment and
for the repair of many of its vehicles. Indeed, Section lb: Freight for the Armed Forces
Waflm-SS units have a higher priority on heavy Armament goods
equipment than do army units. To what extent .1rmed 1;orccs travel
the S S reciprocates by supplying army units has Section IVb: Hospital and convalescent trains
not been determined. Subordinate to the transportation headquarters
b. S S DEPOTS. Of the SS depot centers; are railway station headquarters (Bahnhofskom-
Oranienl~urg is the most important as it contains mauda&lrrell) and officers stationed at inland har-
the Main SS Equipment 1)epot (SS-Zcugamt), bors (Hafmo@5eur). ‘l’hese headquarters and
the SS Central Distribution Center (SS-Zcntral- officers are stationed there for the maintenance of
~~rlassu~zgsfclZc), the S S Signal Equipment Depot order and as liaison officers with the local rail-
(SS-Nacllrichte~lzrz~gtr?~1t), and an SS Motor way and harbor officials.
Transport Depot (SS-h7maftfahr.mugdepot).
Other important SS depot centers are Berlin,
Dachau, and Prague. Since the SS depots suppJy Section SYSTEM OF SUPPLY OF THE
the other branches of the SS as well as the Waf- FIELD ARMY
JcPSS with rations, clothing, and certain typtss of
equipment, they cannot be considered as purely I. General
military depots.
The supply system of the Field Army is simple
8. Transportation
and flexible. Its main objective during combat
is to replace all supplies used during one day of
All military transportation by rail or on inland combat by the beginning of the next day. Rules
waterways comes under the direction of the Chief and regulations are not mandatory; much dis-
of Transportation (Chef des Tramportwesem) cretion therefore remains with the supply officers
at the High Command of the Armed Forces who are tancouraged to move supplies as far for-
(OKW). lie works through a chain of trans- ward as possible without reloading, to salvage all
portation headquarters which arc usually subor- usable materiel, and to limit expenditure of sup
dinate to the Army but act for the whole of the plies as far as possible.
;2rmed Forces. The activities of the transporta-
tion headquarters cover the occupied territories as 2. Staff Control
well as Germany. a. SUPPLY DIRECTIVES, The commanders of
The Transportation Headquarters (Transport- Field Army units conduct supply within their
I~o~~zn~a~zda~lture~z) are regional liaison offices ofcommands in accordance \zith directives laid down
the Armed Forces with the German State Rail- by the Army High Command. For this purpose
ways (Dcutsche Rcichsbahw) and the authorities their general staffs are provided with staff officers,
controlling the transportation on inland water- analogous to our G-4's, who are called lh and
VI—II
I MARCH 1945
UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451
who are responsible for all matters of transport the supply of organic corps troops, the Corps lb
and supply. JVhen the Zb, acting in the name of supervises the distribution of supplies from corps
his commander, issues supply directives, their ex- clumps to lo\\-cr echelons.
ccution usually falls to the following: (5) At division headquarters, the Division Ib
(1) Arms and Equipment Section (W and makes his requisition to the Corps 10 on the basis
WatG). of requisitions and reports from the troop units.
(2) Intendance Section (IVa or I&enduntur), He controls the division services of supply and
dealing with rations, clothing, and pay. provides a systematic suppl!. of reserves of all
(3) Medical Section (ZYb). kinds for the troops. Like the Army Ib, he is in
(4) Veterinary Section (IY C). the normal chain of supply.
(5) Motor Transport Section (V).
3. Requisitioning and Procurement
(6) Supply Troop Commander (Konz~m&eztr
a. REQ~-ISITIOXISG. (1) The normal channel
tlcr Nacllschlrbrl-2cppcw), commanding the organic
of requisitioning is from trool) unils through regi-
or attached supply troops.
ment, division, and corps to army.
b. STAFF OFFICERS AND DUTIES. The staff
(2) An army generally ~~1s requisitions for
officers concerned with supply in the Field Army
ammunition, fuel, 111otor transport, horses,
and their duties are as follows:
weapons, spare parts, and most other types of
(1) At Field Army headquarters, the Chief
equipment to the l:ieltl Army. \vhile requisitions
of Field Army Supply and iidministration (Gejz-
for rations, clothing, medical cclttil)m~nt, and vet-
c,rnZ a~jav~ir,-lllrist‘,r) is directly responsible to
erinary equipment go direct tc~ home depots as-
the Chief of Staff of the l*?eld Army and con-
signct lto the army. JYhilc Ihcc. arc the usual
stantly is kept informed of the supply situation
channels, many variations arc kno\vn to occur.
of the various armies. One of his main func-
For instance, an ariily inay ~.rlltl a requisition for
tions is forwarding the requirements of the armies
certain special I\-capons a:ltl chemical \\-arfare
to the Chief of Army 1:quipment. He regulates
equipment directly to the Chief of Army Equip-
the eyacuation of prisoners and wounded, and
ment, or an army may send a rations requisition
the USC of communications in the theater of oper-
to the ITield Army in addition to forwarding the
ations. Large stocks of materials, including cap-
requisition to a home depot.
tured materials and mobile supply trains, are
under his control. Important repair centers are (3) Rcqnisitions arriving at the I + l d r1rmJ
also maintained under his control. usually are forwarded to the C‘hicf of A r m \
Equipment, who passes them down to a desig-
(2) At army group headquarters, the Army
nated home depot. In son:c cahcs. ho\\-v\-er, the
(;roup Ib intervenes only. \\-hen a critical situation
Field Army ma\ scntl requisitions directly to a
requires action, since arnij P groups are not in the
home depot \vithout routing tllcll~ through the
normal chain of supply. _~(Zrmally his most im-
Chief of Army l*?luipment.
portant function is the supe;vision of security
(4) A requisition tllay bv filled at any !cvel b>-
units which safeguard supplies in the communica-
the echelon which has the necessary supplies avail-
tions zones. Units attached to an army group are
able in its storage centers.
supplied through the army in whose area they are
located. b. P R O C L X X E X T . Requisitioning is supple-
(3) :\t army headquarters, the Army Ib niented by two methods of ficsld procurement: liv-
(Obcvqzlarticrrlzcistcr) administers the collation ing off the land and the WC of captured materiel.
and forwarding of requisifions, the receipt of sup- (1) Living off the land may 1~ acconlplishecl
plies from Zone of the Interior depots, the distri- either by local 1)urchasc or I)\. outrl,‘(rllt cc,nfiscntion
bution of supplies to l$:er echelons, and the of locd supplies. Such l”-~~~c~lurc seldom is suf-
maintenance of import&t dumps and repair ficient to supply all the rec~uircmenls of units. In
centers. some areas, nevertheless, it has consitlerably les-
(4) At corps headquarters, the Corps Ib scned the German supply problem, as in Italy
{Quarticrmcistcr), who always has been a link in \vherc much food, clothing, ammunition, and
the chain of requisitioning, recently has been as- equipment is locally procured.
signed a role in the chain of supply, although the (2) The employment of captured materiel has
larger proportion of supplies Still pass direct from always been a favored ljracticc in the German
army tlutnps to divisions. In'addition to handling Army. In the of?ensive beginning in December
VI—12
1 MARCH 1945
UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30.451
1914, directed against the Americans holding the improvement over the conditions that existed in
St. Vith-Bastogne area, the Germans apbarently the early stages of the Russian campaign, when
expected to keep their tanks operating by the seiz- German railheads \vtbrc on an average from 90 to
ure of American fuel dumps. The German sol- 120 miles behind the front troops.
diers frequently were clothed \\-ith American c. FORWARD OF IIAIJ.~IEXDS. (1) Ar~zy parks
uniforms and operated with liberal amounts of alId dumps iAvmee Parke und I,ager). Arm\
captured Czech, British, French, and Russian, as fuel, rations, and ammunition dumps are almost
well as American weapons and equipment. invariably forward oi army railheads, while arm\
equipment parks generally are in the vicinity of
4. Principal Installations the railheads.
(2) Corps dumps (KOY/LS Izager.). If arm!
a. REARWARD 01: RAILHEADS. (1) Collecting installations are far to the rear, corps dumps ma!
stations (Samnelbahnlztife). Shipments of less be set up between army and division ; in such
than a rail carload are sent to these stations and cases the corps tlumps function as advanced army
combined into carloads and train shipments before dumps distributing to tlivisions.
being routed to the railhead. (3) DiG’on t1~1rrp.s ( I)hi.sio~ls I*ager), The
(~2) F orwardijlg statiom (WeiteyZcitungsta- dump system may bc I)ushid for\\-ard c’vc’n into
tiolzc/l). Rail shipments that are not unit-loaded the division area, but this is the exception rather
for one organization may be forwarded to the than the rule.
army through one of these stations. (4) Distributing points (Azcsgabestellew).
(3) Distributirzg statiom (Vcrteilcybalwh.iife). These are maintained by divisions and possibly
When a large number of units are dependent upon other echelons in their areas for the distribution
a single railroad for their supply, a distributing of rations. fuel, and ammunition. IVhile stores
station may be set up to regulate the dispatch of are not gc~nerally retained at these points, small
supplies to the proper railhcad or unloading point; accumulations may occur.
apparently the combined functions 6f the collect- (5) CollectiHI/ points (Sammelstellen). Al-
ing, forwarding, and distributing stations ap- though called collecting points, these centers,
proach the functi0n.s of the U. S. regulating which are maintained I)y army and division; serve
station. as supply points for new and repaired equipment
(4) Sz~pply collecting arm (Nachsclmbsawt- as well as collecting points for damaged and cap-
nrclgcbictc). Reserves of ammunition, fuel, and tured equipment.
rations are kept loaded in trains in these areas (6) Reloading poirrts (U~~lsclrlagstcllerl).
subject to disposition by the Chief of Field Army When long road movements arc involved, reload-
idministration and Supply. ing points may 1~ set up 11~ army or corps to
(5) Field Arinv payks, bases, arid depots facilitate supply niovem~nts.
(Hccy~x Paykc, Stiitzpunktc, ztrrd La<gcy), Pri- (7) S1qply poirzls. Units lower than divisions
marily conccrncd xi-it11 the maintenance, repair, have points analogous to collecting and distribut-
and forwarding of vehicles, including tanks and ing points.
armored vehicles, these I?eld Army installations
may be located well to the rear of the railheads.
5. Distribution of Supplies to Field Units
(6) :f~rrly parks (Armee Parkc). Some of
the arm!- equipment parks may be located to the a. C K M M R . SCHEME OF DISTRIBUTION. (1)
rear of the army railb~ad5. !%pplies are transported by rail from home de-
b. RAILIIEADS (Kopfbah/lhdfe). Rnilhcads are pots to arm!- railheads where they are picked up
located as far forward as possible. I\l~ilc this l)y army supply -columm and transported to army
generally results in army (drmcc) raiiheatls, each dumps and parks. Division supple columt~s re
of which supplies a number of divisions or a corps ceive rations, fuel, and ammuni;ion at army
(in the latter case the railhead may be called a dumps, and rquipment at army parks. They
corps railhead), a division railhead for each divi- carry the rations, fuel, and ammunition to divi-
sion is established whenever possible. On the sion distrihutirg points. and the equipment to
Western Front, depending on the nature of the division collecting points. At these points, sup-
terrain and the effectiveness of Allied bombings. plies are transfcrrcd to battalion supply columns
the milliead is found from 10 to 50 miles—usuall\~ and carried to battalion or company supply points
about 25 miles-—-from the front. Thil; is a great where the supplies arc’ turned over to the troops.
VI—13
I MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451
(2) While this is the u:;ual ilou. of supplies, it c. DISTRIBUTION OF AMMUNITION. The home
may he modified in a number of ways, most of ammunition depots forward supplies to the Army
which are shown in Figure 2. Operational con- Ammunition Dumps (Armccmunitionslager)
ditions are the cause of most modifications of the which usually store from 3,000 to 6,000 tons.
usual system of distribution. Hence, if the army Any forward army dumps taken over by corps art-
and divisions are short of trucks or gasoline, col- called Corps Ammunition Dumps (Korpsmu-
umns from units as low as companies may be nitionslager). From these dumps, the ammuni-
forced to go as far as 20 miles to receive supplies tion is taken to Division Ammunition Distribut-
from army railheads and dumps; if the lower ing Points (nivisiollsaltsgabcstcllcn). One or
echelons lack means of transportation, army sup- more well camouflaged distributing points are es-
ply columns may be used to bring supplies to the tablished, located out of the effective range of
troops; if Allictl strafing is expected, supply Allied artillery and, if possil on J l c .
movements may be limited to the hours of dark- tected from tank attacks. Ordinarily artillery am-
ness ; if units a,rc stationed in the near vicinity munition and infantry ammunition are handled by
of army clumps, they may draw their supplies different distributing points so as to facilitate the-
direct from the dumps. loading and unloatling of sul)plics. In some cases-
b. DISTRIBUTION OF RATIONS. Normally Division Ammunition Dumps (Divisioiismuni-
home rations depots ship supplies direct to Army tionslager) are set up in the division area, espe-
Rations Dumps (Ar~eeveupflcgzlllgsEager). A cially if the front lines have been stabilized. From!
number of such dumps may be set up, each with the divisions, ammunition is sent to infantry and
stores of less than 100 tons. In some cases, these artillery ammunition supply points maintained by
clumps have been known to store small amounts regiments, battalions, and companies. As Ger-
of clothing, individual equipment, and office man regulations permit the setting up of tem-
equipment. As they are not permanent installa- porary ammunition dumps at these points, smalli
tions, they may move from time to time. For- reserves may be present only a few miles behind!
ward army dumps sometimes are controlled by the front lines.
corps and called Corps Rations Dumps (Kor#- Unused ammunition, empty shell cases, packing-
verpflrgu~~gslugrr) ; in such cases, the corps cases, and faulty ammunition must be returned
dumps supply the division and corps troops, while by the troops to army dumps from where they
army duml~ supply units and individual detach- are sent to the home areas. The rapid return of
ments attached to army headquarters, and form this material is considered as important as am-
a permanent organization for the support of munition suppl!..
future military operations. Rations supply with- d. DISTRIBUTION OF FUFXS AND 1 .UBRICANTS.
in the division is handled through a rations tlis- Fuel from home fuel depots or from Field Army
tributing point (Verpfiegut~gsnz~sgtrbcstcllr). mobile reserves is directed to the railheads. Some-
Supplies are received at this point and are dis- times the fuel is kept loaded in tanker trains
tributed to division units. Usually livestock is (Eisenbahntankstellen) near the railhead and
sent to field butchery plato JnS for dressing, and transferred from these directly to fuel columns,
flour to field bakeries for b- ead production. but preferably it is laid down in 20- and 200-
(1) A butchery platoon' can process the fol- liter containers in Army Fuel Dumps (Armcc-
lowing number of animals per day: betriebesstofflager) forward of the railhead. From
these dumps the fuel is taken forward to Division
40 beef cattle equal to 40,000 meat rations. Fuel Distributing Points (Difisionsbctriebsstof-
80 pigs equal to 24,000 meat rations.
fausgabcstellcn) or, in the case of some motorized
240 sheep .a.*.....9..equal to 19,000 meat rations.
and armored divisions, to Division Fuel Dumps
(2) A field bakery company can produce be- (Divisionsbetriebsstofflagcr). Fuel is forwarded
tween 15,000 and 1’3,200 bread rations, accord- from the division area to lower echelon supply
ing to the weather and the time of the year. After points and to fuel points that are set aside for the
passing through the rations supply points of the use of single vehicles (Tankstellen fur Einscl-
division units, the supplies finally reach field kraftfahrzeugc). The latter may also be supplied
kitchens and troops. Field kitchens of two types from the arm\: fuel stores.
are found: large, with a capacity for supplying e. DISTRIBUTION OF CLOTHING AND INDIVID-
125 to 225 men; and small, with a capacity for UAL EQUIPMENT. Stores are dispatched from
supplying 60 to 125 men. the Zone of the Interior to the field rations dumps
VI—14
>
•RATIONS'—• T
AMMUNITION-* R
0
HIM! 1 0
BATTALION P
COLLECTING OR COMPANY QUIPMENT-- S
POINTS SOPPLY
COLLECTING POINTS
POINTS
A. GENERAL FLOW OF SUPPLIES
COLLECTING
AREA CORPS
RAILHEAD
B. VARIATIONS Of RAIL FLOW
II I t 1 |i I' 1 II I $ CO
>
CORPS: CO
RAILHEAD
REGIMENTAL
POINTS
and to field equipment parks and collecting points, Tank Spare Parts Depots (rclrl=c,,-cr-.sat=tcil-
from which the stores are distributed to units. Zagf7), r\rniored Car Spar” l’arts Depots (Park
f. DISTRIBUTION OF EQUIPMEST. (1) Equip- serspaliwagcnersatcsteillagcr), and Tractor Spare
ment is handled by parks of two different cate- Parts Depots (Zw~~firaft~~a/agcncvsat~tc~iIlngcr). The
gories : the Herres, or Field Army type, and the Depots furnish supplies to maintenance sections,
Armee, or army type. Although performing func- workshop units, army parks, and Field Army
tions analogous to those of the Zone of the Interior parks.
Home (H&at) and Corps Area (Wrl~vkreis) (5) Army Parks (AY~JICE parkc) are pri-
Equipment Parks, the field parks have a number marily for repairs but they also arc supposed
of distinct characteristics. They are concerned to maintain a reserve of between 5 and 10 per
only with military vehicles. Furthermore, they cent of the arms and equipment of the army, and
are dependent upon Zone of the Interior depots, to forward equipment either directly or through
parks, and factories for fifth echelon maintenance. collecting points to units. An army has the fol-
Lastly, the field parks are responsible for the lowing parks:
storage of reserve equipment as well as the dis- (a) Infantry l’ark, ior infantry weapons
tribution of new and repaired equipment. and trucks.
(2) The most numerous Hecrcs type park is (b) Artillery Park, for artillery weapons
the Field Army Motor Transport I’ark (Z~WW.S- and trucks.
kruftfuhrpark or NeKP). Unlike the Home No- (c) Anti-gas I?luipm~nt I’Nli, for gas
tor Transport Park, the HcKP normally does all masks, decontamination suits, anti-gas clothing,
repairs itself, without farming vehicles out to and smoke equipn~ent.
workshops, with the already existing repair facili- (d) Engineer Stores l’ark, ior cnginccr
ties which it customarily takes over. Usually a materials.
number of HcKP are established in each army (e) Signal Park, ior radio and trlcphone
group area. Each HEKP may hold a reserve of materials.
about 200 new vehicles in addition to vehicles (f) Motor Transport Park, for vehicles and
arriving from home equipment parks and depots, spare parts.
and damaged vehicles coming from Army Motor (g) Army Equipment Park, for harness,
Transport Parks (Ar~~zcefiraftfahrparke or horse carts, cooks equipment, and gentral items.
AKP). In conjunction with army parks, the (17) JIedical Park, for medical equipment,
HeKP establish and maintain gasoline stations at (i) Veterinary Park, for veterinary equip-
certain selected points, usually along important ment.
roads. h’ot ascertained are the functions of re- (j) Horse Park, for riding and tlraft horses.
ported Motor Transport Repair Parks (Kraft- (6) N’hen equipment is forwartlcd from army
fahrillstalzdsct,-2tlzgsparkc) and 1Yinterization to division, it passes either directly from the army
Parks (Wi~ztcrlagcr) which may be specialized parks to Division Equipment Collecting Points
HcKP or HeKP branches. (Divisions~criitcsan~~~zclstelle~t) or through an
(3) Perhaps even more important than the Field Army Equipment Collecting Point (Aralcc-
Army Motor Transport Parks are the Field Army grriitcsalllI/zclstcNc) to the division. In turn the
Tank Parks or Bases (St~itzptmktc~). These pre- division directs the equipment to the supply points
sumably are established on the basis of one per maintained by its units. Equipment repaired by
army group. Their importance is increased by the field maintenance sections and works!lop units
fact that armies do not ordinarily maintain fixed may be returned directly or through any of the
installations for the repair of tanks, although collecting or supply points to the troops; because
armies may have semi-permanent tank work- the procedure is greatly variant, Figure 6 pictures
shops. The tank bases are reception or control this latter flow as only direct to the troops.
centers from which tanks are dispatched to work-
shops in the near vicinity for repairs, or returned 6. Supply Movement
to home depots and factories for fifth echelon a. RAILROAD SUPPLY TRAINS. (1) Stmzdard
maintenance. sQpZy traim. German logistical manuals outline
(4) Also under Field Army control are Spare the use of standard rations, ammunition. and fuel
Parts Depots (Ersatzteillagcr), Tire Depots supply trains with a maximum net load of 450
(Reifcnlagw), Track Depots (Glcishcttcnluger), metric tons (or approximately 500 short tons)J
VI—46
I MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451
on a standard gauge (1 feet Sx inches) railway. (5) Horse snugly trains (Pfrvdrrsat:5ige)
The text-book theory has generally been followed consist of 55 cars, each holding eight riding or
out in practice, although in some cases l i g ht light draft horses per car or 440 horses per train;
more locomotives have been sighted pulling $ x six heavy draft horses per car or 330 horses per
usually long fuel trains, and in some areas stand- train; or four very heavy horses per car or 220
ard rations trains seldom are used. Standard horses per train.
equipment supply trains, with great variations in (6) Signals and engineer construction ma-
net loading weights, also are employed. In to.it terials trains (Baustoffsiigc) average 40 cars, of
cases, however, equipment of all kinds is which which 39 are open cars, with a net tonnage of
on the same train. about 820 metric tons (900 short tons).
(2) Ratiom supply trains (Verpflegzilzgsziige), (7) Tank trains carrying up to 25 medium
with an average of 40 cars per train may t anks tanks or up 10 S heavy tanks have also been re-
posed as follows: 1)ortetl. The average number of cars per tank
(a) Iron rations: 300,000 full and 300,ooO train is about 33, with widely varying net loads.
half iron rations, totalling 442 metric tons. (8) Mixed equipment trains are very frequent
(b) Full rations with fodder: 180,000 human and may contain from 25 to 60 cars with a total
and 40,000 animal rations, amounting to 454 net tonnage of up to 850 t o
metric tons. These may be loaded into three b. ROAD SUPPLY COLUMNS AND TRAINS. There
parts, each containing 3 days' supplies for 20,ooO are four typc~s of roa t l columns in the
men and 4,ooO animals. German Army:
(c) Full human rations with no bread but (1) Motorized columns (Kraftwagenkolonnen)
only baking materials: 300,000 rations, are, are, in general, employed on good roads. They
450 metric tons. can cover up to 125 miles per day. They are
organized into very large, large, and small motor
(d) Flour train (Mehlzzrg) : 833,000 rations,
transport columns with a capacity of 120 metric
amounting to 450 metric tons.
tons, 60 tons, and 30 tons respectively for the
(e) Oat train (Hafrl-r/(l) : 90.000 rations. transportation of supplies other than fuel. In
totaling 450 metric tons. addition, mountain divisions may have a special
(f) Animal trains (Viclxiigc) : 360 cattle lo-ton capacity column. l?uel generally is trans-
weighing 180 metric tons, 1200 pigs weighing 120 ported in motorized fuel columns of two types
metric tons, or 1800 sheep weighing 72 metric —heavy columns with a minimum load of 50
tons. cubic meters of fuel, and light columns with a
(3) A~lLmzfnition supply traills (dlzclzitiolzs- minimum of 25 cubic meters. Motor transport
ziige), with an average of 30 cars per train, are columns are designated with reference to their
of three types: employment as Field Army, army, corps, or divi-
(a) Unit-loaded trains, loaded according to the sion motor truck columns.
proportion of different types of ammunition (2) Animal-drawn columns (Fahrkolonnen)
needed by a particular division. normally have capacities of 30 or 17 metric tons,
(b) Caliber unit trains, in which each car is and mountain animal-drawn columns 15 metric
loaded with approximately 15 metric tons a n d tons. In general, they are equipped with one-
short tons) of ammunition of a specific caliber. team wagons; in cavalry units two-team wagons
(c) Single caliber unit. trains. in \vhich all cars are used. According to German training instruc-
are loaded with ammunition of the same caliber. tions, well cared for and trained horses can cover
(4) Fuel supply trains (Brfrirhstofff-iige) of 12 to 15 miles per day and under favorable con-
two types are used : ditions up to 20 miles, with a day of rest follow-
(a) 20 gasoline tank cars, holding between 340 ing. If oxen are cmploye t l , rate of movement
cubic meters (around 89,800 gallons) i s 440 is slower. The Germans have been relying more
cubic meters (around 116,200 gallons) of fuel. and more upon animal-drawn columns for the
(b) 25 cars, holding gasoline in 200-liter (53- movement of their supplies.
gallon) and 20-liter (5-gallon) cans and carrying (3) Pack trains (Tragtierkolonnen), generally
400 cubic meters (105,600 gallons) of consisting consisting of 40 mules or horses each, usually are
and five cars with oil, engine oil, gear oil, paraffin, employed in mountainous terrain. A pack train
and (in winter) anti-freeze barrels and cans. can carry up to 5 tons, but its capacity and speed
VI—17
I MARCH 1945
UNCLASSIFIED
TM-E 30-451
are dependent on the trails and grade. Even in quired 80 tons a day -when inactive and some
level country, pack trains usually march more 1,100 tons during a day of h~~\ry fighting. When
slowly than foot troops. engaged in defensive, mol)ping-up, or minor of-
(4) Mountain carrier units (Gebirgstriigerein- fensive activities, the divisiuns required supplies
Ifeitol) consist of mountain carrier battalions and in amounts somewhere between the two extremes.
companies whose men are employed in terrain By far the most important variable in this cam-
where not even pack animals can be used effec- paign was the amount of amnlunition expended;
tively. Each man can carry between 35 and 75 requirements of fuel and equipment also varied
pounds of materiel on his back. considerably, while rations and clothing consump-
tion remained relatively static. Expenditures de-
SUPPLY COLUMNS AND TRAINS pended upon the nature of the action involved,
Capacity Capacity the types of units eligaged, the zone of action,
(metric (short the season of the year, the amount of materiel
toll-s) tow)
available for consumption, and the facility with
Very Large Motorized C o l u m n . . . . . . . . 120 132
which supply movements could be made.
Large Motorized C o l u m n . . . . , . . . . GO 66
Small Motorized Column 30 33 b. E S T I M A T E S OF TOTAL REQUIREMENTS.
1,arge Animal-lha\vn C o l u m n . _ . 30 33
Small Animal-Drawn C o l u m n . . . . . . . 17 18% When the varial)les cvidcnt in the 1941 Rus-
Mountain Animal-Drawn Column 15 16% sian campaign have become relatively constant,
Mountain Motorized C o l u m n . . . . . . . . . 10 11 as is the case at present, the German supply re-
Pack Train 5 5y2 quirements can be estimated with some degree
Mini- of accuracy. Under present contlitions the aver-
mum Mini- age total supply requirements per (;crman soldier
Amount mum are estimated to vary as follo\vs :
(cubic Amount
meters) (gallons) _ To/al p01f11d.s
Character of fightiiuj per man
Large hlotorized Fuel C o l u m n . . . . . _ . 50 13,200
iu area per day
small Motorlzctl Fuel C o l u m n - 25 6,600
Inactivity 5-10
C. SUPPLY ROADS. Whenever possible a sup- Mopping-up 15-20
ply road is designated for each self-contained unit I)efensive fighting (but not ajiain<t a
major Allied push) 20-2.5
such as a division. In general, the main route of Heavy dcfexsive fighting 25-.;O
advance of the unit is designated as its suppIy Offensive fighting 25-50
road. This principal route may be called a Roll-
Dalzn, or rolling road, to distinguish it from any 2. Rations
secondary supply roads. When the main suppIy a. H U M A N RATIONS SCATXS. The daily ration
route is used for troop movements as well as for quantity (Portionsatz) is the amount of food con-
supply purposes, it generally will be called a sumed by one man for one thy. It consists of
Duvcllga?tgssfrasse, or through road. Great im- three meals, the noon meal amounting to one-
portance is attached to the upkeep of these routes half of the total, the evening meal to one-third,
and the placing of gasoline stations (Ta*tkstellen) and the next morning's brcnkfast to one-sixth.
at strategic points close by the routes. The Armed Forces High Command has laid down
an over-all plan specifying the maximum amount
of any ration item that may be served. The
Section IV. MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS amount depends upon two factors: the duty class
of the man receiving the ration, and the com-
I. Total Requirements ponent class of the particular item being served.
a. VARIABLES INVOLVED. The determination There are four main types of rations served to
of the over-all requirements necessary to main- troops. Ration I (T~er~prglclr!/ssafs I) is for
tain German troops presents a number of diffi- troops committed to cotnhat. for those that are
culties. This is best shown by a review of the recuperating from combat, and for troops sta-
German supply expenditures in Russia in 1941. tioned in Norway north of 66” N. Lat. Ration II
Armored divisions averaged some 30 tons daily is for occupation and line-of-communication
when inactive and about 700 tons a day when troops. Ration III is for garrison troops within
engaged in heavy fighting; infantry divisions re- Germany. Ration IV goes to office workers and
VI—18
I MARCH 1945
UNCLASSlFlED TM-E 30-451
nurses within Cerma!iy. Hospital cases may fall in transit either on carrier or hy foot. It con-
within any of these classes depending on the sists of approximately 700 grams of bread, 200
seriousness of the cases. grams of cold meat or chc~se, 60 grams of bread
The most important items of the component spreads, 9 grams of coti'ee (or 4 grams of tea),
classes are as follows: (a) bread; (b) meats, soy 10 grams of sugar, and six cigarettes. Thus it has
bean flour, cheese, fish, and eggs; (c) vegetables; a total weight of about 980 grams.
(d) puddings and milk; (e) salt, mustard, vine- (2) Iron ration (Eiscnw Portiofq). An iron
gar, and other seasonings; (f) spices such as ration consists of 250 grams of biscuits, 200
pepper, cinnamon, and cloves; (g) butter, lard, grams of cold meat, 1.50 of preserved vegetables,
marmalades, fats, and bread spreads; (h) coffee 25 of coffee, and 25 of salt. Total weight is 650
and tea; (i) sugar; (j) spirits and wines; (k) grams without packing and 825 grams with pack-
tobacco. ing. An iron half-ration is composed of 250
Substitute issues may be made within a com- grams of biscuits and 200 grams of preserved
ponent class but not among different component meat; thus its total weight is 450 grams without
classes. Thus the daily maximum allowance of packing and 535 grams with packing.
vegetables for a soldier is 60 grams* of dried
vegetables, or 1200 grams of kidney beans, or 400 (3) Combat Package iGrosskampfpiicken) and
grams of salted vegetables, or equivalent quanti- Close Combat Package (Nahkampfpticken). The
ties of any of about 30 other substitutes. It is not Germans have begun to use these types of .rations
possible to predict which items will be served on for troops engaged in combat. They include
any given day. The following chart, however, sets chocolate bars. fruit bars. candies. cigarettes, and
forth a likely breakdown of these maximum possibly Ijiscuits.
ration allowances. c. ANIMAL K.~TIONS. An animal ration is the
1~. SPECIAL TYPES OF HUMAN RATIONS. amount of food consumed by one horse, draft
(1) Mlwch mfim (Il~arsclzvcrpflegzcIzg). The ox, dog. or carrier pigeon for one clay. The
march ration is a cold food ration issued for not quantity of an animal ration allowance (Ratiolw
more than three or four consecutive days to units sate) depends on the type of animal, the area in
which he is serving, and the content of the ration
* In dealing with captured German documents, the he is being fed. Horses, for instance, are dividetl
;\merican soldier \vill invariably find the rations allow-
into four groups: draft horses of the heaviest
:mces computed in grams or kilograms. A gram equals
.0353 ounce or .0022 pound. A kilogram (1000 grams) breed, draft horses of heavy breed, saddle-horses
equals 35.3 ounces or 2.2 pounds. and light draft horses, and small horses. On the
VI—19
I MARCH 1945
UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30.451
men, with the guns, and as company an{1 battalion (:i otller exp~tlabl~ sq)plics, however, it is pos-
reserves, while less than one full unit of issue sible that three units of fire are judged by the
is retained as a division reserve in division col- Germans to 1~ suflicicnt to maintain an army for
umns and dumps. The exact cluanti:y issued t:) a period of roughly eight to ten days.
each man is largely determined by the amount
held by the battalion and company as their rc-
serves. The following charts exemplify the units
Section V. EVACUATION
of issue found in infantry and artillery units of
an army.
I. Maintenance and Repair of Equipment
~1mmunition Issues (Rounds) for a J701ks
Grenadier Division: a. GI:SEI:.\I.. I’crhaps the fundamental Ger-
Probable
man princil)le of rcI)air and maintenance is that
Army cquil~ment should be repaired as far forward as
Diui- Rc~erz~ l)os5ible.
Forward siou (Unit of Practically all the installations that deal with
Weapon* Issue Reserve I.we)
repair and maintenance of equipment also partici-
O-mln autotnatic pistol... 18 16 17 pate in the flow of sulq)lies, 1~0th in transferriiq
9-mm machine p i s t o l . 690 512 GO1 repaired equipment back to units and in moving
7.92-mm macliine pistol. . 720 540 630 •
7.92-mm rifle .... 99 75 87
newly manufactured equilniient to units (see Sec-
7.92-mm rifle (for trool)s tions II ant1 I I I ) . In the following paragraphs,
other tha11 infantry therefore, they lvill 1~ trcntctl solely from the
trool)s) ........ 25 20 22 point of view of rearbvard flow.
7.92-mm semi-auto rifle. 159 135 147 b. ?.[OTOR TRASSI~OIX. 1lnintcnance of an in-
Rifle grenatlc launcher... 75 70 70
dividual vehicle is the responsibility of the driver
7.52.mm L.!JG ....... 3450 2505 2977
7.92-mm LMG (for arty and the crew, hut for repairs it is sent to one of
and A T troops) 1350 1020 1183 a number of repair centers. TYhile the piocedurc
7.92-mm H v M G ...... 6300 4750 5525 that determines which center shall undertake the
8%mm bazooka 5 5 5 repair has changed from time to time, it probably
81-mm mortar 150 126 138
is determined by two factors: the number of
l-70-mm mortar 150 90 120
37-mm A A 1200 none** pk working hours; and the facilities needed to effect
75-mm inf how 192 151 171 the repair. Thus maintenance (Insta~zdsct~ungs)
ii-mm :\T ( m t z ) . . . . . 150 100 125 detachments and sections probably carry out re-
i5-mm A T (SF’) 255 — — pairs requiring less than four working hours with
105-mm gun how 225 126 175 the tools at their disposal, while mobile field work-
1%nlm how .,......... 150 60 105
shop (Wrrfisfatt) units cirry out repairs requir-
* Not included are 75-mm gun and flame thrower. ing less than 12 working hours. If the damage in-
** A A ammunition reserves are usually kept by army flicted is too extensive for the facilities of the
and not by division.
mobile workshops, the vehicle is sent to an Army
Units of Issue for Artillery Units: Motor Transport Park (JKP) or to a Field
I Veapon Number of Rounds Army ;\Iotor Transport .Park (H&P). The
37-mm AA 1,500 difference of functions llctn-een these two types of
75-mm AA 300 installations is not clear: it is likely, however, that
88-mm AA 300 the more difficult rcp;:ir j:J;s arc sent to the
105-mm qin .................. 125 HcKP, nhile the /lZ<P handle repairs that can
150-mm how 125 be complctetl in less th:nl 24 \\orkil:g hours. The
150-mm gun 75 disposition of the vehicle from these centers may
210-mm li011 ............. 50
be as follows: it may be repaired or scrapped; it
c. AMMUNITION EXPENDITURE. The unit of may be forwarded to a Home Motor Transport
issue of ammunition is not to be confused with Park (HKP), which is car~alJe of carrying out
the daily expenditure amount of ammunition. all types of repairs; or, in the case of an /lKP, the
The latter does not arrive at any constant figure, vehicle may he forwarded to a HcKP.
hut varies with the type of action, the area of While the exact position of collecting points in
fighting, and the other factors mc&oncd in para- the rcnr\\-ard niovemcnt: of damaged \-&i&s is not
graph 1. By analogy with the reserve amounts certain, it is very likely that whenever possible
VI—2I
I MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30.451
MAINTENANCE
T sent to semi-permanent army tank workshops or
to Field ;\rmy Tank Parks or Bases. \1’hen ar-
mored vehicles are so badly tlnmagetl that they
camlot be repaired in the field, they are canni-
balized or forwarded to tank equipment depots
SECTION or factories in the home area. In the latter case
the vehicles are no longer under Field Army con-
trol and are not returned to the units to which
they were originally assigned.
Armored vehicles are repaired on the spot if
possible. Otherwise they are moved rearward
FIELD under their own power. Tank transporters are
WORKSHOP
UNIT used only when long movements are contemplated
or when vehicles cannot move under their own
~)owcr.
cl. OTHER EQUIPMENT AND CLOTHING. All
types of equipment including weapons, signal
cquipmcnt. bicycles, and clothing are repaired
ARMY
within the division area if possible. If the equip-
MOTOR
TRANSPORT ment (other than clothing and individual equip-
PARK [AKP] ment) requires more specialized attention, it is
forwarded either directly or through equipment
collecting points or workshop units to one of the
army parks. Equipment which cannot be repaired
in the field is directed to a home equipment park,
FIELD ARMY depot, or factory. Damaged clothing and individ-
MOTOR ual equipment generally pass from collecting
TRANSPORT points direct to home clothing depots and dumps.
PARK [HeKP] l:igure 6, which is largely compiled from German
schematics, should be examined for other details
of the German repair methods,
2. Evacuation of Installations
HOME MOTOR TRANSPORT With the narrowing of the Zone of the Interior,
PARK [HKP] the Germans have been faced with the problem
of what to do with depots that were formerly
part of the Zone of the Interior system of supply.
Variant courses adopted have been the c’onversion
of the installation into a field installation, the
Figure A—Motor vehicle repair altd nraiutrnancc. evacuation of the depot to the new Zone of the
Interior, and the operation of the depot as though
it were still within the Zone of the Interior.
VI—22
I MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIED
TM-E 30-451
3. Evacuation of Wounded
a. GENERAL. The German system for the
evacuation of casualties is based upon an imme-
tliate sorting of the woundctl so that soldiers who
are not seriously injuretl can be returned to their
units as quickly as possible, and those who are
severely wounded can receive medical care with
maximum speed. Under combat conditions the
accomplishment of these ends in many cases will
cause deviations from the normal system. A good
example of this was shown in the early part of
the Russian campaign when the great distances
between the combat zone and the Zone of the
Interior forced the Germans to use a chain of
MAINTENANCE Casualty Collecting Points to control and expedite
SECTION
the rear\\-ard movement of sick and wounded.
Now that the combat zone has moved into Ger-
many proper, deviations of an integrating nature
DIVISION
1 should be anticipated.
b. CHANNELS OF ~VACIJATION. (1) Casualties
EQUIPMENT DIVISION unable to walk are carried from the battlefield
COLLECTING WORKSHOP by battalion stretcher bearers, while those still
POINT UNIT capable of walkin,v are directed to the Battalion
A i d Station (IIc~.‘~~I~(~~C~~.~~,II~ICS~) w h i c h is located
as close to the front line as is practicable. The
Battalion Aid Station gives first aid in emergency
cases. As quickly as movements can be made, it
passes the woundctl to the Regimental Aid Sta-
ARMY tion (T~trpprll~‘r~bo~ld~laf,-), which is generally
EQUIPMENT ARMY
COLLECTING WORKSHOP some 200 to 500 yards to the rear of the front
POINT UNIT line. At this station the wounded receive first
aid and arc sorted into ambulatory cases and
stretcher cases. Stretcher cases are carried by
litter to an Ambulance I>oading Post (F~7’ngcwlzal-
fc/datz) for rearwarc1 movement, while ambula-
tory cases are instructed to make their way rear-
ARMY
ward on foot.
EQUIPMENT
PARK (2) Usually the stretcher cases are sent to a,
Main Dressing Station (Hauptvcrbnndplatz)I
whereas the lvalking \vounded move to a Collect-
ing Point for the Slightly Wounded (Leichtver-
~~,llrrdctclrsa/nnzcl~latc). The latter two installa-
lions, both controlled by the regimental medical
HOME CLOTHING HOME EQUIPMENT
DEPOT, PARK, OR officer, sometimes operate as a combined unit, and
DUMP OR DEPOT in practically all cases are located reasonably close
FACTORY
to each other. Their functions are as follows:
The Main Dressing Station attends the serious
cases. It contains a surgical unit which performs
amputations, applies tlrcssings and splints, checks
Figure 6.—Repair of equipment and clothirhg.
hemorrhages, gives blood transfusions, and ad-
ministers sedatives and prcventatire injections.
After treatment the casualties are evacuated fur-
ther rearward.
VI—23
I MARCH 1945 U~!CLASSIFlED TM-E 30-451
The Collecting Point for the Slightly Wounded c. TRANSPORTMIOK FACIIXYIES. Hospital
administers to casualties whose treatment requires trains (Laxrr~ftcii~yr) can carry between 358 and
only a few days. TVhen the treatment is com- 356 lying cases or 920 sitting cases.
pleted, the men are returned to combat. If, how- Standard German ambulances transport four
ever, a case has taken a more serious turn, the lying cases, or two lying and four sitting cases,
wounded soldier is evacuated rearward. or eight sitting cases.
(3) From the regimental area casualties maybe Horse-drawn vehicles, trucks, and hospital
taken to any of the various types of hospitals planes also may be used in evacuating the
(Lu~arctfc) found in the field or at home. Cas- wounded.
ualty Collecting Points (K~,alzhcllstrlrrlrl~~~~~~~~cJ~)
4. Evacuation of Horses
usually are set up along the line of evacuation to
facilitate the grouping of casualtics and their dis- a. CHANNELS OF EVACUATION. Sick and
tribution to the rear. These points are generalIy ~oundctl horses arc marched by foot from the
established at railheads and other traffic centers l~attleficld to n Horse Dresbing Station (Pferdrvcr-
by ambulance units. They do not handle casualties ba.~dplafz), where emergency cases are treated.
whose condition will not permit movement. They then are marched or transported in horse
Mobile Field Hospitals (Fcldlaanvcftc) serve as transport columns to a station set up by the Diyi-
way stations for casualties who cannot h:, movetl sion Veterinary Company (I/c,fr~illiirkonlpallic).
through the Casualty Collecting Points. They This station can be established within a minimum
may be operated either bp an army or bj a tlivi- of six hours and can treat 150 cases. If the horses
sion. Wherercr possible, the I%M Hospital is require further trcatmcnt, they arc moved by
set up in availab!e permanent buildings. It is horse transport colum~x to the Army Horse
equipped to handle any casualty and has a capacity Hospital (Arlrlrcpfcrtlcltr,~~~~~f) or to the Field
of 200 beds. Army Horse llospital (~lcc,r-c,s~fcrdclrr~u~ef~).
(4) Casualties who arc physically able to be Such field hospitals can be established within a
evacuated after treatment at the Main Dressing minimum of 12 hours and can handle 500 sick
Station or the Field Hospital are moved either di- horses. Horse Collecting Points (Pfcrdcsn~rrrrrl-
rectly, or via the Casualty Collecting Points, to a @St,-) are formed generally to expedite the evac-
Base Hospital (Krirgslnzarcft) or sometimes to a uation of horses to the rear. Normally there is
General Hospital (ZZc,jrrz~cIa,nnrctt). an Army Horse Collecting Point (.Il-~!rcpfcl,dc-
Base Hospitals arc large and relatively perma- sammclplatz), intermediate between division and
nent installations which may be established by an army, ant1 a Division Horse Collectii:g Point
army or the Field Army well to the rear of the (Divisior~spfr,.ti~scllllifi('l~lut,") at division. Evac-
combat zone. These hospitals are of two types: uated horses may be moved either directly or
General Base Hospitals (Krirgslnxl-rffc) . with through thcsc collecting points to the rear. Horses
normal accommodations for 500 cases, for casual- which require special surgical operations and
ties who require up to tight weeks' treatment bc- those not likely to bc fit again for army cse are
fore being discharged and for those who require moved by rail from the field hospitals to the
a period of convalcsccncc before moved to Rc- Zone of the Interior Home Horse Hospitals
serve Hospitals; and Base Hospitals for Minor (Hei~~zatpfcrdelazarcttc).
Cases (Lrichtk~alfkenfi~~e~~~a~~~effc), with ac- b. TRANSPORTATION FACILITIES. Horse trans-
commodations for 1,000 patients, for casualties port trains (Pferdcfmnsport,-iigc) are composed
who need up to four weeks of treatment or con- of 55 cars, each carrying six sick or lvounded
valescence prior to discharge. horses, or a total of 350 horses per train. The
General Hospitals are permanent installations standard horse transport road column can move
located inside Germany and are supervised by the 40 sick or wounded horses about 90 miles in one
Chief of Army Equipment; they are dealt with at clay.
length in Chapter I.
5. Evacuation of Prisoners of War
(5) A man may be pronomiced fit for duty by
any hospital. If he is in a forward hospital. hc Guard detai!s tlralvn from the military police
will he returned to his unit. If he is in a General or from the combat unit itself take prisoners to
Hospital for more than eight weeks, he Lvill l)e the Division Prisoner of 1i7ar Collecting Point
returned to the Replacement Army for reassign- (Divisio~~sgefa~~gc,Irl~sa~~~l~clsfcllc). The Pris-
ment. oners of ‘\ZJar are next moved to the Army Pris-
VI—24
I MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIED fM-E 30.451
oner of JYar Collecting Point (nrllzcegcfali.~cllcll- have found it c!esirablc to use troc,p trains of a
.~a~~~~~~rlsfcZZc), the guard details being drawn from~~n;0nablv cnnstal:t cc:nlposilion. The standard
military police, combat troops, or guard units. trains found in the I~alkans, Ital;,-, and Korwa!
The Prisoners of 11’ar are lastly transferred from are composetl of t’e\\-er cars than the base types in
the jurisdiction of the Field Army to the Replace- Germany, Tknmark, and the Setherlands which
ment Army Command. This is accomplished when are described below. All types are tlcsigned as far
the Prisoners of War are moved by rail to one as possible to carry a self-contained unit such as
of the Prisoner of LVar Camps J\-ithin Germany. a company or a battalion. Sonstandard trains
Officers are incarcerated in Officer Prisoner of 2lw may bc used for troop mowiwuts.
War Camps (Ofisie&grl- or Oflag) ; enlisted K-trains i Krnftfnlr~,-iigc or motor vehicle
men are confined in Enlisted Men's Prisoner of trains) aver-a<ge 51 cars l)er train and carry ap-
War Camps (Manrlschafts-Stalllnzlager or Stalag) proximately 250 solc!icrs, 20 heavy vehicles
(I\-eighing up to 3.2 sh(~r1 tons 1)c’r vehicle), ant1
20 light vehicles. plus other equipment. If lighter
Section VI. TROOP MOVEMENTS equipment is carried, the number of soldiers can
be increased.
S-trains (So~rdcmiiyc, or special trains) arc
1. Introduction
made up for the mownlent of very heavy tartks
Jn movements of entire bodies of troops with their and self-propelled guns. The numl)er of me11
equipment, the space occupied, rather than the carried per train averages 125 ;.thc number of
total weight, is the important factor. A \-cry large cars forming the train is bct\vccn 30 and 35. An
proportion of the space is taken up by personnel, S-train usually carries from four to six Tiger
horses, and organic equipment; daily maintenance tanks or from six to eight l’anther tanks, inter-
requirements that accompany the troops occupy spersed with lighter cquip~nciit.
much less space. .$-trains (Solldr/~pa/r=c,~,j~~~,, or special tank
trainsj carry npprosimntel!~ 20 medium tanks to-
2. Rail Transportation gether with personnel ;IIK~ other equipment. Th<
2. M A I N ~IILITARY ROUTES. German railways standard Sp-train is coml~o~~l of about 33 cars.
generally are used jointly for military and civilian I-trains (Illffflltcrircji{/; or infantry trains) of
traffic, although military trains arc given priority. about 55 cars per train hold some 350 officers ant1
I’erhaps the only instances of railways designated men. 10 light vehicles, 10 heavy vehicles of a
solely for military uses arc’ found in tlic combat maximum \\-eight of 22 short tons per vehicle, a r :
zone, either on already existent railways or on 70 horscbs. togcthrr with other equipment. If a
railwa!-s constructctl by the Army. minimum of ecluipmc~lt is carried. up to 800
Sormally double-track stantlard-gauge (4'Syz") troops can bc moved. It is possible that thy
i-nil\\-ays have a daily capacity of 30 military trains [-trains seldom are used bv* the Germans at
in each direction, while single-track standartl- present.
gauge railn-ays can move 10 trains a day in each Replacement troop trailis with SO to 60 cars per
direction. Air damage can materially decrease train can hold over 2,000 replacements. The USC
these capacity figures. of this type of train probably has been cliscon-
b. STANDARD TROOP TRAINS. The Germans tinued.
TYPE
I bS
•il
•
1?
-11
Bl 26-ft Box car 22ft Flatcar » 27.6-ft Flatcar with stanchions 22-ft Antiaircraft car
VI—25
I MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIED TM.E3(M5I
c. ENTRAINMENT AND DETRAINMENT. Troop (2) The average speeds of march columns in
trains generally are formed at railroad stations. miles per hour are as follows :
The speed with which entraining can be accom-
Infantry (long marches) 3
plished varies according to the number of units
Infantry (short marches) 4
being loaded, the number of stations used, the
facilities available at the stations, and the import- Mounted troops 6
ance attached to speedy loading. Dcljending on Cyclists 8
these conditions, loading of a single train can be Motorcycles and cars 22
accomplished within 2 to 12 hours. I f all the unit Trucks 22
trains can be loaded simultaneously at the cntrain- Trucks with trailers 16
ing stations, an entire division can bc loaded with- Half-track vehicles 16
in that time. In practice, however, the time taken Tanks 12
to assemble trains and troops and the limited num-
ber of entraining stations jl-ill materially increase c. MARCH DISTANCES. The infantry division
the loading time of divisions. normally can march about 20 miles in a day;
It is estimated that a troop train can be und under adverse weather or road conditions the rate
loaded in about half the time taken to load. De- of march may fall to 10 miles a day. The motor-
trainnient of infantry units may occur far for- ized division can maintain an average daily march
ward, while armored units usually are detrained of between 90 and 150 miles ; the armored division
in rear areas. • from 60 to 90 miles a day. In the near vicinity
of the combat zone, road movements without
d. SPEED OF MOVEMENTS. The average o f motor transport average 10 to 15 miles a day,
man movement appears to average from 150 moto while movements by motor transport approximate
200 milts per day for long movements within 30 miles a day.
(ieriiiany, and about 60 miles daily in arcas near
the combat zone. d. ROAD SPACES. While the road spaces occu-
pied by divisions on the march are not constant,
C. TRAIN REQUIREMENTS. At present the p i e d
the road spaces of individual units may prove of
ber of trains required to transport an infantry the
some value. The following examples are from
vision is about 35 to 40. An armored division
German sources and do not indicate the intervals
needs about twice that number. If a G e r m a n
maintained between elements:
of divisions are being moved, additional trains
will be necessary for corps and army units.
VI—26
I MARCH 1945
UNCLASSIFIED
ARMORED DIVISION b. LOADING AND UNLOADING TIMES. The
(at 20 kilometers or approximately time r~cluir~tl for the loatling of a vcsscl varicss
12 miles per hour.) with a number c~f factors, such as the size of’ the
vessel, the plan of the \-esst.1, the port facilities,
Yards Meters
and the efficiency with \vhich loading is conducted.
Tank Regt 21,325 19,500
The follo\ving a\‘eragc loading times arc based
Ps ie@ Regt (each of two). 13,14.i 12,020
Ps . . ........... 9,154 8,370 upon German cstimatcs. They apply for loading
AT Bn 3,838 ,3.510 during day and night; considerable tlclays, ho~v-
Ps . . . ......... 14,458 13,220 ever, may occur on account of adverse \veather
Ps . . .............. 3,761 3,440 conditions.
Ps , . ........ 6,365 5,820
])iv Serv 11,702 10,700 Clnss~fimtioit Loading Time
DivHq 1,444 1,320 100 men 8 minutes.
Others 5,468 5,000 100 horses (led over a ramp) . 1 hour.
100 horses (lifted by cranes) . _ . . 6 hours.
100 light motor vclli~lc~ (liftctl
Total Armd Div {approx.; by cranes) 6 hours.
without intervals between Supplies sufficient to 1~~1 a 2,000
elements) 103,806 94,920 G / T vc~scl ...... 10 hours.
Total converted to miles 59.0
c. TONNACK REQUIREMENTS. Among other
If distances between the individual units are
factors, the amount of tonnage required to trans-
included, the average length of the infantry divi-
port troops depends upon the type of unit being
sion would bc about 30 miles (at 3 miles per
transported, the efficiency of loading, the types
hour), of the armored division 70 miles (at 12
of ships uscd,~ ant1 the amount of nonmilitary
miles per hour), and of the motorized division 80
stowage transported. Flylice the following figures
miles (at 16 miles per hour),
give only a general inclication of the amount of
space which is occupied by items \\-hen efficicntl)
4. Sea Transportation
loaded.
a. GENERAL. In the sea movements referred Esti~~uxtrd G/T
to in the following text, the basic shipping meas- Classifin~lion requireme.fzt
urement is the gross registered ton ( G / T ) , which 1 man 2
1 hich .................. 8
is 100 cubic feet of the entire enclosed space of 1 light motcjr vehicle ............ 10
a ship. 1 hip. ....................... 20
The Germans USC‘ all tj-1”s of cargo and pas- 1 heavy field g u n . . . . . . . . . . . 20
senger vessels for the transportation of troops. 1 G e r m ans .........,.......... 25
Generally the depth of water'of the embarkation It is likely that an infantry tlivision requires be-
and debarkation ports determines the size of ship tween 50,000 and 70,000 gross registered tons for
to be used. Thus many of the Baltic ports are its movement. or a mean average of five or six
limited to cargo ships up to 2,000 G/T. Cargo gross registered tons per man. If loading is in-
between Norway and Germany, on the other hand, efficient or if light loatling is used, the G/T re-
ordinarily can be carried on much larger vessels. quirements per man will rise considerably. Thus
The average speed of a ship is estimated at 200 in short movtm~nts such as ferry crossing, as
nautical miles per day, although fast ships maq niucli as 15 g-ross registered tons per man and
average much more. equipment ha\re been employed.
VI—27
I MARCH 1945
UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451
CHAPTER VII
WEAPONS
Section I. INTRODUCTION mobility ot the rocket wapon with the range and
accuracy of the standard Ivpc of howitzer.
1. General d. ARTILLERY. There have been some belated
Before and (luring the first years of the present attempts on the part ol ihe Germans at improve-
war it was the policy of the Ciernian armv to use r t l t in thc.ir standard artillery, hit 110 basic re-
the smallest variety of weapons consistent with design appears contemplated at present.
meeting operational requirements, while emphasis
was maintained on developing weapons with a Section II. SMALL ARMS
high degree of fighting efficiency. Recent devel- 1. General
opments in warfare, however, particularly in the
t h ( . l r c n trends in ;VI-nian small arms have
last year, gradually have forced the Germans to
been i t icrcasc in pro(lnctiorl of semiautomatic
adopt the opposite policy of experimentation with
and fully automatic weapons and an increase in
many innovations in weapon design.
the rate of tire of machine guns. I>uring 19-M.
additional dose-quarter antitank weapons have
2. Recent Trends
bee11 inclutlcd :tmoiig German small arms.
Within the last 12 months distinct trends in the
development of German weapons have hecome 2. Pistols
apparent. a. GENERAL. The two standard pistols now in
a. TANKS AND T A N K DESTROYERS. First, there use in the German Armv are the I-uger, which
has been a tendency for tanks and tank destroy- was used in the last war. and a more modern
ers to become armed and armored more heavily weapon, the \\ alther; neither German weapon
at the expense to some extent of mobility and has the shock effect of the I . S. M1911 or MVJ\ 1
maneuverability. This is compensated for by the Al (‘olt .35. The Alau~r I)i.5tol is seldom ell-
ability to open effective fire at very long ranges. countered.
h. INFANTRY ANTITANK WEAPONS. Second,
there has been a striking increase in the ability of
the German infantry to combat Allied tanks. This
has been accomplished by the development and
constant improvement of close-range grenade and
rocket launchers employing the hollow-charge
principle.
c. ROCKET WEAPONS. Third, German experi-
ments which began before the war have materi-
alized into a comparatively wide range of rocket
weapons used to supplement orthodox artillery.
These experiments with rockets are being con-
tinued, and improvements in range and accuracy
may be expected. Tn the event of the outbreak of I'itjurc l.—Lugcr 1'isti'lr CV. cuhber 9 nun.
chemical warfare, rocket weapons will assume a
greater significance than at present. The German b. LLT.ER PISTOL (Pistole 08). (1) General
recoilless gun (originally developed as an airborne dcscvi~tiou. This is a semiautomatic, recoil-oper-
gun) comes close to combining the lightness and ated pistol with a loggle-|ninl breech action (!'/</.
VII—I
I MARCH 1945
UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451
1).‘ Thc~ safety is located on the left rear sitlc holster, which is in the shapi oi a hollow stock.
of the body. The pistol is set on "safe" when The sal el v is ai the left rear above the trigger
"(;~~sicllrrt" is sho\ving. Thcrc is also a longer guard. The weapon is led ammunilion from a
tnotlel of this pistol, provision beittg tttadc ott the 10-round fixed magazine niseried forward of the
rear sitlc of the grip for a stock altnc1llllellt. (rigger guard. I \\ enly-rnund magazines are used
Construction is ahttost itlerilicxl with the standard when the weapon I- employed a> a carbine.
ttiotl~l cxc~pt thal the barrel is lotigcr, and a leaf (2) Characteristics.
rear sight graduatetl up to SO0 meters is attached. Caliber 9 mm i actually 0.347 inch).
(2) Chaructcristics. Length \\jtltouL 4toc l , 1 2 inches.
Calitwr 9 mm (actually 0.347 inch). Length with slock 25 I j inches.
Length of b a r r e l . . . . . . . . 4 x inches. Weight without slock. .2 pounds 8 ounces.
Weight 2 pounds. Feed 10- or 20-round magazine.
Feed S-routid grip niagazinc.
(3) Am~I~uuifion. Static!;i~-cl 9-mm ammuni-
(3) Anzntu~itio~. The Luger pislol tit-c~s the tion is used.
standard German 9-inin Parabeilum ammunition.
3. Signal Pistols
a. LK;UT SIC.NAL PISTOL ( Lcuchtpistolc).
This is the standard German signal l)ihtol; it is
26.7-mm caliber, has a smooth bore, and fires a
series of colored signal cartridges, as \\-~11 as a
\\-histling cartridge I Z-‘l‘c.if~ci/i,clri~, ~ used as a gas
warning six-ital.
barreled shotguns. This may be set so either one and a folding stock is attached above the pistol
or both of the barrels will fire when the trigger grip. The liner and the folding stock' enable this
is b o t h standard signal cartridges are pistol to fire a hollow-charge grenade as a close-
fired. quarter weapon against tanks (J'iiJ. 5). With
the steel liner removed this pistol Lvill fire the
standard signal cartridges firccl from the Lcttclit-
fistolr.
4. Machine Pistols
VII—3
I MARCH 1945
UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451
f-'igiire 7.—M.P. 43/1, caliber 7.92 mm, sluneing magazine in place for jinn,/.
Figure S.—M.I'. 44, (modified M.P. 43), caliber 7.92 mm, icith grenade launcher attached.
d. MODEL 42 AUTOMATIC RIFLE (Fallschirm- later model of this iveapon, slightly heavier and
jiigcrgcttvllr 42). (1) Gcmral description. Al- more solidly constructed, has tllc biped closer to
though the German nomenclature indicates that the muzzle,
this rifle (Fig. 11) is intended to be an automatic (2) Cllavactcristics.
weapon for use by parachute troops, it also can C a l i b e r . . . . . . . . . . 7 . 9 2 mm (0.312 inch).
be used as a light machine gun or a machine car- Length with bayonet ...... 43% i n c h e s .
bine. The weapon is designed more like a light Weight 9 pounds
machine gun than a rifle. It is gas-operated, fitted Feed 2O-round magazinta.
with a permanently attached folding bipod, and
can be fired automatically or single shot. A com- ( 3 ) il~~~mu~ifio~z. Stnntlartl 7.92-mm a~nnlu-
pensator is attached to the muzzle, and provision nition is used in this \vcapon.
is made for the attachment of a telescopic sight. e. MODEL 43 SEAIIACTOMATIC RIFLE (Karcz-
A bayonet also is attached. The magazine is held bimr43). i 1) (;cJlcroZ drscrip/iorz. This ~vc’apon,
in a h&izontal position on the left of the receiver. originally 1,nown as the Gi’,ick’li~ 43, is a semi-
The aperture rear sight is graduated from 100 to automatic rifle and \\-a~ tl~v~lopcd from the
1,200 meters (109 to 1,310 yards). The safety is Gc~el~ 41. The trigger and l)olt mechanisms arc
located on the left side above the pistol grip, and the same as those used on tile (;cx~~‘/~Y 41, lmt the
the lever for selecting automatic or single-shot fire piston and gas q+ntIt~r are of different design.
is placed above and to the rear of the trigger. A The piston group is located 011 top cJf the barrel
VII—6
I MARCH 1945
UNCLA^iFliD TM-E 30-451
instead of concentrically. The rifle may be loaded breech mechanism. The gun has R leaf rear sight
by inserting either a fully loaded magazine or two graduated from 200 to 2,000 meters (219 to 2.190
cartridge clips into an empty magazine from the yards j , an A A ring sight, and an optical sight
top. The leaf rear sight is graduated from 100 for use with the tripod mount. It is fed either by
to 1,250 meters (109 to 1,365 yards). SO-round metallic-link belts, which may be con-
nected together, or by drums. The weapon is air-
(2) Characteristics.
cooled by a perforated barrel jacket.
Caliber 7.92 mm (0.312 inch).
Length, over-all 45 inches. (2) Characteristics.
Weight lO pounds. Caliber 7.92 mm (0.312 inch).
Length, over-all 48 inches.
(3) Ammunition. Standard 7.92-mm ammu- Weight with bipod 26% pounds.
nition is used in this weapon. mreight with tripod 42 pounds.
Feed Belt or drum.
6. Machine Guns Rate of fire
a. ~~ODEI, 34 MACHINE GUN (M.G. 31). (1) (cyclic) .....900 rounds per minute.
General dcscriptio~z. This weapon (Pigs. 12 and ( p r a c t i c a l ) . . . . . . A s LMG 100 to 120
13) was the original standard German dual-pur- rounds per minute.
pose machine gun and is still used, although it AS 13~ MG 300
has been replaced largely by the N.G. 42. (M.G. rounds per minute.
is the German abbreviation for Maschinengemhr, Effective rang<‘ As LMG 600 to 800
which means "machine gun".) It may be used on yards.
a bipod, on single oi dual AA mounts, or mounted As Hv &lG 2,000 to
on a tripod as a heavy machine gun. It still is 2,500 yards.
used as the subsidiary armament of all German
tanks. It is operated by short recoil, assisted by (3) ntn???zfttitio?t. The ;I!.(;. .?q fires 7.92-mm
muzzle blast, and has a standard Solothurn-type rimless small-arms ammunition.
F@?urc I?.—M.G. 34, caliber 7.92 IVVV, olt bipod ?I~QU~Q as light ~wchine p ,
VII—7
I MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451
F i g u r e 1 3 . — M . G . 3 4 , c a l i b e r 7 . 9 2 m m , o n t r i p o d m o u n t its licit: y m . : c l i i i i e : / u n
VII—8
I MARCH 1945
UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-45I
P
igfire 15.—416. 1.5, c-trlilwr 7.92 mm, uircrrzft llltrchine pry trdnptcd for grozfrrd me.
(2) Clrnructcristics.
C a l i b e r . . . . . . . . . . 7 . 9 2 mm (0.312 inch).
Lenglh, over-all 42 inches. 1'igitre Id.—M.G. 151/20, a JU-nim aircraft machine gun.
IVeight 15 pounds 12 ounces.
Feed 75-round sadtlle magazine. cliaiigeal~lc barrels ; tliiY is not the case, allhough
Rate of fire the gulls are vrry similar iii construction.
( c y c l i c ) . . . . . 1 , 0 0 0 rounds per minute. ( 2 ) Cllrrvclcic,ri.stic-s.
(pr::ctical) ....300 rounds per minute. C a l i b e r . . . . 2 0 mm (0.787 inch).
Length, OWI-=a!! ........... 69$4 inches.
(3) illlz,lllllllitioll. The standard 7.92-mm rim- Weight 92>y> pounds.
less ammunition is used in this machine gun. Fetd .... IXsint~grsting metallic-link belt.
tl. MOTEL 151/10 ~IACIIINE GUN (M.G. kite of fire ROO rcmltls per minute.
1.51/20). (1) General cicmiption. Although Jluzzle volocity i 1II<‘,
primarily an aircraft machine gun iFig. 16)) it 3.fSG feet per second.
also has been found on an improvised ground
mount as an antitank m-capon and tripk-inountctl (~3) il~~r~r~~rritio~. ‘I‘llis gun fires HE, R P ,
on a half-tracked \-chicle. I\licn usctl on the and APITE ammunition.
ground, the gun is hand cocked and nicchanic:.‘ly
fired, instead of utilizing the electrical cocking ant1 7. Antitank Weapons
firing mechanisni provided for its use in aircraft. n. 1:M,I:S. TllC orixiilal German antitank
The gun is entirely recoil-ol)eratetl. The 1 5 m l riiles were the 7.92-mm PanccrbiicJisc 38, with
-1I.G. 151 is sometimes used instead of the dl.G. automatic estraction mc~clranism, :uld the 7.92-mm
152/20 on the triple mount. It oitcn ii supposed I’alr,-cYhiirh.sr 39, operated entirely by hand.
that these two are the same gun fitted with inter- These wrapons IV(V 111 II\.c’ry cffccti\Te and are
VII—9
11MO
I MARCH 1945 uiti TM-E 30-451
now obsolete. Next followed the 20-mm Solo- tank grenntle launchers in prcii rencc to riiles, and
thurn, which was issued in two models: one single the only relic of tlu^c four ihn.K'K is the Gvanat-
shot, and the other both single shot and automatic. bi'ichsc, which is a Panzcrhiu hsc ?l) modified to
The tendency during 1944 has been to adopt anti- fire rifle g r e n a d e s I n mi a n i l ' launcher cup.
I—
4
figure 18.—Granatbikhse 39, a 7,92-mm antitank rifle modified for launching rifle •nrnades.
VII—10
I M A R C H 1945 hULfio>i TM-E 30-451
t
Figure 19.—Faiistpatrone 2 (Panzerjatist), 44-mm recoilless antitank grenade launcher,
showing luunchilly tube and grcrudc.
b. RECOILLESS ANTITANK GRENADE LAUNCH- Pumr!‘trlf.st .:o. A redesigned firing mechan-
EC—Pawcrfaz~~t. This is a series of antitank ism has been fitted and al>o a new sight, which
grenade launchers each bearing the name Pawcr- has ap~rturcs for 30, 60 and SU n~~tcrs.
fazut but each having a &&rent number after The tube of tltis weapon is sliglttl>- thicker than
the name. that of the Panzcrfaust 30 at~d the \veight has
i1) Pamrfaust 30 been increawtl to 13~2 111~.
(a) Gcmral Description. This weapon, also The pettctration ligttr~ of 200 mm for the Pn~t-
known as the Faust/xztrouc 2, w:e the first of the x~ftrusl 30 will apl~lv equally well to this weapon,
four models of recoilless antitank grcnatle dis- (4) Ptzll2~‘~/u1fSf 100
chargers to be produced. It is designed for use This is the latest c~f the Panzcrfaust wries of
against armor at ranges of about 30 yartls, at antitank lauiicli~rs to be encountered. 111 alqxar-
which range a penetration of just over 200 mm atice it is similar to the Panzcrfaust 611, t!lough
is obtained. slightly increased in size and performance. A
The weapon consists of a steel launching tube, l)cnctr;ctic,n tigure of LOO mm is claimed for this
containing a percussion fit-cd l~rol~~llctlt char,q~. A weapon, which is sighted up to 1.50 tnc~tcrs.
hollow-charge antitank grenade is fit-et1 from the c . KOCL<L:T I..\R~S~‘LII I : C lictf~~tl~lr~irrl~~~rl~i~cl~.s~
tube. 54). i1) General description. This weapon,
The Jvcapon is fired from the skmding, kneeling \I-hich is ;tlx~ Lnowi 25 the Ofcnrohr i Stovepipe)
or prone positions, aim being taken owr the ver- o r I'(III,“~‘I,.c~.~~~.~,~~~ (Tank Terror), is similar to
tical sight and the forward entl of the bomb. the U. S. 2.30-inch 1-clc.l,ct l;tutich~r (l!azool~a)
(b) Charactrristics. ant1 fires a hollow-charge rocket lxojectile. The
Uiatnctcr of tube 13A i n & s . launcher cotG~t5 0i a steel tulz provided with
Over-all length 41 inches. fwc a d lJ:lck Sights and a cocking lever a d trig-
\Teight ............... 11 pountls. ger which operate an electrical firing mechanism.
(c) ifllzlllllliiti0/2. The grcnatlc is provided l’or firitlg, the rocket i\ iI]-rt-tctl in the rear of the
lvith spring steel fins I\-hich ;~re \\raplwl aroutttl tube, \\hcrr it is retained in position by a catch
the tail for loading and which arc releas~~l as the and tnak-cs a contact with the electrical lrads at
projectile leaves the tube and stabilize the bomb the rc’ar of the launcher. When the trig;;er is
during fight. pressed, a magnetized rod passes through a coil
(2) Ptrux~r/aztst Klein 30 located in a housing underneath the projector.
This \\-capon, also known as the Fausfpafrolzc 1 This generatc.s a current which provides the spark
or (;~cfclior, is a smaller version of the I’axcr- necessary to i,ytite the propellent charge in the
fawst 30 and has a dificrcntly shaped pro- tail end of the projectiles. Later models of this
jectile hc:d. The system of operation is the same l)rojwtor are fitted with steel lxotective shields
and the range is again about 30 yards. X penelra- clattqxd aroutttl the LXLI-rrl. In each shield there
tion of 140 mm is claimed for this projectile. is an ohser\ation window on the left of the firer.
(3) Pair,-rrfazist 60 These shields ylitninatr. the necessity for the firer
This 1;tunchcr is similar in appeatxttce to tlte to \vc’ar protectivc~ cloll~it~g, Tlte Germans claim
VII—II
I MARCH 1945
UNCLASSIFi:.!I TM-E 30-45I
3. Medium Mortars
n. Sl-MM MORTAR ( 8 cm Srlrwerer Gmnaten-
wwfw 31). (1) Grllrral description. This
n-capon is the German equivalent of the U. S.
81-mm mortar 1I-1. It is a smooth-bore, muzzle-
loaded weapon I\-ith a fixed firing pin. The cle-
vatmg, traver.-ing:, and cross-leveling mechanisms
higtirc 22.—5 cm Irichtt~r Gmnutemuerfer 36. are oi conventional design.
2. Light Mortars 12) (‘lfurtrrfr,l-i.rtic..
a. 50-uM MORTAR (5 cm l.eichtcr Granatcn- C‘alil)c , r $ 1 . - I 4 mm (3.19 inches).
w,crfcr 36). (1) Gellcral description. This is Total It-tight ............124 pounds.
a muzzle-loaded, trigger-fired weapon used solely Maximum traverse 14°.
for high angle fire. Elevation is adjusted by an K l c v a t i o n . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40” to 90”.
elevating arm attached to the baseplate and sup- Jraximum ranges firing H E shell
porting the tube, with provision for both coarse Alain prop~lliq charge...._591 yards.
and fine adjustment. Traverse of about 15 degrees .\tltlitional cllar-::-c 1 1,094 yards.
in either direction is controlled by a traversing .Mlitional char-ge 2 1,597 yards.
arc of conventional design. Two cross-lr\,eling tlditional charge 3 2,078 yards.
o n e on on each side of the baseplate, tlditional charge 4 2,625 yards.
are used for initial laying and to steady thr mortar \ITeight of s h e l l . . . . . . . . . . . 7 . 7 pounds.
during firing. Rate of fire. . . I0 111 12 rounds per minute.
VII—l3
UNCLA3G;F;:J TM-E 30.451
I MARCH 1945
VII—-14
I MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIED rM.E]0.45l
(3) Ammunition. The H E shell contains 1.1 (2) Clzaructcristics.
pounds of TNT, and the smoke shell contains 1 C a l i b e r . . . . . . . . . 8 1 . 4 mm (3.19 inches).
pound of sulphur trioxide. Jn addition to the Total weight 62 pounds.
standard smoke and H E ammunition, another Maximum traverse 10°.
shell kno~vtt as the "bouncing bomb" \vas used Elevation 47° to 88°.
with this mot-tar to provide air burst, but proved Maximum range 1,200 yards.
unsuccessful. This projectile weighed the same
as the standard H E shell but contained only 0.8 13) Amllilolitiou. ‘I‘hls weapon fires the same
pound of T N T . ammunition as the stantlard 81-mm mortar, but
only three incrtments fiiav I)c uwd, giving a maxi-
mum range of l.LOO yartis lvitlt HE.
4. Heavy Mortars
a. 105-,T,T SMOKE MORTAR (10 cm Nebel-
iverfer 35). i l j General description. T h i s is
an cnlarg~t lwwion of IIIL. st;lntlard 81-mm mor-
tar. lssu~tl originally to c~h~itical \varfare troops,
it was intt’n&(l prim:lril\~ for firing smoke and
chemical shells. although HI'", shells now are
issued. In appearance 111~ mortar is almost iden-
tical with the 81-mm mortar,
(2) ClzaracfcGstirs.
C a l i b e r . . . . 1 0 5 mm (4.13 inches).
Total w e i g h t . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 3 1 pounds.
Maximum traverse 13°.
Elevation 45° to 80°.
Maximum r a n g e . . . . . . . . . 3 , 3 0 0 yards.
(with four incrc,mctits)
1Veight of shell ..........16 pounds.
U~jCLAr;;iF;ED
VII—-16
I MARCH 1945 UNCLASS;; IEO
sniall firing aperture covcred by a steel shutter. a l)ipo(l. It has the advantage of being highly
‘Ilie lower conipartnient is wet1 for storing am- 111~11Ii!?. however, since it is ecluipped with a two-
munition and housing the crc’\v. i\mmunition is I\-h~clctl, quickly attached axle, and the bipod is
carried up to the nior:k~r on a con\-c’yor belt and is carried clamped to 1111, mortar ready for action.
lllallually loaded. The nlortnr is a smooth-bow, The \\-~a1I( 111~‘;in 1~ cl~~ickl!. to\vcd or manhandled
breech-loatlctl weapon, fitted with a setxiautoinatic into a new" tiring 1)o’llillll. ‘l‘lle heavy shell and
l)rwch ni~chnnisni, horizontal sliding brccchblock, 1011g range of this weapon provide a type of fire
and h\-tlro])neuiiiatic recoil system. The mortar support c~~~~l~~tr;tbIc \\ith that from the l&?-mm
tulw is held in a cratlle which may be raised and fiVld llo\\-itzcl~.
lockctl into firing poGtion. The trn\-ersing nlech-
nnisni is arrang~~l so that turning the traversing (2) Characteristics.
hantlle rotates the entiw fiyliting coni~srtnient. (‘:llit)vr ...120 mm (4.7 inches).
Is‘irc normally is controlled electrically from an Total \\ci:ht .............616 pounds.
ckcr\-ation lwst, but also cat1 be Contro11~~d b \ Maximum Inn c-rse . 16°.
means of a periscope in the fighting conqw-Went. lil~\arilm .............. 45” to 85”.
Maximum range 6,600 yards.
(2) Characteristics. lktnils of the character- J\.t!igl1t C,i >lleli .”............35 pounds.
istics of this \veapon arc lacking. Limits of ele-
vation are 45 degrees to 90 degrees. (3) Anillcffuitiorr. ‘l‘his mortar fires four
types of I I F projectiles.
(3) rfnunz~~zifio~~. ~Irnniunition fired is the
same as tliat used with the 10.5nini smoke niort;lr
(~\‘~l~~kwfw 40) but nith difierent charg<
weights.
VII—-17
i MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451
porting arm. Two insulated electrical contact also used. This shell is said to ta o and
plates are located above the supporting arm and grapnel with which to clear nll l l c s o r of
arc connected internally to a contact tube running charges.
to the upper end of the spigot to contact the elec-
tric primer of the propelling charge. f. 380-MM HEAVY SPIGOT MORTAR (38 cm
Schwcrer Laduntjsx^crjer). ( 1 i General descrip-
(2) Cllaractcvistics. tion. Xo details of this weapon arc available, its
Diameter of s p i g o t . . . . . . . . . . , 3 . 5 inches. existence having been established from identifica-
Total \\-ei:ght 205 pounds. tion of a 380-mm 111-', spigot shell. This mortar is
Total traverse 5 °. probably an enlarged version of the 200-mm
Elevation 45° to 80°. weapon.
. Maximum range 766 yards.
(2) Cliartrrt~,l.isfit-.
(three increments)
Weight of s h e l l . . . . . , . . . . . . . . 4 6 ~OUIIC~S. Diameter of spigot 6.25 inches.
Weight of shell 331 pounds.
(3) Anz~~zwzition. This mortar fires H E or
smoke projectiles. The H E shell contains 15 (3) Ammunition, l'oth III-, and smoke am-
poumls of amatol explosive. Reports indicatr am- munition are fired by this mortar. The III", shell
munition known as the "harpoon projectile" is bursting charqc \ \ , c x i g - 1 1 s
VII—-l8
MARCH 1945 TM-E 30-451
Section IV. ARTILLERY cm K. IS, 15 cm s. I,.!!. 115’j, and all these guns
are still standard. Vari~111,s r,sl~<~rimcnt;tl modifica-
I. General
tions may be standardized eventually as "12"
a. DEVET.OIWIW~. The Gct1-mans, coniparativ~l~ series, but no fundalncntal redesign of any of
speaking, neglcctetl their artillery during the Carl) their weapons appear> to be contemplated at
stages of the war and since have been compelled present.
to give increased thought to it. The German con-
cept of modern war in 1939 was that of the Illitz-
2. Infantry Guns
kvirg or “1,ightning JVar", in which armor and
the dive bomber jointly were to dominate the a. 75-3 1 11 LIGHT IKF~\ITTRY G U N (7.5 CIM le. I.
battlefield. The enemy was to be softened up b ! G. 18). (1) Gcnrral tlt~scviption. The 7.5 c~ta lc.
bombing and smashed by the tanks, and artiller\ I. G. 18 is an infantry close-support weapon firing
scarcely had more than a subsidiary role. The in both lower and upper registers. It has a box-
B’litzkricg was successful against inadequately type mount on ptt~um:ttic-tired disk wheels, and is
equipped armies, but the gradual recovery of Ger- fitted I\-ith a shield. A modification, the Ic. Gcb.
many's enemies and the complete bankruptcy of I. G. 18, has ~vootlen-~llol;ed wheels, a split tubu-
the "Lightning War" theory have compelled the lar trail, and no shiclcl ; this Torsion has Similar
Germans to attempt a refurbishing of their artil- performance and is used by airborne troops. 130th
lery doctrine. models have an unu~u;~l tulI(‘. ~~iica~tl in a slipper
1). DIVISION ARTILLERY. The division artiller) block. Operation of the, breech mechanism causes
weapons with \vhich Gumany started the \var the rear of the tube to ri^e c,lcai- of the block for
\vere all of the "18" class (10 cm Ir,. /:.I/. 18, 10 loading.
Figure 30.—15 cm s. I.G. 33 (150-ltim heavy infantry gun) shoienni box trail
VII—20
I MARCH 1945 UMCLASS nr 0 TM-E 30-451
Figure 31.—7.5 cm Geb. G. 36 (75wm ~l~ouutabc kowitzcr) with perforated ~.yllrrrlvi~.cll IIIIC.~C brake.
Figure 32.—10.5 cm Gcb. H. 40 (105run wouutaiu lzox~itz,~Y) zcilli doublc-hifflc nmzde brake.
VII—21
I MARCH 1945 UNCL.A : .I I I I L. U TM-E 30-451
Figure 33.-7.5 cllz L.G. 40 (75~mm airborn.e recoilless gm) showing hrcccl
VIl—22
I MARCH 1945 UNCLAS::FILD TM-E 30-451
Figure 35.—Right front view (top) 10.5 on le. F.H. 18 (M), the standard divisional field artillery howitzer with nntr.de
bralic, left recw aicw (bottom).
VIl—24
I MARCH 1945 UNCUT TM-E 30-451
Figure 36.—10.5 cm le. F.ll. IS (105-nim field howitzer), the standard divisional field artillery howitzer.
5. Field and Medium Artillery range charge to be fired, increasing the range by
a. 75-MM FIELD (ii N 38 (7.5 cm Feld Kanone 1SO0 J3rtls. This \.c.t..yiott is l~tio\\n as the Zc. 1;.
38). (1) Gr~lcrtrl drscriptiou. This gut1 is Oi Il. IS (.1/j. 1:~ 19-M a second tttotlification had all-
con\-cnlional design, with a scminutotnntic hori- ~~tre(I, the 1~: I;. II. lS/‘JO. The tube of the Zc.
zontal sliding breechblock. X slotted cylindrical I;. II. 18 C-11) was mounted on the carriage
muzzle brake is fitted lo the niotiol~loc lul)c. ‘ l ‘ alr-eatlx in large scale production for the 7.5 Pak
h\-drol)ileuiiiatic recuperator is above the tube, -10 t 7’5mm :ZT gu~i). Ey tnodifying the elevat-
ant1 the hydraulic buffer below. Equilibrators ing ant1 firing mechanisnts, the rate of fire was
are spring type. The carriage has split trails of iticrcnsctl, and a more &icient muzzle bralie de-
ri\.ctctl box construction and artillery wheels. creased the recoil load. The 10.5 cm le. F. II.
18 (M) and the 1~. I:. I/. 18;10 at-e ballistically
(2) C‘lrurncfcristics.
identical and have the same firing tables.
C;dil)er .......i. 5 mm (2.(/S inrlws).
Ixtq:th of tu l x . . 9 feet, 3% inches. i 2 ) Clniraclerislics i of W.5 cm le F. II. 18/40).
\\‘eight in a c t i o n . . 3 , 1 3 6 pounds. Caliber 105 mm (4.14 inches).
Maximum r a n g e . . IL.570 yards. Length of tube feet, ^.2^2 inches
Muzzle velocity 1,985 feet per second. (incluillng Ill-ct-ch I
Traversv 50^. and mu/zle braki )
Klevation '. .—5° to -)- 45°. Weight in action .4,320 pounds.
1~action .... Trxtor. Maximum range. . . 13,480 yards.
(3) .hnmunition. Two types of HI', shell and Muzzle \ el<iciiy . . . . 1,772 feet per cond.
one Itollow-charge shell are fired. The H I : sltell~ Traverse .5(J
F.Ievalion (J" In : 40°.
\veigh 12.S.S pounds and 13.88 pounds, and t l t
Traction
hello\\--charge, 10.07 pounds.
b. 105-MM FIELD IIOWITZER (10.5 cm Leichte I 3 I Ammunition. III-'., smoke, incendiary, il-
Feld Ilaubitze IS). (1) Gc~rcral dcscriptiojl. luminating, propaganda, hollow-charge, H E sabot,
This is the standard divisional field artillery ho- and A I' s;il)ilt shells are fired. (Sabot shells ma\.
witzer developed during the last \vat-. It 11as a not he fired from guns quipped with existing
tiytlropneumatic recoil system and a heav!.. tuzzle hal~w howc\w-.) The weight of H E
siml)l\- designed breech mechnnistn with a hori- j,rojrctil,,s is .32 ~~outt~1~. 11 ounces.
zottW sliding block and cartridge case obkrxliott. C. 150-MM MEDIUM HOWITZER (15 cnz s. F.
The first modification of the original motlel aI)- ii. 1,s). 11) (l’l~~f~.~(/l tlc,.scr-ipfioll. The 15 cw
pearcd in 1911 when a muzzle brake of cotlv~ll- .c. I:. II. IS is the standard divisional artillery tne-
tional design was fitted to permit a new long- dium howitzer, \vith the same mount as the 10 Ct
VII—25
I MARCH 1945
UNCLA' TM-E 30-451
Figure 40.—J, 10 tin K. IS (105-mm medium nun) zeitli tube in trareliiui position.
VIl—28
I MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451
Figure 42.—17 cm K. in Mrs. Laf. (170-mm gun mounted on 210-mm howitzer carriage).
VII—29
I MARCH 1945 UNLYXIED TM-E 30-451
VII—3I
•'Cirri
• : ! ! . . )
TM-E 30-451
I MARCH 1945
i;iaure 46.-3.7 cm I'ak (37-mm antitank gun), 5 em I'ak i.V (50-mm antitank gun), and 7.5 cm I'ak 40 (73-mm
antitank gun) (front to rear).
Figure 49. -7.5 cm I'ak 97/3S (75-min antitank yun) leith Sololhuni inuzdc brake.
i. 3-INCH ANTITANK GUN (7.62 cm Pak 39). Muzzle velocity CHI t 2,460 feet per second.
Muzzle velocity
(1) General description. This 3-inch antitank CAPC'BO 3.2SO feet per second.
gun is a modified version of the Russian field gun Muzzle velocity ( A P4O ) .3.7(15 feet per second.
7.62 cm F.K. 297 ( r ) . The chamher is bored out, Traverse i',(l .
and a 7.62 Pak 36 muzzle brake is fitted. The Elevation 8 to -|- 40°.
Traction Tractor.
breech mechanism is semiautomatic with a vertical
sliding block. The mount has box-type trails and
pneumatic tires. (3) illl?lrllrrliticJ/i. \\ c,i,qiit of projectiles firetl
from this gun are: III!. 20.08 pounds; Al'CBC,
(2) Characteristics. 22 pounds, and 22.36 pi mud.--; A l ' 40, 16 pounds ;
Caliber 76.2 mm (3 inches). Hollow charge. 16.8 pounds. At 1,500 yards, the
Length of tube 11 feet S inches.
Weight in action 3,360 pounds.
APCBC and AP 40 projectiles will penetrate ap-
Muzzle velocity 2,230 feet per second. proximately 130 111 i .lZ inches) of homo-
Traverse 57°. geneous armor plate al 30 degrees from normal.
Elevation ^ 6 ° to + 45°.
Traction Motor-drawn.
k. 88-MM ANTITANK G r x uS.S cm Pak 43/41).
(1) General description. This 88-mm gun, 71
(3) Ammunition. This gun fires the same same long, is mounted on an orthodox tn-o-
ammunition as the 7.62 cm Pak 36 (r), but has wheeled carriage. The It,gs of the split trail arc
somewhat lower performance. hinged to a base which also mounts the upper car-
j . 88-MM ANTITANK GUN (8.8 cm Pak 43). riage. The \\-li~A, on stub axles, are sprung in-
(1) General description. The 8.8 cm Pak 43 is dependently. The gun has a four-point support
an electrically fired, semiautomatic gun on a two- when firing. A muzzle brake is lilted, and the
bogie cruciform mount. It may be fired from its breech mechanism is semiautomatic with a hori-
wheels if the direction of fire is within 30 degrees zontal slicliug blc~li.
of the longitudinal girders, but must be fired with
its platform on the ground when used in an ar- ( 2 ) Cf2n~o~-lL.)-isii(..s.
tillery role. its platfor nl the top of the t h e ........<\AN8 mm (3.46 inches).
t i l is l 5 c r y inches high. An auto- Length of tube 21 feet 7.25 inches.
{
matic firing cut-out restricts elevation when firing Weight in action ).(>o0 pounds.
over the legs to 12 degrees on early mounts and 16 Muzzle velocity (AI'40 I .3.705 feet per second.
Muzzle velocity
degrees on later mounts. The 8.8 cm Pak 43 is (AI'C'BC) 1280 feet per second.
ballistically identical with the 8.8 cm Pak 43/41. Muzzle velocity ( II H ) . 2.4o:i I eet per second.
Muzzle velocity (hollow
(2) Characteristics. charge) 1 ,%.S feet per second.
Caliber 88 mm (3.45 inches). Traverse 5i>'.
Length of tube 21 feet 7.25 inches. Elevation 5" to + 38".
Weight in action 8,000 pounds. Traction Motor-drawn.
VII—37
I MARCH 1945
UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-45)
• ; - *>• f >
•n
i 1)) Clan,-nclrlis1ic.s.
Caliber 20 mm ( 0.79 inch).
Length of tube 56.6 indies.
Weight in action 896 pounds
Effective ceiling 3,500 fe.-l.
Maximum horizontal
range .......5,230 yards.
Rale of fire: practical. .ISO U> 220 rounds per
minute.
l u z z l e velocity ( H E 3 .2.050 i i c 1 p e r -
Muzzle velocity ( A P ) . .2,625 l\ct per second.
Muzzle velocity (AP40) .3.250 fci t per second.
Traverse 360°.
Elevation — 20° t.. !- 90°.
Traction Motor-drawn, RR, S P .
Antiaircraft sights: Flakz-isiir SS,
Lincalvisier 21, Sclvwcbckrcisvisicr 30/38.
•1 ' \
VII—38
I MARCH 1945
TM-E 30-451
VII—39
TM-E 30-451
t MARCH 1945
Flak is It is mounted on a triangular platforl breech mechanism. ( lips of live rounds are feel
on three adjustable leveling feet. Piece and mount iroln the IL,it. The mount is a triangular platfoml
are carried on a two-wheeled trailer. 'Weight in \I-ith t\vo hhor-t outi-i~~vr\ for\\-artl.
action is 1.71 tons. The 3.7 cm Flak 37 consists (b) Characteristics.
of a normal 3.7 cm Flak 18 mounted on a modi- modi- ..50 mm (1.97 inches).
fied carriage. Ballistically, it is identical with 3.7 Weight in a c t i o n . . 3 . 1 . ? ton?.
cm Flak 18 and 36. Effective ceiling 10,000 feet.
Maximum honzi>m;il
(b) Characteristics.
range 14,760 yards.
Caliber 37 mm (1,45 inches). Rate of fire: praciic.il. . 13(1 rounds per minute.
Length of tube 10 feet 8.75 inches. Muzzle velocity 2,755 leet per second.
Weight in action 1.93 tons. Traverse 360'.
Effective ceiling 5,000 feet. Elevation --10° to -|- 90°.
Maximum horizontal Traction 4-wheel trailer, motor-
range 7,200 yards. drawn.
Rate of fire: practical. .80 rounds per minute. Antiaircraft sight : l:hikvisicr •! I.
Muzzle velocity 2,690 feet per second.
Traverse 360°.
(cj 1Irlr/il~~/iitio/l. I'r[~jr~.tilr \\-eights are: IIE,
Elevation —5° to + 85°. 4.8 pounds; HE-iinviidiary-tracer, 4.8 pounds;
Traction Motor-drawn. l ’ , -1-H po”n’ls.
Antiaircraft sights: Flakvisicr 33, (7) Miscellaneous. The following antiair-
Flakvisier 37 (for Flak 37), Sclnvebedornvisicr. craft automatic weapons possessed by the Ger-
(5) 37-mm Antiaircraft Gun (3.7 cm Flak mans in limited numbers may be encouiiterctl occa-
43). (a) General description. 1M10ugh this sioiwll~ :
gun does not differ externally from the 3.7 cm Flak 2 cm Flak 2S Ocrlikon type.
18, 36, and 37, it has a completely different, fully •/ cm Flak 2$ Rofors type.
automatic, gas-operated action. The gun is fed by 4.7 cm Flak Manufactured for the
eight-round clips on a fixed loading tray in the ~:~cilslovakinn Army
bv the Skoda works.
left side. Using a fixed firing pin, it fires on the
forward movement of the bolt. Of low build, the
3.7 cm Flak 43 has a pedestal mount with a shield.
A twin version known as the Flakzwilliiig exists,
with one gun mounted above the other, The guns
may be fired together or independently. In action
the twin version weighs 3.08 tons.
(b) Characteristics.
Caliber 37 mm (1.45 inches).
Length of tube 9 feet 8.16 inches.
Weight in action 1.37 tons.
Effective ceiling 5,000 feet (approximate).
Maximum horizontal
range 7,200 yards
(approximate).
Rate of fire : practical... 150 rounds per minute,
theoretical.250 rounds per minute.
Muzzle velocity 2,750 feet per second.
Traverse 360°.
Elevation —6° to + 90°.
Traction Static emplacement, mo-
bile mount, or SP.
Antiaircraft sights: Flakvisier 43,
S clneebcdornvisicr.
(c) Ammunition. HE-tracer, HE-incendiary-
tracer, AP-IIE, IIE-incendiary, and HE pro-
jectiles.
(6) 50-mm Antiaircraft Gun (5 cm Flak
41). (a) General description. The 5 cm Flak
41 is similar to the 3.7 cm I;lak 36. It is gas-ol,rr- ol,rr- S—3.7 cm Fink 18 (37-mm antiaircraft gun)
ated, and is fired by the forward movement of the being prepared for firing.
VII—41
SIMP! * ' ^ ' C ^ i
I MARCH 1945 TM-E 30-451
c. IIEAVY ANTIAIRCRAFT GUNS. (1) 88+m section liner, or of a loose 1 parrel fitting into a
Antiaircraft Gun (5.8 cm Flak 18, 36, and 37). jacket. i\ semiautomatic, hori/mital sliding-wedge
(a) Ccucral tlrscriptio% The SS-mm gun was breechblock is used. The mount has two outrig-
produced first in 1934 as the standard mobile anti- gers to sleatly the gun for l;l.ill, (Ic~tlicr than dircctl)
aircraft gun. The tube consists of either an outer front or rear. The 8.8 cm link 36 differs from
tube with an inner locking tube and a loose three- the Fl& 18 only ill having a slightly different
VII—42
I MARCH 1945 UNQl”?;~;F J TM-E 30-451
nlount, \\-hilt the 8.S cuz Flak 37 is identical with Maximum horizontal
the I;lall 36 escel~t for a slightlv tliffcrcnt clat:l range 21,580 yards.
Kate of fire: practical. .20 rounds per minute.
IransmiGon s!5tein. Muzzle velocity (1 IT.) .3.280 feet per second.
(1)) Clltr~acl:l,istics. Tr:>vcrse ...... 360”.
Calilm .............._ 3 mm i 3.46 illchcs). Elevation —3' to -f- 90°.
Length of t u l , c . . . 1 5 feet 5 in,.h,s, Traction Motor-drawn (12-ton
Weight in a c t i o n . 3.19 tolli. half-track, Set. Kfz. .<?),
1Insirnum ceiling.... 3 - 3,500 fed. or sl:lti(..
laximum 1101-i7c~nt:il
rsngc 16,200 >Wil,. !c) . Uuinuiiilio'.i. 1 'rojectile weights are : H K ,
Rate of fire: practical. I 5 to 20 roun~ls per 20.68 pounds; A P I T . C . 22.45 pounds.
mini:tc. C3) 105-iv.in Antiaircraft Gun (10.5 cm Flak
?bluzzlc velocity (1117) .2,690 feet per secontl.
38 ami 30). i a ) General description. The 105-
hluzxlc \c.locity (;1P). .2.600 feet per sccontl.
Traverse 360°. lr.m antiaircrait gun appears in two models.
Elevation .......... —3” to + 85”. It is produced in .-tat:*- and mobile versions, and
Traction .............I lotor-drawn. also is mounted o:i railway cars. The breech has
(c) .•Inimuiritioii. 1 'rojectile weights are : Til"., a horizontal sliding block", which may be operated
20 pounds; AT, 21 pounds. manually or aulomatieall.-, and an electric firing
(2) SQ-III/IIif JIliuircraft GUIZ (8.8 cm F/trk mechanism. The buffer is hydraulic, the recuper-
4I). (a) Geizual tlC,scription. The S.S cm Flak ator hvdropneumatic, and the eqnilibrator of the
41 is designed for use against air, grountl. and sea spring type. T~ave~se -a11d vie\ation may be ac-
targets. Although uwally fired froin the platforin. complished either manually or by power. A re-
it may be firetl from its wheels, with thv sick mvn- mote control, power-operated fuze setter and a
bers of the platform extended. The lmcch lla~ a power rammer are part of the complete unit.
h o k m t a l sliding-wedge block, and the gun ha5 ( b ) Cl/cll-crc(c.ri.st,c..s.
an automatic raniii~er. An electric firing mech- Caliber li)5 mm (4.13 inches).
Length of tube 21 feet 9.6 inches.
anisni is cmployetl.
\\‘eigllt in ;Ictirl t i . 11.0.1 toll\.
(b) Cl~nrflrfrvistics. Maximum ceiling Vi /."') feet.
Cnlilwr ...88 mm (3.46 itlcheq). Effective ceiling I'.MII feel
Ixngth of tu l x . . 2 1 feet 5.75 inches. (approximately).
\\-cigllt in a c t i o n . . 8 . 8 5 lon5. ~l~tsimum ll~~ri~~~nl:il
1 lasim::m c e i l i n g . . 1 0 ,X0 icct range 10,100 vards.
Figure 62.—8.8 cm Flak 41 (88-min multipurpose nun) sli 'cvi'wr/ carriage lowered.
VII—43
I MARCH 1945 TM-E 30-451
figure 63.—105-mm Flak 38 (105-mm antiaircraft gun), top view showing elevating and traversing mechanism on
right side of gun; bottom view showing left side with drill round in fuze setter tray.
ens. (a) General. Antiaircraft fire control for or obtained from a .-eparale source, and are set
automatic weapons is accomplished through the into the sight bv hand. A clock-work motor tlri\-vs
use of various types of on-carriage sights, ranging three disc and \vliecl mechanisms which lx.rform
from the simple manually operated Li~~xlvisicr the multiplications necessarv in the computation
(linear sight) through various mechanical types of deflections. Uni-direetional drives from the ele-
and the complica~etl, electrical Flakvisicr. Range vating and traversing mechanisms rewind the
must be wt into some of the simpler sights, and clock motor. In operation, the necessary deflec-
this is obtainctl either through estinlaGon or tion is obtained by mechanically oli'setting the
through the use of a one-mctcr base range finder. cross hairs of the reticle of a one-power telescope.
Tracer observation also is used for fire control. Provision is incorporated for L‘(~i~l-c~~.tiolls ior su-
(b) Ihcalzdsirr (I,ilrcar siylit) 21. This is a perelevation and temperature c~l~~il~;es. Tlw sigllt
simple, atljustablc t!-pe of speed ring sight, used is of cclmpact box-slqx~l cc~i~~t~-u~.tion, alq)roxi-
as an alternate for the more complicatetl sights de- mately 10 inches 1)y 9 iii&e bv 4 ’ J illclie< in size
signed for use on the 20-111111 antiaircrait guns. and 23 pounds in \vcight. It ii. fi:tc,tl to the sight
Range, course, and speed of target, angle of dive bar of the gun b!- a suspension bracket alltl lug.
or climb, and supcrelevation are set in through (g) Schzvcbcdorni'isicr. This is a relatively
manual manipulation of the sight. sinq)le antiaircr;ift bLh;cll;t rcceiitlv developed for
(c) Flakvisicr (.Intiaircm/t siqllt) 3.5. This alternate use on the 3.7 cm Flak 37 and 43. The
is a mirror sight \vith a computer mechanism op- sight \\-orkS on the linear principle. ‘1‘argc.t s;l)cctl,
crating on the course ant1 speetl, sl~unt-plane-linl~- tlirt,ction. and angle of clilllb or dive are set into
age principle. It tlclxn~ls on accurate setting of tlie sigl;t lll~lilU~lll\~.
target range, coiirsc, and spc’cd. It can engage (h) Scliz^ebekrcisvisier 30; 38, This is a re-
level-flying, climbing, or diving targets. It nor- cent type ot r:lali\-elJ >iiiil~lc. l)i\-ot(.(l ring sight
mally is used on tlw 2 cuz Fluk 30, 1~; also may designed for u.;e \\-ith the 2 cm I:!ak \\-~xl)o~ls. Its
be found on the 2 CHIC Flak 38 and 2 cm Flakvicr- use’ is becoiiiin~g more and more frequent ox the
ling in place of the clectricnl Flakvisicr 38 nud 40. later models of 2 cm Flak in lieu of the more com-
(d) Flakvisicv 38 and 30. The Iilakz?sicr 38 plicated cl~xtrical Flakvisier 38 and JO.
is an electrically opcratcd, range-rate sight which ii) I:ltrk:isicr 41. This is a completely auto-
computes l;\teral and \-ertical leads plus wperele- matic, tachometric clock-work, range-rale sight
\.ntion. The azimuth rate xx1 clc\xtion rate are emploved with the 5 cm Flak 41. ()perated bv one
measured through tachomctcr generators coupled man, range is introduced and angular velocities
to the gun's traversing ant1 elevating gcai-s. Slant are calculated in such manner that superelevation
range is introduced as a battery voltage, modifietl ant1 vertical ant1 lateral dcilections are alqJliet1
by a rheostat, calibrat~tl in hundrctls of meters. automatically. The principle of operation is the
In tracking, the retitles oi the sight heat1 are dis- same as that of the Flakvisier 'S and 40.
placed by the battery yoltagc and tachomct~r gcn- (2) Heavy antiaircraft gnus. ;i) l\omman-
crater s-oltagc in such a mamxr that the gun is dogeriit 3d. ( 1 I This instrument is the earliest
trained automatically on tlw future position. The standard (lennan linear speed antiaircraft di-
use of electric current eliminates mechanical time rector, providing continuous daia for the engage-
lag. This si;;ht is us~tl normally with the 2 CJ ment of aerial targets by heavv antiaircraft guns.
Flak 38. The Flakvisirr 40, which is used with It eliiplo~-5 a i~ic~cli:~llic;~l b.ol~iticlli of the antiair-
the 2 cm Flakz~icdiy, differs from the Flakvisict craft problem, and has facilities for making neces-
35 only in minor details of construction. The prin- ml-y lmllistic correctic1ll5 to gun data. T11e instru-
cil)le of operation is the same. ment is mounted on a four-wheel trailer for trans-
(e) Flakvisirr 33. T_‘sed with the 3.7 cw Flak port.
78 ant1 36. this si:,:ht is similar in operating prin- ( 7) ‘I‘hc tlircctor 112s a main pedestal \vith three
ciples to the Flakvisier 35. leveling feet and two suspension arnls by which it
( i ) I;lahhiL,r 37 (13). This Flakvisier is a is raisetl and securc,tl to front a1lt1 rc’ar bogies for
mechanical computing sight used \vith the 3.7 cm transport. Tlie main l~~lest;il supports a casting
Flak 37. When used with the 3.7 CM Flak 33, it carrying the clirectcx iwchani-1115 ant1 supporting
is known as I-lakvisicv 43. Computation for dc- brackets on xvhich a stereoscopic, four-nwtcr range
flcctions is based upon the angular rates of quad- finder rests TVhen the director iy ~mplaccd for
rant elevation and azimuth. Ranges arc estimated action.
VII—46
I MARCH 1945 TM-E 30-451
VII—47
I MARCH 1945 TM-E 30-451
Figure 68.—Kolrl~~andogeriit 40 (antiaircraft gun director) in trailer for trading, zcithoul range finder.
(3) Firing data determined by the director (3) This director can 1~ used with the different
(firing azimuth, quadrant elevation, and fuze) types of heavy antiaircraft weapons l>v changing
arc transmitted electrically to appropriate dials on the ballistic cams. The Kommandoijeriit 41 is a
the guns. Kommandogeriit 40 fitted with cams for the S.S
(b) I<onlrmzdngcrir’2 40. (1) This is a later cm Hnk -/I, the nomenclature apparently being a
and impro\-cd version of the Ko~~~za~~dogrriit 36, convenient way of tlistingui~llillg its use for this
which it has superseded to a very large extent for purpose.
use with all heavy antiaircraft guns. The four- (c) k’ollllrlalltJoiii!t’.c!/c~~;ji 3?. This is an older
meter, stereoscopic range finder used with the type of anliaircrnit director used only ior aux-
"40" model is mounted on the director, and gun iliary purposes. It o~~crat~s mi the angular-rate
data is transmitted electrically to the guns. It also method of data computation. The four-meter base
uses the linear speed method of data computation. range finder usetl with tllis iil,~tru~nellt is mounted
However, the "40" model can be operated by five separately, and gun tlata provided bv (he tlircctor
men, whereas 11 men are required to operate the normally are transmitted to 111~. guns hy telephone.
"36". (d) Range finders. Four-tnc.tcr base stcreo-
(2) The "40" director incorporates a mech- scopic range finders furnish A n t range for the
anism which copes with changes in target altitude antiaircraft dircctclr5. l\ange Kinder 31 is used
and target course (curvilinear flight). with the Komimwdoycriil 3? and is separately
VII—48
UNCLASS!;T.D
I MARCH 1945 TM-E 30-451
S-kilowatt generator, and was designed for use inches) xxrcllli$ts, also ma}' be found Ftill in
without a sountl loca;c!r ncainst lo\\--ilying aerial active use.
targets. The searchlight is controlled manually
in azimuth and elevation by a layer seated on the f. BARRACK BALLOONS. TWO main types of
equipment. Ko separate location equipment is barrage balloons are cmploved by the (iermans for
used. ThP beam can 1~ cxposcd ant1 coverctl by a added protection of vital in-tallalions against low-
shutter of venetian-blind type. This s~xrchlight flying aircr;kit. ‘1‘11e >tandard barrage b;d10011,
usually will be found in the vicinity of autolllatic which is reported to have a hydrogen gas capacity
\veapo11s. of 200 cul)Ic meters I 7.002 ~xl)i~ i w t ) . usually is
(11) The lligh-currelit-tleiisity arc lamp is self- fIowii at an altitude of 0.000 or 5,000 feet. A
wgulating and is fitted in an invcrtctl position. smaller barrage balloon, reported to have a gas
The light is 135 million cantllcpowel- and has a capacity of 77 cubic meters I 2,71 8 cubic feet), is
range under fa\.oral)lc \\-rather conditions of 5,700 capable of use at altitudes under 2,000 feet. A
yards at a height of 5.000 feet. ‘Cliith bwm dis- large type of German barrage balloon capable of
persed the range is 3,500 yards. bring 1101~11 at altitutl<,.s of lS.(JOO to 30.000 feet
(4) Misccllo~tro~~s. (a) In addition to the has been reported, but this balloon has not been
above, there are a few 1SO-cm w:lrchlights em- used extensively.
ploycd on a special quxlruple mount. These
niouIlts, carryilifi four scarchli~hts, arc ecluil)lx
8. Heavy and Railway Artillery
with remote control gear.
(b) A few obsolct~ 1lo-cm ('43 inches) s~arcl:- 1)ctails availnblc on (;crman IICYIV~ and railway
lights, and a few French 200-cm and 240-cl11 (90 ai-tillcry aw given in I:igurcs 40 and 41.
v
Vigurc 70.—61.5 cm Karl Mrs. (24-inch gun), also kiwzvn as "llwr"
VII—50
TM-E 30-451
I MARCH 1945
VII—4I
k
Shell
Length Weight Maximum
Caliber f in action Range Ma Traverse Eleva- Remarks
Tube (tons) (yards) (f/s) tion Type Weight
(ibs.)
21 cm K. 38 8.3" 38' 28 36,000 2,970 16’ 50” HE 265 Box trail: mounted on platform containing
(55 cals) recoil system. Transported in two loads.
21 cm K. 39 8.3" 31' 3.6" 37.2: 32,800 2,625 360° 45” HE 278 Platform mounted. Carriage in three parts
(415 cals) SAP on four-wheeled limber. Models K. 39/40
AP and K. 39/41 exist; performance and de-
AC tails similar.
24 cm H. 39 9.4" 21'11" 30.2~ 19,700 1,970 360” 70” HE 365 Platform mounted. Improved Model 24 cm
(28 cals) s”i\“P H. 39/40 with similar performance exists.
24 cm K. 3 9.4" .59.3( 41,010 3,248 HE 331 Carriage in five sections.
V
24 cm K. 18 9.4" 43' 1 59.36 40,460 3,182 6” 56” HE 334 Carriage in five sections. Box trail plus
(55 cals) platform. Fires pre-rifled shell.
I
28 cm H.L/ lZ 11" 11” 55.3: 11,370 1,148 360.a HE 770 Platform semi-static. Obsolete.
(12 cals)
28 cm Kst. H. 11" 40.88 12,470 1,243 360° HE 770 Platform static. Obsolete.
35.5 cm Ml 14" 82.6: 21,870 1,870 HE 827 Carriage in seven sections. Also fires AC
AC fin stabilized stick bomb. ;
GO
42 cm Gamma Mrs. 16.5" 22' 15.41 15,530 1,483 45” 66” AC 2,249 Semi-static platform. Obsolete. SO
(16 cals)
54 cm Karl Mrs. 21.25" 17' 8.5" 132 13,0001 70°(?) AP’ 3,310 S. P. tracked carriage. Known as "Thor".
(10 cals) HE AF
HE
61.5 cm Karl Mrs. 24.21" 16'2" 131 6.2001 TO”(?) AP 4,400 Carriage as for 54 cm Karl Mrs. Known as
(8 cals) HE HE "Thor".
1
? Unconfirmed. Anti-fortification.
m
15 cm K. (E) 5.9' 19' 8" 84 25,000? 12,360 2,800 360°? HE 95 Top carriage traversing railway
(40 cals) AC mount w’ith outrigger.
17 cm K. (E) 6.7" 22'4" 88.48 29,200? 14,770 2,870 360°? HEBC 138 Same as above.
(40 cals)
20.3 cm K. (E) 8" 39' 4" 95.2 40,000? 3,040? 45"? HE,AP 247 Car traverse. Usually fired from
(59 cals) Star (API turntable. Carriage does not recoil.
21 cm K. I2 (E) 8.3" 135'7"? 373? 126,800? 49,230 5,330? HEBC 236 Fires pre-rifled shell.
(196 cals)
24 cm Th. Br. K. (E) 9.4" 27'5" 104.16 22,200? 10,940 2,210? 1° 25° HEBC 328 Railway mount, car traverse.
(35 cals) t
24 cm Th. K. (E) 9.4" 31'4" 105.28 29,000? 14,990 2,670? 1° 25°? HEBC 328 Railway mount, car traverse. Car-
(40 cals) 360 O1 riage does not recoil. Usually fired
from turntable.
28 cm Kz. Br. K. (E) 11" 36'8" 130 32,300? 15,645 2,690? HEBC 529 Same as above.
(40 cals) AP
28 cm Lg. Br. K. (E) 11" 41'3" 135.5 40,500? 18,380 2,820? HEBC 626 Same as above. A SO calibers long
(45 cals) version, 28 cm s Br. K. (E), has
estimated range of 40,500 (?) yds.,
a min. range of 18,380 yds. A 28
cm Bruno NK. (E) also exists.
28 cm K.5 (E) 11" 69' 8" 241 67,900 67,900 ,900 50° HEBC 551 Shell splined instead of having driv-
(76 cals) 360 O1 ing bands. Double recoil system,
turntable. Fires rocket assisted
shell.
iO.6 cm K. (E) Adolf 16" 49,200 2,657 2,271
I.445 1,323
38 cm K. (E) Siegfried 15" 64' .5" 316? 60,900 2,6001 360" HE 1,764 Projectile fitted with three driving
(52 cals) 3,445 1,091 bands. Double recoil system, turn-
table.
80 cm Gustav Geschiitz 31.5" 94' 9" 1,344 51,400 AC 16,540 Also known as "Dora."
(36 cals)
1
T" (?) Unconfirmed. On turntable.
o
Figure 73.—German railway gurus.
U I 'i >., L TM-E 30-451
I MARCH 1945
VII—54
• !
- \J
MARCH 1945 Th4.E 30-451
VII—55
I hIARCH 1945 Tlv1-E 30-451
VII—56
I MARCH I945 ;\ TM-6 30-451
Section V. SELF-PROPELLED ARTILLERY tactical point pi ~i~-\v, !.i:t ibe lint of tlcniarca-
tion often is not clear, a- many self-propelled ar-
I. General tillery l)irws Il;ive dual lm-vMons. ‘l‘hese types
a. ~HRI:L.OI’L\IENT. German self-propelled ar-
arc: cl()SC~-SIIIqwt ;11-1111~~1-\-, including assault
tillery has now tlcvelopctl to a point whrre tllere guns; field and medium artillery; tank destroyers;
is scarcely any artillery piece up to ant1 inclutl- and antiaircraft artillerx
ing 150-mm calilxr which has not appeared on (1) Close-support ami assault puns. The de-
at lcnst one self-pi-opelled clmssis. Some of thesr velopment of close-support and assault guns was
have 1xw1 expel-imental, lmt others have heen begun about l('4O. As-auh guns are designed for
stantlartlizetl ant1 have appcaretl in lnrgr nmil~ers. the close support of infantry, and normally con-
sist of a gun of limited traverse on an armored
1). T’RODI;C.TION JTM110R)S. Self-lxmpcllcd ar-
self-propelled chassis carrying heavy frontal ar-
tillery has l m n produced ii, three different ways.
mor. ‘I‘hty :11-e iucliiud to be slower and less
T?rst, there are the gtm-chxsis cotnl~iiiations
maneuvcrable than tank- but are suited particu-
which have been designed and engineered care-
larly well for attacks "ii CI~~~,~I~ infantry heavy
full!- to fill 3 partitular role. Tllcsc were pro-
weapons and main points ol resistance.
tluccd in qunntity l)y m:Ljor arninment factories
in Gel-ninny aid mist in large nuiiil,ers. ‘ I ‘ (2) field and medium sell-propelled artillery.
75mm ant1 105niiii assault guns are esamplcs Field and medium self-propelled artillery was in-
of this tyl)c. Secon:l, tlicrc arc’ the standard p n s troduced first about the middle of 1942. Both
fitted on standard tank chassis. Conversion has types of llc,\\.itzers I in.5 em. Ir I;. II. IS and
been carried out in accortlnt~cc with well-ciigi- 1 5 c m s . /-'. / / . J8) \ision artillery now
neered designs at consitleral~lc csl)cnsc of time may be found on sell-propelled chassis.
aid sldl. .\nirmg these are the 10.5 cm le. I;. II. i.^) Self-propelled ,;:;liianl- j/uus. The first
IS/2 on the GK: If (li'espe) and the 15 cm self-propelled antitank gun was the 4.7 cm
s. F. If. 18/1 on the Gi,\ III IT [Hummel). I'ak. II) m o u n t e d o n 111 ilien i 1(>41 ) obsolescent
Third, there is a large class of self-~~ropellctl guns chassis of the I'a. Kpf:e. I h. Antitank guns now
produced by fieltl coii\w-sion. carrirtl out in unit form the numerically largest class of self-pro-
or lease \V(ll~liSll(O~)S, ant1 requiring little skill, time, pelled artillery weapon.-.
or material. A2n csanil~le c~i this is the 15 Ci (4) Scli-propcllcil caiidircmit artillery. Self-
s. I. c;. 33 mounted on the chassis of the propelled antiaircraft artillery actually was devel-
r2. I‘pfw. 1. oped before any attenip: was made to apply this
c. TACTICAL USES. German self-l~ropellctl ar- principle to other tvp. - of weapons, but so far
tillcry n,:iy Ix tlivitlctl into four ty1wi from a no serious effort has b--.;n made to mount anti-
5*36**.
*v
^^i^i^S^i'iftTS?^
Fii»(r<? 81.—7.5 an Fak 39 (L/48) on Pz. Jag 38.
VIl—59
UNCLASSIFIED
I MARCH 1945 TM-E 30-451
VII—60
I MARCH 1945 TM-E 30-451
UNCLASSIFIED.
VII—61
I MARCH i945
UNCLASSIFl: TM-E 30-451
VII—62
I MARCH 1945 TM-E 30-451
VII—63
I MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451
% • * • • *
Fi,91we U-— Wa.rp (10.5 cm lc. I2.H. 1X/2 ou 1':. Kpfw. II).
VII—65
I MARCH 1945
UNCLASSIFIED ™-E3°-451
Figure 90.—15 cm Heavy Infantry Howitzer (s.I.G. 33) on I'z. Kffiv: II Chassis
VII—66
I MARCH 1945
UNCLASSIFIED
Gun Bear gives much better protection to the crew than
Type 10.5 cm le. F. H. 18/Z. any of these,
Muzzle velocity H E 1,772 feet per second.
Maximum range 13,500 yards. (2) Specificatiom-.
Elevation —S° to + 42”.
General
Traverse 10" each way.
Muzzle brake Yes. Nomenclature Rrzrvmbiir or Stu. PZ 43.
Buffer . H y d r a u l i c . Type of carriage S!II. G. IV, Sd. Kfc. 166.
Recuperator Hydropneumatic. Length over-all:
Ammunition: Including gun 19 feet 4 inches.
Types fired HE ‘HC Smoke Excluding gun 19 feet 4 inches.
Rounds carried 22 8 Width over-all 9 feet 8 inches.
Muzzle velocity 1,772 (supercharge) Height o v e r - a l l . . . . . . . 8 feet 2 inches.
(feet per second) ‘eight 30.4 tons.
Projectile weight 32.6 25.9 32.4 Crew ................. . men.
(pounds)
Gun
Carriage
Suspension: Type 15 cm Stu. H. 43 (L/12).
Number of bogie Muzzle velocity HE 790 feet per second.
wheels 5. Maximum range HE 5,000 yards
Type of bogie wheels.large. (approximately).
Number of return Elevation : —8.5” to + 30”.
rollers 3. Traverse S” each M‘ay.
Track, length 7 feet 10% inches. Muzzle brake No.
Track, width 6 feet 2 inches. Ammunition:
Width of link 11M inches. Types fired HE HC Smokr
Hull armor: Muzzle velocity 790 902 780
Front 30 mm. (feet per second)
Sides 20 mm. Projectile weight 83.6 55 85.7
(pounds)
Fighting compartment
rtment carried Total of 38 rounds.
armor:
Front 10 mm. Carriage
Sides 10 mm.
Suspension:
Power Number of bogie
Engine: wheels 8.
Type Maybach HL 62 TR. Type of bogie wheels. Small rubber tired.
Cylinders 6. Number of return
Fuel Gasoline. rollers 4.
Horsepower 140. Track, length 11 feet 6 inches.
Transmission Synchromesh; 6 forward, Track, width 8 feet 1 inch.
one reverse. Hull armor:
D r i v e . F r o n t sprocket.
Front 45 plus 50 mm
Performance armor at 1.5”.
Trench crossing 6 feet. Sides 30 mm vertical.
Fording ..............3 feet. Rear 20 mm.
Radius of action 127 miles. Fighting compartment
Step l foot. armor:
Gradient 30°.
Front 101 mm at 38°.
Maximum speed 25 miles per hour.
Sides 50 mm at 18°.
Roof 22 mm at 82°.
b. GRIZZLY BEAR (Brusmbh’r) or Stu. Pz. 43
(15 cm Stu. H. 43 (L/12) oa Pz, Kpfw. I!* Power
CHASSIS). (1) General. This is essentially a Engine:
close-support weapon and mounts a very short- Type Maybach HL 120 TRM.
barreled howitzer in a high, armored superstruc- Cylinders v-12.
ture. The 150-mm infantry gun (s. I. G. 33) Fuel • Gasoline.
Horsepower .......,295 at 3,000 rpm.
performs a similar role on its various self-pro- Transmission Synchromesh; 6 forward,
pelled mountings: the chassis of Pz, Kpfw. II?, 1 reverse.
Pz. Kpfw. II, and the Czech 38 (t). The Grizzly Drive Front sprocket.
VII—67
I MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-45I
VII—68
I MARCH 1945
UNCLASSIFIED
Performance Weight 25.2 tons.
Trench crossing 9 feet. Crew 6 men.
Fording ...........3 feet. Gun
Radius of action .130 miles.
Step 2 feet 6 inches. Type 15 cm s.F.f1. 18/1.
Gradient 30°. Weight 2.07 tons (barrel and
Maximum s p e e d . . . 2 5 miles per hour. breech).
hfuzzle velocity 11E 1.70.5 feet per second.
Armament l\laximum range HE charge eight 14.57J
yards.
Type ................One d1.G‘. 34, ball mount.
Elevation 0° to 39°.
Location Left of main armament.
Traver5c 16” each way.
Muzzle b r a k e . . . . . . . . N o .
C. BUMBLE B E (~Zf172d) 15 C?lZ S. I;.II. 18 /l 1:uffer Hydraulic (under tube).
ON GZW. II IIV. (1) Gcncral. This self-pro- Recuperator Hydropneumatic (over
pelled medium howitzer employs a h $ % l chassis tube),
made up of the suspension of the Ps. Kpficl. II’ Ammunition :
and various components of I’,-. k’pficf. 111. This Types fil-cd ... HE HC Smoke
T h i s carried..... 12 G
gun has the same mission in its self-propclletl ver-
hluzzlc 1clarity .. 1.705
sion as in its fieltl version. The 15 cm S. I;. II. 1.7, Projcctilc w e i g h t . . 9.5.9 86
ai1 older medium howitzer (obsolete on its fieltl
mount), may he fount1 in the same role, niountctl l-I-iage
on the French "Lorraine" chassis. Suspension:
Suml)cr of hogie
wheels 8.
(2) S~ccificatims Type of l & e whrel~. Small rubber tired.
General . Number of return
rollers 4.
Nomenclature Hummel. Track, length 11 feet 6 incllcs.
Type elf carriage Gw. III/IV, Sd. k-f:. 165. Track, width 7 feet lO~/~ iii&es.
Length over-all: Width of link l foot 3 in&es.
Including g u n . 2 1 feet 3% inches. Hull armor:
Excluding g u n . 2 0 feet 4:/8 inches. F r o n t . . . . .. 3 0 mm at 22”.
Width o v e r - a l l . . . 9 feet 8% inches. Sides .2C mm vertical.
Height o v e r - a l l . 9 feet 7.; 1 inches. Rear .20 mm at 9°.
Power Carriage
Engine: Suspension :
Type Maybach HL 120 TRM. Jumber ot- boglcs. .. 8.
Cylinders v-12. Type of bogies ...Small rubber tired.
Fuel Gasoline. Number of return
Location Center. rollers 4.
Horsepower 295 at 3,000 rpm. Track, length ..... ll feet 6 inches.
Transmission Synchromesh ; 6 forward, Track, width 7 feet 11 inches.
1 reverse. Width of link 1 fix it 3 inches.
Drive Front sprocket. Hull armor :
Front 30 mm at 12°.
Performance Sides 20 mm vertical.
Trench crossing 9 feet. Rear 22 mm.
Fording 2 feet 7% inches. Top 17 mm.
Radius of action......,160 miles. Belly 17 mm.
Step 2 feet 6 inches. Fighting compartment
Gradient 30”. armor :
Maximum specrd 2j miles per hour. Front 10 mm at 30°.
Sides : 10 mm at 16°.
4. Tank Destroyers
1 'ower
a. RHINOCEROS (Nashont), FORMERLY HOR-
Engine:
NET (Hornisse), 8.8 cm Pak 43/1 ON THE GW.
Type ........I I L 120 TRM.
III/IV. (1) Gcfzcral. This is one of the ver- Cylinders .........\ ‘-12.
sions of the S.S CIFZ Pnk 43, the latest 88-mm Fuel Gasoline.
antitank gun, mounted on the hybrid chassis of Locution Center.
the Pz. Kpfw. III and IT/. The vehicle's sil- Horsepower ....295 ;LI 3.000 r-pm.
Transmission Maybach syncllromesh;
houette is very high and the armor protection
6 i<lr\vartl, 1 reverse.
given to the crew by the thin-skinned superstruc- Drive .I.‘ ront q)rockct.
ture is very poor. ‘The gun, however, is able to
Performance
engage tanks ,at very long ranges.
Trench crossing .....9 icct.
(2), Specifications. Fording ....2 feet 7:/r inches.
Radius of action 160 miles.
General Step ..........2 fcu.1 0 inches.
Nomenclature Nashorn. Gradient 30°.
Type of carriage :. .... G*Lu. III/IV, Sd. Kfz. 164. Maximum sl~cd ..25 milts l,cr hour.
Length over-all: Remarks
Including gun 27 tcct 8:A’ inches. Pcnetrntion of hnmogeneons armor at 30”,
Excluding gun 20 feet 4>/8 inches. APCBC projcctilc:
Width over-all 9 fe& 8% inches. 500 yards ..184 mm.
Height over-all 9 feet 7$j inches. 1,000 yards .. lh9 mm.
Weight 27 tons.
Crew 5 men. 11. LKI3HAN~ (Hrfanf). FORMERLY FERDI-
Gun NAND, 8.8 cm Stu. I<. 13 OR Pals 43/Z ON T I I
Type 8.8 cwt Pak 43/l (L/71). Panzer Jiicgcr Ti,qu 1’. (1) (;PWVQ~. This is an-
Muzzle velocity APCBC 3,280 feet per other version of the latest model, long 8%mm
second. antitank gun. The gun is mounted on the Tiger
Elevation —5” to + 20”. P chassis, a discarded early version of the Tiger,
Traverse 15” each way.
incorporating twin gasoline generating units with
Muzzle brake Yes.
Buffer Hydraulic. direct electric drive. Although protected by heavy
Recuperator Hydropneumatic. armor, this vehicle has been relatively unsuccess-
VII—70
MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIED 33-451
t :_«„:
VII—71
I MARCH 1945
UNCLASSIFIED
U
TM-E J0-45I
. *\
Armament Ammunition :
Type One MXi. 34, ball mount. Type< fired A PC APCBC HE
Location Glacis plate. hluzzle velocity .Z.S O ! ) 3,020 2,886
Remarks (feet Icr sccontl)
Projectile \+eigll l . 5X.1 62.5 57
Penetration of homogeneous armor at 30°, (pounds)
APCBC projectile: Rounds carried Total of 40 rounds.
500 yards 184-mm.
1,000 yards 169 mm.
( ‘miage
(1. Jagdtigcr, 12.8 cm Pak 44 (L/55) ON THE Torsion J>ar Suspen-
Pa. Jiig. Tiqrr RLODEL 13. (1) Gcncr-nl. The sion :
12.8 cm Pak 44 (L/55) is the largest caliber anti- Number of bogie
tank gun the Germans have produced so far. 1t wheels 9.
Type of hosir ~vhrcl~. TUin.
is only found in a self-propelled version, mounted Number of return
on the P.z. Jiig Ti~qcr Model B, which is an adapta- rollers None.
tion of the King Tiger chassis. The superstruc- Track. Icngt l ~ I3 feet 4 inches.
ture in which the gun is mounted, is very heavily Track, 1 1 i t l t h . O 9 icct. 2 inches.
armored. The J&tiger supersedes the 12.8 cuc M’idtll of link . _ ’ 2 icct 8% inches.
K. 40 mounted on a hybrid chassis, which was Hull armor:
cmploq-ed in Russia and will probably not be en- Front 150 mm at 50°.
countered in the future. Sides 80 mm vertical.
Rear 80 mm at 30°.
(2) Specifications. Fighting compartment
General armor :
Nomenclature lagdtigcr. Front 250 mm al 15°.
Type of carriage 1's. Jag. Tiger Model B, Sides 80 mm at 25°.
Sd. Kfz. 1S6. Rear 80 mm at 10°.
Length over-all:
Including gun 32 feet 2 inches. 1 'ower
Excluding gun 23 feet 10 inches. tnginr:
Width over-all 11 feet 9}4 inches.
Height over-all 9 feet 3 inches. Txpr ..1I aybach HL 230 1’30.
Weight 77.2 short tons. C?-lindrrs ..V-12.
Crew 6 men. Fuel Gasoline.
Location Rear.
(am H o r s e p o w e r . . . , 5 9 5 at 2,600 rpm.
Type 12.8 cm Pak 44 (L/55). Transmission ....Preselector, hydraulic
Muzzle velocity APCBC 3,020 feet per operation; 8 forward,
second. 4 reverse.
Muzzle brake Yes. Drive ..............Front sprocket.
l—73
MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIED TM.E »MS.
.:-*• ,
(2) Specifica.tiow
M»d.;
A I', ( '••miiniiulcr's
Dimensions
Length (ieel) 13 14 14
\Vitlth (lcc~t) 6.75 6.75 6.75
Height (feet) 5.58 5.73 6.75
Cleru2ncc (illclics) 9.75 10 1
Road speed (miles pvr hour) 12 15-16 15-16
Range on roads (miles) 112 87 87
* Sd. Kjs. is tile German abbreviation for Sunderkraftfalir,:eui/, meaning special mutur vehicle.
VII—76
I MARCH 1945
UNCLASSIFIED
TM-E 30-451
Section VI. ARMORED VEHICLES cess in combat undoubtedly gave rise to the deci-
sion to redesign the Tiger, which to some extent
I. General had fallen short of expectations. The new ver-
sion is the ~ocn~~s~~~rr or King Tiger.
The story of German armored vehicle develop-
ment is concerned principally with tanks, lvhich 2. Obsolete Tanks
have undergone considerable change since the be-
a. GEKERAL. The I’_n. Kpfw. I, Pz. Kpfw. II,
ginning of the war. German tanks have shown,
and J’z. Kpfw. III, although obsolete, are dis-
in the ccourse of 5 years of war, a gradual change
cussed here since thcv still may be met occasion-
from the Blitzkrieg concept of battle to greater
ally in the field.
emphasis on defensive, or at least offensive-de-
fensive, operations for which the latest German b. LIGHT TANK (PZ. Kpfw. I). (1) General.
tank, the King Tiger, heavily armed and armored This was the first tank to be standardized by the
but relatively slow and unmaneuverable, is Germans, and th<s first ones were produced in
suitable. 1934. Three models (~1, IX, and C) and a com-
mander's version (based on model I3) have been
German tank development began in 1934, osten-
identified, but model C nc’vt’r has been cncount-
sibly at the same time as the rest of the rearma-
erctl in action. The Ilull of the P,-. Kpfw. I was
ment program, but thcrc is no doubt that consid-
used as a self-propelled mount for several types of
erable thought and experimentation had been de-
artillery weapons, but it no longer will be met
\otctl to the subject before then. By 1939 the
even in this role. [ (2) Specifications on page 76.1
Germans had evolved four types of tanks: the Pz.
Iipfx.f1 I II III, and IV, with xvhich the Blitz- c. LIGHT TANK (F’_N. Kpfw. II). (1) General.
kuicg campaigns \\-ere conducted. There is evi- This tank is manned by three men: a commander,
dence that larger tanks $vere being developed in who acts as the gunner; a radio operator; and a
1939, and specimens of \vhat are assumed to have driver. A large number of models of this tank
been a 1’~. Kpfw. V and a Pz. Kpfw. VI in an were produced before it became obsolete. In a
experimental stage were employed in the invasion very much modified form it has reappeared as t’he
of Xor\vay. These, however, must have proved Luchs (Lynx) reconnaissance tank in Western
unsatisfactory, since they were dropped, and the Europe. The original vxpcrimcntal models of Pz.
present PC. Rpf~l. Y (Panther) and Pz. Kpfw. Kpfti. II were produced betiveen 1934 and 1936;
VI (Tigerj have no connection with them. it finally was abantlon~d as a fighting vehicle in
1943. A flame-throiving version, Pz. Kpfw. II
~Ieamvhile, the I-‘z. Kpfw. I and II gradually
(I;), also has become obsolete and probably will
becnmc obsolescent, first being relegated to recon-
not be met again. Motl~l I;, not the flame-thrower
naissance roles and then finally disappearing in
tank, was the latest model encountered. The modi-
1913 from the Table of Equipment of the Pa~zcv
fied hull of the I’:. Kpfw. II is still in use as a
regimeilt. The heavier tanks, Pun. Kpj+cl. III
self-proptlled gun carriage, notably in the case of
and II’, \vhich had proven satisfactory under fire,
r e , cm s. I.(;. 33 and the 10 CIJZ, lr. F.H. 18.
were modified to meet new conditions bv thicker
armor and more effective guns. f2) Specific-atiom.
uodrl L
In 1942, the I’:. Kpfw. VI, or Tiger, appeared lidCl 1, (Ly11s)
in Russia, and later in Africa. The Tiger was Specificarion numl~ct-. .\‘d. K1.r. .I21 Sd. Kfz. 123.
designed in the direct German tradition, and \\‘ei,qht in :lclir)
snnply xl-as armed more heavily and armoretl (tons) 11.5 13.2
Crew .i miti 3 men
more thickly than its predecessors. It appearctl
a r c t l Hull irotlt.i. i mm 30 mm
out of its proper ortler in the line of succession, Hull sides id mm 20 mm
for the Pz. Kpfiu. Y, or Panther, did not appear Front glncis plate.20 mm 20 mm
until nearly a year later. The Panther was some- Supcrstructurc
what of a surprise, since it marked a departure Front M) mm 30 mm
since ..?O20 mm 20 mm
from the conventional lines of German design,
d e s i g n , . . . I i mm 30 mm
and in the arrangement of its armor showed showe d . . . 15 mm 20 mm
strong signs of Russian influence. Its great suc- Armament (coaxialI)
mounted in turret) One 2 cm One 2 cm
x
Pz. Kpfw. is the German abbreviation for I’an.xr- Kw.K.30 Kw.K.18
kampfwagen, meaning armored fighting vehicle or tank. One M.G. 34 One M.G.34
VIl—77
UNCLASSIFIED
TM-E 30-451
I MARCH 1945
Dimensions, Lcngtb was a .?7-111111 gun. The P,-. Kp[~l. III now is ob-
(feet) . 1 4 . 7 5 14.83 solcte and rarely wcounterctl. The excellent hull
Width (fcet) _..7.33 8.25 and suq)ension have been utilized as the carriage
Height (feet) . . . .6.48 6.33
Ground ClC:iGWCC
for self-propelled guns, and it is in this form that
(inrhes) ..... I3 16 (;lpprc)si- the vehicle remains in production. The Pz. Kpf:cl.
mate) Ill has been encountered armed with the short 7.5
Engine ........ h-qlinder • 6-C~liIItkr cm Kw.K. (the original armament of the Pz.
In-line In-lint Zip/;ct. I[‘), anti also as a commander's vehicle,
133 H P 176 HI’
(;asoline Gasoline
;~s a llamc-thro\ving tZlllli. as a \I-I-wker tank, aS an
Road speed (milts armored ammunition carrier, a~icl as an armored
per hour) .. I5 40 obscryation post.
Range 011 roads
(miles) 118 155 (2) S~c,c-i/it-ntiorl.
Models I and M
Suspension : Alotlrl F : 5 hogie wlleels each side : Specification n u m b e r ...Sd. Kf.:. 141/1.
quarter-cllilllic 1cLf springing. Front driw Weight in action 24.6 ton-
sprocket, rear idler. (approximately).
Model L : 5 axles, torsion bar suspension; intcr- Crew 5 men.
leaved bogie wheels. Front drive sprocket, rear ~lrnmor. I~riml nose plate..SO mm.
idler. C,lnci\ Illate _..25 mm.
Driver's front plate 50 antI 20 mm ,spaced
d. MEDIUHI T A N K (PZ. Kpfw. 111). (1) Gcu- armor.
cral. This tank has appeared in many models but Hull sides 30 mm.
has retained basic characteristics throughout. The Rear plate< ...SO50 mm.
Turret front 57 mm.
latest models to appear are armed with the long-
Turret sides 10 mm.
barreled 5 cm Kw.K. 39 (L/60), which in 1942 Armament (coasinll:
displaced the shorter 5 cm Kw.K. (L/32). The mounted in turret) . . .One 5 CU‘ Kw.K. 39
original main armament, discarded late in 1940, with one M.G.34
VII—78
I MARCH 1945 TM-E 30-451
UNCLASSIFIED
VII—80
I MARCH 1945 UNCLASSlFED TM-E 30-451
The Panther first was met in action on the Dimensions, L e n & . . ? l fee: 1I'L inches,
Russian front in the summer of 1943. Originally (excluding gun)
Width _.._..10 feet 9 ^ inches.
designated PB. Kpfw. Y, its nickname, Panther, Height ......9 ic,et 1 inches.
was, adopted as its official nomenclature in Febru- Gun overhang .Oo icct 5 incllcs.
ary 1944. The latest version to appear is the Ground clearance . . . . 1 foot 7 'A inches.
Model G. The principal reasons for the success Performance,
of the Panther are its relatively high speed, Trench crossinc r.: o icct.
maneuverability, dangerous armament, and good S t e p . . . . . . 3 Ecet.
protection. Gradient 30°.
Fording 6 feet ( Some sub-
Variants of the Panther tank which have been meriiblc to 13 feet).
identified are the commander's version, the Road speed ......20 miles {,cr hour.
wrecker tank (Bergepanther), and the self-pro- Crozs-country speed. .15 milt; IK’T hour.
pelled gun Jagdpalztlzer, which consists of the 8.8 Maximum s p e e d . 3 5 milts per honr.
cm Pak 43/3 or 4 on the Panther chassis. Range on roads .. I24 miles.
Range cross-country. .62 milt-.
(2) Specifications. Engine, Type ....... Maybacll HL 230 P30.
Model G Cylinders .......V-12
Specification number .. .Sd. Kfz.171. Fuel Gasoline.
Weight in action 50 short tons Fuel capacity .,193 gallons.
(approximately). Fuel consumption (per
Crew ........_......5 men. 100 miles)
Armor, On roads .... 139 gallons.
Front glacis plate _.. .80 mm at 55”.* Cross-country .. .298 gallons.
Front nose p l a t e . . . . 6 0 mm at 35”. BHP ............ 6!N HP at 3.000 rpm.
Rear plate 40 mm at 30”. Capacity .........23 liters (1.103 cubic
(undercut) inches).
Hull sides 40 mm vertical.
Superstructure sides. .50 mm at 30”. Transmission : Maybach synchromrsh sliding-dog
Turret front 110 mm at 10°. type; manually- operated, xi\-ing seven for-
Turret . ......45 mm at 25”. ward speeds, O:IC reverse.
Turret rear 45 mm at 28°. Suspension : l<igllt load-carr!~t,fi axles each
Armament (coaxially carrying two large disced rubber-tired bogie
mounted in turret) .One i.5 CJU Kri8.K.13 wheel.~, interleaved. Twin torqion-bar suspen-
(L/70) and one M.C.34. sion.
In hull One M.G. 34.
* All angle measurements given are from vertical. b. PC. KpJxf. ‘I‘RCR:~. ( 1 j (;~~~~~~~~~1. This tank,
originally the Pz. Kpfw. VI, first was encountered Width with narrow
by the Russians in the last half of 1942, and by transport track . . . . 10 feet 4 inches.
Height ..........9 feet 41/s inches.
the Western Allies in Tunisia early in 1943. It's Gun overhang . 7 feet % inch.
colloquial name, Tiger, was adopted officially in Ground clearam{ , 1 foot 5 inches.
February 1944. The current versioa is Model E.
‘criorrnance,
Unlike the Panther, the Tiger is designed on Trench crossing J O 1 0 fret.
familiar German lines, but all the dimensions arc Step ..*.2 feet 6 inches.
increased. The main armament is the 8.8 cnz Gradient .... 30”.
Kw.K. 36, which is essentially the 8.8 cm Flak 36 Fording ... Suhmersihle to 13 feet.
adapted for turret mounting. The mounting of Jioad spce t l 1 5 I S milts per hour.
Cros?-country speed .5 to 10 miles per hour.
such a heavy gun has raised considerable prob- Maximum spcct l.25 milts per hour.
lems of rigidity, and consequently the hull is con- !Zangc trn roatls . 8 7 miles.
structed of large plates entirely welded together. liangv croci-country.53 milts.
The superstructure is made up in one unit, and Engine,. Type Mayhach HL 230 1’45.
welded to the hull. The turrent wall is made from Cylintlers ....\ --12.
a single large piece of armor, 82 mm thick, bent BHI ’....,690 HI’ at 3,000 rpm.
into a horseshoe shape. Further, all the armor Fuel Gasoline.
Fuel capacity . 1 5 0 gallons
plates are interlocked, in addition to being welded.
(al~~)roximatel~).
The armor of the Tiger, at the time of its ap-
pearance, was the thickest ever to be fitted on any Transniiusion: Alayl,ach-Olvar presclective gear-
box, hydraulicnll~ operated with eight for-
German tank, the front vertical plate being 102 \vard speeds and four rt’ver’;e.
mm thick and the hull sides 62 mm.
Suspension: Front tlri\-ing sprocket and rear
The suspension, which employs interleaved, idler. Eight Ioacl-carrying axles eacll with
Christie-type bogie wheels with a very wide- track, three large ho:iv wheels. Rogie wheels are
is reasonably simple and is an effective solution interleaved. Torsion-bar suspension, one tor-
of the suspension problem for such a large and sion bar per axle
heavy vehicle.
c. 1’2. ZCpfw. TIGER, MODEL B ( K I N G T I G E R ) .
The Tiger engine requires very skilled driving
and maintenance to get the best performance, and ( 1) G~~ercrl. This tank is a development of the
in the hands of insufficiently trained crews me- Tiger along the lines of the Panther and with a
chanical troubles are apt to appear. This charac- new main armament, the 8.8 cm Kw.K. 43
teristic has been the‘ tank's principal disadvantage. (L/71). The armor is as thick as that of the
Tiger—in some parts thicker—and the improved
design and the slope given to the majority of the
(2) Spccificntiom.
plates (as in the Panther) give the tank vastly
Model E improved protection.
Specification number. . .Cd. Kf.7. IS1
Weight in a c t i o n . . . . . 6X5 sllort tons. The King Tiger is a tank designed essentially
Crew .......5 men. for defensive warfare or for breaking through
Armor, Front nose plate102 mm at 30”. strong lines of defense. It is unsuitable for rapid
Front glacis plate.. . .62 mn~ at 80”. maneuver and highly tnobile warfare because of
Lower nose plate....62 mm at 60”.
its great weight and low speed. To accommodate
Driver's front plate. , 102 mm at 10”.
Hull sides _.....62 mm vertical. the gun the turret has been made unusually long
Superstructure sides. .82 mm vertical. in proportion to the total length of the tank. When
Rear p l a t e . . . . . . S2 mm at 20” “buttoned up" the tank is extremely blind, and
(undcrcut). this is one of its weakest points.
Turret front ... I00 mm at 0” to 11”.
Turret sides and rear.82 mm vertical. Since the King Tiger first appeared in August
Armament (cuaxially 1944 in Normandy, modifications have been made
m & t e d in turret) .One x.8 cm Kiv.KJb in the turret to eliminate the excessive plate-bend-
CL/%). OIW dI.G.34 ing involved in the original construction. The
In hull ........,.One 14.G.34. King Tiger virtually is invulnerable to frontal at-
Dimensions, Length ...20 feet 8% inches,
(excluding gun)
tack, but the flanks, which are less well protected,
Width with wide com- can be penetrated by Allied antitank weaporis’ at
bat track ... I2 feet 3 inches most normal combat ranges.
VIl—83
I MARCH 1945
UNCLASSIFIED
tM-E 30-451
VII—86
I MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIED TM-E30-451
(2) Specificatio+ls. Armor, Turret front. .I5 mm.
Turret sides and rear.8 mm.
Specification number.. .Sd. Kfz. 222. Superstructure front. 18 mm,
Weight in action 5.25 tons. Superstructure sides..8 mm.
Crew 3 men. Hull front nose plate. 18 mm.
Dimensions, Length... .I5 feet 7 inches. Hull sides ....... S to 10 mm.
Width ,.....6 feet 3% inches. Tail plate ..10 mm.
Height 5 feet 11% inches.
Ground clearance . . . fji inches. Armament ( h e 2 CHL Kw.K.30 or 38
Armor 8 mm. ant1 one 7.92-mm ilf.C.34
Armament ...........One 2 cm Kiv.K. .?0 or (oaxially mounted.
38 and one 7.92 11 Enginr . . . . 8 cylinders
X.G.3J roaxially 155 B H I
mounted. (;aro1inr.
Road s l l t ‘ c t l . . 5 1 mi1t.s per hour
Cross-country ,speed . . . 19 miles per hour.
c. EIGHT-WEIEEI.ED ARMORELI CAR (Sclzwerer Range on r o a d s : . . . 1 6 5 to 190 miles.
PanzerspZihwagen 8 Rad). (1) General. The Range cro.s-country ..110 miles.
eight-wheeled armored car has appeared in a var- Suspcn$ion .....8 single wheels.
iety of subsidiary roles. In addition to the prin- (8-n-heel drive).
cipal version (Sd. Kfz. 231)) there are two radio l’erformancc,
vehicles (Sd. Kfz. 232 and 263), an armored car Trench c r o s s i n g . 3 5 feet.
Step ..........I1 foot 7 inches.
mounting the 7.5 cm Kw.K. 38 and having no Fording 2 feet.
turret, and the eight-wheeled armored car mount- Maximum grade . . . .27”.
ing a 5 cna Kw.K. 39 in a turret (Sd. Kfz.
234/2). The radio vehicles have large, rectangu- cl. HALF-TRACKED ARMORED CAR (LE. Schtz.
lar, folding, frame aerials. Ps.it’!/. 2 C/U). (1) GL~J~FYUI. This half-tracked
xnioretl car is armed with 20-mm automatic can-
(2) Specificatiom. non ant1 macliine g-un in a turret.
VII—88
I MARCH 1945
UNCL~'~SS;[~ED TM-E 30-451
fe
Figure 109.—15 cm Nebelwerfer 41.
VII—89
l t JU-4JI
Figure Ill.—--The Panzerwerfer 42 fires the saw rockets as thz 1.5 cm L’vre6elaLzrfer 41.
VII—90
I MARCH 1945
UNCLASSIFIED ^
111 Characteristics. the crew remains behind armor near the weapon
C a l i b e r . . . . . . . . 2 1 0 mm (8.27inches). and can reload in less time.
Length of barrels 4 feet 3% inches. (2) Characterisfics.
Taximum range 8,600 yards. Caliber 150 mm (5.9 inches).
‘ e i g h t of rocket 245 pounds, Traverse 360°.
Maximum elevation 45°.
I 3) T I w The projector fires an H E hfasimum range 7,330 yards.
projectile with a ZS-pound bursting charge. Vehicle ncight 7.1 tons.
c. 1.30-X31 SELF-PKOI'ELI.ED PROJECTOR (15 cm Vehicle road speul 25 miles per hour.
Panzcrzverfcr 42). (1) Gmcral tlrscription. The
Germans have mounted this ten-barreled rocket (3) rlmin2/)litioll. The ammunition 1s the same
projector on the rear of a lightly armored half- as that firul 1jy the I.5 cm Ncbclwcrfer 41.
tracked vehicle with a Maul tier suspension. Two d. WOODKX l\.\c K I.AIXCHER (28/32 cm
horizontal rows of five barrels are mounted on a SfJm1erc.s ll'lri~f~~cr~iit NJ. iI) General descrip-
turntable with a SGO-degree tra\,ersc. The \veapotl tion. This is tltc originnl frame-type rocket pro-
is fued electrically by a gunner who sits in the jcctor and consists oi a simple wooden frame
body of the :v~liiclc immetliatcly Inflow the plat- upon which the I)rojectil<*s are rested to be fired
form, his head protected by a shallow cupola. It from the crates. The rockets are stabilized in
is probable that the rate of fire of this weapon is ili;:ht by rotation itttpart(‘d 1)~ the 26 jets which
higher than that of the Ncbehvcrfcr 41, since are inclined at ati anglr~.
IGNITION WIRES
Figure 112.—The Wurfgcrat 41 consists of a frame of steel tubing on which may be placed 280- or 320-mm rockets in
either wooden or steel crates. (The wooden crates are illustrated above.) The rockets are fired from these crates.
VII—91
I MARCH 1945 "NCLASSIFIEB r-?dM-E 30-451
Figure l/3.—The Wurfrahnzes 10 is here shown iu actiosz. Four wooderl rorkef-carrying uatrs are iu pllrcr on the
&&irs on the side of the half-track. The last of the four rockets has just Dceu/ir~,d.Empty crates lie at the right.
VIl—92
I MARCti 1945
UNCLASSlFlED TM-E 30-451
114—U. S. soldiers impect a capturrd 28/.?2 cm Ncbelwerfer 41. The weapon is lixrded. butt electrical leads are
klot connected to the bases of the rocket motors. Sole the box (sho-wu open) which prolecU the sight.
(2) iirrrrrxf~itiorr. Both high explosive 280-nmi Incendiary 320-mm rock el.
and incendiary 320-mm rockets can be fired from Designation. .32 cm ll'iirfkiirpcr AI.Fl.50.
this frame. Marking (ireen and yellow band.
High explosive 280-mm rocket. Weight 173 pounds.
Killing 11 gallons of oil.
1)esignatim. .... 2S c/ri TITurfkiir/w Spr.
Maximum rangi 2,400 yards.
I\larking ...,........Pink band.
Length of rockc~ l..i} feet 1 inches.
\\7eight ...,.,.. 154.5 pounds.
I<ursting c h a r g e . 1 1 0 pounds of T N T . e. STEEL RACK LAUXCIIKK (2S/32 cm Schivcrcs
Maximum r a n g e . . . . . . . . . 2.100 \zrtls. Witrjgcrcit 41 ). Metal instead of wood construc-
I.ength of r o c k e t . . . . . . . . 3 feet 11 Inches tion (jf tlw launching ir:mw ;m(l crate tlistinguis!i
this rocket launcher from the 2SI’32 CM Sclmwcrc~s
lYurjg~rdt 40. The same ML and incwtliary pro-
jcctiles are firetl.
f. MOTORIZKD LAUNCHER (2S'32 cm Sdfwcrcr
IVurfrahmcn 40). ( l j (icm-rat'description. Modi-
lied versions of the Sdiwrcs Wurfgeriit^ are used
on Iialf-tracked armored vehicles. Six projectors
are mounted on the v~~hiclc, three on each side.
Each projector consist5 of t\zo parts: a carrier
I)late bolted on the sitlr of the vehicle and a
Imcket to hold the crate froul which the rocket
is fired. This bracket i< Imwidr4 \vith an elevat-
l~iguw 115.—7.3 cm Multiple Fortress Kocket Projerto ing scale and clamp.
VII—93
I MARCH IV46
UNCLASSlFlED TM-E 30-451
(2) Arn~~~~ition. The same projectiles are (2) AIIIVIW~~~OJI. The r<lc!zt, which is per-
fired as from the Schweres Wurfgeriit. cussion fired, weighs 11 pou~ltls and contains 310
g. MOBILE LAIJNCHEB (28/32 cm Nebelwerfcr feet of thin n-ire cable with a parachute at one
41). (1) Geizeyal descrififinjz. This mobile version end and a circular counter\\~~i~ht at the other.
J
of the SCIKU~ YC~ ll’yf~~~riif consists of a frame- I‘llis parachute is ejected by a small charge actu-
worlc designct! to hold six projectiles mountet! ated by a delay tram initiated by the propellant.
upon a two-wheelet! carriage. The trail is de- C. 152-MM Axi l.\lR< I:.\i 1 BMXI:T. (1) Gen-
tached after the carriage has been towed into posi- eral d~~scr~iplio~~. The details (,i the launching de-
tion, and the launcher is laid like an artillery vice for this rockc~t are not I,~lon-n. The projec-
piece. The standard electrical firing mechanism is tile contains an I I E charge in the nose and a para-
used. chute and length of cal)i~ in the body. IjYhen the
(2) Anz~u~~ifio~r. The projectiles fired are the I)rojcc.tilc is tlischar~e~l ii unwinds the cable which
standard 280-mm ( H E ) and 320-mm incendiary is anchored to the ground. 'I he cable is fulls LIII-
rockets. wound at an altitucic of about 3,000 feet and pulls
out the p:~rachutc. The projectile continues its up-
h. 300-MM MOBILE LAUNCHER (30 cm Nebel- ward flight until destroved by tile nose charge
TCpe+cY 42). ( I ) Grlrcrnl tlrscripfiolz. Similar to whic!l is fit14 Tvith a d~sla\. action fuzc. The
the 28/32 cm. Nebelwrrfcr, 41, this six-frame pro- caljle, s~~s!~~m!ed !)y the pnrac’llute, will sink slowly
jector launches the largest of the German high- to the ground.
ex!Aosive rockets.
(2) Aumwifiorl. The 300~mm rocket is better 4. Other Rocket Weapons
streamlined than the 280-mm or 320~mm projec-
CL. 7 5 M M I\LT-R.T~~~!.~~ ROC-KI:T PROJECTOR. The
tiles, has a higher ratio of propellcnt weight to
total weight, and as a result has a much longer latest Gemlan frame-type projector consists of
range. 28 frnmcs molnltcci in i0ul. horizontal rows of
seven Cal: ;It the forward CII~! of a long carriage.
High explosive 300-mnl roc!<et. Each frame is buill trf a metal hoop and a T-shaped
D e s i g n a t i o n . . . . 3 0 cm U'k. 1-7 s/v. steel guitlv bar. 1 . 1 , row oi trames is a separate
Weight 277 pounds. assembly and is bolted to the inclined superstruc-
tui-e ;L~K,\-v the carri;t~(~. ’ I . Ii(if1ur ro\\.s arc con-
Rursting ClliLr~<C~. . .100 pounds of am~atol.
nected by a system ol links and are elevated simul-
Maximum range 5,(XX) yards. t:inc~otisly fi-mini thy rear of the carriage, where a
Length of rocket 4 feet 74e inches. shielc!. 0.4 inch thick. IIK>ICYI-the layer. The whole
assembly mav be traversed either about a forked
3. Antiaircraft Rocket Weapons center pi\-ot or by moving tlie carriage itself,
a. GENERAL. l>espitc persistent reports of some which is light ~~ou~~h to 1~ n~mhantlled. The
kind of high-altitude antiaircraft rocket in use by limits of elevation are 4 &~I,-ees alit1 55 degrees.
the Germans, only two such projectiles have been The rockcts are fired hv percussion through a
identified, and neither has a high vertical range. multi!)le firing !)in nlecliaiii,~lli at tlie i-car of each
The two antiaircraft rockets known are the 86-mm row of projectors. Each row is COCl<~d sc~parately,
free cable and parachute type and 1.52-mm rocket lmt all stri!~:crs arc released by one pull on the
of similar type but with the cable tied to the firing cable. The rocket lir~l from this launcher
ground. The cables emitted by the rockets are has t he identified.
designed as a haznrt! to aircraft. b. 73-MM PROPAGANDA ROCKET LAUNCHER
c. SO-MM ROCKET (8 cm Rake tcu Sprepzggra- b. HIC,H EXPLOSIVE STICK GRESADE (Stiet-
mfc). This high explosive rocket is provided hnrldpwsate 43j. ( 1 ) Gl~~lc?-al description. This
with studs on the side for projection, which indi- is a motlifietl form of the Stielhandgranate 24. It
cate that it possibly is used both as a ground and has the same thin sheet metal head, but has a
aircraft rocket. It is unrotated and is stnbilizrtl solid handle. A blue-capped pull igniter and de-
in flight by tail fins. The rocket ~~cighs 15.2 tonator as~ml)l~ SC‘IY~~ into the top of the gre-
pounds, and the maximum ground range is c..-ti- nade head. IIJce the ~Iodel 24, this grenade is
matctl at 6,300 yards. used with a smooth or serrated fragmentation
tl. 240-NEAR ROCKET PROJECTOR. The existence sleeve.
of this projector has been inferred from the use (2) ~~f~JJ'CICf~‘l.iStiCS.
of a 240-mm rocket bomb. Details are not known. Total ncipht ._....1 pound 6 ounces.
\Vcight Of lll1rstin::
charge ......i7 ou*~ccs.
Igniter ..-......l i.%.f.Eikgr.
Section VIII. GRENADES Detonator ..... So. 8.
Fuze delay 4'/, -econds.
I. Hand Grenades
(3) Opcratiolt. To arm the grenade unscrew
a. I I I C H EXPLOSIVE STICK GRENADE (Sfid- and pull the blue metal cap on the top of the ex-
handgranate 24). ( 1 ) General description. This plosive head. This initiates the 4%-second delay.
grenade consists of a hollow I\-ooden handle and
C. WOOI)EN TMI’ROVISE~) HAICD GRENADE (Be-
a thin sheet mctnl head containing the bursting
l?elfsllaJldgrallate-Hole). (1) General descrip-
charge. A double length of cord connects a porce-
fro/r. This is an offmsive-type grenade con-
lain bead at the lower end of the hnndl~ to a fric-
structed entirely of wood. It consists of a cylin-
tion igniter and dctoiiator nsscml~ly screwed on
drical wooden head screwed on a hollow wooden
the head of the grenatle. The wooden handle is
handle. The head is hored to a depth of 4%
closed at its lo\~cr end by a metal screw cap. A
incht5, and spc.cimens oi this grenade have been
fragnicl~tntion slccvc is somctinlts used with this
found to contain half a Bohr-patrone (standard
grenade to improve the antipersonnel effect. This
100-gram (3.527 ounces) demolition cartridge).
is a metal collar spilt longitudiiially so it can be
The extra sl’ace is filled by a wooden plug. A
clipped around the head of the qenatlc. Thr
fuze and rlctonator assembly is located in the
surface of the sleev: may IX citlier smooth or
forward end of the handle with the detonator
divided 11y serrations to assist fragmentation.
inserted into the center of the Bolwpatronc. A
pull igniter is attached by cord to a button in the
recess under the metal cal) at the lower end of the
handle. T h c ~ grenad<.s are packed in wooden
boxes holding 11 grcnatlrs. They are prepared
with charges ant1 delay igniters. The detonators,
with a short kng~h of iuze, are carried in a sepa-
Figwe 116.—Stiell~alzdgrallate 24, HE Stick Grenade.
rate container insi& the box.
(2) Cliavnctc~isti~s. (2) C7~a~trctrvistic.s.
Tcight of grenade.... 1.36 pounds. Length o v e r - a l l . . . 15 inches.
‘eight of hurstilq Length of hrad ..... 5 1 ; inches.
charge .............0.365 pound. Diameter of head .... 2’; inches.
Type of hurstin~ charge.TNT. Diameter of handle . . . . 1 ' : inches.
Length over-all . I4 inchrs. Total Tvveight ... I2 OIII~CES.
Weight 0i Ixlrstin::
Iktonator ..._.. Stallciartl Gerrnatl No. 8. ;
charge 0 grains (1.763
Igniter delay 4 to S seconds. 1 mnces).
Igtliter B.Z.ZJ D e t o n a t o r . . . . . . . . . . . 10. 8.
(3) Opc?~afioIz. To arm the grenade, unscrew (3) Opel-atioil. To arm the grenade, unscrew
the metal cap at the lower end of the handle and the head and break the paper seal on the Bohr-
pull the porcelain bead. This initiates the friction pafrolIc. Screw the detonator and fuze assembl!
igniter and the grenade will function at the end into the igniter and slip the detonator into the
of the 3- to S-second delay. head of the l~olr~/wf~o~~~~. Rrplxe the hcarl and
VII—-.95
UNCLASSIFIED
I MARCtl r945 TM-E 30-451
the grenade is ready for USC. To use the grenade and pull the ignite:-. The pcnade will cxplndc
remove the metal cap on the lower end of the after a delay nf 4 to ; sccoii~
handle, pull the button attached to the friction ig- f. SMOKE STICK GRHNADI- IXchclliandgranale
niter and throw. This grenade is designed to pro- 39). ( 1 ) General description. This grenade
duke blast effect and may be used by troops ad- c;m be distinguished from the liigh ~,sl~:osivc~ stick
\-ancing in the open. grenade (Stielhandgi anate) by three grooves in
d. CONCRETE IMPROVISED HAND GRENADE (Bc- the handle, which serve as recognition features
hclfsha?zdgvallatr-nrioll) ( 1 ) Gcncml drsrrip- in the dark, and by a white land painted around
tion. This grenade is an offensive type grenade the center of the handle and an interrupted white
Gmilar to the wooden improvised hand grenade, band around the head, with the lettering
except the grenade head is made of concrete in- ''Xb. Hgr. 39", also in white. The head is made
stead of wood and a full lOO-gram Bolzrpatrmc of thin metal and contains a Tilling ol zinc-hexa-
is used as an explosive charge. chlorethane. Instead of the detonator used in the
high explosive grenade, an ignition tube is used.
(2) Characteristics.
This is \-m-y silnilar in appearance to tllct S o . 8
Igniter B.Z.4.5Sck.
tletonator, hut may be distinguished by the closed
Detonator ..........No. 8.
end which is painted green. The smoke generated
in the head escapes through 1111lw around the hall-
dle so&ct. h pull igniter is Iocatc~l insid<, the
handle.
( 2 ) Clrcir.trc-tc~ri.stic-s.
Tgniter ti.ZJ".
Ignitioll tulle .S.1.N.4.
Fuze delay 7 serum!*.
g. SMOKE STICK GRENADE (Xehelhandgranate
Figure 117.—I:‘ihnlldgrallatc 39 HE Egg Grmade 39B.) This p-enatlc is a later 1notle1 oi the
(left, older; right, latrr zwsion). Ncbclhandgranatc 3'> and differs only in the com-
position of the stiioke misttire. Iii the I\lotlel
e. H I G H EXPLOSIVE H A E D GRENADE (Eihand-
39B more hexachlorethane and lcy~ zinc are us~l.
gvanatr 39). (1) Gcmral dcsrription. This is
h. SMOKE HAND GRENWDE (Xcbclliandgranatc
an egg-shaped hand grenade constructed of thin
41). ( 1 ) Gcll~Tal tl~~sc-ripfio/r. This grenade has
sheet metal with high explosive bursting charge.
a body which is very similar in that of the Ncbcl-
This grenade and the Sticll~andgral~atr 24 at-e the
handgra~~atr 39 hut 1~s. instead of a stick hnmlle.
standard German hand grenades and are used
a pull igniter inserted into 2 lllxtic xlal)tcr in the
most. The cxplosivc charge is initiated by a tlc-
top of the body. Thcrc are trt~ly t\\-o smol~ cmis-
tonator and a friction igniter. The wire loop of
sion holes. The grenade may be recognized by
the friction igniter is connected by a short cord
the letters "Nh. Hqr. 41" an<1 a lm)kvn linv stcn-
to a blue metal cap screwed on the top of the
tilled in white on the hod\..
grenade body. A model of this grenade contain-
(2) Cl/avactcristic-s.
ing chloracetophenone also exists. It may be rec-
Igniter B.7.?"
ognized by a mellow ring painted around the gre-
T,gnition t l l h c.iY.J.N.4.
nade and four pear-shaped projections on the Duration of -moke
lower half of the body. It contains a 112-gram emission 1 (Ml in 120 -crouds.
(3.95 ounces) T N T bursting charge and a small Filling Merger mixture.
aluminum capsule containing 5 grams (0.176 Fuze delay 3 scrunds.
ounce) of chloracetophenone. (3) Opcr-atiou. The ~rcvln~lc is initiated by
(2) Clzaractcvistics. unscrewing the igniter cap and pulling tlir igniter.
Weight of grenade... .8 ounces. This initiates the ignition tube and the qcllatle
Weight of bursting begins to emit smoke aitcr :~l~out 3 secc~~tls.
charge ..........-I4 ounces. i. SMOKE hc.c GRENADE I A cbeleihandgranate
Detonator ...........No. 8. 42). ( 1 ) General description. T h e elongated
Igniter B.Z.f.Eihgr.
egg-shaped body of this grenade is made of thin
Fuze d e l a y . . . . , . . . . . . . 4 to 5 seconds.
metal. At the lower extremity a small metal loop
(3) Operation. Unscrew the blue metal cap is welded or riveted to the Irody and at the top
VII—96
I MARCH 1945 UNCLASSlFlED TM-E 30-45I
(3) Opcmtiox Pull the ring on the igniter grenades. states that they are suitable for use at
before throwing the grenade. temperatures down to —10 ' centigrade.
j . GLASS SMOKE GREXADE (Blrlldk&prr III). 1. HoLLOW-ClIARGE ANTITANK HAND GRE-
(1) Gcwral drscriptiou. This grenade consists NADK {Paiicerii.'iirfiniiir 1 (L). ( 1 )G e n e r a l d e -
of a sealed glass bulb in a hexagonal carton of scr-iptinll. This is a rcccnt type antitank grenade.
corrugated cardboard. The glass is shaped like a It is of hollow\\--charge tl~~sign and is thrown by
somewhat elongated electric light bulb and is hantl at tanks from a distance of 20 to 30 yards.
about the same size, but of thicker glass. The The grenade body is ill the form of a metal cone
bulb contains 260 grams (9.17 ounces) of tita- with a hemispherical, thin, sheet-metal head. The
con? contains an cxplo>ivc charge. with a concave
nium tetrachloride. This grenade is intended for
metal retainilix plate at the iorward eJld. h l air
use against the crews of pillboxcs and vehicles.
space is formed l)ct\v<~n thih plate and the sheet
(2) Operation.. The grenade is carried in the metal heat1 of the grcllatlc. The narrow end of
cardboard container and when required for use it the COW is located bv setting scr(L\vs around the
can be withdrawn by a tape attached to the lid circuniferenc<~ of a hollow wooden tailpiece Con-
of the box; the lid is cemented to the neck of taining picric rings and serving as a throwing
the bulb. Remove the lid and throw the grenade handle. Around the o11tsitlc of the tailpiece are
against the target. When the bulb bursts, thy four, cloth. trianx-:lll:ll shap~~l fins. Along the
mixture will give off a dense smoke. outer end of each fin i+ a cteel spring which re-
tains the fins in the open l)osition when the gre-
k. GLASS SMOKE GRENADE (Rlr~ldkiirpcv 2II). nade is throlvn. \\‘heii the grenade is being car-
(1) General description. The glass bulb of this ried, and up to the moment of throwing, these
grenade contains 2.50 grams (S.Sl75 ounces) of fins are wrapped around the tailpiece ant1 retained
a yello\\-ish liquid. The bulb is scalctl at the neck in position by a cap. I .ocatcd in the tail of the
with a sulphur plug xvhich also holds in position grenade is a striker mechanism fitted with a safety
a glass tube, orientated along the axis of the bulb. pin which has a cloth tal) attached. The safety pin
This tube contains 25 grams (0.882 nmcej of is retainetl in position I)y a metal clip attached to
a calcium chloride solution. The smoke liquid one of the fins.
consists of titanium tetrachloride with silicon tetra-
chloride added to lower its freezing point. The (2) Oprmtion. 7’11~. grenade is held for
calcium chloride is used to lower the freezing throwing hy the txilpiccc. and immediately before
throwing the metal calI is removed from the end
point of the water which is included to increase
of the tailpiccc. 1~,%en the grenade is thrown the
the effectiveness of the smoke under conditions
fins fly out\vai-(1 ant1 the clip attachrd to one of
of low humidity.
them comes away from the striker mechanism
(2) Operation. Throw the grenade at the tar- and releases the safety pin. Upon impact the
get in the same way as the Model IH. A notice striker mechanism functions and initiates the
on the side of the container, which holds four bomb.
VII—97
UNCLASSlFlED
I MARCH 1945 TM-E 30.451
2. Rifle Grenades
(2) L haractcristics.
\\ eight *......../. 13M ounces (approxi-
mately) ,
Length owr-all ... 7 ~nchv (approximately),
W r i g h t (if hurdling
charge \\ _• <>unce>.
Maximum accuraU
range 101) \ art Is.
VII—99
I MARCH 1945
UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451
(2) Chavactcristics.
’eight .............15% ounces (npproxi-
matelg).
Length over-all.......7.7 in&s.
Length of s t e m . . . . , . . . 4 inches.
Xfaximum tliameter of
head .....l.S1.8 inches.
Diameter ol stem 1.-7 inches.
Type of bursting
charge ......II I)S-TNT.
‘ c i g h t of bursting
charge ......4.8 o~mccs.
(2) Charactcvistic-.s.
Weight 19 ounces t approxi-
mated ).
Length owr-all ,.‘).A itl~ 1 1 , \
Length of item ..._.-14 11w1k -
~Iaxim~im cliameh-r of
head 2.4 iiu-lu-.
Diameter of st~3 n.I111 1 , i I ’,.
Type oi bursting
charge kl)\-T\T.
Weight of bursting
charge S.5 OUIMVS.
Figure 122.—.S.S. Grwrhr Pan~c~~~r~rmte 46, 16.1m1t.
IIolio~v-Cl~aryc Kiflc Grcthadz.
(3) Pcrfolmllrc. Static tests indicate that
in front of the armor. comlktcly nullified the the maximum penetration of huinogeueous armor
effect on the armor. at the extreme range of 220 yards will be ap-
f. Cl-MM HOT.LO\V-CIIARGE RIFLE GRI~XATI proximately 1% 1111ii. i\t a range of approxi-
(S.S. Gewclw PamcrgYauatc 61) ( 1 ) Grl~crtrl mately 18 fert the penetration falls to 100 mm.
description. This is a hollow-charge ritlc grenatlc A 54"inch, milt1 steel plate, ~~I~LZCY~ 11 inches in
similar to the S.S. Gewehr Panzcr gra?late 46 hut front of thv m:lin armor. colrlldctuly tleleats the
having a streamlined body of larger dimensions. grenade.
VII—IO0
I MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30.45I
VII—IOI
I MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIED TM.E 30-451
3. Grenades for Smooth Bore Signal Pistol (2) Operation. A pin inserted through the
(Leuchtpistole) tail of the bomb pushes two metal balls into a
groove and thus prevents the pellet r . t moving
a. H I G H EXPLOSIVE PROJECTILE FOR SIGNAL
forward against the ne c t l l e .
PISTOL (Wwfkiirpcr 361, Lczlclzt pistole). This
jectile is automatically n r i i l v t l , sin ce
projectile consists of the normal egg hand grenade
left behind. On impact the pellet is thrown for-
with a stem screwed on in place of the powder
ward onto the needle.
train time fuzc. The stem contains a powder
train fuze (with a delay of approximately 4% c. HOLLOW CHARGE GRENADE FOR SIGNAL
sccontls) with a No. S detonator at the upper end. PISTOL (Panzcri^itrfko'rpcr 12. Leuchtpistole).
In the lower end the projectile carries the cart- (1) General description. This grenade is fired
ridge (propellcnt charge with percussion cap) up to a maximum range of 75 yards from the
which cxpcls the grenade and sets off the time Leuchtpistole. using the reinforcing sleeve, stock,
fuze. The projectile is secured to the stem by R and combined from and rear sight. The grenade
split pin and ring which must be withdrawn be- has a pear-shaped head containing the hollow
fore the projectile is loaded into the signal pistol. charge and is fitted with an impact cap. The
The projectile is then armed. A removable liner grenade tapers to form a tail tube with pre-
must be inserted in the tube of the signal pistol rifling for screwing into the reinforcing sleeve.
before firing this grenade. The liner is inserted A thinner tube, containing the propellant, percus-
from the breech end and held in place by a pro- sion cap, and a shearing and propelling bolt, is
jecting stud engagin,‘7 with the upper surface of inserted into the end of the tail tube.
the breech. (See Section II for a description of (2) Characteristics.
signal pistols.) Weight of grenade 1 pound 5 ounces.
Diameter of head 2.4 niches.
Diameter of tail tube. .0.875 inch.
Length of grenade 8.5d inches.
(3) Operation. The complete grenade is
loaded into the pistol from the muzzle end. The
propellent tube fits freely into the bore until the
pre-rifled hand meets the muzzle of the reinforc-
ing sleeve, when the grenade must be screwed
Figure 12/“.—l~l’~~~flzorpcr 361, Lcuchf pisfolc, modified into the rifling. On firing, the propellent gases
egg grrundr fov sigmi pistol. drive the propelling and shearing bolt forward.
This bolt breaks a shear pin in the front end of
the propelling tube and discharges the grenade.
The graze fuze in the tail tube is armed by set-
back as the grenade leaves the pistol.
d. SMOKE EGG GRENADE (X cbclcihatidgranale
42/11). This grenade reportedly can be fired
from the Leuchtpistole. No details are available,
however. It seems probable that the Nebelei-
granate 42 has been modified for firing from the
Figwc 128.—TVllrfgrallntpatrone 326, Lruchtpistole,
111C projectile for sigrrtrl pisfvi. signal pistol, using the reinforcing sleeve, in the
same way as the Ilihaiidgranate 39 was modified
b. H I G H EXPLOSIVE PROJECTILE FOR SIGNAL to produce the Wurfkorpcr 361 L.P.
PISTOL (Wurfgranatpatrone 326, Lcztrlzfpistolc). e. T I M E FUZED H I G H EXPLOSIVE ROUND FOR
(1) Griwrnl tlcscriptiolz. This projectile, which SIGNAL PISTOL ( Sprcnggranat patrone, Leucht-
is painted !.ellow, has the appearance of a small pistole Mit Z.Z.). This is a new type of signal
mortar shell. It is attached to a signal cartridge pistol ammunition designed for shooting from
case by crimping. The head is hollow and contains tanks or equivalent cover. The round consists
a fixed needle which is separated from a pellet of a heavy cased high explosive projectile with a
containing the detonator assembly and a 7-gram 1-second time fuze in the base and a varnished
(0.247 ounce) T N T bursting charge by a creep steel cartridge case. Packing cases for these
spring. grenades bear the following inscription: "Ach-
“I i—IO2
I MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451
tung! nur aus Panzer oder gleichzvertiger Dccken Dcck w The internal charge of gunpowtlcr is
vcrfcuern. Brennzcit I Sek." ("Danger! Only to ignited by the flash cap and blown-s off the nose.
be fired from tanks or equivalent cover. Time of Xt thcb same time the smoke generator is ignited.
burning 1 second.") The smoke generator is projected a considerable
distance from the point cji impact.
4. Grenades for Modified Rifled Grenade and
c. ORANGE SMOKE GRICNADE (Drutpcrtrollr fii/,
Signal Pistol Kampf pistole). (1) General description. Ex-
a. H I G H EXPLOSIVE GRENADE (Sprcngpatronc ternally this projectile iy similar lo the h’chcl-
fiir Kampfpistole). This round consists of a die- fiatrow, rxcq)t tltnt it 1~s no nest’ fuzz. The
cast aluminum cartridge case into which the pro- head is paral~olic. The :reii;ttlc is filled with an
jectile is fitted. A percussion cap and propellant orange smoke conipositic),l. In a cmtral cavit!.
are in the base of the cartridge case. Ten holes are four stt-atitls oi cluicl,-match connected to a
in a plate above the propellent charge lead the gunpowder l)cllrt iii the cc~ntcr- of the projectile
gases to the base of the projectile. The projectile base. The stitc)ke jets at the lme are cm-ered
has a rifled aluminum body containing two burst- with a thick patI of co~~~lm~s~tl palm which is
ing charges of penthrite wax and a point deton- burst by the smoke Im~sttre. "/)c,zrt. Z." is stett-
ating fuze which is armed as the projectile leaves cilled on the base.
the muzzle of the pistol. The projectile may be (2) O/wmtiou. \1’hcii the projectile leaves
recognized by the letters "Spr. Z." stencilled on the cartridge casv. the gunpowder pellet is ignited
the base. and, after a delay, the quick-match ignites and in
b. SMOKE GRENADE (Ncbclpatrone fiir Kampf - turn ignites the smoke misturr.
pistolc). (1) General description. Externally d. PARACHUTE FI.ARI:S (Fall.~cl~i~i~iir~tcht~a-
this projectile is similar to the high explosive trour fib Kar~i pistole). (1) Gmc,ral dcscr-ip-
projectile. Internally it contains a smoke genera- tioll. I<xternally this ha5 Ihe g-eneral apl)earance
tor. It is fitted with a point detonating fuze sinii- of the other types. It I m a black bakelitc head
lar to th e in the high explosive projectile, with a white spot in the c,cntor. The base of the
except that there is a charge of gunpowder in projectile has a scrcwctl-ill plug which is lmfor-
place of the detonator below the flash cap. ated to hold a gunpowder pellet. Above this is a
(2) Operation. The projectile functions on flare with parachute attachctl. "F. Lmrht. 2."
is stencilled on the base.
(2) Opcratiou. On firing the flash from the
propellant ignites the grmlmvder pellet which,
after a delay, ignites the 11;~~. The baliclitc hratl
is hlown off ant1 the illuminating type flat-e
ejected.
e. MESSAC.E GR-E~:IDE (hr~~rll~irllt~at~~l~r fiir
Kanlpf pistolc). (1) (;~~rrcwrl tlcscriptio~z. This
grenade consists of a pre-rifled al~:minum body.
fiir Ko with a plastic head, and an ;tlutiiiiiuni cartridge
case. The black plastic head, \\hich screws onto
the body, contains a message- form and pencil.
The body contains a smoke generator, a colored
silk strcamcr, and an cicsc.tittg charge. The body
is closed by a screwed-in base plate with a gun-
powder delay pellet. St~mcilletl on the base are
the letters "Nadir. Z".
(2) Oprratiorr When the projt.ctile is fired,
the flash from the ~mqwll;tnt ignites the delay
in the grenade base I)latc-. This in turn ignites
Figure 129.—Spreng pair one Fiir Kampf pistole, the ejecting charge and mpels the message con-
HE Grenade for Kampf pistole. tainer, stnoke generator, and streamer.
VII—103
UNCLASSIFIED
I MARCH 1945 TM-E 30-451
Section IX. OTHER WEAPONS (Jp%Ltor's control lxmcl. It1 the electrically driven
type, this control is clirc,cl t<• the motors which
I. Remote Controlled Demolition Vehicles drive each track iudividuallv. In the gasoline-
a. GENERAL. Three main types of remote cun- driven model, the control operates magnetic
trolled demolition vehicles in use by the Guman clutches which control the track*. There is no
army have been identified. These are thr Goliath llrovision for l-c’\crsillg the \~~liicl~. The charge
which is line controllctl, the B-IV controlled i s is fired by a drv cell battery in the control unit.
radio, and the N.S,.Zi. -Sprijlyr~ which has not Firing is initiated by throwing a switch on the
been encountered in the field. These vehicles control panel; the firing circuit runs through the
have Bern unsuccessful in action; they u.;ually two outer wires in the three-core cable. 1 he
have been stopped by small arms fire. Goliath is expendable and i- destroyed when its
tlenic,litic,n charyic is -Ct ol‘i’.
b. GOLIATII. (1) Gmcral drsc~i~tio~~. This c. B-IV. (1) (ieneral description. This
vehicle has been producctl in two models; one radio-controlled demolition vehicle, larger than
driven by a gasoline engine ; the other by a11 clcc- the Goliath, also has been generally unsuccessful.
tric motor. The two models have roughly the The hull of the Ii-IV is c< instructed of poorly
same external appearance and rcseml) l e welded 8-mm armor plate. It is divided into an
versions of the type of tanks us~(l during the war engine compartment at the rear, a driver's com-
of 1914-1918. The Goliath's hull is divided into partment on the right front, and a radio equip-
three compartments by transvcrsr bulkheatls. The ment compartment on the It-ft front. The vehi-
explosive charge is carried in the frant compart- cle is fully tracked, with frnr.t driving sprocket,
ment; the Wginv (in the gasoline driven vcr- five bogie wheels, and a rear idler on each side.
sion) and control gear are in the center, and the A six-cylinder gasoline engine is lined in the lelt-
drum carrying the coiled calde is in thv rear hand side of the engine compartment; two gaso-
compartment. In the electrically dri\-en motl~l, line tanks are on the right, and in the center is
a battery and motor are cnrricd in S~O~ISO~IS on the hydraulic mechanism fur operating the en-
both sides. I-Iingcd steel covers gi\-c accc’ss to gine under radio control.
the cable compartment and the cnginc space’. The
(2) SpccifictrfioM-.
vehicle is driven by front sprockets. There are
Length 12 iVet.
four bogie n-heels, mountccl on lcl-er arms with Height 4 I"• ft (i inches.
simple coil springing, and a rear idler. A I \ Width (< fe.!.
jockey wheel is mounted between the driving Total weight 4.5 i"tis.
sprocket and the first bogie wheel on each side. Weight of explosive
charge X00 p"imd-.
(2) Spcrifirafiolzs. Armor thickness 8 mm.
L e n g t h . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 S icct 3 itlchcs. (3) Operation. The R-IY is driven under its
Height ..........2 icet.
Width 2 feet 10 inches. own power to the line of departure near the tar-
Total weight 800 pounds (approxi- get, usually an emplacement or pillbox. The
mate!>). control transmitter of the radio equipment, re-
Weight of explosive tained by the driver when be dismounts, is used
charge ......_.....200 11011i: ( l s to steer the vehicle to its destination. In con-
;lt~l~).
Speed 5 to 12 miles per hour. trast to the Goliath the I!-I\" is not expendable,
I’owcr plant: but deposits its load of explosive at the target
Gasoline engine ?IIotlcl .2-cylin~lcr, Z-c>clc in-line and returns. The 'I'XT demolition charge is in
mgine with chain (II-i \ a container which rests on the sloping front of
Electric motor Model... Two 12-volt Bosch starter the vehicle. The charge is released either directlv
motors gcarctl to driving
sprockets. by radio control, or by a trip mechanism which
operates when the vehicle is reversed.
(3) Oprmtiosz,. The Goliath is transportetl d. A\S.U.~Spr'uit/er. { 1 i (ieucral description.
to the front line on a two-wheeled trailer. After This vehicle has not been encountered in action,
it has been unloaded from the trailer and started but it is known to be a remotely controlled
toward its target it is controlled through the demolition vehicle <>t intermediate size. Lightly
three-core cable, about 2,000 feet long, which un- armored, it probably is no less vulnerable to attack
winds from the rear and is connected to the than the Goliath or B-IY.
VII—lo4
I MARCH 1945
TM-E 30451
UNcLASS\F\ED
VII—105
I MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIF\ED TM-E30.451
Composition . Inntiinent
Two armored gun trucks. . Karh, mie JO nn le.l'.H.
137 to 41.5 ton.) ' ii .'I' / ' I .
Two armored antiairerait
gun truck- Kach. • :ie 20-inm <|uad-
(37 to 41.5) ton.-) tuple antiaircraft guns
a:;d . .:x 7.62 cm I:.K.
-'7.-/7 n.
Txvo armorul i11falltl-
trucks l-'.ac'n. •.'.'.• < 81 -mm mortars,
(i7 to 41.5) tons) one hca\y machine gun,
2 II III r-l.lchirw glllls,
and ' in- llame thrower.
One armored steam loco-
motive Xc i armament.
(ill middle of tuitl)
: Other details:
l hjurc 131.—Radio Controlled Demolition Vehicle
(I?-IV). Total pcr.omlcl ...,113.
Armor IS to 30 mm.
Maximum speed 35 miles per hour
(2) Specifications. (approximately).
Length 9 feet o]/> inches. R:ungc .......110 miles.
Height ........3 i x t IO]/< inchey.
LVidth ...........__.....3 icet 7 incllcs.
In addition, composition of the train may in-
Total weight ..2.25 tons.
clude two tank tixislxx-tvr trt1c.k. cwh carrying
LVeight of cxpl0iii.e
a Czech 38 (t) tad\:; tnv lizlit armored Panhanl
charge ....... i,(ll pouI”l~.
reconnaissance vchiclcs, cap;1lk (Ii tIraveling
Armor thickness ..5 to 8 mm. either on railroatl tr;~cl;s or ;Icl-r)~s country ; N l
Kcmote control range . .-7,200 yar(ls (r\pproxi- two spare-parts trucks. Variotts otllvr t!-pc’s 01
matclJ-) . armored trains may be encountc’r~d, SOIW incor-
AIanually controlled range: porating components of an illil~l-o\~isc~tl nature,
On roads 149 miles. and in these the armor may l)e anything fronl
Cross-country ........87 miles. boiler plate to railroad ties.
3. Aircraft Armament
2. Armored Trains
a. GENERAL. The aircraft armament described
a. GENERAI.. At the outset of the Polish and in this section is limitetl to \vc2l)Cllls such as ma-
Iktch campaigns, Guman armored trains actuall- chine guns and cannon \vhich form an int~.~ral
pr~~~lctl the main forces and scizctl and hcltl key part of aircraft. The numerous t\ycs of Imnll~s
railroad stations or bridges. IVOW recently the and mines which are carrietl in a~id tlropl)rtl fro::l
Germans mac!e extensive USC of armorvtl trains, aircraft (10 not form part of tllc. standard attach~Y1
particularly in Ikstcrn Europe. Their main func- armament and are not included here. There has
tion has been to patrol and keep open railroads been an increasing tendency to use aircraft ma-
in areas of partisan and guerrilla operations, and chine g u x on ground mount>. as illustrated by
their usefulness has been confined largely to op- the use of the MX,.15 as a light machine gun and
erations against enemies who lack heavy weapons. the ilI.G.151‘1.5 and M.G.151'20 as triple. si,li-
Armored trains are under the direct control of propcllcd. ;Intiaircrait \\-ealxxls. isrc* SK1i011 II,
the General Staff and are allotted to army groups. Small Arms, for details on use of aircraft machine
Each train carries a train commandant, who is guns in ground roles.)
usually also the infantry commander; an artillery
1~. 7.92-MM MACHINE G r x fM.G.15). (1)
commander; and a technical officer, responsible
General tl~~scri~~iorl. This W:I thv stalltlard, rifle-
for the operation of the train itself.
caliber, free gu~i until sul~~~-~~~lecl by the .II.G.
b. COMPOSITION. The following details appl! 81. It also is used by the infantry, with bipod
to a typical armored train with the nomenclature ant1 shoulder rest. Thv tlrsi~ll is Solothurn. The
Epz.Bp. 42: gun fires only automatically.
VII—IO6
I MARCH 1945
UNCLASSIFIED
TM-E 30-451
mounts exist for the JI.G. l.51/20, and there is (3) rlrur~ul~itiorz. Ball tract’r, high csplosivr.
a self-propelled antiaircraft version on a half- high explosi\-e tracer, high r \ l ) k J a ivc
track. tracer, and armor piercing - are fired
(2) Characteristics. from this gun.
Caliber .......20 mm (0.791 inch). i. 30-MM MACHINE GUN (Mk.101). (1)
Length over-all ......69.75 inches. General description. This heavy machine gun is
Weight (including elec- of Rheinmctall B i i r sig Tt may be fired
trical control) ..93.5 pounds. single shot or autonlatical!y. ‘I‘\\-0 htxavy coiled
Operation Recoil.
springs around the barrel are necessary to check
Feed Disintegrating metal link
belt. recoil. This 30-mm machine gun is being re-
Cocking ....,.......Electrical. pl;1ctd by the Model 10s.
Firing .............*...Percussion (electrical sol-
enoid, manually oper- (2 ) Characteristics
ated trigger). Caliber ^0 mm ( 1.18 inches).
Rate c , f : Length over-all 9n inches.
Unsynchronized ...... AI’, 800 round< per minute. Weight W4 pounds.
HE, 750 rounds Iwr minute. Operation Recoil.
Muzzle velocity: Feed 10-round box magazine.
HE I n c e n d i a r y . . . . . . . 2.650 feet per second. Cocking Pneumatic.
AP Incendiary an(l Firing I Vrcu--Mon, electrical sol-
APHE ............2,300 feet per secontl. enoid operated.
Rate of fire (estimated) . .400 rounds per minute.
(3) Awlr~twitiolz. Projectiles fired in this gun
include high explosive, incendinrq- tracer, armor- j . 30-MM MACHINE G r x < Mk. 10S). (1)
piercing incendiary, armor-picrcitlg high explo- General description. The Model 108 is the latest
sive, and high explosive incendiary. 30-mm machine gun to be employed in aircraft
h. 20-MM MACIIINE GUN (Orrlikmz F.F. and and is replacing the Model 101.
F.F.M.). (1) Gc~lc~~al dcscviption. This is the
(2) CI2nl-trc-tc-l,i.sfic.s.
German air force version of the standard Oerlikon
Caliber 30 mm ( 1.18 inches).
design. It is chambered to fit the short German Length over-all 3 feet 6 inches.
20-mm round, and the recoiling parts have been Weight J'o pounds.
redesigned accordingly. The M.G.F.F. is a fixed Operation 1'lmvback.
gun. The ill.G.F.F.3I.,~ a later version, is me- Feed 60-round disintegrating link
chanically identical, but may have a cooling cowl- belt.
Cocking Conipn -sed air.
ing and hand firing device for use as a free gun. Firing Electrical (sear is actu-
Both models fire only automatically. ated by compressed air).
Rate of fire 500 rounds per minute.
(2) Chavizcfcuistics.
Muzzle velocity 1,650 feet per second.
Caliber 20 mm (0.791 inch).
Length over-all ....52.75 inches. (3) Ammunition. The high explosive tracer
Weight: projectile fired from tllis gun ~ 1 1 11
Pneumatic cocking . .60 pounds.
Hand cocking ..55.75 pounds.
ounces. Incendiary tracer projectiles are also
Operation 1:ecoi1. fired,
Feed 60-round drum, 20-round k. 21-CM ROCKET. Single engine German
drum, or 15round clip. fighters carry t\vo of these t he w
Cocking: enginN1 fighters carry four. The projectiles,
Fixed gun ..........Pneumatic, electrical con- 42.44 inches long and weighing 248 pounds, are
trol. projected from open end tubes 50.31 inches long.
Free gun .......Manual.
Firing ........ Pcrcussion.
The rockets are fired by electricity. The launch-
Rate of fire (operation) ,100 rounds per minute. ing tubes may be jettisoned by electrical detona-
Muzzle velocity ,,.,..,,.1,900 feet per second. tor charges.
VII—lo8
I MARCH 1945 TM-E 30-45I
UNCLASSIFIED
CHAPTER VIII
EQUIPMENT
VIII—2
I MARCH 1945 o/l-E 30-45I
UNCLASSIFIED
hotly and cngagcs with the propeller-shaft hy (c) Stoewcr Types R W0 W and AW 2.
Ill~‘aIIs of a dog clutch. Wh~i traveling OVC~- These are both water-cooled, four-cylinder O.H.V.
land, the propeller and shaft fold over thv back gasoline engines with dry sump lubrication. The
of the vehicle. The body, which reseml~les a R 180 W is a I.750 EulGc cc~ntimrter (106.75
civilian sports car, is of thin welded sheet tttvt:tl.
cubic inches) model generating 43 brake horse-
b. STANDARD CHASSIS I FOR LIGHT ARMY 1x)wvr at 3.600 rcv1lltttic)ns per minute, and the
CAR. (1) Ck7s.sis. This chassis is of normal AW 2 is a 2-liter (122 cubic ittchcs) engine giv-
type, with a frame of rectangular section, side, ing SO IX-akc hors~q~l\\-c’r at the same speed.
and cross members and lztcing to sttlq)ort t l i (3) PO’ii’i’l’ Thr power (rain is geared to all
cngitie, transmission. and body. The hood is four T h e \ , c l t i c l e a1.s~~ has four-wheel
1ling-cd down the ccttter and fastcnt~tl on each steering, but the rear wheel steering mechanism
sitle by two clips. This chassis is used for the titay lx lOCli?tl. The gears givcx five forward
four-scat light car (Kfz. 1) and for a variety sl)~~& ant1 one ryv(‘rir. ~Iaxiniuiii speed is SO
of radio and other spc’cial put-loose vehicles. tnilvs I)er hour. Tgt~itiott is 11y a 12-I-olt battery
(2) Erl~ims. The engine is mounted at the ant1 coil. The tttaitt gasolittc) tank (13.25 gallons)
front and may be any of the following types: is tttc~tttit~d at the rr;Lt, ant1 the reserve tank (2.4
(a) Hanomag 2-Litn- (122 ruhic illr1rr.s) T~lpr ~~allotis) is in the engine compartment.
20 B. This is a water-cooled, four-cylittilcr
c. STANDARD CHASSIS I TYPE 40 FOR LIGHT
O.H.V. gasoline engine with dry sump lubric;t-
ARMY CAR. This chassis, used for light staff
tioti. It generates SO brake horsq)owcr at 3.500
cars ant1 various special purpose vehicles, is prac-
revolutions pet- minute. \l’:ttcr putiil~, fan. antI
dynamo are driven 1tY one \--belt from the catii- tically the satnc as the Standard Chassis I, but
shaft. has front I\-heel stc<.t-ing otilv. The engine is
thts Stoewer 2-liter (122 cul;ic inches) AJV 2.
(b) BMW. Z-Liter (122 czhic inrhrs) T~lpc
325. This engine is a water-cooled, six-cylinder The vehicle has a ntaxitttum speed of about 50
(in-line) O.H.V. gasoline engine with dry sump miles per hour.
lubrication, generating 45 brake horsepower at d. LIGHT CAR, MERCEDES BENZ TYPE 170 V.
4,000 revolutions per minute. (1) clzctSSiS. The cltassis. used for light staff
Vlll—4
I MARCH 1945
UNCLASSFIED TM-E 30-451
cars and specialized vehicles, is X-shaped and The spare wheels arc carrictl one on each side
supports the engine at the front. The front of the chassis on stub axles to prevent bellying
wheels are independently sprung by two parallel, when traveling over rough ground.
semi-elliptic springs crossing the front of the (2) E~zgimx The engine may be either of
vehicle. The rear wheel suspension is by coil two types: Horch I--8 T>.pe 001 (a water-
springs. The engine is fitted beneath the hood, cooled, 3.5liter (213.5 c h i c inches) gasoline
which is of normal type. engine developing 82 I)rake horst~power at 3,600
(2) E:zginc. The engine is the water-cooled, revolutions per minute), or an ()p~l straight-six
four-cylinder, 1,700 cubic centimeters (103.7 (a xvater-cooled, 3.6 liter (210.6 cubic inches)
cubic inches) Mercedes Benz Type M 136. This O.H.V. gasoline engine tlr\.c*loping 68 brake
is a side-valve, gasoline engine with an IA-shaped horsepower at 2.800 revolutions per minute).
cylinder head, with the camshaft and valve gear There are two gasoline tanks. The main tank,
on the right side. The engine develops about 38 holding 18.7 gallons, is susp~~~~l~~l in the center
brake horsepower at 3,400 revolutions per minute. of the chassis frame.. and the rcst’rve tank hold-
The fuel tank, located in the engine compartment, ing 10.8 gallons. is at the rrar. The main gear
box has four forward speetl~ and one reverse,
contains 11.5 gallons.
with an auxiliary gtsar box giving t\vo ratios: nor-
e. STANDARD CHASSIS FOR MEDIUA~ CAR. (1) mal and cross-countr\.. All for~r ~vhecls are driv-
Chassis. This is a conventional chassis used for ing wheels.
staff cars, radio vehicles, and other specialized f. STAND.~RD CHASSIS 11 I‘OR HEAVY CAR.
types and consisting of two parallel side mem- (1) Clznssis. There arr actually three known
bers and various cross members and brackets. models of this chassis, all bcillg similar in gen-
The engine is fitted at the front, and the wheels eral appearance. Model EGa has stub axles car-
are sprung independently by two coil springs rying the spare wheels to assist in crossing rough
with double-action, hydraulic shock absorbers ground, and four-wheel steering. The steering
VIII-4
I MARCH 1945
UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-45I
mechanism for the rear wheels can be locked. (219.6 cubic inchr,s) capacity, developing about
Model EGb has front wheel steering only. 68 brake horsq,owcr. ‘1’11~ gasoline tank (21.6
Model EGd has no anti-bellying support axles. gallons) is situated uutl<,r the tlrivcr's seat. The
The body usually fitted is a four-door touring gear box givrs five forward speeds and one re-
type of clumsy appearance. The vehicle is used verse. The two rear ~vl~c~c~ls arc the driving wheels.
for a variety of purposes, including an artillery b. OPEL " B L I T Z " ~ - T O N TRUCK ( T Y P E 6700
prime mover for light guns. ns. This is essentially the four-wheel drive.ver-
(2) Ewgine. The engine is the Ford 3.6~liter sion of the t\.pe 3.6.iOS. The drive is taken
(219.6 cubic inches) V-8, developing 78 brake from the fivt--&ectl mail1 gear box to a transfer
horsepower at 3,600 revolutions per minute. This case. The transfer gears have two positions: one
is a side-valve model with L-type cylinder heads. for roads and one for cro5s-country travel.
There are five forward speeds and one reverse. C. I;ORD ~ - T O E TRUCK (TYPES G 917 T ATU’D
The main (14.5 gallons) and subsidiary (17 gal- G 997 T ) . These XX I)oth commercial models
lons) gasoline tanks are supported within the with two-wheel dri\:c, slightly modified to meet
chassis frame. army specifications. IMh are powered by V-S
water-cooled gasoline engines developing about 78
3. German Trucks
brake horscl)ower. In the model G 917 T the
a. OPEL " B L I T Z " 3 - T O N TRUCK TYPE 3.6-36 S. capacity is 3.6 liters (219.6 cubic inches), in-
(1) Clltrssis. This vehicle, employed principally creased to 3.9 liters (237.9 cubic inches) in the
as a general purpose truck, has a variety of spe- G 997 T by enlarging the bore. The gear box
cialized bodies. There are actually three models: gives four forward 51~~1s and one reverse.
the 3.6-36 S, the original Chevrolet-type com- There is also a tyl)e G (157 T, a purely commer-
mercial vehicle; the 3.6-36 S (army model), cial motlcl but very sinlilar to the two army
which is modified to meet army specifications ; and models.
the 3.647 which is intended primarily for coaches d. ;\IICRCEDFS B I X Z 3-TAR; TRUCK ( T Y P E LCF
and has a lengthened chassis. The vehicle has a 3000). (1) Cl1assis. ‘I‘hr: chassis is of welded
normal rectangular type chassis, supporting the construction with prcss~d steel cross-members.
engine at the front. The engine is mountc~tl at the front beneath a
(2) Pmcw The engine is a water-cooled, hood of normal type. IMh front and rear axles
straight-six O.H.V. gasoline unit of 3.6 liters are supported by two longitudinal, semi-elliptic,
vin—s
MARCH 1945
UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-45I
L :
VIII—6
I MARCH 1945
UNCLASSIFIED
TM-E 30-451
VIIL—7
I
COMPARATIVE TABLE OF VARIOUS TYPES OF GERMAN HALF-TRACKED VEHICLES.
Zg.Kw. TYPE Sd. Kfz. Manufacturer's May bach Engine Gearbox type Braking system Suspension Clutch
No. type type
1 ton 10 D7 NL 38 TRKM Maybach pre-selective semi- ATE Hydraulic foot brakes. Hydraulic Full torsion-bar. (Idler not sprung, Fichtel and Sachs
(1938/9) or automatic SRG 102128H. steering brakes. Handbrake works but fitted with shear-bolt safety Mecano type
HL 42 TRKM mechanically on the steering brakes. device). PF 220 K.
Light armored carrier 250 D7p HL 42 TRKM as above as above Note: One pair of oogies less than as above
on Zg.Kw. i-ton 252 (1940) on Zg.Kw. 1-ton (Sa,Kfz. 10).
chassis. 253
3 ton 11 kl6 NL 38 TUKR Normal 4-speed type with Mechanical hand and steering brakes. Full torsion-bar. (Idler not sprung, Mchtel and Sachs
(1938) or auxiliary gearbox. Mechanical servo-assisted i'ootbrake. bu: fitted,with ohear-bolt sa'ety Mecano type PF 220.
HL 42 TUKRM d-vice).
5 ton 6 BNLS NL 38 TUK Mechanical hand and steering brakes. Full torsion bar. (Idler not sprung, as above
DRL8 or Bosch pneumatic footbrake. but fitted with shear-bolt safety
(1938/39) NL 38 TUKRM device).
Footnote at end of table.
JO
Zg.Kw. type Sd. Kfz. Manufacturer's Maybach Engine Gearbox type Braking system Suspension Clutch
No. ture type
8 ton 7 KM m 8 HL 52 TU Zahnradjabnk ZG 55. Mechanical steering and hand-brakes. Bogies with leaf-springing in pairs. -
(1935) t o n pneumatz foot-brakes. (Spiral springing on idler).
8 ton 7 KMm 11 HL 62 TUK "Non-synchronized". h a n d and and steering brakes. Bogies with leaf-springing in pairs. Mecano type K 230 K.
HLm 11 Bosch pneumatic foot brake. (Torsion-bar springing on idler).
, (ca. 1939) N&x This model was being made
up to 1942. but some later mod-
els have full torsion-bar sus-
pension.
12 ton 8 DBs 8 DSO/8 Bosch pneumatic foot brake. (Mechan- Bogies with leaf-springing in pairs. Mecano type LA 80 H.
(1938) ical steering brakes). Torsion-bar springing on idler.
12 ton 8 DB 10 HL 85 TUKRM Mechanical hand-brake. Bosch pneu- Full torsion-bar. (Idler not sprung. Mecano LA 65/80 B.
(1939/40) matic foot-brake. Hydraulic steering but fitted with shear-bolt safety
. device).
3
brakes. CO
CO
18 ton 9 F-2 HL 98 TUK Zahnradfabrik Type G 65 Mechanical hand and steering brakes. as above Meccano LA 65/80.
(1938) VL23O. t o n pneumatic foot brake.
Figure 60.
I
UNCLASSIFIED
I MARCH 1945 TM-E 30-451
Overall
Range Magni- Field length ’eight Ex:t cntranc,
TYPE USED ON GUSS AND AMMUNITION Scales fication (Degrees) (less eye (pounds) Pupil Pupil REMARKS
(Meters) (X) guard) distance liametel
(inches) (mm.1 (mm.)
T.Z.F.2 and 2X. Pz.K#jw.I. Models A and B. 7.92 mm MG 13. 800 2.5 28 19 19 5.5 — It is not known with what gun the T.Z.F.2
was used. nor in which vehicle. Monocular.
T.Z.F. 30. 4.wheeled armored car. 2 cm h’7u.K. 38. 1200 — Little is known about t l & telescope.
Sd.Kfz.222 and semi-tracked MOtlClCUlar. ;
AL. Sd.Kjz. 250/9. 7.92 mm M.G 3%
T.Z.F.4. Pe.Kfijw. II Models R to C. 2 cm Kw.K. 30. 1200 2.5 25 22.5 20 7 17.5 First confirmed Leitz design. Monocular.
7.92 mm M.G. 34.
T.Z.F.4/36 Pz.Kfifw.II Model F. 2 cm Kw.K. 30. 1200 2.5 25 ,22.5 21 7 17.5 The range of 800 metres applies to T.Z.F.
and 4/38. 7.92 mm M.G. 34. 800 4/36 and that of 1200 metres to T.Z.F.
4/38. Monocular.
/
T.Z.B. 5~. Pz.Kf~jw. III Models A to D. 3.7 cm Kw.K. (AP and HE). 2000 2.5 25 32.25 24 5 12.5 MUllOcUlar.
7.92 mm M.G. 34. 800
T.Z.F. 5~. Pz.Kpfw. III Model E, etc. 5 LM Kw.K (.AP and HE). 2000 2.5 25 32.25 21.5 5 12.5 Monocular. Modified T.Z.F. 50. superseded
(Vorl). (See Remarks). 7.92 mm M.G. 3/r. 1500 by T.E.F. 5d.
5 cm.
T.Z.F. 5b. Pz.Kpfw. III with 7.5 cm. 7.5 cm Kw.K. 2000 2.4 23.5 32.25 21.5 5 12.5 MOIKJCUlaI.
Kw.K. Models J to N.
Pn.Kpfw. IV Models B to F. 7.92 mm M.G. 36. 800
o
T.Z.F.56/36. Pz.Kpjw. IV. Models B to F . 7.5 cm Kw.K. 2000 2.4 23.5 32.25 23 6 14.4 Monocular. •
7.92 mm M.G. 30. 800 3
CO
GO
T.Z.F. 5d. Pz.K$fw. III. Models F and J. 5 cm Kw.K. (APC and HE) 3000 2.4 2.4 31.8 20.13 5.5 13.2 Monocular.
7.92 mm M.G. 3/r. 1500
T.Z.F. 5. Ps.Kpfw. III Models L and M. 5 cm Kw.K 39 AP or APCHE 1.500 2.4 2.4 31.8 20.13 5.5 13.2 Monocular.
3000
7.92 mm M.G. 3/r. 1200
T.Z.F. 5f Pz.Kpjw. IV Models F2 to II. 7.5<nzKwK. 40APCBC 2500 2.4 2.4 31.8 20.13 5.5 13.2 Monocular.
(Vorl) HE 3300 The HE scale serves for the machine gua alao.
AP40 1.500
7.92 mm M.G. 34. (See
Remarks)
Bi <
i r Figure 9.
GERMAN TANK AND ARMORED CAR SIGHTS—TURRET SIGHTING TELESCOPES—Continued
Overall
Range Magni- Field length Weight Exit Entrance
TYPE USED ON GUNS AND AMMUNITION Scales fication (Degrees) (less eye (pounds) Pupil Pupil REMARKS
(Meters) (X) guard) distance diameter
(inches) (mm.) (mm.)
T.Z.F. 5f. f. Pz.Kpjw. IV Models G to K. 7.5 cm Kw.K. 40 APCBC 3000 2.4 25 32 26 5.8 13.9 Monocular.
HE 4000 The H E scale serves for the machine gun also.
AP40 1500
7.92 mm M.C. 34. (See
Remarks)
T&F. 6. S-wheeled armored car and 2 cm Kw K. 30 and 38, and 1200 2.4 22 28.4 21 5 12 Monocular.
Pe. sp. wg. II 7.92 mm M.G. 3b.
(Luchs)Sd. Kjz. 123.
T.Z.F. 6/38. 2 cm Kw.K. 38 and 1200 2.5 25 Little known about this telescope but known
7.92 mm M.G. 3b. dimensions agree with those for the
T.Z.F.6. Monocular.
T.Z.F. 9b. Pz.Kpjw. Tiger Model E. 8.8 cm Kw.K. 36. 4000 2.4 26 32.5 37 6 15 Binocular. Adjustable interocular distance.
7.92 mm M.G. 3b. 1200
T.Z.F. 9d. Ps.Kpjw. Tiger Model B. 8.8 cm Kw.K. 43 APCBC 3000 Monocular.
HE 5000 The H E scale is believed to serve for the
7.92 mm M.G. 34. (See machine gun also.
Remarks)
T.Z.F. f2. Pz.Kpjw. Panther Model D. 7.5 cm Kw.K. 42 APCBC 3000 2.5 29 45.1 63.88 6.2 15 Binocular. Light and dark filters fitted. The
(Z./70) HE 4000 HE scale serves for the machine gun also.
AP40. 2000
7.92 mm M.G. 34. (See
Remarks)
T.Z.F. 120. Pz.Kpjw. Panther Models A and G. As above. 3000 2.5 19 44.5 44 6.2 Monocular, dual magnification.
<n
4000 5 15 3.1
2000
(See GO
Remarks) C/0
R.Z.F. f. Early models of most tanks. 7.92 mm M.G. 3'i. 200 1.8 18 5 - Cranked, monocular, moving-eyepiece type.
(gimbal mountmgs). (fixed)
K.Z.F. 2. Pz.Kpjw. I, Commander's. 7.92 mm M.G. 3'i. 200 1.75 18 14.13 7 5 Cranked, monocular, moving-eyepiece type.
Fz.Kojw. II, Flamethrower. (gimbal and ball mountings). (fixed)
Ps.Kpfw. III. Commander's
and MC&IS F to J.
Pz.Kpfw. IV. Tiger and Pnnlher.
Figure 10.
I MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIED
lowering the line of sight. The elevation scale (3) Panoramic Sight M. 16/18. (a) Des&p-
is graduated in hundreds, from 100 mils to 500 tiolz. The M.16/18 sight differs from the M.32
mils, with 300 as normal. The micrometer is as follows:
graduated in single mils numbered in tens. It has no slipping scales.
(e) Eyepiece. This is at the end of an arm JYhen the azimuth scale is set at zero, tE.e rotat-
and can be turned in any direction. The recticle ing head forms an angle of 90 degrees with the
which may be illuminated has an interrupted ver- eye piece.
tical line with an inverted "V" for elevation. A cross-level vial :~sembly is secured to the
Late models of the M.32 as well as M.32 K shank. It is adjusted by turning an eccentric
sights have a horizontal scale added to the reticle.
plug.
(f) Characteristics, M.32 and M.32 K.
Power 4 x. (b) Clraractcrisfics.
Field of view 10°. Power 4 x.
Diameter of exit p u p i l . . I.8 inches. Field.of view 10°.
Overall length ......6.25 inches. I)iameter of csit pupil. . . 1.5 inches.
Weight ...5 pounds. Lcn~th Owr-all .0..? 5 inches.
Weight .............. 3 pounds 5 ouuces.
c. ANTITAKK GUNS. (1) Gemral. All German
antitank-gun sight mounts have facilities for ap-
plying range, and most have a means for applying
lateral deflection. Characteristics of various
sights are:
(a) 2 cm S.Pz. B41. Open sights " U " and
acorn. Graduations for range, but no mechanical
arrangement for applying deflection. Telescope
sight fits into a trigger housing on sight mount.
(b) 5 an Pak 38. The sight incorporates lat-
eral deflection gear ant1 means for adjusting line
and elevation. Range tlr-urn is graduated to 2,400
meters ( H E ) and 1,400 meters (AI’).
(c) 7.5 CM Pak 40. As for 5 cm Pak 38 but
graduated to 2,800 mils ( H E ) and 1,400 mils
(API.
(d) 7.611 cm Pak 36 (I,). Rocking bar recipro-
eating ; range indicator graduated to 6,000 meters
(APCBC) and.2,000 meters (AP 40). Elevation
indicator graduated in meters for three types of
projectiles and in mils up to 800.
(e) 7.5/5..5 cm Pak <!I. Range drum with five
scales. The first is graduated in mils, the remain-
ing four in meters with decreasing range limits;
believed used as muzzle velocity decreases with
rapid wear of the taperctl bore. A deflection mech-
anism is located below the range setting handle.
(f) 8.8 cm Pak 43/31. There are two tele-
scopic mounts side by side on the left. One, of
rocking bar type, is for antitank use, and the other,
similar to the sight mount of the 10.5 cm le.
Figure Il.—Panoramic Telescope M16/18. F.H.18 is for indirect laying.
VIII—I3
I M.~,kCti IV45
UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451
Figure 12.~Sight 11101412ts. (Ixft) ITor 10.5 cm Howitzer on Pa. Kpfzv. III chassis (Stu. IIJ) (h’i!/ll/) /%r 7.5 cm Pok
40 on Czech (381) loll/: clitr.s.sis.
~i!we 13.—si{lht mmrts. (Lrft) For 75/55 mm Pak 41 Gull. (Right) I;OY 8.8 cm IBilk 43/41 Gz(.
Figwe 14—Sight ww~~ts (Left) For 7.5 cm (Stat. K40) Pz. Kpfu: HI chassis. (Right) For 7.5 CM oil 1’:. Kpfzv,
Ill R./O rotary cupola.
12) Zidfcw~oIz~, Z.F. 35/II S.v.o.4 This is conical retitles. Thv anglr ~‘rom conical to ver-
the sight now used with all antitank guns. It has tical reticle is 4 inilb. giving a maximum lay-off oi
on2 main graduation \vith three secondary gradua- 24 niils on each side. The field of view is 8 clr-
tions on each side, and a vertical line between the grres, and nqnitication thrrr*- fc11~1.
VIII—l4
I MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451
VIII—15
I MARCH 1945
UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451
Figwe 16.—AiGrg Circle, Kkr 31, with case artd illwr~inc~fir~g uppurrlhs
WI— I6
I MARCH 1945
UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-45I
strutted in three major parts: the periscope, the iron x r o to i~.-N)o. A i|iiick rcslense mechanism is
telescope, and the angle-of-site mechanism. \\:hen provitletl.
assembled, these can be mounted on the spindle The ~ril~~l is adjustable in height and has a
of a tripod. The instrument can be uwd to mcas- tra\-erring nie~lianisn~. A spindle projecting from
ure vertical and horizontal angles: by using the thy traversing 1~~1 forties thra support for the aim-
magnetic ncetlle, magnetic bearings can be taken. ing circle. Two riilg, in xvliich the spindle is
1Vhen disassembled, part of the instrument can mounted eccentrically CC~ntrol its wrtical position,
be used for plane table work. and by rotating these rings the spherical level
(2) Description. The periscope is fitted to can lx Ccnlc~l-cYl.
the aiming circle by means of a tlov~tailed slitlc. d. KAXGI: FrxnKKs. (1) General. In gen-
Its function is merely to raise the line of sight. eral. (ierman range finders are of the stereoscopic
It has no magnifying power. The telescolw has tylw. 1111t a 70-cm base coincidence range finder,
an adjustable focussing eyepiece, with a leveling though no lollg(~- in l~ro~lwtion~ is still in use.
bubble on top. A lighting attachment is provitltd Rangy fintlcr- are known 11IO c,sist in the following
on the left side. To the left of the telescope is a sizes :
70-cm Ime.
spherical level by which the head can be leveled.
l-lll,~l< r h w .
The angle-of-sight mechanism can be rotated 1.5.tthtcr basr.
through a total of 1,400 mils, the horizontal being 4-III~-lcr baw.
300 mils. The smallest graduation is 1 mil. 6-meter base.
lo-rnt1I’r has?.
The traversing mechanism is graduated in mils 12mcter base.
VIII—-17
I MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451
Figure 20.—Range Finder, 1.5 metcr-Basc. (Top) Assembled vine. (Bottom) Assembled ready for use.
VIII—I8
ll_w
r
(2) 70-cm Range Finders 14 a&?' 3~ Entfer- Section IV. SIGNAL EQUIPMENT
nungsmesser 14 and 34).
(a) General. The 70-cm (27.56 inches) co- . I. Constructional Features
incidence range finder is used by German ma-
a. GENERAL. TWO features stand out in the
chine-gun and mortar units, and by airborne
construction of Germany Army communications
troops for obtaining the ranges of ground targets.
equipment: the unit cohstruction methods em-
It also is used with the M.G.34 for antiaircraft
ployed and the material from which the units are
fire. For adjustment an artificial infinity is used.
made.
There is no adapter for mounting on a tripod.
b. U N I T CONSTRUCTION METHODS. Practically
(b) Characteristics.
every piece of radio equipment is constructed in
Base length 70 cm (27.56 inches).
uhits, which are secured to panels and to each
Magnification 11 x.
Range 219 to 10,930 yards. other, electrical connections being made by plug
Weight of Range finder.. 10 pounds. and socket strips or by screwing tags or solder-
Weight of case complete. .4.5 pounds. ing wires to a terminal strip. In most cases this
permits quick dismantling for servicing and re-
(3) l-Meter (39.37 inches) Stereoscopic Range
pair.
Finders. (a) GeneraZ. These portable l-meter
base range finders are used largely by light anti- c. MATERIALS USED (1) General. The metal
aircraft units manning 20-mm and 37-mm guns. from which radio sets are made is almost uni-
versally an alloy of about 90 per cent magnesium ;
(b) Characteristics. 8 pep cent aluminum; and 2 per cent zinc, copper,
Em.R. 1 m. Em.R.36 1 m. and other metals. Each unit consists of a die-
Base length ....39.37 inches 39.37 inches. casting of this alloy. Not onli is the main sub-
Magnification .. 7.8 x 6 x. chassis cast, but also the screening plates, bosses,
Range 275 to 8,740 yards.545 to 10,930
yards. and recesses for mounting components. The cast-
Weight 9.9 pounds I6 pounds. ings are accurately made, requiring little machin-
ing, thus establishing excellent mechanical rigid-
(4) 1.5-Meter (59.06 inches) Stereoscopic ity and improved electrical performance.
Rarlge Fkder (Em R.l.5 VIJZ). (a)General. This
(2) Tuning condensers. Main tuning con-
range finder is provided with a tripod and is only
densers are made from the standard alloy. Both
used against fixed targets.
rotors and stators are machined from a block
(b) Characteristics. casting. Thus, there can be no deterioration in
Base length ;.. .59.06 inches. performance due to corrosion between individual
Magnification ..........*11 x. plates and their mountin&
Range 435 to 21,860 yards. (3) Insulation. Extensive use is made of
Weight 20.9 pounds.
Weight of tripod 39.6 pounds. ceramic materials for insulating; they are used
for tag strips, tube holders, tube bases, coil
(5) B-Meter (157.48 in&es) Range Finder formers, and almost universally as the main
(Ern:R. 4 m). (a) General. This is the stand- bearing for ganged condensers. Where coil
ard instrument for use with heavy antiaircraft formers are not made from ceramics, porcelain
guns. It may be employed either as an independ- or pressed bakelised paper is used.
ent range finder, or incorporated into an anti- (4) Condensers. Trimmer condensers are
aircraft director. As a range finder it is served by usually either small, air-spaced ones, or of the
a crew of four: rangetaker, layer for line, layer silvered ceramic-disc . type (Philips), which are
for elevation, and reader. used to some extent in British and American
equipment. Small, fixed condensers are the tubu-
(b) Characteristics.
lar ceramic type or flat mica type in a bakelite
Range from 2,200 feet.
Weight .420 pounds. shroud. Except in older versions of the 100
W.S., mica is used sparingly. Larger condensers
( 6 ) 6-, lo-, and 1ZMeter Range Finders. are paper-dielectric Mansbridge type. No color
These instruments are used for range measure- coding is used, the values being printed on the
ment for seacoast artillery. condenser in mF, pF, or centimeters.
VIII—-19
I MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451
(5) Resisto7s. Resistors are usually of the tor or by means of an internal "glow crystal"
noninductive carbon type, although a few wire- (leuchtquarz).
wound ones are employed purely for direct cur- c. NUMBERING. A S an aid to both construction
rent purposes, such as voltage dividers. No color and servicing, each component in a set has a
coding is used, the values being printed on the number, and in many cases the wiring is num-
resistor in ohms. bered also. Any two points bearing the same
(6) Coils. Low frequency coils and chokes number are directly connected.
are wound with single-strand, enamel-insulated 4. Armored Vehicle Radio Sets
wire, or with silk-covered liztendralzt wire. High a. GENERAL. Complete sets in armored vehi-
frequency coils usually are wound with bare cop- cles include transmitter, receiver, power units,
per or copper strip. Alternatively, the coil and accessories, referred to by the designation
former has a helical groove in which a thin layer Fu., followed by a number. An exception is the
of copper is deposited, apparently by electrolysis. voice transmitting set Fu. Spr.f. used in self-
The inductance of most high frequency coils can propelled field and medium artillery vehicles and
be varied within small limits by adjustment of a certain armored cars. This set has no Fu. num-
co-axial iron dust core, or copper ring. Inter- ber. Transmitters and receivers individually are
mediate frequency transformers not only have referred to by a description and a letter, such
iron dust cores, but are in many cases completely as 10 watt transmitter "c".
enclosed in an iron dust shrouding. b. RADIO SETS USED. The following tabula-
(7) Tubes. German radio receivers of modern tion shows what complete radio sets are likely
design have only one type of tube throughout, to be installed in various types of armored and
usually a pentode. These tubes are not always self-propelled artillery vehicles. Details on these
used in an orthodox fashion-—for instance a pen- sets will be found in the accompanying tables.
tode may be used as a diode=but the method Vehicle Radio
considerably facilitates the supply of spares. C;ommander's tank Fu.8 and Fu.5; or Fu.7
and Fu.5.
2. Power Supplies Fighting tanks, all types..Fu.S and Fu.2; or Fu.5
Power supplies vary according to the purpose only.
for which the piece of equipment is used. Vehi- Assault guns .._.........Fu.5 and Fu.2; or Fu.5
(in armored formations) only.
cle sets employ separate rotary converters driven A&ored OP vehicles.. .Fu.8 and Fu.4; or Fu.8,
from the U-volt vehicle storage batteries. These (artillery) Fu.4, and Fu.Spr.f.
converters are of heavy rugged construction, Assault guns (artillery.. .Fu.8, Fu.16, and FUSS; or
and therefore remain serviceable for long periods Fu.16 and Fu.15; or
without attention. Ground stations employ stor- Fu.16 only.
Self-propelled antitank
age batteries and dry batteries, pedal operated
guns ................Fu.8 and Fu.5; or Fu.5
generators, or small gasoline electric sets. Pack (light and medium only.
sets employ storage batteries with dry batteries chassis)
or synchronous vibrators. Self-propelled antitank
guns Fu.8 and Fu.5; or Fu.7
3. Simplification (heavy chassis) and Fu.5; or Fu.5 and Fu.2.
a. CONDENSERS. Great pains are taken to make Antitank-assault guns ...Fu.8 and Fu.5; or Fu.5
only.
the working of the sets as simple and reliable
Lynx (reconnaissance). .Fu.12 and Fu.Spr.f. or
as possible. Tuning condensers are driven through Ft4.Spr.f. only.
a chain of precision gearing, using fiber and Antiaircraft tanks Fu.S or Fw.2 only.
spring-loaded metallic wheels to remove back- (Flak panzer)
lash. Self-propelled heavy in-
fantry gun Fu.16 only.
b. DIALS. The dials are of a large size, with
Wasp and Bumble Bee.. .Fu.Spr.f. only.
calibration spaced over 300 degrees or more. Armored cars (except... .Fu.Spr.f. only,
They are accurately marked out, permitting the eight-wheeled vehicle)
frequency to be set to very close limits without and semi-tracked ve-
the use of a wavemeter. Most dials are marked hicles with armament.
Armored cars Fu.lZ and Fu..Spr.f.
with one or more check points, allowing initial
Eight-wheeled armored
calibration to be accurately set or checked by car Fu.12 and Fu.Spr.f. or
means of an external or internal crystal oscilla- Fu.Spr.f. only.
VIII—20
,1 MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451
VIII—2I
TM-E 30.451
I MARCH 1945
•H
VIII—22
MARCH 1945 TM-E 30.451
UNCLASSlFlED
Vttl—23
I MARCH 1945
UNCLASSIFIED
TM-E 30-451
Figure 29.—/-e!dfcntsehreil>er.
1—25
I MARCH 1945
UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-45I
I:iijurc 30.—Transmitter/Receiver (Tum.l-ii. hi) with case for battery and u ••.••>•;
';,•!•/.• i. . " -
VIII—26
I MARCH 1945 UNCLASSlf\ED TM-E 30-451
VIII—27
I MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30.451
VIII—28
I MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30.451
, • LEGEND
't. CONNECTOR ASS~B~Y
** FfXEO CONNECTOR - LOADING COIL ASS
3 TERMINAL SECTION-
4 LOADfNG COIL CASE-
"
0
"
"
II
/'
.v' r 10
•S. !TfM If3 f,V POSlTfON ON LOADING COfL CASE
It. SCREW CONNECTOR
7 T’WO LOADING COILS IN POSITION ON SUPPORT WfTiJ CEM-ER COPPER M/EL5
v. MOUlDtD FOUH5A TfON - REAR VIEW - SNOWING YOULDED GROOYfS
S. R&?UER GASKET
/0.C0UPLC
VIIl—29
I MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451
VIII—-30
I MARCH 1945
UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30.451
VIII—31
UNCLASSIFIED
I MARCH 1945 TM-E 30-451
AC2 Telefunken Triode 4 0.65 Audio and H.F. Tube 250* -5.5 6 12,000 2,500 30 2.0 1.7
AC2 Telef Receiver iod e A.C. Oscillator
AC2 Tungsram Tube L.F. Amplifier
AF3 Telefunken Variable 250* -3 100 8 1.2M 1,800 2,200 2.0 0.003
fu
AF3 Valvo Pentode 4 Variable mu H.F. 250* -55 100 .015 10M 2
AF3 Tungsram Receiv er Ind. A.C. 0.65 iable
4H2 Loewe Tube
AF7 Telefunken Pentode H.F. Tube 300* -2 100 3 20M 2,100 4,000 1.0 0.003
AL4 Telefunken
AL4 Telef Pentode Ind. 4 1.75 Output Pentode 250 -6 250 36 5 50,000 9,500 9 7.000
4EI Loewe A.C.
AZ1 Telefunken
AZ1 Telef Duo-Diode 4 l Full Wave Maximum A.C. Input 500 Volts per Wave ~-
Maximum D.C, o
TAZI Tungsram Rectifier Rectifier a t e - - - 60 M A
300 Volts per Plate 100 M A
A21 Phillips Tube
VG5OO7 Hoges CO
•n
DAF11 Variable 1.2 Variable mu
mu Pentode m
Pentode D.C. 0.05 Low Frequency 150* 0 120 0.29
Amplifier ,9M 0.6
Diode H.F. Rectifier
RE074 Telefunken Triode Dir. 4 0.06 Audio and H.F. Tube 150* -9 3.5 11,000 900 10 4
G407 Tungsram Receiver D.C. Low Frequency Amplifier
H406 Valve Tube (Transformer Coupling)
RE084 Telefunken Triode Dir. 4 Audio Tube 150* —4 4 10,000 1.500 15 4.5
LD408 Tungsram Receiver D.C. 0.08 Low Frequency Amplifier
A408 Valve Tube
RE084K Triode Dir. 4 RE08 Audio Tube 120 11,000 1,200 13.5 3
Low Frequency Amplifier
(Transformer Coupling)
RE134 Telefunken Triode Dir. 4 0.15 Output Triode 250 -17 . 12 2,000 3 12,000
IA14 Tungsram Output D.C. 12*
L413 Valve Tube
REN904 Telefunken Triode Ind. 4 1.0 Audio and H.F. Tube 150* -9 3.5 11,000 904 10 1.5 2
AG495 Tungsram Receiver A.C. Low Frequency Amplifier
A4110 Valve Tube
LA203 Loewe
Figure 48 ontinlced).
SPECIFICATIONS OF VACUUM TUBES USED IN GERMAN ARMY SIGNAL EQUIPMENT—Continued
Plate Screen Maxi-
Plate Grid Screen Current Current Allow- Allow- mum
NUMBER TYPE CATHODE TYPE USE AND Voltage Voltage Voltage at Plate at Screen Plate Trans- Amqli- able able Load Grid-
AND RATING APPLICATION *Maxi- *Maxi- •Maxi- Voltage Voltage Resist- con- fication Plate Screen Iutput Plate
mum mum mum Indi- Indi- ance ductance Factor Dissi- Dissi- Ca- *
cated cated pation oation pacity
C.T. VOLTS AMP. VOLTS VOLTS VOLTS M A M A OHMS umhos u N A T T ! N A T T ! 3HMS uufds
RENS1264 Telefunken Screen Ind. 4 1.0 Audio and H.F. Tube 200* -2 100 3 45 M 2,000 900 1.0 0.006
AS4120 Tungsram Tetrode A.C. Low Frequency Amplifier
H4111D Valvo Receiver (Resistance Coupling)
RES164 Telefunken Pentode Dir. 4 0.15 Output Tube 250 -11.5 80 12 1.9 60,000 14,000 3 10.000
PP416 Tungsram L416D D.C.
Valvo LAP513 Loewe
RGN2004 Telefunken Duo-Diode Dir. 4 2.0 Full Wave Rectifier Maxim um A.C. input 300 Volts Per Plate — Maximu m D.C. Output 160 M . : \
PV420O Tungstram
G2004 Valvo
VG3512 Hoges
1561 Philips VG420
Sator
1.9
RL2P3 Telefunken Pentode Dir. D.C. 0.28 H.F. Tube Oscillator 200* 150* 75,000 1,000 75 2.0 0.1
RL 2. 4P2
RL2T2 Telefunken Triode Dir. 1.9 0.30 150* 5,000 2,400 12 2.0 18.5
RL2.4T1
cz
RL 12P10
o
RL 12T15
5
CO
RL12P3S Telefunken Pentode 12.6 to
(Trans-
mitting)
RS241V 3.8
RS242
E
(71
Figure 48 (Continued).
E 2:
RVZP700 Teletunken Pentode Dir. 1.9 0.09 Audio and H.F. Tube Short 200* 120* 1. 2M 900 850 1.0 0.01
Wave Tube
RVZPSOO Teleiunken Pentode Dir. 1.9 0.18 Audio and H.F. Tube 200* 150* 1M 900 800 1.5 0.01
RV2. 4P700
RVlZP2000 Telefunkcn Pentode Ind. 12.6 0.065 Audio and H.F. Tube Short 220* 140* 1.5M 1,500 2,000 1.0 0.005
Wave "Universal" Re-
ceiving Output Pentode
RVlZP4000 Telefunken Peutode Ind. 12.6 0.2 Audio and H.F. Tube "Uni- 200* 125* 1.8M 2,300 4,000 1.5 0.004
versal" Receiving
STV280/80
0
STV150/40Z Voltage Regulator
GO
Figure 48 (Continued).
2
rn
POWER SUPPLIES FOR GERMAN RADIO SETS
INPUT OUTPUT I
TYPE OF EXACT NAME-
EQUIPMENT EXACT NAME- Consumption High voltage Low voltage USED WITH (GERMAN
MENTPLATENO. Revo-
lutions SETS)
From per
Volts Amperes Watts* min- Volts Amperes Watts Volts Amperes Watts*
ute (max)
U. 100 or
33/40 3,000 1,000 0.24 240 12 7.3 87.6 loo w . s .
U. 100a
U. 15a
15 W. S. E. a
14.6 175 5,500 320 0.19 60 4.8 2.6 12.5
15 W. S. E. b
U. 10 and
80
10 w . s. c
6.7 3,500 350 0.115 40
V. lOal 10W. S. h
V. 5al 7.5 90 4,000 330 0.140 46 5 1.2 6 5 W. S./24b-104
E. U. a l , a2, a3 2.3 2.i 4,000 130 0.026 3.4 12 U. Kw. E. d. U. Kw. E. e
GO
S. E. U. a 5.2 62 8.000 300 0.070 21 12 Radiotelephone sets a. d. f GO
2-volt storage
EWb 2 1.5 3
battery
0.010 1 0.75 1.5 Torn. E. b
Vibrator units EWc 1 12 2
T20 t 70 20 W. S. c
20 W. S. d
Heavy engine gen- 4.stroke gasoline en- Gasoline/oil................ 1,500 220 220 1,500 and 1,000 watt transmitters
erator set a. gine, 4 cyl, 26 hp. 380 23 15kva and workshop machines.
3-phase a-c
Engine generator 4.stroke gasoline en- Gasoline/oil............ 1,500 220 a-c 13.6 3,000
setF(WG3000) gine, 2 cyl. 9 hp.
Charging set D 2-stroke gasoline en- Sxpints per hour (oil/gasoline) . . 2,000 65 46 3.ooa Storage battery charging (storage
(LG3000).
Charging set E
gine 1 cyl. 6.5 hp.
INPUT OUTPUT
T 15OOt 3.phase a-c mains 220/380 22/12.7 440/1.ooo/ 2/0.5/0.9 4,100 24 36 864 1000 w . s .
3,000 d-c 1500 w . s .
Receiver rectifier N A6 11n/1.50 loo 0.045 4.5 2-2.4 2.5-8 4 Long- and short-wave receivers
220/240
2 2
2 B 19 2 *19 2 *4 For modulated-light speech equip-
ment
IT1
•r- Footnotes at end of table.
Figure 49 (Continued)
I 2
4.8 NC 5 1.5 *5
t *5 For pack vnreless sets, field tele-
Charged by engine phony sets, RDF and inter-
generator charging 12 *30 cept sets
Nickel-cadmium 2.4 NC 58 12 *S8
sets or charging
storage batteries. rectifiers
2.4 NC 28 2.4 6 *28 / 2.4 6 *15
2.4 NC 20 2 *2O 2 *5
*For watts column, items marked with an asterisk (*) indicate ampere hours, and are for batteries only. ^Letter T designates German word "TRAGFAHIGKEIT," meaning carrying capacity. S
Figure 49 (Con:i:mrd)
I MARCH 1945
UNCLASSIFIED TM-fc 30-451
Fu. 7 20 watt transmitter (20 W.S.d) 2-Meter Rod 50(31) 50(31) This is standard ground-
air cooperation equip-
ment.
Ultra short wave receiver "dl" 42100-47800
(UKw.E.dl)
Fu. 8 30 watt transmitter "a" 1120-3000 Roof aerial (Stationary) 50(31) 15(9.3) With 8-meter winch mast
(JO W.S.a) (On the move) 40(24.8) 10(6.2) and star aerial the
Medium wave receiver " c " 835-3000 range increased to ap-
(Mw.E.c) proximately 93 miles
(key). 31 miles (voice).
Fu. 11 100 watt transmitter (100 W.S.) 200-1200 Roof aerial (Stationary) 80(49.6) 20(12.4) With 9-meter winch mast
(On the move) 50(31) 10(6.2) and umbrella aerial
Pack receiver " b " (Torn.E.b) 100-6970 range can be increased
t0 apPrOximately 124
miles (key). 43 miles
(voice).
Fu. 12 80 watt transmitter (SO W.S.a) 1120-3000 Roof aerial (Stationary) 80(49.6) 25(15.5) With 8-meter winch mast
and star aerial range is
Medium wave receiver " c " 835-3000 aPprOXimately 124
(Mw.E.c) eiver (key). 43 miles
(voice)
Fu. 13 20 watt transmitter (20 W.S.c) 27200-33300 2-Meter Rod (Stationary) 10(6.2) 8(5) Fu. 13 is the same as Fu 6.
(On the move) 8(5) (3.7) extra receiver "c". See
remarks under Fu. 6.
Fu. 19 15 watt transmitter/receiver "a" 3000-7500 Roof aerial Range given as 19 miles
(15 W.S.E.a) (key), 16 miles (voice),
but these figures prob-
ably only hold good
when using rod aerial
fixed at top of high
mast (7 meters) (sta-
tionary) .
Fu.Sfir.f. Transmitter/receiver Fusprech. "f" 19997.5-21472.5 1.4 or 2 Meter Rod Joice only. Equipment
(Stationary) — 5(3.1) includes loud smaker.
(On the move) (1.3)
NOMEN- DIMENSIONS
CLATURE AND WEIGHT DESCRIPTION REMARKS
Field Telephone 33 ld5”~11”x4”—-12 lbs This general purpose telephone for local battery The instrument case is a bakelite
operation only, with magneto system for calling, is moulding approximately 0.2 inch
equipped with magneto system. Provision is made thick. The lid has a self locking
for extra plug in headphones and testing of line and fastener which is pressed to open.
bell circuits, and two jacks connected in parallel The shoulder strap has a hook
with line circuit for connection as exchange. It can on it from which the telephone
be connected to a post office exchange by a special head set can be hung if required
adaptor. The power supply is l.S volts; either inert operation of the instrument is
or dry cells may be used. conventional.
The German Wall 15"x7^"x5H" A telephone of extremely sturdy construction and The ringing generator of this set is
Telephone for used apparently where moisture and vibration are the same type as that employed
Field Emplace- excessive. These telephones are local battery oper- in the field telephone 33; may
ments. ated, mounted on concrete walls, and intercon- be employed by Allied troops in
nected through ducts. locations where its qualities are
The telephone is of heavy waterproof construction desirable.
and the handset is connected to the main assembly
by a heavy rubber-covered waterproof cord. The
receiver is covered with a rubber earpiece. Both the
main assembly case aad the handset frame cover
plate is fastened by. means of 4 bolts with triangular
shaped heads recessed in each corner of the face.
This case plate is attached to the body by chains
to prevent its falling off when loosened.
Endverslarker rw ~7~~x4~‘”A.C. Set AC powered unit: This is an audio-frequency ampli- This piece of equipment is an
(f. Feldfnnsiwccher r~"~6~~x3~” Battery Set fier employing one triode tube, type RE 084. The audio-frequency amplifier to
receiver circuit of the field telephone 33 is opened increase the range operation
33) of field telephone 33. They
(Terminal Ampli- and the incoming signal is fed to the grid of the may be either powered by AC
fier for Field Tele- amplifier. The amplified signal is returned to the or by batteries. These sets are
phone 33) earphone receiver. Power is supplied through a employed in place of, or in
transformer, having high and low voltage windings conjunction with field repeat-
for plate andfilamentsupplies. The plate supply is ers. When using the AC set,
rectified (half-wave) by rectifier GLo and the fila- the handset of the field tele-
ment supply by a full wave rectifier GLi. phone 33 is used, but with the
battery set there is already
Battery operated unit: The principle of operation is one provided.
very nearly the same.
Line Intercept 17j/~“x13~“x11”-—78 lbs. Provision for tapping to several telephone or tele- A portable line intercept amplifier,
Receiver LE. 35. graph lines and monitoring any one required. No complete with batteries; may be
Contact need be made as a loop brought to within either manpack or vehicle.
a foot of the line may be sufficient. The equipment
can be used to pick up earth currents between two
earthed lines.
The amplifier consists of a three-stage resistance ca-
pacity coupled circuit using three pentodes, all RV2
PSOO's. The amplifier has a gain of 72 db.
Threefillersare incorporated in the set:
(a) Storsieb: a specialfilterfor alternating the odd
harmonics of 50 cycles where main interference
reduces intelligibility,
(b) A band-pass filter normally in circuit,
(c) Additional filter sections which reduce the
band filter to 400 c/s-22OO c/s.
IO-Line Exchange 1*x14%6”—20 lbs. The exchange will take up to 10 single or double line The exchange is roughly compar-
circuits. In case of mixed circuits (double and able with the British 10-line
single lines to exchange) where the double lines are U.C. switchboard, although it is
numerically superior, the single wire circuits should smaller and more compact.
be connected via a cordless transformer, or vice
versa if single lines preponderate.
Subscribers lines may be connected either direct to
the terminals 1 a.b. to 10 a.b. on top of the ex-
change or through a connection rack; or via 30-way
plug and line system to a line terminal unit.
Figure 51.
VMI--42
MARCH 1945
UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451
NOMEN- DIMENSIONS
CLATURE AND WEIGHT DESCRIPTION REMARKS
German 10 Line This set was designed for common battery operation, Is well made, easy to use and main-
Cordless Exchange the l ’ I H”x7~“-- being marked negative and posi- tain, but has the disadvantage of
(Exact German tive, c h an ge used for local hattety operation. being unable to accommodate
Nomenclature It accommodates 9 lines besides operator's phone and more than two calls at one time,
unknown) c lature only two conversations at one time. though ideal for conference calls.
Provision for night alarm circuit has also been made.
Toggle switches for cross connection of the subscribers
are utilized in conjunction with line drops which
are located about the keys. May be paralleled with
similar type of exchange.
Small telephone One line switchboard unit with an attachable visual The set is well built and sturdy.
elephone indicator used with other such units to serve from Its simplicity and portability
Box (Verntittlung- two xc han g e telephone subscribers. are outstanding characteristics.
skastchen)
s
The small fortress 48ffx39"x8ff— The switchboard is extremely heavy and housed in a Because of its weight and size ob-
switchboard OB fort r e s s brackets are provided at the back of viously could only be used in
36(Kleine Festungs- the box OB fastening the switchboard on a wall. fixed installations. Is very
vermittiung) Can accommodate 30 lines and 12 interconnections Kleine to the OB 37 with the
are possible. exception of two principle dif-
Provision has been made for connecting ten of the 30 ferences in circuit.
lines on the OB 36 to common battery trunks.
(Lines 21 to 30 being fitted with a 4 mfd condenser).
Large Field Switch- This is made up of three types of standard sections With the use of multiple jack field
board for 60 lines Swi in tch- until desired size is reached. this board can be built up to 300
Is i n e s for local battery operation with ground lines. Knowing this, whether the
return or metallic circuit. By adding a commercial term 60-line switchboard is a g
adapter, connections may be established with civil pliable as a separate piece of
exchanges using C.B. or automatic dial system. Is equipment is a matter for further
made up of 4 sections: (1) assembly "A" including consideration.
plug cord holders and conference jack panel, (2)
answering jack panel unit (ten jacks). (3) confrr-
ence call panel, (4) adapter for use with automatic
dial exchange.
Figure 51 (Continued).
VIM—43
UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451
I MARCH 1945
DIMENSIONS
NOMENCLATURE AND WEIGHT DESCRIPTION REMARKS
10-300 Line Switchboard )perating Unit The apparatus consists of several units built up to Very neat, light and compact,
9W"x13"xZlM"—S2 lbs. form the whole exchange: the operating unit, 10- probably used in line of
0 Line Unit line answering unit, 50-line answering unit, 100- communication formations.
4x"xi3"x 7" —11 lbs. line multiple unit, GO-line multiple unit, 10-jack
0 Line Unit bunching unit, dialing unit, and superimposing
15~ % 13"x 7" —37 lbs. unit.
00 Line Unit Line connections are made at the rear of each unit
lS~"x13"x 7" —31 lbs. by a 30-way connector with a 30-pin plug at each
50 Line Unit end.
lS~"x13"x 7" —27 lbs. rhe drop-flap indicators are automatically restored
Gurcbing Unit when the associated jack has a plug inserted. A
Z$$"x13"x 7" — 5 lbs. night alarm is also provided.
Xaling Unit
7" ~13 % 7” —12 lbs.
superimposing Unit
7x"x13"x 7 ’ —21 lbs.
Teleprinter Terminal Unit !4"x21"~9~"—93 lbs. The terminal unit and teleprinter are operated from Used in line of communication
Incorporating Single 110-220 volts AC (total consumption 150 watts). companies.
Channel V.F. Equipment. Provides for single and double current working
(Springschrcibanschlussgeral (simplex or duplex) and remote control operation.
(VF working.) Intercommunication between tele-
printer and similar equipment over a , or radio
link.
Teleprinter Terminal Unit 24"~21"~94~"—96 Ibs. This is for simple working only and operates on the Both types can be worked
Incorporating Single same type of power supply as above. with American and British
Channel V. F. Equipment. teleprinter with the inclu-
(SBringschreibanschlussgeral‘) sion of their respective T.T.
Units. For line of communi-
cation purposes.
Telewriter Tbs/24a-32 ‘7~“xlS~"x9~"-—57 lbs. Sendsfigures1 to 9 and 0, the characters +, T h e ?, The mechanism of the set is
and the 26 letters of the alphabet. Works directly simple but precision made,
into a telephone tine. Field telephone can be and the keyboard is con-
plugged in for speech working. A 900-cycles filter tinental type.
can be switched in to reduce interference. When
the interference is too great, 900/c/s morse code
can be sent and received on headphones. 12-pt
socket on panel is for connection to radio set
through an intermediate unit. Tube system 90C
c/s sender oscillator—Ret amplifier—Ret rectifier
speed control. All tubes are type RV12P400.
Power supply 12-volt storage battery to motor
coupled to dynamo for H.T. for tube.
Telewriter Tbs/T 36 L.O. !O"x16M"x12"—63% lbs. Ihe receiving and transmitting mechanisms are sim- Associated equipment T.T.U.,
(Tape Teleprinter) ilar to those in the American Teletype machine e.g. (Springschreibar-
Pernschreiber described in detail in the Teletype Manual No. 11. schussgerat).
All cables are permanently attached to the tele-
printer. Schematic and wiring diagrams will be
found mounted on the meter base plate.
Speech Scrambler 17"X13"X9’ These are used to provide two-way security on a Use for security purposes over
YK III b. (approx.)—70 lbs. wire or radio-telephone circuit. It is powered by a telephone lines. Is portable
2-volt storage battery and one, 90-volt dry bat- and can be carried by 1
tery. The set is compactly built and is very sturdy man.
in construction. The individual circuit components
are separated according to their functions and
completely scr-eened. 3RV2P800 are used. Two of
these are used as audio amplifiers, one on each side
of the two-way circuit. The other is used as a
2000-cycle audio-oscillator. If not required th
scrambler circuit may be switched on and the in-
put and output circuits directly connected.
Figure 52.
VIII—44
UNCLASSIFIED
I MARCH 1945 TM-E 30-45I
DIMENSIONS
NOMENCLATURE AND WEIGHT DESCRIPTION REMARKS
ronschreiber th e with the exception of one employing a High speed recording ap-
Models b and bl s c h r e i b e r speed control system are identical. paratus.
They are b l physically into two sub units The Germans have designed
known respectively as the Lanfwerke and the and manufactured a series
Verstarker. It offers the facility of recording an of magnetic tape recorders.
o n on a magnetic ribbon. During the re- There are in existence 2 other
cording process, the quality and ware of the signal models known: they are:
impressed on the tape may be monitored. Provi- the Tonschreiber c which is
sion has also been made for playback and for re- a spring-driven recorder for
winding and wiping thetape used. This recording rough field use; and the
tape is made of paper; one side of it has been cov- AEG Type K4. which is a
ered with a coating of material having high mag- studio type device.
netic properties.
The apparatus was designed to he supplied from AC
mains. DC cannot be used. While the voltage may
vary from 110 to 250 volts the permissable fre-
quency variation is not known.
German Teleprinter SWBD 21ffxX8^rfx8M#—50 lbs. This teletypewriter switchboard is housed in a metal Line of communication com-
(T39) cabinet with folding tubular legs. It has four pairs panies.
Vermittlungsschrank of 3 9 ) for handling simultaneous complete cir-
lungs s c h r a n k for terminating one to ten
teletypewriters. The construction is rugged and
will withstand considerable abuse, although it is
not moisture proof; the wiring is neat and sturdy.
The answering and calling cords are each coiled on
an individual wound reel. This method of storing
excess cord lengths is same as that employed on
the German ZO-line, local battery telephone
switchboard.
VW—45
PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS AND SPECIFICATIONS OF TWO-WAY RADIO SETS
I USED IN THE GERMAN ARMY GROUND FORCES
2
NOMEN- FREQUENCY TYPE OF CIRCUIT AND TUBES POWER POWER SUPPLY AND TYPE OF DIMENSIONS ALLOCATION REMARKS
CLATURE RANGE (mcs) SIGNAL (a) Send OUTPUT CONSUMPTION AERIAL AND
a. Send RANGE IN (b) Receive (watts) (a) Send WEIGHT
b. Receive MILES (b) Receive
c. Crystal
Transceiver a. 3-5 C.W. 25 a. MO-PA .65-C.W. a. 2-volt storage battery 12-ft. (max.) rod 18"xl5H"x8/' Short range com- This set is identical
Torn.Fu.bl b. 3-6.7 R/T 10 RV2 P8OO-RL2P3 .35-R/T. b. 130-volt H.T. dry bat- or 50-ft. hori- —43 lbs. munication by with the Torn. Fu.
b. RF-M-LO-IF-DET-AF tery. zontal wire and all arms except f. except for fre-
6RV2 P800 counterpoise. infantry. quency rang! of
sender.
Transceiver a. 33.8-38 C.W.:9 a. MO-B-PA-MOD to PA 1 a. 2-volt storage battery 6-ft. rod (section- Communication
Torn.Fu.aZ. b. 33.8-38 R/T :4 grid 2,RV2P8000-RLZT and 130-volt H.T. dry al) or wire on —37 lbs. from infantry
(Mod is rec. AF Tube). battery. masts. regt. (brigade)
b. RF-M-LO-IF-REAC: b. to battalion,
DET-AF 6RV2 P800 • and from bat-
talion to corps.
Transceiver a. 3-5 C.W.: 60 a. MO-PA (2 tubes in paral- 15-C.W. Pedal generator-, or 12-volt Inverted L, 40-ft. For fire control in
SE 469A. A. R/T ~20 lel) RS242-RE084. 7-R/T. storage battery and dy- long, 10-f thigh —44 lbs. artillery units-
b. RF-Fc-2,IF-DET-AF namotor. (6-volt battery with two 20-ft.
4,RESO94-,2 REO84. and 150-volt H.T. bat- counterpoise
tery for receiver only). cables.
Transceiver
Feldfu.6.
a. 90-110
b. 90-110
R/T : 3/4 a. MO-PA
b. KF-DET-AF (Super-
regenerative) .
.15 a. Storage battery type 2.4
b. NC28 driving an inter-
nal vibrato pack.
32"-vertical rod;
later models
have laminated
14"xl3K"x7"
—28 lbs.
Short range pa-
trol set, used
by infantry in
This set is a modern
pack set. The tubes
used are of small
5
CO
RV2.4 P7OO-RL2.4T1-RL2. steel tape. forward areas. dimensions and
4P2. the whole set is
compactly con-
structed. The
Feldfu c, is a sim-
ilar set covering a
different fre-
quency range.
They are distin-
guished by a color
code, the " b " hav-
m ing red markings
and th« "c'v green.
Fyigure 53.
PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS AND SPECIFICATIONS OF TWO-WAY RADIO SETS
NOMEN-
CLATURE
FREQUENCY
RANGE (mcs)
USED IN THE GERMAN ARMY GROUND FORCES—Continued
TYPE OF
SIGNAL
CIRCUIT AND TUBES
(a) Send '
POWER
OUTPUT
POWER SUPPLY AND
CONSUMPTION
TYPE OF
AERIAL
DIMENSIONS
AND
ALLOCATION REMARKS
I
a. Send
b. Receive
c. Crystal
RANGE IN
MILES
(b) Receive (watts) (a) Send
(b) Receive
WEIGHT
1
Transceiver a. 24.1-25 R/T-2 a. MO (Rec osc)-PA (Rec 8 a. 12-volt storage battery 6x-ft. rod con- Il"x8"x6" Inter-communi-
Fusprech a. a. output (Grid MOD (Rec to nected via —15 lbs. cation between
1st AF) to PA. b. dynamotor SEUa. feeder. armored recon-
b M-OSC-2,IF-DET-2,AF- 12 volts @ .5 amps. naissance cars
Transceiver a. M.C.W. a. MO-Anode Modulator 40-60 m/W. a. 2-volt storage battery, Saw tooth reflect- 13%"x8w"x8$ a " For quasi optical
SEC2T b.454-508 R/T 12S. DS310 (acorn) RL2T2. and two 90-volt H.T. ive aerial. —24 lbs. point to point
b. Quench-DET-AF dry batteries, tapped at working. Not
RL2T2-DS31O (acorn) 9, 60, 90, 130, and 180 known which
RV2P80O. volts, troops “se it.
b.
Transceiver a. 2.5-3.5 C.W.:15 a. MO-PA. a. 2.4-voit storage battery On move whip 15"xl3"x7" As a pack set on This set is provided
•Torn.Fu.g. b. 2.5-3.5 R/T : 8 2.RL24P3. and built in vibrator. aerial S-ft. long the move or as with "Break" in
b. RF-FC-IF-DET-AF b. with loading a ground sta- working.
5,RV2,4P70O coil at base. tion.
/
Transceiver a. 28-33 4-ft. rod. BY troops sup- Main features dis-
Feldfu.f. b. 28-33 Same as for Feldfu b. porting ar- tinguishing this
mored fighting set from the Feld-
vehicles. jab. are:
(1) tuning is contin-
uous, not in fixed
channels; (2) acr-
ial base is tilted so
that aerial is 40 °
out of vertical; (3)
a large white spot.
Transceiver a. 120-156 R/T 11 .15 watts a. 2-volt storage battery. Rod: short, 2 ft.; 14"xl3"x4%" By infantry. The name of this set GO
Feldfu.al. b. 120-156 type2B19. long, 6 ft. —26% lbs. is also abbreviated GO
b.. and 90-volt H.T. battery to Fusp al.
Transceiver a. 19.9975- R/T: 2 Same as for Fusprech.a. 4'7"-vertical rod. Intercommunica- This set is practi-
Fusprech.f. 21.4725. tion between cally ident~cal with
h. s?lf-propelled the Fusprech.a. ex-
gans. cept that the Fus-
prech.o. has a re-
CelYer fire control.
Transceiver a. 23.11-24.01
Ftisprech.d. a.
I$w-e 53 (Continued).
< PERFORMANCE CHkACTERISTICS AND SPECIFICATIONS OF TWO-WAY RADIO SETS
I USED IN THE GERMAN ARMY GROUND FORCES—Continued
2
FO
O
NOMEN-
CLATURE
FREQUENCY
RANGE (mcs)
TYPE OF
SIGNAL ('
CIRCUIT AND TUBES
(a) Send
POWER
OUTPUT
POWER SUPPLY AND
CO~SIl~n~TlON
TYPE OF
AERIAL
DIMENSIONS
AND
ALLOCATION REMARKS 1
a. Send RANGE IN (b) Receive (watts) (a) Send WEIGHT
b : Receive MILES (ab) Receive
c. Crystal
Transceiver a. 3-6.67 M.C.W.: lS a. MO-PA. S a. Z-volt storage battery sod or wire. 18"x14 % 3" Used in defensive This is an old Lorenz
S.E.a.Z/24b- b. 3-6.67 R/T. : 5 b. (3,RE084K-,2RE134,- (NC-lo). ' —35 Ibs. positions. commercial set de-
202. 1,4406D or l,RES094.) b. Two go-volt dry batter- signed before the
• ies. war.
Transmitter- a. 3-7.5 C.W.:60 a. 3.RL4.8PlS-l,RV2.4P7OC a. Pedal generator type High rod anten- 39 % Ibs. From artillery di
Receiver b. (2 Bands). R/T :20 b. 8.RV2.4P700. b. 15A and rectifier with nae with coun- vision down to
15. W.S.E.a. storage battery 2.4NC58 terpoise or ve- lower forma-
12.volt storage battery hicle roof an- tions.
in vehicle with convertor tennae.
type 15A and rectifier.
Transmitter- a. 500-600 N.C.W.:60 0.5-l a. 220 volts AC supply or Two broad-band Rack— These sets are
Receiver b. 500-600 R/T : 30 b. 220~volt. SO-cycle, gaso- directional ar- 46"x20~'%2~I used for multi-
DMG4K line driven alternator. r a y s , 1 for Base— channel com-
DMG5K Xsmtter. 1 for 254j"x26"~20" munication
Rec. DMG4K. Cases for antennae over limited
3 rows of di- 66x51~10. Total distances.
poles. weight 900 Ibs.
Transceiver a. 4.5-6.7 a. C.W.: 15 a. MO-PA (2 tubes in paral- 1.5 a. Two nickel iron 2.4-volt 12-ft. vertical rot 17.2"x13M"x7%' Is r e p l a c i n g Very similar to Far.
Form.Fu.G.k. b.3-6.7 R/T : 7 lel) b. storage batteries (type or horizontal —5.5 lbs. Form.Fu.bl. in bl. except for fre-
b. (C.W.M.C.W RI2.4P2-2.RI2.4P2 N.C.SSa) and vibrator- 33-ft. wire. artillery units. quency range and
WT.) b. RF-M-LO-IF-DET-AF power pack SEWg. transmitter con-
6,RV2,4P700 (IF ampli- construction.
fier used for transmitter
modulation). 5
Transmitter a. 42.1~54 C.W. 120 IO-ft. mast with Army corps and GO
120. M.C.W. vertical stub HQ.
R/T aerial on top.
Transceiver a. 37.5-462.2 R/T a. Z.K.D.D.-2.DF25. 1. a. Three 4.5 volt batteries 14 wave pole Not known.
PHf.Z.LJK41 b. b. in parallel. (1.75 meters) (approx.) 33 lbs.
b. One 150-volt H.T. bat- J^ wave pole
teries. (2.40 meters)
.3 amps. @ 4.5 volt.
40 m/a @ 150 volt.
Figure 53 (Continued).
PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS AND SPECIFICATIONS FOR GERMAN GROUND RADIO TRANSMITTERS
2:
NOMEN-
CLATURE
FREQUENCY
RANGE (mcs)
a. Send
TYPES OF
SIGNAL
RANGE IN
CIRCUIT AND
TUBES
(a) Send
POWER
OUTPUT
(watts)
POWER SUPPLY AND
CONSUMPTION
(a) Send
TYPE OF
AERIAL
DIMENSIONS
AND WEIGHT
ALLOCATION REMARKS I
b. Receive
c. Crystal
MILES (b) Receive ( t R&ive
1
Transmitter a. .95-3.15 C.W.: 36 a. MO-PA 5-7 a. Pedal generator. Storage Horizontal wire. Regimental and Divi- A general medium
5WS/2&b-104 R/T : 10 2, RS 241 battery and dynamotor vehicular rod. —52 lbs. sional nets may be f r e q u e n c y low
U.S. A.L., or gasoline mo- Counterpoise employed for vehic- power transmitter.
tor generator. 3.8 Volts 50 ft. long. ular or ground use.
@4 1.2 amps. 300-330 volt
® . 14 amps.
Transmitter a. 27.2-33.3 M.C.W.:4 a. MO-MOD-PA 6.5 a. 12-volt storage battery 6?+ft. rod on 7%"xlZM"x7" Armored vehicles. This is similar to the
10W.S.C. R/T :2K RL12, P.55-RV12, (10 Max.) and dynamo U-10AL 12 move. Mast —22 Ibs. , Generally t a n k J0W.S.b. but for
P.4000-RV 12.P. volts Q 2 amps. 350 volts sections and units. Usually in calibration and fre-
35. @ 100 m/a. gear provided Commander's tank. quency range IOW.
for g r o u n d S.b. f r e q u e n c y
use. range is 23-24.95
imcs.
Transmitter a. 1-3 C.W. a. MO-PA 8 (Can be a. Pedal generator, engine 66.ft. "L" type 20*xl2*xll* Regimental command
8W.S. R/T 2, Rl 12 TI5 reduced generator or 12 volt star- or 33-ft. T 48% lbs. and reconnaissance
t o a age battery and dynamo- type. nets.
power) tor. 12 volts @ 1.25amps.
350 volts @ 75 m/a.
Transmitter a. 27.2-33.3 M.C.W. -3 a. MO-D-MOD-P! 20 a. 12.volt storage battery *$+ft.— cif%-ft. 19"xS~"xlO" Tank formations gen- A similar set is the
2OW.S.C. R/T -2 (PA-Push pull) and dynamotor U-ZOA. whip type. —30 Ibs. erally. 2OW.S.d. but which
5, RL 12 TIS U-2OA2 or U-2OA3. 12 has a frequency
volts @ 2.75 amps. 370 range of 42.1-47.8.
volts @ 130 m/a.
Transmitter a. 25-27 R/T 20 a. 12-volt storage buttery 8-ft. vertical rod By sound ranges in Very similar to ?O.W. o
20W.SM. to dynamotor U-2OA3. via feeder. —35 lhs. artillery units. S.C. except for mod- 3
ulntor control and CO
indicator. CO
Transmitter a. 3-6 C.W.: SO a. MO-D-MOD-P! 25 a. Engine driven or pedal 33-ft. wire on 17~"XL2"X14~~" In infantry divisions
AKS 25. R/T : 15 (P&Push pull). driven generator. 12.5 one 33-ft. —60 lbs. and artillery regi-
5 RL 12 TI5. volts @ 2.5 amps. 350 mast with 4. ments.
volts @ 250 m/a. 33-ft. coun-
terpoise.
Transmitter a. 1.1-3.01 C.W.: 50 a. MO-MOD-PA (2 30 a. 12 volt storage battery Vehicular rod 19"19N"x9~~ Small signal units and Medium powered field
30W.S.O. (3 Bands) R/T :16 tubes in parallel) to dynamotor U-30 b. or roof anten- —42 lbs. signal troops in ar- transmitter. This
(Mod: 2 tubes in nae. Open mored corps. set is identical with
parallel) 2 RL12. wire anten- the 8OW.S.a. as re-
P 35-2, RV 12 nae. gards its circuit.
r
P.2OOO1.RL12TI5.
o
Figure 54.
i PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS AND SPECIFICATIONS FOR GERMAN GROUND RADIO TRANSMITTERS—--continued
I
NOMEN- FREQLIENCY rYPES OF CIRCUIT AND POWER POWER SUPPLY AND TYPE OF DIMENSIONS ALLOCATION REMARKS i
CLATURE RANGE (mcs) SIGNAL TUBES OUTPUT CON$J~~TION AERIAL AND WEIGHT
a. Send <ANGE IN (a) Send (watts) (a) Send
b. keceive MILES (b) Receive (b) Receive
c. Crystal
Transmitter i.. .95-1.68 3.w.: 2.5 30 a. ll-volt storage battery 19"xll%"xl l ~ Armored cars and
30W.S./24b-120 R/T : 10 to dynamotor U-30A. —56 Ibs. other vehicles and
reconnaissance nets
of division troops.
Transmitter a. 3-16.667 Z.W. 36 70 a. 12-volt storage battery Rod, or 25.40.ft. 21M"xllN"xl9%" Used by all reconnais-
7ow.s. to dynamo U-30A. single wire. —78 lbs. sance units within
command nets.
Transmitter a. 1.12-3.0 C.W. 125 i. MO-MOD-P.4 80 a. 12-volt storage battery 3.meter vertical 18~"Xll~~"XlO" In tank division to
8OW.S.o. (3 Bands) R/T 45 (:PA-2. tubes 1” par- (or 10) to dynamo U-SOA. mast vehicu- —48 lbs. tank brigade sets.
allel) MOD 2, lar rod or roof
tubes in parallel aerial.
(3RL 12. P.36.
2 RV 12 PZOOO.)
Transmitter a. 0.2-1.2 C.W.:200 a. MO-MOD-PA 100 a. Storage battery to dyna- 1.33-ft. mast 18’~"xl8"xl0" Administrative con- A commercial design
1oow.s. R/T : 70 RS-237.RS 241-RS (or 10) motor U-100 or U-100A with I-spoke —76 lbs. trol set for large adapted for mili-
237. 12 volts @ 30.8 an&s. antennae(me- areas. Can be used tary use. Provision
Field gasoline dtyision dium fre- in vehicle or as a made for local or
D-C generator. quency) or fixed station. remote control and
12 volts @ 7.3 amps. one 20.ft. sec- picture transmitter.
1000 volts @ 240.300 m/a. tional mast High-low power
with J-spoke switch ior C.W.
umbrella
(higher fre-
que”cY) CO
CO
d
Transmitter a.1.090-4.7 cw. -700 1. MO-B-PA 1.000 a Dynamotor 1’.1000 to (2) Two SO-ft. 5'2".x3'4"x6'Y ’ Army and corps staffs.
MOOW.S.6. (4 Bands) M.C.W.-700 MO and Buffer KS AC line, or M.G. gas en- masts sup- — 1630 lbs. also used for liaison
R/T-150-30( 282. gine set. porting single as ground set to
P.4. RS 329G Key- wire antennae Luftwaffe.
mg Section .‘, RS 83.ft. for me-
282 and 3 RGN dium fre-
2004 Amp. Sec- quency and
tion 2. RS282 and 33.ft. long for
3RE 084 K. hi i g h f r e .
quency.
Figure 54 (Continued)
JO
O
NOMEN- FREQUENCY TYPES OF CIRCUIT AND POWER POWER SUPPLY AND TYPE OF DIMENSIONS ALLOCATION REMARKS
CLATURE RANGE (mcs) SIGNAL TUBES OUTPUT CONSUMPTION AERIAL AND WEIGHT
a. Send RANGE IN (a) Send (watts) (a) Send
b. Receive MILES (b) Receive (b) Receive
c. Crystal
Transmitter a. O.l-66 C.W. : 725 a. As for 1000 W.S. 1.500 a. Dynamotor to V-1500 80.ft. mast with 5'2"x3'3"~6 a/" For communication A d-stage transmitter
~5ooW S.a. (4 Bands) M.C.W.: 725 b. Except that AC line or M.G. gas en- 6- or 12.ft. —1430 Ibs. between corps for installation in
R / T : 18-34C P.A. tubes are gine set. spoke " u r n - ground headquar- ^ motor cars and
RS 239. brellas." ters. and army staff. • fixed stations. It is
* divided into several
‘com*o”e”ts for
speedy removal as-
sembly and replace-
ment.
Transmitter 60W a. 18.75-61.25 C.W. a. MO/D-PA 60 AC single pllase, 50 cycle. 2O"xl2M"xl2K" A special type of
(Jamming) Freq. Mod. (Freq. Mod.) 3. 110 volts. transmitter de-
FE06/40-(EL 2) signed for j amming,
Transmitter 600H. a.(a)1775-17.85 M.C.W. a. MO / D-(Freq. 6,004 a. AC three phase, 50 cycle, 75"x27"~27" This special S.W.
(S.W. Jamming) (b)lS. l-15.35 Freq. Mod. MOD/PA) 2. 180/200 volts. —880 Ibs. jamming apparatu:
(c)11.7-11.9 PE 06/40-PB is made in 6 mod&
(d)9.5-9.7 3/1000 corresponding to
(e) 7. 2-7.3 the 6 models as
(f)6.-6.2 shown in column 2.
Each band has a
variable frequency.
Figure 54 (Contirkued).
m
I MARCH 1945 UNCLASS\FlED TM-E 30-451
ianges (Km
Nomenclature Nom Frequency Carrier Ringing Max. Line 2mm C. and Miles) Field
or of Range Freq;ncies Freq Attenuation. Open 3 mm Cu Cable
DesigOngtion :hannels Kcs. Kcs. quency . b . and Nepern Wire Open Wire (I-K)
T.f. a 1 3.4-8.2 5.8 sOO/20 4.O np. 400 K”l. 520 Km. 25-60 Km.
34.76 db. 250 Miles 325 Miles l&37 Miles
T.f. b 1. 1 3.5-7.5 5.5 500 3.6 np. 400 Km. 500 Ktn. 25-50 Km.
31.28 db. 250 Miles 325 Miles 16-31 Miles
T.f. b 2. 1 9.0-13.0 11.0 500 3.6 np. 320 Km. 400 Km. 15-30 Km.
31.28 db. 200 Miles 250 Miles 9-19 Miles
T.f. b 3. 1 16.5-20.5 18.5 500 3.6 np. 220 Km. 280 Km.
31.28 db. 137 Miles 175 Miles
T.f. b 4. 1 22.0-26.0 24.0 500 3.6 np. 160 Km. 200 Km.
31.28 db. 100 Miles 12.5 Miles
E. 2. 1 3.4-8.2 5.8 SOO/ZO 2.0 np. 230 Km. 290 Km. l(t30 Km.
17.38 db. 144 Miles 181 Miles 6-19 Miles
E. 3. 1 3.7-10.0 6.4; 10.3. 500 3.75 np 350 Km. 4.50 Km. 18-45 Km.
32.49 db. 219 Miles 281 Miles 11-28 Miles
T. 1. 3 6.6-28.2 6.3; 9.4; 12.9 500/40 4.0 np. 270 Km. 350 Km.
20.7; 24.4;28.5 34.76db. 169 Miles 219 Miles
T. 3 3 8.8-30.4 7.7: 10.9; 14.3 500/20 4.0 np. 270 Km. 350 Km.
19.8; 23.7; 27.7 34.76db. 169 Miles 219 Miles
The German carrier equipment, both commercial and army is listed above. It is similar to the America” in design, channel frequencies, and “se
Diagrams (not shown here) authenticate this, and show that the carrier practice in line and repeater set “p are practically identical.
Within the German army the most common sets for field “se are the Tragerfrequensgmat a (Tf.0.) and the Tragerfrequemgemt b (T.f.6). including
bl. b2, b3, and b4. Other sets in “se by the Germans are: Mehrfach (MEK) MC. MK, Tl, T3, El, EZ, and E3; the MG and MEK carrier Systems
are apparently more recent additions.
The "L" and "U" carrier systems for cable. are used by the German PO. The "L" system is installed on lightly loaded cable, and the "U" oc
- non-loaded cable. The German broadcasting carrier system is the Tragerfrequenzgnat Rundfunk (TfR’-—"Carries Broadcasting,"
Differentiation is made with multiple Tf (carrier) systems between single channel systems (transmission channels for EW a”d WE traffic lie directly
next to one another, as in the case of Sets T.f.a. and T.f.h.) and UOUP systems (the channels for each carrier direction are adjacent and the>
form therefore, two separate groups. e.g. sets MEDK and MG).
VIII—52
I MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451
3anges (Kn1.
Nomenclature No. Frequency Carrier Ringing Max. Line 2mm C. and Miles) Field
or No. Range Frequencies Fre- Attenuation, ten 3 mm Cu Cable
Designation Channels Kcs. Kc. quency db. and Nepers Wire Open Wire (FFK)
MG 15. 48-156 "> 00/20 4.0 np. 100 Km.
34.76db. 62 Miles
M 1 3 5.8-38.4
M 2 (M3) 4 5.2-39.7
M 4 (M5) 3 12.2-29.7
M 6 (M7) 4 8.7-43.7 •
L-(Kabel-System) 1 3.3-5.8 6
DRP
U-(Kabelsystem) 12 12.3-60.0
DRP
Figure 55 (Co&ued).
VIII—53
PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS AND SPECIFICATIONS FOR GERMAN INTERCEPT,
GENERAL PURPOSE, AND SPECIAL PURPOSE RADIO RECEIVERS
REMARKS
I
NOMEN- FREQUENCY TYPES CIRCUIT AND TUBES POWER SUPPLY AND TYPE OF DIMENSIONS ALLOCATION
CLATURE RANGE (mcs)
a. Send
d. Receive
OF
SIGNAL
(a) Send
(b) Receive
CONSUMPTION
(a) Send
(b) Receive
AERIAL AND
WEIGHT 1
c. Crystal
Receiver b. 3.0-25.8 C.W. b. 2,tiF- M-LO-3, b. 2-v& storage battery and 18"xl4"xlO» Intercept service. Moni- It is very difficult to service.
Fu.HE.c. (4 bands) M.C.W. IF-DET-OBFO-AF 9Qvolt H.T. dry battery. —56 lbs. toring for security. Is one of a series of four
R/T 10. RV 2P800 2-volts @ 1.7 amps. intercept receivers.
90-volts @ 12 m/a.
Receiver b. .9&10.2 C.W. b. ZRF-M-LOJ, b. Z-volt storage battery and 27"xlOM*Jtl3M" For stationary or semi-
K.w.E.a. R/T 1F- D ET-BFO-AVC-AF. 90-&t H.T. dry battery, or —91 lbs. mobile services.
11, RV 2PBCtO Converter unit EU.dt or main All arms.
unit NA6.
Receiver b. 42-48 M.C.W. b. RF-FC-IF-DET-AF. b. 2.4-volt storage battery for 6^-ft. vertical rod 14*xl2K"x6H* The associated sender is the
UKw.E.f. R/T 5. RV2-4P700 internal H.T. vibrator. when used as pack —17 lbs. 20 W.S.d. When used alone
set. the aerial base and rod are
mounted on top of the case.
Receker b. .096-7.095 C.W. b. 2. RF-DET-AF. b. 2-volt storage battery and 9H"xl4M"x8M" General purpose receiver.
Term Eb. (8 bands) M.C.W. 4, RV 2P800 9Cwolt H.T. battery, or 12- —29 lbs.
R/T volt storage battery and vi-
brator unit E.W.c.
2-v&s @ 0.75 amps.
12-volts @ 1 amp.
Receiver b. .075-3.333 C.W. b. RF-M-LO-IF-DET-AF. b. 4.8~volt storage battery; four Open wire and coun- 18^*xl5K"x9*' Intercept receiver. This set is an old design and
L.M.W. (5 bands) M.C.W. (RF-M-IF-RF?? 094) 30-volt or 9cl-volt plus one 30- terpoise. —44 lbs. is being replaced by inter-
H.E./24b- R/T (LO-DET-AF RE 084K) volt H.T. batteries. cept receivers Fu.H.E.a.
316 4.8~volt @ .45 amps. and b.
100 volt @ 18 m/a.
Receiver b. 25 60 C.W. b. 2. RF-M-LO-3. b. 2.volt storage battery and 15-ft. open wire on 18"xl4"xl0" Intercept receiver for This receiver is similar in
Fu.H.E.d. (4 bands) M.C.W. 1F-DET-BFO- 90-&t H.T. dry battery. sectional masts —56 lbs. U.H.F. signals. every respect to the Fu.H.-
R/T 2,AF All RV2 P800 (2.4volt storage battery may and counterpoise. E.c. except in frequency
be used after internal adjust- range and number of
ment to set.) tubes.
Receiver b. .15-15.5 M.C.W. b. FC-2,IF-DET/AF- b. AC or DC mains supply 9Ch For broadcast reception. Can be used as a microphone
WR1P. R/T Driver Class 'B' Output 250. Volts (voltage need not —57 lbs. With the aid of a micro- amplifier.
DCH 25-2,DF25-DAC25- be known), or two . dry phone it can be used for
DC25-DDD25 DF26 cells ENL DIN VDE. 1210 oral transmission of or-
plus 9o-volt A.T. battery ders.
from mains 0.25 amps.
Receiver b. 27.2-33.3 M.C.W. b. RF-M-LO-I. IF-DET-AF 1. 12-volt storage battery to 634-ft. vertical rod. 12H"x8"x7" Communication through-
UKW.E.e. R/T 7 RV 12 P4000. dynamotor EUa2. —22 lbs. out a tank battalion.
Figure 56.
2:
PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS AND SPECIFICATIONS FOR GERMAN INTERCEPT,
o
GENERAL PURPOSE, AND SPECIAL PURPOSE RADIO RECEIVERS—Continued
I
NOMEN- FREQUENCY TYPES CIRCUIT AND TUBES POWER SUPPLY AND TYPE OF DIMENSIONS ALLOCATION REMARKS
CLATURE RANGE (mcs) OF (a) Send CONSUMPTION AERIAL AND
a. Send SIGNAL (b) Receive (a) Send WEIGHT
b. Receive (b) Receive
C. Crystal
Receiver b. .835-3 C.W. b. RF-M-LO-Z, IF-BFO/ b. la-volt storage battery tc Open wire or roof lZ%"x8"r7” Communication receivel
M.W.E.c. M.C.W. Calibrator DET-AF (2 dynamotor EUa.1. 2. or 3. aerial. 24 lbs. for medium waveband
R/T tubes in push pull) 12-volts 0 4 5 amperes.
ALL RV12 P200
Receiver b. .5-25 C.W. b. 1 9-tuhe superhetrodyne. b. As for Fu.H.E.c. 17"X1.3~~"XlO Intercept services. Very similar to Fu.H.E.c.
Fv.H.E.u. (5 bands) M.C.W. —56 lbs. but for frequency range
R/T and circuit.
Receiver b. .072-1.525 C.W. b. RF-M-LO-Z, > b. Z-volt storage battery and 27"x1.3W"xlO~ Long range communica. iimilar in construction to
L.W.E.e. (5 bands) R/T IF-DET-BFO-AF 90-volt dry H.T. battery 01 —87 lbs. tion at army and com- K.W.E.a. except that the
8, RV2 P 800 convertor unit E.U.O, or mand hq. K.W.E.a.has fewer stages
. mains unit NA 6. / and no A.V.C.
Receiver b. .1-6.7 C.W. b. RF-REG DET-2.AF b. 4.8~volt nickel-iron storage Lo&g wire or rod. 18"x14"~8%" General purpose receiver.
Spez.445b. R/T 4, REO 74 battery and 90-volt H.T. dry —55 lbs.
battery.
Receiver b. 42.1-47.8 M.C.W. b. RF-M-LO-J. b. Dynamotor E.U.a.2 or 130. 6$+ft. rod connected lS~"xlO"x8" By signal and armored Jery accessible for servicing.
UKW.E.d R/T IF-2nd DET-AVC-AF vo!t dry H.T. batteries and via feeder. —19 Ibs. troops for ground-air
t. 9 RV12 P2000 l&volt storage battery. cooperatiop
Receiver b. 23-24.95 M.C.W. b. RF-M-LO-2, IF-DET-AF b. 12.volt storage battery to 6%ft. rod. 1LZ%“"x8"x6~" -4rmored troops in cars Jery similar to the U.KM’.-
UKW.E.h. R/T 7, RV12 P4000 dynamotor E.U.a. 1. 2, or 3. 22% Ibs. and assault guns. e. except for frequency
model G. range.
Receiver D / F b. .075-3.333 C.W. b. RF-M-LO-IF-DET-BFO- b. 4.8~volt storage battery (NC- Goniometer loops, !l"x14~"x8~" Used by subsection of in- The circuit is the same as the-
Ground (5 bands) M.C.W. AF 2,RES094,-RE084K- IO); four 30-volt or one go- about 1 square mr- —51 lbs. tercept company. intercept receiver L. Mw.
L.M.W.P./ R/T RES094,-2,RE084K volt PIUS one 30-volt H.T. ter each. and aux- HE/Z46-316.
240-315. respectively. dry battery. iliary aerial (l-me-
42 %volts @I .45 amps. ter rod or 3-meter
100~volts 0 18 m/a. horizontal wire).
Receiver b. 24.6 R/T b. FC-IF-IF,AVC, b. Dynamotor with ll-volt stor- 4-ft. flexible rod. 7.1'xlO.6"x3.1" For radio controlled tank
(Radio c. Crystal DET-AF-AF age battery. In conjunction with an
Controlled ECH 11-EF 13-EBF 11-2, audio filler unit .which
Tank) Set EF12. is not listed here.
B4Fu.E6.
I
01
Figure 56 (Continued).
2
TO
Transmitter- a. .3-.6 and C.W. a. 3.RS31-3.R2074 100 (High) a. Air driven generator 30th fixed and trailing Bomber aircraft; found Similar sets Fu.G3 A.
Receiver b. 3 - 6 M.C.W. & l.R.2134. 20(Low) (Low) in some but not all and Fu.G3 A U.
FU.G3. R/T b . T w o 90-volt b a t t e r - specimens of the fol- Both the above sets are
(Airborne) ies. one 4 v o l t Edison lowing types of air- still in use in transport
craft: Ju 52, FW 58, aircraft, flying boats.
HE 114, DO 11, 13, and second-line obso-
& 17 E & F; AR 66, lescent aircraft gener-
A R 96, W 33 and 34. ally.
Transmitter- a. 2.5-3.75 a. C.W./RT -15 a. 2. REN 904,- 20 a. Dynamotor U44/24. + e d antennae in fight- a. 14"x9"x8" In fighter aircraft and Was replaced by Fu.
Receiver b. b. M.C.W. R/T 2. RENS 1664 b. er aircraft: In dive —20 lbs. dive bombers. Prior G16Z. Is still used.
Fu.G7, b. 5, RENS 1264. bombers a trailing b. 14"x9"x8" to 1943,7A was fitted however, in twin seat-
7a, 76. antennae manually —25 lbs. in ME 109, ME 109 er aircraft particular-
(Airborne) reeled. F,FW 190. It is still ly the JU 87.
/ fitted in JU 87 and
HS 129.
Transmitter- a. S.W. 3-6: a. (L.W:C.W.) a. 9, RS 242 20 (S.W.) a. Dynamotor (LJ5) Common T and R. Air-to-air-to ground Intended originally for
1
Receiver L.W. (SW:CW.R/T) b. 4, NF 2 and 40 (L.W.) b. Dynamotor (U6) Fixed or trailing an- (intercommunica- bomber aircraft but
Fu.Gt. b. .3-.6 b. (C.W.M.C.W., 3NF3 tennae may be used. tion). was superseded by
(Airborne) R/T) Fu.GlO. o
Transmitter- a. As for a. C.W.-R/T. a. 6, RL 12P35-25. 40 (SW.) a. Dynamotor U-lo/S Both fixed and trailing. a. 9"x85i"x8" Current equipment for 5—
Receiver Fu.Gt 300-500 RV12 P2000 70 (L.W.) b. Dynamotor U-lo/E Aerial tuning units. —16K lbs. all first line multiple
CO
CO
FaGlO. b. b. b. AAAG-2 and AAAG- b. 7Ji"x8M"x8" engine aircraft.
(Airborne) 3 are provided. —16 lbs.
Transmitter- a. 38-42.5 a. R/T. 20-100 a. 2. RL12P35- 10 a. Dynamotor U-17 ‘ixed single wire 6'11” a. 15"x8~"~8" All bombers. Air-to-air Is fitted in large aircraft
Receiver b. b. ll,RVlZ PZOOO b. long —26:/z lbs. and ground liaison. in addition to the
Fu.Gl6. 20 ground level b. Fu.GlO. The design
(Airborne) 100 in the air was taken from the
Fu.G17.
Figure 3.
m
9
TO
O
PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS AND SPECIFICATIONS OF TWO-WAY RADIOS AND
EMERGENCY TRANSMITTERS USED IN GERMAN AIRCRAFT—Continued
NOMEN- FRE- TYPES OF CIRCUIT AND POWER POWER SUPPLY TYPE OF DIMENSIONS ALLOCATION REMARKS
CLATURE QUENCY SIGNAL TUBES OUTPUT AND AERIAL AND
RANGE (mcs) RANGE IN (a) Send (watts) CONSUMPTION WEIGHT
a. Send MILES (b) Receive (a) Send a. Send
b. Receive (b) Receive b. Receive
c. Crystal
Transmitter- a. a. M.C.W. a. 2, RL 12P35 As above a. Dynamotor U-17 Fixed single wire 6'11" a. 15"x8J4"x8" Used in all single seater Also' incorporates D / F
Receiver b. As for b. R / T . 1. 2, R L 1 2 P 3 5 M. long. Matching units lighters. homing apparatus.
Fu.G16 Fu.G16 20 ground level 9, RV 12PZOOO in AAG16-2 and AAG-
Z,ZE. 100 in the air navigational aid 16-3 permit use of
(Airborne) equipment. leading edge of the
tail fin as antennae
8" single loop is used
for D / F homing.
Transmitter- a. 42.1-47.9 a. M.C.W. a. 2 RL 12P35,- As above a. Dynamotor U-17 Vertical rod about 39" In twin seater, close Fu.Gl7 was the original
Receiver a. b. R/T. 13.RV12 P2000 M. long terminating in supporting aircraft. design from which
Fu.G17 30 at ground level T. matching unit Air-to-air-to ground Fu.Gl6 was copied..
17B and Z. 185 in the air AAG7. liaison. Fu.G 72 is used alter-
(Airborne) natively with D / F
homing apparatus.
Transmitter- a. .6-1.667 a. C.W. a. 3, RS-31G- 20-100 a. Air driven generator Fixed. For bombers.
Receiver a. a. . C.W. 3.R2074- b. Batteries
Fu.Gl and R/T. b. 1 R 2134
G2.
(Airborne)
o
Transmitter- As for Fu.G7 Interrogation and com-
Receiver mand. Air-to-air-to CO
Fu.G6, 6A ground. CO
(Airborne)
Transmitter- a. 5.3-10 a. R / T . a. 2, RL 12P35-11 10 a. Dynamotor U-17 Single wire 6 ' H " long. Command liaison set. m
Receiver a. b. M.C.W.-R/T. RL 12P35-11 "b. o
Fu.GlO K-l b.
(Airborne)
Figure 57 (Continued).
I
I PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS AND SPECIFICATIONS OF TWO-WAY RADIOS AND
EMERGENCY TRANSMITTERS USED IN GERMAN AIRCRAFT—Continued
NOMEN- FRE TYPES OF CIRCUIT AND POWER POWER SUPPLY TYPE OF 1IMENSIONS ALLOCATION REMARKS
CLATURE QUENCY SIGNAL TUBES OUTPUT AND AERIAL AND
XANGE (mcs) RANGE IN (a) Send (watts) CONSUMPTION WEIGHT
a. Send MILES (b) Receive (a) Send a. Send
b : Receive (b) Receive b. Receive
c. Crystal
Transmitter- a. 152.2-161 a. L550 440 1. Dynamotor 14’ Stub. common t< 14%8"x8”
Receiver b. 123-128 b. 6. RV12P2000.- b. Trans.-Receiver. —33 Ibs.
Fu.GZ.5 a. 2,LDl. (Antennae tuning
unit AAG25a).
Transmitter a. 0.5. C.W.: a. ALSN-REt3A. 8 a. Hand generator Steel antennae wire 23! LL”XLO”X7~" Emergency transmitte3ar 3arried loose in aircraft.
NS2. M.C.W.: feet long with groun< —15 lbs. for dinghy use. Forerunner of N.S.I.
("Not- 250 at sea. wire and sende
sender") 120 overland raised by box kite o
(2~ 26) hydrogen filled bal
loon. 5
CO
Transmitter a. 53.5-61.C C.W. at 200 feet to a. 2, LS 1 and LS2 1-2 a. 11 midget storage Strip of copper plats 6M'x6Ji'x3' Emergency transmitter Replaces the N.S.Z. CO
' NS4. air craft 9. at 1000 cells—3 used in par- steel tape 3'5’ h i —3% lbs. for dinghy use. Standard equipment
("Not- feet is 14. 40,000 allel for 2-volt fila- and 1' in diamete on all twin engine and
sender") feet 40. ment, 8 used in series tapering to 3/16’ a larger aircraft.
parallel for S-volt end.
vibrator supply.
Figure 57 (Continued).
rn
•pa
O
PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS AND SPECIFICATIONS OF RADIO EQUIPMENT INSTALLED IN GERMAN
AIRCRAFT FOR DIRECTION FINDING, BLIND LANDING, BLIND BOMBING AND HEIGHT FINDING
NOMEN- FREQUENCY TYPE OF CIRCUIT AND TUBES POWER POWER SUPPLY TYPE OF DIMENSIONS ALLOCATION REMARKS
CLATURE RANGE (mcs) SIGNAL (a) Send OUTPUT & CONSUMPTION AERIAL A L WEIGHT
a. Send RANGE IN (b) Receive (watts (a) Send
b. Receive MILES (bj Receive
c. Crystal
D/F Receiver b.0.25-0.4 C.W. b. 8 Tube superhetrodyne b. Dynamotor U-8 Fixed loop 13" long b. ll"x9~"x6" Homing receiver
Peil: 4. ' M.C.W. 8 RV 12 P200 and aircraft bat- and 3%" in diam- —22% Ibs. used in single
R:T 150 tery. eter, carries 13 seater fighters
(approx.) turns of Lit2 wire prior to intro-
crosswound in d u c t i o n of
series. FUG 16Z.
D/F Receiver b. .165-1 C.W. b. 6 Tube superhetrodyne b. Dynamotor U-8 Oval loop with pow- 24"xlO"x8" D/F and homing A pre-war commercial set.
Petl: 5. M.C.W. 6NF2 and , aircraft bat- der Ironb. cone: —24 lbs. receiver in twin
R/T 250 tery. 8 turns of Litz e n g i n e and
i wire connected in larger aircraft
series. for above pur-
pose.
D/F Receiver b. .15-1.2 C.W. b. 6 Tube superhetrodyne b. Dynamotor U-l1.4 Oval loop: sense b. 9%“xSx"s iI , [Jsed in bombers. One of the few German
Peil: 6 M.C.W. 6 RV 12 P2000 antenna is metal —20 Ibs. May be used sets that uses crystals.
R/T paint on loop as a separate
housing. r e c e i v e r in
FUG IO.
D/F Receiver b. .15-1.2 C.W.
M.C.W.
b. Dynamotor U-11.4 Same as abov;. o
Peil: 7.
R/T ii
CO
Savigation b. 28.5-35 R./T 250 b. 2NF2 TRF b. Dynamotor U-8 39.ft. vertical rod. Carried loose in aircraft CO
Receiver for blind landings.
FU 1 EB1.
Navigation b. 30-33.3 3. 7 Tube superhet: b. Dynamotor U-8 39.ft. vertical rod. For blind landings.
Receiver 7RV12 P4000
FU m.
Fi&re 58.
I w
o
I-:, <
I
PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS AND SPECIFICATIONS OF RADIO EQUIPMENT INSTALLED IN GERMAN
2
U1
AIRCRAFT FOR DIRECTION FINDING, BLIND LANDING, BLIND BOMBING AND HEIGHT FINDING—continued
NOMEN- FREQUENCY TYPE OF CIRCUIT AND TUBES POWER POWER SUPPLY TYPE OF DIMENSIONS ALLOCATION REMARKS
CLATURE RANGE (mcs) SIGNAL (a) Send OUTPUT & CONSUMPTION AERIAL AND WEIGHT
a. Send RANGE IN (b) Receive (watts) (a) Send
b. Receive MILES (b) Receive
c. Crystal
Navigation b. 38 b. 5NF 2 TRF 1. Dynamotor U-8 Dipole under fusel- For blind landings.
Receiver age.
FU 2 EBl2.
x ceriit b. 66.5-75 Visual >. 7 Tube superhetrodyne , . Dynamotor Two vertical yi Bomber aircraft. A special blind bombing
(2 on the same lot-Dash left- 20 RV12 P4000 wave rods in device operating on three
range) right beams. streamlined hous- main beams: one for
ing. pilot and two for observ-
ers. (Believed to be ob-
solete.)
YGeriit a. M.C.W. k. 2 RL P35.-13,RV12 10 L. Dynamotor U-17 Vertical rod above Bomber aircraft. A later development than
(with b. 42.1-47.9 R/T b. P4000 and retractable the X-Ger&t employing
FUG f7.E and R/T 2.50 antennae below One instead of three
FUG 28A. fuselage. beams.
Radio-Altimeter a. 351-389 F.M.C.W. a. 1. LD 2.1. RV 12 P2001 a. Dynamotor U-101 Two separate % Multi-engined
FUGIOI-RMA b. (Operating 0 150 meters b. 1. LVS-6. RV12 P2001 b. wave dipoles hor- aircraft for
Frequency) 100-1500 meters izontally polar- height finding.
370 ized : one each for
transmitter and
receiver. CO
-
Radio Altimeters a. 370 An improvement on FUG
FUG 103. 3. 101 and 101 A. Does not
interfere with other wire-
less equipment on board.
figure 58 (C‘oi~liud).
GERMAN CABLES
D-C Resist- Attenuation
1
Estimated Weight Tensile Insulation ance Single at
Description Conductor Strands Insulation Outside Talking (Lbs. per Strength sulation Conductor 1,000 CPS.
Material Diameter 1,000 Feet)
Range Talking(Mls.) (Lbs.) Resistance per 1,000 db. per
Feet Mile
•o
‘Two-conductor. cable with black rubber 0.024-inch solid copper. Rubber type. 0.115-inch Dry. 16.3; 20.5 275 High. 25.9 Dry, 1.84;
jacket applied over one white and one (single- wet, 10.1. wet, 2.97.
black rubber-insulated conductor. conductor) .
Twisted-pair field wire, each conductor of 6, 0.013-inch steel; Rubber type. 0.128-inch. LO.3 (Zwire 12.9 400 Very high. 12.9 2.91
which has a black braid over a white 2, 0.013-inch co$per; metallic
rubber insulation. 1, O.Ml-inch copper. circuit).
Single-conductor field wire with a stiff red 8, O.OlS-inch steel; Polyvinyl, 0.135-inch. 400 Very high. 11.6
synthetic insulation over 8 steel and 1 1, 0.028-inch copper. Chloride
copper strands. type.
Single-conductor ii&Id wire with a wax- 8, 0.015-inch steel; Rubber type. 0.128-inch. 3.5 (Z-wire 11.8 400 Very high. 16.9 3.53
impregnated cotton braid over a black 1, 0.028-inch copper. metallic
rubber insulation. The conductor con- circuit).
sisting of 8 steel, and 1 copper, strands.
Single-conductor field wire with a stiff red 8, 0.015-inch steel; Polyvinyl, 0.130-inch. I.9 (Zwire 9.2 High. 51.4 6.12
synthetic insulation and a conductor con- 1, 0.02%inch alum- Chloride metallic
sisting of 8 steel and 1 aluminum strands. inum. type. circuit).
Single-conductor assault wire with a yellow 7, 0.016-inch alum- Polyvinyl, 0.055-inch. 2.5 83.5
synthetic insulation over a conductor con- Chloride
sisting of 7 aluminum strands. type.
Single-conductor assault wire with a cotton 6, 0.00%inch steel; Cellophane 0.425inch. >ry, 25.6; 127 510 3.52 Dry, 1.17;
braid over a blue cellophane insulation. 1, O.OlO-inch copper. ppe wet, 25.6 wet, 1.17.
The conductor has 6 steel and 1 copper material. (not
strands. loaded).
Voice
frequency.
Long range field cable having four ru!)ber- 19, 0.0125-inch copper. :ubber type
insulated conductors spirally twisted about insulation
a rubber-covered synthetic core. Over this and jacket.
quad is placed a tinsel shielding tape and
a black rubber jacket.
IO&conductor cable composed’ of 12 tinned 12 copper 0.875-inch. 525
copper strands. Insulation of cotton cov-
ered with impregnated cotton tape and
rubber outer jacket.
I
Figure 59.
UNCLASSIFIED
I MARCH 1945 TM-E 30-451
DIMENSIONS
NOMENCLATURE AND WEIGHT DESCRIPTION REMARKS
W
Wavemeter Fremes 0. yj"x14 O"-46 lbs. Frequency range: —30 kcs —30 mcs in 20 switched bands. The outstanding feature in the
Facilities: will emit modulated or unmodulated signal. construction of the wave-
(Loose or tight coupling to receiver.) meter is the massive turret
Circuit as receiver: RF-oscillating detector—2AF RES for waveband switching,
094. RE134W: RE. 134 which takes up most of the
Circuit as sender: oscillator—anode modulator. space inside the case.
Power supply: 4-volt storage battery. 3-volt grid bias,
ISO-volt H.T. batteries.
Frequency Tester —29 lbs. Frequency range —120 —156 me (26 fixed frequencies). For frequency calibration of
F. firuf. dl. Power supply: storage battery 2 N/9 and one 90-volt fixed sets within its range.
H.T. Battery.
Field Test Set 18 6.3"x4.7%2.9”—2% Ibs. Afieldtest set similar to the U. S. army's EE65. A general purpose field Test
(Das Feldmesskaslchen) Set.
Attenuation Meter.—39 13Ji"xlO)i'i9K"— Is capable of measuring the amplification (in nepers) of 2 Used in conjunction with tele-
(Dam~fungsmesser and 4 wire repeaters and the attenuation at 300 cycles phone repeaters in testing
39) over any type of line. Can measure crosstalk attenua- and adjusting input and
tion between the lines. output levels.
Is powered with 90-volt H.T. battery and a 2-volt 2B19
storage battery.
German Tube Checker 16»xl5»x9'—30 lbs. Will test all European and a small number of American
(RohrcnPruf.wat tubes. It may be used as a milliammeter, ohmeter, and
RPG4) capacity meter. Can only be used for DC voltages and
currents.
German Exploring Coil This apparatus can be used to locate grounds, shorts,
crosses and wet spo^s in cables. (However, it will not
locate "opens" in cable pairs.)
German Frequency —25 lbs. Crystal controlled oscillator fundamental output fre- Afieldpack servicing and cali-
Test Set F. quency of 26 mcs. bration unit for the Fddfu.
prufg. f. Power supply: 2.4-volt storage battery for vibrator, one b and un
tube RL2 4T1.
Consumption: 2.42 @ 6 amperes.
Figure 60.
VIII—62
UNCLASSIFIED
I MARCH 1945 TM-E 30-451
Section V. ENGINEER EQUIPMENT safety fuze and be initiated by it. The initiator of
the cap consists of lead azide and lead styphnate.
1. Instruments
(2) Characteristics.
a. GENERAL. In general the instruments usrd
Length 2.36 inches.
in the field by the engineers of the German Diameter ........., 028 inch.
Army are identical with our own, particularly Packing ..........15 in wooden box.
their transits, theodolites, and surveyor's levels.
The main differences occur in compasses and gap- (3) Eakelite Holder (Ziinderhiilter). This
measuring instruments. holder serves the double purpose of connecting
b. GERMAN FIELD COMPASS (Marschkompass). the cap and fuze and permitting the cap to be
(1) Description. The German field compass is screwed into the charge. It consists of a tube
a black, pocket-sized instrument. The housing which covers the junction of the cap and fuze,
is of aluminum-like metal. A brass outer ring and is enclosed in a bakelite cover. At one end
is attached with a carrying handle. A hinged, of this cover is an externally threaded sleeve;
linear, centimeter scale unfolds from the base of the other end is covered by a bakelite cap with
the compass housing. The letters MKZ(KZ) a central hole for passage of the fuze.
are marked on the body of the compass. (4) Blasting Cap Igniter Sef (Sprengkapsel-
(2) Operation. The swinging of the magnetic ziinder). This is a prepared set with a cap in
needle can be stopped by pressing the damper a bakelite holder, with a 3- to 6-foot safety fuze
button. When the destination is visible, open attached, and a safety fuze igniter. This pro-
the cover and raise the mirror half way, so the vides a convenient short-delay demolition igniter.
magnetic needle can be seen clearly. Sight the b. SAFETY FUZE (Zeitziindschnur). The black
point through the rear V sight and the front powder train of this fuze is enclosed in strands
aperture at the base of the mirror. Hold steady of jute-like fibre and white cotton-like fibre al-
until the point is in line with the eye, then with ternately, the whole being covered with a bitumin-
the free hand turn the azimuth circle until the ous paint, over which goes the black rubber outer
magnetic needle falls on the magnetic declination covering. This safety fuze burns in air or under
mark. Read the azimuth from the dial. The water at the rate of approximately 2 feet a minute.
German compass is numbered counter-clockwise, It can be initiated in the same way as U. S. and
and the graduations are in mils. To simplify British safety fuzes.
compass reading, the dial has been abbreviated c. ELECTRIC BLASTING CAPS. (1) Gliihziinder
so the last two zeros have been omitted; thus, 28. This consists of a cap, with twin leads of
6,000 mils is shown as 60. The markings for copper or iron, and a wire bridge. The whole
directions are the. same as our own, with the fits into a standard bakelite cap holder. The cop-
exception of East which is marked " 0 " for per leads have a resistance of 2 ohms; iron, 3
Ost. The adjustments for magnetic declination ohms.
are marked directly on the azimuth dial; two (2) Delay Electric Blasting Cap (Gliihztinder
luminous dots indicate 150 mils. East and’ West. mnit Verzb’gerung). These electric caps, which
c. N E W TYPE FIELD COMPASS (Marschkom- fire with a delay of 2, 4, 6, 8, or 10 seconds
pass "A"). It is now known that a new type after electrical initiation, are similar to ordinary
compass is in use in the German Army. This electric caps except that there is a pyrotechnic
compass is numbered clockwise in mils. delay pellet between the wire bridge and the
d. GAP-MEASURING INSTRUMENT. This is a cap proper. These caps have the number of
simple device to measure the width of streams seconds delay marked on a disc attached to the
and similar gaps. It is designed on the prin- leads.
ciple of similar right-angled triangles and con- (3) Spark Gap Electric Blasting Cap (Spalt-
sists of two parts: a fixed mirror and a measur- ziinder). In these caps, the wire bridge has been
ing mirror. replaced by a spark gap.
d. INSTANTANEOUS FUZE (Knallziindschur).
2. German Demolition Equipment This fuze has a soft, pliable, green, outer covering
a. SAFETY F U Z E BLASTING CAP AND ACCES- with a waterproof varnish finish, surrounding an
SORIES (Sprengkapsel No. 8). (1) Description. explosive core. It will detonate under water,
This blasting cap is similar to the U. S. and initiated by a cap, but the ends must be water-
British types. It is designed to fit over the proofed.
Vlll—63
UNCLASSIFIED
I MARCH 1945 TM-E 30-451
transport, this charge is made iri two parts. The Height of cavity ..4 ill&Y
lower part, which is provided with a separate M’eight of charge 110 ~~~untls.
Filling ..........‘l -ST.
carrying handle, contains a hemispherical cavity.
The upper part contains both an explosive charge n. HOLLOW RING CTIARGF.S (Hohlringladitng).
and a standard cap socket. This charge is part (1) Dc.~cript,olf. ‘I‘llVsV charge,s, used princi-
of the equipment of airborne troops. pally for the clcstt-uctiotl of gun barrels, contain
T S T , in a thin annular nletal casing which is
(2) Characteristics.
slipped over the gun l~~i-r~al x1(1 iircd by a cap.
Outside diameter 20 inches.
There is an annular, hollow space of semi-cir-
Diameter of cavity 8 inches.
u&r cross swtion on the inside of the ring, de-
signed to iiicr<2se the cutting effect. The frag-
mcntation effect of these charges is negligible,
I\-hi& makes then1 sui~:J~lc for cse by raiding
parties and l~atl-ols.
( 2 ) Clfnl-ncf~~i~isfics.
Hollow riilg cliargc iijr ;111lit;u1k and machine-
gun Im-rcls :
Weight 2 pounds 11 ounces.
Outsick dinmrtcr .F 1 in!.llry.
Inside diameter \'l inches.
Width ...............i.lil lcllcs.
VIII—66
UNCLASSIt\tU
I MARCH 1945 TM-E 30-451
VIII—67
1 MARCH 1945
UNCLASSlFlED TM-E 30-451
(5) Field Exploder 1026. This exploder testing the small Exploder I1 Mn. I: w part of the
weighs 14.5 pounds and is packed in a leather portable Demolition Kit 1’140.
Cast. The c~s~)lotl~~r is of the low tension tlyw t. MAONHTJC DEMOLITION ( IIAI«;E ANTITANK
(hot wire as opposed to spark) with an internal (Panccrluimlntinc). This fliar^c is spherical
resistance of 45 ohms. Maximum resistance and completely covered by piv-M d cardboard. 1 his
through ~vhich it \I-ill fi~-(, is 2.5.5 011111~. cardboard casing, held in sli;ipe by two metal
q. PORTABLE DKMOLITIOX KIT 1940. This bands, extends 4 inches bel"\v the base ot the
is a pack containing everything needed to fire explosive. I'rimarilv designed as a demolition
charges electrically. It weighs 51 pounds, and charge, it also can be used against tanks. The
can I)e carried by a handle or by shoulder straps explosive filler is 1 pound 12 ounces of cyclonite
on the back. It contains a small exploder (1940) and TXT. The booster consists of two pellets of
and neon test tul,c~, a coiitiiluit\~ tester (g-da- cyclonite and wax in which there is a lilting for a
nometer) (1926). 40 electric detonators, two standard igniter ol the />'/ type.
sl~ools of sin,q]r cable and two tlrullls of tloul,le
cable, metal sleeve for crimping over electrical
joints, a notched pocket knife, crimpers, and in-
sdating tap’.
r. CONTIXITTY TKST (GALVANOMETER) 1926.
This tester not only tests continuity but also
measures resistance ol circuits and detonators.
It contains an ohmeter. resistance, and battery
(1.5 vdt5). The battery is housed in a cylinder
4.7 inch high with the ohmeter 01, top. Ad-
justing scrC’IVS for setting the olm~3cr needle to
zero and infinity are midway between the testing
tcrmin;k A Iuilt-iii resistanw ]m)tvcts ci~]~s
from bciiig initiated while being tcstccl for wti-
tinuity.
~\
s. TEST R~XWAK-~T ASD SI T ON I A M P S . The
resistnncc is for tvstiilg the 1:ield l<r]~lotler 1926
for firing t]lroIyli 250 0li11is rc.sist;liice. l ’ l
lleoll lalli]), designed for testing the Field Ex-
ploder 1937 and 1939, has a screw head which
inay lx set to test for tiring citlicr 50 or 100
tletonators. There is aiicdh~r n~‘on lamp for rc o " . - A'I'W.V/I'/I.V I/)/.' ,.,-.ni It's! l u m p .
VIII—68
ll-l>
u. GERMAN ANTITANK MAGNETIC HOLLOW 29, attached to a prepared detonator, also is used
(‘IL.\I<(;I:. ‘l‘his charge is painted field gray. The with a pull cord. The trip or piI1 wires may be
tllrrc attached magnets are strong enough to hold laid across <~litranc<5 :LIIII tloorways, across stair-
the cl~;u-~e against a 1crtical surface. The main ways. or attached to doors of roolm, cuplJoards,
filling is ill a lJrc’ssc’~l metal container, conical in or to lvintlo\vs. 11oth ~.ntls cjf wires should bc
slial)e, with an rlongatctl apex to act 3s a hand investigatul ior tralJs. If wires are in tension,
grilJ and to accommodate the detonator. The ign- they must iJot lye cut until this investigation has
tvr has a tlt,la!. of only 4% srcontls. How~\~r, a been carrictl out. l’t-cwure ignitrrs commonly
new tylJc igniter with a >.~llo\v head and a 7>5- arv fouiitl unrkr 100~~ I~urtls and door mats.
second delay has been introduced. The 1)7.35 type ih the, igniter usually employed.
3. Booby Traps 4. German Mine Detectors
a. ;\IA’I’I3~IAI.. ‘I% follouing standard ma- a. M I N E DETECTING Ron. 1039 PATTERN. (1)
terials have heen used in (iennan booby traps: Iksrvipfioil. T111 detector consists of a length
Tellermines. of ligllt :dlov tulJing. one end of which carries a
S-Mines. steel IGnt. \vliilc the other carrie.~ a hayonrt joint
CAM'.I. Mines. permitting a second length of tul)ing to by added
Improvised wooden mints. when the operator is standing. The weight of
Prepared charges. the main tulJe and point is alJIn-(Jximately 10
Mortar bombs. oLlnces.
Hand grenades. (2) ~llrplo~imri. Tlli\ tltatcctnr is used as a
Italian B.4 mines. prcJlJe, the point Iwing dropped vertically into the
Italian h;i~id grenades. ground from a htight of ;~lJout 1 inches. It is
French antitank mines. claimed that thy nature of anv untlwground oh-
I~ritish (;.S;. InilJeb 111;s. IT, I \ ‘ , and 17. jt,ct eticountrrc.d can be recognized by the char-
I’,ritiyli gun cottoii sl:ilJs. acteristic sountl coming from the tuhv.
British aircraft bombs. b. M I N E DETECTOR BERLIN 40 TYPE B.
b. METHODS OE SETTING. The booby traps are (1) /k.twiptiorr. This detector consists of a de-
s<,t or(linarilv in the following ways : tector unit carriul in a pack on the operator's
‘I’~~llcrniines with anti-lifting tlwiws. IJack. a search coil, scctic111ali/~~l pole, headphones,
Tcll~rliiiii~~s connected by prillia cord to two and cable connections.
or more F..P. mines and fitted with an anti-
(2) Employment. The variable condenser is
li fting device.
adjusted to produce a suitable note in the ear-
5Aliiics with pull igniters.
1Jhon~s. l’rosinlit~ of a metal olJjrct to the search
C'.\..I'.I. nliii~s with wtting at "Ti" and a trip
coil produces a change of tone.
or pull \Vil-r.
I‘r~I1arc~1 charges, conccnl~~l in rulJlJish, fitted c. M I N E DETECTOR Tcmpclhof 41. (1) De-
\\?th Iwll igiiilcri; and pull wires. scription. This is a portable detector provided
Charges inside a water hottl? fittctl with a with a loud speaker ill+te;lcl of tqA~ones. The
1)1111 igiiitu- to d(~toliate 011 the I\-ithtlrawal of whole instrument can be carried in an infantry
the cork. pack.
Mortar bombs fitted with S.Mi.Z.35 igniter. (2, E/riplo~‘/iw/ll. ‘1‘1~ tone control is turned
Kgg and stick grtwatles fittctl with pull igniters. to the riglit until the loudspeaker produces its
Italian B.4 mines with triIJ wiws. maximum LY~Iu~J~v. Tn presence of a metal object
I~rclich niJtit:ilik mints with IJuIl ignitcbrs. the tone will i-is<, in l)ilc.ll.
l!ritisli aircraft h(Jmhs with pull igtiitcq3 ant1 d. MTXE DETECTOR Frankfurt 40. (1) De-
trip wires. serip'tion. This detector is contained in a wooden
Kinpty German mitle cases with pull iglJitcrs I)os which tit\ into a canvas pack. The pack also
attached to the bottom of the crate or inside, has a wmI~:~rtnwnt in which the scxrch coil can
of the lid. IJe carriul when not i11 iiw. Thr hox is divided
c. EMPLOYMENT IN BUILDINGS. Pull igniters into tn-0 t.oiiiIJal-tlnent~. clne for the batteries and
inscrtul iJi prc~pai-u1 charges, grcnadrs, and stan- one for tlie tl~~tector. The wiring is exposed by
dard mines coiiiliioii1~ arc used as I~ool~~ traps in rcnio\.al of a sliding panel which is hcltl in position
buildings. The frictkn igniter ZDSCH:L’. AA-Z. by one SCIWV. The tubes and hnttcries are acces-
vi&-—69
I MARCH 1945
UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451
5. Antipersonnel Mines
a. I 35. l c sc-riptioll. This anti-
personnel mine may be operated by direct pres-
sure on an i n in the head, or by a pull on
n or more i l - e s attacllrtl to pull igniters.
The mine may also be fired electrically. The pres-
sure igniter, S.Mi.Z.35, functions under a weight Ju/urc 71.—S-Mine with )' Adapter and Z.Z.35 Igniter.
of about 15 pounds. When set with trip n-ircs,
pull igniters ZZ.35 or Zu.ZZ.35 are used, with a
two- or three-way adapter screwed on the mine in
place of the transit cap. The mine is cylindrical
with a c o v c ‘ r , For transport three
are carried in a wooden box or watertight pressed
metal case. In the space between the outer case
and inner cylinder of each mine there are approxi-
mately 360 steel balls, mild steel rods in short
lengths, or small pieces of scrap steel. These con-
stitute the loading of the mine. The base plate
has a recess to hold the propcllent charge. The
central steel tube is threaded externally to take
the adapters or igniters, and internally to take
any standard German igniter or electric detonator
for deliberate firing. At its lower end, the tube
passes through the base plate and is securrtl by a
union. Inside the main steel tube is another short
tube, containing a delay element (about A]/> sec-
onds). There have been cases where the delay
holder has been replaced by a detonator, causing
the mine to explode without jumping-. E1uall~
spaced in the base plate are holes leading into the
bottom of the three detonator tubes and contain-
ing short-delay elements. When the igniter func-
tions, the delay pellet provides a short delay be-
fore igniting the propellent charge in the base
of the mine. The burning of this charge projects
the main elements of the mine into the air. Simul-
taneously, the powder delays in the bottom of the
detonator tubes are ignited and explode the mine
some 3 to 5 feet above the ground. Figure 73.—S-Mine with S.Mi.Z.35 Igniter.
I MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451
VIII—72
I MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451
the striker. The operating load is apprmimatcly a d U.%.:.i. The main filling is cast T I i T with
75 ~poun’ls. pressed T X T primu-.
(4) 7‘0 Ncutralkc. The same as for the (2) Characteristics.
Schit-minc 42. Length ,;• , i]K.hcs_
c’. \\‘OODEN M I N E 4 2 ( N ) . ( 1 ) Dcsrriptio~r. l\ldth ..........(I’m 1 illCl1~~.
The body is made of impregnated wood, with a Over-all height ~?<,i inches.
ci eht f h<>(lv ; imhcs
zinc socket in the top to take a detonator and " : °. -" -
-. . ,, , i I, i - , W e i g h ! (it tilling- i pounds ;i o u n c e s .
igiiitcr. .bm~ss the top is a shaped block of wood
drilletl to allow the igniter to he screwed don-n (3) oprclrio/r. The mine is tired 1)~ pressure
on the top of the body. The igniter is the stand- on top of the D.Z.35 igniter, or by pressure on a
VIII—73
I MARCH 1945
UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451
lHyurc 76.—Glass Mine 43 with (a) Hcbeteunder hjmter, and (b) Ihtck li/m/.-r.
cover board over the head of the igniter. Without the wall of the has by a flangc~. Tile striker as-
the cover board, the mine is practically insensible sembly slips into the side of the mine, in a recess
to blast, but the probability of operating the mine cut out to receive it. A corresponding slot in the
is reduced consitlerahly. The functioning load of lid enables the mine to be completely closed when
the igniter fitted to this mine is 75 pounds. It the igniter is not cocked.
appears that the igniter is being manufactured
(2) Cllarclrtcri.stic.s.
with a weaker spring for use in this mine. since
Length of box ..T.X i l l i 1 1 1 i .
the pressure required to function a standard Width of box 2.5d indies.
D.Z.3.5 is 130 to 165 pounds. Deptli of box 1.5 indie-;.
i. AKTIPERSONNEL PRESSURE MINE (TTAL- Length of charge J.d indies.
IAN). (1) Drscviption. This mine consists of Width of charge 1.97 indies.
Depth of char~c 1.181.18 indies.
a rectangular Ix&elite box, with a lvedge-shaped, Weight of charge 5,'i ounces.
hinged lid, containing a TKT charge held in place
by a projection and surrounded on the remaining (3) Method of ~r.~r,i,r,~/. To arm the mine
three sides by deeply grooved fragmentation the igniter is cocked by pulling wit the ring and
plates. The igniter mechanism consists of a metal inserting the actuating pin. The detonator is
tube which contains a spring-loaded striker, fitted then inserted in the striker tube and secured by
with an actuating pin and a cocking ring. The locking the ring. The whole ;~~~enll)ly is inserted
outer end of the striker tube is secured against in the box, the detonator fitting into a recess in
VIII—74
UNCLASSIFIED
I MARCH 1945 TM-E 30-451
(he explosive charge. Finnlly, the lid is gently as possihlc. Do not grip the corrugated portion
closed until it rests on the actuating pin. which crushes vaSil\-.
(4) . \ slight l~r~ssure on the lid h. GERMAN ANTIPERSONNEL "POT MINE".
will cause lx dl push out the pin and release the (1) I)c~.sr/-iplior?. A crush igniter is screwed into
striker. the top of the cylin(irl(31 I)otly of this mine by
(5) To Neutralize. Avoid all pressure 011 the means of an adapter. The pressed steel body con-
lid of the mine. Search for and neutralize any tains an esl)losive lilling CJi a~qmminiately 1
anti-handling devices. IAift the lid clear of the ounces of powdered picric acitl.
actuating pin. Insert a wire or nail in the safety.- (2) Opri-,lfiOl/. A moderate ~mssure on the
pin hole and lift out the Stl-iliel- asscmldy. Un- top of the ignitw explodes the Ininr.
r the ing ring and remove the detonator, (3) To n’c~lltrtrliz~~. L~iiscrew tile igniter,
g. ANTIPERSONNEL (;T.GS I I I X E 33. (1) Dc- grasping it as low a> l)os~il)le. If tlic detonator
scription. his antipersonnel mine is made al- clots not conic out with the igniter, remove it by
most entirely of glass. It is armed with the cheni- turning tlw mine up>ide down. If it does not
ical igniter or with the Hebelzundcr. The bottom then drop oul, LIIISCI’C\V the xlaptcr ant1 remove
of the glass container is recessed to hold a Spreng- the tlctonatcir. The total weight of the mine is
korper 28. On top of the mine rests a glass shear 1.2;/1 ounces.
plate, and, on top of that, a thick glass pressure i. M O D I F I E D Schii-Minc. (1) 11c’SCl.ipti0l2.
plate. This modified Schii-wiuc may lx usetl with the
(2) Operation. A pressure of 20 to 25 pountls 2.Z.35 igniter. 7%~ 1x1~gc lit1 has a sloping front
breaks the thin shear plate and applies pressure through which the igniter I)luiig:er licxtl lx-otrudes.
on the lever of the Hcbelziinder, thus firing the (2) opcYaliorr. 1’1-~‘i~ui-e on the lid causes the
igniter and exploding the mine. sloping fl-trnt to push mi the actuating pin. This
(3) To Neutralize. If the mine is fitted with pulls out the l)lutlgcr of the igniter, causing it ‘to
a Ilebchiinder, remove the turn glass plates, iiiserl 61-r. A hole is bored in the lid directly above the
safety pin, and unscrew thr igliitvr. Then re- safety pin of the igniter. A cord attached to the
move the detonator. If it is fitted with a chemical riiig of the satety pill is used to tll-aw the pin
igniter, unscrew the igniter by gripping it as low out through the hole to ;Lrnl tile nlille.
VIII—75
I MARCH 1945
UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451
6. Antitank Mines niter sockets are provided, one in the side ot the
mine 4 inches from the carrying handle, : n l t l i
a. GENERAL. The Germans use about 40 types
other in the base 2 inches from the center of the
of antitank mines, but the four types of 7‘ellw-
mine. These sockets are screwed mto the body
mines are used nlost extensively.
of the mine and waterproofed 1>\ rubber washers.
II. TELLERMIKE 4S (1LUSR1~00~1). (1) llc-
A cylindrical cavity on the lop of the mine C‘OI~-
sc~~ijtiox In place of the usual cover. this mine
tains the pressure-plate a^sembh. This pressure
has a mushroom head prc‘ssure plate which scre\vs
plate carries a rubber wa>her or aluminum strip,
into the igniter socket. Two thrcatletl sockets are
which is secured to it by a >Uvl ring ^pot-welded
provided for subsitliary anti-lifting igniters. one
to the plate and forming a seal where it passes
in the side of the mine ant1 the other in tht. base.
under the lower edge of the flanged ring. A
The positions of thrse two sockets vary. although
strong spring provides the reM-Iance which must
they always have been found on a tliametvr of
be overcome to depress the pre — ure plate. A cen-
the mine.
tral, threaded socket serves tor the m>ertion of
(2) Charactcvistics.
the igniter assembly, T.Mi.Z.42' 1? I. cmiMsting of
Diameter over-all 12.5 inches. a spring-loaded striker retained bv a >hear pm.
Depth of body ........2.6 inches.
The detonator resembles that u>ed m the Teller-
Maximum height of mine.3.5 inches.
IIiameter of mubhroom mine 35. but it screws into the 'toilv ot the mine.
head ..............7.5 inches.
I)epth of mushroom head.1 inch. (2) Clfnvarfrrisficx.
Total w-eight of mine . . 1 7 pountls 5 ounces. Diameter of base . .12 ; : iillII<,-.
1 )iameter ol ca<e . . . ... 1 2 ' , ii;. !.>>.
c. T E L L E R M I N E 1942 (T.Mi.4I?) (I) IIrscrip- jiameter of 1”’C\II~
tioiz. This mine consists of a cylintlrical. pressed- plate ......i:j . .5- ! 4 i n c h ' -.
steel body, containing a central detonator pocket Maximum height . . . .. . 4 n i c l u -.
Type oi filline . TXT.
which is surrountletl by a priming c)-lintler of a Weight 0i fillin- . . . ..12 puur-.N.
composition resembling penthrite. T w o pull ig- ’ e i g h t oi mill c . . 18 pound- (approximately)
VIII—76
I MARCH 1945
TM-E 30-451
VN—77
I MARCH 1945
UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451
the lmver face of the igniter presses hard against f. T E I L I X M I N E 20 I T. .lli. 29). (1) Dcsc~ip-
the rubber ring. One collar is a retaining coll;tr tion. This mine was the first of the Tellermine
for the detonator; the other is an adjusting 01 series and was thought to have become obsolete,
positioning collar for the igniter. The igniter is but it has been fount1 in 1:rance since D-Day. It
screwed into the correct pusition by a special tool, consists of a cvlintlric-al hotly the lid of xvhich
and \vhen positioned it is secured by a sniall grub is provided with three sockets for the reception
passing through the collar. If this collar has been of three Z.L).%. ZY l d - p u l l igniters. These igni-
rtmoved, it cannot be replaced correctly unless ters, according to a C;~~iian tlocunxmt, are to be
the special tool is available. Iimxrect positioning set at the heavy lm’bsure setting (marked S or
makes the mint either too sluggish or too stmsi- 1.25 kg.). Three atltlitional sockets, two in the
tive. si(le and one in the base provide means of attach-
ing anti-handling igniters.
(2) Clrnmctc&firs.
(2) CI~nu7rfcrisfic-.~
Diameter 12.6 inches.
Diameter . . . 10 inches.
Weight of mine 19.2 pounds.
Height . . .2.7 inches.
Weight of filling 11 pounds.
Type of filling TNT. Weight . h t . 13.2 pmmtls.
. e i g h t (Ii liliitic .10 pounds.
‘ y p c of tilllllg . . ..TXT.
(3) Fz~nctiouiwg. The mine functions T\hcn the
Firing pressure . . . . 100-275 pounds.
pressure on the covc2~ coml~r~2is~s the mint slxing.
causing the hotly of the igniter to descend aid (3) Neutralization. Search for ant1 neutralize
shear the pin holding the striker. I’ressurr uf 17.3 anti-handling devices. Gnscrrw the three igniters.
to 400 pounds will explode the mine. The mine . now safc~.
(3) To nrutralix. ISxatninc the sides ant1 g. IA. I’:. .\NTITA\I< GUISE. (1) Ilescviption.
bottom of the mine for anti-handling ignitcirs. ‘fliis is 3 circular mine with flat top and bottom,
Identify the ignitus ant1 neutralize. Iiemovc the enclosed in two s:l~ic~r-.~ll;l~~ctl covers. In the
main igniter from tlic mine, nimipulate the safety crnter of the tol) is a small cover plate securetl
device, aiid inmietliately replace the igniter. by bayonet catclics 1111~Ic’r \\Ilicli is a safety screxv.
which when ~cr~\\-~tl tightI!, clockwise closes the Il. Topf 1RLRRC. (1) fhweriplinu. Tll? mine
entry to the detonator. A b o ~ the blasting cap l)o(ly is a hollow cylindrical III-~. 0i 1jl:i<tic mate-
is a small chrullber from which fire tubes IGKI rial filled \\-ith HK. Its top f;ice i< i~~l-n~~l as a
ratliall\- to tile fi\-e special pressure igniters action circular pr~~5tlre plate surrounded bv a shc2r
of which is similar to that of the D.Z. 35 pressure grc1ove. The cylindrical rece-s m the ccllter of
igniter. the mine bodv accommodates the primer plug.
T h e
(2) Characteristics. carrying handle is fixed t.. the mine bottom
. l y bv t\vo glas5 scl-e\VS.
TXameter of 1nille l foot. ° . . .
Height 3 inches. ' h c ' primer plug assembly consols of a glass
M’eigllt of tninc 8 pounds. screw call ant1 the i~\~liil~lric:~l igniter seating, I l l :
M’eight of fillill f i . . . . 5 Iwunds. of l)ituniitiou~ cardboard material.
Nature of filling TNT. ( 2 j Action, I nder a load ..[ 330 pounds, the
(3) F2Inctioniug. Pressure on the lid cause’s lxcssurc’ plate shv;ir5 along it. .hear groove and
comt5 t o rest o n tlir
one or more of the igniters to fire, setting off the l u 3 +Yu~‘t’ l i ~ ~ ( l 0 i i g: n i t c Y ,
crushing it and causing the mine to ~~sl~lotlc.
(4) Neutrali,-atiou. Search for and neutralize (3) To llrutrolix:
any anti-handling devices. Remove cap and screw (a) Searth for and neutralize any anti-han-
safety screw clockwise until line marked SICHER clling devices.
coincides with white mark on case. If all the (bj Ensure that the mine i- ~~IJc~;~I~KI:,
nuts on the bottom of the mine are present and (c) Lift carefully, re>t on luie side, and un-
screwed up, mine is safe. screw the primer plug.
5VJ IN
GLASS FUZE
ASSEMBLY PLUG
CARRYING HANDLE
TOP VIEW BOTl’OM VlEW
((1) Rcniove thr igniter. Jvith fiw staiidai-(1 igt~it~~ scxkt.ts, one on top,
(c) Unscrw protective detonator p & t . two on one side, and one at each end. Holes in
(f) Remove the detonator and replace the the box correspond with tllv sockets on top and
protcctivc pocket 011 the ig-nittar. on thy sitlv, ~nal~liiig igiiitvrs to Ix inserted from
outside and fitted as anti-Iwldlin~ dwices.
i. Rirgcl. ANTITANK M I N E (R. Mi. 1.3). (1‘i Z.Z. 42 igniters are inserted in the end sockets
Desmiption. The mine consists of an wcawtl and their pins rest OII ~hcmltl~m at each end of
explosive charge and of an outer box in two the tray am1 arv covered by ~\vivrl clips. The
lmrts, li(l and tray. The charge is provided chargr is supported in the, tray by two s h m
VIII—8I
UNCLASSIFIED
I MARCH 1945 TM-E 30-451
wires. For transport, two safety bars are in- (4) Nez~fralixtion. Search for and neutralize
serted which take the weight of the charge off any anti-handling tlrviccs. ‘I‘ui-ii the mine on its
the shear wires. \Vhen the safety bars are with- side and hy pushing a 1~~31 w nail through the
drawn, spring-loaded shutters close the holes. hole in the base mist, the shutters covering the
These shutters can be opened by pushing a pcn- safety bar holes. Insert safety -1)x-s. Cut shear
cil or large nail through a hole in the base of the wires and rcmovc litl. 01~1 swivel clips and,
tray. having seen that the loins of tltc. Z.Z. J2 igniters
The lid rests on the charge, and the ends of arc resting on the shoultlcrs and not l)cncath, take
the shear wires arc led up over the lid and wind- out the charge case. I~nscrew tllc, %.%. -/2 igniters.
lassed together to keep it on. EOTE: The charge: case C;LII Ix inserted with
one 2.2. J2 ig-niter pi11 reversctl and beneath the
(2) Charnrtcristirs.
shoulders. In this ca>c the char-ge case must he
Length .........31.5 inches.
Width ............ 3,;; inches. slid out by lifting the tind in \\llich the Z.Z. ‘12
Height ............. 3% inches. igniter is usctl nornially.
Weight of mine 20.5 pounds. j . FRENCH LIGHT ANTITANK MINT.. (1) De-
M’eight of explosive.. .8.8 pounds. scription. The mine hotly consists of a recta-lgu-
Kature of explosive... .Amatol SO/SO. lar steel body filled with 5% pounds of HE.
(3) Fwzrtio~hzg. Pressure on the lid of the In the top of the mine are two ixtritcr pockets, one
mine shears the shear wires and the pins of the at either end. The body is CWVI-cd with a slip-on
2.2 42 igniters are pushed out, thus setting off rectangular cover the top of which is corrugated.
the mine. There is a square hole in eit1x.r end of the cover
?-;•
• . .• i . V. i -
through which passes a safety Ijar which is I-C’- shear flange secured to the side of the mine by
moved when the mine is laid. wooden dowels.
(2) Actio?z. A pressure of from 300 poun~ls The mine is gray of unpainted, \vith a red Iland
to 500 pounds in the lid C~LISCS it to descend on on one sitle ant1 on the face of the pressure Hock.
the igniters, exploding the mine. (2) Action. Pressure of 200 pounds or more
(3) Chavactcristics. on the pr~‘5~ure block shears tlir. tlo\vels securing
Length 9V2 inches. the Ji(.ar fl;~nxc, which when forced tlown pushes
Width 5y2 inches. cnlt 1he pin in t l lc.%.%. 1-7 igniter, exploding the
Height 4;% inches. mine.
U’eight .... 14% pounds.
(3 ) (‘l/tri.crc-i~.i-i,siic.
(4) To ucutrnlix: Length . . l.i inches.
(a) Search for and ncutralizc~ any anti-han- Width . . 1 - inches.
Height . . 4 ' : illdl(~‘.
dling devices.
\\eight . . I S pounds.
(11) I<iit cover and remove both igniters.
(c) Replace the cover. (4) .\~l~//l/~c~liri//!/. Search lor and ncutMize
k. \~‘OOUEK-BOX 111S~ 42 (H~lmiu~). (1) any anti-handling devices. Remove the lid avoid-
Dcsuiptiou. The hod\- of the mine is a rcc- ing all pressure on the pressure block. Lift pres-
tangular wooden 110x containing 119; pounds of suw Mock clear of the shear flange. Place the
HE. A pressure block protrutles through the pressurr 1~10~1~ so it beats on the supporting block
lid of the mine, which inside the mine rests on a in the unarmed positi(111. ICc,l)lace the lid.
VIII—83
I MARCH 1945
UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451
Tellermine 35. 12.5 3.2 2 T.Mi.Z. 175- Fltted for anti-handling devices.
(diam.) 35 400
or
T.Mi.Z.
42
Tellermine 35 (steel). 12.5 .5 20 T.Mt.Z. 12.5 Fitted for anti-handling devices.
(diam.) 35 400
or
T.Mi.Z.
42
Riegel Mine (R.Mi.43). 32.75 4 3.5 3.5 ZZ.42 400 Fitted for three external igniters for
anti handling.
Heavy Wooden AT Mine. 17 15.75 10.5 37 DZ.35 200 Fitted for anti-handlmg devices.
Figure 88.
Y!!!—84
I MARCH 1945 TM-E 30-451
When the plunger is depressed about y$ inch, casing. The upper part of the sleeve is fitted with
the two small totters escape from the a a strong shear pin, and the lower part is connected
into the space below. The striker then is released to the igniter body by a weak brass arming wire.
and fires the cap. The pressure required in Inside Inside the pressure sleeve is a plain tubular striker
cases is as low as 50 pounds. guide containing the striker, held in place by two
(c) To neutralize. Same as for Type A. retaining balls.
(d) To disarm. Same as for Type A. (b) Operation. The igniter is inserted in the
(3) S-Minekinder 35 (S.Mi.Z.35). (a) De- normal manner, and the top of the mine is
scription. This igniter is used to initiate nor screwed on. This depresses the pressure sleeve,
S-mine when set as a pressure operated screwed which in turn shears the weak arming pins with
The body of the igniter is made of aluminum whi an audible snap. The anti-lifting device of the
holds a pressure spring, plunger, striker, an igniter now is armed. The igniter can be set off
striker spring. A central part of the body acts as in either of two ways. When the pressure plate
a distance piece and guide for the plunger. i a is crushed or pressur e sleeve is p l a t e
steel antennae, 1% inches long, are i s to down until the strong shear pin is cut. The re-
the head of the plunger. This hollow down taining balls escape into the recess above the
takes the striker, which is held in position taining shoulder of the sleeve, freeing the spring-loaded
its spring by two steel balls. The balls are should striker which fires the percussion cap. Any at-
partly in two holes in the plunger and partly strik tempt to unscrew the pressure plate or cap of
a groove in the striker. The safety pin te mpt the mine will cause it to explode. Under pressure
tained in its hole by a spring-loaded and t h e of the spring the sleeve follows any upward move-
nut. When the safety pin is withdrawn, o f mine ment of the plate or cap and after about % inch
is armed. upward travel the balls escape below the sleeve,
(b) Operation. Pressure on the antennae again releasing the striker.
causes the plunger to descend, and after moving (c) Disarming. Since there is no way to de-
approximately 0.2 inch the steel balls fall away termine whether a Tellermine is armed with this
releasing the striker. The firing pressure is ap- igniter, no pressure t or screw h i s should
proximately 15 pounds. be removed from caps mines. They should be
(c) To neutralize. Push a nail into the safety lifted and destroyed. However, should it be nec-
pin hole. Care must be taken in handling ess essary to determine i t b e of n e c - wind a
igniter as a slight steady pressure may cause it rope or tracing tape counter-clockwise around the
to function. pressure plate or screw cap four complete times.
(4) Tellerwainenzihder 42 (T.Mi.Z.42). This Then pull from a safe distance to unscrew the
igniter consists of a simple steel striker p l a t e plate or cap.
against the pressure of a steel spring by a shear (6) T.Mi.Z.35. (a) Description. This pres-
wire. The striker is in a steel casing. A percus- sure igniter has only been found in Tellermines.
sion cap is at the base of the casing. The pres- The brass body contains a floating striker as-
sure necessary on the head of the striker is ap- sembly. The striker head is striker to fit a s -
proximately 400 pounds. jection on the spindle. This is a secondary safety -
(5) Tellernzineneiinder 43 (T.Mi.Z.43). dev device to keep the weight of the striker off the
Description. The chief feature of this igniter, shear pin until the. igniter is armed. A white
which can be used in Tellermines 35, 35 (steel), mark with the word Sicker (safe) above it, and
42, and 43, is that once it has been placed in the a red mark with the word Scharf (armed) above
mine and armed it cannot be removed without it are inscribed on the head of the igniter. When
exploding the mine. The head of the T.Mi.Z.43 the screw head is turned so the red spot moves
is approximately y4 inch higher than that of the from the safe to the armed position, the projec-
T.Mi.Z.42. The upper shear pin is g inch above tion moves clear of the striker head.
the body of the igniter. The outer l i on the
arming shear pins can be seen on the sides of the (b) Operation. In the min the lower e of
igniter body, either yz inch or % inch below the the guide compresses the ring situated above the
top of the igniter body. The igniter consists of a adjusting collar. Pressure on the cover of the
body into which is pressed a cap retainer. Inside mine moves the body of the igniter down against
is a pressure sleeve, which protrudes above the the rubber on the collar and so exerts a force on
VIII—86
MARCH 1945
TM-E JO-451
B.Z. 24 B.Z. 39 NB.B.Z. 38 B.Z. 39 B.Z. FXP. B.Z 4.5 Feld Sehlag Reisszun-
Mod
- SEC. Ruhr. der.
B.Z.E.
i
.?---•• 3
VIII—88
I MARCH 1945
TM-E 30-4~1
UNCLASSIFIED
VIII—89
UNCLASSIFIED
I MARCH 1945 TM-E 30-451
top of the striker, shearing the pin. The striker striker spring, percussion cap, detonator holder,
then moves under the pressure of the spring. and detonator.
(c) To neutralize. If the mines have been (b) Operation. The clockwork mechanism is
subjected to blast, unscrew the igniter gently. wound. A weight of at least 10 pounds is placed
Hold the igniter clear of the mine with the cap on the plunger. The safety bar is released, per-
pointing away. Turn the red spot on the screw mitting the clockwork mechanism to function for
head from Sclzarf to Siclzer. Fix the claw at- \Yi minutes with a loud buzzing sound, withdraw-
tached to the wire, or a similar improvisation, into ing the internal sound, wi t h d r a w -
the slotted end of the safety bolt, and press the armed.
safety bolt home. Replace the igniter in the mine, (c) To neutralize. Once this device is armed
screwing it in hand tight. If the mines are known it cannot be neutralized.
to be in good condition, turn the red spot from
(2) Tilt Igniter, Ki.Z.43 (Kippsiinder 43).
Scharf to Siclzer, using a coin, not a screwdriver.
(a) Description. The tilt igniter is designed to
Fix the claw attached to the wire into the slotted
fire whenever the tilt rod is moved in any direc-
end of the safety bolt and press the bolt home.
tion. This tilt rod is on top of the igniter, which
contains a sliding pressure piece, pressure spring,
hollow striker, striker spring, and two retaining
balls. The detonator assembly includes percus-
sion cap and detonator. An extension rod, 24^4
inches long, is connected by pushing the sleeve
"\i r the tilt rod.
44. The steel case of the igniter contains a spring- and should be destroyed in place. Unscrew the
loaded striker above a percussion cap and deto- igniter, lift the mine, and remove the detonator.
nator socket. The striker protrudes through the (4) above long delay igniter (J-Feder
top of the igniter. Two flat, winged, actuating 504). s triker is a clockwork mechanism
pieces are held together at the top by a safety n i t e r . be set to function at any desired delay
pin. Holes in these pieces serve for the attach- from 10 h e l d 21 days. It is used for spe-
ment of trip wires. cial demolitions.
(b) Operation. The igniter is armed after the (5) Crztslt Type Cilr>wical CIBu~k" Igniter.
safety pin is withdrawn. A pressure of 21 (a) peration. This igniter is a chemical,
pounds on the wings of the actuating pieces, or i s type, consisting of a thin metal
an outward pull of 14 pounds on the trip wires, drum, with circumferential grooves to reduce its
opens the winged actuating pieces sufficiently to resistance to vertical pressure. It contains a glass
release the striker and fire the percussion cap. actuat i n g filled with acid, surrounded by a
(c) To neutralise. This igniter requires ex- t h e powdered, flash composition. It weighs 1
treme care in neutralization. In place the igniter ounce.
is completely covered, leaving only the wings ex- (b) alization. A moderate pressure on top
posed. Carefully locate the wings and remove of ove r e d , crushes the metal drum and the
enough earth to insert a safety pin or nail through loc a t e inside it. The acid pours into the
the pin holes. If trouble is encountered in in- safe t y and a flash results, setting off
serting the pin or nail, the mine is dangerous detonator and mine.
VIII—9!
I MARCH 1945
UNCLASSIFIED
U
TM-E 30-451!
(1) Small pnemaatic boat. (c) Etzgine. The boat is driven by a six-
L e n g t h . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . < 4 feet 10 inches. cylinder, Maybach-type, S5, water-cooled, gaso-
Beam over-all 3 feet 9 inches. line engine.
Weight ............ I16 pounds.
Capacity ............ Horsepower 80 at 1,400 rpm.
; 3 armed men or 660
pounds. Total engine capacity.. .7 liters (427 cubic inches)
(approximately).
Maximum permissible
(2) Pneumatic boat assault bridge. This revolutions in still
bridge can be built ,in any lengths in a current water e , , . . , , . . . , . . . . 1 , 4 0 0 rpm.
VIII—92
UNCLASSIFIED
I MARCH 1945 TM-E 30-451
(d) Trailer. The two-wheel trailer includes (6) Large pneumatic boat. This is the largest
chassis, extensible tipping slipway, traveling of the three standard pneumatic boats and is
cradles, winch, and hoisting cable. It has the generally used singly.
following characteristics: Length over-all 26 feet.
Weight, unloaded..... 2% tons. Beam over-all 9 feet 9 inches.
Length o v e r - a l l . . . . . . . 2 4 feet 9 inches. Weight 637 pounds.
Length with b o a t . . . . . 2 8 feet 6 inches. Maximum buoyancy. 13.5 tons.
Length extended 32 feet 4 inches.
c. PONTON AND TRESTLE BRIDGES. (1)
Width over-all 6 feet 7 inches.
Length of hoisting Training ponton bridge. (a) Description. There
cable 49 feet 3 inches. is little evidence of this equipment being used
Working party 6 men. operationally; it is thought to be kept for train-
ing. There are two types of light ponton and
(5) Storm bout. (a) Description. This boat, trestle bridges: one with half pontdns having
when in operation, is carried and launched by a load capacity of 4 tons, and the other with
eight men, while four men are required to carry double-ponton piers having a load capacity of
and install the motor. The boat is steered by 5% tons. The decking used for this bridge also
pivoting the motor on the bracket which attaches is used in bridging and rafting with pneumatic
it to the stern. The helmsman stands in the boats.
stern gripping two handles at the front of the
motor. (b) Characteristics.
Half ponton:
(b) Characteristics. Length 12 feet.
Length 19 feet 9 inches. Beam 5 feet.
Beam S feet 2 inches. Depth 2 feet 6 inches.
Depth amidships 2 feet 1 inch. Superstructure:
Weight 475 pounds. Timber with decking.20 feet by 2 feet.
Material Wood. Track w i d t h . . . . . . . . 8 feet.
Crew 2 men. Bay length 20 feet.
Capacity 7 men in addition to crew.
Maximum speed, loaded. IS to 16 knots. (2) Pontolz and trestle bridge (Czech). This
Transport 3 boats with motors on equipment consists of steel half pontons and
special trailer.
center sections. Two types of bridges are built.
(c) Engine. This is a "mechanical oar" pro- (a) Roadways built on piers of one half pon-
pulsion unit: a propeller attached to a long shaft ton and one center section, with a capacity of S.2
running through a casing bolted to the engine. tons and the following characteristics.
The propeller revolves several feet behind the Pier length:
boat. Half ponton 16 feet.
Center section 8 feet.
Length 13 feet 6 inches.
he s.•....4 feet 6 inches.
Width 2 feet 9 inches.
Track width 8 feet.
Height 2 feet.
Bay length 21 feet.
Weight (without oil
and f u e l ) . . . . . = _ , ,375 pounds.
Weight (with oil and
(b) Roadway built on piers of two half pon-
fuel) .........412 pounds. tons and one center section, with a capacity 16.5
BHP 30. tpns and the following characteristics:
Cylinders 4, horizontally opposed. Track width 8 feet.
Running time on full Bay length 21 feet.
tank ............. ls hours. Complete pier:
Propeller a . ........3 blade, IO:& inches in in ..4 feet 6 inches.
diameter. Length ..40 feet.
VIII—93
I MARCH 1945 TM-E 30-451
UNCLASSIFIED
(3) Light ponton and trestle equipnaent
(Brtickengeriit C). The three following types
of bridges can be built with this equipment.
VIII—94
I MARCH 1945
UNCLASSIFIED
TM-E 30-451
VIM—95
I MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-45I
VIII—96
I MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIED
U l L n
^ TM-E 30-45I
(6) I.ight timber bridges otz fixrd snpporfs. tracked bridge, with a capacity of 27 tons. it
(a) Folding single span foot Oridgcs. This consists of t\vo ba!-s and a 5l)an of 29 feet 6
c~uilmu~t Is made up of two single mcinbers, incht5. A single hem framed trestle is used
hinged together, and consisting each of t\vo 3- as a central sulq)ort.
inch round timber roadbearcrs supporting three
cross bearers to which are wired two planks (9 (b) Components.
foot 10 inches by 10 inches by 3yz inches. This Bri(l:gc -‘cat, :
bridge is trussed by means of a timber strut a Length l.i feel.
short distance off center and a system of ties. The Width iI ili~~l7~5.
Depth ,S inches.
total Icngth of the bridge is 19 fevt S inches.
Ramps .
(I,) Light tvaclscd hidgc. This is a light ;
Length feet.
tracked timber bridge, constructed in t\\-o load Width 4 feel 9 inches.
rating-s: 6 tons and 9.5 tons. It gcncraIl>- is Roadbenrcr^ :
sqq~ortctl by simple framed trcstlcs, hut if float- Length 1-1 feet 9 inches.
Width 7 inches.
ing supports are nwtled the large pncuniatic l)oat Depth ') j inches.
is usctl. The following tables give tlw cross T1-ack icclioll:
srctions of the roatlbearvrs for \rarying sl)ans Length 4 feet 11 inches.
and loatls: Width u\er-all ! feet 9 inches.
Span Useful width 4 feet 3 inches.
Trestle:
Bridge 33 frrt 16 fwt 6 inches 20 fret
Capill alid
G-ton 7 x 7 inclles S s 7 inchc< 9 s S incllcs.
95ton Sx8inches 945x S inches 10% s 9% inches. Gro~in~liill :
Length I .i ird.
(7) 27-Ton heavy tracked bl-idye. (a) Dc- Width 7 inches.
scriptio/r. This bridge is a variation of the light Lkpth ......S : ; iwlies.
VIII—97
I MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451
d. FIXED TIRIDGES. (1) SllKll /110X girder The lib has two radii of operation according to the
(Briickcngcriit K). This equipment is capable of lifting calztcity: 6 tons for the smaller radius
carrying heavy vehicles and light tanks over and 4 tons for the larger radiu~.
short gaps. It is eswntially an assault bridge b. WTRT. CUTTERS. (1) large type. These
and can span gaps of 31 feet 6 inches, 47 feet cutters are approximately 2 i'eet in length and
3 inches, or 63 feet with box girders alone. The weigh 5 1~ottttds. pl‘he two jaws of special steel
bridge always is built with three girders and are pivoted on two links and operated by a pair
has a carrying capacity of 27 tons. ‘I‘rrstlrs of tubular steel handles. These are hinged to-
and pontons are supplied to span wet or dry galls gether and covered with insulated grips which
with a series of bridges;. are secured by twninal c:lp- antI locking rings.
(2) Light srrtiollal bridgr (Lcirlltr Z A short pin acts as a -.top
Briickc). This is a through bridge with a tim-
ber roadway, approximately 12 feet wide, slung
lwtween two main girders of brawd steel pawls
8 feet 2 inches long and 7 feet 10 inches high.
The normal bridge cannot span a gal> grcatc.r
than 147 feet 6 inches, and is rated over this
and all lesser spans at 33 tons for tanks. 1\-ith
special underslung bracing the span may 1~ in-
creased to 172 fert without altering its rating.
(3) Hcrhcr-t Bridge. This bridge is some-
times called the "Italian Meccano Bridge". It
is through-girtkr type with a lo-foot clear roatl-
way. Each girder is constructed of stwl lattice
pyramids, made of angle iron and channel struts.
The decking is of 6-inch timber plank. The Ger-
man classification of this bridge is 18 tons owr
82 feet. This bridge also may be used in con-
junction with trestles or pontons.
e. HEAVY BRIDGING EQIJIPNEKT. J 42 aud
J 43 I<ridghg Equipment {Briickcngercit J 42
ad J 43). The J 42 equipment consists of
s;tcel box-girder sections, of which any number ~1
to four can be bolted together to form a maxi-
mum span of 64 feet. Each section is about 16
feet 6 inches long. X decking of stout chcsscs Vinure WO.—ll'irrniltrrs.
is laid on these tnain bearers and held down by
two similar box girders used as vibrants. The (2) Small type. These cutters are 1 foot 4
girders are launched over rollers. Trestles and inches long ant1 weigh 2$$ pounds. There are
four-section pontons are used as supports. The minor variations in construction among samples
single track width of the bridge is believed to be manufactured bv different firms. The general
13 feet 9 inches, but it also can be constructed (lesigtt is similar 10 that 11i the large cutters,
in double track width. The / 43 bridge is a but the shape of the jaws K dilterent, one jaw
strengthened version of the J 42. being I)ent over in th< form of a hook to aid in
holding the \virr. The handles have insulated
9. Mechanical Equipment grills.
a. ~-TON MOBILE CRANE (‘.yci. Kfz. O/l) c. L3LAST NR<I\~ I - Tllis cquipmcnt is de-
(Drehkran Kraftivagen 6 t.). This crane is sigIte(l for the rapid l)t-oclttctif111( of stt~all diameter
mounted on the chassis of the 18-ton semi-tracked vertical holes in the ground for telegraph poles
vehicle (Stl. Kfz. 9). It has a telescopic jib or similar sttl)p~)rtc. The equipment includes a
mounted on a ball-bearing base, which permits a drive rod ; two tabular hand levers; a long, thin,
traverse of 180 dcgwes and an adjustmt~nt for metal rod ; and a propellent charge, safety fuze,
ground slope up to 12 degrees in any direction. and igniter.
VIII—98
UNCLASSIFIED
I MARCH ,945 TM-E 30-451
d. GERMAN PORTABLE POWER SAWS. (\) Light e. ELKCTRIC G E M RATORS AND ET.ECTRIC
power sa71’. (a) Dcsrvipfioll. The main cotu- POWER TO0L.S. (1) l:ield generating set.. (a)
ponents are the gasoline tnotor with its gearing, 1Ic.vvipfiorr. This field generating set is used by
the clutch, saw blade, and saw chain. The saw Gertiian arniy ctigincc~t-i in mol~ile norkshn~~s for
blade can be turned through 90 degrees for power drivctl tools. h is also used for charg-
‘or or vcrticnl cutting and is locked in ing storage 1)attcries.
position bv+ a lever. ( 1 ) ) Clrrrr-crc-f~,i,i.c/i~..~.
(2) German Tube Well 1937 Pattern, with i. KAKTII M O V I M ; KI >ri!\\i KNT. Trench plows.
Accessories "A" and "B". This tube well is a Small and large trench plows are used by the
suction pump capal)le of lifting \vntcr from a (ierman A n n v . The Mnail trench plow consists
depth of 26 feet. Accessory "A" extends the of a double plowshare on the hooked end of
tlq)th to alm~t 33 feet. ~~\cccssor-\- "I’,” ],erlllit,~ a girder which is supported on a two-wheeled
the pump to be used for pumping surface water. trailer and lowed behind a semi-tracked vehicle.
h. MARKINGS OF CYLINDERS OK INDUSTRIAL The large plow consists u i ilii- plow, anchor, pul-
GASES. The Germans always stamp the type of lev assembly, tow wire, and support.
gzts their cylintlers conlain into the metal it<eIi j. A I R CoMi'RKssok' AND I'NK.CM.vrrc TOOLS.
as guide in case the paint should change color or (1 ) Sinker rock drills There are two types of
tlisalqxxr tlirou::h \I-cntlicrittg. sinker rock drills used by the (ierman Army: the
" D " handle and the " T " handle types. Both,
Cylinder
color German name Eiu/lish name judged by American standards, fall into the light-
Red IVasscrstofj Ilytirogen weight class (40 to N> pounds). These tools are
P.lue Sauersiofj Oxygen similar m design but I he internal parts are not in-
Green Stickstoff Kitrogen terchangeable, l'olh of these rock drills can be
Yellow .Izetylcn Acetyletlr used by attaching American standard air lines
Cray (with I'ropan Propane
red band) with the universal coupling used on the German
Gray I’rc.wlz1ft Compressed air drills.
Not given Kohlcn Satire or Carbon dioxide (2) German F.M.I. Air Compressor, (a)
Kohlen Dio.rid
Schwefcl Dioxid Sulphur dioxide r.iujiite. This is a foiir-cvlinder gasoline engine
ClilormetJivl Methyl chloride with magneto ignition. I he horsepower rating is
vIII— lol
I MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451
VIII—i02
I MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451
VIII—104
UNCLASSIFIED
I MARCH 1945 TM-E 30-451
VIII—105
I MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451
VIII—-106
I MARCH 1945
UNCLXXIED TM-E 30-45I
SMOKE VEHICLE ( Sd. Kfz. I I/l ) GAS-DETECTION VEHICLE ( Sd. Kfz. IO/l)
(9) Gas ClotlGg 41 for dogs. This consists (2) Dccontaminants. (a) Losantin. This
of a hood and suit, to which are sewccl rubhcr high quality, 5tat)iliz~(l. while bleach powder is
footcovcrs. Suit and hood are tnatk of thin, fieltl- used for decontamination uf standard blister
gray, impregnatrtl fabric. The suit. made in @SCS. It is l~~kcd in :trrl (Ii-unis of 5.5 ant1 110
three sizes, is carried inside the faccpicce of the po~ltids capacity.
clog gas mask. (h) Decontaminant 40. ‘I‘llis is a :IGne white
(10) Dog Ixggiilg 41. T h s is made nf ruhl~er or pale cream powder, packed in steel drums
in only one size ant1 consists of foot ant1 leg par’s, holding 132 pound.-. K>pec:ally designed for
fitted with fastctting straljs. nitrogen mustards, it is also a powerful decon-
c. DECOXL~A\ILN.\I‘ION. (1) Rpiplirrrlf. (a) taminant for all blister ga>es.
Mobile decontamination plant. This plant for the (c) Deconlaminant X. A powdered or flaked
d~cotitnminatioti of clothing and cquil)tttent may white solid, supplied in wooden boxes of 175
take the form of motor trucks motitititig a water- l~oti~i~ls callncity. tltis is a substitute for I)ecotl-
tube boiler for the rapid generation of StcCttll, a taminant 40, which is difficult and expensive to
a steam chatnl)~r. and n drying chatnher. produce.
(b) Vehicle for dcc-oIrfarrli7lafiorr of pcrsoliirc~l. (dj Weapon decontamination agent. This in-
A six-wheeled tnotor vehicle fitted n-it11 a large dividual issue is a small bottle of liquid agent in a
box hotly which contains hathing facilitiw for dark brown, bakelite container. It is used for
1SO men per hour. Complctcl\- eqtii1)lwd, it the decontamination of small arms and individual
wciglis &out 0 tons. equiptii~tit.
(c) Vehicle for decontamination of clothing. (e) Weapon decontaminating agent set. This
A six-wheeled vehicle iittetl with a l:trgV cl0sctl is a company issue. It consists ot two bottles of
body which is equipped with a boiler, fans, and liquid in a cat-tll~oai-tl container 14 inches liigli
water tanks. Completely equipped, it \v+$is by 4.7 inches in diameter. The red-capped bottle
al)out 9.7 tons. contains the decontaminating agent, and the black-
capped bottle contains a sub-lance to counteract
(d) Light decontamination vehicle. This open,
the corrosion caused by the agml.
semi-tracked, 1-ton motor j-chicle, equipped with
a tlistt-ilwting hol)pc’r on the war, cat-rirs al)Otlt (f) Horse decontamination canister. A quad-
1,675 pttnds of bulk decontaminant and 16 cl?- rangular cardboard box. with a perforated screen
contamination canisters (22 1~ottnds) for ttw l)y at one end, type 40 holds about 20 ounces of de-
hand. contaminant. It is intended for a team of horses;
t!-pc 41 which lioltls only .ill(0tt 10 ot~ticc’s is
(e) Filter- for tircorrfnlrli2latinlz of wntcr. The
designed for an individual horse. The canister
apl)aratus consists of b-0 lztrts : tlic filter l)ropcr
is cat-rid in the horse gas-ma>k carrier.
and a tank containing water for clcatiitig the
(g) Dog decontamination canister 42. This is
filter. Both arc of shwt it-on co\-cwtl with cwant~l.
a quadrangular cardboard box holding about 10
The filter pro1)er is a tall, c~~lintlrical tank fillctl
ounces of decontaminant.
with activate(l chnrcoal.
d. PROTKCTIVK AI'.KNTS. I 1) I.osantin. Ten
(f) Decontamination plozv. This is a large,
tablets of Losantin are issued m p!a-,tie boxes for
fish-hook-shaped, ditching plow, mounted on a
two-wheeled carriage \vith lui~tttiiatic tires. Over-
all length is 11 Fert 6 inches ; OVCI--all width is 6
fwt 1 inch. The lkw produces a furrow 20
inches witk.
(g) Decontamination pump. This is a metal
m
stirrup p~ttiip, approxitiiatcl~ 23 inches it7 length,
with almtt 9 inches of ruhl~er hose.
(h) I)ccolzttrllfirlnlioil cauisfrl-s. These canis-
ters consist of metal cylintlers, 6.7 inches high
hy 3.3 inches in diatiwtu, and a qtt:idratigular
metal or carcll)oartl container, 14.6 inches high hy
8.2 inches title. Each has a pcrforatc~tl scrccti
in the top for sprinlding the contents, normally
I.osatititi, on a contaminated surface. I'u/ure 1 In.- -Cicninin alkiihnc r\v sak\
VIII—108
1 MARCH 1945
UNCLASSiFIED
TM-E 30-451
i- .1-
*£5" k
ft
decontamination of the skin. Adhesive strips in a metal holder and five tyljc.5 of testing tul)c
of different colors indicate the year of manufac- in a metal carrier.
ture. The issue is four boxes to a soldier, but (6) Carhnn wono.~-ide dcfccfor srf. (a) drlr
reports state that it is being replaced by Protective type. This consists of a field gray, wooden box,
Ointment 41. containing an air pump, 32 tlctyctor tubes, a tube
(2) Protective Ointment 41. This is issued in holder, and accessories.
bottles, with six swabs in an orange bakelite con- (b) Corrrr1:crc-ic7l fypC.. L~entially, this con-
tainer, for decontamination of the skin. sists of an air p u n i and clctcctor tubes in a metal
(3) Alkalitw cyc salve. This is a creamy cylintlrical carrier. Though a <‘Illim~rcinl detector,
white salve in either a metal foil tube or a white it is used in armv iortificatioll>. \\7i~n air con-
jar. It is used for the treatment of eyes con- taining carbon motioxitl~ is dr;t\\-n through a tube
taminated with blister gases. from either set, the contents 0i the tulx changes
(4) Inhalant awpoules alld swabs. Five in- color.
halant ampoules and six swabs are packed in a (7) Gas detector equipment set. This consists
of a metal carrier containing an air pttinp, a fiw
tlctector tubes of each t!.l>c’, ar5ine cl<,tcctor paI)er.
a smnll detector i‘nnis;ter, and accessories.
(S) Spray dcti-c/or cards. These stiff paper
cards, packed 20 to a carton, are coated on both
sides with a paint containing a (11-e which changes
color in contact \vith liquid blister gastss.
(9) Detector powder pump.. This is a ribbed,
sheet-metal box container having an internally
viii—no
I MARCH 1945
UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30.451
VIII—III
UNCLASSIFIED
I MARCH 1945 TM-E 30-451
(6) Gas alarm dwicc. This is a whistling ( 9 ) Collf~c.tizlc~ pr~t~~c‘tor. Tl~is is installed in
cartridge which is fired from a signal pistol. It air raid shelters and other fixed installations. It
rises a h u t 50 feet, giving off either a whitish or consists of a pump, eithc,r cl~~.Iric;Llly or hand
green light and eniitting a high-pitched whistle driven, a nidianical canider, a chemical cmistu,
audihlc for ahout 400 yards. and necessary connc~ctions for tlrn\ving outsi(le
(7) Aufi-yn.s pathay ~~r~~tcriaZ. T h i s s t r o n g air through the canisters.
paper, imprc~gnatctl with a tar-like substance, is (10) Gas protective case fur j~i(/c’c)~l.s. This is
prc‘paretl in rolls, approximately 4 feet witlc and a case of four c u m l u r t m c l l : s , each with a11 inlet
55 yards long. Tt is stated to bc of sufficient tube a n d filter,
strength to allow 200 men to cross a contaminated
arca iii safety. 3. War Sases
(8) Gas warning flag set. This is a pistol- a. (IEXEKAI.. German war gases, generally
shaped cast’ containing 20 I,-shaped iron rods. 20 speaking, have rctaiiiul thi,ir \\'<>rld War 1 clnssi-
warning flags (~~cllow with black skull and crossctl fication. However, "crosses" arc believed to have
bones imprinted), and a roll of yellow marking been superseded by the terms "rings" or "bands '
t;lpC. for purposes of nomenclature. I he appearance
of the FE 12 canister suggests that the Germans
are aware of the I~ot~llti;llitir- of hytlroc\-anic
acid (XC), cyanogt~n chloride i CK ) and al-sine
(SAA). Tests show that this c:lllistcr affortls fair
protection against these g;iws. I‘lw Ckrm;ms are
known to favor the coml)it~atic~ll of gasps. Thus,
a vesicant toxic smoke is a combination of "blue"-
and "yellow’'-l)antl gasps. and the nature of the
chemical filling would be indicated by two bands
of the correspontling cc~lors. "(;rcu1" ant1 "yrl-
low" bands would indicate a cllckill~ gas with
vcsicant proputies. A double "yellow"' hand
woultl indicate a v~sicalit gas of enhanced per-
sistence.
/•igure 125.—Set of German collective protectors.
VIII—112
I MARCH 1945 itO TM.E 30.45l
VIII—I13
UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451
I t # R C H 1945
*IO cm If’gr. 40 Nb. A-b. 14’. 40. lirick rul or 0lif.e ,crc<‘II;
*lO cm Wgr. 40 Wkb. Nh. Nb. TV. 40. Nb in white with lon» burster tube.
20 CM Wgr. 40 Nb. 20 cm Spigot Mortar (le. Ld, ’.40). Lsed by the l.hgincI1s.
l3ectrically fired. Range 700 meters
38 cm Wgr. 40 Nb. 38 cm Spigot Mortar (S. Ld.q. 12’. 40). Used bv the
* I t should be noted that the H E shell for the 10 cm mortar 40 has stencilled on the tail "1(1 cm Nh. il'. -l'i", due to the fart
that the m o r t a r i s the 'LNebelwerfer 40", i.e., " s m o k e " projector.
Figure 128.
VIII—I14
I MARCH 1945 TM-E 30-45I
approximately 86 pounds are provided for 150- erators" due to the iact that they produce smoke
mm self-propelled guns, known as the "Grizzly 11y the "hot" process, namely, by the combustion
Bear" and the "Bumble Bee". There are also of the smoke niaterials. They may be stationary,
smoke and incendiary shells for the 150-mm thrown by hand or rifle, or hy dischargers mount-
heavy infantry gun. cd on tanks. Also. they may be fastened on floats
c. MORTARS. The basic weapon of German or buoys for amphibious operations.
chen1ical warfare troops is the 105mm mortar, (2) S11rokr Calltllr 39 (L%r21.K.39). This
two models of which are known. In addition to smoke generator consists of a metal can, 5v~
the 81-mm mortar, the Germans have a 12-cm inches high by 3 ; / inches in diameter, provided
mortar that is identical with the Finnish 12-cm with 1101~s in the t(q) for smoke emission. It
mortar made by Tampella. They also have weighs approximately 4% pounds and is painted
copied the Russian 12-cm mortar. Revolutionary green, with t\vo \vllite bands around the body.
in design are the 20-cm and 3%cm spigot mortars. The Berger-type anloke mixture, consisting of
While these mortars are primarily intended for two parts of zinc (lust to three parts of hexa-
the destruction of obstacles, minefields, and gun
chlorcthanc, is fired by a pull type igniter and
emplacements, smoke shells arc provided and
burns from 4 to 7 nlirlut~s.
there is apparently no reason why gas or incen-
(3) Smoke Cylinder (Rauchrohr). Designed
diary fillings could not be substituted for HE.
primarily for WC against tanks, this munition
d. HOWITZERS. Smoke shells are provided for consists of a cylinder 10 inches long with a diam-
tlvo types of light field howitzers of 105-mm
eter of 1 inch. It contains 7% ounces of a smoke
caliber and three types of 150-111111 heavy field
mixture composed of zinc. magnesium, and hexa-
howitzers. Projectiles weighing 80 pounds filled
chlorcthane. Its total weight is 11 ounces. Ig-
\vith blister and choking gases, for the heavy
nited by a pull type igniter. it burns 3 to 4 min-
field howitzers are reported.
utes, emitting a dark gray smoke.
e. PROJECTORS. TWO general types of rocket
projectors have n1ade their appearance during the (1) Long-Burning Smoke Generator (Lange-
current war: the Xrbclwerfry (literally, smoke kcrxr 112, ,VO.h*L 42). This long burning smoke
projector) and the Schzrcres TW~fg~riit (heavy generator is a green. cylindrical metal container
throwing apparatus). For details of these wea- \vith an over-all height of 19 inches and a diam-
pons see Section YII of Chapter VII. rter of 6:;; inches. It contains approximately 36
f. SMOKE GENERATORS. (1) C;cllcl-al. Smoke p0t”‘ds of a smoke iiiixturc’ consisting of zinc,
generators are often referred to as "thermo-gen- zinc (or ammoniulll) chloride, and hexachlore-
VIII—I15
. f-.r-.tr • ••-
h'it/urc 13!.--Smoke cylinders, Rauchrolire Xh. 39. lu/urc 132. - German .\'J;; 'i'n i/; .aid > ylmder.
VIII—I16
I MARCH 1945 TM-E 30-451
VIII—117
I MARCH 1945 TM-E 30-451
for forcing the fuel out of the container, a pro- onlp 47 pounds. Hmvever. thtt decrease in weight
jecting tube with a nozzle at its end, and an ig- has been accomplished by a one-third reduction
niting system to set the jet of fuel aflame. The in fuel, as compared with t11e Model 35. The
principle types developed by the Germans are as range is unaltered.
follows: (3) Flame tllrozcw, poYtal~I~-, ~Jodcl Il. This
(1) Flame thrower, portable, Model 3.5. This consists of two cylinders, one for fuel and the
is the type with which Germany started the other for compressed nitrc~gc>n. The complete
present war. It is a modified version of the 1918 apparatus weighs 35 to 40 ~~ound1;. Ignition is
model. Both fuel and compressed nitrogen con- by hydrogen, Lvhich flows over an electrically
tainers are housed in one cylinder. The nitrogen heated wire at the nozzle, \vhczre it is lighted and
is used for propulsion of the fuel, which is ignited in turn sets the oil afire. F~I-ing is by the "hot"
at the nozzle by a jet of hydrogen flame. Both method : the oil is ignited each time the trigger
ejection and ignition of the fuel are controlled by is pulled: thus, the target can llot be first sprayed
the same trigger placed on the top of the gun. It with oil and then set afire. Five blasts can be
can fire ten one-second bursts as far as 30 yards. fired, producing a flame of 700 to 800 degrees
Weighing 79 pounds it is too heavy for a single centigrade.
man in action. (4) Flalrze thvnxw, ~OI-tnl~lc. 3Jodel 42. In
(2) Flam thro-wev, portable, ATode 40. This appearance it is ,sinlilnr to Alo(lcl 41, but is slight-
is a "lifebuoy-type" flame thrower, weighing ly shorter and differing in one essential point:
VIII—I18
UNCLASSIFIED
I MARCH 1945 TM-E 30-45I
the ignition system. The hot-spot hydrogen jet (1) Flame thrower fin a,~niorctl car (half-
ignition system of the older model has beei re- hfk) (Sd Kfc 251.) ‘l‘wo flame throwers are
placed by the cartridge system. This consists of mounted on the rear oi an ordinary 3-ton half-
a cartridge magazine in which there are ten rim- track armored vehicle, but are controlled from the
less, blank, 9-mm pistol cartridges, loaded, fired, front seat nest to the tlri\-cr. The flame throwers
and ejected in automatic succession at each pull ma\- be traversed 160 tlcgrccs. Length of hose
of the trigger. Since the fuel ejection and the is 11 yards. The tank holds 185 gallons of the
firing mechanisms are operated by the same trig- usriZY 7Zrman flame thro\ver-fuel. A centrifugal
ger the result is the "hot-firing", wherein prior primp propels fuel \vitli a consumption rate of 2
drenching of the target with oil is impossible. gallons per sccontl. TIRE fuel is sufficient for 80
The jet of the fuel is set afire at the instant it bursts of 1 to 2 secontl.~ each at a range of 40
leaves the nozzle. The apparatus weighs about to 50 \-artls. The weapon is fired by an electro-
30 pounds empty and up to 40 pounds full. It gasoline system.
holds approximately 7% gallons of fuel, a black (8) Flame thrower on Pancerjdger 38 Chassis.
oil smelling like creosote. The fuel ejection is (Ir. PC. Jijg. .;A Chassis) The flame thrower is
by compressed nitrogen gas under a pressure of mounted offside on the iront of the self-propelled
441 po~mds per square inch. There is no reduc- Panscr jiigu 38. The iuc~l cal)ncity is 154 gallons.
ing valve on the nitrogen line. The oil is suf- with a consumption ratr of 1.X gallons per second.
ficient for 5 to 6 blasts, each lasting 3 seconds, Fuel release is controlled by hand through a 14-
reaching a range of 25 to 35 yards. mm nozzle. The range i:, 55 to 66 yards.
(5) Pal-a-Flame Throeaw (Einstoss Flmlmrt~- m. STATIOXARY FLAME THROWERS. (1) GEW
werfer). This is another variety of the portable cral. These are called .Ihwehr Fla~i~rncnzcvrfer
flame thrower. It is the standard one used by by the C&malls, a nomc.nclaturc that implies the
the paratroops and also is used to a great extent defensive nature of the \v~al)oiis. They are also
by the SS. It weighs 23% pounds. The fuel is known as static flame t1lrcnver.s. emplacecl flame
the usual black liquid used in other German throwers, iougasse flank throwers. and flame
flame throwers. It is fired from the shoulder, thrower mines. The latter nallle is probably due
throws a flame 38 yards long, lasting 2 to 3 sec- to the fact that they arc I)uried directly behind
onds. It is said to possess a constant, steady minefields or are tlisper~ed among the mines to
pressure producing an even flame. Also, it is "thicken up" the clef~nse and fired by remote
claimed that it can be aimed accurately. control. Usually they are emplaced behind wire
(6) Trailer flame throzew~. This is a flame entanglements facing in tllr direction of probable
thrower that bears a resemblance to a "field gun", attack to cover road blc~.ks. landing beaches, har-
since it is mom~ted on a chassis and is towed by bor walls. and to act ah mo\-able obstacles at a
a motor vehicle. Fitted on the frame is a box- gap in tkiense lvalls;. ‘l‘licy are 1)uried at inter-
shaped sheet metal body which contains the fuel vals of 12 to 30 yards, \\cl1 cauiouflaged, leaving
only the horizontal nni/~l~ llrojecting above the
tank, the pump, and the engine. The fuel tank
ground. Groups of t~~~plac~tl flame throwers are
is 4 feet 111% inches by 1 foot 9% inches, and
controlled from a centl-al 1)oint. usually a small
holds 40 gallons of creosote oil. The pump is a
pillbox, and arc operated either by remote electric
gasoline engine-driven, centrifugal pump. The control or by trip-wire ii1c.ch:inism.
flame gun is mounted on a spigot on top of the
fuel tank to facilitate traversing; the gun itself is (2) Emplaced flame thrower (Alnvehrflam-
menz^crfer 42). (a) Cencral. This apparatus
carried on trunnions to permit elevating and de-
consists of iut~l c0iitaillc.r. flame tube, and propel-
pressing. It can be traversed 45 tlcgrces each
lent cotitain~r. Nt~t5~ar~~ accessories are slow
way and elevated between + 3 0 degrees and —10
burning po\v~l~r l)rol)ellailt, cl&ric squibs, wire,
degrees. The Cue1 is ignited by an electric spark storage batter-y. and fuel. It has an over-all
and the flame will last 24 seconds at a range of height of 2 feet 6 in&e>,
45 to 50 yards, using 1.46 gallons of fuel per sec-
(1)) Furl rontairw. The fuel container is a
ond. It has an over-all length of 7 feet 11 inches
cylindrical tank 21 in~hc~s high and 11va inches
and weighs 900 pounds. When operating it in diameter. It has irony carrying handles, and a
makes a noise which can be heard easily at a capacity of 8 gallons. ‘l‘he fuel is a black viscid
distance of 300 yards. liquid smelling like coal tar. It is a mixture of
VIII—II9
UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451
pitch and light. nictlium, ant1 heavy oils. It is duced by the explosion of ilic propelling charge
a little- thicker than the usual flame-thrower oil. ejects the itlc~l.
l’hc fuel t a d lx~ltls 7.7 gallons. (e) Performance. Both electrical squibs fire
(c) Flame tube. The flame tnhe is a 2-inch simultaneously into the pre>>ure chamber. One
n:t.tal pile rising vertidly and centrally fmm ignites the propellent powder which generates
mar the lmttom of the i11c1 container; aitcr p s s - pressure to force the fuel out through the flame
ing through the top it cumes ant1 exten(ls hori- tube: the other ignites the fuel as it passes out
zontally a tlist:lncc of 30 inclics. ‘I’his girts the of the 110zz1c. ‘I‘l>c~rc is an igIlitioii colll]x)sition
of aluminum and barium nitrate at the nozzle.
apparatus a :otal hciglit of 30 inches.
The flame, 5 yards wide and ,1 yards high, lasts
((1) Plv,JvlImf rollltrilrrl-. This is a cylinder l/-j seconds. The range is .•>() yards.
10 inches high by 2^g inches in di;tnlcter. It con-
n. F L A M K - T I I R O W E R TANKS. (]) General.
tains slmv-lmrning po&cr. an ignition squih. and
These are tanks in which tlame throwers are
firing n-ircs. T & propellent pmulcr is tither mounted. The flame thrower and its accessories,
black powder or a mixture of nitrocellulose and the fuel tanks, projecting hose, gas cylinders,
diethylene glycol &nitrate. The pressure pro- pump, engiiws, ant1 ignition svstcm are all so
VIII—120
I MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451
housed in the turret that the vehicles preserve the tains an at-senic filling, identified by the Germans
external appearance of ordinary tanks. They with a blue cross.
have undergone several modifications and some (2) SU-Kilo:p~arll (1iii porrlltls) dzrstard Gas
are obsolescent. Bard (GC SO). Tllis I~~tnb has a highly sensi-
(2) Flame-Thrower Tank Pz. Kpfw. II (F) tive impact fuze, \vith vither a small bursting
(Sd. Kfs. 122). This tank has two flame throw- charge for ground cont;~ll~inatio~l or a large burst-
ing projectors, each mounted in a small turret ing charge for antipersolrll~l effect.
well forward on the track guards but operated (3) 250-Kilogram (5% pounds) Mustard Gas
electrically from panels in the turret. The tur- Bomb (KC 2.50 GE). ‘I‘liis l~oiiii~ has a time fuze
rets have a traverse of 180 degrees, elevation of which is set to function about 330 feet above the
20 degrees, and depression of 10 degrees. ground. The bomb will contaminate an area of
Seventy gallons of fuel are kept in two tanks about 6.000 squ:m yartl ~ It is possible that the
mounted externally on the track guards. The Germans have gas I~oml~~ of larger caliber. A
fuel tanks are protected by shields. Fuel is pro- "green cross" (/CC 500) I)omb has been reported
jected by compressed nitrogen. It is sufficient with a choking-gas filling.
for 80 shots of 2 to 3 seconds duration at a range b. SMOKE BO>IB~. (1) K
C 50 Smoke Bomb.
of 35 yards. Ignition is by acetylene flame. This I~omh has a fi~ltl gr:~\r body with white nose.
(3) Flamc-Throwcr Tank Ps.Kpfiu.III, Model It may have four white, vertical stripes or t\vo
L. A flame thrower in the turret replaces the white bands painted OH the body. Its over-all
normal 50-mm gun (5 cm Kw.K.39), which it length is 2 feet 7 inches.
resembles outwardly. Traverse is 360 degrees, and (2) XC SO IITC. ‘Hiis bonh is for use on
elevation is from —10 degrees to -j-20 degrees. water. It has a field grav or silver body with
The fuel is a black, sticky oil smelling of creosote yellow nose. Four ycli(I\\‘ vertical stripes may
and is sufficient for 70 to 80 shots of 2 to 3 appear on the Lilly. It ii. 3 icet 7 inches long
seconds duration. The range is 55 to 65 yards. and 7% inches in tlial1rcstc.r. The filling is a
The fuel, 225 gallons, is carried in tanks mounted Rergcr Rlisture or hes;~clilcl~-eth;tne.
inside the right and left side. (3) n’C 2.50 S. l’hi~ bomb is similar to the
Flam. C 250. Tt is pailltc<l silver with a lvhite
5. Aerial Weapons band and h-C 2.50 painted between the filling plug
a. CHEMICAL BOMBS. (1) 10-Kilogram (22 and suspension socket. ‘I’he no;e is white, and
pounds) Fragmentation Bomb (GC 10). This is the tail is olive drab. There are two sizes of
a toxic smoke and high explosive bomb. It con- this bomb, one \\-cighing -‘II’ p o n d s and the other
VIII—121
I MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451
418 p i n & . The filling is chlorsttlionic acid a11 d. SPRAY TANKS. All German aircraft smoke
sulphurtrioxide. sprayers. S 100, S 125, S 2iH), and .V 300, are
c. INCENDIARY B O ~ S S . (1) I-Kilogram simil similar in construction. They make use of a
Specimens of this bomb may bear tlcsignntions smoke acid mixture and are operated by gas pres-
Bl El, Bl El Z, and Bl El ZB. All types sure. The sprayer is a cylindrical apparatus
weigh about 2.75 pounds each. The hotly is paintetl housing an acid container, a small cylinder or bot-
aluminum or grcrn. The diameter is 2 inches, tle of compressed air, air lines with valve, and
and over-all length 13s inches. T i l e is emission pipe, and nozzle. It is carried external-
0.44 pounds of thermite. ly on the aircraft and can he jettisoned at will.
(2) 2-KilqmvrI Tourb. This I m m l ~ h a s The smoke acid is ejected bv compressed air at
ignation 122 E7 Z and weighs al)out 4J/ pounds. 45 pounds per square inch. It may be filled to
The body color is aluminum or light gwvn. 4 . 5 two levels. When charged at low level, it has a
filling inclutlcs T,UT or amatol in atltlition to t l v 0 weight of 551 pounds: charged at high level it
mite. The diameter is 2 inches, and \ veight weighs 827 pounds, holding 4S2 and 758 pounds
length is 20.7 inches. respectively. The tiring is done electrically by
(3) Oil I7zrclldiary Bomb (Il?YWd C 50 A). operating a magnetic valve. Kmission may be
This homb weighs 99 pounds. It o perat ing interrupted and re-started at will.
gray, with red under the tail, a red band erruldctl
the body, and a yellow stripe on the tail cone.
The body diameter is 8 inches, and the over-all Section VII. FIELD RANGES AND
length 43.2 itlchcs. The filling is 15 1 (3.3 COOKING EQUIPMENT
gallons) of a mixture of 81) per cenl l)enzWe, 10
per cent i-ul)hvr, and 4 per cent l~hosl~horus. I. 1. General
has a bursting charge of picric acid. \ arious types of field ranges and other cooking
(4) I~zcrntliary Bomb C SO Il. This is iden- equipment are issued to units of the German
tical in marking, dimensions, and body color Tvith Army. The most important of these include:
the c 50 A. Ho\vewr, it is roll ing white rolling field kitchens, field ranges, tireless cookers,
phosphorus, and this is indicated by a ant 1 and cooking outfit, 15.
bottle painted on the bomb.
2. Rolling Field Kitchens
(5) Flam. C 2.50. This bomb weighs 2 .
pounds. It is painted green with a red nose, a. GENERAL. Horse-drawn rolling field kitch-
two blue tail rings, and t\vo red bad;.‘ The ens are issued to non-mechanized units. The
diameter of the hotly is 2 inches, and l a r g e large rolling field kitchen will serve 125 to 225
length is 64% inches. It contains 16 gallons of men; the small rolling field kitchen, 50 to 125
oil, hveiglling 110 pounds, coniposed of cl-ut le men. Smaller units do not receive field kitchens
aluminum, magnesiulll powder, ant1 wootlmeal- but get either tireless cookers or cooking out-
petroleunl igniting Inixturc. The 1)urs;ting Chl-gC fits, 15.
is 2.6 pounds of picric acid and TXT.
(6) F/am. C 2.50 B and Flalrl. C Z.50 c‘. These
l~oml)s are i(lentical \\ith the I;la~r~. C 2.70 except
markings. The type B and C bonll)s arc pailltetl
Clark l)lue or gray and hart two red bands encir-
cling the body.
(7) Brand C 250 A. This bomb is painted
ficltl gray xl-ith a red undertail. It measures 14Vj
inches in diameter and 64% inches in length.
The filling, 15.8 gallons, is a mixture of 87.7 per
cent petroleum solvent, 11.7 per cent polystyrene,
and 0.5 per cent phosphorus. The bursting
charge is picric acid.
(8) Flam. C. 500 C. Tllis. bomb is painted blue I3S.—The roUinij field kitchen ready for
or gray and weighs 440 to 460 1~~~1~~1s.
VIII—122
I MARCH 1945
UNCLAS2"."1ED TM-E 30-451
‘All— l23
I MARCH ,945 UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451
Figure 141.—Small field range mounted in truck. Figure 142.—Large field range mounted in truck.
1~. LIHCREK AND TRAILER. The rolling field The range normally is used as a fireless cooker,
kitchen consists of two parts: the detachable especially when underway. I'ires are built in the
limber and the trailer, on which the field range fire boxes, but as soon as steam starts to escape
is mounted. It is drawn either by two or four from the safety valve t o e s c a p e and
horses. The limber, on which the driver and allowed to go out. This practice both saves fuel
cook may ride only during rapid marches, is used and prevents revealing the unit's position by the
to transport most of the supplies, including the smoke.
extra iron rations which are carried for emer- (2) Stew kettle. The main part of the range
gency use only. After the kitchen has been set is a large stew kettle, a kind of double boiler
up, the limber may be used alone to get additional which has a second slightly larger shell around
supplies. Under some circumstances the rolling the food kettle. A special liquid between the
field kitchen without the limber is issued to motor- inner and outer kettles keeps the heat evenly
ized units, and additional supplies are carried in distributed and prevents burning. The double
the light truck used to move the kitchen. shell cover is provi t a lct l The
c. COOKING UTENSILS. (1) Range. The actual capacity of the kettle of the large range is
range itself, mounted on the trailer, can burn 200 liters (53 gallons), and its cooking capacity
either coal, coke, briquettes, or wood. The fol- is 175 liters (46 gallons). The small range holds
lowing is considered the normal issue of fuel: 125 liters (33 gallons) and can cook about 110
Large SwalI liters (29 gallons) a bou t 1 1 0 meat,
Field Kitchen Field Kitchen or vegetablrs at one time.
Briquettes 187 pounds 66 pounds
(3) Coffee kettle. The cnfTee kettle has a sin-
or Wood ...... 82 pounds 29 pounds
or Briquettes 77 pounds 33 pounds gle shell but a double cover with a safety valve.
and Wood 48 pounds 13 pounds Ninety liters (24 gallons) of coffee can be pre-
VIII—124
I MARCH 1945
UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451
pared at one time in the large range, and 60 liters provided for units of less than 60 men. The
(16 gallons) in the small one. There is a faucet large fireless cooker outfit, which weighs 77
to draw off the coffee. There is also a broiler pounds, has an insert kettle of 25 liters capacity,
in some of the ranges. All have a separate fire \vhile the small one, \vcighing 53 pounds, has a
box, but use the same chimney. pot of 15 liters capacity. A cooking fork,
(4) Food containers. After the food has butcher's knife, and ladle, as well as a coffee
been prepared, it may be transported forward in sieve complete the outfit.
insulated food containers, six of which are pro-
vided with each large rolling field kitchen, four 5. Cooking Outfit, I5
with each small one. These containers hold 12 This 29-pound cooking nutfit is issued to groups
liters (about \2y2 quarts) and weigh about 18 smaller than those using the fireless cook-
pounds. They consist of an inner and an outer er. It consists of three nesting pots of 9, 10,
container with air space between them to act as and 12 liters (2 to 2>1 gallons) capacity, with a
insulation. Special carrying harnesses may be ladle, 10 plates, and 10 combination fork-spoons.
at to the rings at the four corners of the
back. 6. Bakery Equipment
3. Field Ranges a. BAKE OVEN TRAILER. The German field
Field ranges are provided for motorized units. bake oven consists of a trailer with draw-hearth
These consist of the same type ranges as used type ovens, heated by the steam-pipe principle.
with the rolling field kitchen mounted on a stand Seven trailers are issued per bakery company.
in the back of a truck. The supplies which ac-
a the r e are packed in a special chest. b. DOUGH MIXER. The German dough mixer,
mounted on a single axle trailer, is operated by
4. Fireless Cookers a gasoline engine. TWO are authorized per
Either large or small fireless cookers may be Laker)- company.
VIII—125
I MARCH 1945 TM-E 30-451
UNCLASSIFIED
CHAPTER IX
IX—I
UNCLASSIFIED
I MARCH 1945 TM-E 30-451
2. Service Uniform is used for all ranks. The base color is the warm.
a. GENERAL. Whereas many armies have both field green known to the Germans as "field gray"
dress and service uniforms, in the German Army (feldgrau). Collar and cuffs are covered \vith a
the service coat (Wafle~ock) and trousers serve dark bluish-green imitation velvet, which also ap-
as the basis for the following varieties of dress: pears as the base for any sleeve insignia that may
be worn. The front edge of the eight-button coat
(1) Gesellschaftamug. This is the dress uni-
opening, the lower edge of the collar, and the up-
form, which in turn is divided into g~osscn (cere-
per part of the cuffs are piped in the color of the
monial) and kleine (ordinary) Gesellsclzafta~img.
wearer's arm. Fancy silver patches with buttons
Long trousers and high black shoes always are
are worn on the cuffs. These patches, together
worn with this type of uniform. Officers may
with the collar patches, are each mounted on a
wear white jackets during appropriate seasons.
velvet base dyed in the color of arm. Noncom-
(2) Azlsgrhaxug. This is a type of uniform
missioned officers wear silver braid on the upper
which might be termed "walking-out dress". In
edge of collar and cuffs, and around the shoulder
the peacetime Army, it was a most important uni-
straps. They therefore present an even gaudier
form, since it gave noncommissioned officers and
appearance than commissioned officers. Officers
enlisted men an opportunity to display themselves
and noncommissioned officers of the Reichswehr
while on pass. It includes service cap, service
may wear Rcich.wehr coats \vith proper insignia
coat, long piped trousers, high black shoes, and
as service dress (Plate I I ) . These coats also are
black belt with saber (for senior noncommissioned
worn sometimes in the field. Though service coats
officers) or decorative bayonet (for junior non-
are of wool, officers may have cotton ones pri-
commissioned officers and men). Decorations and
vately tailored for summer wear.
awards may be worn, together with a colored tas-
sel on the sword or bayonet. For officers and se- c. SERVICE TROUSERS. The service trousers or
nior noncommissioned officers, this tassel indi- breeches made of bluish-gray wool cloth, are
cates rank; for others, it indicates by its color piped along the sides in the color of arm. On
the wearer's unit within the regiment. both sides of this piping General Staff and general
(3) Meldearlmg. This uniform, much like officers add a broad stripe in the proper color.
"walking-out dress", is worn on minor occasions. Officers may wear service breeches in the field.
(4) Dienstaxxig. This is the service dress d. SERVICE CAP. The service cap is similar
proper, worn when attending classes, on duty in to the U. S. Army service cap, but is upswept to
an office, or performing other duties not calling give the wearer the appearance of height. The
for the field uniform. visor is black, with a silvercorded chin strap for
(5) Paradeawug. This uniform is similar to officers, and a black leather strap for noncommis-
"walking-out dress", but resembles the field uni- sioned officers and men. The cap band is of dark,
form in that steel helmet, boots, and (for enlisted bluish-green imitation velvet (blue-gray for
men) cartridge pouches are worn. Sonderfiilzrer), piped top and bottom in the color
b. SERVICE COAT. The service coat (Plate I ) , of arms. Piping also appears around the crown
which forms the basis for all these uniforms, is of the cap. The cap cover is field-gray. The na-
highly decorative. The same basic formfitting coat tional emblem (an eagle, stylized differently for
the different Armed Forces and Party organiza-
tions), and below it the national colors (black,
white, and red) surrounded by oak leaves, are
worn on the cap front. Officers often wear serv-
ice caps in the field.
3. Field Uniform
Since anticipated economic conditions precluded
the provision of both service and field uniforms
for all German Army personnel, the German
Figure I.—Army national emblem, worn on the right Army field uniform was designed to perform the
breast of the field aud service coat alzd on the frolzt of
caps. The eagle is silver or gray, on a dark green back- dual purpose of field and service uniform. It
ground. The background is black for the black uniform. therefore retains as many of the morale-raising
Navy personvael wear a similar gold eagle. features of the service uniform as possible. In
IX—2
I MARCH 1945 NCLASS1F1E0 TM-E 30-451
Iyigure 5.—Field gray wiform for crews of self-propelled gn//s. 7‘1~s~ wits uox* zereir death's Ireud collar patches.
abscncc since mid-1933 of pocket pleats. and the 1943 the German Army was issued field uniform
use of straight-edge instead of pointed pocket trouw-s with built-in (,loth belt after the style of
flaps. The color of the cloth alsn twds to\vartls a _Ifi-ika ii0rp.r clothing. The decision to drop sus-
gray rather than a warm green. (Compare in pendw- trousers was governed by t\vo consider-
l’late I the private in field uniform, a-ho lvears ations: the iml~racticnl,;lit~- of suspenders when
the prewar coal, with the first sergeant in mom- onlv shirt mid trouscr- are worn, and the incon-
tain uniform, who wears the later type of coat.) wnient and. iin(ler colllllnt conditions. dangerous
Nwessity finally has compelled adoption of the nccehsity of renio\.ing tli? coat and battle equip-
Motlcl 1944 coat (see Fi.qurc 3), the main ap- ment to let tlo~vn the tl-ollser5. These trousers arc
parent tlifferenccs of which are tailoring motliii- still cut high. Like ski or mountain trousers, the
cations 1)ermitting the use of less skillctl labor legs are tapered to fit illto leggings or shoe-tops.
and the conservation of materials. 13) O:wcoat. TIIC tloubl~-breasted six-but-
(2) Tm~scrs. (a) Prewar trousers. Until ton, \\-ool-rayon overcoat is standard for all ranks,
1933, full trousers of the same field-gray m a t & d cxccpt that grncrnl offiwrs \\‘ear gold buttons and
as the field uniform coat were issued to the Ger- have red lapel facings / ant1 administrative offi-
man Army. Suspenders are used with this type cials in ,gc7icr;&office~ gl-ntlcs wear dark grew
of trousctrs which have two sets of suspender but- facings). Collars, once of dark, bluish-green imi-
tons s(wn in place. Nan)- of thcw trousers have tation velvet, now tend to be plain ficltl-gray wool.
winforc~ments in the seat. iVan\ have semi- The coat, which is cut narro\v at the waist, flares
brcwhes legs, so that the leg ends easily may be at the bottom, and has t\\w side slash pockets. The
fitted into the marching boot. Two slanting but- ordinary leather belt nlay be xvorn, run through
tonctl front pockets, a buttoned hip pocket, and a slits on the sitlc so that it runs inside the rear of
watch pocket with ring are provided. The trousers the o\-ercoat \\-ithout illterf~~ring with the cloth
may be tightened at the waist by means of two belt at the back. ()vt.rcoats have degenerated in
tapes and a metal buckle in the rear. quality of matc~rial in the same manner as the field
(M Belted trousers (Rundbundlwsen). In coats.
IX—5
I MARCH 1945
UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451
IX—6
I bihJ~3-4 194~
UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451
lower edge rimmed with leather. Each legging is in black cloth. Tnsigilin and braid for officcbrs
secured on the outside with two leather straps follow the field-gray cal) pattern.
with metal buckles. (2) Body clotlzi~ry. (a) Coat. The black.
(4) High shoes (Sclz~ziirsclzz&). High laced double-breastetl, wool-rayon coat issued with
leather service shoes have always been part of the black uniform is kno\vn as the "field jacket"
the field uniform issued by the German Army. (Fcldjackc) It is illubtratcd in I’late II. Recent
They now replace the boot entirely, instead of jackets lack the piping on the edge of the collar,
serving as alternate footgear. and some ma). have large pockets on the left
d. FATIGUE OR WORK CLOTHING. Prior to breast. The coat is made of the same quality
the war and during its first 2 years, individuals of wool-rayon cloth as the field uniform. It is
might be issued both a lvork suit and a fatigue dyed black to conceal dirt and grease stains. A
suit with the field uniform. Generally only one metal death's head is worn on each collar patch.
was issued each man, the work suit being reserved (b) TI-ozrsr~s. The black, wool-rayon trousers
for those with heavy tasks, suc11 as motor main- of the black uniform are referred to as "Field
tenance. Both are cut in the same style, but the trousers" (FAdlloscll1, They rrsemble the later
work suit is of unbleached linen woven as herring-, type of normal fieltl uniform trousers in cut,
bone twill, while the fatigue suit is of a lighter with ski-pant legs. ‘l‘hey are fitted with tapes,
linen herringbone twill dyed a rush green (Plate however, so that they may be bound to the leg
I I I ) . In 1943 a fatigue coat, cut in the style of at the ankle.
the field uniform coat, was issued. This latter (c) L’r~dcmear. Lntlerwear consists of long
type, often of a cloth containing a high percentage drawers and a collared tricot shirt-undershirt with
of rayon, may serve as a summer uniform. black necktie. Until 1944. this shirt was gray.
e. ISSUE. The field uniform as described above Issue since that date has lien green, and therc-
is issued to all troops except those requiring fore identical with underwear for the normal
special uniforms or special clothing issue because field uniform.
of unusual tasks or because they are expected to (d) ?helo-piccc cozfcrall. For camouflage pur-
operate under abnormal terrain or weather con- poses, for a summer uniform. and for a work
ditions. garment a two-piece coverall of rush-green cotton
4. Special Uniforms and Clothing or rayon is issued. It is cut identically with the
black wool uniform.
Special clothing issued to German Army troops
varies from minor changes or additions to the (3) Footgm. Standard black service shoes,
field uniforms, to uniforms of completely differ- long socks. and foot\vraI)s are worn. The use
ent cut, color, and material. of boots with the black uniform is contrary to
a. BLACK UNIFORM. Prior to the \var, a black German regulations.
uniform was furnished crews of German Army b. FIELD-GRAY UNIFORM FOR ARMORED-VEHI-
tanks and armored cars. This uniform, which CLE CREWS. X wool-rayon field-gray uniform,
has undergone slight changes, now is worn by identical in cut with the black uniform, was
crews of "Elephants". by tank-destroyer and issued in the spring of 1940 to crews of assault
assault-gun crews in Panzer and Pn~~xr Grcna- guns. This uniform is worn by the crews of
dicr divisions, and by tank and armored-car crews. the assault gum and tank destroyers of infantry,
(1) Hcadgrav. (a) Bcwt. Until the winter light infantry, and nlountain infantry divisions.
of 1939-40, troops wearing the black uniform The uniforms bear a death's head on each collar
wore a black beret, which served as a crash hel- patch. Crews of armored trains and of self-
met. This helmet type of headgear proved un- propelled infantry and antiaircraft guns wear the
necessary. same uniform with the usual field uniform collar
(1~) Black field cap. During the winter of patches ([‘late I I ) . A two-piece, rush-green
1939-40, a black, wool-rayon field cap, in the coverall. identical with that issuctl to troops wear-
style of the old-style Army field cap. replaced ing the black uniform. also is issued to those wear-
the black beret. ing the fieltl-gray ~III~form for armored-vehicle
(c) 1931 black jicld rnp (Eilllzritsllziit,“r), crews.
Simultaneously with the introduction of the field- c. MOUNTAIN UNIFORM. The mountain uni-
gray Einheitsmiit~e for the normal field uniform, form is similar to the normal field uniform with
the black uniform received a similar visored cap the following exceptions:
IX—7
I MARCH 1945
UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451
f. SUXIMER UNIFORM. Prior to 19A1, no uni- ing became obvious. th< German Army attempted
form for field sun7nier wear was issued. Since numerous improvisation-, based on manv varieties
that date, unifornis clevclopetl for the .Ij‘r-ifi of civilian, iililitai-y. anoi captured clothing. J:ven
Kovps have 11cen mxtle avxilal)le to trocp IJ~JLTZ-
ing in arid and trOlAca1 climates, such a3 lmvail
in Italy, Greece, the Crimea, ant1 the Kuban delta.
Mention alrcatly has I,ecn made of tllc ;~tlaptaticm
of the normal firlcl uniform and norma1 fntigm5
as a summer uniform. 7’17~ summer field uni-
form p r o p r inclutlcs the iollo~viiig itcms:
(1) IIdgrav. The first .dfrifitr Ko/-p.s troops
were provided with tropical hcltnt.ts ant1 khaki
cotton field caps iii the cut Of the ok-style ficlcl
uniform cap. These soon were i-~placctl by a
vi sored khaki cotton tick1 cap col)ictl from the
10u11tai11 cap.
(2) Bod~r clotllirfg. I M y clothing consists of
luosc-mesh rayon or cotton uiitl~rshorts and
slmrt-slee\-ed untlershirt; a t\\o-pocket, gra!Gh-
grev11 or khaki cotton shirt cari-\-ing dioulder-
strap insignia; and khaki shorts or long trousers
with lmilt-in cloth 1)clts. ‘I‘llough shirtsleeves
may he the uniform of the da)-, n roll-collar. V-
ncckcd, khaki coat is furnished. In spite of cot-
ton shortages, the coat and trousers continue to
be of good quality cotton twill. Since late 1912.
however, the four pleated pockets of the coat
have been niotlificd in the saim fashion ZIS those
of the normal field uniform coat. ‘me cotto
twill breeches furnished in the vvry early days
of the Afrikn Korps are worn only hy those still
possessing them.
(3) ~OOt{JCW'. Ikier1 hoots \vitli cloth tops
are no long-u ncces.snry, hut still rna~. 1)~ en-
countered. High brcmm leather hlioes arc now
the standard Lvcar. ~\‘ool socks. rathc2- than foot-
wraps, are worn.
g. W I N T E R UNIFORMS. (1) Pre-1941 winter
clothing. I’rior to the winter of 19-k-32, the
German ,4rniy niack little provision for winter
warfare. Mountain troops were the Ijest equipped
to fight under conditions of estrcmc cold and
snow; the remainder of the Army- received special
clothing only for slxcial missions and duties, as
noted above. Sentries were the only soldiers,
I k d e s tlrivcrs and motorcyclists. who received
specially designed clothing. 7‘0 them were issued
surcoats and felt overl~oots, Or, if tlir latter were
lacking, straw overboots. Ortlinnr\- troops wore
the wool toque, gloves, sweater, and overcoat in
winter.
Inntrc S.- -hnproiised leinlcr clothing. The ordinary over-
(2) Post-1941 wiutcv clothiiu/. .\s soo11 as coat has been tenif'fr'd aromai the leas and the lower part
the necessity for great quantities of winter cloth- <>/ the coat bound ;eith .</••:< <>; cloth secured by cords.
IX—9
I MARCH 1945
UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451
IX—10
I MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451
terliner. The windproof cloth has the same recognition. cloth I)nncls in ihe color of the day
water-repellent features as the latest mountain may be buttoned to the, sleeves ol the parka.
parka. Since the complete uniform contains h. C'AMO~.ILU;I- CI.OTHINC. The original pre-
only 9 per cent wool, the clothing is heavy for mar issue of a camouflage slreltcr half proved in-
its warmth, and therefore not as efficient as the sufficient for the cxmouflagc of ii~tlivitluals. After
Germans had planned. The uniform originally considerable improvisation on the part of field
had a white and a field-gray side, but by 1943 the units, particularly in Italy, a standard Army
need for better camouflage had become so appar- light-rayon camouflage jacket ( I’late III) was
ent that a mottled design was substituted for the issued and put into USC in I‘j-l34 4. 17arious
field-gray. Two designs of mottle are used— types of field-made jackets, u\ing C;erman and
one is that of the normal shelter half, and the Italian shelter lialvcs. arc \vitlely employed.
other is that of the Army camouflage jacket Snipers may wear complete camouflage suits, in-
(Plate I I I ) . Both types are in use, To facilitate cluding face masks. Headgear camouflage often
IX—12
I MARCH 1945 TM-E 30-451
1. General
German Army insignia are intended to establish
clear differentiation between ranks and types of
service, and at the same time to encourage indi-
vidual combat efficiency and proficiency in mili-
tary arts. Direct appeal is made to vanity and
to the human tendency to show off military
prowess as expressed in terms of insignia and
decorations. Many of these insignia are based
on traditional German military insignia selected
from units famous in German popular and mili-
tary history.
2. Insignia of Rank
Insignia of rank mainly are determined by
shoulder-strap devices (Plate IV and V ) . While
there arc many minor complexities having to (10
with fine differentiation among various ranks,
services, and functions, these do not concern the
average case. A clear distinction is made among
commissioned officers (Offiaicre), noncommis-
sioned officers (Untcrofftcicre), and enlisted men
of various grades (Mannschaften). Because of the
importance of noncommissioned officers in combat
and on the drill field, they are accorded special dis-
tinguishing marks beyond the normal insignia
of rank. Along the lower edge of their coat
collar they have a silver or gray braid .4 inch
wide. First sergeants, as senior company or bat-
tery noncommissioned officers, wear two bands
of similar braid on each coatsleeve. Distinction
is made between the upper three and the lower
two grades of noncommissioned officers. The
former are known as Porte pccuntcroffizicrc; the
latter as Untcroffizicrc ohnc Portcpcc. The
former are entitled to special considerations and
privileges, as are the first three grades of U. S.
Army noncommissioned officers. These include
wearing on certain occasions an officer's saber
IX—13
UNCLASSIFIED
I MARCH 1945 TM-E 30-451
and a tassel known as the Portefiee, hence the are worn as shown in Plates I\ and V. Arabic
title. Fatigue clothing carries the type of non- numerals indicate the number <>{ the regiment or
commissioned-officer insignia used on Reichsweh battalion to \\-hich the \\-carc‘r 11c~long5. Enlisted
uniforms. men and the lolvvr I\vo grades of nonconlnli5-
sioned officers wear numbers in the color of their
3. Insignia of Arm and Specialty arm; other noncommissioned officers wear silver
In order to clarify an individual's duties, to numbers, as do officer candidates. Officers wear
afford easy recognition of line troops, and to gold numbers. Lcttcr5 may 1~. coml)inetl with
avoid jealousy arising from rapid promotion of Arabic numerals. In some cases (See Plate V I ) .
qualified specialists, the German Army has made tliesc intlicatc units of slx&d arms or of special
a somewhat ill-organized effort to distinguish branches of arms. In other cases, the letter D
line personnel of the arms; personnel of special and an nral)ic numeral indicate. (Ii\-i5ion headqual--
and administrative services, and personnel of ters personnel. 5iiicr i-e~-ulatl~1115 have changed
both preceding categories who are so proficient frequently since 10.30. the sy~tt~ of identiiica-
or qualified that rapid promotion to suitable rank tion by numbers ant1 letters i, clifticult to iollou
is necessary. The first group wear insignia of without the aid of cuniplcx gui(lr4.
the line arms (normal insignia of rank and of
arm) ; the specialists and administrative officials
tend to be designated by varied insignia (usually
Section III. GERMAN AIR FORCE
by introducing a basic dark-green color) ; the
UNIFORMS AND INSIGNIA
third group (Sondcvfiihr~) wear modifications
of normal insignia. Sonderfiihrcr insignia for I. General
line duty is shown in color plates; insignia for
Although many items of unii~lrms and clothing
Sonderfi&er of the Corps of Administrative
of special Xir Force design are provided, many
Officials is somewhat similar as regards the col-
items arc’ prcxurcxl from the Armv in suitable
lar patch, but the shoulder strap is more difficult
colors. There is not. howr\~~r, the degree of
to differentiate. In peacetime and during the
standardization in .\rmy and .\ir I:orcc clothing
early part of the war, further differentiation
that would alqxxr tle5iral)le, 1nrticularly in view
was made to indicate reserve officers, Landwelrr
of the number of riir I;orce ~1-0u~ltl troops per-
officers, officers recalled to active duty, and offi-
forniing the same functions a> ccJnil)arnble Army
cers over the retirement age who might be re-
troops. This is cspccinlly trllr in regard to the
quired from time to time for consultation.
uniforms provided for Africx, and 11OW used as
summer field uniforms. Characteristic of most
4. Fourrageres
,4ir Force ullifornls is tlie gray-111~ color of
All German officers are entitled to wear the much of the uniforms and equilxncnt. Comments
fourragere shown on the officer's service dress in made on the decline of cloth quality in Army
Plate II. Adjutants wear a single cord. The uniforms art’ equally. alq~lical)l~~ to -Air Force uni-
adjutant's fourragere must not be mistaken for for
one of the 12 grades of markmanship awards
(Plate V I I ) , and 1st sergeant in service dress
(Plate I ) . The marksmanship awards some-
times are worn in combat.
(2) Jump suit. The older types of jump suit- silver braid in the nianiier of Army noncommis-
used in 1939-40 were of the pullover, coverall sioned officers' coats. The awards for combat
variety. The present types button up the front flights (see color plates) easilv ma)r be mistaken
like coats, and have snap closures to secure the for pilots insignia I)ec;1ii5e 0f llrc,ir shape. The
bottom tightly around the legs—a feature bor- pilot's insignia. ho\vc,\-~r. is worn as n nletal or
rowed from the older types. ,\mple zipper-closvtl cloth badge on the lower lett breast, whereas tin-
pockets are provided. The material is a light awards for combat flights are worn above the
shelter duck, originally olive in color (Plate 1-X), left breast 1)ocli~t. Sot illustrated under a\v:irCls
but in present versions ahvays mottled. The in the color l)l:~tc; i- tl1;ct I/11. 11i!$t ligllters,
present jump suit, like older types, is worn ovc’r which consists of the award I or fighters with a
the wool or sumnit’r uniform, hut caii quickly l)e black instead of a silver winded arrow. Air
removed. Force personnel are award' d marksmanship
(3) Cammfltryc jacket. Usually peculiar to badges of a design similar in that ot Army
parachute troops (and worn by the 1st l’ara- awards. Other fourrageres an- worn, indicating
chute Division during the Battle of Cassino— commissioned rank, adjutant, "i merely length of
hence the appellation "Green Devils") is a green- service.
ish, mottled camouflage jacket about the length
of the jump suit. This is a fly-front. cotton, her-
ringbone twill garment \vith two pockets (I‘lath,
IX).
(4) Footpar. Several types of jump boots
have been issued. The earlier types laced along
the sides and had heavy corrugat&rubl)er soles.
Later types resemble the U. S. parachutist's boot.
In battle, Army-type high service shoes may lx
worn.
g. WINTER CLOTHING. The Air Force LISCS
Picture 16.—Xational ewhlew <>[ the . I nurd I'tirty l:litr
the Army winter uniform, and improvises in the
Guard OVattrn-SS). This rin/'lrin is T O T / I on the Irfl
same way as the elder service. Often lvurn l l sleeves of routs, ,iz:errtnits, and wrl.r's. and afprars eitlirr
Flak sentries in very exposed positions is the. on the jront or on the le}l • ide oj caps.
very heavy sheepskin surcoat she\\-n in co101
plates. This coat may be \vorn by the entire gun
Section IV. ARMED ELITE GUARD
crew, if necessary. It is, however, too heap\- for
UNIFORMS AND INSIGNIA
infantry combat use.
h. UNIFORMS OF THE I;allsrhi~ll~jiigr~-P~rl~~ I. Uniforms
Division Hcmarl Gorving. This division follo\~~ The Armed Klite Guard i II '<///>//-.V.S') has fol-
unusual practices in the issue 0i iinif0rni.s a i i lowed the Army closely in the provision of uni-
insignia. The collar patch is white for all ranks. iorm clothing. When first M-IH inlo the field,
while the color of the shoulder strap varies ac- ll'affeu-SS units were distinguished in part by
cording to type of service. Tank crews an(l the type of roll-collar Y-neek eoat shown in Plate
crews of self-propelled guns wear Army black X Y I I I . .Also distinctive were their camouflage
or field-gray jackets and iield trousers, but with jacket (Plate X Y I I I ). and their brown shirts with
Air Force insignia. black ties. For some time stocks of the .V.S' coat
have been practically exhausted, and Army coats
3. Insignia have been used. Army shirts also are issued.
.\ir Force insignia are extremely complex. There. There remain slight differences between the high
are four svstvms of indicating rank: that uwtl grade shelter-duck, water-repellent, windproof >S\S"
on the shoulder straps and on sleeve chevrons; camouflage jacket and the similar Army jaclic‘t:
that used on the collar patch ; that LIS~Y~ 011 flying the .V.S' jacket has two slant, buttoned pockets at
suits ; and that used on h t h sleeves of the motor its side in later versions, and a different camou-
vehicle coat and on fatigue coveralls. The Ilagc patterli.
collar patches of no~~comn~issioned officers' ovei-- A new IVaffcn-SS uniform is a linen-cotton.
coats, and their coat collars, are edged with herringbone t;;.ill. two-piece suit (Plate X I X ) .
IX—16
I MARCH 1945
UNCLA3SSFSED TM-E 30-451
would be worn as ribhons in the huttonholc, at the tions and awards, the numbers of which are al-
neck, or in the form of the easily recognizable most incredibly large because of the authoriza-
actual metal medal pinned on the uniform. This tion of the wearing of Xazi I'arty and Police
rule holds as a rough guide, but there are man\ badges, as well as foreign decorations and those
cxccptions, notable among which are the various of minor German states under the German Em-
foreign ribbons for valor worn with other rihhnns pire. Much of the paper-work of the German
above the left breast pocket. Rlark~manship Army is concerned with the awarding of various
awards are worn in the form of fourrager c s types of medals and badges and their certificates.
the right breast. The German troops themselves prize these honors
The German Armed Forces place much cm- highly, and wear them on the field uniform even
phasis on the morale effect of the various decora- in combat.
IX—18
UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451
I MARCH 1945
I. General
There are a host of puppet and auxiliary forces
and semi-military organizations which may take
part in combat alongside the Army, Kavy, and Xir
Force. Included among these at-e the various units
raised from former citizens of the Soviet Union.
While many of these troops were intended to have
insignia peculiar to their organization, it has not
been possible in practice to manufacture and issue
the necessary uniforms and insignia. The insignia
for these forces may be grouped into three sets:
those for the Eastern Legions (Ostlcgio~c?~),
those for the Russian and Ukranian Armies of Irujurc 20.—Labor Service private (left), sergeant (cen-
Liberation (with rank insignia after the Russian ft,r), and genera! officer (right).
style), and those for Cossack units. In practice,
German Army uniforms ant1 insignia often are
used. Llilitary organizations with uniforms and
insignia also were formed from men recruited
from the former I3altic states. n Czech puppet
Army, with its o\vn uniforms and insignia. also
exists. The Italian Republican At-my also may
use German uniforms and WO~~~J~-.SS insignia.
although Italian Republican insignia may be worn
on German-made uniforms. Women's uniformed
auxiliary forces include signal services for the
Army, Navy, and Air Force; antiaircraft person-
nel for the Air Force; and remount units for the
Army. Such p~rsonnc1 have uniforms, insignia,
and titles of rank peculiar to their organizations.
Many uniformed l’arty organizations of a setni-
military nature exist, as well as Frontier (Cus-
toms) Guards, Railway Police, State Railway
Personnel, the Forestry Service, and other uni-
formed state organizations. Uniforms and insig-
nia of several of the more important auxiliat-!
organizations svt-ving \vith the armed forccs arc
briefly described below. These organizations
usualh' wear an arm band inscribed Deutsche
Wehrmacht when in forward areas. The Ger-
mans state that such arm bands indicate that the
wearers are members of the German Armed
Forces.
IX—20
I MARCH 1945 TM-E 30-451
Section VII. INDIVIDUAL EQUIPMENT an eagle whose outstretched wings extend across
the to]) of tlw lnicl\l~. The words "1leinr Elire
I. Field Equipment heisst Treue" make a nearly complete circle be-
a. ISKI.T. The German soldier habitually wears low the eagle's wi1ig.s. The bird rests on another
his IwIt, willi or \vithout ficltl equil)tiit. lit.NOF smaller c h l ) ~ ; i rs a sn.astika. Officers
mally the enlisted man kvears a black leather belt, \vcxr bro~3i leather l)elt< lvitli a simple tongue-
1jut a \I-eb belt goes with tlw tropical uniiol-m. mtl-lm- type ‘llUCl<l~. In the field the soldier cnr-
The bolt ;il\\ays is worn \vitb a steel Imcl& I~ar- rics his cartridge pouches, In\-onet, entrenching
iiig the I~aiich of service emblem. X11 ground tool. ant1 "brexl bag-" ~u~~w&d from this belt.
forces 0i the Xriny (Herr) ha\-e a buckle em- When not wearing field equipment he wears the
bossed with a circular crest in the center of which belt and buckle alone. Metal hooks in the field
appc’a13 a11 eagle. The circle is formetl by the l~lousc help bolt1 thy belt m IJaw.
words "Gott mit ~11s" above the eagle and a 1). C . ( . I I I I:>. ‘l‘he usual German
n x x t h l~clow. The Air I’orce (L~rfte~fnf~) lx~cl& cartridge pouch is made of lc~;~thcr. It has three
carrick an eagle in flight with 3 swastika in its separate pockets, each holding 10 rounds of rifle
claws. The figure is encircled by a nmxth. The ;ilnmuiiitioii in t\\-0 clips. The uniform belt slips
~\rmetl Elite Guard (Wcrff r~ SS) buckle bears through 1001)5 on tlw Iwli 0i tile amniunitim
Figure 23.—Field equipment of the German infantry '•'igurc 24.—Field equipment (rear vinv). Mcsskit, shelter
roldicr (fro/it Gcw). The royfritlqc pourhrs on thr hclt quarter, and a small bag (concealed under the shelter
are partially held by leather suspenders. The "bread bag" quarter) are strapped to the combat pack. The canteen
and canteen with cup are carried on the right hip, and hangs front the "bread bag." (Mounted troops carry the
the entrenching tool and bayonet arc carried on the left canteen on the bread bag's right-hand fittings). The upper
hip. The "bread bag" is Imng on the belt, and for dem- end of the metal gas mask carrier is suspended by a sling
onstration purposes is shown further forward than usual. over the shoulder, while the rear end is hung on the belt.
IX—2I
I MARCH 1945
UNCLASS\F!ED TM-E 30-45I
6. Miscellaneous Equipment
a. DISPATCH CASE. Platoon and squad leaders,
master sergeants, messenger carriers, and similar
personnel wear a black leather dispatch case on
their belts. Previously this case was issuctl to
a greater number, but in 1943 the issue was re- figure 30.—1'iicl table! stove (lisbit Kochcr) in half-open
stricted to conserve leather. A leather map case position. When closed, the box of lisbit fuel tablets fits
with a plastic window fits inside the dispatch inside and is fully protected at/uiiist breakage.
case. Several pockets are sewn on the front of
the case to accommodate seven pencils, rules, map-
combination utensil is c>asilp c;il-rietl. It is much
reading instruments, and other equipment.
simpler and lighter than a cotl~l~illation strainless
b. PACK FRAMES. Pack frames, which are steel knife, fork. 51)c)on. antl soinetimcs can-
used by German troops to carry heavy weapons opener issued to German troop< during the Afri-
and other heavy or clumsy loads, particularly in can campCaign.
difficult terrain, are somewhat similar in appear- e. RATIOS HEATEKL. i si~:ill gasoline stove.
ance to the metal tube frames sometimes used with I\-vigliing a little over a 11oul1~1. in ishutatl to special
frame rucksacks. There is no universal type )hut units such as mountain troops who must operate
rather special ones for each type of load \vith ~untl~r difficult coiltlitions 1jut keep a high clegrce
special tubes and shelves to accommodate the of mobility. This stove works by burning vapor-
particular type of equipment carried. ized gasoline, but it has no pressure pump. Pres-
c. GOGCLES. The commonest German goggles sure is I)uill up by heating the I~urner with gaso-
are the plastic-lens folding type, made with both liilv or fuel tal)ltlts l)urllt in a small cup below
clear and amber lenses, one of each type fre- the tank and maintained by the heat generated l)y
quently being issued to each man. These arr thy stovv itself. More widely i~ue(l arv fuel
the "sun and dust goggles" which are issued to tablets, the ~oinnioi~~‘t of which is lC.shit: tablets
all members of motorized or mechanized units of h~,xaiii~tll~l~.i1~, tetraniinc. .l‘he iucxl is packed
except vehicle drivers and motorcyclists, who in a paper carton \vliich is c:lr-rietl in the fuel-
receive a heavier model with smoke-colored lenses tablet stove i lisbit Kochcr). In the carton there
and leather, synthetic rubber, or felt framtas. are four cakes of five tablets each, one or more
The heavier goggles are also issued to some anti- of which may be broken fnun the cake and
aircraft gunners and sometimes to mountain and hi-net1 at a time. This iuel is extremely
troops, although mountain troops frequently get efficient. The fuel-tablet stove is made of three
the plastic goggles. sections of zinc-coated steel. Two identical sec-
d. FORK-SPOON. A combination aluminum tions, which form the cover in the closed posi-
fork-spoon is issued to each German soldier. tion, and the sides and mess kit supl)ort in the
The handles of the fork and spoon are riveted two open l~nsitiotis. are attached to a third s&ion,
together so that when extended the fork is on by a groiimict liingr. This thirtl section is a
one end and the spoon on the other, but when shallow pali on \vhiih the t;il)lets are burned.
folded the handles lie together and the tines Dimples in the. tllet:tl ;It apl)rol~ri:~t~ I)ositions hold
of the fork rest in the bowl of the spoon. Since the sto1.e in either the closed, half-open, or open
the over-all length folded is only 5% inches, this positions.
IX—26
I MARCH 1945 -'"• " 0 TM-E 30-45I
FIELD UNIFORM, ENLISTED MAN MOUNTAIN UNIFORM, NCO VERCGAT ALL RANKS
; NCOs add braided edging to collar as shown <
SERVICE DRESS, OFFICER FIELD UNIFORM, OFFICER BLACK '-••• :?£<< UNIFORM
Lf co, , COO, II remode Resrhrwehr coo1, nor Mllery . he Relchwehr root may OIJO
ice coat resembles EM's.
PIATE II
I MARCH 1945 TM-E 30-45!
shmr, a n d t r o p , m hehd
PLATE III
r
I MARCH 1945 UF
\\'i\
1 D TM-E 30-451
GERMAN ARMY: INSIGNIA OF RANK Shoulder straps ore the main indrcotton of rank P!oncomm,>r .
ore further distinguished by o braided edge so the collar
office'-, , Unterofftziere)
rlr ,~rwce, fieid, and
fatigue CDD+S Certain noncommirsloned oFi;,er< vcly weor oft uffcmm and daspense
with the braded collar edgtng lllurtroted belox are :top *o b,3 - :ollur patch, shoulder
strop, and the type of rqnk ,ns,gn,a worn or oath sleeve< I* erallv winter suits and
GENERAL OFFICERS iGeneroleJ like uniforms.
COLONEL LT COLONEL
Oberif Oberst/eutnonf
(General SOA Corp., Artillery
NONCOMMISSIONED OFFICERS
SERGEANT MAJOR 1ST SERGEANT MASTER SERGEANT TECHNICAL SERGEANT 5TAFF SERGEANT SERGEANT
Stabsieldwebel Hauptieldwebe! Oberfeidwebel Feldwebe/ Unferfe/dwebel Unferoffiiier
Mountain Infantry (Sleeve braid on coot) Armored or AT Unit Supply Troops 4th Engineer*
I MARCH 1945 TM-E 30-451
GERMAN ARMY: INSIGNIA OF RANK Corporals in the Germon Army are nof roted : nancomm,woned officers, but ore placed
alsamong what amount to several grader of ~‘,i:,ter These grade, may weor the sleeve
insignia shown below (chevronr or p~pi on thf ^lat, OV~KOO+, fatigues. and on other types
of uniformshown There are many classes of odm\n~~~rotws ofir~als; examples of a few typicol
ofunif orm There are shown Such oficrJs ^cy be dsstlnguirhed by their basic color of
ENLISTED MEN arm, N IS dark green
PRIVATE
ADMINISTRATIVE CORP
Grenadier, Fusilie
Stabsgefreiter
Artillery ce) (under 6y
OBSOLETE COLLAR
ADMINISTRATIVE OFFICIALS -r yP ,cai rank » g ™ . CHAPLAINS
PATCHES
CHAPLAIN BISHOPS
PLATE V
I MARCH 1945 ' V • F.
Wine Red
SPECIALIST SERVICE,
JAGD
LIGHT ARMY .
Truppemonderdienst,
Orange Red
CHtMICAL WARFARE
MILITARY POLICE
TROOPS
Nebettt uppen
O r a nge
ORDNIANCE
Gold Yellow
Light Blue
RCN1 BNS,
TRANSPORT S.
C A V SQDNS
SUPPLY TROOPS
line Cy •CJJ*J fins
Auiklai •ungi Abt,
Pink
Gold Light Blue with
TD BNS 4 UNITS
°l DIV
(•xctpf of Gr»n ReSt»)
A r m d i Armd (nr SP SERV, ADMIN
Pi Jag Abr und
Rent, Armd Ren 8n 5, PAYMR BRS
Fin he i f . n
Light Grey
Pink with f o n Straps PROPAGANDA
ARMORED TRAINS TROOPS
Mtz Inf & Integra
,DMIN A N D PAYMfl
FARRIER W O i MUSICIAN OFFICERS JAGD, SPECU BR» SPECIALIST
HufbefcMaglshrmei Moiifcinipinenfen, SERVICf. SERVICE
PLATE VI
C :3 •
SNIPER SNIPER
Schorfscniirze SchorfscfiiJh*
:At leosf 20 enemy killed) (At least 40 enemy killed)
MUSICIAN'S BADGES (On both shoulders) MARKSMANSHIP AWARDS: PI ~~r iubstrtvte ton~ for swords~
PLATE VII
I MARCH 1945 TM-E 30-45!
PLATE VIII
I MARCH 1945 TM-E 30.45I
PLATE IX
I MARCH 1945 m TM-E 30-451
PLATE X
I MARCH 1945
UNCLES:;-' TM-E 30.451
SERGEANT MAJOR 1ST SERGEANT MASTER SERGEANT TECHNICAL SERGEANT STAFF SERGEANT
Sfabsteldwebel Havpfwochfmeiiter Obvrfeldwebet Feldwebel
Flying Troops Ut Flak Rgt Signal Troops Civilian Air Traffic Control 3d Hak Regt
PLA XI
I MARCH 1945 TM-E 30.451
t
SENIOR OFFICER CANDIDATE OFFICER CANDIDAn VOLUNTEER OFFICER
ObsrfaWich Fahnrirh CANDIDATE
Construction Troops 5th Flak Rcgt
v&ly bc 0 ” ” rant)
GERMAN AIR FORCE: ENGINEERING CORPS Engmeerr having lo do with mechanical engtneer~ng rhe German Au Force
belong to a rpeciol corpr and are dtrtlngutshed by ~,I-IO ra.lk lnrignio and
(ADMINISTRATIVE OFFICIALS) S)xcial designations of conk All ronkr we xnk CI D R of ,he,r ierv,ce
PLATE XII
I MARCH 1945 TM-E 30-451
Gold Ycilo*
ADMINISTRATIVE
FLllNG TROOPS
OFFICIALS
der iuftwaffe
While line arms and services wear the same DETACHED No”f,‘e.liOrpS
IN THE G/\F
:olor on both shoulder strop and collar patch,
m+e that all but one of ihe divisonr of the Corps
)f Administrative Officiolr wear wo colors. The Dark Blue
RECALLED OFFICERS MEDICAL PERSON'
basic color for most Administrative Officials is Offiziere mi
lark green. Dienif/eisfurrg
SONDERFUHRER
Specmhrt oficerr and NCOs, awarded commissions or ratings because of specmi quaiificotionr
1523)
GENERAL OFFICER FIELO OFFICER COMPANY OFFICER WARRANT OFFICER NONCOMMISSIONED OFFICER
Mmktry Dircrtor VAai Gcnl Weather Serv Officer (Mojl Flremon WO JAGD (nipeclor iMr Sgt)
Oberflugtufire Untetbrondmv, - •
I MARCH 1945 ^ I S J I HIU'ILU * * TM-E 30.451
PILOT AND OBSERVER AIR GUNNERRADIO AIR GUNNER AIR CREW MEMBER
OPERATOR FLIGHT ENGINEER Uncertified as gunner)
AWARDS
GLIDER PILOT AIR FORCE PARACHUTIST WCXLD WAR , FLIERS GROUND COMBAT BADGE ! ANTIAIRCRAFT BADGE
Wornonu
AWAPFIQ FUR
FftP nPPPATinNAI _ p p e r l e ftbreort.Awarded in gold, mlver, bronze:
AYVAKU5 UrtKAMUNAL laurel pendant may be odded to gold words, (IS shown
RECONNAISANCE
A”TOMOTl”E EQUIPMENT MEDlCAL PERSONNEL SEARCHLIGHT EQUIPMENT SIGNAL EQUIPMENT FLAK ORDNANCE SGTS
ADMINISTRATORS Sanitatfptrtonat ADMINIST~nxS ADMlNlSTRATclRS
(Bono Tor condjuot£s)
OTHER OrcJNANtE SGTS AIICIAFT EPUIPMWT GRADS OF TECH TELEPHONE OPEl!ATOR TELEPHCJNE SERGEANTS TELETYPE OPEI*TOrlS
W.Ren”ntaroRnere *DMINISTR*TORS PREP SCHOOLS Fernscbreiher
flugzeuggerotverwofer
TELETIPE SGGEANTS AIR RAID WARNING RADIO SERGEANTS i(ADIO DlRFCTlON FlNDERS RADIO DIRECTION FINDER
FttrntchfibunlToffizierm PERSONNEL Funtunteroffiziere
Flugmeldpersonnel
RADIO INTEKEPTOPS LADlO INTERCEPTKIN SCTS TSECHNICAL AVN PEc!SONNEI PERSONNEL OF TENDER FLIING PE!iSONNEL FLAK PEFSONNEL
Horchfunktr Fliegertecknischet Pertonat CRASH BOATS, ETC (For 9 month,' , c r r k r )
0
RANGEFINDER CREWS SO”ND LOtATOP. CREWS SOUND LOCATOR. CREWS MOTOI VEHICLE D R W l ADMIN SGTS 6 TECH SGiS SIGNAL PERSONNEL
Entfernvngtmtttimuie (For o*s, 1 yeor', serwrs) NON SIGNAL “NlTS
Gold border for 1 “1 w n i
PLATE XIV
I MARCH 1945 TM-E 30.451
PLATE XV
I MARCH 1945
UNCL'V TM-E 30.451
CHEVRONS-f-seo
PLATE XVI
I MARCH 1945 IIMfl TM-E 30-451
FIELD GRAY UNIFORM, OFFICERS FIELD GRAY UNIFORM, WOr, PO5 Flt C;RAY UNIFORM, SEAMEN
Lieutenant (ig) Warrant Officer, Coast Amllery Seaman, 2d Clorr
teutnont I”, See Oberfeidwebel Getreiter
CHIEF WARRANT OFFICER WARRANT OFFICER CHIEF PETTY OFFICER PETTY OFFICER 1, C PETTY • 'HICER 2 C PETTY OFFICER 3/C
Slabiobor/./dw.b./ Fotdwbet Moat
COLLAR P*TCHES
FOR FIELD GRAY
UNIFORM COATS
PETTY OFFICER A5PIRANT ENLISTED MAN COMMISSIONED OFFICERS WOi, POi, SEAMtN
BELOW PO GRADE
PLATE XVII
I ARCH 1945 TM-E 30.451
PLATE XVIII
<H v "
I MARCH 1945 UNCLA TM-E 30.451
:,CKCl)AT M O 5 AND EM
SERVICE DRESS, OFFICER SERVICE DRESS, N C 0
ly pe of J 5 CO at Illustrated.
PLATE XIX
I MARCH 1945 TM-E 30-451
I H j j H
_ _ _ _ _
I^^^^H
VETERINARY CORPS
Pink
TANK, ANTITANK
Light Green
MOUNTAIN
INFANTRY
RIFLE REGTS OF
• Light Blue
SUPPLY AND
TECHNICAL SERVICES
Sky Blue
ADMINISTRATORS
^ ^ ^ B j 7ROOPS SS POLICE DIV5
MILITARY GEOLOGISTS
• Dark Green
RESERVE OFFICERS
I—
GENERAL OFFICERS
•
W&en-SS troops wear collr~r patches similar to those
Orana. Red White , ^ _ _ Block
of the General SS (Aflgemeine SSj, but W&en-SS shoul-
H|J*|HUU RtHACEMENT INFANTRY FNG1NEERS
der straps are of+er the German Army ponern, except M B SERVICES.
SH&P9 ENGINEERING
for that of the Reichrfirhrer~SS jgE^gfR OFFICERS
REICHSFOHREFSS ‘olice generals now w e t GENERAL LT GENERAL MAJOR GENERAL BRIGADIER GENERAL
Chid of G.nl .nd C.n.rol0b.r.t d Gmnmrai dmr WaJ.n-SS
W&.“.SS the same collar patches c (Ob^rgrupp.nfijhrer Woffen-SS Woffen-SS
(H.i”,i<h Himmlerl {Oberitgruppenfiihrc in GenISS) BngacUfuhrer in
55 generals in Cenl SSI Genl SS.i Genl SS)
FIELD OFFICERS
COMPANY OFFICERS
I
CAPTAIN 1ST LIEUTENANT 2D LIEUTENANT
Hauptiturmfukrtr Obersturmr'uhrar Unterjfurm/unrer
Supply Troop* Artillery Infantry
PLATE XX
I M A R C H 1945 •lWW*lHJMWg» Ui »•-—•-••• •"' T M - E 30-451
•A VBk I
SERGEANT MAJOR
Sfurmicnorfunr»r
Artillery
9
1ST AND MR SERGEANT
Hauplichartohfr
Cavolry
1 1 1
ObirtchaHuhre
Infantry
STAFF SERGEA
Scharfuhrtr
Artillery
SERGEANT
Unterscharfijhre
Artillery
fill
1 CORPORAL
Rolf.n/iihr.r
Infantry
ACTING CORPORAL
Artillery
i PRIVATE 1ST CLASS
torihuriB or 5S-Ofa«ri
Medical Troops
PRIVATE
S5-Se/iut« or SS-Soldat
o
OrCwIALTY D n U u t d — W o r n on lower lefi arm by officers, NCOs, and men. See olso Army sniper badges
SECURITY SERVICE FARRIER PERSONNEL TECHNICIAN OFFICERS SIGNAL PERSONNEL MEDICAL PERSONNEL
TRANSPORT SERGEANTS
o
Hufbvschhgpwrsonal
Sth.rrmeirfer
ORDNANCE NCOi VETERINARY OFFICERS, NCOj OFFICERS IN LEGAL MUSICIAN OFFICERS MEDICAL OFFICERS
Waffinvntfrfiihfr FUhrmr und Unttrfiihrtr WORK ADMINISTRATIVE OFFICERS
Fiihrtr im Gtrichlidientt
o
The chevrons +o lndlcote previous -rvice IW the armed farce< or police
(above) a r e worn on the upper r , g “ ' ,,rm, a n d ore n o t lo be confused with
chevronr +o indicate rank, 01 worn v* the upper left arm. The special collor
patches at left ore worn tnrteod ’ the 5tondard SS right collar patch.
PLATE XXI
I M A R C H 1945 TM-E 30-451
KNIGHT'S CROSS OF THE IRON CROSS I KNIGHT'S CROSS •.-F THE IRON CROSS
With
IRON CROSS 1ST CLASS IRON CROSS 2D CLASS 1914 IRON CROSS
Worn rlfhovt ribbon Uwaliy ribbon only Od”
WAR SERVICE CROSS WITH SWORDS WAR SERVICE CROSS WITHOUT SWORDS
Silrcr 0, bronze Silver or bronze
PLATE XXII
I MARCH 1945 TM-E 30-45I
~NCL,iSSiKD
GERMAN DECORATIONS AND AWARDS
w
GERMAN-ITALIAN MEDAL ARMY ANTIAIRCRAFT BADGE | ,’ iit DRIVER 5 BADGC
PLATE XXIII
L
w w l TM-E 30-451
I M A R C H 1945 ^ ™ ^ " (J j \ L/ L.< ' -•-• •'• - s-'
DIDDflUC FHD UAI HD AMI1 ^ F D V I P F These ribbons ore a selection of those which may be worn
" above the left breast pocket by Germon ditory personnel.
i Hi tun 10 11 12
20 23
I24
13. LNTRl INTO SUDETENLAND 17 GERMAN MOTHER'S CROSS 21 PR”SS’4N WAR L f i O P ’ ROSS
14. WESTWALL SERVICE, ,939 10 18 FIREMAN'S RlBBON 22 PRUSSIAN L I F E S A Y I N G *rEDAL
15. MEMEL RIBBON 23 SiLtSIAN EAGLE IT,“ . F>ght-ig *s
j
16 OLYMPIC GAMES MEDAL 20 ARP MEDAL 24P, fLDEN MILIT/\R” SERi’i c1055
32 33
111I 34 35 36
25. BAVANAN MlllTARl SERVICE CROSS 29 BAVALlAN MEDAL OF VALOR 33 AUSTRIAN WAR SERVK : nEDAL
26. KING L”DWlG CROSS 30 WURTTEMBERG MlllTARY SERVICE CROSS 34 TlSOL SLFWCF MCDAL
27. PRINCE REGENT LUITPOLD MEDAL 31. AUSTRIAN MEDAL OF “ALOR 35 HAMBURG HANSA WAC . ROSS
28. BAVARIAN MlllTARY SERVICE BADGE 32 KARL TROOP CROSS 36 BREMEN “AN% WAR cIUSS
I 37 38 39 40
iiniiiieit 46 48
37. LUBECI: HANSA WAR CROSS 41 CROATIAN MEDdl OF “ALGR 45 IT4LlAN SERYICE M E D ’
38. BULGARIAN MEDAL OF VALOR 42 SLOY*KIAN MEDAL OF VALOR
39. BULGARIAN WAR SERVICE MEDAL 43 AFRICA RIBBON
40. HUNGARIAN WAR SERVICE ,tiorthy, 14 ITALIAN MEDAL OF “ALOrl FINNISH LIBERATION CROSS I, CLASS
49 54 55 56 57 58 59 60
49 FINNISH LIBERATION CROSS 111 CLASS 53 SPANISH CAMPAIGN MEDAL 57 RUMANIAN M t D * L Of . R T ” P AND LOIALT”
*4 SPANISH WOUND MEDAL 58 RUMAh~AN FAITHFUL \ck*lCE CROSC h a r e .
51 SPANISH RED MILITARY SER”,CE CROSS 55 SPANISH S”R”lVORS RIBBON 59 RUMANIAN MEDAL OF . n i o l (
52. SPANISH WHITE MILlTAR” SERVICE CROSS 56. SP*NISH CCJMMUNIST RIBBON 60 RUMANIAN ORDER OF l i l F CROWN ,POl,,931
62 63 64 65 64 67
I 69 70
•111 72
61 RUMANIAN ORDER OF THE CROWN (Prs-,932 66. CROSS OF QUEEN MARIE OF RUMANIA 70 BRONZE CROSS OF VALQR AND SERVICE
62. RUMANIAN FAITHFUL SERVICE CROSS (War, 67. RUMANIAN FLIERS' MEDAL OF VALOR 'for Eoirern Volunteers,
63. RUMANIAN MEDlCAL SEIWCE CRCJSS 68. RUMANIAN FLIERS' ORDER OF VALOR 71 SILVER CROSS OF VALOR AND SERVICE
64. RUMANIAN FAITHFUL SERVICE MEDAL (W.lr, 69. STAR OF RUMANIA For Foitern Von-nfeers'
65. RUMANIAN ANT,KOMM”NIST SERWCE 72. GOLD CROSS OF VALOR AND SERVICE
,Far Eastern Volunteers'
PLATE XXIV
UNCLASSIFIED
I MARCH 1945 TM-E 30-451
CHAPTER X
Section I. AIR FORCE HIGH COMMAND those of the General Staff and those concerned
with administration and supply.
1. General
The German Air Force {Luftwaffe), one of the Section II. CHAIN OF COMMAND
three branches of the German Armed Forces, is
organized and administered independently of
either the Army or the Navy. Its three main 1. General
branches are the flying troops, antiaircraft artil-
The role of the Air Force in the conduct of the
lery, and air signal troops. It also includes para-
war, and to a certain extent in particular oper-
chute and airborne troops, air engineers, air
ations, is determined by the High Command of
medical corps, and air police, and a number of
the Armed Forces (Oberkommando der Wehr-
special divisions formed of Air Force personnel
macht). The chain of command is from the Su-
for service as regular fighting troops. It is organ-
preme Commander (Hitler), through the OKW
ized on a territorial rather than a functional basis, •
to the Commander-in-Chief of the Air Force
with separate operational and administrative com-
(Goering). The latter directs the actual employ-
mands. This division of responsibilities has made
ment of the Air Force through the Air Ministry
for a high degree of mobility among the flying
ing through his subordinate commanders of air
units and thus has been responsible for much of
o f units. However, when Air Force units
the success of the German Air Force.
are used in conjunction with Army or Navy units,
all the forces involved come under a single oper-
2. Commander-in-Chief r - i n - C h i e f in accordance with the German
Reichsmarschall Goering serves in the dual cap- doctrine of unity of command. In such circum-
acity of Minister of Aviation (Reichsminister der c a p - a commanding officer is chosen from
Luftfahrt) and Commander-in-Chief of the Air whichever of the three branches predominates in
Force (Oberbefehlshaber der Luftwaffe). As the operation, and he becomes directly responsible
Commander-in-Chief he is charged with the ad- to the OKW.
ministration and operations of the Air Force. As
Minister of Aviation he is a member of the 2. LEcftflotte
Cabinet and is responsible for the coordination
and supervision of civil aviation. Since Goering All Air Force units are organized into tactical and
has many other duties in the German Government, territorial air commands known as Luftflotten.
however, the supreme command usually is exer- Each LuftfEotte is assigned a particular command
cised by the State Secretary in the Ministry of area, although this assignment is not necessarily
Aviation and Inspector General of the Air Force. permanent, for an entire Luftflotte at any time
may be moved from one area to another at the
direction of the Air Ministry. Within its area,
3. Air Ministry (Rekhslujtfahrministerium or
however, each Luftflotte not only controls all op-
R.L.M.)
erations of the flying units, but also supervises the
At the Air Ministry—the highest administrative activities of all ground service units. Thus, in
and operational authority of the Air Force—are addition to a large operations department, each
found the departments which control all Air Force of has its own adjutant, legal, administra-
activity. These departments fall into two groups: tion,, signal, and supply departments. All com-
X—I
UNCLASSIFIED
I MARCH 1945 TM-E 30-451
O. X. W.
O. K. I .
IUFTFIOTIE
Administration
• FUEGERKORPS
NACHRICHTEN
FUK
(Communications)
SIF
GESCHWADEK 6ESCHWADEH
FLUGNAFENBERELCHKOMMANGALUREN
lAirfield Regional Comnmnd,
GRUPPE GRUPPE
s
STAFFEL STAFFEl
EINSATZHAFENKOMMANDATURlN
(Owra~ional Airdrome Commmd,
•i, to
«'-
MARCH 1945
UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451
ganization, technical, signal, navigation, meteoro- always issued in terms of Gruppen. Usually the
logical, and intelligence branches. Some staffs entire Gruppe is based at the same airdrome.
also have a photographic officer. The staff has its b. COMMAND. The Gruppe normally is com-
own headquarters flight (Stabs-Schwtirm) of manded by a major or captain known as the Grup-
three to six aircraft of the same type as those penkommandeur. He h&s a small staff, consisting
which make up the Geschwader. This Geschwader of the adjutant, operations officer, technical of-
staff is always maintained, even when the subor- ficer, and medical officer. There apparently is no
dinate Gruppen are separated for operations on special intelligence officer, since prisoners are sent
different fronts. directly to interrogation centers. Each Gruppe
c. TYPES. There are several types of Gesch- also has its own air signal platoon (Luftnachrich- .
wader, known according to aircraft complement tenzug), known as a Technical Ground Station,
and/or operational employment as follows: and a staff flight (Stabs-Kette) of three aircraft
Abbre- generally of the same type with which the Gruppe
German title Aircraft type viation is equipped.
Kampfgeschwader Bomber K.G. c. EQUIPMENT. The Gruppen are organized
Schlachtgeschwader1 ... Ground attack
and antitank . .S.G. into three Stafleln, with the exception of single-
Jagdgeschwader Single-engine engine fighter Geschwadern which recently have
fighter J.G. been organized into four Stafleln. Thus, most
Zerstorergeschwader .. .Twin-engine Gruppen are considered to have a table of or-
fighter Z.G. ganization of 27 aircraft each (exclusive of the
Nachtjagdgeschwader .. Night fighter .. .N. J.G.
Lehrgeschwader Tactical ex- three aircraft of the Gruppen-Stab) and Jagd-
perimental ... .L.G. gruppen a table of organization of 36 aircraft
(also exclusive of the Gruppen-Stab). Actual
Each Geschwader is designated by its abbreviation strength, however, is likely to differ substantially
followed by an Arabic numeral: for example, from authorized strength; on many occasions it
K.G.77, NJ.G.26, Z.G.Ill, etc. The numerals are has been found well below or above such figures.
n necessarily in consecutive order. Gruppen attached to a Geschwader are numbered
d. EQUIPMENT. Although all Gruppen in a in Roman numerals in consecutive order. Thtfe
Geschwader specialize in similar air tactics and I/K.G.77, II/K.G.77, and III/K.G.77 are the
are equipped with the same type of plane, the first, second, and third Gruppen, respectively, of
make and model may differ among the Gruppen. long-range bomber Geschwader 77.
This variation is most prevalent in fighter Gesch-
wader, but also occurs in a few of the bomber IO. StuffeZ
Geschwader. Thus a Kampfgeschwader may have a. GENERAL. The Staffel is the smallest Air
one G e schwader . the Dornier 217 and Force operational unit, and is generally corn-’
the other two Gruppen with the Heinkel 111, manded by a captain or lieutenant known as the
Junkers 88, or the Focke-Wulf 200. Or the entire Stafl elkapitiix One oficer serves as adjutant; the
Geschwader may be equipped with the same make signal, technical, and navigation branches are su-
of plane, such as the Messerschmitt 109, although pervised by the flying personnel in their spare
one Gruppe may have a newer model while the time.
other Gruppen have earlier ones. b. EQUIPMENT. A Staffed is considered. to
have a table of organization of nine aircraft, Its
9. Gruppe
actual strength, however, may be as low as five
a. GENERAL. The Gruppe is the basic combat o six r or as much as 18 or 20 aircraft.
unit of the Air Force for both administrative and For tactical purposes, it may be subdivided into
operational purposes. It is a mobile homogeneous Schwiirme of five planes; into Ketten of three
unit which is largely self-contained and which planes; or into Rotten of two planes. Each Staffed
may be detached from its parent Geschwader for usually will have its own mobile repair shop for
operations in any command area. In fact, direc- minor repairs in the dispersal areas; other motor
tives for the movement of flying units are almost vehicles must be drawn from the organization of
1 the parent Gruppe.
Sturskampfgeschwader (Dive bomber) and Schnell-
kampfgeschwader (Ground attack) have been incorpo- c. NUMBERING. All Staffeln in the Gesch-
rated into, or superseded by the Schlachtgeschwadern. wader are numbered consecutively in Arabic nu-
X—5
UNCLASSIFIED
I MARCH 1945 TM-E 30-451
merals. Thus, in all but Jagdgeschwader, the first, coincidentally with their reorganization in Grup-
second, and third Staffeln constitute Gruppe I; the pen, these units have been modernized to some
fourth, fifth and sixth Stafleln, Gruppe II; and extent. Though some units in the East still have
the seventh, eighth, and ninth Stafleln, Gruppe such aircraft as Arado 66, G0145, HESO, etc.,
III. Where a fourth or fifth Gruppe exists, the those in the West are equipped with modern
Stafleln will be numbered 10, 11, and 12, or 13, JU87 and FW190. These Nachtschlachtgruppen
14, and 15, respectively. In Jagdgeschwadern are numbered in Arabic numbers and thus abbre-
having four Staffeln, the Gruppe I thus will con- viated—NSl, NS2, NS3, etc.
tain Staffeln 1, 2, 3, and 4; Gruppe II, Stafleln (2) The Luftbeobachter Staffeln (Air Ob-
5, 6, 7, and 8; Gruppe III, Staffeln 9,10,11, and servers).
12, etc. In unit designations, the Gruppe numeral (3) A number of specialized units such as mine-
is omitted whenever the State1 number is indi- sweeping Stageha, etc.
cated. Thus the fourth Staffel of K.G.77 is known
as 4/K.G.77, and no other reference to its posi- 12. Special Commands
tion in Gruppe II of K.G.77 is necessary.
a. Jagdflhrer. Separate fighter commands
11. Semiautonomous Units known as Jagdfiihrer, or more commonly as Jafii,
have been established in each Luftflotte since the
a. GENERAL. Reconnaissance and Army co- outbreak of war. At first a Jafii was concerned
operation aircraft operate and are organized as primarily with matters of policy and controlled
semiautonomous units, as Staffeln or Gruppen. operations only on specific occasions. Yet, for a
These semiautonomous units fall into three gen- period, the Jafiis in France and Germany appeared
eral categories, all of which are numbered non- to have had an overriding authority in directing
consecutively in Arabic numerals of one, two or all defensive fighter operations. Lately, however,
three digits. it- is believed that their functions have become
b. LONG-RANGE RECONNAISSANCE. Long-range virtually administrative.
reconnaissance aircraft are organized into Fer-
b. Fliegerfiihrer. Highly specialized operations
naufkltirungsgruppen, which are known as (F)
on certain fronts have been put under the control
or FAG units. Thus 3(F)123 is the third Staffel
of special commanders known as Fliegerfiihrer.
of Fernaufkltirungsgruppe 123.
These Fliegerfiihrer control operations in a par-
c. SHORT-RANGE RECONNAISSANCE. Short- ticular area only and are directly responsible to
range reconnaissance and Army cooperation air- the Luftflotte commander in whose area they op-
craft are organized into Nahaufkliirungsgruppen, erate. For instance, the three Fliegerfidwer (3, 4,
which are known as NAGr or (H) units (due to 5) in Luftjlotte V, although primarily concerned
former name of Heeresaufkliirungsgruppen). Un- with antishipping operations and weather recom-
der the old nomenclature still applying to some naissance, controlled all types of combat aircraft
units, the first Staflel of Nahaufkliirungsgruppe in their area of operations.
32 is therefore l(H)32. Under the more recent
Gruppen organization and numbering, the third 13. Luftglau
Staflel of Nahaufkltirungsgruppe 1 for instance,
a. GENERAL. The Luffgaue are the actual ad-
is 3/NAGr 1.
ministrative and supply organizations of the Luft-
A. COASTAL RECONNAISSANCE. Coastal recon- wa@e. They are stationary or immobile com-
naissance and naval cooperation aircraft were mands whose authority is limited to certain well
originally organized into Kiistenfliegergruppen defined and permanently fixed geographical areas.
(abbreviated K.F.Gr.). They are now known as A Luftgau commander is usually a General der
Seeaufkliirungsgruppen (abbreviated SAGr.). Flieger or General der Flakartillerie, and theo-
Thus the third Staflel of Seeaufkliirungsgruppe retically is responsible to the LuftfZotte commander
196 is known as 3/SA4G7. 196. within whose command area the Luftgau lies. In
e. MISCELLANEOUS UNITS. Miscellaneous units actual practice, however, the Luftgazt commanders
also are similarly organized and operated. receive most of their instructions direct from the
(1) Nachtschlachtgruppen (Night Harassing) Air Ministry, and the Luftflottenchefs interfere
represent the relatively recent grouping of little with Luftgau administration. The Luftgaue
previously loosely organized Stageha. Most of permanently established in Germany are num-
them are equipped with obsolete aircraft, although bered non-consecutively by Roman numerals;
X—6
UNCLASSIFIED
I MARCH 1945 TM-E 30-451
those in occupied countries are generally desig- which the Luftgau allots to the regional command
nated by their location: for example, Luftgau and which the regional command then redistributes
Norwegen. among the operational commands. For example,
b. FUNCTIONS. Each Luftgau is responsible the Field Works Office (Feldbauamt) at the re-
for the following services within its command gional command handles airdrome maintenance
area: through its subsidiary Works Superintendent's
(1) Administration, supply, and maintenance , Offices which are stationed at the airdromes. Sim-
of all flying units. ilarly, the Air Signal Company at each regional
(2) Active and passive defense against air command is divided into platoons which are sta-
attack. tioned at the operational commands. A senior
(3) Operations of signal units. technical officer supervises aircraft maintenance '
(4) All training other than that of auxiliary in the region through his subordinate technical
units. officers at the operational commands. The air-
(5) Recruitment, mobilization, and training of drom regional command is thus largely self-con-
reserve personnel. tained and calls on the Luftgau for assistance only
when the units already assigned prove inadequate.
c. SECTIONS. Each Luftgau has its own oper-
ations, adjutant, legal, administration, signal, and (2) The airdrome regional command also acts
supply sections. It also has a department for pro- as the intermediary between the Luftgau head-
hibited and restricted flying areas which has no quarters and the operational airdrome command.
known counterpart in the Luftflotte or Flieger- All orders, requests, reports, etc., traveling be;
korps headquarters. All training within the Luft- tween the two must pass through the regional
gau area is directed by a Higher Commander of command f t - This staff numbers from 50 to 150
Training. This officer is usually a Generalmajor officers and enlisted men and is headed by a corn-
and is subordinate only to the Luftgau corn- mandant who usually holds the rank of Genera&
mander. All other Luftgau services are main- major.
tained through subordinate section commands (3) The airdrome regional command's primary
which are designated by Arabic numerals preced- practical task is that of transporting supplies and
ing the Luftgau unit designation. Thus 4/VIII equipment from the depots to its subordinate op-
is the fourth section command in Luftgau VIII. erational commands. For this purpose it is gener-
d. AIRDROME COMMANDS. The main channels ally assigned a supply company (Nachschubkom-
through which the flying units draw on the serv- pa&e) composed of a supply column staff (Nach-
ices of the Luftgaue are the airdrome commands. schubkolonnenstab), some four transport columns
Each Luftgau area is divided into about five air- (Transportkolonnen), and two or three fuel*col-
drome regional commands (Flughafenbereichkonz- umns (Flugbetriebsstoffkolonnen).
mandanturen). The regional commands are in (4) The commander of the operational air-
turn subdivided into five or more operational air- drome command normally holds the rank of
drome commands (Einsatzhafenkommandan- major, captain, or first lieutenant. His adjutant
turen). The regional command is essentially ad- handles personnel matters. The personnel corn-
ministrative and is not necessarily located at an plement of an operational command numbers
airfield. The operational airdrome command, about 350 officers and enlisted men, and the motor
however, exists only to serve the flying units at transport allotment is between 50 and 100 vehicles.
their stations and is thus always found at an air- (5) Airdrome maintenance at each operational
drome. The manner in which the Luftgau has de- command is handled by a Works Superintendent's
centralized its authority through these commands Office (Bauleitung), subordinate to the Field
is as follows: Works Office at the regional command. The
(1) The airdrome regional commands are Bauleitung has charge of most of the construction
charged with the Luftgnu's responsibility for sup- done at the airdrome (buildings, dispersal areas,
ply and maintenance of supplies and equipment defense works, camouflage, etc.), as well as the
within their respective areas; meeting the physical laying of runways, extension of landing grounds,
needs of the flying units; defense of aircraft, and installation of lighting systems. Reports on
equipment, and motor transport against. air at- serviceability and bomb damage are radioed
; airdrome development; and air movements. through the regional command to the Luftgau,,
These duties are discharged by specialized units and thence to the Air Ministry for broadcast over
X—7
I MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451
the Air Force Safety Service network. The Bau- staffs for special duty) or, simply, Luftgaustiibe
leitung personnel is composed of civil servants and z. b. V. units. These units may be designated by
technical staffs. Any other specialized construc- an Arabic numeral (Luftgaustii z. b V. 3) or
tion units which may be attached to the airdromes by their location (Luftgaustiib Kiev). They are
to repair bomb damage or enlarge facilities are sent into the forward battle areas by their con-
also directed by the Bauleitung. trolling Luftgau and are normally responsible
(6) The operational airdrome command is also for all services in an area occupied by a Flieger-
responsible for defense against air attack, for Corps. After conditions have become relatively
which it has both heavy and light Flak units. stabilized—for example, when operational air-
These guns and other aerial defense units are drome commands have been established and sup-
commanded by the airdrome commander only ply stations and fuel and ammunition field depots
when there is no flying unit stationed at the field. have been set up—the Luftgaustii z. b z. unit
Otherwise, defense is controlled by the com- is withdrawn and the parent Luftgau assumes
mander of that flying unit which is occupying the direct command.
airdrome.
(7) The telephone, teleprinter, and radio at
each operational airdrome command are operated Section III. AIR FORCE ARMS AND SERVICES
by an air signal platoon (Fliegerhorst-Luftnach-
richtenzug) and commanded by. a signal officer I . Antiaircraft Defenses
Who is subordinate to the senior signal officer at
the airdrome regional command. The signal pla- a. GENERAL. The bulk of the German anti-
toon also transmits the meteorological ‘and air- aircraft artillery, inclusive of antiaircraft search-
drome serviceability reports and operates the Air light units, is an organic part of the German Air
Movements Control. This control directs only Force. The German Army has antiaircraft artil-
nonoperational flying. Signal communications lery units of its own, but these units are only for
with aircraft in operations are controlled by the the organic use and protection of the Army units
tactical ground station attached to the flying unit. against air attack.
(8) Aircraft maintenance at the operational For organizational charts of Luftwaffe and
airdrome command—except for servicing and Army antiaircraft units see Sections V and VI,
minor repairs which are performed by the ground Chapter II. For a discussion of antiaircraft
staff of the flying unit—is the responsibility of a weapons and equipment see Chapter VII, Sec-
technical officer. This officer not only handles tion IV.
overhauls and major repairs, but also is responsi- b. ANTIAIRCRAFT DEFENSE OF GERMANY AND
ble for maintenance of motor vehicles; for bomb, REAR AREAS. The Chief of the German Air
fuel, and other supply stores; and for equipment Force is responsible for the air defense of terri-
stores and the armory. He is subordinate to the torial Germany as well as important installations
senior technical Dflicer at the airdrome regional in occupied countries. The Aircraft Warning Ser-
command. vice as a part of the Air Force is tied in with the
(9) The requests by the operational airdrome coordinated use of aviation, antiaircraft artillery,
command for equipment and spare parts reach and barrage balloons. All air ai r
the regional command through the technical of- measures also are the responsibility of the Chief
ficer. Requisitions for bombs, fuel, and ammu- of the German Air Force.
nition are made by the supply section. The oper- Antiaircraft defense of rear areas is carried
ational command also has an administrative out through the Luftgaue mentioned above. Luft-
section which handles clothing, food, pay, billet- gaue coordinate their defenses with each other
ing, and other accommodations; a record office; in accordance with regulations published by the
a photographic section; a medical section; and a Chief of the Air Force. The commander of each
welfare section. Luftgau has a specialist under him who exercises
(10) Luftgaustiibe z.b.V. During campaigns command over the antiaircraft artillery units, in-
the Luftgaue provide the advancing air forma- cluding searchlights, assigned to the district.
tion with supplies and services through a sys- Other specialists include the commanders of bar-
tem of subordinate commands known as Luft- rage balloon units and of units responsible for
gaustiibe zur besonderer Verwendung (LzGftgau carrying out special defense measures. In actual
x—8
I MARCH 1945
UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451
operations, in most cases the commands above poses to the Army unit concerned, and adminis- I
the actual operating units act mainly in a coordi- tratively (for replacements, etc.) to their parent
nating capacity, feeding information to the oper- Air Force Organization.
ating units which act in turn on their own initia- Employment and composition of the higher
tive in accordance with prescribed standing oper- FZak units will vary in accordance with local con-
ating procedure. ditions. For a fuller 4iscussion of the organiza-
Within certain of the air districts there are spe- tion and employment of higher antiaircraft units
cial air defense commands. Each of these covers in the field, see Section V, Chapter II.
special areas or cities of vital importance, defense d. DEFENSE OF RAILWAY TRAINS. The mount-
of which, under one command, is laid out with a ing of antiaircraft materiel on railway mounts for
concentration of coordinated defense facilities the protection of railway trains and as a means of
inclusive of antiaircraft guns and searchlights, furnishing a highly mobile defense of lines of
fighter aviation, barrage balloons, warning facili- communication has been highly perfected by the
ties, and the use of special devices such as smoke Germans. Antiaircraft guns on railway mounts
generators. can be used either in rear areas for protection of
Operation of the antiaircraft defense system trains operating there, or for the protection of
calls for close cooperation between fighter planes trains carrying troops or supplies to forward com-
and air warning systems, and the antiaircraft guns bat areas. Although the ZO-mm single- or four-
with supporting searchlights are cohsidered the barreled Flak is normally employed for this pur-
backbone of the static defense. For operational pose, the 37-mm, 8%mm and 105-mm guns will
control, the antiaircraft command in a Luftgu also be encountered mounted on railway cars.
is usually divided into groups known as Flak-
gruppcn, and these groups in turn are divided 2. German Air Force Signal Service (Luftnd-
into sub-groups known as Flakuntergruppen. The ricbtenwesen)
headquarters of the group is normally the con;
trol center of the Flak defenses, and acts down- a. GENERAL. The importance of a comprehen-
ward through the sub-groups. sive and efficient air signal service in aerial war-
fare is obvious. Neither offensive nor defensive
In deployment of heavy antiaircraft guns in air operations could be conducted without a com-
important static areas, there is a tendency toward plete network of signal communications, or with-
the use of concentrated sites known as Grossbat- out radio and radar equipment for the direction
teries. These usually consist of three 4-, 6-, or and control of aircraft, particularly in fighter
even S-gun batteries grouped together at one site, defense. So vital is the role of the German Air
with fire control for all guns emanating from one Force Signal Service that it has had a greater
central source. proportionate wartime expansion than any other
Antiaircraft searchlights are used in coopera- arm of the German Air Force, and now has an
tion with night fighters, as well as in their normal estimated personnel strength of between 175,000
role of illuminating targets for the gun units. and 200,000.
c. USE OF ANTIAIRCRAFT WITH FIELD FORCES. b. FLEXIBILITY. The efficiency of the German
For operation in the field, Luftwaffe antiaircraft Air Force has been enhanced by the flexibility of
units are allotted to field task forces for protec- its signal organization. This was particularly
tion of Army and Air Force installations. Even true when the Germans were advancing into new
in moving situations, a certain amount of antiair- territory, usually well prepared, on a temporary
craft is present for the defense of important basis, for the reception of flying units. As soon
semi-permanent installations such as depots, parks, as the captured territory was firmly occupied, sig-
railroads, bridges, and airdromes. No hard and nal units then established a more permanent land-
fast rule is laid down for this use of antiaircraft line communications system. Under present cir-
artillery. The size of the antiaircraft force de- cumstances, with the Germans on the defensive,
fending such areas will depend to a large extent the flexibility and mobility of the German Air
on importance of the areas to be defended, plus Force are no longer dependent to the same extent
availability of Luftwafle antiaircraft units for on its signal organization. However, a work-
such assignment. Luftwaffe antiaircraft organi- able German Air Force Signal Service is still of
zations and units operating with .the Army are paramount importance in the defense of Germany
subordinated operationally and for command pur- against air attacks.
x—9
u&tA$SlFiED
I MARCH 1945 TM-E 30-451
c. FUNCTIONS. These include the transmis- system for signal units is not as readily workable
sion of all orders and communications nedessary as formerly.
for the operation and functioning of the German (5) Special u&s. In addition to the standard
Air Force, if possible both by landline and by units, there is a special Research Regiment
wireless; the establishment and supervision of charged with the development of new types of
all navigational aids to aiwraft; the manning of signal equipment and its employment. Aircraft
Observer Corps and radar in con&ction with specially equipped for signal activities have also
air defense; control of air traffic, air safety and in many instances been allotted to various com-
rescue services; and the interception of enemy mands and have proved extremely useful in con-
signals. ducting air operations in mobile situations.
d. ORGANIZATION. (1) General. One of the (6) Cowwnand. The supreme signal command
departments of the German Air Ministry is the of the above units is exercised by the Director
Director General of Signal Communications (GE+ General of Signals of the Air Ministry. Signal
eralnachrichtenfiihrer der Luftwafle). To han- command of a Luftflotte is under a Chief Sig-
dle its multiple duties, a flexible organization has nal Officer (Htihere Nachrichtenfiihrer 01
been developed, consisting of many self-contained Hiihere Nafii) who controls the senior Signal
specialist companies. .The bulk of these compa- Officer (Nafii) of the Fliegerkorps, Luftgaue,
nies are allocated to the major operational and Flak-Kwps and Flak Division, and Airfield Re-
administrative commands, and the others are gional Cow&nand. Subordinate to these are the
grouped into battalions or remain as individual Signal Officers (Nachrichten Ofizier or N. 0.)
companies attached to minor commands. who exercise command in the lower subdivisions
such as Operational Airfield Command signal pla-
(2) Section platoon and company. The basic toons, and Geschzvader signal companies.
operational unit is the section (Truppe) of lo-20
men. Each section specializes in one particular e. SIGNAL EQUIPMENT. (1) General. Ger-
signal activity such as telephone, teletype, cable man’ signal equipment, generally speaking, has
laying, construction, etc. Five to ten sections of been characterized by standardization of design,
the same type are organized into a platoon (Zug) relatively few major types, and a high quality of
of 80 to 100 men. Three to six platoons are components and workmanship. During the first
grouped into a company (Kounpanie) of 200 to years of the war, the Germans did not fully ap-
300 men. All blatoons in a company specialize preciate the tactical possibilities of radar1 and
in the same branch of signal activity, so that each for a time Allied radar development was well
company is a self-contained specialist unit. ahead of the German. However, the Germans
have made tremendous efforts to match Allied
(3) Battalion and regiwzent. Three to four technical &ogress and to overcome the various
companies usually make up a battalion (Ab- tactical problems resulting from Allied superiority.
teilung), although some have many more. The
(2) Ground radar. German ground radar
strength of a battalion, aside from its staff, de-
falls into three general categories: Early warning
pends on the number of companies. Three to five
set (Freya, Mawmut or Wassermann) for long
battalions normally form a regiment (Regi-
range detection; Giant Wiirzburg primarily for
nzenter), with a strength between 1,500 and 9,000
aircraft interception control; and Small Wiir~-
and varying functions.
burg designed for flak control, but also used for
(4) Allotment and numbering of units. Sig- height finding in the Aircraft Reporting Service.
nal regiments and smaller units are allotted to the These various types of ground radar equipment
several different types of operational and admin- play a large part in the German system of air
istrative commands requiring a permanent alloca- raid warning and control of fighter interception.
tion of signal personnel. Allocation is on the ba- Many devices have been developed by the Allies
sis of the size and requirements of the command. to nullify the effectiveness of the German equip-
The relationship of the signal units to their as- ment, but at the same time the Germans have
signed commands often is indicated by the ter- 1
The basic principle of radar is the transmission of a wireless
minal number of the unit designation; e.g. Luft- pulse of very short duration, the reflection of the pulse by the
object to be detected, and the reception of both the original and
jlotte. 2 had Signal Regiments 2, 12, and 22. HOW- reflected pulses by a receiver adjacent to the transmitter. Elec-
trical measurement of the time interval • between the two pulses
ever, iyith the creation of many new commands gives a direct indication of the distance of the reflecting object.
Means are also provided whereby direction of the object from
and the renumbering of others, the numbering the transmitter, and in some cases its height, can be obtained.
10
I MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 3045’1
developed numerous countermeasures. These and short-range sets measure height. Other types
measures and counhrmeasures have led to ex- of equipment distinguish between friendly and
tremely rapid development of new techniques and hostile aircraft. An Observer Corps network
equipment both by the Germans and by the Allies. with strategically located posts also supplies air-
(3) Airborne radio and radar. German air- craft warning information, while in some in-
borne radio and radar equipment may be classified stances patrolling aircraft shadow the attacking
in four general categories: Funkgerat (FUG), aircraft. On the basis of the information from
or radio aird radar equipment involving trans- these various sources, hostile aircraft are plotted
mitters and receivers; Peilgerat (PeG), or naviga- in a central headquarters, and the Germans in the
tional equipment; Notsender (NS), or emergency past have been able to construct a fairly accurate
transmitter; and other types of miscellaneous and current picture of Allied air operations.
equipment. Airborne equipment is an absolute Proper warning then is given to all interested
necessity for the successful conduct of air opera- agencies, and defensive fighters are put in the
tions. Throughout the war, the Germans have air to intercept the attackers. Information on the
developed navigational, bombing, and fighter con- course and expected target of the bombers is
trol equipment. The latter is particularly impor- passed by radio to the airborne fighters until con-
tant at .the present time for the Germans who tact is made. The specific aerial tactics used by
must depend on adequate warning of Allied air the German fighters have varied considerably
attacks and efficient control of fighters and flak throughout the war, but in general the precise
for effective opposition. method becomes the responsibility of the fighter
pilots after contact is made. In spite of the ex-
f. FIGHTER DEFENSE. (1) General During cellent equipment and control methods the Ger-
1941 and early 1942, the German Air Force mans have developed, their defensive warnings
fighter organization was concerned mainly with and operations are considerably handicapped by
defense of targets in Northern France and the the loss of territory in Western Europe.
Lowlands. The bulk of aerial combats then were
taking place in the relatively small area over those 3. Airborne Forces
countries and over the English Channel; and a
See Chapter X, section VII.
warning system, consisting of a coastal radar belt
and visual observers, was adequate. But the 4. Air Force Fighting Units
greater depth of penetration by Allied bombers
in 1943 required that the German Air Force pro- See Chapter II, sections V, VI.
tect targets in Germany as well as in occupied
territory, and the defensive problem thus became 5. Air Transport
infinitely more complex. Additional radar belts a. GENERAL. German transport aircraft and
and observer posts were required. German fight- gliders are controlled by a General Staff Depart-
ers had to be placed in tactically favorable posi- ment at the Air Ministry. This department,
tions, and they were forced to enlarge the scope headed by a Kommodor und Lufttransportfiihrer,
of their activity to cover all areas subject to allocates and adminsters all transport units in the
attack. Such developments naturally .led to con- Air Force. The majority of the transport planes
siderable changes in the German Air Force fighter consist of the JU 52. This old type has been re-
organization and the methods of fighter control. tained because of its adaptability to varied tasks
The liberation of France and part of the Low- and its ability to operate under’ difficult condi-
lands in 1944 further complicated the German de- tions. Since the production of JU 52's has been
fensive problem by depriving the German Air
inadequate to meet present transport needs, the
Force of a large and efficient part of its early
German Air Force has drawn upon Italian air-
warning system, as well as many excellent air-
craft, such as the SM 82. Production of new
fields at a time when. the weight of the Allied
air assault was increasing. types specifically designed as transports, such as
the JU 252, JU 290 and the ME 323, has been
(2) Reporting and warning system. The almost negligible. The HE 111 has been adapted
Aircraft Reporting Service is a part of the Ger- to extensive employment as a freight carrier, and
man Air Force. Long-range radar sets determine lighter planes, such as the Fieseler Starch (FI
the range and bearing of the approaching aircraft, 156), frequently are used for passenger-carrying
X—l I
I MARCH 1945
UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451
and liaison work. Transport and communications their own Kurier-Staflel to carry mail and per-
aircraft are organized for the following services: sonnel. These aircraft operate on a fixed sched-
b. FOR OPERATIONAL UNITS. The Air Force ule over all of Germany and remaining occupied
maintains several minor air transport units which territory. Individual aircraft may also be detailed
are more or less’ permanently allocated to various on special urgent tasks.
commands. These units are not .intended to per- c. FOR CIVIL AIRLINES. A small number of
form any particularly heavy or large-scale trans- transports, primarily JU 52's, still are used on
port work such as airborne operations or long- those civil air routes which the Deutsche Luft-
term supply. They are used rather for the numer- hansa A. G. operated before the war and con-
ous odd jobs of communications, liaison, and tinues to maintain under strict military supervi-
passenger-carrying within the Luftflotte area, or sion for high priority communication.
between the Luftfiotte and Air Force headquar- d. FOR K. G. Z. b. V. UNITS. The Kampfge-
ters in Germany. These units are distributed schwader zur besonderer Ver-wendung (for spe-
among the commands as follows: cial duty), known more simply as K. G. z. b. V.
(1) The staff of each Luftflotte and Flieger- units, include over two-thirds of the German
korps is allotted a transport Staffel, with 12 or 13 transport aircraft and are actually the mainstay
aircraft to be used for transport within Germany of the Air Force transport 'organization. For
proper as well as in forward areas. limited operations these aircraft still may be
(2) Each Fliegerkorps is allotted a transport subordinated to and receive their directives from
Staf el of 10 to 15 JU 52's in addition to a Kurier- the Luftflotten and Geschwader. In the past
StafeZ (communications) of lighter planes. The they occasionally were allotted by the Air Minis-
Fliegerkorps then may temporarily re-allot part try to the LuftfEottevz on a fairly permanent basis
or all of the JU 52's to the subordinate Gesch- (for example, to a Luftflotte headquarters).
wader and Gruppen whenever the transport of Now, however, they usually are so allotted for
personnel, equipment, and/or supplies becomes a specific operation only (for example, an air-
particularly urgent. borne operation or supply mission). If only one
(3) Each operational Gruppe is allotted sev- or two units are allotted to a Luftjlotte, the chief
eral lighter types of communication aircraft. quartermaster department of the Luftflotte will
Formerly, each Gruppe also had at least one JU handle administration, personnel, and aircraft
52 for transport purposes. Now, however, the serviceability. If several units are operating un-
Gruppen usually rely on JU 52's temporarily lent der the Luftflotte, however, the Air Ministry
to them by the Fliegerkorps headquarters. usually will detail an air transport officer to the
(4) Each Aufkliirungsgruppe (reconnaissance Luftflotte. This officer, who normally holds the
group) has a Kurier-Staflel within the Flieger- rank of Oberst, generally is assisted by a staff,
korps organization which is primariIy intended for which may include a technical officer, a personnel
liaison with Army commanders. These aircraft officer or adjutant, and an operations officer, in
are at the disposal of Army personnel as well as addition to a transport officer who apportions the
the Air Force reconnaissance officers. loads.
(5) Allotted to each F&o is a Verbindungs- The organization of the K. G. z. b. V. units
SfafeZ (liaison) of communication aircraft which is extremely fluid, and although the original in-
is used for contact work between Army head- tention apparently was to set up the units in
quarters and those Air Force units which are Geschwader, the actual strength of most z. b. V.
providing close or direct support for the Army. units rarely exceeds that of a Gruppe. These
(6) The main air signal regiments of each Gruppen normally number 53 aircraft organized
LuftjIotte and Fliegerkorps have their own Staf- into four Staflelvt of 12 aircraft each plus a Grub-
f&z or transport aircraft. Some of these planes penstab of five planes.
are equipped as flying signal stations, but many For purposes of transporting parachute troops
are used simply for transporting equipment and and air-landing infantry in airborne operations,
personnel. transport aircraft are organized into Z. b. V.
(7) The higher commands, including the Ober- Geschwader. Each such Geschwader consists of
komma?zdo der Wehrmacht, the Oberkommando about 200 aircraft organized into four Gruppen
des Heeres, the Oberkommando der Marine, and of four Staflelvt each. Each Staflel has 12 air-
the Oberkommando der Luftwaffe, each have craft organized into four Ketten of three aircraft
x—12
UNCLASSIFIED
I MARCH 1945 TM-E 30451
each. The organization of the Kampfgeschwader by surface craft. These craft may be attached
thus closely parallels that of the parachute troops to the service or may be simply lent to it for a
which they transport. A JU 52 can carry 10 particular rescue.
to 12 fully equipped parachutists. Thus one sec- Seenotdienst units were subordinated to the
tion of parachutists is carried by one aircraft; a Luftflotte within whose area they serve. These
platoon of 36 men is carried by a z. b. V. Kette; units were organized into three sea rescue com-
a company of 120 to 144 men is carried by a mands (Seenotjlugkomzunandos), each of which
2. b. V. StafeE; and an entire parachute battalion is headed by a Seenotdienstfiihrer with the rank
is carried by a z. b. V. Gruppe. Whenever pos- of colonel. Subordinate to these commands are
sible, the men are moved by units, that is, a regional commands, known as Bereichkomman-
Z. b. V. Kette carrying a parachute platoon. dos, which control the various Staff eln- and de-
tachments. Single rescue planes were often at-
e. SPECIALLY EQUIPPED TRANSPORTS. A
tached to combat units which operated over water.
number of JU 52's have been designed for highly
specialized transport services. For example, 7. Meteorological Services
many JU 52's, a number of which are attached to
Air Force medical units, are fitted as ambulance a. GENERAL. The Air Force Meteorological
planes with a capacity of 12 stretcher patients and Service (Flugwetterdienst) is controlled by the
five sitting patients. Some JU 52's temporarily Air Ministry. The chief responsibility of the
have been equipped with skiti, and others with Flugwetterdienst is to provide all flying units with
pontoons for transporting men and supplies into dependable weather forecasts as well as all long-
areas made inaccessible by snow or separated by term forecasts for strategical planning. The two
bodies of water. main sources of Air Force meteorological infor-
mation are weather stations and weather aircraft.
f. GLIDERS. The Germans also are using b. WEATHER STATIONS. At each airfield
towed gliders for air tragsport. Since they cQm- there is a relatively small Wetferstelle (weather
bine a high load capacity with comparatively small% station) which reports on conditions in its imme-
fuel consumption for the towing aircraft (or of diate vicinity. These reports are collected at reg-
the glider itself in the powered version), they ular intervals (usually hourly) by a Wetterbem-
first were used in the Lowlands in 1940. The tungszentral (weather reporting center) which
DFS 230 and the Gotha 242 carried troops and then coordinates the reports of all the Wetter-
supplies from Italy and Sicily to Africa from stellen within its area and prepares maps for the
mid-1941 until the conclusion of the Tunisian flying units. A center usually serves an area
campaign. In the fall of 1942, the ME 323 covered by a Fliegerkorps and frequently is mo-
powered glider caused wide comment in its oper- torized. Some centers carry a Luftgau, unit des-
ations between Sicily and Tunisia. At the same ignation, such as W. 2. B./XIII. The chain of
time it was revealed that each dive-bomber Staffel command from the airfield to Air Ministry is
operating from Tunisia had its own DFS 230 to completed through meteorological officers sta-
carry supplies from Sicily to Africa. Critical tioned at Luftgau, Fliegerkorps, and Luftflotte
supply situations on the Russian Front and in the headquarters.
Balkans forced the Germans to employ gliders in
c. WEATHER AIRCRAFT. Attached to each
many instances. Though they have seen little
Luftjlotte is a Wetterkiindigungstaflel (weather
service in the West to date, disruption of trans-
reconnaissance squadron), commonly known as a
portation lines through Allied aerial attacks may
Westa unit. These units normally have nine to
compel further use of unpowered gliders.
12 aircraft equipped with automatic recording
instruments. The crews include a meteorological
6. Sea Rescue Service
officer and a specially trained wireless operator.
The Air Force Sea Rescue Service (Seenot- Combat aircraft often are detailed to report
dienst) was first established to take care of air- on weather conditions encountered during their
men shot down over the North Sea area and the operations. The outstanding example of this
English Channel. Its services were extended to type of reporting is that of the long-range bomber
the Mediterranean, the Black Sea, and the Baltic. units operating from Norway. Weather recon-
Rescues are performed normally by the service's naissance performed by these units has become
own lit-craft, but where the hazards of water almost as important as their anti-shipping recon-
landing are too great, the actual rescue is made naissance.
x—13
I MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451
Section IV. ARMY AND NAVY COOPERATION both army cooperation and tactical reconnaissance
is provided by specially trained Air Force officers
Air Force cooperation may be of three types: known as Flivos (Fliegerverbindungsofziere).
direct or close support (tactical support); indirect The German Air Force support is requested by
support (strategic missions) ; and liaison. the Army units through their superior commands.
The armies transmit the request to the competent
1. Direct or Close Support headquarters authority where a German Air
Close support usually is confined to the actual Force liaison officer (Flivo) is stationed. Such
battle front and the area immediately behind it. headquarters are generally those of Army groups.
It consists of bombing and strafing enemy ground German Air Force Signal Liaison officers (Flie-
forces, tanks, artillery, pillboxes, field defense gerverbindungsofiiziere (Ln)) are stationed with
works, antiaircraft defenses, forward dumps, and Army corps headquarters and in some particular
supply columns. It also includes air cover as cases with division headquarters. A German Air
protection for ground and Air Force units against Force Liaison Officer is specially assigned to
enemy air attacks, and against enemy air recon- Army Headquarters for the purpose of directing
naissance. All types of aircraft may be used for close cooperation between the Army and German
these operations. Air Force reconnaissance units (Fliegewerbin-
dungsofiziere (Aufkliirung)). For the control
2. Indirect Support of the close support missions, which as a result
of these requests are ordered by the German Air
Indirect support involves attacks on targets
Force Command (Fliegerkorps or Luftflotte
beyond the battle area such as rear maintenance
HQ), special German Air Force officers are sta-
and supply depots, enemy airfields, railroads, in-
tioned at the front line. These control officers
dustrial centers, etc.
(Fliegerleitofiziere) direct the flying formations
3. Liaison to their targets by radio from advanced observa-
Liaison between the Army and Air Force for tion’posts on the ground.
X—14
IINcLASSIF~~~
I MARCH 1945 TM-E iO-45,
in German Air Force operations. Allied fighter c. JET- AND ROCKET-PROPELLED. (1) General.
superiority, combined with the necessity of in- The perfection and application of jet and rocket
creased German fighter production, largely has propulsion as motive power for aircraft are out-
restricted bomber activities to mine laying and standing German aeronautical developments of
occasional night bombing. Principal types used the current war. To counter this new type air-
are the JU 88, DO 217 and HE 111. craft, if it is employed on any appreciable scale,
(6) Transport planes. Although a pre-war might well necessitate a general revision of de-
model, the Junkers 52 three-engine, low-wing fensive and offensive aerial tactics. Required
monoplane is still the standard freight and troop changes or .improvements also might extend to
carrying transport of the German Air Force. It include ground defenses against attacks by these
also is used extensively for carrying and dropping aircraft. To date the Germans have not em-
parachute troops and as a glider tug. Other ployed jet or rocket aircraft on a sufficient scale
operational transport types include the six-engine to permit full and accurate assessment of their
Messerschmitt 323 and the four-engine Junkers characteristics and possibilities. Those currently
290. Converted bombers, such as the HE 111, in use, however, appear to possess significant ad-
also are employed frequently for heavy transport vantages over conventional types. In level flight,
duty. dives, and rate of climb all known conventional
types have been surpassed by aircraft with this
(7) Gliders. Gliders are of two types: pow- type of motive power. The propellerless power
ered and tow. Both resemble a conventional unit is capable of operation on the lowest grade
monoplane, but the tow glider lacks an engine and fuels, and the absence of many intricate parts,
landing gear. The tow glider generally uses necessary in conventional types, probably greatly
wheels during take-off and then jettisons them, simplifies assembly and repair methods.
subsequently landing on a skid. Both types of
gliders are equipped with landing flaps and dive (2) Types. Operational types of German jet
brakes, as well as navigation and landing lights. and jrocket aircraft thus far have been limited to
The principal types of tow gliders are the DFS those powered by single or twin-units. They
230, GO 242 and ME 321. Principal powered have been employed to date as defensive fighters,
gliders are ME 323 and GO 244. as ground-attack or low-altitude bombers, and for
(8) Army cooperation and reconnaissance air- reconnaissance. For the latter purpose they have
craft. The standard type of Army cooperation proved to be very effective because of their speed.
plane, typified by the Henschel 126, has proved (a) The only rocket-propelled aircraft known
very vulnerable to modern fighters and antiair- to be operational by the German Air Force is the
craft fire. This has resulted in the employment Messerschmitt 163 (ME 163). It is a very
of converted fighters, sufficiently. fast, maneuver- fast, single-seat fighter. Although it has only a
able, and armed to undertake short-range recon- single power unit, it has a remarkable rate of
naissance without fighter protection. Such con- climb. Because of its present limited endurance,
version usually consists of replacing some of the to date it has seen comparatively little use, par-
armament with cameras. Recent development of ticularly in forward areas.
high-speed jet aircraft has furnished the German
Air Force with a highly desirable reconnaissance (b) The Messerschmitt 262 (ME 262), a
plane. twin-unit, jet-propelled aircraft, has proved to be
the most successful of the German jet or rocket
b. GERMAN COMPOSITE OR "PICK-A'BACK"
types thus far developed. Employed as a fighter,
AIRCRAFT. This innovation, still in the experi-
as a ground-attack or low-level bomber, and for
mental stage, consists of a multi-motored plane reconnaissance duties, it is the most versatile of
with a large amount of explosive in the nose, sur- the jet or rocket aircraft yet introduced by the
mounted and controlled by a single-engine air- Germans.
craft. The latter directs the former in a dive
towards the target and then releases it. There- (c) Other German twin-unit jet aircraft, either
after its operation is apparently by remote con- currently operational on a limited scale or ex-
trol. The usual components observed have been pected to become operational in the near future,
the JU 88 and the ME 109, but there is no reason are the Arado 234 (AR 234) and Heinkel 280
to believe that other similar types could not be (HE 280). Both of these aircraft are somewhat
adapted for this purpose. similar to the Messerschmitt 262 in appearance
X—16
I MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIED TM-E M-451
and are expected to be about equal in perform- c. ROCKET-PROPULSION UNITS. A closed unit >'.
ance. in which fuel is burned or gasified, a rocket does
d. NAVAL AND MARINE. At present, naval not require air from the atmosphere for combus-
and marine aircraft are operated by the German tion. The gases leave through a nozzle at the
Air Force on a limited scale. The use of the rear to provide thrust by jet propulsion. Fuels
BV 138 for reconnaissance in the Norway and are of three types: solids, (e. g., cordite); two
Denmark areas is the principal duty performed liquids, one a fuel, (e. g., gasoline), and the
by this type of aircraft. Other types, such as second an oxidizing agent (e. g., liquid oxygen) ;
the HE 115 and AR 196, are employed for gen- or a single liquid with or without liquid as a
eral reconnaissance and liaison with the various catalyst, (e. g., hydrogen peroxide with potassium
naval testing units operating in the Baltic Sea, or sodium permanganate).
and for the performance of air/sea rescue service. 3. Armament
In addition, naval aircraft such as the BV 222
The Germans started the war with only a few
are occasionally used for marine supply and trans-
types of aircraft armament, in order to standard-
port duty.
ize manufacture and achieve large-scale produc-
2. Power Units tion. As the war progressed, improvements be-
came necessary and many changes and additions
a. ENGINES. The German Air Force has
have been made. In addition to increasing the
equipped practically all operational aircraft with
rate of fire, muzzle velocity, and caliber of air-
engines manufactured by three large companies:
craft armament, the number of guns on German
Daimler-Benz (D.B.); the Buyerische Moteren
Air Force fighters has been greatly increased.
We&e (B.M.W.); and the Junkers (Jumo).
The addition of the Model 108 30-mm cannon,
The trend of aeronautical engine development has
a new weapon in aircraft armament, to FW 190's,
been toward more powerful engines with in-
ME 262's, ME 110 G's and ME 109 G's stands
creased altitude performance. German aero-en;
out as a great advancement, in terms of striking
gine designers have obtained this by modifying
power. A detailed discussion of the various
existing engines to use GM-1 (nitrous oxide)
types of aircraft armament can be found in Chap-
and MW-50 (methanol injection) apparatus and,
ter VII, Section IX. , .
in certain instances, by coupling two existing en-
gines together. Lack of time for experimenta- 4. Armor
tion with new engines has led to the modification
of existing types which could be more quickly The armor protection in German planes varies
put into service in war time. in thickness from 4 to 20 mm. The total weight
per plane may vary from 100 pounds or less in
b. JET PROPULSION UNITS. An outstanding some army cooperation types to over 1,000 pounds
achievement in the field of aircraft power units for a ground-attack plane. The demands of
has been the development of jet propulsion, an modern warfare have necessitated increased pro-
example being the Junkers Jumo 004. This unit tection of the pilot as well as of the engine and
often is referred to as a jet-propulsion turbine, accessory equipment. Other crew members are
or turbo jet. Propulsion is developed through normally protected by plates on the sides and
the reaction to ejected hot gases which have been floor of the plane.
created by compressed air igniting with liquid
5. Tabulated Data
fuel. As these gases pass out to the vents they
traverse a turbine, which in turn operates the air Specifications given are for the principal types in
compressor. Original momentum of the turbine current operation. The following type abbrevia-
is created by an auxiliary engine which disengages tions are used:
when the turbine has developed sufficient speed LWM—Low Wing Monoplane.
HWM—High Wing Monoplane.
to create the required compression. German air-
MWM—Mid-Wing Monoplane.
craft using jet propulsion turbines include the TT—Twin tails.
Messerschmitt 262, Arado 234 and Heinkel 280. TB—Twin tail booms.
X—17
FIGHTERS
I
Radius of Action Bomb or Normal Service
Aircraft Manufacturer Type Normal Engines, Model Wing Max. Speed (40% Normal Typical Armament Freight Load Weight Ceiling
and Model Crew and Rated HP Span MPH Range) (Miles) (Pounds) (Pounds) (Feet)
Single-Engine
(1) Focke-Wulf LWM 1 lxBMW801D 34'6" 385 at 175 Forward fuselage 2x21-cm 8,600 36,000
FW 190 14 cyl. twin-row, 19,000 2x7.9-or 13-mm. rockets
air-cooled radial— ft. Forward wings under - •
(2) Focke-Wulf LWM 1 Jumo213—12 34'6" 435 (est.) 160 (est.) Forward fuselage 9,000 36,000
FW 190 (Long cyl. liquid-cooled 2x7.9- or 13-mm. (est.) (est.)
nose) — 1700 HP Forward wings
or 2/4x20-mm.
DB603—12 cyl.
liq uid-cooled—
1800 HP
(3) Messerschmitt LWM 1 lxDB605A/l 32'8" 400 at 175 Forward fuselage 2x21-cm 6,820 38,500
ME 109 12 cyl. liquid- 22,000 2x7.9- or 13-mm. rockets
cooled—1460 HP ft. Forward wings under
2 x 20-mm. wings
Prop, hub
lx20-mm.
Twin-engine
(1) Dornier HWM 3 2xBMW801D 62'5" 328 at 470 Forward fuselage 27,500 29,000
DO 217 J 14 cyl. twin-row, 20,000 4x7.9-mm plus
air-cooled radial— ft. 4x20-mm. CO
1755 HP Dorsal CO
Ixl3-mrr..
Ventral
Ixl3-mm.
(2) Heinkel MWM 2 2xDB 603 60'6" 400 at 600 (est. max.) Forward wings 26,100 32,800
HE 219 (est. 12 cyl. liquid- 22,000 2x20-mm.
cooled—1800 HP ft. Dorsal
(est.) 2x20-mm.
Ventral
4x24- or 30-mm.
I MARCH 1945
UNCLASSIFIED
TM-E 30-45.1 7;
>3 8
5§
i#£
s
"S^4
II •2.1 s s E S
E S
J-af
~0
c
IS.
o ft f*
U
J,
Pi
O o
o
o
c"
W 8 10 rsi
a-
H
O
Cw
is
If
53 s
k k X—1?
-vr
BOMBERS
Single-Engine
(1) Junkers nkers 2 1xJumo 211 J 45 '4* 255 at 280 Forward fuselage 2,200 12,600 18,500
JU 87 (Stuka) ted 12 cyl. liquid- 13,500 2xl2.7-mm.
(Dive-bomber) Gull cooled—1335 HP ft. Forward wings
Wing 2x7.9-or 37-mm.
Dorsal
2x7.9-mm.
(2) Focke-Wulf LWM 1 lxBMW 801D 34'6" 370 at 165 Forward fuselage 550 9,800 31,500
FW190 14 cyl. twin-row, 190 2x7.9-or 13-mm.
(Fighter-bomber) air-cooled radial— ft. Forward wings
I
1755 HP 2/4x20-mm.
Twin-Engine
(1) Henschel LWM 1 2xGnome-Rhone 44'6" 275 at 220 Forward fuselage 220 11,400 25,000
HS129 14M 04/05, 9,000 2x7.9-mm plus
14 cyl. twin-row, ft. 2xl5-or 20-mm
air-cooled radial— plus
800 HP lx30-mm or
6x7.9-mm.
Dorsal
Possibly 2x20-mm.
3
(2) Dornier HWM 4 2xBMW 801 A-2 80'6" 325 at 470 Forward fuselage 6,600 35,000 25,000 CO
CO
DO 217 K-2 14 cyl. twin-row, 20,000 2x7.9-mm or
air-cooled radial— ft. larger caliber
1595 HP (est.) gercal
Ixl3-mm.
Lateral
2x7.9-mm.
Ventral
Ixl3-mm.
Tail
4x7.9-mm. 2
rn
uNCLASS\F\ED
I MARCH 1945 TM-E 30-451
0
8 I
•a ^ a
i-aj
-I sE
1 a s 6
"g ^ -5. J d, ~ O;
S5
•sz
in
o
«8
W
P3
i
I -
I -
S OH
xBMW
I1 c
xs
h= 00
"-•00
X—21
I MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451
III
III
If!
(x,
S O ^
X X, p X
I
+3
O
O
Y 8
s
CL, 2
Si
. - 3 53
S
P3
X •
c 1
81 S
TRANSPORT AND GLIDER TUGS
1 Radius of Action Bomb or ' Normal Service
Aircraft Manufacturer Type Normal Engines, Model, Wing Max. Speed (40% Normal Typical Armament Freight Load Weight Ceiling
and Model Crew and Rated HP Span MPH Range) (Miles) (Pounds) (Pounds) (Feet)
(1) Arado HWM 3/4 2xBMW 801 A or L 104' 210 at 350/400 Forward fuselage 9,000 45,000 20,000
AR232 TT 14 cyl. twin-row, 18,000 1 MG
(performance and air-cooled radial— ft. Lateral
characteristics 1595 HP 4MGs
estimated)
(2) Gotha HWM 2 2xGnome-Rhone 79' 169 at 145 Forward fuselage 4,400 17,500 19,000
GO 244 TB 14 m, 14 cyl. 10,000 l/2x7.9-mm. or
(Twin-engine twin-row, air- ft. Dorsal 23 men
powered version cooled radial— Ix7.9-mm.
of GO 242 glider) 800 HP Lateral
4x7.9-mm.
Tail
Ix7.9-mm.
(3) Junkers LWM 3/4 3xBMW 132A A/T 95'11* 165 210 Forward fuselage 5,000 23,100 16,000
JU52 9 cyl. air-cooled Ix7.9-mm. or
radial—660 HP Dorsal 22 men
Ix7.9-mm.
Lateral
2x7.9-mm.
Ventral CO
Ix7.9-mm.
(4) Junkers
JU9O
LWM 5 4xBMW 132 H
9 cyl. air-cooled
115' 218 at
3,500
315 Forward fuselage
Ix7.9-mm.
9,000
or up to
51,000 15,000 3
radial—830 HP ft. Dorsal 70 men
Ixl3-mm.
Ventral
Ix7.9-mm.
iiifii
i I
TRANSPORT AND GLIDER TUGS—Continued
(5) Junkers LWM 6 3xBMW 801 111' (est.) 235 at Unknown Dorsal . 12,000 45,000 26,000
JU252 14 cyl. twin-row, 18,500 Ixl3-or 20-mm. (est.) (est.) (est.)
air-cooled radial— ft. Lateral or 35
1755 HP ?x7.9-mm. men
Ventral
Ixl3-mm.
Tail
Ixl3-or 30-mm.
(6) Junkers LWM 4/7 4xBMW 801 L-2 138' 243 at 395 Forward fuselage 19,000 or 90,000 19,000
JU290 TT 14 cyl. twin-row, 18,000 lx20-mm. up to
air-cooled radial— ft. Dorsal 90 men
1500 HP Ixl5-or 20-mm.
Lateral
4 or 6x7.9-mm or
/ 2xl3-mm.
Ventral
Ixl3-mm, forward
and
lx20-mm, rear
Tail
lx20-mm.
(7) Messerschmitt HWM 8/10 6xGnome-Rhone 181' 195 at 255 Fuselage 26,900 85,000 23,000
ME 323 14N 48/49, 13,000 2x7.9-mm, upper or oo
14 cyl. twin-row, ft. 2x7.9-mm, upper 60/100
radial—965 HP Dorsal
4x7.9-mm, forward
men
S
plus
2x7.9-mm, rear
Lateral
6x7.9-mm.
Ventral
2x7.9-mm.
GLIDERS
(1) Gotha HWM 1 or 2 None 72'4" Dependent on type of Light MG can be 2,800 or 4,700
DFS 230 tug. carried 10 men
(2) Gotha HWM 2 None 79' Dependent on type of Fuselage 5,300 or 12,500
GO 242 TB tug. 1 or 2x7.9-mm. 23 fully
Dorsal equipped
Ix7.9-mm. troops
Tail
Ix7.9-mm.
(1) Henschel HWM 2 lxBramo "Fafnir" 477" 230 at 210 Forward fuselage 220 7,250 27,000
HS126 323, 9 cyl. air- 15,000 1 or 2x7.9-mm. 55
cooled radial— ft. Cockpit CA
1,000 HP Ix7.9-mm.
Dorsal
2x7.9-mm.
(2) Fieseler HWM 2 or 3 lxArgus As 10C/3, 46'8" 110 95 Dorsal 220 2,250 15,000
FI 156 8 cyl. air-cooled, at S.L. Ix7.9-mm.
inverted "V"—•
240 HP
to
in
* * • • > • : < : •
I
NAVY TYPES i
Radius of Action Bomb or Normal Service
Aircraft Manufacturer Normal Engines, Model, Wing Max. Speed (40% Normal Freight Load Weight Ceiling
and Model Type Crew and Rated HP Span MPH Range) (Miles) Typical Armament (Pounds) (Pounds) (Feet)
(I) Arado LWM 2 1xBMW 132 K, 41' 195 at 185 Fuselage 220 6,600 21,500
AR 196 (Float) 9 cyl. air-cooled S.L. Ix7.9-mm.
radial—920 HP Forward wings -
2x20-m.
Dorsal
- 2x7.9-mm.
(2) Blohm&Voss HWM 5 or 6 3xJumo 205 D 88'7* 175 at 395 Forward fuselage 660 30,800 17,000
BV138 TB 6 cyl. liquid- S.L. Ixl5-or 20-mm.
(Fly- cooled Diesel Dorsal
ing 700 HP Ixl3-mm.
boat Tail
Ixl5-or 20-mm.
(3) Blohm&Voss HWM 10 5xBMW 801 A, 150'10" 200/240 1,400 to 1,800 Forward fuselage 45,000 45,000 18,000
BV222 14 cyl. twin-row, at 15/ Ixl3-or 15-or (est.)
(Performance air-cooled radial— 17,000 20-mm. up to
estimated) 1595 HP ft. Dorsal 116 men
2xl5-or 20-mm.
Lateral!
CO
(4) Heinkel MWM 3 2xBMW 132 K, 72'6" 185 at 490 Forward fuselage 1,100 23,500 18,500 GO
HE 115 (Twin 9 cyl. air-cooled S.L. Ix7.9-and
Floats) radial—920 HP Ixl5-mm.
Engine nacelles
2x7.9-mm.
Dorsal
Ix7.9-mm.
I MARCH 1945 TM-E 30-451
X—27
I MARCH 1945
UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-45!
X—28
I MARCH 1945 TM-E 30-45I
X—29
U 1 'i V~
1 MARCH ,945 TM-E 30-451
\ r ^
IM^^^M^&mS^ii^^^^^iSM
Vuptrc H). -Mli 410 Twin-lint/im- l:i:ililrr-i:,ni:!>,-i
x—30
I MARCH 1945 TM-E 30-451
Fiti
x— 3I
I MARCH 1945 TM-E 30.451
X-33
! \ i !
I MARCH 1945 •J i i ! , . I
TM-E 30.451
X—34
I MARCH 1945
UN1 TM-E 30-451
HI I nin.\port.
sUmi
US
Fniurc So.—I
x—37
I MARCH 1945 UNCLVo2;. TM-E 30.451
• :'&*
X—38
I MARCH 1945 UMCLASS; TM-E 30-451
x—39
I MARCH 1945 UNCLASS\flED TM-E 30-451
(KIEGMAUSBHOUNGSREGIMENn
(HUGZEUGFOHIEft-
SCHULE A>—11«3I
Etementory Flying
(ERGANZUNGS (EftGANZUNGS
KlGXNl”NGS
FERNAUFKLARER- (ERGANZUNGS
UUFTNACHftlCH- IERGANZUNGS NACHUAGD Ofl
SCHlACrtr QKUPPE)
JAGDGESCHWADER)
TENSCHULEI KAMPfGftUPPE) ZERSTcMEft GRUPFFl GRlfPFEl
Ground Attack
R eco nna Issan ce Single Engine
VMroloi £ Telegraph Bomber Reserve Twin Engine
Reierve Train*
Fighter R/T Pool
Oporcrtor School Training Unit Fighter Reiervo Reserve
IrtgUnH
Training Unit Training Unit
fighter aircraft. This course includes aerobatics, Ground-At&k School (Schlachtschule) Gesch-
cross-country, and formation flying. wader. Here the instruction includes dive bomb-
ing, strafing, aerobatics, rocket firing, and navi-
4. Single-Engine Fighter Training aining The total time required to produce a
The single-engine fighter pilot progresses from ground-attack pilot is about 5 months.
Course Number 3 of Elementary Flying Training d. R A I N I N G TRAINING. Proceeding
School to the specialized single-engine fighter from the Advanced Training School to a Spe-
school (Jagdsckule) Geschwader where he learns cialized Reconnaissance School (Fernaufk&e&
to fly operational fighter types. He also receives schule) Geschwader, students training for recon-
instruction in gunnery, blindflying,and formation naissance pilots are instructed in aerial photog-
flying. He is next assigned to a Reserve Train- raphy, visual reconnaissance, and navigation.
ing Pool (Erganzungs Jagdgeschwader) where
he receives intensive combat training prior to 7. Reserve Training Units
joining an operational unit. The total time nec- After completion of instruction in their indi-
essary to produce a single-engine fighter pilot is vidual specialized school, Geschwadern—bomber,
from 7 to 8 months, including flying time of from twin-engine, ground-attack, and reconnaissance—
107 to 8 months, h o u r s . with their assigned crews, are advanced
5. Advanced Training or Conversion School to their respective Reserve Training Units
(Ergiinzungs Kampfgruppe, Erziinzungs Nucht-
Upon completion of the Elementary Flying jagd or Zerstiirer Gruppe, Erg&ungs Fernauf-
Training School (A) Course Number 2, the kliirer Gruppe, Ergiinzungs Schlacht Gruppe).
bomber, reconnaissance, ground-attack, and twin- Here they are assigned to a non-operational
engine fighter pilots are sent to an Advanced vanced of a Geschwader until such time as vacan-
Training or Conversion School {Flugzeugfuhrer- cies occur in the operational Gruppen of the unit
schule B). Here they are instructed in the han-< to which they are attached. Thus, training pe-
dling of multi-engine aircraft, in blind flying, riods in this phase vary according to operational
link trainer, instrument flying, and the use of requirements. In such Geschwadern the crews
direction-finder apparatus. Two or three months receive intensive training under combat conditions
are spent in this phase of training. in the specific tactics of the unit.
6. Specialized School Geschwadern 8. Air Crew Training
a. BOMBER TRAINING. From the Advanced From the Initial Training Regiment prospec-
Training or Conversion School the bomber pilot tive air crew members proceed to their respective
is sent to a Specialized Bomber School (Kampf- specialist schools: Observer's School (Auf&Z&
schule) Geschwader, where pilots and members rungschule) ; Wireless Telegraphy School (Luft-
of their crews are assembled as units. This nachrichtenschule); Air Gunnery School (Flieg-
course includes formation flying and leading, tor- erschiitzenschule) ; and Flight Engineer's School
pedo and tactical bombing, high level and preci- (Fliegertechnisheschule). Observer candidates
sion bombing, minelaying, and bomb ballistics. spend 1 to 2 months learning map-making and
The total training period of a bomber pilot com- reading, navigation, bombsights and bombing, .
prises about 9 months. meteorology, astro-navigation, and air gunnery.
b. TWIN-ENGINE FIGHTER TRAINING. From Students in wireless telegraphy undergo 1 to 2
the Advanced Training School, prospective twin- months' intensive training in wireless transmitting
engine fighter pilots proceed to a Specialized and receiving, navigation, map reading, and radio
Twin-Engine School Geschwader, either day direction-finding. Air gunners must complete a
(Zerstorerschule) or night (Nachtjagdschule). l- to Zmonths course, comprised of ground fir-
Here they are instructed in gunnery, blind flying, ing, camera-gun operation, air-to-air machine-gun
bad weather flying, mock attacks, and operational tion a l elementary navigation. Students, in
day and night flying. A twin-engine pilot spends flight engineering are given theoretical training in
from 6 to 7 months in training. aircraft engines and aerodynamics. They also
c GROUND-ATTACK TRAINING. Upon' com- spend some time .engaged in practical work on
pletion of the Advanced Training School course, engines in an aircraft factory. Upon completion
ground-attack students advance to a Specialized of their various courses, these specially trained
X—*l
MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451
V personnel are assembled with pilots into crews b. RECENT TREND. In view of these factors,
& for unit training in a specialized school Gesch- the German Air Force in the summer of 1944
wader. substantially curtailed its bomber force. The
relatively few units remaining operational are to-
Section VII. TACTICS day engaged in the following operations:
(1) Level bombing from medium height, in
I. General dusk or dawn attacks by small formations on
bridges, railroads, dock facilities, and targets of
In more than 5 years of. warfare new tactics
opportunity in the rear of battle areas.
had to be perfected to take advantage of im-
(2) Mining of coastal waters and estuaries at
provements or new developments in both German
night.
and Allied aircraft and armament. Other fac-
(3) Occasional torpedo attacks on shipping.
tors have been the German Air Force's loss of
its original numerical superiority and the new (4) Miscellaneous minor activities such as air
problems arising in the defense of the homeland launching of pilotless aircraft, "pick-a-back" at-
due to continually recedingI front lines. As a tacks on shipping, docks and bridges, etc.
result, profound changes have and are still taking 3. Ground Attack
place in German Air Force tactics. In general,
however, it may be said that through the last a. "STUKAS." Ground attack is the extremely
few years the German Air Force has been in- close support of ground forces in the battle area
creasingly on the defensive. It has been unable illustrated by the close teamwork of aircraft with
to go on the offensive, except occasionally and on advancing Panzer columns which was the basic
a limited scope. Thus,. the German Air Force formula of Germany's Blitzkrieg. The "Stuka"
tactics were’ modified from one of bold attack to dive-bombing JU 87 was the air artillery which
one of conservation of strength, assuming risks o_n short summons from the ground forces cleared
only when decisive results appeared obtainable. roads blocks and reduced opposition. It also
Within the limitations of such enforced caution roamed behind the enemy's line disrupting traffic
the German Air Force has held to its basic con- and creating confusion. For such tactics, com-
cepts of surprise, concentrated attack and exploi- plete mastery of the air was a requirement. In
tation of the enemy's mistakes. the early campaigns, the skies were swept clear
of opposition by sudden attacks on ‘enemy air-
2. Long-Range Bombers fields followed by destruction in the air of such
a. OPERATIONS EARLY IN THE WAR. The aircraft as had escaped. Without such freedom
German Air Force never has had a heavy bomber from enemy fighter interception, the "Stuka" was
force, Its long-range bomber force has consisted too vulnerable and could not operate. This be-
of medium bombers designed originally for close, came apparent in the later stages of the Tunisian
as well as indirect, support. Typical of its in- campaign. With the advent of appreciable Allied
tended purpose were the large-scale bombing at- fighter strength, dive bombing in daytime con-
tacks on airfields which initiated the German cam- tinued only in areas where the enemy lacked
paigns against Poland, France, and the Lowlands. fighter strength such as the Partisan sectors of
The inadequacy of this bomber force for stra- the Balkans or where special front characteris-
tegic operations was revealed .in the Battle of tics, such as the vastness of the Eastern Front,
Britain. The deficiency was never corrected, and made their employment still possible. In the
thereafter the main employment of the long-range West, dive-bombing "Stukas" have been relegated
bomber force was as close support, a function to individual night sorties chiefly against troop
which progressively declined as the German Air concentrations, headquarters and other front-line
Force lost more and more its previous air superi- objectives.
ority to the growing fighter forces of the Allies. b. TWIN-ENGINE FIGHTERS. The German
Units specializing in anti-shipping activities Air Force unsuccessfully experimented with heav-
have comprised the most experienced and efficient ily armored twin-engine fighters to fill the place
branch of the bomber force during the war. They left vacant by the obsolescence of the "Stuka".
too eventually proved inadequate to their main The HS 129 never proved satisfactory and is
mission when major Allied landings were made disappearing from the Eastern Front, its only
on the coasts of Europe; sphere of operations.
X-42
uNCLASSIF\ED
I MARCH 1945 TM-E 30-451
sun, from above, and from behind. Speed and b. OPERATIONS SINCE CRETE. (1) Since the
maneuverability remain as always the decisive capture of Crete, increasing transport commit-
factors. Tactics are based on the "Rotte" forma- ments on all fronts and Allied air superiority
1 tion of 2 planes, number two flying wing man have placed almost insurmountable difficulties in
j protection for his leader. the way of such large scale ventures. The Ger-
: c. NIGHT FIGHTERS. Against enemy night mans have, however, dropped parachutists and
i penetration, the German Air Force night fighters landed glider troops in conjunction with land
! have been equipped with both single- and twin- operations.
engine- aircraft, but the latter has really been the (2) In Russia, the Balkans, and the December
basic equipment of the force. Two main night 1944 counteroffensive in the Ardennes, units
fighter-tactics have been the free lance, independ- varying in strength from a platoon to a battalion
ent hunt, or the attack guided by radio from a have been landed behind enemy lines to disrupt
ground control. In either case the attack is by communications, to seize such key points as rail-
single aircraft and target location is generally roads, roadheads, bridges, and power stations,
determined by airborne radar, though in some and to engage in other sabotage activities. When
cases it is accomplished by visual sighting. such tactics are employed, the troops, whether
d. INTRUDER ATTACKS. Twin-engine fighters they are parachuted from the JU 52 or landed
have carried out night intruder attacks. This by the DFS 230, usually hold their positions a
consists of attacks against returning enemy bomb- limited time before being relieved ‘by advancing
ground forces or attempting to work their way
er aircraft on or near their bases as they prepare
back to their own lines.
to land as well as strafing attacks against the air-
fields.
6. Supply by Air
5. Airborne Troops
a. TIRPOSES. AS the complex of the war
a. ATTACK ON CRETE. In the early stages of changes, &stained operations on several fronts
the war Germany tried various methods of em- forced the German Air Force to use defensively
ploying air-landing troops in the Lowlands, Nor- aircraft that had previously been envisioned as
way, and the Balkans. Tactics for airborne com- spearheading short, decisive victories. The sup-
bat became more clearly defined, however, in the ply situation has been so desperate on many oc-
combined attack on Crete, which was the first casions that the German Army has had to rely
airborne invasion and capture of strongly de- upon air transportation of personnel, supplies and
fended territory across a body of water. The equipment for its existence. This was evident
pattern established then consisted of the fol- in Russia, North Africa, and the Balkans first
lowing: as an attempt to reinforce the Wehrmacht; when
(1) Short, intensive low and medium bombing that failed, efforts were made to carry out eva-
and strafing of enemy positions in the intended cuation by air. Although the JU 52 has been
landing area, immediately preceding or even the mainstay in these operations, the German Air
simultaneous with the landing of glider-borne and Force has employed nearly every type of its oper-
parachute troops. ational aircraft. Most recent application of the
(2) As these troops proceeded, according to defensive mission of the German Air Force trans-
plan, to disrupt communications, silence local de- ports has been the supply of isolated garrisons in
fenses, and seize airfields or other suitable land- the Channel and Biscay ports and in other isolated
ing grounds, areas surrounding their immediate localities. These landings or dropping of supplies
objectives were subjected to continuous bombard- are essentially emergency measures—carried on
ment. when all other means of supply are interrupted.
(3) With the arrijal of the airborne infantry b. METHODS. A landing operation, accom-
and engineer units closely followed by heavier plished by power-driven aircraft or by freight-
elements, the parachute and other shock troops carrying gliders, is the safest method of air sup-
were reinforced and this combined force con- ply if proper landing facilities are available.
tinued the task of attacking enemy communica- Glider landings may be made in good or bad
tions from the rear, drawing, off reserves, and weather after precise agreements on signals and
clearing the area for the armored forces which markers have been reached. Power-driven air-
were to follow. craft have the additional asset of being able to
. UNCLASSIFIED
I MARCH 1945 •HHfWBTHT" TM-E 30-451
carry off wounded and make other evacuations, on. made as to the time and locality of the dropping,
the return trip. Supply-dropping operations have and for the cessation of local defenses. Night
been necessary in other instances. These usually missions, moreover, necessitate increasing the size
have been carried out by night, although some of the dropping zone and more careful marking
have taken place during the day. Whichever of the approach and target area with flares and
method is used, careful arrangements have to be other signals.